PLC(eng)_Ver4.03 PLC(eng) Ver4.03

L010988 - CICON Users Manual_Ver4.03 L010988 - CICON Users Manual_Ver4.03

User Manual: PLC(eng)_Ver4.03

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 1

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

CIMON-PLC
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

Note:
To change the product logo for your own print manual or
PDF, click "Tools > Manual Designer" and modify the print
manual template.

Title page 1
Use this page to introduce the product
by Tim Green

This is "Title Page 1" - you may use this page to introduce
your product, show title, author, copyright, company logos,
etc.
This page intentionally starts on an odd page, so that it is on
the right half of an open book from the readers point of view.
This is the reason why the previous page was blank (the
previous page is the back side of the cover)

CIMON-PLC
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.
All rights reserved. No parts of this work may be reproduced in any form or by any means - graphic, electronic, or
mechanical, including photocopying, recording, taping, or information storage and retrieval systems - without the
written permission of the publisher.
Products that are referred to in this document may be either trademarks and/or registered trademarks of the
respective owners. The publisher and the author make no claim to these trademarks.
While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document, the publisher and the author assume no
responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from the use of information contained in this document
or from the use of programs and source code that may accompany it. In no event shall the publisher and the author be
liable for any loss of profit or any other commercial damage caused or alleged to have been caused directly or
indirectly by this document.
Printed: 9 2012 in (whereever you are located)

Publisher

Special thanks to:

Technical Editors

All the people who contributed to this document, to mum and dad
and grandpa, to my sisters and brothers and mothers in law, to our
secretary Kathrin, to the graphic artist who created this great
product logo on the cover page (sorry, don't remember your name
at the moment but you did a great work), to the pizza service down
the street (your daily Capricciosas saved our lives), to the copy
shop where this document will be duplicated, and and and...

...enter name...
...enter name...

Last not least, we want to thank EC Software who wrote this great
help tool called HELP & MANUAL which printed this document.

...enter name...
Managing Editor
...enter name...

Cover Designer
...enter name...
Team Coordinator
...enter name...
Production
...enter name...

CIMON-PLC

Table of Contents
Foreword

Part I Welcome to CIMON-PLC

Part II Update News

1 Update History
................................................................................................................................... 38
Ver403
Ver402
Ver401
Ver400
Ver310
Ver309
Ver308
Ver307
Ver306
Ver305
Ver304
Ver303
Ver302
Ver301

.......................................................................................................................................................... 41
.......................................................................................................................................................... 46
.......................................................................................................................................................... 51
.......................................................................................................................................................... 51
.......................................................................................................................................................... 65
.......................................................................................................................................................... 75
.......................................................................................................................................................... 77
.......................................................................................................................................................... 84
.......................................................................................................................................................... 84
.......................................................................................................................................................... 85
.......................................................................................................................................................... 91
.......................................................................................................................................................... 96
.......................................................................................................................................................... 109
.......................................................................................................................................................... 109

Part III Quick Reference Manual

111

1 CIMON-PLC
...................................................................................................................................
CPU
112
2 CIMON-PLC
...................................................................................................................................
CPU(MPnA / XPnX)
122
3 CIMON-PLC
...................................................................................................................................
RS232C/422/485 module
127
4 CIMON-PLC
...................................................................................................................................
Power
136
5 CIMON-PLC
...................................................................................................................................
Base
141
6 CIMON-PLC
...................................................................................................................................
Ethernet module
144
7 CIMON-PLC
...................................................................................................................................
BACnet module
153
8 CIMON-PLC
...................................................................................................................................
DeviceNet module
160
9 CIMON-PLC
...................................................................................................................................
Profibus DP module
169
10 CIMON-PLC
...................................................................................................................................
Data Logger module
177
11 CIMON-PLC
...................................................................................................................................
Digital Inputs
184
12 CIMON-PLC
...................................................................................................................................
Digital Outputs
195
13 CIMON-PLC
...................................................................................................................................
Combination I/O module
205
14 CIMON-PLC
...................................................................................................................................
A/D Converters
212
15 CIMON-PLC
...................................................................................................................................
D/A Converters
223
16 CIMON-PLC
...................................................................................................................................
Positioning Module
233
17 CIMON-PLC
...................................................................................................................................
High Speed Convertrs
244
18 CIMON-PLC
...................................................................................................................................
Loadcell Module
256
19 CIMON-PLC
...................................................................................................................................
RTD Converters Module
265
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

Contents

20 CIMON-PLC
...................................................................................................................................
TC04A Converters Module
274
21 CIMON-PLC
...................................................................................................................................
Thermistor Module
283
22 CIMON-PLC
...................................................................................................................................
Expansion
290
23 CIMON-PLC
...................................................................................................................................
Redundant System
296
24 CIMON-PLC
...................................................................................................................................
Remote I/O Series
299
25 CIMON-BP ...................................................................................................................................
Series 32Main Block
308
26 CIMON-BP ...................................................................................................................................
Series 16Main Block
317
27 CIMON-BP ...................................................................................................................................
32 I/O Expansion Blocks
324
28 CIMON-BP ...................................................................................................................................
16 I/O Expansion Blocks
329
29 CM2-BP04EAO
...................................................................................................................................
(Analog Expansion Blocks - AD V/I 4Ch Input)
337
30 CM2-BP04EOA
...................................................................................................................................
(Analog Expansion Blocks - DA V/I 4Ch Output)
344
31 CM2-BP04EAA (Analog Expansion Blocks - Input 2Ch / Output
2Ch)
................................................................................................................................... 352
32 CM2-BP04ERO
...................................................................................................................................
(Analog Expansion Blocks)
361
33 CM2-BP04ETO
...................................................................................................................................
(Analog Expansion Blocks)
369
34 CM2-BP32A***
................................................................................................................................... 378
35 CM2-BP32B***
................................................................................................................................... 388
36 CM3-PLCS ...................................................................................................................................
CPU
398

Part IV CICON - PLC Loader Program

418

1 Requirements
...................................................................................................................................
for Installation
419
2 Installation................................................................................................................................... 420
3 CICON Components
................................................................................................................................... 422
Screen Configuration
..........................................................................................................................................................
CICON Menu..........................................................................................................................................................
CICON Option
..........................................................................................................................................................

423
426
429

4 Essential Function
................................................................................................................................... 432
Device Memory
..........................................................................................................................................................
Export Import

432

5 Programming
...................................................................................................................................
(Single Programs)
435
Creating a project
..........................................................................................................................................................
Registering a
..........................................................................................................................................................
new program
Writing Scan..........................................................................................................................................................
Program
Entering a variable
..........................................................................................................................................................
table
Communication
..........................................................................................................................................................
Setting
Compile/Link
..........................................................................................................................................................
Download ..........................................................................................................................................................
Monitoring ..........................................................................................................................................................
Find and Replace
..........................................................................................................................................................
Find All
..........................................................................................................................................................
Cross Reference
..........................................................................................................................................................
Bookmark ..........................................................................................................................................................

436
437
438
442
456
458
459
459
460
465
465
471

6 Programming
...................................................................................................................................
(Multiple Programs)
472
Add a new program
..........................................................................................................................................................
Remove program
..........................................................................................................................................................
from project
Writing / Managing
..........................................................................................................................................................
Program

472
473
474

CIMON-PLC
Parameter Setting
..........................................................................................................................................................
Reserve I/O ..........................................................................................................................................................

481
485

7 Scan Program
................................................................................................................................... 487
Scan Program
..........................................................................................................................................................
Sub-routine ..........................................................................................................................................................
Program
Initialization..........................................................................................................................................................
Program (Cold)
Initialization..........................................................................................................................................................
Program (Hot)
Periodic Interrupt
..........................................................................................................................................................
Program

488
489
489
490
491

8 Communication
...................................................................................................................................
Setting Program
492
Protocol Program
..........................................................................................................................................................
DNP3 Program
..........................................................................................................................................................
Public Network
..........................................................................................................................................................
IP Setting Program
Field Bus Communication
..........................................................................................................................................................
Block Setup Program
Modbus Master
..........................................................................................................................................................
Program
Ethernet Protocol
..........................................................................................................................................................
Program
CIMONNET Communication
..........................................................................................................................................................
Block Setup Program
CIMONNET Communication
..........................................................................................................................................................
Block Slave Setup Program

492
503
505
508
512
516
528
528

9 Special Program
................................................................................................................................... 532
Special Card..........................................................................................................................................................
Init. Program
PID Special Program
..........................................................................................................................................................
Thermistor setting
..........................................................................................................................................................
Program
HSC Program
..........................................................................................................................................................
for PLC-S
Positioning Program
..........................................................................................................................................................
for PLC-S
IO Input Filter
..........................................................................................................................................................
Setting Program

533
533
543
550
550
550

10 SFC Program
................................................................................................................................... 550
11 PLC Control
................................................................................................................................... 551
PLC Status ..........................................................................................................................................................
PLC Time Setting
..........................................................................................................................................................
Change operation
..........................................................................................................................................................
mode
RAM Operation
..........................................................................................................................................................
ROM Operation
..........................................................................................................................................................

551
552
552
552
552

12 Special Card
...................................................................................................................................
Setting
553
Ethernet Module
..........................................................................................................................................................
RS232/422 Module
..........................................................................................................................................................
Logger (RS232)
..........................................................................................................................................................
Module
DNP3 (Ethernet)
..........................................................................................................................................................
Module
DNP3 (232/422)
..........................................................................................................................................................
Module
BACnet (Slave)
..........................................................................................................................................................
Module
AD Conversion
..........................................................................................................................................................
Module
DA Conversion
..........................................................................................................................................................
Module
AD/DA Conversion
..........................................................................................................................................................
Module
RTD Conversion
..........................................................................................................................................................
Module
TC Conversion
..........................................................................................................................................................
Module
High-speed Counter
..........................................................................................................................................................
AD MUX Module
..........................................................................................................................................................

554
555
556
559
560
562
565
567
569
572
574
577
579

13 PLC Simulator
................................................................................................................................... 581
Simulator Features
..........................................................................................................................................................
Simulator Screen
..........................................................................................................................................................
Layout
Basic Screen
.........................................................................................................................................................
Tool bar.........................................................................................................................................................
Module Information
.........................................................................................................................................................
Window

582
583
584
584
586

Contents

CPU Config
.........................................................................................................................................................
PLC Mode
.........................................................................................................................................................
Module Monitor
.........................................................................................................................................................
Module Setting
.........................................................................................................................................................
Status Information
.........................................................................................................................................................
Warnings
.........................................................................................................................................................
and Errors
Simulator Settings
..........................................................................................................................................................
CPU Config
.........................................................................................................................................................
Module Setting
.........................................................................................................................................................
CICON - PLC..........................................................................................................................................................
Simulator Manual
Run Plc .........................................................................................................................................................
Simulator
Connect.........................................................................................................................................................
Scan Program
.........................................................................................................................................................
Download
Run Edit.........................................................................................................................................................
Online Mode
.........................................................................................................................................................

588
594
594
606
608
609
613
613
616
624
624
626
627
628
631

14 Downloader
................................................................................................................................... 633
Types of Downloader
..........................................................................................................................................................
Downloader ..........................................................................................................................................................
Screen Configuration
Creating Downloadable
..........................................................................................................................................................
Project File
Downloading..........................................................................................................................................................
in PLC Downloader

634
635
637
646

15 Appendix ................................................................................................................................... 654
Shortcut Key..........................................................................................................................................................
Loader Cabling
..........................................................................................................................................................
Diagram
Installation of
..........................................................................................................................................................
USB Device Driver

Part V PLC Common

654
655
655

669

1 Index Register
................................................................................................................................... 669
2 Instruction...................................................................................................................................
List - Type
671
3 Instruction...................................................................................................................................
List - Alphabetic
699
4 Internal Flag(Relay)
...................................................................................................................................
F
721
5 Programming
................................................................................................................................... 724
Setting up Parameter
..........................................................................................................................................................
Basic .........................................................................................................................................................
Latch Area
.........................................................................................................................................................
Setup
Interrupt.........................................................................................................................................................
Processing in
..........................................................................................................................................................
CPU
Processing
.........................................................................................................................................................
Operation
Actions by
.........................................................................................................................................................
Modes
Converting
.........................................................................................................................................................
Memory Mode
Restart Mode
.........................................................................................................................................................
Type of Programs
..........................................................................................................................................................
Scan Program
.........................................................................................................................................................
Sub-Routine
.........................................................................................................................................................
Program
Initialization
.........................................................................................................................................................
Program (Cold)
Initialization
.........................................................................................................................................................
Program (Hot)
Interrupt.........................................................................................................................................................
Program
Self-Diagnosis
..........................................................................................................................................................
Built-In Functions
..........................................................................................................................................................

724
725
726
726
727
727
728
728
729
731
731
732
732
732
733
733
735

6 Instruction...................................................................................................................................
Overview
738
Devices
..........................................................................................................................................................
Input/Output
.........................................................................................................................................................
X, Y

738
739

CIMON-PLC
Auxiliary.........................................................................................................................................................
Relay M
Keeep Relay
.........................................................................................................................................................
K
Link Relay
.........................................................................................................................................................
L
Timer T .........................................................................................................................................................
Counter .........................................................................................................................................................
C
Data Register
.........................................................................................................................................................
D
Indirect Data
.........................................................................................................................................................
Register @D
Index Qualification
.........................................................................................................................................................
R
Step Control
.........................................................................................................................................................
Relay S
Internal Flag
.........................................................................................................................................................
(Relay) F
Indicating
.........................................................................................................................................................
Device Addresses
CPU device
.........................................................................................................................................................
memory capacity
Basic Instructions
..........................................................................................................................................................
Contact .........................................................................................................................................................
Instruction
Connection
.........................................................................................................................................................
Instruction
Output Instruction
.........................................................................................................................................................
Step Control
.........................................................................................................................................................
Instruction
Master Control
.........................................................................................................................................................
Instruction
Termination
.........................................................................................................................................................
Instruction
Program.........................................................................................................................................................
branch Instruction
Structure.........................................................................................................................................................
Creation Instruction
Program.........................................................................................................................................................
run control Instruction
Other Instructions
.........................................................................................................................................................
Application Instructions
..........................................................................................................................................................
Comparison
.........................................................................................................................................................
Operation Instruction
Arithmetic
.........................................................................................................................................................
Operation Instruction
Data Conversion
.........................................................................................................................................................
Instruction
Data Transfer
.........................................................................................................................................................
Instruction
Data Table
.........................................................................................................................................................
operation Instruction
Logic operation
.........................................................................................................................................................
Instruction
Rotation.........................................................................................................................................................
Instruction
Shift Instruction
.........................................................................................................................................................
Character
.........................................................................................................................................................
string Processing Instruction
Data Processing
.........................................................................................................................................................
Instruction
Bit Processing
.........................................................................................................................................................
Instruction
Clock Instruction
.........................................................................................................................................................
Buffer Memory
.........................................................................................................................................................
Access Instruction
Instruction
.........................................................................................................................................................
for Data Link
Timer / Counter
.........................................................................................................................................................
Real number
.........................................................................................................................................................
operation Instruction
Read / Write
.........................................................................................................................................................
Instruction
Search Instruction
.........................................................................................................................................................
Other Instructions
.........................................................................................................................................................
Configuration
..........................................................................................................................................................
of Instructions
Numerical Values
..........................................................................................................................................................
Error
..........................................................................................................................................................
Types of Instructions
..........................................................................................................................................................
Processing in
..........................................................................................................................................................
Bit
Processing in
..........................................................................................................................................................
Word
Form of Instructions
..........................................................................................................................................................

740
740
740
740
741
741
741
742
743
744
747
748
748
749
749
750
750
750
751
751
751
752
752
753
753
756
758
760
761
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
767
768
768
769
771
771
771
771
773
775
775
777
777
777

7 Basic Instruction
................................................................................................................................... 779
Contact Instruction
..........................................................................................................................................................
Start Operation, Connect in A Series, Connect in A Parallel : LD, LDI, AND,
ANDI, OR,
.........................................................................................................................................................
ORI

780
781

Contents

For Rising-Falling Edge, Start Operation, Connect in Series, Connect in
Parallel :.........................................................................................................................................................
LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, ORF
Invert Result
.........................................................................................................................................................
of Operation : INV
Start Operation by Bit in Data Device : LDBT, LDBTI, ANDBT, ANDBTI,
ORBT, ORBTI
.........................................................................................................................................................
Connection Instruction
..........................................................................................................................................................
Connect.........................................................................................................................................................
in Series, Connect in Parallel by Blocks : ANB, ORB
Branch Multiply
.........................................................................................................................................................
: MPS, MRD, MPP
Output Instruction
..........................................................................................................................................................
Bit Device
.........................................................................................................................................................
Timer, Counter : OUT
Bit Device
.........................................................................................................................................................
set : SET
Bit Device
.........................................................................................................................................................
Reset : RST
Output for
.........................................................................................................................................................
a Scan at Rising Edge and Falling Edge : PLS, PLF
Step Control..........................................................................................................................................................
Instruction
Step Control
.........................................................................................................................................................
: SET Sxx.xx
Last-In &.........................................................................................................................................................
First-Out Control : OUT Sxx.xx
Master Control
..........................................................................................................................................................
Instruction
Set or Reset
.........................................................................................................................................................
Master Control : MC, MCR
Termination ..........................................................................................................................................................
Insruction
End Main
.........................................................................................................................................................
Routine Program : END
End Main
.........................................................................................................................................................
Roution Program Conditionally : CEND, CENDP
End Sequence
.........................................................................................................................................................
Program : PEND
Program branch
..........................................................................................................................................................
Instruction
Jump : JMP,
.........................................................................................................................................................
JMPP, JME
Branch Sub-Routine
.........................................................................................................................................................
: CALL, CALLP, SBRT, RET
Call Sub-Routine
.........................................................................................................................................................
between Program Files : ECALL, ECALLP, SBRT, RET
Structure Creation
..........................................................................................................................................................
Instruction
FOR-NEXT
.........................................................................................................................................................
: FOR, NEXT
Force FOR-NEXT
.........................................................................................................................................................
to End : BREAK, BREAKP
Program run..........................................................................................................................................................
control Instruction
Enable or
.........................................................................................................................................................
Disable to Interrupt : EI, DI, GEI, GDI
Return : .........................................................................................................................................................
IRET
Enable, .........................................................................................................................................................
Disable PBT : EPGM, DPGM
Other Instructions
..........................................................................................................................................................
Stop Sequence
.........................................................................................................................................................
Program : STOP
End Initialization
.........................................................................................................................................................
Program and Execute Scan Program : INITEND
Reset WDT
.........................................................................................................................................................
: WDT, WDTP
Set or Reset
.........................................................................................................................................................
Carry Flag : STC, CLC
I/O Refresh
.........................................................................................................................................................
: RFS, RFSP

784
786
787
789
789
792
796
796
798
800
801
804
804
806
807
808
809
810
812
813
815
815
816
818
820
820
822
823
823
825
825
826
827
828
829
831
832

8 Application...................................................................................................................................
Instruction
833
Comparison..........................................................................................................................................................
operation Instruction
Compare.........................................................................................................................................................
16 Bit and 32 Bit Data : LDx, LDDx, ANDx, ANDDx, OR, ORDx
16 Bit, 32
.........................................................................................................................................................
Bit Unsigned Data Comparisons : UCMP, UDCMP
INT 16 Block Data Comparison : BK=, BK<>, BK>, BK<=, BK<, BK>=,
BK=P, BK<>P,
.........................................................................................................................................................
BK>P, BK<=P, BK=P
Arithmetic operation
..........................................................................................................................................................
Instruction
ADD BIN.........................................................................................................................................................
: ADD, DADD, ADDP, DADDP
ADD BCD
.........................................................................................................................................................
: BADD, BADDP, DBADD, DBADDP
Floating-point four arithmetical operations arithmetic(Addition) : EADD,
EADDP .........................................................................................................................................................
Subtract.........................................................................................................................................................
BIN : SUB, SUBP, DSUB, DSUBP
Subtract.........................................................................................................................................................
BCD : BSUB, BSUBP, DBSUB, DBSUBP
Floating-point four arithmetical operations arithmetic(Subtraction) : ESUB,
ESUBP .........................................................................................................................................................
Multiply .........................................................................................................................................................
BIN : MUL, MULP, DMUL, DMULP

837
837
840
842
844
845
846
846
848
849
850
850

CIMON-PLC
BIN 16 Bit and BIN 32 Bit multiplication operations : WMUL, WMULP,
DWMUL,.........................................................................................................................................................
DWMULP
Multiply .........................................................................................................................................................
BCD : BMUL, BMULP, DBMUL, DBMULP
Floating-point four arithmetical operations arithmetic(Multiplication) : EMUL,
EMULP .........................................................................................................................................................
Divide BIN
.........................................................................................................................................................
: DIV, DIVP, DDIV, DDIVP
BIN 16 Bit,
.........................................................................................................................................................
32 Bit division operations : WDIV, WDIVP, DWDIV, DWDIVP
Divide BCD
.........................................................................................................................................................
: BDIV, BDIVP, DBDIV, DBDIVP
Floating-point four arithmetical operations arithmetic(Division) : EDIV,
EDIVP .........................................................................................................................................................
Increase.........................................................................................................................................................
16 and 32 Bit BIN Data : INC, INCP, DINC, DINCP
Decrease
.........................................................................................................................................................
BIN Data : DEC, DECP, DDEC, DDECP
Calculation
.........................................................................................................................................................
of totals for 16bit data : WSUM, WSUMP
Data conversion
..........................................................................................................................................................
Instruction
Convert .........................................................................................................................................................
BCD : BCD, BCDP, DBCD, DBCDP
Convert .........................................................................................................................................................
BIN : BIN, BINP, DBIN, DBINP
Invert Sing
.........................................................................................................................................................
for BIN 16 Bit and 32 Bit Data : NEG, NEGP, DNEG, DNEGP
Conversion from BIN 16 and 32 Bit Data to floating decimal point : FLT,
FLTP, DFLT,
.........................................................................................................................................................
DFLTP
Conversion from floating decimal point data to BIN 16 and 32 Bit Data :
INT, INTP,
.........................................................................................................................................................
DINT, DINTP
Conversion
.........................................................................................................................................................
from BIN Data to Gray Code : GRY, GRYP, DGRY, DGRYP
Conversion
.........................................................................................................................................................
from Gray code to BIN Data : GBIN, GBINP, DGBIN, DGBINP
Data transfer..........................................................................................................................................................
Instruction
Transfer.........................................................................................................................................................
16 Bit or 32 Bit Data : MOV, MOVP, DMOV, DMOVP
Transfer.........................................................................................................................................................
Block : BMOV, BMOVP
Floating-point
.........................................................................................................................................................
data transfer Instruction : EMOV, EMOVP
Invert 16.........................................................................................................................................................
Bit Data Bit : CML, CMLP, DCML, DCMLP
Exchange
.........................................................................................................................................................
16 Bit and 32 Bit Data : XCH, XCHP, DXCH, DXCHP
Exchange
.........................................................................................................................................................
Block Data : BXCH, BXCHP
Transfer.........................................................................................................................................................
Identical 16 Bit Data Block : FMOV, FMOVP
Bit data .........................................................................................................................................................
transfer : WBMOV, WBMOVP
Transfer.........................................................................................................................................................
Bit Data : BITMOV, BITMOVP
Exchange
.........................................................................................................................................................
Upper and Lower Byte : SWAP, SWAPP
Data Table operation
..........................................................................................................................................................
Instruction
Writing data
.........................................................................................................................................................
to the data table : FIFW, FIFWP
Reading.........................................................................................................................................................
the first data from the data table : FIFR, FIFRP
Reading.........................................................................................................................................................
the last data from the data table : FPOP, FPOPP
Inserting.........................................................................................................................................................
a data in the data table : FINS, FINSP
Deleting.........................................................................................................................................................
a data from the data table : FDEL, FDELP
Logic operation
..........................................................................................................................................................
Instruction
Logical products
.........................................................................................................................................................
with 16-bit and 32-bit data : WAND(P), DAND(P)
Word OR
.........................................................................................................................................................
: WOR, WORP, DOR, DORP
Word Exclusive
.........................................................................................................................................................
OR : WXOR, WXORP, DXOR, DXORP
Word Exclusive
.........................................................................................................................................................
NOR : WXNR, WXNRP, DXNR, DXNRP
Block Logical
.........................................................................................................................................................
Product : BKAND, BKANDP
Block Logical
.........................................................................................................................................................
Sum : BKOR, BKORP
Block Exclusive
.........................................................................................................................................................
OR : BKXOR, BKXORP
Block Non-Exclusive
.........................................................................................................................................................
Logical Sum : BKXNR, BKXNRP
Rotation Instruction
..........................................................................................................................................................
Rotate Right
.........................................................................................................................................................
: ROR, RORP, DROR, DRORP
Rotate Right
.........................................................................................................................................................
With Carry : RCR, RCRP, DRCR, DRCRP
Rotate Left
.........................................................................................................................................................
: ROL, ROLP, DROL, DROLP
Rotate Left
.........................................................................................................................................................
With Carry : RCL, RCLP, DRCL, DRCLP
Shift Instruction
..........................................................................................................................................................

852
853
855
856
857
859
861
862
862
863
865
865
867
868
869
871
873
874
875
875
877
878
879
880
881
883
885
886
887
889
889
891
893
895
896
898
898
900
901
903
904
906
908
910
912
912
913
914
916
917

Contents

Shift Right
.........................................................................................................................................................
or Shift Left 16Bit Data as n Bits : SFR, SFRP, SFL, SFLP
Shift Right
.........................................................................................................................................................
or Shift Left 16 Bit Data as 1 Bit : BSFR, BSFRP, BSFL, BSFLP
Shift Right or Shift Left n Word Data as 1 Word : DSFR, DSFRP, DSFL,
DSFLP .........................................................................................................................................................
Character String
..........................................................................................................................................................
Processing Instruction
Convert BIN 16 Bit or 32 Bit Data to Decimal ASCII : BINDA(P),
DBINDA(P)
.........................................................................................................................................................
Convert BIN 16 Bit or 32 Bit Data to Hexadecimal ASCII : BINHA(P)),
DBINHA(P)
.........................................................................................................................................................
Convert BCD 4 Digit or 8 Digit to Decimal ASCII Data : BCDDA(P),
DBCDDA(P)
.........................................................................................................................................................
Convert Decimal ASCII to BIN 16 Bit or 32 Bit Data : DABIN(P),
DDABIN(P)
.........................................................................................................................................................
Convert .........................................................................................................................................................
hexadecimal ASCII to BIN 16 bit Data : HABIN(P), DHABIN(P)
Data Processing
..........................................................................................................................................................
Instruction
Search 16 Bit and 32 Bit Data for Maximum Value : MAX, MAXP, DMAX,
DMAXP .........................................................................................................................................................
Search for 16 Bit and 32 Bit Data for Minimum Value : MIN, MINP, DMIN,
DMINP .........................................................................................................................................................
Check 16
.........................................................................................................................................................
Bit and 32 Bit Data : SUM, SUMP, DSUM, DSUMP
Decode .........................................................................................................................................................
in 7-Segment : SEG, SEGP
Decode 8 Bit Data or Encode 256 Bit Data : DECO, DECOP, ENCO,
ENCOP .........................................................................................................................................................
Dissociate
.........................................................................................................................................................
or Unite 16 Bit Data : DIS, DISP, UNI, UNIP
Data Scaling
.........................................................................................................................................................
according to the specified linear function : SCL, SCLP
Bit Processing
..........................................................................................................................................................
Instruction
Bit tests .........................................................................................................................................................
: TEST, TESTP, DTEST, DTESTP
Set or Reset
.........................................................................................................................................................
Bit in Word Device : BSET, BSETP, BRST, BRSTP
Clock Instruction
..........................................................................................................................................................
Add Clock
.........................................................................................................................................................
Data : DATE+, DATE+P
Subtract.........................................................................................................................................................
Clock Data : DATE-, DATE-P
Convert .........................................................................................................................................................
Clock Data Format : SECOND(P), HOUR(P)
Reading.........................................................................................................................................................
Clock Data : DATERD, DATERDP
Writing Clock
.........................................................................................................................................................
Data : DATEWR, DATEWRP
Timer / Counter
..........................................................................................................................................................
Set after.........................................................................................................................................................
Delay : TON
Reset after
.........................................................................................................................................................
Delay : TOFF
Accumulate
.........................................................................................................................................................
Time : TMR
Decrease
.........................................................................................................................................................
Time Irrelevantly to Input : TMON
Redecrease
.........................................................................................................................................................
Time Relevantly to Input (OFF to ON) : TRTG
Count : CTU
.........................................................................................................................................................
Count Down
.........................................................................................................................................................
: CTD
Count and
.........................................................................................................................................................
Count Down : CTUD
Count and
.........................................................................................................................................................
Set Conditionally : CTR
Buffer Memory
..........................................................................................................................................................
Access Instruction
Read 1 Word or 2 Word Data in Optional Unit : FROM, FROMP, DFRO,
DFROP .........................................................................................................................................................
Write 1 Word
.........................................................................................................................................................
or 2 Word Data in optional Unit : TO, TOP, DTO, DTOP
Instruction for
..........................................................................................................................................................
Data Link
Send Data
.........................................................................................................................................................
: SND, SNDP
Receive.........................................................................................................................................................
Data : RCV, RCVP
Send Data
.........................................................................................................................................................
: SEND, SENDP
Receive.........................................................................................................................................................
Data : RECV, RECVP
Real number..........................................................................................................................................................
operation Instruction
SIN operation
.........................................................................................................................................................
on floating decimal point Data : SIN, SINP
COS Operation
.........................................................................................................................................................
on floationg decimal point data : COS, COSP

917
919
921
923
923
926
927
930
934
936
937
938
940
942
944
946
949
953
953
955
957
958
960
962
964
967
969
970
971
972
973
975
976
977
979
980
982
982
984
987
987
988
990
991
993
993
995

CIMON-PLC
TAN operation
.........................................................................................................................................................
on floating decimal point Data : TAN, TANP
SIN-1 Operation
.........................................................................................................................................................
on floating point data : ASIN, ASINP
COS-1 Operation
.........................................................................................................................................................
on floating point data : ACOS, ACOSP
TAN-1 .........................................................................................................................................................
Operation on floating point data : ATAN, ATANP
Conversion
.........................................................................................................................................................
form floating decimal point angle to radian : RAD, RADP
Conversion
.........................................................................................................................................................
from floating decimal point radian to angle : DEG, DEGP
Square.........................................................................................................................................................
root operations for floating decimal point Data : SQR, SQRP
Exponent
.........................................................................................................................................................
operation on floating decimal point dataInstruction : EXP, EXPP
Natural.........................................................................................................................................................
logarithm operations on floating decimal point Data : LOG, LOGP
Random number generate and series Update : RND, RNDP, SRND,
SRNDP.........................................................................................................................................................
BCD of.........................................................................................................................................................
4 Digit, Square root of 8 Digit : BSQR, BSQRP, BDSQR, BDSQRP
BCD Type
.........................................................................................................................................................
SIN operation : BSIN, BSINP
BCD Type
.........................................................................................................................................................
COS Operation : BCOS, BCOSP
BCD Type
.........................................................................................................................................................
TAN Operation : BTAN, BTANP
BCD Type
.........................................................................................................................................................
SIN-1 Operations : BASIN, BASINP
BCD Type
.........................................................................................................................................................
COS-1 Operation : BACOS, BACOSP
BCD Type
.........................................................................................................................................................
TAN-1 Operation : BATAN, BATANP
Read / Write
..........................................................................................................................................................
Instruction
Setting Data Memory Access Instruction Special function module Setting
Data Read
.........................................................................................................................................................
: FREAD, FREADP
Setting Data Memory Access Instruction Special function module Setting
Data Write
.........................................................................................................................................................
: FWRITE, FWRITEP
Instruction ..........................................................................................................................................................
for High Speed Counter
Enable/Preset
.........................................................................................................................................................
High Speed Counter : HSC
Operating/Preset/SW-Adding
.........................................................................................................................................................
or Subtracting High Speed Counter : HSCSW
Other Instructions
..........................................................................................................................................................
Timing .........................................................................................................................................................
pulse generation : DUTY
Swap Active
.........................................................................................................................................................
Status in Redundant System : ATVP

996
997
998
1000
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1007
1008
1010
1011
1012
1014
1015
1016
1017
1017
1019
1021
1022
1023
1025
1025
1026

9 PID CONTROL
................................................................................................................................... 1028
PID2 notice..........................................................................................................................................................
PID Control..........................................................................................................................................................
Function
PID Basics ..........................................................................................................................................................
PID Control..........................................................................................................................................................
formula
PID Instruction
..........................................................................................................................................................

1028
1028
1028
1029
1030

10 TROUBLE...................................................................................................................................
SHOOTING
1038
CPU Error Code
..........................................................................................................................................................
Table

Part VI XP / CP Series(CM1)

1038

1043

1 Brochure ................................................................................................................................... 1043
Description..........................................................................................................................................................
Specifications
Redundant..........................................................................................................................................................
System
CPU
..........................................................................................................................................................
Base
..........................................................................................................................................................
Power
..........................................................................................................................................................
Communication
..........................................................................................................................................................
Digital I/O ..........................................................................................................................................................
Analog I/O ..........................................................................................................................................................
Temperature
..........................................................................................................................................................
High-Speed..........................................................................................................................................................
Counter
Load Cell ..........................................................................................................................................................
Data Logger
..........................................................................................................................................................
Positioning..........................................................................................................................................................
Module

1044
1044
1047
1049
1050
1052
1056
1060
1063
1066
1068
1069
1070

Contents

Expansion ..........................................................................................................................................................
Accessories
..........................................................................................................................................................
Training KIT
..........................................................................................................................................................

1072
1073
1075

2 Serial Communication
...................................................................................................................................
Module
1076
Specifications
..........................................................................................................................................................
General.........................................................................................................................................................
Specifications
Module.........................................................................................................................................................
Specifications
Cable Specifications
.........................................................................................................................................................
Termination
.........................................................................................................................................................
Register
SC02A.........................................................................................................................................................
Dimensions
SC01A.........................................................................................................................................................
Dimensions
SC01B.........................................................................................................................................................
Dimensions
Operation Setup
..........................................................................................................................................................
Operation
.........................................................................................................................................................
Mode Setup
Series .........................................................................................................................................................
Interface Method
Internal I/O..........................................................................................................................................................
Shared Memory
..........................................................................................................................................................
Mode .........................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
.........................................................................................................................................................
Network Example
..........................................................................................................................................................
1:1 Communication
.........................................................................................................................................................
between CIMON PLC and PC
1:1 Communication
.........................................................................................................................................................
between CIMON PLC and 3rd vendor device
1:2 Communication
.........................................................................................................................................................
with 3rd vendor device via modem
1:2 Communication
.........................................................................................................................................................
with 3rd vendor device
1:N long
.........................................................................................................................................................
distance communication via modem
1:N Multi-drop
.........................................................................................................................................................
communication
1:N Multi-drop
.........................................................................................................................................................
communication between various devices via modem
1:N Multi-drop
.........................................................................................................................................................
communication between various devices
An example
.........................................................................................................................................................
of CIMON PLC network
An example
.........................................................................................................................................................
of CIMON PLC network including 3rd vendor devices
Communication
..........................................................................................................................................................
Services
User Communication
.........................................................................................................................................................
(SND, RCV)
User Communication
.........................................................................................................................................................
(SEND, RECV)
Operation Procedure
.........................................................................................................................................
of User Communications
Registering and
.........................................................................................................................................
Editing a Special Program
Instructions for
.........................................................................................................................................
User Program
Error Codes for
.........................................................................................................................................
User Communications
Example of Programming
.........................................................................................................................................
for User Communications
Example of Application
.........................................................................................................................................
of MODICON (MODBUS) protocol
Sending/Receiving
.........................................................................................................................................
communication frames at communication intervals
CIMON.........................................................................................................................................................
PLC - HMI Protocol
Structure of Frame
.........................................................................................................................................
Details of Command
.........................................................................................................................................
Dial-Up.........................................................................................................................................................
Modem Communication
Leased.........................................................................................................................................................
Line Modem Communication
RS485 .........................................................................................................................................................
PLC Link Service
MODBUS
.........................................................................................................................................................
Protocol Service
MODBUS
.........................................................................................................................................................
Master Special module program Service
Installing and
..........................................................................................................................................................
Testing
Order of
.........................................................................................................................................................
Installation
Safety .........................................................................................................................................................
Precautions
Testing.........................................................................................................................................................
Trouble Shooting
..........................................................................................................................................................
Error Codes
.........................................................................................................................................................

1077
1078
1078
1079
1079
1079
1080
1081
1081
1081
1083
1086
1087
1088
1088
1089
1089
1090
1091
1092
1092
1093
1094
1095
1096
1097
1098
1099
1101
1102
1103
1115
1118
1118
1128
1130
1132
1132
1134
1150
1153
1154
1160
1163
1171
1172
1172
1173
1174
1174

CIMON-PLC
Error in.........................................................................................................................................................
Hardware
Error in.........................................................................................................................................................
Exclusive Communications
Error in.........................................................................................................................................................
Modem Link when Linking CICON
Appendix ..........................................................................................................................................................
Definitions
.........................................................................................................................................................
CIMON-PLC/HMI
.........................................................................................................................................................
Protocal
Structure of Frame
.........................................................................................................................................
Exclusive Communications
.........................................................................................................................................
Error Response
.........................................................................................................................................
ASCII Code
.........................................................................................................................................................
Table

1175
1176
1178
1178
1178
1180
1180
1182
1196
1197

3 Ethernet Module
................................................................................................................................... 1198
New Products
..........................................................................................................................................................
: EC10A /B
CIMON Ethernet
..........................................................................................................................................................
PLC Link Performance Test
Specifications
..........................................................................................................................................................
General.........................................................................................................................................................
Specifications
Module.........................................................................................................................................................
Specifications
Cable Specifications
.........................................................................................................................................................
Dimensions
.........................................................................................................................................................
Internal I/O..........................................................................................................................................................
Table
Shared Memory
..........................................................................................................................................................
System Configuration
..........................................................................................................................................................
CIMON.........................................................................................................................................................
PLC Network SYSTEM
CIMON.........................................................................................................................................................
PLC Ethernet SYSTEM
CIMON.........................................................................................................................................................
PLC Ethernet SYSTEM (Exclusive)
CIMON.........................................................................................................................................................
PLC Ethernet SYSTEM (Exclusive+Other)
CIMON.........................................................................................................................................................
PLC Ethernet SYSTEM (Internet+Exclusive)
CIMON.........................................................................................................................................................
PLC Ethernet SYSTEM (Internet+Exclusive+Other)
Communication
..........................................................................................................................................................
Funcions
Graphic.........................................................................................................................................................
Loader Service
Exclusive
.........................................................................................................................................................
Service for CIMON PLC Ethernet
PLC Link
.........................................................................................................................................................
in Exclusive Network
Processing Sent/Received
.........................................................................................................................................
Data under PLC Link
Setting up PLC
.........................................................................................................................................
Link Parameter
IP Configuration
.........................................................................................................................................
PLC Link
.........................................................................................................................................................
Service in Common Network
Processing Sent/Received
.........................................................................................................................................
Data under PLC Link
Setting up PLC
.........................................................................................................................................
Link Parameter
TCP Modbus
.........................................................................................................................................................
Service
Installing and
..........................................................................................................................................................
Testing
Installing
.........................................................................................................................................................
10BASE-T
Testing.........................................................................................................................................................
Maintenance
.........................................................................................................................................................
and Check up
Trouble Shooting
..........................................................................................................................................................
Error Codes
.........................................................................................................................................................
for System
Error in.........................................................................................................................................................
Hardware
Error in.........................................................................................................................................................
Interface
Error in.........................................................................................................................................................
Network
Error in.........................................................................................................................................................
the Interface with CPU while Operating
Error in.........................................................................................................................................................
PLC Link Parameter
Error in.........................................................................................................................................................
PLC Link Operation
CIMON PLC..........................................................................................................................................................
HMI Protocol Service
Structure
.........................................................................................................................................................
of Frames
Word Block
.........................................................................................................................................................
Read
Word Block
.........................................................................................................................................................
Write

1199
1200
1202
1202
1203
1203
1203
1204
1205
1206
1206
1208
1208
1209
1209
1210
1210
1212
1214
1216
1217
1217
1222
1226
1227
1228
1233
1235
1236
1237
1239
1240
1240
1241
1241
1242
1243
1245
1246
1247
1247
1250
1252

Contents

Bit Block
.........................................................................................................................................................
Read
Bit Block
.........................................................................................................................................................
Write
Error Codes
.........................................................................................................................................................
for Exclusive Service

1254
1256
1259

4 A/D Converters
................................................................................................................................... 1259
General Idea
..........................................................................................................................................................
Specifications
..........................................................................................................................................................
General.........................................................................................................................................................
Specification
Technical
.........................................................................................................................................................
Specification
Dimensions
.........................................................................................................................................................
Features of..........................................................................................................................................................
I/O Conversion
AD04VI.........................................................................................................................................................
AD08I .........................................................................................................................................................
AD08V.........................................................................................................................................................
Wiring
..........................................................................................................................................................
AD04VI.........................................................................................................................................................
AD08I .........................................................................................................................................................
AD08V.........................................................................................................................................................
Internal I/O..........................................................................................................................................................
Table
Input Signals
.........................................................................................................................................................
Output .........................................................................................................................................................
Signals
Buffer Memory
..........................................................................................................................................................
Enabling
.........................................................................................................................................................
/ Disabling to A/D Convert (Address "0")
Average
.........................................................................................................................................................
Time / Average Number of Times (Address "1 - 8")
Assigning
.........................................................................................................................................................
Average Process (Address "9")
A/D Converted
.........................................................................................................................................................
(Address "10")
Digital OutPut
.........................................................................................................................................................
Value (Address "11 - 18")
Error Codes
.........................................................................................................................................................
(Address "19")
Range .........................................................................................................................................................
of Input Setup (Address "20, 21")
Offset/Gain
.........................................................................................................................................................
Calibration Mode (Address "22, 23")
Digital Output
.........................................................................................................................................................
Setup Mode (Address "24, 25")
Devices.........................................................................................................................................................
to Strore Max. and Min. (Address "30 - 45")

1260
1261
1262
1262
1263
1264
1264
1265
1266
1266
1267
1269
1270
1270
1271
1272
1273
1274
1275
1275
1276
1277
1277
1278
1278
1279
1280

5 D/A Converters
................................................................................................................................... 1280
General Idea
..........................................................................................................................................................
Specifications
..........................................................................................................................................................
General.........................................................................................................................................................
Specification
Technical
.........................................................................................................................................................
Specification
Dimensions
.........................................................................................................................................................
Features of..........................................................................................................................................................
I/O Conversion
Features
.........................................................................................................................................................
of Voltage Output (DA04V, DA08V)
Features
.........................................................................................................................................................
of Current Output (DA04I , DA08I)
Features
.........................................................................................................................................................
of Voltage and Current Output (DA04VA , DA08VA)
Wiring
..........................................................................................................................................................
DA04I, .........................................................................................................................................................
DA08I
DA04V,.........................................................................................................................................................
DA08V, DA04VA, DA08VA
Internal I/O..........................................................................................................................................................
Table
Input Signals
.........................................................................................................................................................
Output .........................................................................................................................................................
Signals
Buffer Memory
..........................................................................................................................................................
Enabling
.........................................................................................................................................................
/ Disabling to D/A Convert (Address "0")
Digital Value
.........................................................................................................................................................
by Channels (Address "1 - 8")
Error Codes
.........................................................................................................................................................
(Address "9")
Setting.........................................................................................................................................................
up Hold / Clear (Address "10")
Set Value
.........................................................................................................................................................
Check Code by Channels (Address "11 - 18")

1281
1282
1282
1283
1283
1284
1285
1286
1287
1287
1288
1289
1289
1290
1292
1292
1293
1294
1294
1295
1296

CIMON-PLC
Channel
.........................................................................................................................................................
to Calibrate Offset / Gain (Address " 19, 20")
Calibrated
.........................................................................................................................................................
Offset Value and Gain Value (Address "21")
Set up .........................................................................................................................................................
Digital Input Type (Address "22")
Enabling
.........................................................................................................................................................
/ Disabling D/A Output (Address "23")

1297
1297
1297
1298

6 RTD Module
................................................................................................................................... 1298
General Idea
..........................................................................................................................................................
Specifications
..........................................................................................................................................................
General.........................................................................................................................................................
Specifications
Module.........................................................................................................................................................
Specifications
Outward
.........................................................................................................................................................
View and Dimensions
Installing and
..........................................................................................................................................................
Wiring
Internal I/O..........................................................................................................................................................
Table
Input Signals
.........................................................................................................................................................
Output .........................................................................................................................................................
Signals
Shared Memory
..........................................................................................................................................................
Enabling/Disabling
.........................................................................................................................................................
to RTD-Convert ("0")
Detected
.........................................................................................................................................................
Temperature Values °C ("1-8")
Assigning
.........................................................................................................................................................
RTD Type ("9")
Detected
.........................................................................................................................................................
Temperature Values °F ("11-18")
Information
.........................................................................................................................................................
about Operating Channels ("19")
Digitally.........................................................................................................................................................
Converted Values ("21-28")
Digital Output
.........................................................................................................................................................
Setup ("29")
Assigning
.........................................................................................................................................................
Average Process ("30")
Error Codes
.........................................................................................................................................................
("31-38")
Buffer Memory
.........................................................................................................................................................
Address ("41-58")
Setting.........................................................................................................................................................
up Average Time/Filter Coefficeient for Ch1-Ch4 ("59-62")
CICON - Setting
..........................................................................................................................................................
up RTD Card
Setting.........................................................................................................................................................
up Channels
Initialization
.........................................................................................................................................................
Program on a Local Base
Comparing
.........................................................................................................................................................
Converted Values on an Expansion Base
Trouble Shooting
..........................................................................................................................................................
RUN LED
.........................................................................................................................................................
blinks
RUN LED
.........................................................................................................................................................
is out
CPU module
.........................................................................................................................................................
cannot read converted temperature values
RTD input
.........................................................................................................................................................
values do not correspond to detected temperature values
RTD Converter
.........................................................................................................................................................
module breaks down

1300
1302
1303
1303
1304
1304
1306
1307
1308
1308
1309
1310
1310
1311
1311
1311
1311
1312
1312
1313
1313
1314
1314
1318
1321
1326
1327
1327
1328
1329
1329

7 TC Module
................................................................................................................................... 1329
Specifications
..........................................................................................................................................................
General.........................................................................................................................................................
Specifications
Module.........................................................................................................................................................
Specifications
Outward
.........................................................................................................................................................
View and Dimensions
Installing and
..........................................................................................................................................................
Wiring
Internal I/O..........................................................................................................................................................
Table
Input Signals
.........................................................................................................................................................
Output .........................................................................................................................................................
Signals
Shared Memory
..........................................................................................................................................................
Enabling/Disabling
.........................................................................................................................................................
to TC-Convert ("0")
Detected
.........................................................................................................................................................
Temperature Values °C ("1-8")
Assigning
.........................................................................................................................................................
TC Type ("9")
Detected
.........................................................................................................................................................
Temperature Values °F ("11-18")
Information
.........................................................................................................................................................
about Operating Channels ("19")
Digitally.........................................................................................................................................................
Converted Values ("21-28")
Digital Output
.........................................................................................................................................................
Setup ("29")

1330
1331
1331
1332
1333
1335
1336
1337
1337
1338
1339
1340
1340
1340
1341
1341

Contents

Assigning
.........................................................................................................................................................
Average Process ("30")
Error Codes
.........................................................................................................................................................
("31-38")
Buffer Memory
.........................................................................................................................................................
Address ("41-58")
Setting.........................................................................................................................................................
up Average Time/Filter Coefficient for Ch1-Ch4 ("59-62")
CICON - Setting
..........................................................................................................................................................
up TC Card
Setting.........................................................................................................................................................
up Channels
Initialization
.........................................................................................................................................................
Program on a Local Base
Comparing
.........................................................................................................................................................
Converted Values on an Expansion Base
Trouble Shooting
..........................................................................................................................................................
RUN LED
.........................................................................................................................................................
blinks
RUN LED
.........................................................................................................................................................
is out
CPU Module
.........................................................................................................................................................
cannot read converted temperature values
Converted
.........................................................................................................................................................
temperature values fluctuate
TC input
.........................................................................................................................................................
values do not conrrespond to detected temperature values
TC converter
.........................................................................................................................................................
module breaks down
General Idea
..........................................................................................................................................................

1341
1342
1342
1343
1344
1344
1347
1350
1355
1355
1356
1357
1357
1358
1358
1358

8 Weighing ................................................................................................................................... 1362
Specifications
..........................................................................................................................................................
General.........................................................................................................................................................
Specification
Module.........................................................................................................................................................
Specification
Front View
.........................................................................................................................................................
Wiring
..........................................................................................................................................................
Internal I/O..........................................................................................................................................................
and Shared Memory
Shared Memory
..........................................................................................................................................................
Monitoring
.........................................................................................................................................................
Data
Basic Configuration
.........................................................................................................................................................
Data
Batch Control
.........................................................................................................................................................
Parameters
Batch Program
..........................................................................................................................................................
Automatic
.........................................................................................................................................................
Normal Batch
Automatic
.........................................................................................................................................................
Loss in Weight Batch
User Controlled
.........................................................................................................................................................
Normal Batch
User Controlled
.........................................................................................................................................................
Loss in Weight Batch
Comparator
.........................................................................................................................................................
Mode
Weight.........................................................................................................................................................
Sorting Mode
Dynamic
.........................................................................................................................................................
Weighing(Fluid Material)
Dynamic
.........................................................................................................................................................
Weighing(Solid Material)
Instructions..........................................................................................................................................................
for Weighing
WGBATCH
.........................................................................................................................................................
WGSTOP
.........................................................................................................................................................
Calibration..........................................................................................................................................................
How to.........................................................................................................................................................
calibrate
Save and
.........................................................................................................................................................
download a configuration data
Configure ..........................................................................................................................................................
Basic Configuration
.........................................................................................................................................................
with Special Program

1363
1363
1364
1364
1366
1367
1369
1371
1375
1375
1377
1377
1382
1387
1389
1392
1394
1398
1399
1399
1399
1400
1401
1401
1405
1407
1409

9 High-speed
...................................................................................................................................
Counter
1413
Overview ..........................................................................................................................................................
Specifications
..........................................................................................................................................................
General.........................................................................................................................................................
Specifications
Module.........................................................................................................................................................
Specifications
Dimensions
.........................................................................................................................................................
Installing and
..........................................................................................................................................................
Wiring
Arrangement
.........................................................................................................................................................
of HS02B pin
Arrangement
.........................................................................................................................................................
of HS02D pin

1414
1416
1416
1417
1418
1419
1419
1420

CIMON-PLC
Installing
.........................................................................................................................................................
Wiring .........................................................................................................................................................
- Safety Precautions
Examples
.........................................................................................................................................................
of Wiring
Internal I/O..........................................................................................................................................................
Input Signals
.........................................................................................................................................................
Output .........................................................................................................................................................
Signals
Shared Memory
..........................................................................................................................................................
Currently-counted
.........................................................................................................................................................
Value (Signed 32-bit)
Flag Indicating
.........................................................................................................................................................
Overflow Detected
Flag Indicating
.........................................................................................................................................................
Sampling-counted or Periodic-Pulse Counted
Latch-counted
.........................................................................................................................................................
Value
Sampling-counted
.........................................................................................................................................................
Value
Previous
.........................................................................................................................................................
and Current Periodic-pulse-counted Value
Preset .........................................................................................................................................................
Value
Set Coincidence
.........................................................................................................................................................
Comparison Value 1 & 2
Set Lowest
.........................................................................................................................................................
Limit Value and Upper Limit Value of Ring Counting
Counting
.........................................................................................................................................................
Function Setup
Sampling
.........................................................................................................................................................
/ Periodic Time
Counting
.........................................................................................................................................................
Mode
Pulse Input
.........................................................................................................................................................
Method
Subtract
.........................................................................................................................................................
Command by software
Basic Functions
..........................................................................................................................................................
Understanding
.........................................................................................................................................................
Pulse Input Method and Counting Method
Counting
.........................................................................................................................................................
Forms
Coincidence
.........................................................................................................................................................
Output
Presetting
.........................................................................................................................................................
Counting Functions
..........................................................................................................................................................
Reading
.........................................................................................................................................................
the Counted value for Counting Functions
Disabling
.........................................................................................................................................................
to Count
Latch Counting
.........................................................................................................................................................
Sampling
.........................................................................................................................................................
Counting
Periodic
.........................................................................................................................................................
Pulse Counting
CICON - Setting
..........................................................................................................................................................
up HSC Card
Set up .........................................................................................................................................................
HSC
Upload.........................................................................................................................................................
Download
.........................................................................................................................................................
Current.........................................................................................................................................................
Status
Application
.........................................................................................................................................................
Programs (Using the CICON)
Trouble Shooting
..........................................................................................................................................................
Error in.........................................................................................................................................................
Counting
Error in.........................................................................................................................................................
Counted Value
Error in.........................................................................................................................................................
Output

1421
1422
1422
1426
1426
1427
1427
1429
1429
1429
1429
1430
1430
1430
1430
1431
1431
1432
1432
1432
1433
1433
1434
1436
1440
1441
1443
1444
1445
1445
1446
1448
1449
1450
1452
1452
1453
1454
1458
1459
1460
1461

10 Positioning
................................................................................................................................... 1461
Specifications
..........................................................................................................................................................
Technical
.........................................................................................................................................................
Data
General.........................................................................................................................................................
Specification
Module.........................................................................................................................................................
Specification
Input Signal
.........................................................................................................................................................
Specifications
Output .........................................................................................................................................................
Signal Specification
Dimensions
.........................................................................................................................................................
Wiring
..........................................................................................................................................................
Input Signal
.........................................................................................................................................................
Output .........................................................................................................................................................
Signal
Wiring .........................................................................................................................................................
Example "MR-J2S Seres (Mitsubishi)"

1462
1462
1464
1465
1466
1467
1467
1468
1469
1469
1470

Contents

Wiring .........................................................................................................................................................
Example "APD-VS Series (Metronix)"
Wiring .........................................................................................................................................................
Exmaple "FDA5000 Series (LG Otis)"
Internal I/O..........................................................................................................................................................
and Shared Memory
Shared Memory
..........................................................................................................................................................
Area
Control.........................................................................................................................................................
Data Memory Area
Parameter ..........................................................................................................................................................
Basic Parameters
.........................................................................................................................................................
Expaned
.........................................................................................................................................................
Parameters
OPR Parameters
.........................................................................................................................................................
Common
.........................................................................................................................................................
Parameters
Position Data
..........................................................................................................................................................
Control.........................................................................................................................................................
Type
Interpolation
.........................................................................................................................................................
Area
Acceleration/Deceleration
.........................................................................................................................................................
Number
Control.........................................................................................................................................................
Instruction
M Code.........................................................................................................................................................
Dwewll.........................................................................................................................................................
Time
Speed .........................................................................................................................................................
Destination
.........................................................................................................................................................
Address / Movement Amount
Circular.........................................................................................................................................................
Interpolation Address
Dedicated Instructions
..........................................................................................................................................................
for Positioning
PSTRT1,
.........................................................................................................................................................
PSTRT2
PFWRT
.........................................................................................................................................................
PINIT .........................................................................................................................................................
POSCTRL
.........................................................................................................................................................
CICON-The..........................................................................................................................................................
configuration Tool
Open / .........................................................................................................................................................
Create a Configuration Data
Save a.........................................................................................................................................................
Configuration Data
Parameter
.........................................................................................................................................................
Configuration
Position.........................................................................................................................................................
data configuration
Upload.........................................................................................................................................................
from module
Download
.........................................................................................................................................................
module
Programming
..........................................................................................................................................................
Examples
Making.........................................................................................................................................................
the Module ready
Reading
.........................................................................................................................................................
the error code and reset
Reading
.........................................................................................................................................................
the current position address
Inching/JOG
.........................................................................................................................................................
OPR .........................................................................................................................................................
Issuing.........................................................................................................................................................
the control with position data
Continuous
.........................................................................................................................................................
positioning with position data list
Positioning
.........................................................................................................................................................
Stop
Resume
.........................................................................................................................................................
Positioning
Speed .........................................................................................................................................................
Changing
Speed .........................................................................................................................................................
Control
Positioning
.........................................................................................................................................................
with M Code
Positioning
.........................................................................................................................................................
control without position data
Flash Write
.........................................................................................................................................................
Trouble Shooting
..........................................................................................................................................................
Error and
.........................................................................................................................................................
Warn
Error Code
.........................................................................................................................................................
Details
Warning
.........................................................................................................................................................
Code Details

Part VII BP Series(CM2, Block Type)

1471
1472
1473
1473
1474
1477
1480
1482
1487
1490
1491
1492
1494
1494
1494
1498
1498
1498
1498
1498
1498
1499
1500
1501
1502
1505
1505
1506
1506
1507
1507
1508
1509
1510
1510
1511
1511
1513
1513
1514
1515
1515
1515
1516
1517
1518
1519
1520
1520
1521
1523

1527

CIMON-PLC
1 Brochure ................................................................................................................................... 1527
2 Specification
................................................................................................................................... 1536
3 Functions................................................................................................................................... 1540
4 Product Line
................................................................................................................................... 1541
5 Data Link ................................................................................................................................... 1543
6 Dimensions
................................................................................................................................... 1545
7 BP Main Module
................................................................................................................................... 1546
External Wiring
..........................................................................................................................................................
Communication
..........................................................................................................................................................
Option Module Setting

1546
1550

8 BP I/O Module
................................................................................................................................... 1552
External Wiring
..........................................................................................................................................................

1552

9 Built-In High
...................................................................................................................................
Speed Counter
1554
Features ..........................................................................................................................................................
Setting Up ..........................................................................................................................................................
Coincidence
..........................................................................................................................................................
Output Flag and Overflow Bit
Exclusive Commands
..........................................................................................................................................................
for Built-In High Speed Counter

Part VIII PLC-S(CM3)

1554
1557
1559
1560

1562

1 PLCS Brochure
................................................................................................................................... 1563
2 PLCS Program
...................................................................................................................................
Setting
1566
Frimware Download
..........................................................................................................................................................
How to.........................................................................................................................................................
upgrade PLC-S CPU firmware
PLC-S .........................................................................................................................................................
Expansion module Firmware Upgrade

1566
1566
1571

3 PLCS Communication
................................................................................................................................... 1573
Outline
..........................................................................................................................................................
Ethernet ..........................................................................................................................................................
Serial(COM1
..........................................................................................................................................................
/ COM2)

1574
1574
1582

4 PLCS AD ...................................................................................................................................
Module : SP04EAO
1586
Features ..........................................................................................................................................................
Specification
..........................................................................................................................................................
of Analog input module
Dimension ..........................................................................................................................................................
Conversion..........................................................................................................................................................
Characteristic according to Analog input voltage
Conversion..........................................................................................................................................................
Characteristic according to Analog input current
Functions of
..........................................................................................................................................................
Analog Input Module
A/D Conversion
.........................................................................................................................................................
methods
Digital output
.........................................................................................................................................................
value setting
Precise.........................................................................................................................................................
value
Percentile
.........................................................................................................................................................
value
Internal I/O..........................................................................................................................................................
Table
Buffer Memory
..........................................................................................................................................................
Digital conversion
.........................................................................................................................................................
value
Precise.........................................................................................................................................................
value
Percentile
.........................................................................................................................................................
value
Setting.........................................................................................................................................................
Input signal range
Setting.........................................................................................................................................................
Raw Value digital output
Average
.........................................................................................................................................................
processing setting value
Maximum
.........................................................................................................................................................
alarm setting value
Minimum
.........................................................................................................................................................
alarm setting value
Maximum
.........................................................................................................................................................
alarm status

1586
1587
1589
1589
1590
1590
1590
1591
1591
1591
1591
1592
1593
1593
1593
1593
1594
1594
1594
1594
1594

Contents

Minimum
.........................................................................................................................................................
alarm status
Error Code
.........................................................................................................................................................
OS Version
.........................................................................................................................................................
Wiring
..........................................................................................................................................................

1595
1595
1595
1595

5 PLCS DA ...................................................................................................................................
Module : SP04EOAx
1596
Features ..........................................................................................................................................................
Specification
..........................................................................................................................................................
of Analog output module (CM3-SP04EOAI, CM3-SP04EOAV)
Dimension ..........................................................................................................................................................
Conversion..........................................................................................................................................................
Characteristic according to Analog output voltage
Conversion..........................................................................................................................................................
Characteristic according to Analog output current
Functions of
..........................................................................................................................................................
Analog Output Module
Internal I/O..........................................................................................................................................................
Table
Shared Memory
..........................................................................................................................................................
DA conversion
.........................................................................................................................................................
Enable/Disable setup
Digital output
.........................................................................................................................................................
value
Range .........................................................................................................................................................
of digital value.
Channel
.........................................................................................................................................................
Hold / Clear
Setup output
.........................................................................................................................................................
range for channel (DIP S/W setting needed)
Error Code
.........................................................................................................................................................
OS Version
.........................................................................................................................................................
Calibration..........................................................................................................................................................
setting (Voltage output / Current output)
Wiring
..........................................................................................................................................................

1596
1597
1598
1598
1599
1599
1599
1600
1601
1601
1601
1601
1601
1602
1602
1602
1605

6 PLCS AD ...................................................................................................................................
DA Module : SP04EAA
1606
Overview ..........................................................................................................................................................
Characteristics
.........................................................................................................................................................
Understanding
.........................................................................................................................................................
concept
Specifications
..........................................................................................................................................................
Specification
.........................................................................................................................................................
of AD/DA module
Dimension
.........................................................................................................................................................
Characteristic
..........................................................................................................................................................
of I/O conversion
I/O signal for
..........................................................................................................................................................
CPU
Buffer Memory
..........................................................................................................................................................
Digital conversion
.........................................................................................................................................................
value
Precise.........................................................................................................................................................
value
Percentile
.........................................................................................................................................................
value
Setting.........................................................................................................................................................
Input signal range
Setting.........................................................................................................................................................
Raw Value digital output
Average
.........................................................................................................................................................
processing setting value
Maximum
.........................................................................................................................................................
alarm setting value
Minimum
.........................................................................................................................................................
alarm setting value
Maximum
.........................................................................................................................................................
alarm status
Minimum
.........................................................................................................................................................
alarm status
Digital output
.........................................................................................................................................................
value
DA Out.........................................................................................................................................................
Enable/Disable
DA Output
.........................................................................................................................................................
type
DA Range
.........................................................................................................................................................
of digital value
DA Channel
.........................................................................................................................................................
Hold/Clear
AD / DA
.........................................................................................................................................................
Resolution setting
Error Code
.........................................................................................................................................................
OS Version
.........................................................................................................................................................
Calibration..........................................................................................................................................................
setting for A/D
Calibration..........................................................................................................................................................
setting for D/A
A/D D/A Module
..........................................................................................................................................................
setup in CICON

1606
1606
1607
1608
1608
1609
1609
1611
1612
1613
1613
1613
1613
1614
1614
1614
1615
1615
1615
1615
1615
1615
1616
1616
1616
1617
1617
1617
1620
1622

CIMON-PLC
AD Channel
.........................................................................................................................................................
Setting
DA Channel
.........................................................................................................................................................
Setting
A/D D/A
.........................................................................................................................................................
Module Status
Installation..........................................................................................................................................................
and Wiring
Installation
.........................................................................................................................................................
Wiring .........................................................................................................................................................

1622
1624
1625
1626
1626
1627

7 PLCS RTD...................................................................................................................................
Module : SP04ERO
1628
Analog input
..........................................................................................................................................................
4 channel RTD
Features
.........................................................................................................................................................
Understanding
.........................................................................................................................................................
concept
Specification
..........................................................................................................................................................
General.........................................................................................................................................................
Specification
Performance
.........................................................................................................................................................
Specification
Dimension
.........................................................................................................................................................
Characteristic
..........................................................................................................................................................
of Temperature conversion
Functions ..........................................................................................................................................................
I/O signal for
..........................................................................................................................................................
CPU
Input Signal
.........................................................................................................................................................
Output .........................................................................................................................................................
signal
Buffer Memory
..........................................................................................................................................................
RTD conversion
.........................................................................................................................................................
Enable/Disable setting(Buffer memory address "0")
Temperature
.........................................................................................................................................................
detection value (Buffer memory address "1"~"8")
Designate
.........................................................................................................................................................
RTD type (Buffer memory address "9")
Temperature
.........................................................................................................................................................
detection value, °F (Buffer memory address "11" ~ "18")
Information
.........................................................................................................................................................
for operation channel (Buffer memory address "19")
Digital conversion
.........................................................................................................................................................
value (Buffer memory address "21"~"28")
Digital output
.........................................................................................................................................................
setting (Buffer memory address "10,29")
Assigning
.........................................................................................................................................................
average process (Buffer memory address "30")
Error code
.........................................................................................................................................................
(Buffer memory address "31"~"38")
Maximum and Minimum Temperature input value (Buffer memory address
"41"~"48",
.........................................................................................................................................................
"51"~"58")
Maximum
.........................................................................................................................................................
and Minimum Scale setting data (buffer memory address "49")
Maximum
.........................................................................................................................................................
and Minimum Set error (buffer memory address "50")
CH1-CH4 average time / filter coefficient (buffer memory address
"59"~"62")
.........................................................................................................................................................
RTD module
..........................................................................................................................................................
setting in CICON
Channel
.........................................................................................................................................................
Setup
RTD Module
.........................................................................................................................................................
Status
Trouble shooting
..........................................................................................................................................................
RUN LED
.........................................................................................................................................................
is blinking every 0.3 second
RUN LED is blinking every 0.5 second and temperature value is not
changed
.........................................................................................................................................................
LED is blinking every 0.3 second temperature is stopped at around -250
(or -50.........................................................................................................................................................
)

1629
1629
1629
1630
1631
1632
1632
1634
1634
1635
1636
1637
1637
1638
1638
1638
1639
1639
1639
1639
1640
1640
1641
1641
1641
1642
1642
1643
1646
1647
1647
1648
1648

8 PLCS TC Module
...................................................................................................................................
: SP04ETO
1648
Overview ..........................................................................................................................................................
Features
.........................................................................................................................................................
Understanding
.........................................................................................................................................................
concept
Specification
..........................................................................................................................................................
General.........................................................................................................................................................
specification
Performance
.........................................................................................................................................................
Specification
Dimension
.........................................................................................................................................................
Characteristic
..........................................................................................................................................................
of thermocouple temperature conversion
Functions ..........................................................................................................................................................

1649
1649
1650
1651
1651
1652
1653
1655
1655

Contents

I/O signal for
..........................................................................................................................................................
CPU
Input Signal
.........................................................................................................................................................
Output .........................................................................................................................................................
signal
Buffer Memory
..........................................................................................................................................................
TC conversion
.........................................................................................................................................................
Enable/Disable setting(Buffer memory address "0")
Temperature
.........................................................................................................................................................
detection value (Buffer memory address "1"~"8")
TC type.........................................................................................................................................................
setting (Buffer memory address "9")
Temperature
.........................................................................................................................................................
detection value, °F (Buffer memory address "11" ~ "18")
Information
.........................................................................................................................................................
for operation channel (Buffer memory address "19")
Digital conversion
.........................................................................................................................................................
value (Buffer memory address "21"~"28")
Digital output
.........................................................................................................................................................
setting (Buffer memory address "10,29")
Assigning
.........................................................................................................................................................
average process (Buffer memory address "30")
Error code
.........................................................................................................................................................
(Buffer memory address "31~38")
Maximum
.........................................................................................................................................................
Temperature input value (Buffer memory address "41~48")
CH1-CH4
.........................................................................................................................................................
average time / filter coefficient (buffer memory address "49~52")
Max. Temp.
.........................................................................................................................................................
in changing (Buffer memory address "64~71")
TC module ..........................................................................................................................................................
setting in CICON
Channel
.........................................................................................................................................................
Setup
TC Module
.........................................................................................................................................................
Status
Trouble shooting
..........................................................................................................................................................
RUN LED
.........................................................................................................................................................
is blinking every 0.2 second.
RUN LED
.........................................................................................................................................................
is blinking every 0.2 second and Error code No.2 is displayed.
Thermistor..........................................................................................................................................................
Calibration
Installation..........................................................................................................................................................
and Wiring
Installation
.........................................................................................................................................................
Wiring .........................................................................................................................................................

1656
1657
1658
1658
1660
1660
1660
1661
1661
1661
1661
1662
1662
1663
1663
1664
1664
1665
1667
1668
1668
1669
1669
1671
1671
1672

9 PLCS AD ...................................................................................................................................
MUX Module : SP04EAM
1672
Summary ..........................................................................................................................................................
Performance
..........................................................................................................................................................
Specifications
General.........................................................................................................................................................
Standards
Performance
.........................................................................................................................................................
Specifications
Appearance
.........................................................................................................................................................
and Dimensions
Function ..........................................................................................................................................................
Input and Output
..........................................................................................................................................................
Flags for the CPU
Input Flag
.........................................................................................................................................................
Output .........................................................................................................................................................
Flag
Buffer Memory
..........................................................................................................................................................
Channel
.........................................................................................................................................................
enable / disable setting (Buffer memory address "0")
Relay Count
.........................................................................................................................................................
Value (Buffer memory address "1"~"8")
Auto/Manual
.........................................................................................................................................................
Mode Settings ( Buffer memory address "9")
Operation
.........................................................................................................................................................
Status (Buffer memory address "10")
Relay ON
.........................................................................................................................................................
Time Settings (Buffer memory address "11"~"14")
Error Code
.........................................................................................................................................................
(Buffer memory address "15")
MUX Module
..........................................................................................................................................................
Settings in CICON
Channel
.........................................................................................................................................................
Settings
Application..........................................................................................................................................................
Program and Example
Initialization
.........................................................................................................................................................
Installation..........................................................................................................................................................
and Wiring
Installation
.........................................................................................................................................................
Wiring .........................................................................................................................................................

1672
1673
1673
1674
1675
1675
1676
1677
1678
1679
1679
1680
1680
1680
1680
1680
1681
1681
1685
1686
1688
1688
1688

10 PLCS High-Speed
...................................................................................................................................
Counter
1691
General Specification
..........................................................................................................................................................
Counter / Preset
..........................................................................................................................................................
Input Specification

1692
1692

CIMON-PLC
I/O Signal Connection
..........................................................................................................................................................
Major Function
..........................................................................................................................................................
Counter.........................................................................................................................................................
Input mode
Counter.........................................................................................................................................................
Types
Compared
.........................................................................................................................................................
Output
Counter.........................................................................................................................................................
Latch
Revolution
.........................................................................................................................................................
/ Unit time
Preset .........................................................................................................................................................
Function
High-Speed..........................................................................................................................................................
Counter
Parameter
.........................................................................................................................................................
Memory
Parameter
.........................................................................................................................................................
Memory Setting
Parameter
.........................................................................................................................................................
Setting

1693
1694
1695
1696
1697
1698
1698
1698
1698
1699
1699
1700

11 PLCS Positioning
................................................................................................................................... 1703
General Specification
..........................................................................................................................................................
Input Signal..........................................................................................................................................................
Specification
Output Signal
..........................................................................................................................................................
Specification
Ex. Signal Wiring
..........................................................................................................................................................
Output Pulse
..........................................................................................................................................................
Level
Parameter ..........................................................................................................................................................
Pulse Output
.........................................................................................................................................................
Select
Bais Speed
.........................................................................................................................................................
Speed .........................................................................................................................................................
Limit
Acc/Dec
.........................................................................................................................................................
Time (1~4)
S/W Upper/Lower
.........................................................................................................................................................
Limit
Position.........................................................................................................................................................
address under speed control
Backlash
.........................................................................................................................................................
Compensation
External
.........................................................................................................................................................
Upper/Lower Limit Signal
Jog Speed
.........................................................................................................................................................
Limit
Jog Acc/Dec
.........................................................................................................................................................
Time
Inching.........................................................................................................................................................
Speed
Complete
.........................................................................................................................................................
Output Signal Duration.
OPR Method
.........................................................................................................................................................
OPR Direction
.........................................................................................................................................................
Origin Address
.........................................................................................................................................................
OPR High
.........................................................................................................................................................
Speed
OPR Low
.........................................................................................................................................................
Speed
OPR Acc/Dec
.........................................................................................................................................................
Time
DWELL.........................................................................................................................................................
Time
Operation Data
..........................................................................................................................................................
Axis Enable/Disable
.........................................................................................................................................................
Decelerate
.........................................................................................................................................................
Stop Req
Emergency
.........................................................................................................................................................
Stop Req
Forward/Backward
.........................................................................................................................................................
JOG/Inching ON/OFF
Positioning
.........................................................................................................................................................
Completed Flag
OPR Completed
.........................................................................................................................................................
Flag
Direction
.........................................................................................................................................................
Flag
Pulse Output
.........................................................................................................................................................
Disabled Flag
Error Flag
.........................................................................................................................................................
Position Data
..........................................................................................................................................................
Control.........................................................................................................................................................
Pattern
Interpolation
.........................................................................................................................................................
Acc/Dec
.........................................................................................................................................................
Time
Control.........................................................................................................................................................
Code (Command)
ABS
.........................................................................................................................................

1703
1704
1704
1705
1706
1706
1708
1709
1709
1709
1709
1710
1710
1710
1710
1710
1710
1710
1711
1713
1713
1713
1714
1714
1714
1714
1716
1716
1717
1717
1717
1717
1717
1717
1718
1718
1718
1720
1723
1723
1724

Contents

INC
......................................................................................................................................... 1724
FEED
......................................................................................................................................... 1724
FSC/RSC
......................................................................................................................................... 1725
NOP
......................................................................................................................................... 1725
JUMP
......................................................................................................................................... 1725
LOOP/LEND ......................................................................................................................................... 1725
POS
......................................................................................................................................... 1725
Positioning..........................................................................................................................................................
Instruction
1725
PSTRTn
.........................................................................................................................................................
(n=1 2)
1726
POSCTRL
......................................................................................................................................................... 1726
TEACHn
.........................................................................................................................................................
(n=1 2)
1728
Error Code.......................................................................................................................................................... 1729

12 PLCS Parameter
...................................................................................................................................
Settings
1730
Basic Settings
..........................................................................................................................................................
Latch Area ..........................................................................................................................................................
Setup
Interrupt ..........................................................................................................................................................
CPU Error Manipulation
..........................................................................................................................................................
Communication
..........................................................................................................................................................
Input Setting
..........................................................................................................................................................
Modbus ..........................................................................................................................................................
Ethernet Settings
..........................................................................................................................................................
PLC Link ..........................................................................................................................................................

1730
1731
1732
1734
1736
1739
1740
1741
1742

Part IX Remote I/O(Rio)

1751

Part X Training Kit

1755

1 PEK - 308................................................................................................................................... 1755
Summary ..........................................................................................................................................................
Training
.........................................................................................................................................................
Objectives
PEK - 308
.........................................................................................................................................................
Training Kit Features
Overview ..........................................................................................................................................................
Features and
..........................................................................................................................................................
Specifications
PLCS .........................................................................................................................................................
PLCS Specifications
.........................................................................................................................................
CPU : CM3-SP32MDTF
...................................................................................................................................
Digital Input Expansion
...................................................................................................................................
Module : CM3-SP32EDT
Analog I/O Expansion
...................................................................................................................................
Module : CM3-SP04EAA
RTD Thermometer
...................................................................................................................................
Module : CM3-SP04ERO
PLCS module.........................................................................................................................................
connection diagrams
SP32MDTV ...................................................................................................................................
SP32EDT(Input
...................................................................................................................................
Module Connection Diagram)
SP32EAA(Analog
...................................................................................................................................
I/O Module)
SP32ERO(RTD
...................................................................................................................................
Temperature Measuring Module)
Training Kit connection
.........................................................................................................................................
diagrams
I/O signal & buffer
.........................................................................................................................................
memory expansion module
SP32EAA ...................................................................................................................................
SP32ERO ...................................................................................................................................
Serial port(DSUB-9)
.........................................................................................................................................
network connection diagram
XPANEL
.........................................................................................................................................................
Xpanel Specifications
.........................................................................................................................................
XT04CB-D Spec.
...................................................................................................................................
Serial Port Connection
...................................................................................................................................
Diagram
Instructions on
...................................................................................................................................
Project Download

1755
1755
1755
1756
1757
1757
1757
1758
1759
1759
1761
1761
1762
1764
1764
1765
1766
1768
1768
1769
1772
1772
1772
1772
1773
1774

CIMON-PLC
Accessories
..........................................................................................................................................................
Getting Started
..........................................................................................................................................................
Basic Operating
.........................................................................................................................................................
Instructions
Main Page .........................................................................................................................................
I/O POINT Page
.........................................................................................................................................
Analog Page .........................................................................................................................................
Position Status
.........................................................................................................................................
Page
Positioning Page
.........................................................................................................................................
Creating
.........................................................................................................................................................
a Sample Project
Lamp On/Off .........................................................................................................................................
Control Exercise
Analog Input /.........................................................................................................................................
Output Exercise
Using RTD Thermometer
.........................................................................................................................................
Using Positioning
.........................................................................................................................................
Control
Appendix ..........................................................................................................................................................
Toggle .........................................................................................................................................................
Switch
ON-OFF
.........................................................................................................................................................
Control by Using Timers
Controlling
.........................................................................................................................................................
Garage Door
Measuring
.........................................................................................................................................................
the Length of Items by Using Limit SW and Encoder
Decoding
.........................................................................................................................................................
Counting
.........................................................................................................................................................
the Number of Items

1774
1774
1775
1775
1776
1776
1777
1778
1779
1780
1780
1782
1783
1788
1789
1789
1790
1790
1792
1793

2 PEK - 408................................................................................................................................... 1793
Structure ..........................................................................................................................................................
Module Specifications
..........................................................................................................................................................
Assigning Input/Output
..........................................................................................................................................................
Addresses
Internal Connection
..........................................................................................................................................................
Diagram
CM1-XD32C
.........................................................................................................................................................
CM1-YT32B
.........................................................................................................................................................
CM1-DA04V
.........................................................................................................................................................
/ AD08V
CM1-HS02B
.........................................................................................................................................................
Programming
..........................................................................................................................................................
and Operating
Operating
.........................................................................................................................................................
PLC
Writing.........................................................................................................................................................
Device Addresses
Example
.........................................................................................................................................................
of PLC Program
Linking.........................................................................................................................................................
with HMI S/W CIMON in RS232C Type
Exmaple of..........................................................................................................................................................
PLC Application
Toggling
.........................................................................................................................................................
Output Contact by Using Input Contact
Controlling
.........................................................................................................................................................
On-Off by Using a Timer
Controlling
.........................................................................................................................................................
Garage Shutter
Measuring
.........................................................................................................................................................
the Length of an Object by Using Limit S/W and Encoder
Decoding
.........................................................................................................................................................
Using a.........................................................................................................................................................
Cam Switch
Counting
.........................................................................................................................................................
the Number of Moving Objects
Keeping
.........................................................................................................................................................
the Counted Value
Network
.........................................................................................................................................................

Part XI FAQ

1795
1796
1801
1801
1802
1804
1806
1807
1807
1808
1808
1808
1810
1816
1817
1818
1818
1819
1820
1821
1823
1824
1825

1828

1 How can I program an ON-Off (digital) PID control loop with
CIMON PLC?
................................................................................................................................... 1828
2 How can I send the initialize commands to my dial-up MODEM
which is connected
...................................................................................................................................
with CM1-SC01A?
1830

Contents

3 Is there any protocol over serial network to share data between
two different PLC System? Especially for the PLC model that
does not support
...................................................................................................................................
the "PLC Link" such as BP16Mxx.
1832
4 How can I use the variable name in mnemonic (IL, instruction
list) program?
................................................................................................................................... 1836
5 How can I...................................................................................................................................
read(write) data from(to) special modules?
1837
6 Device Memories
...................................................................................................................................
of CIMON-PLC
1842
7 How can I...................................................................................................................................
create a serial protocol program?
1847
8 How can I make a sequence program to generate analog outputs
from my DA
...................................................................................................................................
module?
1860

Index

1863

Foreword

This is just another title page
placed between table of contents
and topics

Top Level Intro
This page is printed before a new
top-level chapter starts

Part

CIMON-PLC

Welcome to CIMON-PLC
Total Solution for Industrial Automation "CIMON - PLC" :

CIMON-PLC was developed with long-term experiences in automation fields. The product interfaces with
various sub-devices such as sensors. controllers, motors, and controls the process equipment. It plays the
role of 'brain' in various industrial sites.

CICON Update V4.03
This is Version of CICON provides following new functions.
· Supports "MPnA" and "XPnX" CPU. Click [Here] for more information
· Added project compatible feature and automatic connection feature between XP <-> MP
· Added the firmware download function for MP series CPU
· New online status monitoring window for an easy monitoring of the current operations.(Error
status / Run, Stop status / Forced IO status)
· Supports IO forced input/output function in the LD editor
· When the Rung info in the scan program is double clicked, it prompts users to type in
Comments
· Online editing possible during a CPU minor breakdown
· Added the ability to display the variables and the descriptions at the same time in the editor
· When CPU Type is changed, link parameters don’t get deleted
· Improved the mouse input function of LD editor

For details see "Click"

Contents :
· Update News
· Quick Reference Manual
· CICON - PLC Loader Program
· PLC Common
· XP / CP Series(CM1)
· BP Series(CM2, Block Type)
· PLC-S(CM3)
· Remote I/O(Rio)

Welcome to CIMON-PLC

· CIMON - Training Kit
· FAQ

Top Level Intro
This page is printed before a new
top-level chapter starts

Part

Update News

Update News
This document is issued to notify the new release of CICON.
This version of CICON provides following new functions.
· Supports "MPnA" and "XPnX" CPU. Click [Here] for more information
· Added project compatible feature and automatic connection feature between XP <-> MP
· Added the firmware download function for MP series CPU
· New online status monitoring window for an easy monitoring of the current operations.(Error status /
Run, Stop status / Forced IO status)
· Supports IO forced input/output function in the LD editor
· When the Rung info in the scan program is double clicked, it prompts users to type in Comments
· Online editing possible during a CPU minor breakdown
· Added the ability to display the variables and the descriptions at the same time in the editor
· When CPU Type is changed, link parameters don’t get deleted
· Improved the mouse input function of LD editor

Added project compatible feature and automatic connection feature between
XP <-> MP
Project compatible feature and automatic connection feature is now supported between XP series CPU and
MP series CPU
Existing XP CPU projects can be used for MP CPU.
When trying to connect to online without changing the CPU type, CICON detects if it’s the type of CPU that
is compatible and rebuilds the project automatically so that the download proceeds immediately.

MP CPU firmware download function is added (CICON Build Ver.4.3 or higher)
Users can easily upgrade the firmware of the CPU and expansion modules (XPnA / CP / BP not supported)
Firmware can be downloaded at [Online] -> [Firmware Upgrade]
For detailed information, please refer to [Here].

Online Status Monitoring Window (Error status / Run, Stop status / Forced IO
status)
All new online status monitoring windows is added.

CIMON-PLC

Online status can be monitored while in online to check the error status, CPU mode, and forced IO status
instantly.

Button #1 – Online Status: This button shows the current online status. When it’s in a normal status, the
green light is turned on and when it’s in an error state, the red light is turned on with a corresponding error
code.
When there is an error, click on the button to see a detailed description of the error.
Button #2 – Mode Status: Run / Stop / Pause mode. During Run status, the yellow light is turned on.
Button #3 – Forced IO Status: If forced IO feature is enabled, the button turns to blue with the enabled
device names.
Please go to [Tool] -> [CICON Options] and select [Hide online status window] and then restart CICON to
turn this feature (Online status monitoring window) off.

Forced IO configuration function in LD editor is added
Forced IO function is used to select input device "X" and output device "Y" and force them to set or reset.
Regardless of the sequence process, the forced IO’s keep their set values.

Update News

In order to use Forced IO function, “Forced Input” and “Forced Output” must be set to “Enable” from
[Debug] -> [Enable/Disable Forced I/O]

Device settings details can be found at [Debug] -> [Forced Input/Output Setup]
Details of the value that you set in the editor appears on this window and it is possible to change the settings
on here.

CIMON-PLC

Addition of the ability to simultaneously display the variables and descriptions
in the LD editor
The ability to simultaneously display the descriptions and the variables has been added.
When selecting "Variable/Comment" from "View" tool, the comments and the variables get displayed at the
same time as seen below.

Update News

When CPU Type is changed, link parameters don’t get deleted
When “CPU Type” is modified from [File] -> [Project Properties] as in the window below, the parameter file
gets initialized.
In this case, the "PLC Link" parameters will not be initialized.

Improved LD editor mouse input capabilities
When editing scan programs in the LD editor using the mouse, it maintains the latest symbol (input tool) that
was used from the tool bar so that users can create the program faster without the need to click the symbol
(input tool) on the tool bar again.
In order to use this feature please deselect "Return arrow after symbol" from [Tool] -> [CICON Options] ->
[LD Editor]

CIMON-PLC

When the input tool is selected from the tool bar of the LD editor, the mouse cursor will change to the
selected tool and the tool will remain selected even after the input is completed.
Press ESC key or click on the same tool again to dismiss the selected tool.

2.1

Update History
Ver 403
·

Ver 402
· CDMA Module NTWE-310 model added.
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

Update News

· PLCS TC module – Max. Temp. in changing function is added.
· Position Setup function is added.
· Module Input/Output points and IO module Icons are added.
· MP1A / MP2A / MP3A CPU Types added.

Ver 401
· CICON version 4.01 supports PID control for all types of CIMON PLC.

Ver 400
· SFC Program (Ver. 4.00)
· Device memory Export and Import
· “Stop deleting empty rungs” added
· Variable selection dialog
· Module Config Export for Simulator
· Detailed device information of double word in Cross Ref. added
· Full screen(Alt+Enter) and Variable table(F11)
· LD editor shows Rung number
· CICON Version pop up message
· All menus does not activate while compiling.
· “Don’t insert END” option added
· Maximum tempt. Setting in PLC-S TC module added.
· Variable indication when C device is used as word.
· “Prohibit Uploading sequence program” in PLC parameter
· FROM / TO window added
· Firmware upgrade mode
· Program ID(PID) shows at scan program and SFC program

Ver 310
· PLC-S AD MUX Module Added.
· PLC-S Ethernet Module Added.
· PLC-S Serial Module Added.
· PLC-S RS232 2CH. Module Added.
· Variable Export / Import function Added.
· IO Input module Filter Setting Program Added
· PID Special Program: PID_2 function Added.
· Incomplete Rung indication (Red and Green) in LD editor Added.
· Rung Number Added.
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

CIMON-PLC

· Device Setting of Cross Reference is modified.
· Ch1 (RS232) and Ch2 (RS422/485) at PLC Parameter of PLC-S default setup modified.
· Segment Setup function in Protocol Program Added.

Ver 309
· CIMON Download Utility added
· DWORD viewer function in memory monitor added
· PLC-S training kit manual added.

Ver 308
· Check function for PLCS Firmware version added.
· Check function for PLCS MAC Address added.
· XP Style Setting added.
· New Contact Input Dialog added.
· Load cell setting program range.

Ver 307
· USB Driver for Windows7 64Bit added.

Ver 306
· Add PLC simulator.

Ver 305
· [Search]->[Find All] : [Find Next]function is added.
· Load Cell : Avr. Time / Weighing Mode(Not used) / Read added.
· PLC-S TC : [Internal Temp] is added.
· [Position Status] : Axis and Unit Setting functions are added.
· PLCS : Internal Comm. manual added.
· [Tool]->[CICON Options]->[LD Editor] : Font function is added.

Ver 304
· PLC-S D/A Module Setup modified. (Calibration function is added)
· PLC-S A/D D/A Module Setup modified. (D/A Calibration function is added)
· PLC-S Positioning program : “Inching Movement” is added
· PLC-S HSC manual is added.

Update News

· PLC-S Positioning manual is added.
· Special Card Init. Program is added.

Ver 303
· Auto delete function for empty line.
· U/I size of [Find and Replace] is modified.
· Prohibiting function for Upload sequence (PLC parameter)
· Calibration function for A/D D/A of PLCS A/D module.
· Auto USB Driver installation and upgrade function.(OS : XP)
· PLCS : PLC parameter "Pulse Catch Input" modified.(only available at X02, X03, X06)
· PLCS : PLC parameter "Ethernet" set-up modified. (DHCP)
· More than 2 special programs cannot be added in project.(when project is compiled, warning pop up)
· PLCS Positioning : device registration is added in Positioning data Setup.

Ver 302
· Test Version

Ver 301
· HSC Program for plcS
· Positioning Program for plcS
· Program for CM2-A
· Program for CM2-B
· Variable Table Upgrade

2.1.1

Ver403

This document is issued to notify the new release of CICON.
This version of CICON provides following new functions.
· Supports "MPnA" and "XPnX" CPU. Click [Here] for more information
· Added project compatible feature and automatic connection feature between XP <-> MP
· Added the firmware download function for MP series CPU
· New online status monitoring window for an easy monitoring of the current operations.(Error status /
Run, Stop status / Forced IO status)
· Supports IO forced input/output function in the LD editor
· When the Rung info in the scan program is double clicked, it prompts users to type in Comments
· Online editing possible during a CPU minor breakdown
· Added the ability to display the variables and the descriptions at the same time in the editor

CIMON-PLC

· When CPU Type is changed, link parameters don’t get deleted
· Improved the mouse input function of LD editor

Online Status Monitoring Window (Error status / Run, Stop status / Forced IO
status)
All new online status monitoring windows is added.
Online status can be monitored while in online to check the error status, CPU mode, and forced IO status
instantly.

Update News

Please go to [Tool] -> [CICON Options] and select [Hide online status window] and then restart CICON to
turn this feature (Online status monitoring window) off.

In order to use Forced IO function, “Forced Input” and “Forced Output” must be set to “Enable” from
[Debug] -> [Enable/Disable Forced I/O]

CIMON-PLC

Update News

CIMON-PLC

[LD Editor]

2.1.2

Ver402

This document is issued to notify the new release of CICON.
This version of CICON provides following new functions.
· CDMA Module NTWE-310 model added.
· PLCS TC module – Max. Temp. in changing function is added.
· Position Setup function is added.
· Module Input/Output points and I/O module Icons are added.
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

Update News

· MP1A / MP2A / MP3A CPU Types added.

CDMA Module NTWE-310 model added.
NTWE-310 modem is added. Refer to [Here] for details.

PLCS TC module – Max. Temp. in changing function is added.
Clcik Max. Temp. in changing or write “0” not to use this function

CIMON-PLC

Position Setup function is added.
If user writes wrong value, warning message appears.
Click [Tool] -> [Position Module] -> [Position Setup]

Write the value at "Basic Parameter" as following.
Ex) ACC/DEC Time 1(Range: 0 - 65535): Write 65565

Update News

After parameter setup, click [Tool] -> [Position Module] -> [Save Data]

Since the value(65565) of ACC/DEC Time 1 is out of range, warning message pops up.
If you change this value between 0~65535, it will be saved.

CIMON-PLC

Module Input/Output points and IO module Icons are added.
IO points indicators "X" / "Y" / "XY" are added to Module information.
"X" : Input module "Y" : Output module

"XY" : Input and output module

*IO module Icon is added.

MP1A / MP2A / MP3A CPU Types are added.

Update News

2.1.3

Ver401

This version of CICON provides following new functions.
· CICON version 4.01 supports PID control for all types of CIMON PLC.

PID2
CICON version 4.01 supports PID control for all types of CIMON PLC.
However New PID2 functions are available with below PLC type and firmware.

* ”Self Learning” function does not support CP3U
and CP4U CPU.
* MP Series is under development.
If CICON Ver.4.01 executes “online edit” with the PLC which has old firmware version(that does not support
PID2), “Self Learning” and “Kp x 100” functions cannot be supported.

2.1.4

Ver400

This version of CICON provides following new functions.
· SFC Program (Ver. 4.00)
· Device memory Export and Import
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

CIMON-PLC

· “Stop deleting empty rungs” added
· Variable selection dialog
· Module Config Export for Simulator
· Detailed device information of double word in Cross Ref. added
· Full screen(Alt+Enter) and Variable table(F11)
· LD editor shows Rung number
· CICON Version pop up message
· All menus does not activate while compiling.
· “Don’t insert END” option added
· Maximum tempt. Setting in PLC-S TC module added.
· Variable indication when C device is used as word.
· “Prohibit Uploading sequence program” in PLC parameter
· FROM / TO window added
· Firmware upgrade mode
· Program ID(PID) shows at scan program and SFC program

SFC Program
SFC program added in Version 4.00
Click [here] to see more details.

Device memory Export and Import
You can access PLC and upload/download device memory.

Update News

Click [here] to see more details.

Stop deleting empty rungs
LD editor remove all empty rungs when you save the program.
If you do not want to use this function, click the ‘Stop deleting empty rungs’

Variable selection dialog
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

CIMON-PLC

You can choose address with variable.

In order to use this function, click ‘Var. Selection Dialog’at CICON Options.

Module Config Export for Simulator
It is used to save module configuration and use it as simulator.
Once you save module configuration, you can open it at simulator to use it.

Update News

Click [Online] -> [Module Config Export] after connecting PLC online.

Write the file name and Save it.
Click [File] -> [Module Config. Load] to open saved ‘Module config file’

Detailed device information of double word in Cross Ref. added
If you use double words instruction, Cross reference shows detailed device which is related with word.
In case of “DINC D12”, it shows ‘D12’and ‘D13’
* Instructions for block and more than double devices are exception.

CIMON-PLC

Full screen(Alt+Enter) and Variable table(F11)
In order to see only scan program, Full screen feature is added.
Press “Alt + Enter” to see scan program with full screen.
If press ‘Alt + Enter” one more time, screen size comes back to small size.
* In order to disappear Variable table, press “F11”.

Update News

LD editor shows Rung number
LD Editor shows rung number.
Its function helps you to find out rung location.
* The form of rung number is like “No.xxx” as below picture. (Rung and Row is totally different meaning.)
* If there is description, it is also considered to belong to rung number.

CIMON-PLC

CICON Version pop up message (in case CICON is connected internet)
When you open CICON, CICON check the OS version if CICON is connected to internet.
If your OS version is not latest version, popup message appears as below.

OK : Close
Website : go to KDT website to download new CICON version.
Hide : Do not show this message again.
* If you do not want to see this message again, click [Tool] -> [CICON Options] and select ‘Do not show
CICON version popup message’

Update News

All menus does not activate while compiling.
All menus are not activated while compiling.
You can use menus after compiling is completed.

Do not insert END” option added

CIMON-PLC

“END” and “PEND” are automatically inserted in scan program.

If you want to use this function, click [Tool] ->[CICON Options] -> [LD Editor] and select “Do not insert END”

Maximum tempt. Setting in PLC-S TC module added.
“Maximum Temp. in changing” function in TC module Setup is added.
This function works with CM3-SP04ETO (TC module in range of PLCS)
TC Module Setup

Update News

Channel Setup

Variable indication when C device is used as word.
You can make comment and show it in scan program when C device is used word type.

CIMON-PLC

“Prohibit Uploading sequence program” in PLC parameter
It is used to prohibit uploading sequence program from PLC to PC.
If you select “Prohibit upload Sequence Program”, warning message pops up as below.

Update News

FROM / TO window added
It is used to set up “FROM” and “TO” instruction in scan program.
When you press F10 or write “FROM” or “TO” instruction, there is “Input Helper” as below picture.
If you click ‘Input Helper’, ‘Instruction’window pops up.
‘Instruction’setting window helps you to make easy setting.

CIMON-PLC

‘Input Helper’is activated with only ‘FROM’and ‘TO’ instruction.

* "FROM" instruction window

* "TO" instruction window

Update News

Program ID(PID) shows at scan program and SFC program
Program ID number is appeared in front of program name.

2.1.5

Ver310

This version of CICON provides following new functions.
· PLC-S AD MUX Module Added.
· PLC-S Ethernet Module Added.
· PLC-S Serial Module Added.
· PLC-S RS232 2CH. Module Added.
· Variable Export / Import function Added.
· IO Input module Filter Setting Program Added
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

CIMON-PLC

· PID Special Program: PID_2 function Added. Refer to [Here]
· Incomplete Rung indication (Red and Green) in LD editor Added.
· Rung Number Added.
· Device Setting of Cross Reference is modified.
· Ch1 (RS232) and Ch2 (RS422/485) at PLC Parameter of PLC-S default setup modified.
· Segment Setup function in Protocol Program Added.

PLC-S AD MUX Module Added
PLC-S AD MUX Module is newly added. Refer to [Here]

PLC-S Ethernet Module Added
PLC-S Ethernet Module is added. Refer to [Here].
Setup method is the same as that of XP / CP Type Ethernet Module.
-> The Setup Ethernet Module is available at Special Card Initialize Program and Simulator.

Update News

PLC-S Serial Module Added
PLC-S Serial Module is added. Refer to [Here].
Setup method is the same as that of XP / CP Type Serial Module.
-> The RS232C/433 Module Setup is available at Special Card Initialize Program and Simulator.

CIMON-PLC

PLC-S RS232 2CH. Module Added
PLC-S RS232C 2CH. Module is added. Refer to [Here].
Setup method is almost the same as that of XP / CP Type Serial Module. Only difference is Communication
Setup in CH.2 is changed to Null Modem and Flow Control.
-> The RS232C 2CH. Setup is available at Special Card Initialize Program and Simulator.

Update News

Variable Export / Import function Added
Export and save Variable data which is shown on project as file.
Click [Save] at Variable table before execute.

CIMON-PLC

Execute [Variable Import] in order to open and apply variable table which is saved before to project.

IO Input module Filter Setting Program Added
IO Input module Filter Setting Program is added.
Setting method is the same with [Input Setting] of PLCS CPU.

Update News

Set up Slot number and Card Type as following.

Incomplete Rung indication (Red and Green) in LD editor Added
If there are incomplete rungs, it becomes green in LD Editor as below.
*In order to arrange rungs without incomplete rungs, click [Edit] -> [Program Line-Up] or remove all
incomplete rungs.
Red: Complete Rung.
Green: Incomplete Rung.

CIMON-PLC

Rung Number Added
Rung number is shown at LD Editor as below.

Device Setting of Cross Reference is modified

Update News

Ch1 (RS232) and Ch2 (RS422/485) at PLC Parameter of PLC-S default setup
modified
The initial values of Channel 1 (RS232C) and Channel 2 (RS422/485) are changed to have the same
settings.

CIMON-PLC

Segment Setup function in Protocol Program Added
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

Update News

There is the Segment Setup in Protocol Program.
1. Segment Type : "Ignore" or "Memory Link"
2. Length(Byte) : 255

2.1.6

Ver309
This version of CICON provides following new functions.
· Download Utility added.
· DWORD viewer function in memory monitor added.
· PLC-S training kit manual added. Refer to [Here]

Download Utility added.

CIMON-PLC

Download Utility added.
Download Utility is a tool for easy downloading of a project file created in CICON to PLC.
Project file, which is created in CICON by using "Export Project", can be used in PLC downloader
CICON to download project files to PLC.
For detailed information, please refer to the manual.Refer to [Here]

Memory monitor - DWORD Viewer function added
DWORD Viewer for Word devide(D Dev/ R Dev/ T Cnt / T Set / C Cnt / C Set / Z Dev) has been added.

Update News

2.1.7

Ver308
This version of CICON provides following new functions.
· Check function for PLCS Firmware version added.
· Check function for PLCS MAC Address added.
· XP Style Setting added.
· New Contact Input Dialog added.
· Load cell setting program range.

Check function for PLCS Firmware version added.
You can check firmware version of PLCS in CICON.
In order to check PLCS firmware version, connect PLCS to CICON and click [Online] -> [PLC Status]
If current OS version is not the latest version, you can check the OS version in “PLCS Firmware Version”.

CIMON-PLC

If current OS version is not the latest version, you can upgrade it at [Online] -> [Firmware Upgrade]

Update News

The new firmware file is under Firmware folder in CICON folder.
(ex. C:/Program Files/CICON/Firmware)

Check function for PLCS MAC Address added.
In order to check MAC Address, Connect PLCS to CICON with Online mode and click [Online] -> [PLC
Status]

CIMON-PLC

XP Style Setting(Restart) added.
You can change CICON style at [Tool] -> [CICON Options].
After checking “XP Style Setting”, restart CICON.

Update News

New Contact Input Dialog function added.
Instead writing contact address in scan program, you can choose Device and Address in “Contact Input
Dialog box”.
Click [Tool] -> [CICON Options] -> [LD Editor] and check “New Contact Input Dialog”

CIMON-PLC

Now, you can see “Contact Dialog box” as below.

Current “Contact box” is as below.

Update News

Add the LoadCell setting program range
Input range of Load cell setting program added.

2.1.8

CIMON-PLC

Ver307
This version of CICON provides following new functions.
· USB Driver for Windows7 64Bit added.

USB Driver for Windows7 64Bit added.
The user who has Windows7 64Bit now can connect PLC with USB cable.
64Bit driver is located at [CICON] -> [Usb_Driver] -> [OS_64Bit] Install USB Driver.
Select "USB Port" at CICON -> [Tool] -> [Connection Setup]. Refer to [Here]

2.1.9

Ver306
This version of CICON provides following new functions.
· Add PLC simulator.

Add PLC simulator
User can monitor and control ladder program through PLC Simulator.
Click [Here] to see more detailed information.

Update News

2.1.10 Ver305
This version of CICON provides following new functions.
· [Search]->[Find All] : [Find Next]function is added.
· Load Cell : Avr. Time / Weighing Mode(Not used) / Read added.
· PLC-S TC : [Internal Temp] is added.
· [Position Status] : Axis and Unit Setting functions are added.
· PLCS : Internal Comm. manual added.
· [Tool]->[CICON Options]->[LD Editor] : Font function is added.

[Search]->[Find All] : [Find Next]function is added.
If you click [Find Next], it keep searching all scan programs.

CIMON-PLC

Update News

Load Cell : Avr. Time / Weighing Mode(Not used) / Read added.
Average Time function is added.
You can read value of module which is online connected through [Read].

CIMON-PLC

You can select ‘Not Use’ in [Weighing Mode]

PLC-S TC : [Internal Temp] is added.

Update News

You can set up Internal Temperature from -10 to 65 and up to first decimal.

[Position Status] : Axis and Unit Setting functions are added.
You can set up Current Axis and measurement in [Position Status].

CIMON-PLC

Update News

[Tool]->[CICON Options]->[LD Editor] : Font function is added.

2.1.11 Ver304
This version of CICON provides following new functions.
· PLC-S D/A Module Setup modified. (Calibration function is added)

CIMON-PLC

· PLC-S A/D D/A Module Setup modified. (D/A Calibration function is added)
· PLC-S Positioning program : “Inching Movement” is added
· PLC-S HSC manual is added.
· PLC-S Positioning manual is added.
· Special Card Init. Program is added.

PLC-S D/A Module Setup modified. (Calibration function is added)
Calibration function is added. Please click here to go to manual.

PLC-S Positioning program : “Inching Movement” is added
“Inching Movement” is added

Update News

Special Card Init. Program is added.
Please click here to go to manual.

CIMON-PLC

Special Card Init. Program...

Special Card Setting...

Update News

D/A Module Setup Dialog...

I/L Convert

CIMON-PLC

2.1.12 Ver303
This version of CICON provides following new functions.
· Auto delete function for empty line.
· U/I size of [Find and Replace] is modified.
· Prohibiting function for Upload sequence (PLC parameter)
· Calibration function for A/D D/A of PLCS A/D module.
· Auto USB Driver installation and upgrade function.(OS : XP)
· PLCS : PLC parameter "Pulse Catch Input" modified.(only available at X02, X03, X06)
· PLCS : PLC parameter "Ethernet" set-up modified. (DHCP)
· More than 2 special programs cannot be added in project.(when project is compiled, warning pop
up)
· PLCS Positioning : device registration is added in Positioning data Setup.

Auto delete function for empty line
You can remove all incomplete rungs on your scan program.

when you click "Save" with incomplete rung, the below message pops up.

[Edit] -> [Program Line-Up] it will remove all incomplete rungs.
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

Update News

After removing incomplete rungs, you can check amount of deleted rungs at the message box.
You can restore deleted rungs with "Undo"

* [Program Line-Up] will not work properly in below cases.

CIMON-PLC

U/I size of [Find and Replace] is modified.
Screen of [Find and Replace] becomes smaller for user’s convenient.
In case that mouse point is on scan program and indicates contact, [Find and Replace]
indicates device on "Find what"

When you click ">>", you can see "Option"
click "<<" to close "Option"
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

Update News

*No need to write again after changing tab

100

CIMON-PLC

Prohibiting function for Upload sequence (PLC parameter)
Protect program uploading which is downloaded from CICON to PLC.
When you click "Prohibit upload sequence program", you cannot upload program again no matter
password.
In order to use "Prohibit upload sequence program", please upgrade CICON version.
1. Install CICON Ver.3.03
2. Upgrade firmware

Set up "Prohibit upload sequence program" on [PLC Parameter] as below.
Basic set-up is OFF.

Update News

101

After checking "Prohibit upload Sequence Program", click [Online] -> [Download (PC->PLC)]

There are only two option "OK" and "Cancel".

After download, even if you click [Online] -> [Upload(PLC->PC)], you can see below message.

we
Error message pops up.

Calibration function for A/D D/A of PLCS A/D module

102

CIMON-PLC

Modification function (minimum / maximum) for PLCS A/D module and PLCS A/D D/A module is
added.
Click "A/D Calibrate"

Select channel to be modified.
*You can select only one channel at once

After selecting Channel, supply voltage(current) to input terminal as message.
Supplied Voltage or Current should be minimized.
After supplying Voltage or Current, click "Next" for calibration.

Update News

After finishing calibration, supply maximum Voltage (Current)

103

104

CIMON-PLC

After finishing calibration, next Channel will be done by the same way.
OK" to save the result and close calibration
"Delete" to delete calibration result
"Cancel" to close calibration.

"Delete"

After "Delete", message pops up.

You can see status of Calibration in message box.

Update News

105

Auto USB Driver installation and upgrade function (OS : XP)
CICON USB Driver is installed automatically with MS Windows XP.
*Vista and Windows7 will be done soon.

After running CICON Ver.3.03(Ver.3.04) and connecting USB Driver, below message pops up.
It only pops up in case CICON version is not new. (it will not appear again after installation.)
*New version of USB Driver is [VER.201008].

Dialog Message is...
"USB drivers are not the latest version."
"delete the existing driver and you want to install the latest driver?"
Click "Continue(Y)"
Warning message pops up for compatibility with Window XP.
Click "Continue" to install Driver
Click "Stop" to stop installation.

When installation is finished, OK message pops up at message box.

When "Stop", below message pops up.

PLCS : PLC parameter "Pulse Catch Input" modified (only available at X02,
X03, X06)
As CPU is PLCS, [PLC parameter] -> [Input Setting] ->"Pulse Catch Input" is modified as below.
You can only select X02 / X03 / X06.

106

CIMON-PLC

PLCS : PLC parameter "Ethernet" set-up modified. (DHCP)
As CPU is PLCS, [PLC parameter] -> [Ethernet] is modified as below.
It separates into IP Setting and DDNS Setting.
"Use DHCP" checked : IP Setting is not available / DDNS Setting is available.
"Use DHCP" not checked : IP Setting is available / DDNS Setting is not available.

Update News

*Initial setting value
"Use DHCP" : not checked
"DDNS 1Port" / "DDNS 2Port" : 20266
"DDNS Retry" : 60 Sec.

107

108

CIMON-PLC

More than 2 special programs cannot be added in project. (when project is
compiled, warning pop up)
Those special programs in project cannot be added more than 2 programs.
Check special programs as below
*If more than 2 special programs are added, compiled warning message pops up

· Initialization Program (Cold)
· Initialization Program (Hot)
· Pid Program
· HSC Program for plcS
· Positioning Program for plcS
· Comm. / I/O Program for CM2-BP32A
· Comm. / I/O Program for CM2-BP32B
· Special card initialization Program is under development

PLCS Positioning : device registration is added in Positioning data Setup

Update News

When you set up Dwell Time / Comm. Speed / Position Address, you can add device.
Device type : [D] / [M] / [L] / [K]
*Only Decuple can be written at [M] / [L] / [K] except [D]. if not, warning pops up.

2.1.13 Ver302
Test Version...

2.1.14 Ver301
This version of CICON provides following new functions.

· HSC Program for plcS
· Positioning Program for plcS
· Program for CM2-A Type
· Program for CM2-B Type
· Variable Table Upgrade

109

Top Level Intro
This page is printed before a new
top-level chapter starts

Part

III

Quick Reference Manual

111

Quick Reference Manual
See :
Manual
CIMON-PLC CPU

Module
XP1A/R, XP2A, XP3A, CP3A/B/P, CP4A/B/C/D

CIMON-PLC CPU(MPnA / XPnX)
CIMON-PLC Power

SPC, SPA, SP2B, SPR

CIMON-PLC Base

BS03A, BS04A, BS05A, BS08A, BS10A, BS12A,
BS05R, BS08R, BS10R

CIMON-PLC RS232C/422/485 module

SC01A/B, SC02A, SC01DNP

CIMON-PLC Ethernet module

EC01A, EC10A/B, EC01DNP, EC04DNP

CIMON-PLC BACnet module

BN01A

CIMON-PLC DeviceNet module

DN01A

CIMON-PLC Profibus DP module

PD01A

CIMON-PLC Data Logger module

LG32A

CIMON-PLC Digital Input module

XD16A, XD16B, XD32B, XD32C, XD64C, XA08A,
XA08B

CIMON-PLC Digital Output module

YR16A, YT16A, YT32A, YT64A, YS08A, YT16B,
YT32B

CIMON-PLC Digital I/O module

XY16DR

CIMON-PLC AD Converters module

AD04VI, AD08V, AD08I, AD16I, AD16V

CIMON-PLC DA Converters module

DA08I, DA04I, DA08V, DA04V, DA16I, DA16V,
DA04VA, DA08VA, DA16VA

CIMON-PLC High Speed Converters

HS02B, HS02D

CIMON-PLC Positioning module

PS02A

CIMON-PLC Loadcell module

WG02A, WG04A

CIMON-PLC TC04A Converters module

TC04A

CIMON-PLC RTD Converters module

RD04A/B, RD08A/B

CIMON-PLC Thermistor module

TH08A

CIMON-PLC Expansion module

EP01A, EP02A, EP03A

CIMON-PLC Redundant System

XP1R(CPU), RM01A, PC01A

CIMON-PLC Remote I/O Series

XD16A*. XD32A*, YT16A*, YT32A*, YR16A*,
XY32DT*

CIMON-BP Series 32Main Block

BP32MDR*-*, BP32MDT*-*, BP32MDC*-*

CIMON-BP Series 16Main Block

BP16MDTA-*, BP16MDCA-*, BP16MRA-*,
BP16MDTD-*, BP16MDCD-*, BP16MDRD-*

112

CIMON-PLC

CIMON-BP 32 I/O Expansion Blocks module

BP32EDT, BP32EDC, BP32EDR

CIMON-BP 16 I/O Expansion Blocks module

BP16EDT, BP16EDC, BP16EDR, BP16EDO,
BP16EOR, BP16EOT, BP16EOC

CM2-BP04EAA CM2-BP04EAA (Analog Expansion

BP04EAA

Blocks - Input 2Ch / Output 2Ch)
CM2-BP04EAOAnalog Expansion Blocks - AD V/I

BP04EAO

4Ch Input)
CM2-BP04EOA (Analog Expansion Blocks - DA V/I

BP04EOA

4Ch Output)
CM2-BP04ERO CM2-BP04ERO (Analog Expansion

BP04ERO

Blocks)
CM2-BP04ETO CM2-BP04ETO (Analog Expansion

BP04ETO

Blocks)
CM2-BP32A***

BP32 A Type

CM2-BP32B***

BP32 B Type

CM3-PLCS CPU

3.1

1.CM3-SP32MDT / V / E / F / SD
2.CM3-SP16MDR / V / E / F

CIMON-PLC CPU
Modules :
· CM1-XP1A/2A/3A
· CM1-CP3A/B/P/U
· CM1-CP4A/B/C/D/U
Contents :
· GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
· XP CPU SPECIFICATIONS
· CP CPU SPECIFICATIONS
· DEVICE & ADDRESS
· ASSIGNING I/O NUMBERS
· MODE CHANGE
· FEATURES
· CM1-CP4C RS-232 INTERFACE
· CM1-CP4D RS-422/485 INTERFACE
· LOADER CABLE WIRING
· EXTERNAL VIEW(TOP)
· DIMENSIONS
· SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Quick Reference Manual

CIMON-PLC CPU Module For details see "Click" .

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Item

Specification

Op.Temp.

Reference

Operating Temperature -10 ~65

St.Temp

Storage Temperature

-25 ~

Op.Hum

Operating Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

St.Hum

Storage Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency
10=
57=

Acceleration

f=
57Hz

Amplitude

Sweep

0.075mm

f=
150Hz

9.8m/s2{1G}

Vibration
In case of continuous vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

10=
f
=
57Hz
57=
f=
150Hz
Shock

Noise

10 times
in X,Y,Z

Amplitude

IEC61131-2

0.035mm
4.8m/s2{0.5G}

Max. shock Acc. :147 m/s{15G}
Time :11㎳
Pulse wave: Half sine wave pulse(3 times in X,Y,Z)
Square wave
impulse noise

2,000 V

Electro-static
discharge

Voltage :4kV (Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magneti
c field

27 ~500 MHz,10 V/m

Fast transient
bust noise

Power
Module

Digital I/O
(24V or more)

2kV

1kV

Environ..

No corrosive gas and no dust

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

2 or less

IEC61131-2

KDT Standard
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-2
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-3

Digital I/O
(Less than 24V)
Analog
I/Ocomm..
Interface
0.25kV

IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-4

113

114

CIMON-PLC

Cooling

Natural Air Cooling

XP CPU SPECIFICATIONS
Specification

Item

CM1-XP1A

CM1-XP2A

CM1-XP3A

Program Control Type

Stored Program, Cyclic Operation, Time Driven Interrupt

Operation Method

Indirect, Direct by Instructions

Program Language

IL(Instruction List), LD(Ladder Diagram)

Data Processing Method

32 Bit

Sequence

55 Instruction

Application

389 Instruction

Instruction
Processing speed

75ns / Step
128K Step

64K Step

2Mbyte

Program Memory Capacity
Expansion

Max. 16Bases

Data Memory Capacity

1Mbyte

X
8,192

4,096

2,048

Data
Memory
Capacity

16,000

2,048

4,096(10ms, 100ms Selective)

4,096

100Card*100Step

32,000

2,048

Type

On Delay, Off Delay, Accumulated, Monostable, Retriggerable

Range

0.01sec ~ 655.35sec

Type

Up Counter, Down Counter, Up-Down Counter, Ring Counter

Range

-32,768 ~ 32,767

Timer

Counter
Operation Mode

RUN, STOP, PAUSE, DEBUG

Self-dianostic function

Watch-dog Timer, Memory Error, I/O Error, Battery Error, Power Supply Error

Built-in funciton

- Floating point arithmetic
- Computer Link (RS232C)
- PID Control
- Clock

Quick Reference Manual

- I/O Reservation
- On-line Editable Program

CP CPU SPECIFICATIONS

Specification

Item

CM1-CP3A/B/P/U

CM1-CP4A/B/C/D/U

Program Control Type

Stored Program, Cyclic Operation, Time Driven Interrupt

Operation Method

Indirect, Direct by Instructions

Program Language

IL(Instruction List), LD(Ladder Diagram)

Data Processing Method

16 Bit

Sequence

55 Instruction

Application

293 Instruction

Instruction
Processing speed

200ns / Step

Program Memory
Capacity

32K Step

16K Step

512Kbyte

256Kbyte

Expansion

Max. 16Bases

Not available

Data Memory Capacity

512Kbyte

256Kbyte

1,024

384

1,024

384

Data
Memory
Capacity

8,192

2,048

1,024(10ms, 100ms Selective)

1,024

100Card*100Step

10,000

5,000

2,048

Type

On Delay, Off Delay, Accumulated, Monostable, Retriggerable

Range

0.01sec ~ 655.35sec

Type

Up Counter, Down Counter, Up-Down Counter, Ring Counter

Range

-32,768 ~ 32,767

Timer

Counter
Operation Mode

RUN, STOP, PAUSE, DEBUG

Self-dianostic function

Watch-dog Timer, Memory Error, I/O Error, Battery Error, Power Supply Error

Built-in funciton

- Computer Link (RS232C)
- PID Control
- Clock

115

116

CIMON-PLC

- I/O Reservation
- On-line Editable Program

DEVICE & ADDRESS

Device
- Input : X

- Output : Y

- Auxiliary Relay : M

- Keep Relay : K

- Timer : T

- Counter : C

- Data Register : D

- Indirect Data Register : @D

- Link Relay : L

- Step Control Relay : S

- Internal Flag(Relay) : F
Indicating Device Addresses
- Bit Data : [Device]+[Card No.]+[Bit No.]
Device : X, Y, M, K, L, F
Card No. : Decimal 3Characters
Bit No. : Hexadecimal 1Character
- Word Data : [Device]+[Card No.]
Device : D, Z, T, C
Card No. : Decimal 4Characters
- Timer, Counter Output contact : [Device]+[Bit No.]
Device : T. C
Bit No. : Decimal 4Characters
- Step Controller Contact : [Device]+[Card No.]+[.]+[ Step No.]
Device : S
Card No. : Decimal 2Characters
Step No. : Decimal 2Characters
- Bit Device in Word(Card) : [Device]+[Card No.]+[0]
Device : X, Y, M, K, L, F
Card No. : Decimal 3Characters

ASSIGNING I/O NUMBERS

Quick Reference Manual

117

IO addresses are continuously allocated between expansion bases.
The order of allocation is based on the expansion number which is configured by the
rotary switch of
expansion module
All non-digital IO modules and empty slots occupy 16points

MODE CHANGE

118

CIMON-PLC

The Arrow indicate convertible routes between modes each by a
mode-conversion switch
REMOTE Operation
REMOTE operation(RUN/STOP) is possible when the position of switch is moved
from "STOP" to "PAUSE/RM"

FEATURES

Built-in functions
ü PID Control
All CPU models embed PID control function
ü Clock(CP*A type exception)
Read a time RTC and store the result in the device assigned to F
ü I/O Reservation
Detect whether a card is inserted to an assigned slot correctly and to reserve that a
program is written without
changing the number of I/O when spare parts are substituted in case of expansion
or break-down
ü On-line Editable program
Edit the contents of a program while a PLC is in Run mode.
Self-Diagnosis
ü Watch-dog Timer
Detect the operation delay by an error in user's program
ü Checking whether module Fixed or unfixed
Detect whether the slot of the card built in a base unfixed or connected
incompletely
ü Memory Check-Sum Error
In case that there is an error in the flash memory of CPU or an error occurs in

Quick Reference Manual

119

accessing Dual Port Ram,
the error is indicated in internal Flag Device F.
ü Battery Discharge
In case that the voltage of the battery is less than standard one, the internal Flag
F3.4 is set.
ü Power Failure
A CPU module detects the instantaneous power failure when the voltage of input
power is lower than the standard.
power is lower than the standard

CM1-CP4C RS-232 INTERFACE

Supported Protocols : CIMON-HMI Loader(auto-detection)
Pin Description( RJ45)

Name

Contents

DSR/RI

DCD

Data Carrier Detect

DTR

Data Terminal Ready

SGND

Signal Ground

Receive Data

Transmit Data

CTS

Clear to Send

RTS

Request to Send

Data set Ready/Ring Indicator

* RJ45 Male Connector Pin Numbering

CM1-CP4D RS-422/485 INTERFACE

Supported Protocols : CIMON-HMI Loader(auto-detection)
Pin Description( RJ45)

Name

SDA

Send Data(+)

SDB

Send Data(-)

RDA

Receive Data(+)

Contents

120

CIMON-PLC

RDB

Receive Data(-)

SGND

Signal Ground

* RJ45 Male Connector Pin Numbering

LOADER CABLE WIRING

PLC use the RJ11(6P) connector for Loader communication

EXTERNAL VIEW(TOP)

Quick Reference Manual

DIMENSIONS

(Uint : mm)

121

122

CIMON-PLC

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Use the PLC in an environment that meets the general specifications given in the User’s Manual of the
CPU module being used.

Take care that dregs are not put into a module case.

Do not touch in the status that the power source is supplied. (It is prohibited to mount and dismount
modules.)

Do not dismount or disassemble a module.

In Case that the voltage of the battery is less than standard one, the Internal Flag F3.4 is set up. At this
time, the battery is to be replaced.

3.2

CIMON-PLC CPU(MPnA / XPnX)
New High-end CPUs are coming out soon.
CM1-XPnB, the next model of CM1-XPnA and High-End CPU, CM-MPnA will be released soon.
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

Quick Reference Manual

Exterior shape

High-End performance of MPnA and XPnB
Powerful Communication
- Easy Connector
1. Push-in type Loader Port
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

123

124

CIMON-PLC

RJ-11 is replaced to Push-in type Loader Port(3pins) for easy connection.

2. Mini-B type USB Loader Port
The most common USB Mini-B type Loader Port is installed.
- Automatic Protocol detection
HMI, CICON, MODBUS/RTU Protocol supported.
Auto protocol detection function makes user to set communication parameter easily.
SFC Program
SFC Program is supported for MPnA and XPnB.
User has SFC and LD-IL for developing program.

Firmware Upgrade
XPnB and MPnA supports Firmware upgrade function.
Unlike XPnA, user can upgrade firmware of MPnA and XPnB through CICON.
CICON version: 4.03 or higher
Expansion Network
- Communication speed increased with Expansion
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

Quick Reference Manual

125

Communication of 10Mbps is upgraded to 100Mbps.
( Communication module(100Mbps) for Expansion is under development. )
- Ring Topological Network
Ring type expansion network helps communication stable even if disconnection occurs one side of
expansion line.
- Optical communication expansion supported.

Specifications

Performance Specification
Item

CM1-XP1A

CM1-XP2A

CM1-XP3A

CM1-XP1B

CM1-XP2B

CM1-XP3B

CM1-MP1A

CM1-MP2A

CM1-MP3A

Operation Method

Stored Program, Cyclic Operation, Time Driven Interrupt

I/O Control Method

Indirect, Direct by Instruction

Program Language

IL(Instruction List), LD(Ladder Diagram),SFC(MPnA/XPnB)

Data Processing Method

32 Bit

Instruction

55 Instruction

Sequence

126

CIMON-PLC

Application

389 Instruction
128K Step

64K Step

2Mbyte

4,096

2,048

Program Memory Capacity

BASE Expansion
Data Memory Capacity

Maximum16
1Mbyte

X
8,192
Y

Device
Memory
Capacity

16,000

2,048

4,096(Option : 10ms / 100ms )

4,096

100Card*100Step

32,000

2,048

Type

On Delay, Off Delay, Integration, Monostable, Retriggerable

Timer
Range
Type
Counter

Coefficient
Range

Operation mode
Self Diagnosis
Battery Back-up

0.01 ~ 655.35 Sec.
Up Counter, Down Counter, Up-Down Counter, Ring Counter
-32,768 ~ 32,767
RUN, STOP, PAUSE, DEBUG
Watch-Dog Timer, Memory Error, I/O Error, Battery Error, Power Error
Over 3 years
- Floating point arithmetic

Built-in Function

- PID Control
- I/O Reservation

- Computer Link(RS232C)

- Clock (RTC)
- Online Edit

- RS-232 1CH(HMI/CICON/MODBUS : MPnA, XPnB)

Quick Reference Manual

3.3

127

CIMON-PLC RS232C/422/485 module
Modules :
· CM1-SC02A
· CM1-SC01A / B
· CM1-SC01DNP
Contents :
· GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
· Module SPECIFICATIONS
· FEATURES AND OPERATION
· I/O SIGNALS
· USER PROGRAM MEMORY DEVICES
· SETTING UP PARAMETERS
· USER COMMUNICATIONS
· WIRING DIAGRAM
· HMI EXCLUSIVE SERVICE
· CONNECTION
· Modem COMMUNICATIONS
· MODBUS SERVICE

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Item

Specification

Op.Temp.

Reference

Operating Temperature -10 ~65

St.Temp

Storage Temperature

-25 ~

Op.Hum

Operating Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

St.Hum

Storage Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency
10=

Acceleration

f=
57Hz

Amplitude

Sweep

0.075mm

Vibration
57=

f=
150Hz

9.8m/s2{1G}

In case of continuous vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

Amplitude

10 times
in X,Y,Z

IEC61131-2

128

CIMON-PLC

10=
f
=
57Hz

0.035mm

57=
f=
150Hz

4.8m/s2{0.5G}

Max. shock Acc. :147 m/s{15G}
Time :11㎳
Pulse wave: Half sine wave pulse(3 times in X,Y,Z)

Shock

Noise

Square wave
impulse noise

2,000 V

Electro-static
discharge

Voltage :4kV (Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magneti
c field

27 ~500 MHz,10 V/m

Fast transient
bust noise

Power
Module

Digital I/O
(24V or more)

2kV

KDT Standard

No corrosive gas and no dust

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

2 or less

Cooling

Natural Air Cooling

IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-2
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-3

Digital I/O
(Less than 24V)
Analog
I/Ocomm..
Interface

1kV

Environ..

IEC61131-2

IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-4

0.25kV

Module SPECIFICATIONS

Model

CM-SC02A

CM1-SC01A

CM1-SC01B

Interface

RS232C / RS422/
RS485

RS232C

RS422 / RS485

Null Modem Direct communication between a PC and RS232C/RS422 port
Comm.
Method

Leased-Line
Communication using a leased-line modem
Modem
Dial-up
Modem

Remote communication using a dial-up modem

User
Protocol

Communication using user protocol

HMI Protocol Communication using exclusive protocol
Operatio
n Mode

Data
Type

MODBUS
Protocol

Communication using Modicon protocol

PLC Link
Protocol

Communication sharing data between CIMON-PLCs

Graphic
Loader
Protocol

Controls a PLC, using link function in the CICON.

Data Bit

7 or 8 bits

Quick Reference Manual

Stop Bit

129

1 or 2 bits

Parity

Even/Odd/None

Synchronous Type

Asynchronous

Baud Rate

300bps / 600 / 1200 / 2400 / 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 76800 bps

Modem Link Function

Long-distance communication linking modem

FEATURES AND OPERATION

n As other makers’ protocols are written to use RS-232 and RS-422(485) each,
independent operation is available by protocols
n It is available to use an exclusive protocol to read/write data.
n The exclusive communication function suitable for the multi-drop configuration of
32 units access as max. is offered.
n As modem communication function is built in, a PLC at a long distance can be
controlled through exclusive communications
n Baud rate is set up in the range from 300bps to 38400bps
n It is available to set up RS232C/ RS422(485) communication port as independent or
linked channel.

n 1:1 / 1:N / N:M communications (RS422 used) are supported
n Full–Duplex(RS422) and Half-Duplex(RS485) are supported
n RS485multi-drop communication system can be configured, using RS485 channel.

I/O SIGNALS

Signal Direction (CPU? Cnet)

Signal Direction(CPU? Cnet)

Input

Signal Name

Output

Signal Name

Error in module

Clear error

Initialized

Rx data existing (CH1)

Clear Rx Buffer (CH1)

130

CIMON-PLC

Tx Buffer Empty (CH1)

Clear Tx Buffer (CH1)

Rx Data Existing (CH2)

Clear Rx Buffer (CH2)

Tx Buffer Empty (CH2)

Clear Tx Buffer (CH2)

Modem Initialized

Modem initialization request

Dialing

Dialing request
(Line connection)

Line connection

Connection release request

Parameter applied

Parameter setup request

USER PROGRAM MEMORY DEVICES

Offset

Description

R/W

Status Code (0=Normal, Others=Error Code)

Mode

R/W

CH1 Port Parameter

R/W

CH2 Port Parameter

R/W

Number of retrying dialing

R/W

Interval of retrying dialing

R/W

Modem initialization/Dialing Timeout

R/W

Number of retrying modem initialization

R/W

Station Number

R/W

SND command timeout

R/W

RCV command timeout

R/W

Modem initialization command

R/W

11
…
31
…
37

PLC Link station number

PLC Link Connection

Dial Number(H)

R/W

Quick Reference Manual

131

Dial Number

R/W

Dial Number

R/W

Response Delay Time(CH1)

R/W

Response Delay Time(CH2)

R/W

…
63

OS Version

64
…

User Message

R/W

255

SETTING UP PARAMETERS
1)

Click the CICON to set up Specialty Card in Tool menu

Select RS232C/422 as Card Type, Base and Slot No.
Base : Number of the base on which a communication module is mounted. If not expansion,
select Local.
Slot : Number of the slot on which a communication module is mounted.
The slot number is counted from the slot next to a CPU module like 0,1---11.

Enter values to set up the parameters used in a communication card for Channel 1 and 2.
• Read : This is used to read and display the currently set parameter of the RS232C/422 module
which is mounted on a slot from
buffer memory.
• Current Status : This is used to read and display the error status, version and PLC link status
from buffer memory.

USER COMMUNICATIONS
This is used when the communication frame defined in a user program is used to send and
receive data in the program.
1)

SND
· This is used to send the data as much as the length of the data requested from a computer
link module.
Command

Description

Base-ChanSlot

Base(1Byte): h00XX, Expansion base number in upper 1Byte
(Local:00)

132

CIMON-PLC

Channel mode, Slot numberè

Addr

Address of the data sent

Leng

Length of the data sent (BYTE), Decimal figure, Maximum 500BYTE

Result

hXX00 : RS-232C, hXX10 : RS-422

Address where the result of sending is noticed is assigned.
(X,Y,M,L,K,T,C,D,@D,Z)
Result Format :
Bit 0 : If sending completed, 1Scan ON. If failed, always ON.
Bit 1 : If failed, always ON
Bit 2-7 : OFF
Bit 8-F : Error Code (0=No Error)

Format

WIRING DIAGRAM
1) RCV
·

This is used to store the data as much as the length of the data requested from a
computer link module.
Command

Base-ChanSlot

Description
Base(1Byte): h00XX, Expansion base number in upper 1Byte (Local:00)
Channel mode, Slot numberè hXX00 : RS-232C, hXX10 : RS-422

Addr

Address where data are received and stored

Leng

Length of the data received (BYTE), Decimal figure, Maximum 500BYTE

Result

Address where the result of receiving is noticed is assigned. (
X,Y,M,L,K,T,C,D,@D,Z)
Result Format :
Bit 0 : If receiving completed, 1Scan ON. If failed, always ON.
Bit 1 : If failed, always ON
Bit 2-7 : OFF
Bit 8-F : Error Code (0=No Error)

2) Format

Quick Reference Manual

133

HMI EXCLUSIVE SERVICE
This service is used to read or write the information and data in a PC and other devices, and to
control a PLC (RUN, STOP, PAUSE).
As station numbers are assigned in the system configured with master and slave, multi-drop
communication is available.
· In case of exclusive communication mode, station numbers for RS232C side and RS422 side are
to be set up in specialty card setup.
· All the frames used in exclusive communication are composed of ASCII code.
· In case of multi-drop, access up to 32 stations is allowed.
· When station number is set up, duplicate station number is not to be set up in a network. In case
of multi-drop network
configuration, the baud rate, stop bit, parity bit and data bit of a RS232C/422module are to be
same.
· To use HMI exclusive service, HMI protocol is to be selected as action mode in the specialty card
setup of the CICON.
If a RS232C/422module is used in inter-link mode, check CH 1 inter-link box in the action mode
of CH 2. In this case, the data
received to CH 1(RS232C) are received inside and sent to CH 2(RS422/485).

ERROR CODES FOR HMI EXCLUSIVE SERVICE
Error
Code

Description

Receives unknown command code.

An error occurs in BCC.

CPU does not respond.

Receives unknown device code

Exceeds the device read.

Invalid address

Internal error

Receives the number of invalid data

Invalid data

Unregistered (Not initialized) frame number

Invalid monitor frame No. (0h – Fh)
Invalid frame number

134

CIMON-PLC

CPU is not in REMOTE status.

Invalid CPU status is assigned.

Error in the size of the data written

Error in changing remote mode

Error in writing to remote memory device

CONNECTION
[ RS232 ]
In case of null modem

In case of modem (Lease-line modem, Dial-up modem)
* Connect each pin in 1 to 1 basis

[ RS-422/485 ]
In case of RS422

In case of RS485

Quick Reference Manual

135

Modem COMMUNICATIONS
RS232C/422 has the function to use the public network for a long-distance network.
This function enables long-distance communication through public network by sending and receiving
phone call after connecting a
RS232C/422 nodule to an external modem.
In case of modem specifications, it is required to use the modem complying with the
recommendable specifications for reliability.
According to the performance of a modem and the state of a public network, the case that a line is
not linked or the case that a
line is cut off while exchanging data may occur.
1. Baud rate: Over 14400bps
2. DTE Interface: CTS / RTS Flow Control
3. Command: AT Command
4. Error correction: While sending data
5. Controlling carrier: Controls to send carrier
How to connect an external modem with a RS232C/422module
1. Use RS-232C interface cable to connect a computer link module and an external type RS232C
modem.
2. Connect a RS-232C interface cable to the RS-232C port of the computer link module and DTE
link terminal.
3. Connect the telephone line of a public network to the line terminal of the modem.
4. If there is a telephone set, connect the telephone terminal of the modem with the telephone
set.
5. Turning on the power for the PLC and the modem, make sure the modem is initialized.

MODBUS SERVICE
· This is used to access CPU Data Memory, using ModBus Protocol.
· This corresponds to Device Memory of all types.
· Address Map
Bit / Word

Modicon Address

CIMON-PLC Address

Size
Cimon-PLC

100001 ~

X0000 ~

4096 Bits

104097 ~

F0000 ~

2048 Bits

106145 ~

T0000 ~

1024 Bits

Bit
Read Input

136

CIMON-PLC

Bit
Read Coil

Word
Input
Register

Word
Holding
Register

3.4

107169 ~
108192

C0000 ~

1024 Bits

000001 ~

Y0000 ~

4096 Bits

004097 ~

M0000 ~

8192 Bits

012289 ~

K0000 ~

2048 Bits

014337 ~
016384

L0000 ~

2048 Bits

400001 ~

X0000 ~

256 Words

400257 ~

F0000 ~

128 Words

400385 ~

TC0000 ~

1024 Words

401409 ~

CC0000 ~

1024 Words

402433 ~
402482

S0000 ~

50 Words

300001 ~

Y0000 ~

256 Words

300257 ~

K0000 ~

128 Words

300385 ~

TS0000~

1024 Words

301409 ~

CS0000 ~

1024 Words

302433 ~

L0000 ~

128 Words

302561 ~

M0000 ~

512 Words

303073 ~
313072

D0000 ~

10000 Words

CIMON-PLC Power
Modules :
· CM1-SPA
· CM1-SPC
· CM1-SP2B
· CM1-SPR
Contents :
· GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
· Module SPECIFICATIONS
· Usage OF OUTPUT VOLTAGE
· Current Consumption
· Wiring
· Outward Dimension

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

Quick Reference Manual

Item

Specification

Op.Temp.

Reference

Operating Temperature -10 ~65

St.Temp

Storage Temperature

-25 ~

Op.Hum

Operating Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

St.Hum

Storage Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency
10=
57=
Vibration

Acceleration

f=
57Hz

Amplitude

Sweep

0.075mm

f=
150Hz

9.8m/s2{1G}

In case of continuous vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

10=
f
=
57Hz
57=
f=
150Hz

10 times
in X,Y,Z

Amplitude

4.8m/s2{0.5G}

Square wave
impulse noise

2,000 V

Electro-static
discharge

Voltage :4kV (Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magneti
c field

27 ~500 MHz,10 V/m

Fast transient
bust noise

Power
Module

Digital I/O
(24V or more)

2kV

1kV

Environ..

No corrosive gas and no dust

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

2 or less

Cooling

Natural Air Cooling

IEC61131-2

0.035mm

Max. shock Acc. :147 m/s{15G}
Time :11㎳
Pulse wave: Half sine wave pulse(3 times in X,Y,Z)

Shock

Noise

137

IEC61131-2

KDT Standard
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-2
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-3

Digital I/O
(Less than 24V)
Analog
I/Ocomm..
Interface
0.25kV

IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-4

138

CIMON-PLC

Module SPECIFICATIONS

Item

I
N
P
U
T

CM1-SPA

CM1-SPC/SPR

CM1-SP2B

Input Voltage

AC100-240V, 50/60Hz

DC 24V

Input Current

0.25A MAX For 220VAC

1.8A MAX For
24VDC

Inrush Current

Less then 30A

Efficiency

More than 70%(regular input/load)

PF indicate

20ms more

O
U
T
P
U
T

Output
Voltage
/
Output
Current

+5V (3.5A)
+24V (0.3A)

Power supply
Status indication

+5 (3.5A)
+24V (0.3A)
+15V (0.5A)
-15V (0.3A)

+5 (3.5A)
+15V (0.5A)
-15V (0.3A)

LED On.Off

Maximum allowable input power line disturbance is 20ms or less.
Analog modules must be used with SPC or SP2B type power

(AD, DA, RTD, TC, TH

module)

Usage OF OUTPUT VOLTAGE

SPC / SP2B
Output Voltage

Usage

+5V

Operation Power of all PLC module

+24V

External Sensor and Switch Power, Analog current output module

+15V

Operation Power of Analog Module

-15V

Operation Power of Analog Module

SPA
Output Voltage

Usage

Quick Reference Manual

+5V

Operation Power of all PLC module

+24V

External Sensor and Switch Power, Analog current output module

Current Consumption

Item

Model

Current consumption

CPU Module

CM1-CP**

130 mA

CM1-RM01A

70 mA

CM1-RC01A

290 mA

CM1-EP***

270 mA

CM1-XD16A

60 mA

CM1-XD32C

100 mA

CM1-XA08A

30 mA

CM1-XA08B

30 mA

I/O Hybrid Module

CM1-XY16DR

180 mA

Relay Module

CM1-YR16A

250 mA

CM1-YT16A

110 mA

CM1-YT16B

110 mA

CM1-YT32A

130 mA

CM1-YT32B

130 mA

SSR Output Module

CM1-YS08A

120 mA

High Speed Counter Module

CM1-HS02B

290 mA

CM1-AD04VI

50 mA

CM1-AD08V

50 mA

CM1-AD08I

55 mA

CM1-DA04V

40 mA

CM1-DA08V

50 mA

CM1-DA04I

40 mA

CM1-DA08I

50 mA

CM1-RD04A

50 mA

CM1-RD04B

50 mA

CM1-TC04A

60 mA

CM1-SC02A

190 mA

CM1-SC01A

170 mA

CM1-SC01B

170 mA

CM1-SC01DNP

170 mA

Redundancy Module
Expansion Module
DC Input Module

AC Input Module

Transistor Module

A/D Convert Module

D/A Convert Module

RTD Measuring Module
TC Measuring Module

Communication Module

139

140

CIMON-PLC

CM1-EC01A

290 mA

CM1-EC01DNP

290 mA

Wiring

Warning
Touching the electrical part nay be fatal- even after the Power module Has been
disconnected from a power source :

Wait at least 5 minutes for current dissipate
Use only 60℃ copper conductor or equivalent.
Use copper conductors in a size range of 12AWG(3.31mm2) to 220AWG(0.324mm2)
The torque required to tighten these screw is 16 lbf·in(1.813N·m)

Outward Dimension

(Unit : mm)

Quick Reference Manual

3.5

141

CIMON-PLC Base
Modules :
· CM1-BS03A / 04A / 05A / 08A / 10A / 12A
· CM1-BS05R / 08R / 10R
Contents :
· GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
· BASE SPECIFICATIONS
· Outward Dimension

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Item
Op.Temp.
St.Temp

Specification

Reference

Operating Temperature -10 ~65
Storage Temperature

-25 ~

Op.Hum

Operating Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

St.Hum

Storage Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

142

CIMON-PLC

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency
10=
57=

Acceleration

f=
57Hz

Amplitude

Sweep

0.075mm

f=
150Hz

9.8m/s2{1G}

Vibration
In case of continuous vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

10=
f
=
57Hz

Amplitude

4.8m/s2{0.5G}

Max. shock Acc. :147 m/s{15G}
Time :11㎳
Pulse wave: Half sine wave pulse(3 times in X,Y,Z)

Shock

IEC61131-2

0.035mm

57=
f=
150Hz

Noise

10 times
in X,Y,Z

Square wave
impulse noise

2,000 V

Electro-static
discharge

Voltage :4kV (Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magneti
c field

27 ~500 MHz,10 V/m

Power
Module

Fast transient
bust noise

Digital I/O
(24V or more)

2kV

1kV

Environ..

No corrosive gas and no dust

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

2 or less

Cooling

Natural Air Cooling

IEC61131-2

KDT Standard
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-2
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-3

Digital I/O
(Less than 24V)
Analog
I/Ocomm..
Interface

IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-4

0.25kV

BASE SPECIFICATIONS

Model

No. of I/O Slot

Unit (mm)

weight

CM1-BS03A

3 Slot

183×108

258 g

CM1-BS04A

4 Slot

216×108

304.5 g

CM1-BS05A

5 Slot

247×108

345.5 g

CM1-BS08A

8 Slot

344×108

478 g

CM1-BS10A

10 Slot

408×108

571 g

Quick Reference Manual

CM1-BS12A

12 Slot

Outward Dimension

473×108

683 g

143

144

3.6

CIMON-PLC

CIMON-PLC Ethernet module
Modules :
· CM1-EC01A
· CM1-EC10A / B
· CM1-EC01DNP / EC04DNP
Contents :
· GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
· MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
· FEATURES AND OPERATION
· I/O SIGNALS
· USER PROGRAM MEMORY DEVICES
· SETTING UP IP ADDRESS AND NETMASK
· SETTING UP PLC LINK PARAMETERS
· PLC LINK IN COMMON/EXCLUSIVE NETWORK
· SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
· ERROR CODES FOR SYSTEM
· ERROR CODES FOR EXCLUSIVE SERVICE
· TROUBLE SHOOTING

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Item
Op.Temp.
St.Temp

Specification

Reference

Operating Temperature -10 ~65
Storage Temperature

-25 ~

Op.Hum

Operating Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

St.Hum

Storage Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

Vibration

In case of intermittent vibration

Quick Reference Manual

Frequency
10=
57=

Acceleration

f=
57Hz

Amplitude

Sweep

0.075mm

f=
150Hz

9.8m/s2{1G}

In case of continuous vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

10=
f
=
57Hz
57=
f=
150Hz

10 times
in X,Y,Z

Amplitude

4.8m/s2{0.5G}

Square wave
impulse noise

2,000 V

Electro-static
discharge

Voltage :4kV (Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magneti
c field

27 ~500 MHz,10 V/m

Fast transient
bust noise

Power
Module

Digital I/O
(24V or more)

2kV

No corrosive gas and no dust

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

2 or less

Cooling

Natural Air Cooling

Item

Specification (10BASE-T)

Baud Rate

10 Mbps

Sending Type

Base Band

Max. Segment Length

100m(Node – Hub)

Max. No. of Nodes

4-Hub link
1500 Byte

Communication Access

CSMA / CD

5V Current Consumption

280(㎃ )

IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-2
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-3

Digital I/O
(Less than 24V)
Analog
I/Ocomm..
Interface

MODULE SPECIFICATIONS

Max. Size of Protocol

IEC61131-2

KDT Standard

1kV

Environ..

IEC61131-2

0.035mm

Max. shock Acc. :147 m/s{15G}
Time :11㎳
Pulse wave: Half sine wave pulse(3 times in X,Y,Z)

Shock

Noise

145

0.25kV

IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-4

146

CIMON-PLC

No. of Occupied Points

16 Points

Cable Specifications – Twisted-Pair Cable (UTP)
Item

Unit

Value

Conductor Resistance (Max.)

Ω/㎞

93.5

Insulation Resistance (Min.)

㏁ㆍ㎞

2500

Internal Voltage

V / min.

AC 500

Characteristic Impedance

Ω (1 ~ 100㎒ )

100± 15

Attenuation

Less than dB / 100m

Near-end Cross Talk
Attenuation

Less than dB / 100m

6.5

8.2

9.3

※ As the cables for Ethernet connection are different according to system configuration and cable
type,
consultation with an expert is required to install them

FEATURES AND OPERATION

n Complies with IEEE802.3 standard
n Supports the protocols like ARP, ICMP, IP, TCP and UDP.
n Several Ethernet modules can be mounted on one base plate
n Supports PLC link function for the communications between CIMON-PLCs. Allows
communications up to 64 stations at the same time.

n In case of PLC link communication, Ethernet modules up to 4 units can be
mounted.

n Ethernet module can be mounted on a expansion base plate.

LED
No.

Indication

RUN

Description
ON in case of power supply.

Quick Reference Manual

ERR

Blinking in case of error in system.

Blinking in case of receiving.

Blinking in case of sending.

I/O SIGNALS
Signal Direction
(CPU← Ethernet)

Signal Direction
(CPU→ Ethernet)

Input

Signal Name

Output

Signal Name

Error in module

Request to clear error

Initialized

Request to clear PLC link status

User frame received

Request to clear received user frame

User frame sending busy

Request to clear sending

HMI TCP Link On-Service

Parameter has been saved.

Request to unlink HMI TCP

Request to save parameter

USER PROGRAM MEMORY DEVICES
Offset

Description

R/W

147

148

CIMON-PLC

Status Code
(0=Normal, Others=Error Code)

1
2
3
4

IP Address

R/W

IP Address

R/W

Net Mask

R/W

Net Mask

R/W

PLC Link Station

PLC Link Connection

The last HMI Service IP Address

The last HMI Service Port

The last Loader Service IP Address

The last Loader Service Port

TCP Modbus Unit ID

Dest IP Address

Dest Port

Source IP Address

Source Port

Gate Way

R/W

Gate Way

R/W

…
30

DNP Host IP Address (Upper)

DNP Host IP Address (Lower)

DNP Host Station

DNP My Station

DNP Flags

Dnp DataLink Rty/Dnp DataLink T.O

Dnp Application Rty/Dnp AppicationT.O

37~127

User Message

R/W

128

PLC Link Number 0 Station IP Address (Upper)

R/W

129

PLC Link Number 0 Station IP Address (Lower)

R/W

…

Quick Reference Manual

149

…
254

PLC Link Number 63 Station IP Address (Upper)

R/W

255

PLC Link Number 63 Station IP Address (Lower)

R/W

SETTING UP IP ADDRESS AND NETMASK
1)
2)

Click Tool = >Special Card Setup in the CICON.
Select Ethernet as Type and base and slot number.
Base: This is used to select the number of the base on which a module is mounted. If an
Ethernet module is mounted
on an expansion base, select the number of the base on which the module is mounted
among Expansion 1,
Expansion 2, ? and Expansion 16.
Otherwise, select Local.
Slot No.: This is used to select the number of the slot on which an Ethernet module is mounted.

3)
4)

Enter IP Address and Net Mask used for an Ethernet module and click Download.
Press OK to set up IP Address and Net Mask for an Ethernet module following the above order.
• Upload Set Value : This is used to read and display current IP Address and Net Mask of the
Ethernet module which is
mounted on a slot from buffer memory.
• Current Status : This is used to display error status, the IP address and port for the last HMI
service, the IP address and
port for the last loader service and PLC Link status.

SETTING UP PLC LINK PARAMETERS
1) Select PLC Link in Parameter.
2) Ethernet modules up to 4 can be mounted on a base to set up PLC Link.
3) Select PLC Link.
· Network: Select Ethernet (Common, Exclusive).
· Base: This is used to select the base on which an Ethernet module is mounted. If an Ethernet
module is mounted on the base on

which a CPU module is mounted, select

Local. In case of an Ethernet module mounted on an expansion base, select the
number of the expansion base.
· Slot: Select the slot on which an Ethernet module is mounted.
· Station: Select a station number for PLC Link. But, the station number duplicated with other
Ethernet module may cause an error.
4) Select PLC Link Type and enter the values of parameters to set up Comm. Block.
5) Select Add button to set up a sending block and a receiving block.
6) Select the sending interval, sending device and data size of a sending block.
7) Select the number of a receiving station and block, the address in which received data are stored
and data size.

150

CIMON-PLC

PLC LINK IN COMMON/EXCLUSIVE NETWORK
PLC Link in Common Network
PLC Link is used to exchange data and information with other party at a certain time periodically.
The sending/receiving data size,
the interval and the device in the parameter of the CICON to exchange data can be set up.
IP Address of other node is stored in User Program Memory Device (128 ~ 255).

PLC Link in Exclusive Network
PLC Link is used to exchange data and information with other party at a certain time periodically.
The sending/receiving data size,
the interval and the device in the parameter of the CICON to exchange data can be set up.
-

Transport Layer : UDP/IP(IP Broadcasting)
Maximum linked PLC : 64 units

Number of Link Points
Sending/Receiving
Capacity per
Station

Max. Block Number

Max. No. of Points
per Block

4,096 words

Block 64 (0~63)

64 words

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
·

PLC Link station number of all communications modules including Ethernet module is to be
different each other.

If duplicate station number is accessed, an error occurs.

Use the communication cable with assigned specification.

Check whether communication cable is broken before installation.

The cable other than assigned may cause communication disturbance.

Connect communication cable correctly.
Incomplete cable connection may cause serious communication disturbance.

As shield cable has low flexibility, it is to be branched 30 cm or more away from the connector
of a communications module.
Bending perpendicularly or transforming by force may cause breaking cable or the connector

in a communications module.
·

In case of long-distance communication cable, wire a cable far away from power line or
induction noise.

Quick Reference Manual

ERROR CODES FOR SYSTEM
Code

Description

0000h

No error

0001h

A specialty module is not initialized.

0002h

EEPROM is not initialized.

0005h

Not able to write to buffer memory.

0006h

Not able to read buffer memory.

0007h

A CPU module is dismounted.

0008h

Station number for PLC LINK is duplicated.

000Dh

Buffer is overflowed.

000Fh

Accesses Graphic Loader over the maximum.

0010h

Not able to access EERROM.

0011h

Sending/receiving data size for PLC LINK is exceeded.

0012h

Not able to send specialty program.

0014h

No. of PLC LINK stations is over the Maximum.

ERROR CODES FOR EXCLUSIVE SERVICE
Code

Description
No error (Cmd=57h/77h, the response in case that the command is

0000h

successfully processed.)

0001h

Error in system (No link with CPU)

0002h

Invalid device prefix

0003h

Invalid device address

0004h

Error in requested data size

0005h

Over 16 request blocks

0006h

The case that buffer memory send an error in data and size

0007h

Over receiving buffer capacity

0008h

Over sending time

0009h

Error in header

000Ah

Error in check-sum of received data

151

152

CIMON-PLC

Error in the information on frame length
000Bh

(Total received frame size)

000Ch

Error in the size to write

000Dh

Error in Bit Write Data

000Eh

Unknown command

000Fh

Disabling state from writing

0010h

Error in CPU process

TROUBLE SHOOTING

Quick Reference Manual

3.7

153

CIMON-PLC BACnet module
Modules :
· CM1-BN01A
Contents :
· Feature of BACNET module
· GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
· SPECIFICATION
· Wiring Precautions
· Internal I/O table
· User Program Memory Device
· System Error Code
· OUTWARD Demensions
· Error in Hardware
· Error in Network

Feature of BACNET module

n Abbreviation of “Building Automation and Control Network” is open-type
standard protocol for BAS.

n ASHRAE / ANSI, (USA), 1995
n It is applicable to many building utilities such as HVAC control system,
lighting control system, emergency and security system, elevator control
system, etc.

n It is easy to modify, change, expand and due to use of standard protocol.
n Supports BACnet which is the standard of BAS.
n Supports the functionality of BACnet class 3 servers.
n Choose Ethernet for communication physical layer.

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Item
Op.Temp.

Specification
Operating Temperature -10 ~65

Reference

154

CIMON-PLC

St.Temp

Storage Temperature

-25 ~

Op.Hum

Operating Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

St.Hum

Storage Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency
10=
57=

Acceleration

f=
57Hz

Amplitude

Sweep

0.075mm

f=
150Hz

9.8m/s2{1G}

Vibration
In case of continuous vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

10=
f
=
57Hz
57=
f=
150Hz

Amplitude

4.8m/s2{0.5G}

Square wave
impulse noise

2,000 V

Electro-static
discharge

Voltage :4kV (Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magneti
c field

27 ~500 MHz,10 V/m

Fast transient
bust noise

IEC61131-2

0.035mm

Max. shock Acc. :147 m/s{15G}
Time :11㎳
Pulse wave: Half sine wave pulse(3 times in X,Y,Z)

Shock

Noise

10 times
in X,Y,Z

Power
Module

Digital I/O
(24V or more)

2kV

1kV

Environ..

No corrosive gas and no dust

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

2 or less

Cooling

Natural Air Cooling

IEC61131-2

KDT Standard
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-2
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-3

Digital I/O
(Less than 24V)
Analog
I/Ocomm..
Interface

IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-4

0.25kV

SPECIFICATION

Module specification
Model

CM1-BN01A

Protocol size

ANSI / ASHRAE 135-1995 (KS X 6909)

Quick Reference Manual

Protocol stack

UDP / IP

Physical Standard

ISO / IEC8802-3(IEEE 802.3, CSMA / CD, 10Base-T)

Data transfer speed

10Mbps

Transfer method

Base band

Max. Segment length

100m

Max. I/O data slave

Binary : 64 words, Analog : 1024 words

Object data type

BI, BO, BV, AZ, AO, AV

Service

Loader, BACNet protocol, PLC Link (Private / Public)

155

Cable specification – Twisted-Pair Cable (UTP)

ITEM

Unit

Value

Conductor Resistance (Max.)

? /㎞

93.5

Insulation Resistance (Min.)

㏁ㆍ㎞

2500

Internal Voltage

V / min

AC 500

? (1 ~ 100㎒ )

100±5

Characteristic Impedance

Near-end Cross Talk Attenuation

Less than
dB / 100m

6.5

8.2

9.3

※ As the cables for Ethernet connection are different according to system
configuration and cable type, consultation with an expert is required to install them.

Wiring Precautions

· PLC Link station number of all communications modules including BACNet module is to be
different each other.
· If duplicate station number is accessed, an error occurs.
· Check whether communication cable is broken before installation.
· Use the communication cable with assigned specification. The cable other than assigned may
cause communication disturbance.
· Connect communication cable correctly. Incomplete cable connection may cause serious
communication disturbance.
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

156

CIMON-PLC

· As shield cable has low flexibility, it is to be branched 30cm or more away from the connector of
a communications module.
Bending perpendicularly or transforming by force may cause breaking cable or the connector in a
communication module.

•

In case of long-distance communication cable, wire a cable far away from power line or induction
noise.

Internal I/O table
Direction : CPU ? BN01A

Direction : CPU ? BN01A

Input

Signal Description

Output

Signal Description

Module Error

Request to clear error

Initialized

Request to clear PLC Link status

Parameter has been saved

Request to save parameter

User Program Memory Device
offset
0

Description
Status Code (0= Normal, Others=Error Code)

R/W
R

…

Quick Reference Manual

IP Address

R/W

IP Address

R/W

Net Mask

R/W

Net Mask

R/W

PLC Link Station

PLC Link Connection

The last BACNet service IP address

The last BACNet service IP Port

The last Loader service IP address

The last Loader service IP Port

OS Version

…
63
…
255

System Error Code
Error Code
Description

Decimal

Hexadeciaml

0x0000

No Error (Normal status)

0x0001

DPRAM initialize error

0x0002

EEPROM is not initialized

0x0005

Not able to write to buffer memory

0x0006

Not able to read buffer memory

0x0007

A CPU module is dismounted

0x0008

Station number for PLC Link is duplicated

0x000D

Buffer is overflowed

157

158

CIMON-PLC

0x000F

Access Graphic Loader over the maximum

0x0010

Not able to access EEPROM

0x0011

Sending/Receiving data size for PLC Link is exceeded

0x0012

Not able to send specialty program

0x0014

Number of PLC Link station is over the maximum

OUTWARD Demensions
(Unit :
mm)

Error in Hardware

This corresponds Error Code 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 16 and 18

Quick Reference Manual

Is the input power is normal?

Check the Power/Voltage

Yes
Does the environment comply

Supplement the environment

Mount the module correctly

Make sure the installation and

With the specification?

Yes
Is the module mounted correctly?

Yes
Is

the

cable

installed

correctly?

Connection of the cable

Yes
Re-supply the power

Operate

Does the same error occur?

Yes
This is an error in the hardware of
the module. Please consult with
A/S center

Error in Network
This corresponds Error Code 8,13,15,17 and 20

159

160

CIMON-PLC

Is the input power is normal?

Check the Power/Voltage

Yes
Is the IP address setup?

Select the menu to set up the
IP address and to download

Yes
Is the subnet mask value set up?

Select the menu to set up to
The subnet mask value and
To download

Yes
Is the cable installed correctly?

Make sure the installation and
Connection of the cable

Yes
Re-supply the power
Does the same error occur?

Yes

Is the other station operated
Normally?
No

This is an error in the hardware of

Take action for an error in the

the module. Please consult with

Other party

RUN

A/S center

3.8

CIMON-PLC DeviceNet module
Modules :
· CM1-DN01A
Contents :
· Feature of BACNET module
· GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
· SPECIFICATION
· Precautions
· Wiring Precautions
· Internal I/O table
· User Program Memory Device
· LED Display
· OUTWARD Demensions
· Trouble Shooting(1)
· Trouble Shooting(2)

Quick Reference Manual

161

Feature of BACNET module

n Machine I/O is high speed network of open Structure by choosing
Global Standard Devicenet
n Multi-Drop and T-type branch is available and Improves flexibility of network
installation
n One network module can manage 63 slave modules And maximum 57,334 points
of I/O
n Enable real time managing of lowest level input/output Machines within network
system
n Functions such as sequence managing, processing Managing and motion
managing
can be used in many Different fields of managing sites
n Able to connect with various types of slave I/O
n Max 4 master modules are applicable with one CPU

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Item

Specification

Op.Temp.

Reference

Operating Temperature -10 ~65

St.Temp

Storage Temperature

-25 ~

Op.Hum

Operating Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

St.Hum

Storage Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency
10=
57=

Acceleration

f=
57Hz

Amplitude

Sweep

0.075mm

f=
150Hz

9.8m/s2{1G}

Vibration
In case of continuous vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

10=
f
=
57Hz
57=
f=
150Hz
Shock

Amplitude

10 times
in X,Y,Z

IEC61131-2

0.035mm
4.8m/s2{0.5G}
Max. shock Acc. :147 m/s{15G}

IEC61131-2

162

CIMON-PLC

Time :11㎳
Pulse wave: Half sine wave pulse(3 times in X,Y,Z)

Noise

Square wave
impulse noise

2,000 V

Electro-static
discharge

Voltage :4kV (Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magneti
c field

27 ~500 MHz,10 V/m

Fast transient
bust noise

Power
Module

Digital I/O
(24V or more)

2kV

KDT Standard
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-2
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-3

Digital I/O
(Less than 24V)
Analog
I/Ocomm..
Interface

1kV

IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-4

0.25kV

Environ..

No corrosive gas and no dust

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

2 or less

Cooling

Natural Air Cooling

SPECIFICATION

Module specification
Model

CM1-DN01A

Network

DeviceNet

Communication speed

125kbps / 250kbps / 500kbps

Transmission speed

Transmission
speed

Network Max.
length

125k

500m (1640feet)

250k

250m (820feet)

500k

100m (328feet)

Max. length

Total distance
156m (512 feet)

6m (20feet)

78m (256 feet)
39m (128 feet)

No. of connect station

64 stations

Cable

24V+ / 24V- / Shield / CAN H / CAN L (5 lines)

No. of Max. Node

MAC ID (Node address) of Max. 64

Diagnosis function

ID duplication check / inferior station check / detect operating status by
LED

Cable specification

Fea Signal Desc

Quick Reference Manual

name

riptio
n

Red 24 V+

Pow
er

Whi
te

CAN_
H

Sign
al

Bar
e

Drain

Shiel
d

Blu
e

CAN_
L

Sign
al

Bla
ck

24 V-

Pow
er

ture

163

Precautions
· Use the PLC in an environment that meets the general specifications given In the User’s Manual
of the PD01A module being used.
· Do not dismount or disassemble a module.
· Do not touch in the status that power source is supplied. It is prohibited to mount and dismount
module
· Take care that dregs are not put into a module case
· The termination is necessary needed in the trunk Line. For details see the "termination
Register"? section in the manual.
· The station number of all communication devices including DeviceNet Module is to be different
each other. If duplicate station
number is accessed, An error occurs

•

Please re-supply the power source when you want to apply a new transmission Speed to the
network

Wiring Precautions
·

Please use after understanding the wire diagram including rated voltage and terminal
arrangement.

· The wiring together with high-voltage line or power line cause malfunction or breakdown
due to induction jam.
Design the wiring 100mm or more away from a high voltage line or a power line not to
receive the influence by the variation
of noise or magnetic field.
· Tighten the screws for terminal connection after turning off the power source.

164

CIMON-PLC

· In case of tightening the screws of a terminal, tighten firmly according to the rated torque.
· Earth FG terminal in the third class, which is exclusive for PLC.
· Terminating Register
Terminating register is necessary installed in the trunk line when you using DeviceNet.
The requirement of the terminating register is below.

121 Ω, 1%, 1/4W

• Caution

- Do not install the terminating register in the drop line.
- Do not install the terminating register in the Node.
It may cause network disturbance.

Internal I/O table

Direction : CPU ? DN01A

Input

Signal Description

Output

Signal Description

Module Error

Error Clear request

Initialized

XE
XF

Module RUN

Link enable

Quick Reference Manual

User Program Memory Device
offset
0

Description
Status Code (0= Normal, Others=Error Code)

R/W
R

…
10

RunOK

Link Error (Slave station 15~0)

Link Error (Slave station 31~16)

Link Error (Slave station 47~32)

Link Error (Slave station 63~48)

Network State(Slave station 15~0)

Network State(Slave station 31~16)

Network State(Slave station 47~32)

Network State(Slave station 63~48)

OS Version

15
16
17
18

23
24
25
26
…
63
…
255

LED Display

165

166

CIMON-PLC

Module status is shown with 2 LED display
LED

Status
Blink
(0.2sec)

Green

Description
No error detected and not connected with any devices

Blink
Power ON : No error detected, not configured parameter and
(3times/0.2 not connected with any device
sec)
Operating : Fatal error occurred

Communication O.K

Blink (1sec) Ready for F/W download

Red

Blink
(0.2sec)

On F/W download

Blink
Fatal error occurred
(3times/0.2
The module is required to repair
sec)
Off

Module is off (Power source is not supplied)
On

Green

Blink (1sec)

NS
Red

On
Off

Module O.K
Not connected with any device or module has wrong
configuration
Module cannot access to the network
Device is not online

OUTWARD Demensions
(Unit :
mm)

Quick Reference Manual

Trouble Shooting(1)

This corresponds Error Code 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 16 and 18

167

168

CIMON-PLC

Trouble Shooting(2)
This corresponds Error Code 11,12,13 and 15

Quick Reference Manual

3.9

CIMON-PLC Profibus DP module
Modules :
· CM1-PD01A
Contents :
· Feature of Profibus DP module
· GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
· SPECIFICATIONS
· Precautions
· Wiring Precautions
· Internal I/O table
· Wring 1
· LED Display
· Error Code
· Trouble Shooting(1)
· Trouble Shooting(2)

169

170

CIMON-PLC

Feature of Profibus DP module

n Suitable to communication between Master Automization Machine and
scatter Slave I/O Machine

n Support various communication speed(9.6kbps to 12mbps)
n RS485 communication method is used
n Field construction made easier due to use of twisted Pair cable
n Support Maximum of 127 station(32 per segment)
n Network setup is done with configuration tool
* 1kbytes input data can be transferred within 2ms
* Data transition can be done with order or without order
* Individual or Multi master network function available

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Item

Specification

Op.Temp.

Reference

Operating Temperature -10 ~65

St.Temp

Storage Temperature

-25 ~

Op.Hum

Operating Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

St.Hum

Storage Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency
10=

Vibration

57=

Acceleration

f=
57Hz

Amplitude

Sweep

0.075mm

f=
150Hz

9.8m/s2{1G}

In case of continuous vibration
Frequency
10=
f
=
57Hz

Acceleration

10 times
in X,Y,Z

IEC61131-2

Amplitude
0.035mm

Quick Reference Manual

57=
f=
150Hz

Noise

4.8m/s2{0.5G}

Max. shock Acc. :147 m/s{15G}
Time :11㎳
Pulse wave: Half sine wave pulse(3 times in X,Y,Z)

Shock

Square wave
impulse noise

2,000 V

Electro-static
discharge

Voltage :4kV (Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magneti
c field

27 ~500 MHz,10 V/m

Fast transient
bust noise

Power
Module

Digital I/O
(24V or more)

2kV

1kV

Environ..

No corrosive gas and no dust

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

2 or less

Cooling

Natural Air Cooling

SPECIFICATIONS
Module specification
Model

CM1-PD01A

Network

Profibus DP

Interface

RS-485

Standard

EN50170 / EN50254

Media
Access

Token passing & Polling

No. of Max
slave
connection
/ network

127

No. of Max
slave
connection
/ segment

Cable

Two wire shielded twist pair
cable

Max. I/O
Data slave

244 bytes

Max. I/O
Data

I/O 3,584 bytes each

171

IEC61131-2

KDT Standard
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-2
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-3

Digital I/O
(Less than 24V)
Analog
I/Ocomm..
Interface
0.25kV

IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-4

172

CIMON-PLC

Configurati
on Tool

Sycon-PB

Cable specification
Feature

Cable #1

Cable #2

Impedan
ce

135~16 5 Ω
(f=3 to 20MHz)

100~130 Ω
(f>100KHz)

Capacity

<300nF/Km

<60nF/Km

Wire
gauge

=0.34mm
(22AWG)

=0.22mm2
(24AWG)

Communication distance according to the transmission speed and cable
Baud(Kbps)

9.6

19.2

93.75

187.5

500

1500

3000~

Cable #1

1200

1000

400

200

100

Cable #2

1200

600

200

Precautions

· Use the PLC in an environment that meets the general specifications given In the User’s Manual
of the PD01A module being used.
· Do not dismount or disassemble a module.
· Do not touch in the status that power source is supplied. It is prohibited to mount and dismount
module
· Take care that dregs are not put into a module case

Wiring Precautions
· Please use after understanding the wire diagram including rated voltage and terminal arrangement.
· Tighten the screws for terminal connection after turning off the power source.
In case of tightening the screws of a terminal, tighten firmly according to the rated torque.
· Earth FG terminal in the third class, which is exclusive for PLC.
· To make a termination is necessary needed.
· Use the specialty connector which is embedded inductor when you use high speed transmission
speed over 1.5Mbps
· Do not use the branch line when you use high speed transmission speed over 1.5Mbps
· Keep station’s distance over 1m when you using transmission speed over 12Mbps
· The wiring close to heat-generating device or material and directly contacted with oil for long time
may cause short circuit or breakdown or malfunction.

Quick Reference Manual

173

In case of the installation environment with a lot of vibration, prevent a PLC from the vibration
The wiring together with high-voltage line or power line cause malfunction or breakdown due to
induction jam. Design the wiring 100mm or more away
from a high voltage line or a power line not to receive the influence by the variation of noise or
magnetic field.

Internal I/O table
Direction : CPU ? PD01A

Direction : CPU ? PD01A

Input

Signal Description

Output

Signal Description

Module Error

Error Clear

Initialized

Module RUN

Link enable

Wring 1

Offset

Description

Status Code
(0=Normal, Others=Error Code)

…
10

RunOK (DP_STATE)

Configured (Slave station 15~0)

R/W

174

CIMON-PLC

Configured (Slave station 31~16)

Configured (Slave station 47~32)

Configured (Slave station 63~48)

Configured (Slave station 79~64)

Configured (Slave station 95~80)

Configured (Slave station 111~96)

Configured (Slave station 127~112)

Network State Configured (Slave station 15~0)

Network State Configured (Slave station 31~16)

Network State Configured (Slave station 47~32)

Network State Configured (Slave station 63~48)

Network State Configured (Slave station 79~64)

Network State Configured (Slave station 95~80)

Network State Configured (Slave station 111~96)

Network State Configured (Slave station 127~112)

OS Version

…
63
…
255

LED Display
Module status is shown with 5 LED display
LED

Status

RUN

Communication O.K

Off

Parameter setting error

Blink
RDY

STS

SYS-ERR

Communication stop

Module O.K

Off

Module Error (hardware)

Blink
ERR

Description

Module Error (hardware or software)

Communication line error

Off

Communication line O.K

Secure token

Off

Concede token to other Master station

Module initialize error

Blink

Error in interface

Quick Reference Manual

Off

Normal status (Interface with CPU)

Error Code
Error Code
Description
10진 수

16진 수

0x0000

No Error (Normal status)

0x0001

DPRAM initialize error

0x0002

Error in interface

0x0003

Error in interface

0x0004

Error in interface

0x0005

Error in interface

0x0006

A CPU module is dismounted

0x0007

Not able to send specialty program

0x0008

Error in interface

0x0009

Error in interface

0x000A

0x000B

Sending/receiving data size is exceeded (max 64 block each)

0x000C

Input/output data size is exceeded

0x000D

Data get form CPU is not matched with configuration data

0x000E

0x000F

I/O data size get from specialty program is not matched with
configured I/O data size

Trouble Shooting(1)

This corresponds Error Code 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9

175

176

CIMON-PLC

Trouble Shooting(2)

This corresponds Error Code 11,12,13 and 15

Quick Reference Manual

3.10

CIMON-PLC Data Logger module
Modules :
· CM1-LG32A
Contents :
· Feature of Data Logger module
· GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
· SPECIFICATIONS
· Wring Precautions
· Internal I/O table
· User Program Memory Device
· SYSTEM Error Code
· Trouble Hardware
· Error in Exclusive Communication

177

178

CIMON-PLC

Feature of Data Logger module

n Equipped with large capacity and non-combustible Log memory (32MB)

n Standalone real time data sampling and preserving
n Upon restoration of communication system, upper Level system
(CIMON-SCADA)data can be obtained.
n Maximum 32word data can be sampled at the same Time with maximum
of 10msec interval
n Built in HMI Protocol : no necessary of optional Communication card
(RS232C,Support Modem)
n Self-diagnosis function(communication error, memory Error, capacity check, etc.)
n Trigger Logging by Sequence program
n Provide event logging (COS,VOC)

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Item

Specification

Op.Temp.

Reference

Operating Temperature -10 ~65

St.Temp

Storage Temperature

-25 ~

Op.Hum

Operating Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

St.Hum

Storage Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency
10=
57=

Acceleration

f=
57Hz

Amplitude

Sweep

0.075mm

f=
150Hz

9.8m/s2{1G}

Vibration
In case of continuous vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

10=
f
=
57Hz
57=
f=
150Hz

Amplitude

10 times
in X,Y,Z

IEC61131-2

0.035mm
4.8m/s2{0.5G}

Quick Reference Manual

Max. shock Acc. :147 m/s{15G}
Time :11㎳
Pulse wave: Half sine wave pulse(3 times in X,Y,Z)

Shock

Noise

Square wave
impulse noise

2,000 V

Electro-static
discharge

Voltage :4kV (Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magneti
c field

27 ~500 MHz,10 V/m

Fast transient
bust noise

Power
Module

IEC61131-2

KDT Standard

Digital I/O
(24V or more)

2kV

IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-2
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-3

Digital I/O
(Less than 24V)
Analog
I/Ocomm..
Interface

1kV

IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-4

0.25kV

Environ..

No corrosive gas and no dust

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

2 or less

Cooling

Natural Air Cooling

SPECIFICATIONS
Module specification
Model
Communic
ation
Mode

Data Mode

CM1-LG32A

HMI Mode

CIMON HMI Protocol

Terminal
Mode

Text transmission

Data bit

7 / 8

Stop bit

1 / 2

Parity

Even / Odd / None

Synchronous

Asynchronous

Transmission speed

300 / 600 / 1200 / 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400

Communication method

RS232C

Modem

Cable Modem or Dial up Modem

Log memory capacity

32 Mbytes

Sampling interval

10msec ~ 327670msec

Max. Logging data size

32 Words

Log data

Block sampling or Even data

Logging method

Periodic, Trigger, Event (COS / VOC)

179

180

CIMON-PLC

Memory condition check, Communication error check, and Memory capacity
check

Built in function

Wring Precautions

· Check whether communication cable is broken before installation.
· Use the communication cable with assigned specification. The cable other than assigned may
cause communication disturbance.
· Connect communication cable correctly. Incomplete cable connection may cause serious
communication disturbance.
· As shield cable has low flexibility, it is to be branched 30cm or more away from the connector
of a communications module.
Bending perpendicularly or transforming by force may cause breaking cable or the connector
in a communication module.
In case of long-distance communication cable, wire a cable far away from power line or
induction noise.

Internal I/O table
Direction : CPU ? LG32A

Direction : CPU ? LG32A

Input

Signal Description

Output

Signal Description

Module Error

Request to clear error

Initialized

Request to clear PLC
Link status

Parameter has been saved

Quick Reference Manual

User Program Memory Device
Offset

Description

R/W

Status Code
(0=Normal, Others=Error Code)

…
4

IP Address

R/W

IP Address

R/W

Net Mask

R/W

Net Mask

R/W

PLC Link Station

PLC Link Connection

The last BACNet service IP address

The last BACNet service Port

The last Loader service IP address

The last Loader service Port

OS Version

…
63
…
255

SYSTEM Error Code

Error Code
Decimal

Hexadeciaml

0x0000

Description

No Error (Normal status)

181

182

CIMON-PLC

0x0001

DPRAM initialize error

0x0002

EEPROM is not initialized

0x0005

Not able to write to buffer memory

0x0006

Not able to read buffer memory

0x0007

A CPU module is dismounted

0x0008

Station number for PLC Link is duplicated

0x000D

Buffer is overflowed

0x000F

Access Graphic Loader over the maximum

0x0010

Not able to access EEPROM

0x0011

Sending/Receiving data size for PLC Link is exceeded

0x0012

Not able to send specialty program

0x0014

Number of PLC Link station is over the maximum

Trouble Hardware

This corresponds Error Code 1, 2, 3, 6 and 7

Quick Reference Manual

Error in Exclusive Communication

This corresponds Error Code 5

183

184

3.11

CIMON-PLC

CIMON-PLC Digital Inputs
Modules :
· CM1-XD16A
· CM1-XD32C
· CM1-XA08A
· CM1- XA08B
Contents :
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

Quick Reference Manual

· GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
· MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
· Front view
· Front view
· CONNECTION TYPE
· WIRING DIAGRAM
· FEATURES AND OPERATION
· BEFORE USING
· SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (1)
· SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (2)
· OUTWARD DIMENSIONS

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item

Specification

Op.Temp.

Reference

Operating Temperature -10 ~65

St.Temp

Storage Temperature

-25 ~

Op.Hum

Operating Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

St.Hum

Storage Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency
10=
57=

Acceleration

f=
57Hz

Amplitude

Sweep

0.075mm

f=
150Hz

9.8m/s2{1G}

Vibration
In case of continuous vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

10=
f
=
57Hz
57=
f=
150Hz
Shock

Noise

Amplitude

10 times
in X,Y,Z

0.035mm
4.8m/s2{0.5G}

Max. shock Acc. :147 m/s{15G}
Time :11㎳
Pulse wave: Half sine wave pulse(3 times in X,Y,Z)
Square wave
impulse noise

2,000 V

Electro-static
discharge

Voltage :4kV (Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magneti
c field

27 ~500 MHz,10 V/m

Fast transient

IEC61131-2

Power

Digital I/O

IEC61131-2

KDT Standard
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-2
IEC1131-2
IEC1000-4-3

Digital I/O

IEC1131-2

185

186

CIMON-PLC

Module

(Less than 24V)
Analog
I/Ocomm..
Interface

(24V or more)

bust noise
2kV

1kV

Environ..

No corrosive gas and no dust

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

2 or less

Cooling

Natural Air Cooling

IEC1000-4-4

0.25kV

MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
DC INPUT
ITEM

Input Type

CM1-XD16A

CM1-XD32C

Both SINK and SOURCE
(16 point)

Both SINK and SOURCE
(32 point) 2A

Rated input Voltage

DC 24V

Rated input
Current

4 mA

On Voltage/
On Current

DC 19V / 4mA

Off Voltage/
Off Current

DC 11V / 1mA

Response
Time

Off->On

5ms or less

On->Off

5ms or less

No.of Occupied Points

16 Points

Common Type
Indication Current

32 Points
18-Point / 1 COM

60mA

100mA

Action Indication

LED is on when input is set

Insulation Type

Photo-Coupler

AC INPUT
ITEM
CM1-XA08A
No. of Outputs
Rated input Voltage

CM1-XA08B
8 Points

AC200- 240V

AC90 -130V

Quick Reference Manual

Rated input
Current

9mA

5mA

On Voltage

AC 160V

AC 80V

Off Current

AC 60V

AC 30V

Response
Time

Off->On

5ms or less

On->Off

5ms or less

Common Type

8-Point / 1 COM

Internal Current

30mA

Action Indication

LED is on when input is set

Insulation Type

Photo-Coupler

FRONT VIEW

187

188

CIMON-PLC

The tightening torque if 6.99 in. 1b
USE COPPER OF COPPER-CLAD ALUMINUM CONDUTORS
“Class 2, adjacent to coltage ration(30V max.)”

FRONT VIEW

Quick Reference Manual

CONNECTION TYPE

189

190

CIMON-PLC

CM1-XD16A and CM1-XD32C are used for both Sink and Source

WIRING DIAGRAM

Quick Reference Manual

191

192

CIMON-PLC

FEATURES AND OPERATION
All modules are photo-coupler- insulated.
LED indication enables to make sure the operation of a module
Terminal block type and one-touch module loading type lead Easy maintenance.
CM1-XD16A and XD32C are DC24V input module.
CM1-XA08A is AC 220V input module and CM1-XA08B is AC 110V input module.

Quick Reference Manual

193

BEFORE USING
Please use after understanding the wire diagram including Rated voltage and terminal
arrangement
Do not touch in the status that the power source is supplied (It is prohibited to mount and
dismount modules.)
Tighten the screws for terminal connection after turning off The power source
In case of tightening the screws of a terminal, tighten firmly According to the rated torque
Earth FG terminal in the third class, which is exclusive for PLC.
Design a system putting an input signal line 100mm or more Away from a high voltage line
and a power line not to
receive the Influence by the variation of noise or magnetic field.
Under installation environment with a log of vibration, prevent a PLC from vibration
Take care that dregs are not put into a module case. Do not dismount of disassemble a
module

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (1)
In case of connection to a terminal block without contact Connector, the uncovered part of
a wire is to be 6mm to 8mm.
And take care that uncovered metal part of a wire is pushed out From a terminal block

194

CIMON-PLC

In case of a twisted wire, take care that it is not loosed.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (2)

Use a cable for outside input signal of output converter Module differently from a cable for
AC to prevent the influence
Of surge or induction noise occurring from AC
Select a cable, considering ambient temperature, allowable current.

AWG22(0.3mm2) or

more cable is recommended.
The wiring close to heat-generation device or material and directly Contacted with oil for
long time may cause short
circuit or breakdown or malfunction. In case of the installation environment with a lot of
vibration, prevent a PLC from the vibration.
The wiring together with high-voltage line or power line may cause Malfunction or
breakdown due to induction jam.
Design the wring 100mm or more away from a high voltage line or a power line not to
Receive the influence by the variation
of noise or magnetic field.
Do not dismount or disassemble a module.

OUTWARD DIMENSIONS
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

Quick Reference Manual

( UNIT : mm )

3.12

CIMON-PLC Digital Outputs
Modules :
· CM1-YR16A
· CM1-YS08A
· CM1-YT16A
· CM1-YT16B
· CM1-YT32A
· CM1-YT32B
Contents :
· GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
· MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
· FRONT VIEW
· CONNECTION TYPE
· WIRING DIAGRAM
· SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (1)

195

196

CIMON-PLC

· SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (2)
· BEFORE USING
· OUTWARD DIMENSIONS

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Item

Specification

Op.Temp.

Reference

Operating Temperature -10 ~65

St.Temp

Storage Temperature

-25 ~

Op.Hum

Operating Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

St.Hum

Storage Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency
10=
57=

Acceleration

f=
57Hz

Amplitude

Sweep

0.075mm

f=
150Hz

9.8m/s2{1G}

Vibration
In case of continuous vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

10=
f
=
57Hz
57=
f=
150Hz
Shock

Noise

10 times
in X,Y,Z

Amplitude
0.035mm

4.8m/s2{0.5G}

Max. shock Acc. :147 m/s{15G}
Time :11㎳
Pulse wave: Half sine wave pulse(3 times in X,Y,Z)
Square wave
impulse noise

2,000 V

Electro-static
discharge

Voltage :4kV (Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magneti
c field

27 ~500 MHz,10 V/m

Fast transient
bust noise

IEC61131-2

Power
Module

2kV

Digital I/O
(24V or more)

1kV

Environ..

No corrosive gas and no dust

Altitude

2,000m or less

IEC61131-2

KDT Standard
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-2
IEC1131-2
IEC1000-4-3

Digital I/O
(Less than 24V)
Analog
I/Ocomm..
Interface

IEC1131-2
IEC1000-4-4

0.25kV

Quick Reference Manual

Pollution

2 or less

Cooling

Natural Air Cooling

MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
RELAY OUTPUT

SSR OUTPUT

CM1-YR16A

CM1-YS08A

No. of Outputs

16 Points

8 Points

Rated input Voltage

DC12/24V AC220V

AD100-240V

1 Point

1 Com

Off->On

10ms or less

1 ms or less

On->Off

5ms or less

0.5cycle+1ms or less

No.of Occupied Points

16 Points

32 Points

Common Type

8Point / 1 COM

Current Consumption

250 mA

120 mA

Indication

LED on if input on

Insulation

Relay

Photo

Leaked Current off

2mA

ITEM

Rated
input

Response
Time

Transistor Output
ITEM
CM1-YT16A / YT16B

CM1-YT32A / YT32B

No. of Outputs

16 Points

32 Points

Rated input Voltage

DC 12-24V

DC12-24V

1 Points

0.5A

0.2A

1Com

Rated
input

Response
Time

Off->On

1ms or less

On->Off

1ms or less

No. of Occupied
Points

16 Points

32Points

Common Type

16Point / 1 COM

32Point / 1 COM

197

198

CIMON-PLC

Current Consumption

110mA

130mA

Indication

LED on if input on

Insulation

Photo-Coupler

FRONT VIEW

Quick Reference Manual

The tightening torque if 6.99 in. 1b
USE COPPER OF COPPER-CLAD ALUMINUM CONDUTORS
“Class 2, adjacent to coltage ration(30V max.)”

CONNECTION TYPE

199

200

CIMON-PLC

CM1-XD16A and CM1-XD32C are used for both Sink and Source

WIRING DIAGRAM

Quick Reference Manual

201

202

CIMON-PLC

Quick Reference Manual

203

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (1)

AWG22(0.3mm2) or

204

CIMON-PLC

The wiring together with high-voltage line or power line may cause Malfunction or
breakdown due to induction jam.
Design the wring 100mm or more away from a high voltage line or a power line not to
Receive the influence by the variation
of noise or magnetic field.
Do not dismount or disassemble a module.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (2)
In case of connection to a terminal block without contact Connector, the uncovered part of
a wire is to be 6mm to 8mm.
And take care that uncovered metal part of a wire is pushed out From a terminal block

In case of a twisted wire, take care that it is not loosed.

BEFORE USING

Please use after understanding the wire diagram including Rated voltage and terminal arrangement
Do not touch in the status that the power source is supplied (It is prohibited to mount and dismount

Quick Reference Manual

205

modules.)
In case of tightening the screws of a terminal, tighten firmly According to the rated torque
Earth FG terminal in the third class, which is exclusive for PLC.
In case of the load of high open-close frequency, high capacity or low power factor by coil load of
electromagnet,
use a SSR output module (In case of using a relay output module, the life span of will shorten.)
In case of driving Load L, the maximum open-close frequency is To be on and off for 1 second or more

OUTWARD DIMENSIONS

( UNIT : mm )

3.13

CIMON-PLC Combination I/O module
Modules :
· CM1-XY16DR
Contents :
· GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
· Module SPECIFICATIONS

206

CIMON-PLC

· Front View / Wiring Diagram
· Connection Type
· Safety Precautions(1)
· Safety Precautions(2)
· Outward Dimension
· Before Using

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Item

Specification

Op.Temp.

Reference

Operating Temperature -10 ~65

St.Temp

Storage Temperature

-25 ~

Op.Hum

Operating Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

St.Hum

Storage Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency
10=
57=

Acceleration

f=
57Hz

Amplitude

Sweep

0.075mm

f=
150Hz

9.8m/s2{1G}

Vibration
In case of continuous vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

10=
f
=
57Hz
57=
f=
150Hz
Shock

Noise

10 times
in X,Y,Z

Amplitude
0.035mm

4.8m/s2{0.5G}

Max. shock Acc. :147 m/s{15G}
Time :11㎳
Pulse wave: Half sine wave pulse(3 times in X,Y,Z)
Square wave
impulse noise

2,000 V

Electro-static
discharge

Voltage :4kV (Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magneti
c field

27 ~500 MHz,10 V/m

Fast transient
bust noise

IEC61131-2

Power
Module

Digital I/O
(24V or more)

IEC61131-2

KDT Standard

Digital I/O
(Less than 24V)
Analog
I/Ocomm..
Interface

IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-2
IEC1131-2
IEC1000-4-3

IEC1131-2
IEC1000-4-4

Quick Reference Manual

2kV

1kV

207

0.25kV

Environ..

No corrosive gas and no dust

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

2 or less

Cooling

Natural Air Cooling

Module SPECIFICATIONS

CM1-XY16DR
Item

INPUT

OUTPUT

8 Point

Both SINK and SOURCE

Relay

Rated input
Voltage

DC 24V

Rated Load
Voltage

DC12/24V
AC220V

4mA

On Voltage /
On Current

DC19V/4mA

On Voltage /
On Current

DC11V/1mA

No. of I/O Points

Rated Current

Re
spo Off -> On
nse
tim On -> Off
e
Common Type
Action
indication
Insulation Type

Front View / Wiring Diagram

or less

8 Points / 1COM

LED is on when input or output is set
Photo-Coupler

Relay

208

CIMON-PLC

· The tightening torque of 6.99 in 1b
· USE COPPER OR COPPER-CLAD ALUMINUM CONDUCTORS
· "Class 2, adjacent to voltage rating (30V max.)"

Connection Type

Quick Reference Manual

209

* CM1-XY16DR is used for both Sink and Source

Safety Precautions(1)
1. In case of connection to a terminal block without contact connector the uncovered part of a wire is to be
6mm to 8mm.
And take care that the uncovered metal part of a wire is pushed out from a terminal block

210

CIMON-PLC

2. In case of a twisted wire, take care that it is not loosed

Safety Precautions(2)
· Use a cable for outside input signal of output converter module differently from a cable for AC to prevent
the influence of surge or
induction noise occurring from AC.
· Select a cable, considering ambient temperature, allowable current. AWG22(0.3mm2) or more cable is
recommended.
· The wiring close to heat-generating device or material and directly contacted with oil for long time may
cause short circuit or
breakdown or malfunction. In case of the installation environment with a lot of vibration, prevent a PLC
from the vibration
· The wiring together with high-voltage line or power line may cause malfunction or breakdown due to
induction jam.
Design the wring100mm or more away from a high voltage line or a power line not to receive the
influence by the variation of noise
or magnetic field.
· Do not dismount or disassemble a module

Quick Reference Manual

211

Outward Dimension

( UNIT : mm )

Before Using
· Please use after understanding the wire diagram including raged voltage.
· Do not touch in the status that the power source is supplied.(It is prohibited to mount and dismount
modules.)
· Tighten the screws for terminal connection after turning off the power source.
· In case of tightening the screws of a terminal, tighten firmly according to the rated torque.
· Earth FG terminal in the third class, which is exclusive for PLC.
· Design a system putting an input signal line 100mm or more away from high voltage line and a power
line not to receive the
influence by the variation of noise or magnetic field.
· Under installation environment with a lot of vibration, prevent a PLC from vibration.
· Take care that dregs are not put into a module case.

212

3.14

CIMON-PLC

CIMON-PLC A/D Converters
Modules :
· CM1-AD04VI
· CM1-AD08I
· CM1-AD08V
Contents :
· GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
· MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
· Features and Operation
· FRONT VIEW
· WRING
· Safety Precautions
· I/O SIGNALS
· USER PROGRAM MEMORY DEVICES
· ERROR CODES
· TROUBLE SHOOTING(1)
· TROUBLE SHOOTING(2)
· OUTWARD DIMENSIONS
CIMON-PLC AD Converters Module For details see "Click"

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Item

Specification

Op.Temp.

Reference

Operating Temperature -10 ~65

St.Temp

Storage Temperature

-25 ~

Op.Hum

Operating Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

St.Hum

Storage Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency
10=

Acceleration

f=
57Hz

Amplitude

Sweep

0.075mm

Vibration
57=

f=
150Hz

9.8m/s2{1G}

10 times
in X,Y,Z

IEC61131-2

In case of continuous vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

Amplitude

Quick Reference Manual

10=
f
=
57Hz
57=
f=
150Hz
Shock

Noise

0.035mm
4.8m/s2{0.5G}

Max. shock Acc. :147 m/s{15G}
Time :11㎳
Pulse wave: Half sine wave pulse(3 times in X,Y,Z)
Square wave
impulse noise

2,000 V

Electro-static
discharge

Voltage :4kV (Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magneti
c field

27 ~500 MHz,10 V/m

Fast transient
bust noise

Power
Module

Digital I/O
(24V or more)

2kV

KDT Standard

No corrosive gas and no dust

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

2 or less

Cooling

Natural Air Cooling

IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-2
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-3

Digital I/O
(Less than 24V)
Analog
I/Ocomm..
Interface

1kV

Environ..

IEC61131-2

IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-4

0.25kV

MODULE SPECIFICATIONS

CM1-AD04VI

CM1-AD08V

CM1-AD08I

No. of Analog
Inputs

4 Points

8 Points

Analog Input

0~+5V(0~20mA)
1~+5V(4~20mA)
0 ~ +10V
-10V ~ +10V

0 ~ +5V
1 ~ +5V
0 ~ +10V
-10V~ +10V

0 ~ 20mA
4 ~ 20mA

Digital Output

0 ~ 16000(-8000 ~ 8000)

213

214

CIMON-PLC

Input

Range of
Analog Input

Max. Rresplution

Digital Output

Voltage

0 ~ +5V

312.5uV

1 ~ +5V

250uV

0~16000
-8000~8000

0 ~ +10V

625uV

Maximum
Resolution

Current

-10V~+10V

1.25mV

0 ~ 20mA

1.25m A

4 ~ 20mA

1m A

Precision

± 0.3%(Full Scale)

Conversion Rate

5mS/1ch

Absolute Max.
Input

Voltage :± 12V
Current : ± 25mA

± 12V

± 25mA

Insulation

Between input terminal and PLC: Photo-Coupler
Between channels: No

Occupied Points

16 Points

Contact Terminal

18-Point Terminal Block

Internal
Current
(mA)

+5V

+15V

-15V

Features and Operation

CM1-AD04VI is an A/D module to input 4-Ch voltage and 4-Ch current
CM1-AD08I is an A/D module to input 8–Ch current.
CM1-AD08V is an A/D module to input 8-Ch voltage.
AD04VI

0~20mA, 4~20mA, 0~5V, 1~5V, -10~10V, 0~10V

AD08I 0~20mA, 4~20mA
AD08V 0~5V, 1~5V, -10~10V, 0~10V
Average or sampling is used as the method to process input signal.

As the resolution for the digital value is selected as 1/16000, the digital values of high
resolution will be gotten.
An input signal is converted to the digital value from 0

to 16000 or from –8000 to 8000. In

Quick Reference Manual

215

case of being out of the range,
it is converted from –192 to 16191 (-8192 ~ 8191). And in case of the range, it is fixed from
0 to 16000 (-8000 ~ 8000).
To set up Offset/Gain value easily, use CICON Loader Program.

The number of this modules used for one base is not limited.

LED is on in case of normal status and blinks at the intervals of 0.3 sec in case of error.

FRONT VIEW

AD04VI : Do not use Terminal 4,8,12,16,17 and18.
In case of voltage input, use V+ terminal and COM terminal.
In case of current input, use COM terminal, connecting V+ terminal with I+
terminal.

216

CIMON-PLC

AD08I

: Do not use Terminal 17 and 18.

AD08V : Do not use Terminal 17 and 18.

WRING
Measured values are input to all the channels grouped as Terminal 1-2-3, 5-6-7, 9-10-11 and
13-14-15.

In case of voltage input
+ Terminal

- Terminal

Ch 1

Terminal 1

Terminal 3

Ch 2

Terminal 5

Terminal 7

Ch 3

Terminal 9

Terminal 11

Ch 4

Terminal 13

Terminal 15

In case of current input
+ Terminal

- Terminal

Action

Ch 1

Terminal 2

Terminal 3

Connect 1-2

Ch 2

Terminal 6

Terminal 7

Connect 5-6

Ch 3

Terminal 10

Terminal11

Connect 9-10

Ch 4

Terminal 14

Terminal 15

Connect 13-14

※ Make sure polarity is correct before analog input to a terminal. Do not use Terminal 4, 8, 12, 16, 17
and 18.

Safety Precautions
Use a cable for outside input signal of A/D converter module differently from a cable for
AC to prevent the influence of surge or induction noise occurring from AC.
Select a cable, considering ambient temperature, allowable current. AWG22(0.3mm2)
or more cable is recommended.

The wiring close to heat-generating device or material and directly contacted with oil for
long time may cause short circuit or breakdown or malfunction.

Quick Reference Manual

217

The wiring together with high-voltage line or power line may cause malfunction or breakdown
due to induction jam. Design the wring 100mm or more away from a high voltage line or a power
line not to receive the influence by the variation of noise or magnetic field.

The tightening torque if 6.99 in. 1b
USE COPPER OF COPPER-CLAD ALUMINUM CONDUTORS
“Class 2, adjacent to coltage ration(30V max.)”

I/O SIGNALS
Direction (CPU← A/D)

Direction (CPU→ A/D)

Input

Signal Name

Output

Signal Name

A/D Module Ready

Flag Indicating A/D-converted

Flag indicating operation condition
setup

Requesting to set up operation
condition

Flag indicating channel switched

Requesting to switch channel

Flag indicating offset or gain
calibration mode

Requesting to calibrate offset or gain

Assigning offset or gain mode

Not Use

Not Use
YA

Requesting to reset max. value and
min. value

Requesting to clear error

Flag indicating error in A/D module

218

CIMON-PLC

USER PROGRAM MEMORY DEVICES

Address
Description

R/W

Hexa

Deci

Enabling/disabling to A/D-convert Setup

R/W

Average time & number of times of CH.1

R/W

Average time & number of times of CH.2

R/W

Average time & number of times of CH.3

R/W

Average time & number of times of CH.4

R/W

Average time & number of times of CH.5

R/W

Average time & number of times of CH.6

R/W

Average time & number of times of CH.7

R/W

Average time & number of times of CH.8

R/W

Assigning Averaging Process

R/W

Flag Indicating A/D-converted

Digital Output Value of CH.1

Digital Output Value of CH.2

Digital Output Value of CH.3

Digital Output Value of CH.4

Digital Output Value of CH.5

10H

Digital Output Value of CH.6

11H

Digital Output Value of CH.7

12H

Digital Output Value of CH.8

13H

Error Code

14H

Set Range (CH.1~CH.4)

R/W

15H

Set Range (CH.5~CH.8)

R/W

16H

Channel to Calibrate Offset

R/W

17H

Channel to Calibrate Gain

R/W

Address
Description
Hexa

R/W

Deci

Quick Reference Manual

18H

19H

1AH

1BH

1CH

1DH

1EH

Setting up Digital Output

R/W

Not Use

Max. Value of CH.1

1FH

Min. Value of CH.1

20H

Max. Value of CH.2

21H

Min. Value of CH.2

22H

Max. Value of CH.3

23H

Min. Value of CH.3

24H

Max. Value of CH.4

25H

Min. Value of CH.4

26H

Max. Value of CH.5

27H

Min. Value of CH.5

28H

Max. Value of CH.6

29H

Min. Value of CH.6

2AH

Max. Value of CH.7

2BH

Min. Value of CH.7

2CH

Max. Value of CH.8

2DH

Min. Value of CH.8

ERROR CODES
In case of error in inputted data or in offset/gain setup, the following error code is stored
Buffer Memory “19” and LED is blinking at the intervals of 0.3 second.

If “Tool” -> “Special Card Setup” -> “A/D Card Setup” -> “Current Status” is selected,
a dialog box displaying error code will appear.

219

220

CIMON-PLC

To clear an error code, select “Error code reset” button in the “A/D Card Status” of the CICON.

□: 1CH~4CH for AD04VI, 1CH~8CH for AD08I and AD08V
△ : 0~3 for AD module

CODES
1□

DESCRIPTIONS
The case the range of input setup is wrong
The case current is set up in AD08V or voltage is set up in AD08I

2□

The case average process time is out of range

3□

The case number of average process times is out of range

4□

The case an offset value is greater than a gain value

The case offset channels and gain channels are calibrated at the same time

10△

System error (A/S required.)

TROUBLE SHOOTING(1)
Analog input values do not correspond to digital output values

Quick Reference Manual

TROUBLE SHOOTING(2)
CPU module cannot read A/S-converted values.

221

222

CIMON-PLC

OUTWARD DIMENSIONS

[ un
it : mm ]

Quick Reference Manual

3.15

CIMON-PLC D/A Converters
Modules :
· CM1-DA04V, DA08V, DA16V
· CM1-DA04I, DA08I, DA16I
· CM1-DA04VA, DA08VA, DA16VA
Contents :
· GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
· MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
· FEATURES AND OPERATION
· FRONT VIEW
· WRING
· SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
· I/O SIGNALS
· USER PROGRAM MEMORY DEVICES
· ERROR CODES
· TROUBLE SHOOTING(1)

223

224

CIMON-PLC

· TROUBLE SHOOTING(2)
· DIMENSIONS

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Item

Specification

Op.Temp.

Reference

Operating Temperature -10 ~65

St.Temp

Storage Temperature

-25 ~

Op.Hum

Operating Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

St.Hum

Storage Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency
10=
57=

Acceleration

f=
57Hz

Amplitude

Sweep

0.075mm

f=
150Hz

9.8m/s2{1G}

Vibration
In case of continuous vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

10=
f
=
57Hz
57=
f=
150Hz
Shock

Noise

10 times
in X,Y,Z

Amplitude
0.035mm

4.8m/s2{0.5G}

Max. shock Acc. :147 m/s{15G}
Time :11㎳
Pulse wave: Half sine wave pulse(3 times in X,Y,Z)
Square wave
impulse noise

2,000 V

Electro-static
discharge

Voltage :4kV (Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magneti
c field

27 ~500 MHz,10 V/m

Fast transient
bust noise

IEC61131-2

Power
Module

Digital I/O
(24V or more)

2kV

1kV

Environ..

No corrosive gas and no dust

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

2 or less

Cooling

Natural Air Cooling

IEC61131-2

KDT Standard
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-2
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-3

Digital I/O
(Less than 24V)
Analog
I/Ocomm..
Interface

IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-4

0.25kV

Quick Reference Manual

MODULE SPECIFICATIONS

No. of Analog
Output Points

(DA04V)

(DA08V)

(DA04I)

(DA08I)

4 Points

8 Points

4 Points

8 Points

Analog Output

-10V ~ +10V

Digital Input

4 ~ 20mA

-192 ~ 16191(-8192~8191)
Output Digital Input Value

Maximum
Resolution

Max. Resolution

Voltage

0 ~ 16000
(-8000~8000)

-10V ~ +10V

1.25mV

Current

0 ~ 16000
(-8000~8000)

4 ~ 20mA

1.0mA

Precision
Conversion Rate

Range of

0.1
10ms/4ch.

15ms/8ch.

10ms/4ch.

15ms/4ch.

Absolute Max.
Input

Voltage : ±12V Current : ±21mA

Insulation

Between input terminal and PLC: Photo-coupler
Between output channels: No
Between externally supplied power and analog output: No

Externally
Supplied Power

None

+24V

Occupied Point

Contact terminal

18-point Terminal Block

Internal
Current
(mA)

+5V

+15V

24V

FEATURES AND OPERATION
1) DA08I:
DA04I:
DA08V:
DA04V:

8-channel current (4~20mA) output
4-channel current (4~20mA) output
8-channel voltage (-10~10V) output
4-channel voltage (-10~10V) output.

100

225

226

CIMON-PLC

As the resolution for digital values is selected as 1/16000, the analog values of high
resolution will be gotten

3) DA converter modules are used to convert the digital values for the signed binary data (Data:
14 bits) set up in a CPU to
analog signals (Voltage or current). The digital values in the range from 0 to 16000(-8000 ~
8000) are converted to the
analog values in the range from 4 to 20mA (-10 ~ 10V)
4) If you use the CICON to set up hold or clear, DA output values will be outputted as offset
value (4mA, -10V) or
current DA output value will be kept in case that a PLC is switched from RUN mode to STOP
mode or an error occurs
in a CPU.
5) The channel disabled to convert outputs offset value (4mA,-10V).
6) To set up Offset/Gain value easily, use CICON Loader Program.
7) The number of this modules used for one base is not limited.
8) LED is on in case of normal status and blinks at the intervals of 0.3 sec in case of error.

FRONT VIEW

Quick Reference Manual

227

* DA04I, DA08I : 24V power source is to bel supplied. Connect +24V to Terminal 17 and 0V
to Terminal 18.

WRING
In case of current output
Channel

+ Terminal

- Terminal

Ch 1

Terminal 1

Terminal 2

Ch 2

Terminal 3

Terminal 4

Ch 3

Terminal 5

Terminal 6

Ch 4

Terminal 7

Terminal 8

Ch 5

Terminal 9

Terminal 10

Ch 6

Terminal 11

Terminal 12

Ch 7

Terminal 13

Terminal 14

Ch 8

Terminal 15

Terminal 16

228

CIMON-PLC

24V External Input

Terminal 17

Terminal 18

In case of voltage output
Channel

+ Terminal

- Terminal

Ch 1

Terminal 1

Terminal 2

Ch 2

Terminal 3

Terminal 4

Ch 3

Terminal 5

Terminal 6

Ch 4

Terminal 7

Terminal 8

Ch 5

Terminal 9

Terminal 10

Ch 6

Terminal 11

Terminal 12

Ch 7

Terminal 13

Terminal 14

Ch 8

Terminal 15

Terminal 16

※ In case of voltage output, do not use Terminal 17 and 18.
※ Make sure polarity is correct before analog input to a terminal

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1) Use a cable for outside input signal of D/A converter module differently from a cable for AC to
prevent the influence of surge or
induction noise occurring from AC.
2) Select a cable, considering ambient temperature, allowable current.
)~26AGW(0.405mm2) or more cable is recommended.

18AWG(0.823mm2

3) The wiring close to heat-generating device or material and directly contacted with oil for long time
may cause short circuit or
breakdown or malfunction.
4) The wiring together with high-voltage line or power line may cause malfunction or breakdown due to
induction jam.
Design the wring 100mm or more away from a high voltage line or a power line not to receive the
influence by the variation of
noise or magnetic field.

I/O SIGNALS
Signal Direction(CPU← D/A)

Signal Direction(CPU→ D/A)

Input

Signal Name

Output

Signal Name

D/A module Ready

Not use

Quick Reference Manual

Y4
Not use

229

Flag indicating operation condition setup

Requesting to set up operation condition

Flag indicating the channel switched

Requesting to switch an channel

Flag indicating the set value modified

Requesting to modify an set value

Flag indicating offset or gain calibration
mode

Requesting to calibrate offset or gain

Not use

Assigning offset or gain calibration mode

Flag indicating an error in D/A module

Requesting to clear an error

USER PROGRAM MEMORY DEVICES
Address

Name

Initial
Value

R/W

Hexa

Deci

Enabling/disabling to D/A-convert setup

R/W

Digital Value of CH.1

R/W

Digital Value of CH.2

R/W

Digital Value of CH.3

R/W

Digital Value of CH.4

R/W

Digital Value of CH.5

R/W

Digital Value of CH.6

R/W

Digital Value of CH.7

R/W

Digital Value of CH.8

R/W

Error Code

Hold/Clear

R/W

Set value check code of CH.1

Set value check code of CH.2

230

CIMON-PLC

Set value check code of CH.3

Set value check code of CH.4

Set value check code of CH.5

10H

Set value check code of CH.6

11H

Set value check code of CH.7

12H

Set value check code of CH.8

13H

Channel to Calibrate offset

R/W

14H

Channel to calibrate gain

R/W

15H

Calibrated offset and gain

R/W

16H

Setting up digital input type

R/W

17H

Enabling/disabling to D/A-convert setup

R/W

ERROR CODES
In case of error in inputted data or in offset/gain setup, the following error code is stored Buffer
Memory 19? and LED is
blinking at the intervals of 0.2 second.
If "Tool"? ->" Special Card Setup "? -> " A/D Card Setup "? -> " Current Status"? is selected, a
dialog box displaying error code will appear.
To clear an error code, select " Error code reset"? button in the " A/D Card Status" of the CICON.

Error Code

Description

1•

The case a set digital value is out of maximum range (16191, 8191)

2•

The case a set digital value is out of minimum range (-192, -8192)

The case an offset value is greater than a gain value

The case both an offset and an gain are calibrated or plural channels are set up at
the same time

The case a calibrated digital value is out of range when calibrating offset/gain

10△

System error(A/S required)

• : CH 1~ CH 4 for DA04I and DA04V / CH1~ CH 8 for DA08I and DA08V
△ : 0~3 for DA module

TROUBLE SHOOTING(1)

Quick Reference Manual

TROUBLE SHOOTING(2)

231

232

CIMON-PLC

DIMENSIONS

(Unit : mm)

Quick Reference Manual

3.16

CIMON-PLC Positioning Module
Modules :
· CM1-PS02A
Contents :
· GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
· MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
· Feature
· Internal I/O table
· Front View
· Connector Pin Description
· Input Signal
· Output Signal
· Input Signal Specification
· Output Signal Specification
· Wiring Example
· Wiring Precaution
· Precaution
· Dimension

233

234

CIMON-PLC

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Item

Specification

Op.Temp.

Reference

Operating Temperature -10 ~65

St.Temp

Storage Temperature

-25 ~

Op.Hum

Operating Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

St.Hum

Storage Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency
10=
57=
Vibration

Acceleration

f=
57Hz

Amplitude

Sweep

0.075mm

f=
150Hz

9.8m/s2{1G}

In case of continuous vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

10=
f
=
57Hz
57=
f=
150Hz
Shock

Noise

10 times
in X,Y,Z

Amplitude
0.035mm

4.8m/s2{0.5G}

Max. shock Acc. :147 m/s{15G}
Time :11㎳
Pulse wave: Half sine wave pulse(3 times in X,Y,Z)
Square wave
impulse noise

2,000 V

Electro-static
discharge

Voltage :4kV (Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magneti
c field

27 ~500 MHz,10 V/m

Fast transient
bust noise

IEC61131-2

Power
Module

Digital I/O
(24V or more)

2kV

1kV

Environ..

No corrosive gas and no dust

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

2 or less

Cooling

Natural Air Cooling

IEC61131-2

KDT Standard
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-2
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-3

Digital I/O
(Less than 24V)
Analog
I/Ocomm..
Interface

IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-4

0.25kV

Quick Reference Manual

235

MODULE SPECIFICATIONS

Module Name

CM1-PS02A

Axis

2 Axis

Interpolation

2Axis Linear/Circular Interpolation

Control Functions

Point to Point, Path, Speed

Control Unit

Pulse, mm, inch, degree

Position Data

600 / Axis

Coordinate

Absolute/ Incremental

Backup

Flash Rom Backup

Control Type

Position Control

Absolute/Incremental

Path Control

Absolute/Incremental

• Absolute
-214748364.8 ~ 214748364.7 ㎛
-21474.83648 ~ 21474.83647 inch 0 ~ 359.9999 degree
Positioning Range • -2147483648 ~ 2147483647 pulse
Incremental
-214748364.8 ~ 214748364.7 ㎛
-21474.83648 ~ 21474.83647 inch 0 ~ 359.9999 degree
-2147483648 ~ 2147483647 pulse
0.01~ 20,000,000.00 mm/min
Speed Command 0.001 ~ 2,000,000.000 inch/min
0.001 ~ 2,000,000.000 degree/min
1 ~ 1,000,000 pulse/sec
Acc./Dec.
Process

Trapezoidal / S-pattern

External Cabling

40 Pin Connector

Max. Pulse
Output

1 Mpps (Line Drive)

Max. Distance

10 m

Power Consume

240 mA / 5V

I/O Occupation

16 Points

Weight

168 g

Feature

CM1-PSnnZ module is a pulse output modules for CP and XP series of CIMON PLCs.
PS02A type supports differential driver system pulse output. PSnnX is capable of driving not
only motor but also stepping motor.
1) Control Axis
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

236

CIMON-PLC

CM1-PS02A provides 2 axis pulse outputs and supports linear/circular interpolation.
2) Dedicated Instructions
CP and XP series of CIMON PLCs are embedding several dedicated instructions for PSnnX
module.
These instructions provide easy and powerful control functions.
3) Manual operation
PSnnX module supports various kinds of manual operations, such as jog operation, inching
operations.
And this module supports external connection of MPG(manual pulse generatior).
4) PLC Compatibility
CP and XP CPUs of CIMON PLC supporting PSnnX module.

Internal I/O table
Direction : CPU ← PSnnX

Direction : CPU → PSnnX

Input

Signal Description

Output

Signal Description

Module Ready

CPU Ready

Module Error

Command Ack. (Axis 1)

Busy (Axis 1)

MPG Run (Axis 1)

Error (Axis 1)

Forward JOG (Axis 1)

Positioning Done (Axis 1)

Reverse JOG (Axis 1)

M code ON (Axis 1)

Stop (Axis 1)

Positioning Start (Axis 1)

Command Ack. (Axis 2)

Positioning Start (Axis 2)

Busy (Axis 2)

MPG Run (Axis 2)

Error (Axis 2)

Forward JOG (Axis 2)

Positioning Done (Axis 2)

Reverse JOG (Axis 2)

M code ON (Axis 2)

Stop (Axis 2)

Front View

Quick Reference Manual

Connector Pin Description
Connector

Signal

Pin
A1

FP+

FP-

RP+

Description

Pulse output
(Line Drive Type)

RP-

LMT U

LMT L

Lower Limit Input

DOG

Near Point DOG Input

STOP

External STOP Input

ECMD

External Command Input

COM1

30
28

29
27

COMMON
(LMT U, LMT L, DOG, STOP, ECMD)

Upper Limit Input

RDY

Ready Signal Input from Driver

COM2

COMMON (RDY)

ZERO24

Zero Signal Input (+24V)

ZERO05

Zero Signal Input (+5V)

COM3

COMMON (ZERO24, ZERO05)

CLEAR

Deviation Counter Clear Output

COM4

COMMON (CLEAR)

MPG A+

MPG/ENCODER A+ 입 력

MPG A-

MPG/ENCODER A- 입 력

MPG B+

MPG/ENCODER B+ 입 력

MPG B-

MPG/ENCODER B- 입 력

237

238

CIMON-PLC

* Deviation counter clear is an output signal of PSnnX module.

Input Signal

Output Signal

Quick Reference Manual

239

Input Signal Specification

Signal

Rated input

Working
voltage
range

24V DC
/ 5mA

19.2-26.4
Vdc

ON
OFF
Voltage/Cur Voltage/Cu
rent
rrent

Input
resistance

DOG
LMT U
LMT L

19Vdc/4mA
or more

11V DC
/ 1mA

2.7kΩ

STOP
ECMD
5Vdc/7mA

4.25-5.5Vd 2.5Vdc/3mA 1Vdc/1mA
c
or more
or less

940Ω

MPG Phase A
(MPG
A+,MPG A-)
MPG Phase B
(MPG
B+,MPG B-)

RDY

24Vdc/5mA

19.2-26.4
Vdc

19Vdc/4mA
11Vdc/1mA
or more

2.8kΩ

Response
Time

240

CIMON-PLC

5Vdc/7mA

4.25-5.5
Vdc

2.5Vdc/3mA 1Vdc/1mA
or more
or less

600Ω

24V DC
/ 5mA

19.2V-26.4
Vdc

19Vdc/4mA
11Vdc/1mA
or more

2.7kΩ

Zero
(Encoder
Phase Z)
(ZERO 5)
(ZERO 24)

Output Signal Specification

Signal

Rated
voltage

Working
voltag

Max.
Current/Inrus
h current

Voltage
Drop at ON

Leakage
current at
OFF

5-24 Vdc

4.75-26.4
Vdc

50mA(1
point)/
0.2A(10ms or
less)

0.5 Vdc

0.1mA
or less

Differential driver equivalent to AM26C31

? The type of output pulse(CW/CCW, Pulse/Sign) is select by basic
parameter settings
Pulse Output
(CW/PULSE)
Pulse Sign
(CCW/SIGN)

Pulse
Output
Mode

Output Signal Level
Positive Logic
Forward

Reverse

Negative Logic
Forward

Reverse

CW
CCW
Pulse
Sign

Deviation
Counter
(CLEAR)

5-24 Vdc

4.75-26.4
Vdc

0.1A(1 point)/
0.4A(10ms or
less)

1 Vdc

0.1mA
or less

Wiring Example

Mitsubishi MR-J2S Series

LG Otis FD5000 Series

Quick Reference Manual

241

242

CIMON-PLC

Metronix APD-VS Series

Quick Reference Manual

243

Wiring Precaution
1) Please use after understanding the wire diagram including rated voltage and terminal
arrangement.
2) The maximum distance from PSnnX to motor driver is 10m. Do not wire the device over
maximum distance and use a
general shielded cable.
3) The wiring together with high-voltage line or power line may cause malfunction or
breakdown due to induction jam.
Design the wiring 100mm or more away from a high voltage line or a power line not to
receive the influence by the variation
of noise or magnetic field.
4) Class 2, adjacent to voltage rating (30V max.).
5) Select a cable, considering ambient temperature, allowable current. Copper conductors in
a size range of
(3.31mm2) to 22AWG(3.324mm2) cable is recommended.

244

CIMON-PLC

6) The wiring close to heat-generating device or material and directly contacted with oil for a
long time may cause
short circuit or breakdown or malfunction. In case of the installation environment with a lot
o f vibration, prevent a PLC
from the vibration.

Precaution
1) Use the PLC in an environment that meets the general specifications given in the User’s
Manual of the PSnnX module
being used.
2) Do not dismount or disassemble a module.
3) Do not touch in the status that the power source is supplied. (It is prohibited to mount and
dismount module.
Take care that dregs are not put into a module case.

Dimension

( Unit : mm )

3.17

CIMON-PLC High Speed Convertrs
Modules :
· CM1-HS02B

Quick Reference Manual

245

· CM1-HS02D
Contents :
· GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
· MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
· FEATURES AND OPERATION
· FRONT VIEW
· EXAMPLES OF WIRING
· SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
· I/O SIGNALS
· USER PROGRAM DATA DEVICES
· INPUT TERMINAL
· PULSE INPUT TYPES
· PULSE INPUT TYPES
· COUNTING FORMS
· DIMENSIONS

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Item

Specification

Op.Temp.

Reference

Operating Temperature -10 ~65

St.Temp

Storage Temperature

-25 ~

Op.Hum

Operating Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

St.Hum

Storage Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency
10=
57=

Acceleration

f=
57Hz

Amplitude

Sweep

0.075mm

f=
150Hz

9.8m/s2{1G}

Vibration
In case of continuous vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

10=
f
=
57Hz
57=
f=
150Hz
Shock

Amplitude

10 times
in X,Y,Z

IEC61131-2

0.035mm
4.8m/s2{0.5G}

Max. shock Acc. :147 m/s{15G}
Time :11㎳
Pulse wave: Half sine wave pulse(3 times in X,Y,Z)

IEC61131-2

246

CIMON-PLC

Noise

Square wave
impulse noise

2,000 V

Electro-static
discharge

Voltage :4kV (Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magneti
c field

27 ~500 MHz,10 V/m

Fast transient
bust noise

Power
Module

Digital I/O
(24V or more)

2kV

KDT Standard

No corrosive gas and no dust

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

2 or less

Cooling

Natural Air Cooling

IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-3

Digital I/O
(Less than 24V)
Analog
I/Ocomm..
Interface

1kV

Environ..

IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-2

IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-4

0.25kV

MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
Model
Item

CM1-HS02B

CM1-HS02D

No.of I/O Points

16 Points

No. of Channels

2 Channels

Phase
Counter
Input
Signal Level
Signal
( ф A,ф B)

1-p Input/ 2-p Input

Line Drive Input

5/12/24 V DC 2~5mA

RS-422A(Line Drive)

Counting
Rate

200 kPPS

Counting
Range

32-bit signed binary values
(-2147483648~2147483647)

Form

Up/Down Presetting Counting + Ring Counting

Countin
g
Min. Interval of
Counting
Pulse(uS)
(Duty ratio
50%)
Range of
Coincid Comparison
ence
Output Comparison
Outer
Input

Presetting

32-bit signed binary values
Set Value < Counted Value
Set Value = Counted Value
Set Value > Counted Value
5/12/24 V DC 2~5mA

Quick Reference Manual

247

Starting
Function
Outer Coincidence
Output
Output

Transistor (Sink Type) Output
Operating Voltage 12 ~ 24V

FEATURES AND OPERATION
1) Pulses in wide range can be counted. (-2147483648 ~ 2147483647) Counted values are stored in a
buffer memory in signed 32-bit
binary value.
2) Pulse input type can be selected.
1-p input 1-m, 1-p input 1-m (Counting down by S/W), 1-p input 2-m, 1-p input 2-m (Counting down
by S/W),
CW/CCW, 2-p input 1-m, 2-p input 2-m, 2-p input 4-m
3) Counting form can be selected.
- Linear counting
Input pulses can be counted from -2147483648 to 2147483647. In case that a value is out of the
range, overflow occurs.
- Ring counting
Input pulses are counted repeatedly between the max. value and the min. value of ring counting.
4) Coincidence output is available.(2 points/channel)
Comparing a current value with a set coincidence comparison value, the output can be on/off.
5) Four counting functions can be selected.
- Latch counting
- Sampling counting
- Periodic pulse counting
- Disabling to count
6) Presetting and counting function can be processed by outer control signals.

FRONT VIEW

248

CIMON-PLC

EXAMPLES OF WIRING
1) In case That an encoder is open collector output type (PNP)

Quick Reference Manual

249

2) In case that an encoder is voltage output type

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1) Use a cable for outside input signal of HSC converter module differently from a cable for AC to
prevent the influence of surge
or induction noise occurring from AC.
2)
Select
a
cable,
considering
ambient
temperature,
allowable
current.
18AWG(0.823)~26AWG(0.405) or more cable is recommended.

250

CIMON-PLC

3) The wiring close to heat-generating device or material and directly contacted with oil for long
time may cause short circuit or breakdown
or malfunction. In case of the installation environment with a lot of vibration, prevent a PLC
from the vibration.
4) The wiring together with high-voltage line or power line may cause malfunction or breakdown
due to induction jam. Design the wring
100mm or more away from a high voltage line or a power line not to receive the influence by
the variation of noise or magnetic field.

I/O SIGNALS
Signal Direction(CPU← HSC)
In

Signal Name

Signal Direction(CPU→ HSC)
Out

Signal Name

DPRAM ACK Signal

Requesting to Reset Coincidence
Signal 1

Counted Value Greater 1

Requesting to Preset

Counted Value Coincident 1

Enabling Coincidence Output

Counted Value Less 1

DRRAM REQUEST
CH1

Detecting Request for Outer
Presetting

Enabling to Count

Counted Value Greater 2

Requesting to Reset Detecting Outer
Presetting

Counted Value Coincident 2

Requesting to Start to Count

Counted Value Less 2

Requesting to Reset Coincidence
Signal 2

Counted Value Greater 1

Requesting to Reset Coincidence
Signal 1

Counted Value Coincident 1

Requesting to Preset

Counted Value Less 1

Enabling Coincidence Output

Detecting Request for Outer
Presetting

CH1

CH2

DRRAM REQUEST
CH2

Counted value Greater 2

Enabling to Count

Counted Value Coincident 2

Requesting to Reset Detecting Outer
Presetting

Counted Value Less 2

Requesting to Start to Count

DPRAM ACK Signal

Requesting to Reset Coincidence
Signal 2

USER PROGRAM DATA DEVICES
Address

Set Value

Initial
Value R/W

Quick Reference Manual

CH1

251

CH2

He De He De
0H 0 20H 32

Currently Counted Value (Signed 32-bit)

2H 2 22H 34 Flag Indicating Overflow Detected (If overflow in linear 0
counting, 1)

3H 3 23H 35 Flag Indicating Sampling-counted or Periodic-pulse-counted

R/W

1A H 26 3AH 58 Counting Function Setup
(0:Disable 1:Latch 2:Sampling 3:Periodic-pulse)

R/W

1B H 27 3BH 59 Sampling/Periodic Time

R/W

1C H 28 3CH 60 Counting Mode (0:Linear 1:Ring)

R/W

1E H 30 3EH 62 Counting down by S/W

R/W

1F H 31 3FH 63 Not Use

1H 1 21H 33

4H 4 24H 36
5H 5 25H 37
6H 6 26H 38
7H 7 27H 39
8H 8 28H 40
9H 9 29H 41
AH 10 2AH 42
BH 11 2BH 43

Latch-counted Value

L
H

Sampling-counted Value

L
H

Previous Periodic-pulse-counted Value

L
H

Current Periodic-pulse-counted Value

L
H

CH 12 2CH 44
DH 13 2DH 45
EH 14 2EH 46

Not Use

FH 15 2FH 47
10H 16 30H 48
11H 17 31H 49

Preset Value (Signed 32-bit)

L
H

12H 18 32H 50 Set Coincidence Comparison Value 1
13H 19 33H 51 (Signed 32-bit)

14H 20 34H 52 Set Coincidence Comparison Value 2
15H 21 35H 53 (Signed 32-bit)

16 H 22 36H 54

17 H 23 37H 55

Set Lowest Limit Value of Ring Counting (Signed 32-bit)

18 H 24 38H 56 Set Upper Limit Value of Ring Counting
19 H 25 39H 57 (signed 32-bit)

1D H 29 3DH 61

Pulse Input Method
(0:1-p 1-m 1:1-p 1-m (Counting down By S/W)
2:1-p 2-m 3:1-p 2-m (Counting down By S/W)
4:CW/CCW 5:2-p 1-m 6:2-p 2-m 7:2-p 4-m)

L
H

252

CIMON-PLC

INPUT TERMINAL
Signal

Terminal

Signal

Pin No.
1

Phase A Pulse Input 24V

Phase A Pulse Input 12V

Phase A Pulse Input 5V

AB common

Phase B Pulse Input 24V

Phase B Pulse Input 12V

Phase B Pulse Input 5V

Presetting Input 24V

CH2 Presetting Input 12V

Presetting Input 5V
Presetting, Starting Function .
Input Common

Presetting Input 5V
Presetting, Starting Function .

Input Common

14
33

Start Function Input 24V

Start Function Input 12V

Start Function Input 5V

Coincidence Output 1

Coincidence Output 2

24V
Input

Pin No.

Phase A Pulse Input 24V

CH1 Presetting Input 12V

Power

Terminal

36,18

Power
Input 0V

37,19

PULSE INPUT TYPES

Quick Reference Manual

PULSE INPUT TYPES

253

254

CIMON-PLC

COUNTING FORMS
Linear Counting
Input pulses are counted in the range from -2147483648 to 2147483647

Ring Counting
Input pulses are counted repeatedly between the min. value and the max. value. Overflow error

Quick Reference Manual

255

does not occur.

DIMENSIONS

( Unit : mm)

256

3.18

CIMON-PLC

CIMON-PLC Loadcell Module
Modules :
· CM1-WG02A
· CM1-WG04A
Contents :
· GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
· MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
· Feature and Operation
· Weighing Module
· Wiring
· Internal I/O Table
· User Program Memory Devices(1)
· User Program Memory Devices(2)
· User Program Memory Devices(3)
· User Program Memory Devices(4)
· User Program Memory Devices(5)
· Error Code(1)
· Error Code(2)

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Item

Specification

Op.Temp.

Reference

Operating Temperature -10 ~65

St.Temp

Storage Temperature

-25 ~

Op.Hum

Operating Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

St.Hum

Storage Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency
10=

Vibration

57=

Acceleration

f=
57Hz

Amplitude

Sweep

0.075mm

f=
150Hz

9.8m/s2{1G}

In case of continuous vibration
Frequency
10=
f
=
57Hz

Acceleration

10 times
in X,Y,Z

IEC61131-2

Amplitude
0.035mm

Quick Reference Manual

57=
f=
150Hz

Noise

4.8m/s2{0.5G}

Max. shock Acc. :147 m/s{15G}
Time :11㎳
Pulse wave: Half sine wave pulse(3 times in X,Y,Z)

Shock

Square wave
impulse noise

2,000 V

Electro-static
discharge

Voltage :4kV (Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magneti
c field

27 ~500 MHz,10 V/m

Fast transient
bust noise

Power
Module

Digital I/O
(24V or more)

2kV

No corrosive gas and no dust

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

2 or less

Cooling

Natural Air Cooling

IEC61131-2

KDT Standard
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-2
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-3

Digital I/O
(Less than 24V)
Analog
I/Ocomm..
Interface

1kV

Environ..

0.25kV

MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
Specification
Item

Input Channel

WG02A

WG04A

2 Channel

4 Channel

Load Cell Type

Strain Gage

Insulation Method

Photo-Coupler

External Power Supply

DC24V, 2Watts

Load Cell Excitation
Voltage

DC5V ±5%
(Up to 4x350Ω Loadcells / Channel)

Full Scale Input Signal

3.6mV/V

A/D Conversion Method

Sigma Delta

A/D Converter Resolution

24 bits (1/1,600,000,000)

A/D Program Resolution

1/6,000,000

Weigh value resolution

1/10,000 (Max.)

A/D Conversion Speed

257

20 times/sec

10 times/sec

IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-4

258

CIMON-PLC

Feature and Operation

WG02A and WG04A modules provide the functionality for weighing system. These modules can be
connected with various kinds
of loadcell units. WG04A can be connected with up to 4 independent loadcell signals at the same time.
Weighing modules have following characteristics. :
1) Max. 4 Channels of independent signal inputs. (WG04A)
2) Supplies 5Vdc power to the connected loadcells for generating input signals.
3) 24 bits A/D converter
4) Provides 1 / 6,000,000 effective resolution.
5) Provides 6 internal ready to use batch programs.

Weighing Module

Quick Reference Manual

259

Wiring

All 4 channels have the same pin-out that of above diagram. If 4-wire type loadcell is used, just
leave the
SEN+ and SEN- pin as opened.

WG0nA module needs the external power supply. The power module should have the capacity of
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

260

CIMON-PLC

2 Watts or more,
and be separated with other power.
- USE COPPER OR COPPER-CLAD ALUMINUM CONDUTORS
-"Class 2, adjacent to voltage rating (30 V max.)? "

Internal I/O Table

Input Signal
Point
X00

Description
Module Ready

Output Signal
Point

Description

Y00

X01

Y01

X02

Ch1 Command Ack

Y02

Ch1 Command

X03

Ch2 Command Ack

Y03

Ch2 Command

X04

Ch3 Command Ack

Y04

Ch3 Command

X05

Ch4 Command Ack

Y05

Ch4 Command

X06

Ch1 Batch Running

Y06

Ch1 Zero Command

X07

Ch2 Batch Running

Y07

Ch2 Zero Command

X08

Ch3 Batch Running

Y08

Ch3 Zero Command

X09

Ch4 Batch Running

Y09

Ch4 Zero Command

X0A Ch1 Error

Y0A

Ch1 Tare Command

X0B Ch2 Error

Y0B

Ch2 Tare Command

X0C Ch3 Error

Y0C

Ch3 Tare Command

X0D Ch4 Error

Y0D

Ch4 Tare Command

X0E

Y0E

X0F

Y0F

User Program Memory Devices(1)
OFFSET
Description

Ch
1

Ch
2

Ch
3

Ch
4

Measured weight (low word)

Measured weight (high word)

Status flags (bit mapped)

Control outputs (bitmapped)

Gross weight (Zero applied, low word)

Gross weight (Zero applied, high word)

Command main code

R/W

Quick Reference Manual

Command sub code (low word)

R/W

Command sub code (high word)

R/W

Net weight (Tare applied, low word)

Net weight (Tare applied, high word)

AD Data (raw value, low word)

AD Data (raw value, high word)

Error Code

User Program Memory Devices(2)
OFFSET
Ch
3

Ch
4

Description

Ch
1

Ch
2

116 162 208 Weighing Mode

117 163 209 -

118 164 210 Max. weight (low word)

119 165 211 Max. weight (high word)

120 166 212 Zero range

0~65535

R/W

121 167 213 Motion detect range

0~65535

R/W

122 168 214 Motion detect time (100ms)

0~65535
(100mS)

R/W

123 169 215 Auto zero range

0~65535

R/W

124 170 216 Auto zero time period

0~65535
(100mS)

R/W

125 171 217 Hysteresis range

0~65535
(100mS)

R/W

126 172 218 Hysteresis time limit

0~65535
(100mS)

R/W

127 173 219 Avr. Window size

3~13

R/W

0~6

R/W

User Program Memory Devices(3)
OFFSET
Ch
3

Ch
4

Description

Ch
1

Ch
2

128 174 220 Digital filter constant

129 175 221 Systems used area

130 176 222 Systems used area

0~90%

R/W

261

262

CIMON-PLC

131 177 223 Systems used area

132 178 224 Systems used area

133 179 225 Systems used area

134 180 226 Systems used area

135 181 227 Reserved

136 182 228 Reserved

137 183 229 Reserved

138 184 230 Reserved

139 185 231 Reserved

140 186 232 Reserved

141 187 233 Reserved

142 188 234 Min. hopper weight (low word)

143 189 235 Min. hopper weight (high word)

Max.
Weight

R/W

User Program Memory Devices(4)
내 용

OFFSET
Ch1

Ch2

Ch3 Ch4

144

190

236 Dribble weight, high set point or set point
# 1 (low word)

145

191

237 Dribble weight, high set point or set point
# 1 (high word)

100

146

192

238 Full flow weight, low set point or set point
# 2 (low word)

101

147

193

239 Full flow weight, low set point or set point
# 2 (high word)

102

148

194

240 Over weight, High-High set point or set
point #3 (low word)

103

149

195

241 Over weight, High-High set point or set
point #3 (high word)

104

150

196

242 Under weight, Low-Low set point or set
point #4 (low word)

105

151

197

243 Under weight, Low-Low set point or set
point #4 (high word)

Max.
Weight

R/W

Max.
Weight

R/W

Max.
Weight

R/W

Max.
Weight

R/W

0~65535

R/W

User Program Memory Devices(5)
OFFSET
Ch
1

Ch
2

Ch
3

내 용
Ch
4

106 152 198 244 Comparator inhibit time after full flow stop or set

Quick Reference Manual

263

point #5 (low word)

(100mS)

107 153 199 245

Comparator inhibit time after full flow stop or set
point #5 (high word)

0~65535
(100mS)

R/W

108 154 200 246

Gate open time for compensation or set point #6
(low word)

0~65535
(100mS)

R/W

109 155 201 247

Gate closing time for compensation or set point #6
(high word)

0~65535
(100mS)

R/W

110 156 202 248

Target weight for compensation or set point #7
(low word)

Max.
Weight

R/W

112 158 204 250 Batch complete delay

0~65535
(100mS)

R/W

113 159 205 251 Batch limit time

0~65535
(100mS)

R/W

Max.
Weight

R/W

Target weight for compensation or set point #7
111 157 203 249
(high word)

114 160 206 252 Max. hopper weight (low word)
115 161 207 253 Max. hopper weight (high word)

Error Code(1)
Code

Error

Description

0000

No error

0001

No sensor

Check the loadcell cable and its connection

0002

Batch time out

Batch control is not complete within the period of setting (offset
113, 159, 205, 251)

0003

Unstable at zero Zero operation(Y6/7/8/9) is issued at unstable state. Zero
operation
operation can be re-issued with this error.

0004

Unstable at tare Tare operation(YA/B/C/D) is issued at unstable state. Tare
operation
operation can be re-issued with this error.

0005

NO
External
Check the external 24Vdc power supply.
power supply

0010

Unknown
command

0011

Parameter error Check the parameter of WGBATCH instruction in sequence
on instruction
program.

Check the version of WG0nA and CPU module.

Error codes which can be occurred on storing the basic parameters with command code 9.
0020

Invalid weighing
The code of weighing mode must be within the range of 0 to 6.
mode

0021

Invalid near zero
When the configured value is larger than the maximum weight.
range

0022

Invalid
range

0023

Invalid auto zero
When the configured value is larger than the maximum weight.
range

stable

When the configured value is larger than the maximum weight.

264

CIMON-PLC

0024

Invalid
hysteresis

0025

Invalid average
When the configured value is larger than 15.
window size

0026

Invalid
constant

When the configured value is larger than the maximum weight

filter

When the configured value is larger than 90.

Error Code(2)
Code
-

Error codes which can be occurred on storing the basic parameters with command
code 9.
Batch Mode

Error

Auto. Loss in Weight batch
User controlled Loss in Weight Batch

Invalid ‘Min. hopper weight’

Auto. Normal Batch
Auto. Loss in Weight Batch
User Controlled Normal Batch
User Controlled Loss in Weight Batch

Invalid ‘dribble flow weight’

Comparator

Invalid ‘high’weight

Weight Sorting

Invalid ‘set point #1’

Auto. Normal Batch
Auto. Loss in Weight Batch
User Controlled Normal Batch
User Controlled Loss in Weight Batch

Invalid ‘full flow weight’

Comparator

Invalid ‘low’weight

Weight Sorting

Invalid ‘set point #2’

Auto. Normal Batch
Auto. Loss in Weight Batch
User Controlled Normal Batch
User Controlled Loss in Weight Batch

Invalid ‘over weight’

Comparator

Invalid ‘high-high weight’

Weight Sorting

Invalid ‘set point #3’

Auto. Normal Batch
Auto. Loss in Weight Batch
User Controlled Normal Batch
User Controlled Loss in Weight Batch

Invalid ‘under weight’

Comparator

Invalid ‘low-low weight’

Weight Sorting

Invalid ‘set point #4’

0035

Weight Sorting

Invalid ‘set point #5’

0036

Weight Sorting

Invalid ‘set point #6’

0037

Auto. Normal Batch
Auto. Loss in Weight Batch

Invalid ‘target weight’

Weight Sorting

Invalid ‘set point #7’

Auto. Loss in Weight Batch
User Controlled Loss in Weight Batch

Invalid ‘Max. hopper weight’

0030

0031

0032

0033

0034

0038

Quick Reference Manual

3.19

265

CIMON-PLC RTD Converters Module
Modules :
· CM1-RD04A, B
· CM1-RD08A, B
Contents :
· GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
· MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
· FEATURES AND OPERATION
· WRING
· CHARACTERISTICS OF RTD CONVERSION
· I/O SIGNALS
· USER PROGRAM MEMORY DEVICES
· ERROR CODES
· TROUBLE SHOOTING(1)
· TROUBLE SHOOTING(2)
· FRONT VIEW
· DIMENSIONS

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Item

Specification

Op.Temp.

Reference

Operating Temperature -10 ~65

St.Temp

Storage Temperature

-25 ~

Op.Hum

Operating Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

St.Hum

Storage Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency
10=

Acceleration

f=
57Hz

Amplitude

Sweep

0.075mm

Vibration
57=

f=
150Hz

9.8m/s2{1G}

In case of continuous vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

Amplitude

10 times
in X,Y,Z

IEC61131-2

266

CIMON-PLC

10=
f
=
57Hz

0.035mm

57=
f=
150Hz
Shock

Noise

4.8m/s2{0.5G}

Max. shock Acc. :147 m/s{15G}
Time :11㎳
Pulse wave: Half sine wave pulse(3 times in X,Y,Z)
Square wave
impulse noise

2,000 V

Electro-static
discharge

Voltage :4kV (Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magneti
c field

27 ~500 MHz,10 V/m

Fast transient
bust noise

Power
Module

KDT Standard

Digital I/O
(24V or more)

2kV

IEC61131-2

IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-3

Digital I/O
(Less than 24V)
Analog
I/Ocomm..
Interface

1kV

IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-2

IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-4

0.25kV

Environ..

No corrosive gas and no dust

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

2 or less

Cooling

Natural Air Cooling

MODULE SPECIFICATIONS

CM1-RD04A , RD08A
Available RTD

CM1-RD04B, RD08B

Pt100 (JIS C1640-1989, DIN 43760-1980)

Pt1000 (DIN EN 60751)

JPt100 (KS C1603-1991, JIS C1604-1981)
Range of
Pt100 : -200.0°C to 600°C (18.48 to 313.59W) Pt1000 : -200.0°C to 600°C
Temperature Input
(18.48 to 313.59W)
JPt100 : -200.0°C to 600°C (17.14 to 317.28W)

Digital

Output

Digitally converted value : 0 ~16,000(-8000~8000)
Detected temperature value : -2000~6000
(First decimal place value X 10 times)

Detecting the
breaking of wires

3 wires by channels available

Accuracy

±0.1 %([Full scale]

Max. Conversion
Rate
Number of
Temperature
Inputs
Insulation

50ms / 1ch.
4 ch. / 1 module
Between input terminal and PLC: Photo-Coupler
Between output channels: No

Quick Reference Manual

Contact terminal

18-point Terminal Block

No. of Occupied
Points

16 Points

+5V
Internal
Current +15V
(mA)
-15V

267

50
30
10

FEATURES AND OPERATION
1) The temperature converted by a platinum resistance temperature detector of Pt100 or Jpt100
or Pt1000 can be displayed in ℃ or ℉
and the temperature values can be processed as digital values up to the first decimal
place.
2) The converted temperature data are converted to 16-bit binary data, which can be processed
as digital values.
The temperature in the range from -200℃ to 600℃ are converted to the values from 0 to
16000(-8000~8000).
3) The range of temperature is from –250℃ to 650℃ and the range of digital value is from –192 to
16191.
4) If a min. temperature value and a max. temperature value are set up, the min. value will be
converted to 0(-8000) and
the max. value is 16000(8000).
5) The breaking of resistance temperature detectors and cables, and the excess of measuring
range are detected by channels.
6) It is available to connect four points of a Pt100 or a JPt100 or a Pt1000 to a one module.
7) The number of modules used on one base is not limited.
8) LED is lighted in case of normal status and blinks at the intervals of 0.3 second in case of error.

WRING
Measures values are inputted to all the channels grouped as Terminal 1-2-3, 5-6-7, 9-10-11
and 13-14-15..
CH

Terminal A

Terminal B

Terminal b

Terminal FG

Ch 1

Terminal 1

Terminal 2

Terminal 3

Terminal 18

Ch 2

Terminal 5

Terminal 6

Terminal 7

Terminal 18

Ch 3

Terminal 9

Terminal 10

Terminal 11

Terminal 18

Ch 4

Terminal 13

Terminal 14

Terminal 15

Terminal 18

Wiring Method

268

CIMON-PLC

※ Connect the shields of a RTD and a wire to the FG of a RTD input module. The difference
between the values of the wire
is to be 1Ω or less.

CHARACTERISTICS OF RTD CONVERSION
1) Pt100 or jPt100 has the resistance of 100Ω at 0℃ and the resistance value is varied
according to temperature variation.

2) CM1-RTD gets resistance values by dividing voltage and converts it to a temperature value,
storing the result in memory.

3) RTD input module linearizes the resistance input of non-linear RTD as follows.

Quick Reference Manual

I/O SIGNALS

Input
X0
X1

Signal Direction
(CPU ← RTD)
Signal Name
RTD Module Ready
Flag Indicating
RTD-converted

Output
Y0

Signal Direction
(CPU → RTD)
Signal Name
Not use

Flag indicating an operation
condition setup

Requesting to set up an operation
condition

X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
X9
XA
XB
XC
XD
XE

Not use

Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y8
Y9
YA
YB
YC
YD
YE

Not use

Flag indicating an error in RTD
module

Requesting to clear an error

USER PROGRAM MEMORY DEVICES
Address
Hexa Deci
0H
0
1H
1
2H
2
3H
3
4H
4
5H
5
6H
6
7H
7
8H
8
9H
9
AH
10
BH
11
CH
12
DH
13
EH
14
FH
15
10H
16
11H
17
12H
18
13H
19
14H
20
15H
21
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

Description

R/W

Enabling/disabling to RTD-convert setup
Detected temp. value of CH.1 (°C)
Detected temp. value of CH.2 (°C)
Detected temp. value of CH.3 (°C)
Detected temp. value of CH.4 (°C)
Detected temp. value of CH.5 (°C)
Detected temp. value of CH.6 (°C)
Detected temp. value of CH.7 (°C)
Detected temp. value of CH.8 (°C)
Assigning RTD type
Not use
Detected temp. value of CH.1 (°F)
Detected temp. value of CH.2 (°F)
Detected temp. value of CH.3 (°F)
Detected temp. value of CH.4 (°F)
Detected temp. value of CH.5 (°F)
Detected temp. value of CH.6 (°F)
Detected temp. value of CH.7 (°F)
Detected temp. value of CH.8 (°F)
Information on operating channels
Not use
Digitally converted value of CH.1

R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R

269

270

CIMON-PLC

16H
17H
18H
19H
1AH
1BH
1CH

22
23
24
25
26
27
28

Digitally converted value of CH.2
Digitally converted value of CH.3
Digitally converted value of CH.4
Digitally converted value of CH.5
Digitally converted value of CH.6
Digitally converted value of CH.7
Digitally converted value of CH.8

R
R
R
R
R
R
R

1DH

Digital output setup

R/W

Address
Hexa
Deci
1EH
30
1FH
31
20H
32
21H
33
22H
34
23H
35
24H
36
25H
37
26H
38
27H
39
28H
40
29H
41
2AH
42
2BH
43
2CH
44
2DH
45
2EH
46
2FH
47
30H
48
31H
49
32H
50
33H
51
34H
52
35H
53
36H
54
37H
55
38H
56
39H
57
3AH
58
3BH
59~62

Description

R/W

Assigning Average Process
Error code value of CH.1
Error code value of CH.2
Error code value of CH.3
Error code value of CH.4
Error code value of CH.5
Error code value of CH.6
Error code value of CH.7
Error code value of CH.8

R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R

Not use

Max. temp. input value of CH.1
Max. temp. input value of CH.2
Max. temp. input value of CH.3
Max. temp. input value of CH.4
Max. temp. input value of CH.5
Max. temp. input value of CH.6
Max. temp. input value of CH.7
Max. temp. input value of CH.8
Max./Min. temp. setup data
Error in max./min. setup
Min. temp. input value of CH.1
Min. temp. input value of CH.2
Min. temp. input value of CH.3
Min. temp. input value of CH.4
Min. temp. input value of CH.5
Min. temp. input value of CH.6
Min. temp. input value of CH.7
Min. temp. input value of CH.8
Setting up average time/filter coefficient for CH1~CH4

R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W

ERROR CODES
In case that RTD or cable is broken down, or measured temperature values are greater than max. value
or less than min. value, the following
error codes are stored in Buffer Memory from "31" to "38"? by channels and LED blinks at the intervals
of 0.2 second.
If " Tool"? -> " Special Card Setup"? -> " RTD Card Setup"? -> " Current Status "? is selected, a dialog
box displaying error code will appear.
To clear an error code, select Error code reset? button in the RTD Card Status of the CICON.
△ is 0~3 for RTD modules.

Quick Reference Manual

In case that A is broken

In case that B is broken

In case that b or both A and B are broken

In case that a measured temperature is over the range of max. and min. temperature.

10△

271

System error (A/S required)

In case of error in max. and min. temperature setup, the bit corresponding to Buffer Memory "50"? is 1
and LED blinks at the intervals of 0.2 second.

TROUBLE SHOOTING(1)

TROUBLE SHOOTING(2)

272

CIMON-PLC

FRONT VIEW

Quick Reference Manual

The tightening torque if 6.99 in. 1b
USE COPPER OF COPPER-CLAD ALUMINUM CONDUTORS
“Class 2, adjacent to coltage ration(30V max.)”

DIMENSIONS

(Unit : mm)

273

274

3.20

CIMON-PLC

CIMON-PLC TC04A Converters Module
Modules :
· CM1-TC04A
Contents :
· GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
· MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
· FEATURES AND OPERATION
· WRING
· SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
· I/O SIGNALS
· USER PROGRAM MEMORY DEVICES
· ERROR CODES
· TROUBLE SHOOTING(1)
· TROUBLE SHOOTING(2)
· DIMENSIONS

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Quick Reference Manual

Item

Specification

Op.Temp.

275

Reference

Operating Temperature -10 ~65

St.Temp

Storage Temperature

-25 ~

Op.Hum

Operating Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

St.Hum

Storage Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency
10=
57=

Acceleration

f=
57Hz

Amplitude

Sweep

0.075mm

f=
150Hz

9.8m/s2{1G}

Vibration
In case of continuous vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

10=
f
=
57Hz
57=
f=
150Hz

Amplitude

4.8m/s2{0.5G}

Square wave
impulse noise

2,000 V

Electro-static
discharge

Voltage :4kV (Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magneti
c field

27 ~500 MHz,10 V/m

Fast transient
bust noise

Power
Module

Digital I/O
(24V or more)

2kV

No corrosive gas and no dust

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

2 or less

Cooling

Natural Air Cooling

IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-2
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-3

Digital I/O
(Less than 24V)
Analog
I/Ocomm..
Interface
0.25kV

MODULE SPECIFICATIONS

Specification

IEC61131-2

KDT Standard

1kV

Environ..

Available

IEC61131-2

0.035mm

Max. shock Acc. :147 m/s{15G}
Time :11㎳
Pulse wave: Half sine wave pulse(3 times in X,Y,Z)

Shock

Noise

10 times
in X,Y,Z

Type K, J, E, T, B, R, S ,N

IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-4

276

CIMON-PLC

Thermocouple
Digitally converted value: 0 ~ 16000(-8000~8000),

Digital Output

Converted temperature value:(Range of measured temp.X10)
RangeofMeasured
Rangeof Measured
Type
Code
Temperature(°C)
Voltage(mV)
K
-200.0~1200.0
-5891~48828
J
-200.0~800.0
-7890~45498
E
-200.0~600.0
-8824~45085
T
-200.0~400.0
-5602~20869
ITS-90
B
400.0~1800.0
786~13585
R
0.0~1750.0
0~21006
S
0.0~1750.0
0~18612
N
-200.0~1250.0
-3990~43846

Range of
Temperature

RJC

Automatic

Detecting the
breaking of wires

By channels

Accuracy

±[ Full Scale]x0.3%+1°C(RJC Error)]

Max. Converted Rate

50ms / 1 Channel

No. of Input
Channels

4 channels /module

Insulation

Between input terminal and PLC: Photo- Couple,
No

Connection Termnal

18-point terminal block

+5V
Current
Consumption +15V
(mA)
-15V

Between output channels:

30
10

FEATURES AND OPERATION

The temperatures converted in the state that 7 kinds (K,J,E,T,R,S,B,N) of thermocouple are
connected to a TC module can be indicated in
Centigrade or Fahrenheit (℃ ,℉ ) and the temperature values can be processed as digital values up
to the first decimal place.

Converted temperature data are converted to 16-bit binary data, which can be processed as digital
values. The min. value and the max.
value of each thermocouple are converted to 0 and 16000(-8000~8000).

Temperatures are expressed up to min. value of -50℃ and max. value of +50℃ and digital values
are expressed in the
range from –192 to16191(-8192~8191).

If a min. temperature value and a max. temperature value are set up, the min. value will be converted
to 0(-8000) and the max.
value to 16000(8000).

The breaking of thermocouple and cables and the excess of measuring range are detected by
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

Quick Reference Manual

277

channels.
6)

It is available to connect 4 thermocouples with one module.

The number of modules used on one base is not limited.

Reference junction compensation by the temperature sensor mounted on a terminal is automatically
performed.

LED is on in case of normal status and blinks at the intervals of 0.2 second in case of error.

WRING
Measured values are inputted to all the channels grouped as Terminal 7-8, 9-10, 11-12, 13-14.
Connect RJC to Terminal 1,3 and 5.
Channel

+ Terminal

- Terminal

FG Terminal

Ch 1

Terminal 7

Terminal 8

Terminal 18

Ch 2

Terminal 9

Terminal 10

Terminal 18

Ch 3

Terminal 11

Terminal 12

Terminal 18

Ch 4

Terminal 13

Terminal 14

Terminal 18

Wiring Method

※ Cable is to be used as conducting wires. Connect the shield part of a wire to FG terminal and
ground it.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

1) Use a cable for outside input signal of D/A converter module differently from a cable for AC to
prevent the influence of surge or induction
noise occurring from AC.
2) Select a cable, considering ambient temperature, allowable current. 18AWG(0.823)~26AWG
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

278

CIMON-PLC

(0.405) or more cable is recommended.
3) The wiring close to heat-generating device or material and directly contacted with oil for long time
may cause short circuit or
breakdown or malfunction.
4) The wiring together with high-voltage line or power line may cause malfunction or breakdown due to
induction jam.
Design the wring 100mm or more away from a high voltage line or a power line not to receive the
influence by the variation
of noise or magnetic field.

I/O SIGNALS

Input

Signal Direction
(CPU ← TC)
Signal Name

Output

TC Module Ready

Flag indicating TC-converted

Flag indicating operation condition
setup

X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
X9
XA
XB

Not use

Requesting to set up an operation
condition

Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y8
Y9
YA
YB

Not use

YE
Flag indicating an error in TC
module

Signal Direction
(CPU → TC)
Signal Name

Not use

Requesting to clear an error

USER PROGRAM MEMORY DEVICES
Address

Description

R/W

Enabling/disabling to TC-converted setup

R/W

Detected temp. value of CH.1 (°C)

Hexa

Deci

0H
1H

Quick Reference Manual

Detected temp. value of CH.2 (°C)

Detected temp. value of CH.3 (°C)

Detected temp. value of CH.4 (°C)

Detected temp. value of CH.5 (°C)

Detected temp. value of CH.6 (°C)

Detected temp. value of CH.7 (°C)

Detected temp. value of CH.8 (°C)

Assigning TC type (CH.1~CH.4)

R/W

Assigning TC type (CH.5~CH.8)

R/W

Detected temp. value of CH.1 (°F)

Detected temp. value of CH.2 (°F)

Detected temp. value of CH.3 (°F)

Detected temp. value of CH.4 (°F)

Detected temp. value of CH.5 (°F)

10H

Detected temp. value of CH.6 (°F)

11H

Detected temp. value of CH.7 (°F)

12H

Detected temp. value of CH.8 (°F)

13H

Information on operating channels

14H

Assigning type setup data

R/W

15H

Digitally converted value of CH.1

16H

Digitally converted value of CH.2

17H

Digitally converted value of CH.3

18H

Digitally converted value of CH.4

19H

Digitally converted value of CH.5

1AH

Digitally converted value of CH.6

1BH

Digitally converted value of CH.7

1CH

Digitally converted value of CH.8

1DH

Digital output setup

Specification

R/W

Address
Hexa

Deci

1EH

Assigning average process

1FH

Error code value of CH.1

20H

Error code value of CH.2

21H

Error code value of CH.3

22H

Error code value of CH.4

23H

Error code value of CH.5

24H

Error code value of CH.6

25H

Error code value of CH.7

26H

Error code value of CH.8

27H

28H

Not use

29H

Max. temp. input value of CH.1

R/W

2AH

Max. temp. input value of CH.2

R/W

2BH

Max. temp. input value of CH.3

R/W

279

280

CIMON-PLC

2CH

Max. temp. input value of CH.4

R/W

2DH

Max. temp. input value of CH.5

R/W

2EH

Max. temp. input value of CH.6

R/W

2FH

Max. temp. input value of CH.7

R/W

30H

Max. temp. input value of CH.8

R/W

31H

Assigning temp. setup data

R/W

32H

Error in Temp. error

33H

Min. temp. input value of CH.1

R/W

34H

Min. temp. input value of CH.2

R/W

35H

Min. temp. input value of CH.3

R/W

36H

Min. temp. input value of CH.4

R/W

37H

Min. temp. input value of CH.5

R/W

38H

Min. temp. input value of CH.6

R/W

39H

Min. temp. input value of CH.7

R/W

3AH

Min. temp. input value of CH.8

R/W

59-62

Setting up average time/filter coefficient for CH.1-Ch.4

R/W

3B-3E

ERROR CODES

In case that TC or cable is broken down, or measured temperature values are greater than max. value
or less than min.
value, the following error codes are stored in Buffer Memory from "31"? to "38"? by channels and LED
blinks at the intervals of 0.2 second.
If "Tool"? -> "Special Card Setup"? -> "TC Card Setup"? -> "Current Status"? is selected, a dialog box
displaying error code will appear.
To clear an error code, select " Error code reset"? button in the " TC Card Status"? of the CICON.
△ is 0~3 for TC modules.
01

In case of the breaking of wires

Error in RJC

In case that TC type is wrongly set up

In case that measured temperature is over range

10△

System error (A/S required)

In case of error in max. and min. temperature setup, the bit corresponding to Buffer Memory " 50 "? is
1 and LED blinks at the intervals
of 0.2 second.

TROUBLE SHOOTING(1)

Quick Reference Manual

TROUBLE SHOOTING(2)

281

282

CIMON-PLC

DIMENSIONS

(unit : mm)

Quick Reference Manual

3.21

CIMON-PLC Thermistor Module
Modules :
· CM1-TH08A
Contents :
· GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
· MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
· I/O signals
· User Program Memory Devices(1)
· Error Code
· Usage(1)
· Usage(3)
· Usage(4)
· Wiring
· Features and Operation
· FRONT VIEW

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

283

284

CIMON-PLC

Item

Specification

Op.Temp.

Reference

Operating Temperature -10 ~65

St.Temp

Storage Temperature

-25 ~

Op.Hum

Operating Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

St.Hum

Storage Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency
10=
57=

Acceleration

f=
57Hz

Amplitude

Sweep

0.075mm

f=
150Hz

9.8m/s2{1G}

Vibration
In case of continuous vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

10=
f
=
57Hz
57=
f=
150Hz
Shock

Noise

10 times
in X,Y,Z

Amplitude
0.035mm

4.8m/s2{0.5G}

Max. shock Acc. :147 m/s{15G}
Time :11㎳
Pulse wave: Half sine wave pulse(3 times in X,Y,Z)
Square wave
impulse noise

2,000 V

Electro-static
discharge

Voltage :4kV (Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magneti
c field

27 ~500 MHz,10 V/m

Fast transient
bust noise

IEC61131-2

Power
Module

Digital I/O
(24V or more)

2kV

1kV

Environ..

No corrosive gas and no dust

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

2 or less

Cooling

Natural Air Cooling

IEC61131-2

KDT Standard
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-2
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-3

Digital I/O
(Less than 24V)
Analog
I/Ocomm..
Interface

IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-4

0.25kV

MODULE SPECIFICATIONS

Item

Specification

Quick Reference Manual

NTC TYPE
(Negative Temperature Coefficient)

Available Thermistor
Range of
Thermistor Resistance

0~1M?

Resolution of
Thermistor Resistance

0 ? ~40k? : 1?
40 k? ~400k? : 10?
400 k? ~1M? : 30?

Digital
Output

Converted
temperature Range of measured temp.( ° C, ° F )X10
value
Digitally
converted
value

0~16000 (-8000~8000)

Equation

Steinhart-Hart thermistor polynomial

Accuracy

± 0.3 %(Full Scale)

Max. Converted rate

1Sec(8ch)

No. of input Channel

8 Channels/module
Between input terminal and PLC: Photo- Couple,
Between output channels: No

Insulation
Connection Terminal

18-point terminal block

I/O signals

Input
X0

Signal Direction
(CPU ? RTD)
Signal Name
Thermistor Module Ready

Output
Y0

X7
X8

Not use

Y7
Y8

Signal Direction
(CPU ? RTD)
Signal Name

Not use

285

286

CIMON-PLC

Flag indicating an error in Thermistor
module

Requesting to clear an error

User Program Memory Devices(1)
Address

Description

R/W

Hexa

Deci

Not use

Detected temp. value of CH.1 (°C)

Detected temp. value of CH.2 (°C)

Detected temp. value of CH.3 (°C)

Detected temp. value of CH.4 (°C)

Detected temp. value of CH.5 (°C)

Detected temp. value of CH.6 (°C)

Detected temp. value of CH.7 (°C)

Detected temp. value of CH.8 (°C)

Not use

Detected temp. value of CH.1 (°C)

Detected temp. value of CH.2 (°C)

Detected temp. value of CH.3 (°C)

Detected temp. value of CH.4 (°C)

Detected temp. value of CH.5 (°C)

10H

Detected temp. value of CH.6 (°C)

11H

Detected temp. value of CH.7 (°C)

12H

Detected temp. value of CH.8 (°C)

13H

Information on operating channels

Description

R/W

Address
Hexa

Deci

14H

Not use

15H

Digitally converted value of CH.1

16H

Digitally converted value of CH.2

17H

Digitally converted value of CH.3

18H

Digitally converted value of CH.4

19H

Digitally converted value of CH.5

1AH

Digitally converted value of CH.6

1BH

Digitally converted value of CH.7

1CH

Digitally converted value of CH.8

Quick Reference Manual

1DH

1EH

1FH

Not use

Error code value of CH.1

20H

Error code value of CH.2

21H

Error code value of CH.3

22H

Error code value of CH.4

23H

Error code value of CH.5

24H

Error code value of CH.6

25H

Error code value of CH.7

26H

Error code value of CH.8

27H

Not use

28H

287

Error Code
In case that Thermistor or cable is broken down, or measured temperature values are greater than max.
value or less than min. value,
the following error codes are stored in Buffer Memory from "31" to "38"? by channels and LED blinks at
the intervals of 0.3 second.
If " Tool "? -> " Special Card Setup "? -> " Thermistor module "? -> " Current Status "? is selected, a
dialog box displaying error code will appear.
To clear an error code, select " Error code reset "? button in the " Thermistor Card Status " of the
CICON.

Error Code

Description

No error

In case of channel enable, when temperature – resistance table is not input

In case of the breaking of wires

In case that measured temperature is over range

Usage(1)
NTC Thermistor (Negative Temperature Coefficient) can be converted by module
To use module, it need R/T Table that provided by manufacturer The constants, A, B and C can be
determined from resistance value

288

CIMON-PLC

1/T = A + B(lnR) + C(lnR)3
(Steinhart-Hart thermistor polynomial)
T = Kelvin temperature (°K) = 273 + °C
R = Resistance Value(? )

Usage(3)
Select New Program at CICON and register Thermistor Setting Program.

If you click OK on the above window, a Setup dialog box will appear as follows

Set up channel

Usage(4)

Click " Table" , set the temperature and resistance value that are selected Uasge(2).

Quick Reference Manual

289

Set the module is installed base and slot It can compile with one or more Scan Program and
download to PLC

Wiring
Channel

Terminal +

Terminal -

1 Ch

Terminal 1

Terminal 2

2 Ch

Terminal 3

Terminal 4

3 Ch

Terminal 5

Terminal 6

4 Ch

Terminal 7

Terminal 8

5 Ch

Terminal 9

Terminal 10

6 Ch

Terminal 11

Terminal 12

7 Ch

Terminal 13

Terminal 14

8 Ch

Terminal 15

Terminal 16

Terminal 18

- The tightening torque of 6.99 in.lb
- USE COPPER OR COPPER-CLAD ALUMINUM CONDUTORS
- " Class 2, adjacent to voltage rating(30 V max.)"?
Caution: The terminal – can not wiring to common

Features and Operation
1) The temperatures converted by NTC Thermistor (Negative Temperature Coefficient) can be displayed in
centigrade or
Fahrenheit(°C , °F ) and the temperature values can be processed as digital values up to the first
decimal place
2) The range of thermistor resistance is from 0W to 1MW
3) If a min. temperature value and a max. temperature value are set up, the min. value will be converted to
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

290

CIMON-PLC

0(-8000) and
the max. value is 16000(8000).
4) The breaking of thermistor and cables and the excess of measuring range are detected by channels.
5) The number of modules used on one base is not limited.
6) LED is lighted in case of normal status and blinks at the intervals of 0.3 second in case of error.

FRONT VIEW

3.22

CIMON-PLC Expansion
Modules :
· CM1-EP01A
· CM1-EP02A
· CM1-EP03A
Contents :
· GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
· Feature
· Cable Wiring
· Expansion configuration

Quick Reference Manual

291

· Front view
· Outward dimension

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Item

Specification

Op.Temp.

Reference

Operating Temperature -10 ~65

St.Temp

Storage Temperature

-25 ~

Op.Hum

Operating Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

St.Hum

Storage Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency
10=
57=

Acceleration

f=
57Hz

Amplitude

Sweep

0.075mm

f=
150Hz

9.8m/s2{1G}

Vibration
In case of continuous vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

10=
f
=
57Hz
57=
f=
150Hz

Amplitude

4.8m/s2{0.5G}

Square wave
impulse noise

2,000 V

Electro-static
discharge

Voltage :4kV (Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magneti
c field

27 ~500 MHz,10 V/m

Fast transient
bust noise

Power
Module

Digital I/O
(24V or more)

2kV

1kV

Environ..

No corrosive gas and no dust

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

2 or less

Cooling

Natural Air Cooling

IEC61131-2

0.035mm

Max. shock Acc. :147 m/s{15G}
Time :11㎳
Pulse wave: Half sine wave pulse(3 times in X,Y,Z)

Shock

Noise

10 times
in X,Y,Z

IEC61131-2

KDT Standard
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-2
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-3

Digital I/O
(Less than 24V)
Analog
I/Ocomm..
Interface
0.25kV

IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-4

292

CIMON-PLC

Feature
Series XP/CP allows expanding base up to 16
Supports the high-speed expansion communication of 10BASE-T
Built-in network Repeater
Expansion of remote I/O function
Distance between segments : Max. 100m (Max. entire expansion length : 1,600m)

Cable Wiring

Expansion configuration
PLC Parameter -> Basic -> Expansion
Sets PLC increment number as much as you want. If the number in the increment end is
smaller than the setting value,
the increment communication error will occur.

Quick Reference Manual

293

IO addresses are continuously allocated between expansion bases.
The order of allocation is based on the expansion number which is configured by the rotary
switch of expansion module.

Base No.

Rotary Switch

Base No.

Rotary Switch

Exp. #1

Exp. #9

Exp. #2

Exp. #10

Exp. #3

Exp. #11

Exp. #4

Exp. #12

Exp. #5

Exp. #13

Exp. #6

Exp. #14

Exp. #7

Exp. #15

Exp. #8

Exp. #16

FROM/TO instruction

294

CIMON-PLC

Keep in mind that base and slot numbers are "0" based.

Slot #0

Slot #11

Base No.

Slot No.

form

Local

Slot #5

H0005 or 5

Expansion #1

Slot #0

H0100

Expansion #2

Slot #3

H0203

Expansion #9

Slot #8

H0908

Expansion #10

Slot #9

H0A09

Expansion #15

Slot #10

H0F0A

Expansion #16

Slot #11

H100B

Front view

Quick Reference Manual

295

Outward dimension

(Unit : mm)

296

3.23

CIMON-PLC

CIMON-PLC Redundant System
Modules :
· CM1-XP1R (Redundancy CPU)
· CM1-RM01A (Redundancy Interface)
· CM1-RC01A (Redundancy Communication)
· CM1-RPW (Power Monitoring Module)
· CM1-RC01A (Power)
Contents :
· GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
· Basic Composition of Redundancy Base
· System Configuration
· Feature
· Front View

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Quick Reference Manual

Item

Specification

Op.Temp.

297

Reference

Operating Temperature -10 ~65

St.Temp

Storage Temperature

-25 ~

Op.Hum

Operating Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

St.Hum

Storage Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency
10=
57=

Acceleration

f=
57Hz

Amplitude

Sweep

0.075mm

f=
150Hz

9.8m/s2{1G}

Vibration
In case of continuous vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

10=
f
=
57Hz
57=
f=
150Hz

Amplitude

4.8m/s2{0.5G}

Square wave
impulse noise

2,000 V

Electro-static
discharge

Voltage :4kV (Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magneti
c field

27 ~500 MHz,10 V/m

Fast transient
bust noise

Power
Module

Digital I/O
(24V or more)

2kV

1kV

Environ..

No corrosive gas and no dust

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

2 or less

Cooling

Natural Air Cooling

Basic Composition of Redundancy Base

IEC61131-2

0.035mm

Max. shock Acc. :147 m/s{15G}
Time :11㎳
Pulse wave: Half sine wave pulse(3 times in X,Y,Z)

Shock

Noise

10 times
in X,Y,Z

IEC61131-2

KDT Standard
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-2
IEC1131-2
IEC1000-4-3

Digital I/O
(Less than 24V)
Analog
I/Ocomm..
Interface
0.25kV

IEC1131-2
IEC1000-4-4

298

CIMON-PLC

System Configuration

Feature

Ø Redundancy for a CPU module, power module, bases, and communication module is available.
Ø CPU redundancy system is composed of separate base for ideal redundancy structure.
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

Quick Reference Manual

299

Ø In case an error occurs in an active CPU module, a back-up module is automatically switched
to active one for continuous operation.
Ø Furnishes a test button to check and maintain a system easily.
Ø Enables the configuration of network redundancy.
Ø Enables backup within the control scan delay time of 50ms and high-speed active switching.
Ø Enables to construct redundancy network with a high-ranking computer.
Ø Supports Power redundancy.

Front View

CM1-XP1R

3.24

CM1-RC01A

CIMON-PLC Remote I/O Series
Modules :
· RP-XD16A
· RP-XD32A
· RP-YR16A
· RP-YT16A
· RP-YT32A
· RP-XY32DT

CM1-RM01A

300

CIMON-PLC

Contents :
· GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
· INPUT SPECIFICATIONS
· OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
· Communication SPECIFICATIONS
· Connector
· Cable Specification
· Wiring
· Wiring Precaution
· Precaution
· Dimension

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item

Specification

Op.Temp.

Reference

Operating Temperature -10 ~65

St.Temp

Storage Temperature

-25 ~

Op.Hum

Operating Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

St.Hum

Storage Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency
10=
57=

Acceleration

f=
57Hz

Amplitude

Sweep

0.075mm

f=
150Hz

9.8m/s2{1G}

Vibration
In case of continuous vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

10=
f
=
57Hz
57=
f=
150Hz
Shock

Noise

Amplitude

10 times
in X,Y,Z

IEC61131-2

0.035mm
4.8m/s2{0.5G}

Max. shock Acc. :147 m/s{15G}
Time :11㎳
Pulse wave: Half sine wave pulse(3 times in X,Y,Z)
Square wave
impulse noise

2,000 V

Electro-static
discharge

Voltage :4kV (Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magneti
c field

27 ~500 MHz,10 V/m

IEC61131-2

KDT Standard
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-2
IEC1131-2
IEC1000-4-3

Quick Reference Manual

Fast transient
bust noise

Power
Module

Digital I/O
(24V or more)

2kV

Digital I/O
(Less than 24V)
Analog
I/Ocomm..
Interface

1kV

Environ..

No corrosive gas and no dust

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

2 or less

Cooling

Natural Air Cooling

IEC1131-2
IEC1000-4-4

0.25kV

INPUT SPECIFICATIONS

Model

RP-XD16A

Power

DC24V, 0.4A (19VDC - 28VDC)

External
Connecting Method

Terminal Connector

Rated Input

DC24V / 7mA

Input Point

16 points

On Voltage / On Current

DC19V or more / 3.5mA or more

Off Voltage / Off Current

DC6V or less / 1.5mA or less

Resp.
time

Off --> On

3ms or less

On --> Off

3ms or less

Common TYPE
Operation Display

RP-XD32A

32 points

16points Common
LED

Insulation Type

Photo Coupler

Insulation Method

SINK / SRC Combination

Internal Circuit

OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

301

RP-XY32DT

16 points

302

CIMON-PLC

RP-YR16A

RP-YT16A

RP-YT32A

RP-XY32DT

32 points

16 points

Power

DC24V, 0.4A (19VDC - 28VDC)

Output point

16 points

Insulation Method

Relay

Photo Coupler

Rated Output

DC24V 2A / 1

DC24V, 0.5A / 1point, 4A / Common

(Resistant Load), AC220V 2A (
COSΨ=1)
Surge
Resp.
time

Clamp Diode

Off --> On

10ms or less

2ms or less

3ms or less

On --> Off

10ms or less

2ms or less

3ms or less

8 points

16 points

Common TYPE

32 points

16 points

Operation Display

LED

External
Connecting Method

Terminal Connector

Sink Type (NPN Transistror Open
Colleector)

Insulation Method
Internal Circuit

Communication SPECIFICATIONS

Network

Profibus-DP

Media Access

Logical Token Ring

Communication method

RS-485 (Electric)

Topology

Bus

Modulation Method

NRZ

Communication Cable

Shielded Twisted Pair

Quick Reference Manual

1000m (9.6-187.5 kbps)
400m (500 kbps)
Transmission distance
200m (1.5 Mbps)
100m (3-12 Mbps)
No. of Nodes / Network

99 Station

No. of Nodes / Segment

32 Station

Connector

Cable Specification
* LAPP KABEL
Type : Network Components
Protocol : DP-FMS

303

304

CIMON-PLC

Item

Twinax

AWG

Type

UNITRONIC BUS DP FMS / FIP

Insulation

PE-Polyethylen
Aluminum Foil-Polyester

Shield

Tape/Braid Shield

Electric Capacity

30 nF/km

Impedance

150Ω

No. of core

2 Core

Wiring

RP-XD16A

RP-YT16A

RP-YR16A

Quick Reference Manual

305

RP-XD32A

RP-YT32A

RP-XY32DT

Wiring Precaution

Please use after understanding the wire diagram including rated voltage and terminal
arrangement.
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

306

CIMON-PLC

Tighten the screws for terminal connection after turning off the power source.
In case of tightening the screws of a terminal, tighten firmly according to the rated torque.
Earth FG terminal in the third class, which is exclusive for PLC.
Take care that dregs are not put into a module case.
The wiring close to heat-generating device or material and directly contacted with oil for long
time may cause short circuit or
breakdown or malfunction. In case of the installation environment with a lot of vibration, prevent
a PLC from the vibration.
The wiring together with high-voltage line or power line cause malfunction or breakdown due to
induction jam.
Design the wiring 100mm or more away from a high voltage line or a power line not to receive the
influence by the variation
of noise or magnetic field.

Precaution

The Link station number of all module is to be different each other. If duplicate station
number is accessed, an error occurs.
Use the communication cable with assigned specification. The other than assigned may
cause communication disturbance.
Connect communication cable correctly. Incomplete cable connection may cause serious
communication disturbance.
Check whether communication cable is broken before installation.
In case of

long-distance communication cable, wire a cable far away from power line or

induction noise.
Do not change the station number in the status that the power source is supplied.
It is prohibited to mount and dismount Remote I/O module.
Please make initialize program to the master module. If there is not initialize program in the
master module,
it may cause a communication error when the power failure occurred in Remote I/O.

Dimension

· RP-XD16A / YT16A

Quick Reference Manual

· RP-XD32A / YT32A / YR16A / XY32DT

· RP Series

307

308

3.25

CIMON-PLC

CIMON-BP Series 32Main Block
Modules :
· CM2-BP32M***

Contents :
· GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
· MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
· INPUT SPECIFICATIONS
· OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
· COMMUNICATION OPTION
· Main Block Line-Up
· EXTERNAL WIRING
· COMMUNICATION CABLE WIRING
· WIRING PRECAUTIONS
· OUTWARD DIMENSIONS
· INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS
CIMON-BP Series 32Main Block Module For details see "Click"

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Op.Temp.
St.Temp

Specification

Reference

Operating Temperature -10 ~65
Storage Temperature

-25 ~

Quick Reference Manual

Op.Hum

Operating Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

St.Hum

Storage Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency
10=
57=

Acceleration

f=
57Hz

309

Amplitude

Sweep

0.075mm

f=
150Hz

9.8m/s2{1G}

Vibration
In case of continuous vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

10=
f
=
57Hz
57=
f=
150Hz

Amplitude

4.8m/s2{0.5G}

Square wave
impulse noise

2,000 V

Electro-static
discharge

Voltage :4kV (Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magneti
c field

27 ~500 MHz,10 V/m

Fast transient
bust noise

Power
Module

Digital I/O
(24V or more)

2kV

No corrosive gas and no dust

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

2 or less

Cooling

Natural Air Cooling

IEC61131-2

KDT Standard
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-2
IEC1131-2
IEC1000-4-3

Digital I/O
(Less than 24V)
Analog
I/Ocomm..
Interface

1kV

Environ..

0.25kV

MODULE SPECIFICATIONS

Items

Specifications

Power Supply

AC100~ 240V / DC 24V (Max.20W)

Input

DC 24V

IEC61131-2

0.035mm

Max. shock Acc. :147 m/s{15G}
Time :11㎳
Pulse wave: Half sine wave pulse(3 times in X,Y,Z)

Shock

Noise

10 times
in X,Y,Z

IEC1131-2
IEC1000-4-4

310

CIMON-PLC

Output

Relay / TR SINK /TR SOURCE

Expansion

Max. 3 Unit (Max.2 Analog, Max 3 I/O units)

Main Block I/O

16 Inputs / 16 Outputs

Program Control

Stored Program, Cyclic Processing, TIME Driven Interrupt

I/O Processing

Indirect (or direct by instruction)

Language

IL(Instruction List), LD(Ladder Diagram)

Basic inst.

55 Instruction

Application Inst.

289 Instruction

Speed

200ns / Step(Basic Instruction)

Program Capacity

8k Step

▶ I/O and Data Memory

128

4,096

1,024

1,024,

2,048

256,

256

100*100

5,000

1,024

INPUT SPECIFICATIONS
Items

Specifications

Input Voltage

DC 24V

Nominal Input Current

4 mA

On Voltage
/On Current

DC 19V/4mA

Off Voltage
/Off Current

DC 11V/1mA

Resp.
Time

Off → On

5㎳ or faster

On → Off

5㎳ or faster

Common Type

4 Points Common

Operation Display

LED

Insulation Type

Photo-coupler

Quick Reference Manual

Input Type

SINK/SRC

Wiring Diagram

OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

Items

Relay

Transister

Nominal Output
Voltage

AC 220V / DC24V

DC12/24V

Max. Output
Current

2A for 1 Point
( 5A for common)

0.2A for 1 Point
( 2A for common)

Off → On

10ms or faster

1ms or faster

On → Off

5ms or faster

1ms or faster

Common Type

4 Points

8 Points

Operation Display

LED

Insulation Type

Relay

Photo-coupler

Resp.
Time

Wiring Diagram

COMMUNICATION OPTION
▶ RS232/422/485

311

312

CIMON-PLC

구분

-T

-U

-R

-S

Channel Type

RS232C/RS422/485

RS422/485
(2 ports)

RS232C

RS422/485

HMI
Mode

Param

Multi-Drop( max.32 stations)

Loader

Support

Program

Support

Data Bits

7 or 8 Bits

Stop Bits

1 or 2 Bits

Parity

Even / Odd / None
Asynchronous

Synchronize
Speed(bps)
Modem Supp.

300/600/1200/2400/9600/19200/38400
Supports Dial-Up MODEM

▶ Ethernet
Option(BPnnMxx-)

-E

Cable Type

10BASE -T

Comm. Speed

10Mbps

Max. Distance

10m(Node to HUB)

Max. HUB

Max.4 cascaded HUB

Max. Frame Size

1500Byte

Protocol

TCP/IP, UDP/IP

Main Block Line-Up

Quick Reference Manual

Model Name

Power

Input

CM2-BP32MDTA□
CM2-BP32MDCA□

Output
TR(SINK)

AC 90
240V

TR(SRC)

CM2-BP32MDRA□

RELAY

CM2-BP32MDTD□

TR(SINK)

CM2-BP32MDCD□

DC 24V

TR(SRC)

CM2-BP32MDRD□

RELAY
TR(SINK)
AC 90
240V

TR(SRC)

CM2-BP16MDRA□

RELAY

CM2-BP16MDTD□

TR(SINK)

CM2-BP16MDCD□
CM2-BP16MDRD□

DC 24V

R: RS232C
T: RS232C/422/485
S: RS422/485

DC24V
CM2-BP16MDTA□
CM2-BP16MDCA□

Option

U: RS422/485 (2ports)
E: Ethernet

TR(SRC)
RELAY

EXTERNAL WIRING

▶ CM2-BP32MDTA□

▶ CM2-BP32MDCA□

313

314

CIMON-PLC

▶ CM2-BP32MDRA□

▶ CM2-BP32MDCD□

▶ CM2-BP32MDTD□

▶ CM2-BP32MDRD□

Quick Reference Manual

315

COMMUNICATION CABLE WIRING

WIRING PRECAUTIONS

▶ Always ground the FG terminal for the PLC. There is a risk of electric shock or malfunction

▶ When turning on the power and operating the module after wiring Is completed, always attach
the terminal cover
that comes with the Product.

▶ Tighten the terminal screws within the range of specified torque If the terminal screws are loose,
it may result in
short circuits or malfunction

316

CIMON-PLC

▶ Be careful not to let foreign matters such as sawdust or wire Chips get inside the module. These
may cause fires,
failure or Malfunction.

OUTWARD DIMENSIONS

( Unit : mm )

INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS

▶ Use the PLC in an environment that meets the general specifications Given in the User’s Manual of
the CPU module being used.
▶ Do not bunch the control wires or communication cables with the main circuit or power wires, or
install them close to
each other. They should be installed 100mm (3.94 inch) or more from each other.
Not doing so could result in noise that may cause malfunction
▶ Switch all phases of the external power supply off when mounting or removing the module. Not
doing so may cause
damage to the module.
▶ Do not directly touch the conductive area or electronic components Of the module. Doing so may
cause malfunction
or failure in the Module.
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

Quick Reference Manual

3.26

317

CIMON-BP Series 16Main Block
Modules :
· CM2-BP16MDRA-*

· CM2-BP16MDRD-*

· CM2-BP16MDTA-*

· CM2-BP16MDTD-*

· CM2-BP16MDCA-*

· CM2-BP16MDCD-*

Contents :
· GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
· MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
· INPUT / OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
· COMMUNICATION OPTIONS
· MAIN BLOCK LINE-UP
· EXTERNAL WIRING
· COMMUNICATION CABLE WIRING
· WIRING PRECAUTIONS
· DIMENSIONS

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item

Specification

Op.Temp.

Reference

Operating Temperature -10 ~65

St.Temp

Storage Temperature

-25 ~

Op.Hum

Operating Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

St.Hum

Storage Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency
10=

Vibration

57=

Acceleration

f=
57Hz

Amplitude
0.075mm

f=
150Hz

9.8m/s2{1G}

In case of continuous vibration
Frequency
10=
f
=
57Hz

Sweep

Acceleration

Amplitude
0.035mm

10 times
in X,Y,Z

IEC61131-2

318

CIMON-PLC

57=
f=
150Hz

4.8m/s2{0.5G}

Max. shock Acc. :147 m/s{15G}
Time :11㎳
Pulse wave: Half sine wave pulse(3 times in X,Y,Z)

Shock

Noise

Square wave
impulse noise

2,000 V

Electro-static
discharge

Voltage :4kV (Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magneti
c field

27 ~500 MHz,10 V/m

Fast transient
bust noise

Power
Module

Digital I/O
(24V or more)

2kV

IEC61131-2

KDT Standard

IEC1000-4-2
IEC1131-2
IEC1000-4-3

Digital I/O
(Less than 24V)
Analog
I/Ocomm..
Interface

1kV

IEC61131-2

IEC1131-2
IEC1000-4-4

0.25kV

Environ..

No corrosive gas and no dust

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

2 or less

Cooling

Natural Air Cooling

MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
Items

Specifications

Power Supply

AC 220V / DC 24V (Max. 15W)

Input

DC 24V

Output

Relay / TR Sink / TR Source

Expansion

Not Supported

Main Block I/O

8 Inputs / 7 Outputs

Program Control

Stored Program, Cyclic Processing,
Time Driven Interrupt

I/O Processing

Indirect (or direct by instruction)

Language

IL(Instruction List), LD(Ladder Diagrm)

Basic Inst.

62 Instructions

Application Inst.

308 Instructions

Speed

200㎱ / Step (Basic Instruction)

Program Capacity

8K Steps

I/O and Data Memory
X

Quick Reference Manual

4,096

1,024

256

100*100

5,000

1,024

319

2,048

INPUT / OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
Items

Relay Output

DC Input

Transistor Output

Input Voltage

DC 24V

AC220V / DC24V

DC12/24V

Nominal
Input/Output
Current

4mA

1Points 2A / COM 5A

1Points 0.5A / COM 4A

On Voltage/Current

DC19V/4mA

Off Voltage/Current

DC11V/1mA

Resp.
Time

Off -> On

or faster

On -> Off

or faster

Common Type

or faster
or faster

or faster

4 Points

8 Points

LED

Insulation Type

Photo coupler

Relay

Photo coupler

Input Type

SINK/SRC

Operation Display

Wiring Diagram

COMMUNICATION OPTIONS

RS232/422/485

Option (BPnnMxxx-)

-R

-S

Channel Type

RS232C

RS422/485

Mode

Param

HMI

Multi-Drop (max. 32 stations)

Data Bits

7 or 8 bits

Stop Bits

1 or 2 bits

Parity

Even / Odd / None

320

CIMON-PLC

Synchronize

Asynchronous

Speed (bps)

300/600/1200/2400/9600/19200/38400

Modem Supp.

Supports Dial-Up MODEM

MAIN BLOCK LINE-UP

Model Name
CM2-BP16MDTA?
CM2-BP16MDCA?
CM2-BP16MDRA?
CM2-BP16MDTD?
CM2-BP16MDCD?
CM2-BP16MDRD?

Power
AC 90
~
240V
DC 24V

Input

Output
Option
TR(SINK)
TR(SRC)
RELAY R : RS232C
TR(SINK) S : RS422/485
TR(SRC)
RELAY

EXTERNAL WIRING

· CM2-BP16MDTA*

· CM2-BP16MDCA*

Quick Reference Manual

· CM2-BP16MDRA*

· CM2-BP16MDTD*

· CM2-BP16MDCD*

321

322

CIMON-PLC

· CM2-BP16MDRD*

COMMUNICATION CABLE WIRING

Quick Reference Manual

323

WIRING PRECAUTIONS
Always ground the FG terminal for the PLC. There is a risk of electric shock or malfunction.
When turning on the power and operating the module after wiring is completed, always attach the terminal cover
that comes with the product.
Tighten the terminal screws within the range of specified torque. If the terminal screws are loose, it may result in
short circuits or malfunction.
Be careful not to let foreign matters such as sawdust or wire chips get inside the module. These may cause
fires, failure or malfunction.

DIMENSIONS

324

3.27

CIMON-PLC

CIMON-BP 32 I/O Expansion Blocks
Modules :
· CM2-BP32EDT
· CM2-BP32EDC
· CM2-BP32EDR
Contents :
· GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
· INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
· EXPANSION CABLE
· SAFETY PRECAUTIONS( on wiring )
· EXTERNAL WIRING
· INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS
· DIMENSIONS

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Item
Op.Temp.
St.Temp

Specification

Reference

Operating Temperature -10 ~65
Storage Temperature

-25 ~

Op.Hum

Operating Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

St.Hum

Storage Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

Quick Reference Manual

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency
10=
57=

Acceleration

f=
57Hz

325

Amplitude

Sweep

0.075mm

f=
150Hz

9.8m/s2{1G}

Vibration
In case of continuous vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

10=
f
=
57Hz
57=
f=
150Hz

IEC61131-2

10 times
in X,Y,Z

Amplitude
0.035mm

4.8m/s2{0.5G}

Max. shock Acc. :147 m/s{15G}
Time :11㎳
Pulse wave: Half sine wave pulse(3 times in X,Y,Z)

Shock

Noise

Square wave
impulse noise

2,000 V

Electro-static
discharge

Voltage :4kV (Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magneti
c field

27 ~500 MHz,10 V/m

Fast transient
bust noise

Power
Module

Digital I/O
(24V or more)

2kV

1kV

Environ..

No corrosive gas and no dust

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

2 or less

Cooling

Natural Air Cooling

IEC61131-2

KDT Standard
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-2
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-3

Digital I/O
(Less than 24V)
Analog
I/Ocomm..
Interface

IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-4

0.25kV

INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

ITEMS

DC INPUT

RELAY OUTPUT

TRANSISTOR OUTPUT

Input Voltage

DC 24V

AC220V / DC24V

DC12/24V

Nominal Input
Current

4mA

1Point 2A / COM 5A

1Point 0.2A / COM 4A

On Voltage/Current

DC19V/4mA

Off Voltage/Current

DC11V/1mA

Resp.
Time

Off -> On

or faster

On -> Off

or faster

or faster?

or faster

326

CIMON-PLC

Common Type
Operation Display
Insulation Type
Input Type

4 Points Common

4Points?

8Points

LED?

Photo-coupler

RELAY

Photo-coupler

SINK/SRC

Wiring Diagram

EXPANSION CABLE

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS( on wiring )

In case of connecting to a terminal block without contact connector, the uncovered part of a
wire is to be 6mm to 8mm.
And take care that the uncovered metal part of a wire is pushed out from a terminal block.

Quick Reference Manual

In case of a twisted wire, take care that it is not loosed.

EXTERNAL WIRING
· CM2-BP32EDT

327

328

CIMON-PLC

· CM2-BP32EDC

· CM2-BP32EDR

INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

Quick Reference Manual

329

Use the PLC in an environment that meets the general specifications given in the User’s Manual of the CPU
module being used.
Do not bunch the control wires or communication cables with the main circuit or power wires, or install
them close to each other.
They should be installed 100mm (3.94 inch) or more from each other. Not doing so could result in noise that
may cause malfunction.
Switch all phases of the external power supply off when mounting or removing the module. Not doing so
may cause damage to the module.
Do not directly touch the conductive area or electronic components of the module. Doing so may cause
malfunction or failure in the module.

DIMENSIONS

3.28

CIMON-BP 16 I/O Expansion Blocks
Modules :
· CM2-BP16EDT
· CM2-BP16EDC
· CM2-BP16EDR
· CM2-BP16EDO
· CM2-BP16EOR
· CM2-BP16EOT
· CM2-BP16EOC
Contents :

330

CIMON-PLC

· GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
· INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
· EXPANSION CABLE
· SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (ON Wiring)
· EXTERNAL WIRING
· INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS
· DIMENSIONS

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Item

Specification

Op.Temp.

Reference

Operating Temperature -10 ~65

St.Temp

Storage Temperature

-25 ~

Op.Hum

Operating Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

St.Hum

Storage Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency
10=
57=

Acceleration

f=
57Hz

Amplitude

Sweep

0.075mm

f=
150Hz

9.8m/s2{1G}

Vibration
In case of continuous vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

10=
f
=
57Hz
57=
f=
150Hz
Shock

Noise

10 times
in X,Y,Z

Amplitude
0.035mm

4.8m/s2{0.5G}

Max. shock Acc. :147 m/s{15G}
Time :11㎳
Pulse wave: Half sine wave pulse(3 times in X,Y,Z)
Square wave
impulse noise

2,000 V

Electro-static
discharge

Voltage :4kV (Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magneti
c field

27 ~500 MHz,10 V/m

Fast transient
bust noise

IEC61131-2

Power
Module

Digital I/O
(24V or more)

IEC61131-2

KDT Standard

Digital I/O
(Less than 24V)
Analog
I/Ocomm..
Interface

IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-2
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-3

IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-4

Quick Reference Manual

2kV

1kV

331

0.25kV

Environ..

No corrosive gas and no dust

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

2 or less

Cooling

Natural Air Cooling

INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

Items

DC INPUT

Relay Output

Input Voltage

DC 24V

AC220V / DC24V

DC12/24V

Nominal Input
Current

4mA

1Point 2A / COM 5A

1Point 0.2A / COM 2A

On Voltage/Current

DC19V/4mA

Off Voltage/Current

DC11V/1mA

Off -> On

5㎳ or faster

or faster

On -> Off

5㎳ or faster

or faster

Common Type

4 Points

4Points?

8 Points?

Operation Display

LED

Insulation Type

Photo coupler

Relay

Photo coupler

Input Type

SINK / SRC ?

Resp.
Time

Wiring Diagram

EXPANSION CABLE

332

CIMON-PLC

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (ON Wiring)
In case of connecting to a terminal block without contact connector, the uncovered part of a
wire is to be 6mm to 8mm.
And take care that the uncovered metal part of a wire is pushed out from a terminal block.

Quick Reference Manual

In case of a twisted wire, take care that it is not loosed.

EXTERNAL WIRING

· CM2-BP16EDT

· CM2-BP16EDC

o INPUT : 8 Points

o INPUT : 8Points

o OUTPUT : 8Points(TR SINK)

o OUTPUT : 8Points(TR Source)

· CM2-BP16EDR

· CM2-BP16EDO

o INPUT : 8Points

o INPUT : 16Points

o OUTPUT : 8Points(RELAY)

o OUTPUT : None

333

334

CIMON-PLC

· CM2-BP16EOR

· CM2-BP16EOT

o INPUT : 0Points

o OUTPUT : 16Points(RELAY)

o OUTPUT : 16Points(TR Sink)

Quick Reference Manual

· CM2-BP16EOC
o INPUT : 0Points
o OUTPUT : 16Points(TR Source)

335

336

CIMON-PLC

INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS

DIMENSIONS

Quick Reference Manual

3.29

CM2-BP04EAO (Analog Expansion Blocks - AD V/I 4Ch Input)
Modules :
· CM2-BP04EAO (Analog Expansion Blocks - AD V/I 4Ch Input)
Contents :
· GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
· MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
· User Program Memory MAP
· I/O MAP
· EXTERNAL WIRING

337

338

CIMON-PLC

· EXTERNAL WIRING
· PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE
· TROUBLE SHOOTING
· FEATURES
· INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS
· DIMENSIONS

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Item

Specification

Op.Temp.

Reference

Operating Temperature -10 ~65

St.Temp

Storage Temperature

-25 ~

Op.Hum

Operating Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

St.Hum

Storage Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency
10=
57=

Acceleration

f=
57Hz

Amplitude

Sweep

0.075mm

f=
150Hz

9.8m/s2{1G}

Vibration
In case of continuous vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

10=
f
=
57Hz
57=
f=
150Hz
Shock

Noise

10 times
in X,Y,Z

Amplitude
0.035mm

4.8m/s2{0.5G}

Max. shock Acc. :147 m/s{15G}
Time :11㎳
Pulse wave: Half sine wave pulse(3 times in X,Y,Z)
Square wave
impulse noise

2,000 V

Electro-static
discharge

Voltage :4kV (Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magneti
c field

27 ~500 MHz,10 V/m

Fast transient
bust noise

IEC61131-2

Power
Module

2kV

Digital I/O
(24V or more)

1kV

IEC61131-2

KDT Standard
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-2
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-3

Digital I/O
(Less than 24V)
Analog
I/Ocomm..
Interface

IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-4

0.25kV

Quick Reference Manual

Environ..

No corrosive gas and no dust

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

2 or less

Cooling

Natural Air Cooling

339

MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
Items

Specifications

Channels

4 Channels
0 ~ 5V
1 ~ 5V
0 ~ 10V
-10 ~ 10V
0 ~ 20㎃
4 ~ 20㎃

V
Input
I
Converted Data

0 ~ 16000 (-8000 ~ 8000)
0 ~ 5V

0.3125㎷

1 ~ 5V

0.25㎷

0 ~ 10V

0.625㎷

-10 ~ +10V

1.25㎷

0 ~ 20㎃

1.25㎂

V
Precision

I
4 ~ 20㎃

1.0㎂

Accuracy

0.3%(Full Scale)

Conv. Speed

5㎳ / 1 Ch.
V : ±12V
I : ±25㎃
Photo-Coupler
(Between Channel : Not Insulated)

Max. Input
Insulation
Occupied I/O

16 Points

Terminal Block

12 Point Terminal Block X 2

External Power

24VDC

Power Consumption

70㎃

User Program Memory MAP
Address

Descriptions

R/W

Channel Enable/Disable

R/W

CH1 Avr. Filtering Constant

R/W

CH2 Avr. Filtering Constant

R/W

CH3 Avr. Filtering Constant

R/W

CH4 Avr. Filtering Constant

R/W

HEX

DEC

0H
1H

340

CIMON-PLC

Reserved

Avr. Filtering Method

R/W

AD Conversion Completed Flags

CH1 Converted Value

CH2 Converted Value

CH3 Converted Value

CH4 Converted Value

Reserved

10H

11H

12H

13H

Error Code

14H

Input Signal Range

R/W

15H

Reserved

16H

Channel Select for Calib. (Offset)

R/W

17H

Channel Select for Calib (Gain)

R/W

Address

Descriptions

R/W

Converted Value Range

R/W

Reserved

CH1 Max. Value

CH1 Min. Value

CH2 Max. Value

21H

CH2 Min. Value

22H

CH3 Max Value

23H

CH3 Min. Value

24H

CH4 Max. Value

25H

CH4 Min. Value

26H

27H

28H

29H

2AH

Reserved

HEX

DEC

18H

19H

1AH

1BH

1CH

1DH

1EH

1FH
20H

2BH

2CH

2DH

Quick Reference Manual

341

I/O MAP

Direction : CPU ← A/D
Inputs

Direction : CPU→ A/D

Descriptions

Outputs

Descriptions

Module Ready

A/D Conversion Completed

Completed to Store Config. Data

Req. to Store Config. Data

Ch. Selection Completed

Req. to Select Channel

Calib. Mode

Reserved

Req. to Calib. Mode

Calib. Mode Select (Offset/Gain)

Y9
Reserved

Reserved
YA

Req. to Reset Min/Max.

Req. to Clear Error

Error

EXTERNAL WIRING

Codes

Descriptions

4•

Invalid input signal range defined. This error can be occurred when the module was configured
with inadequate configuration tool. Assure the menu that had been used for configuration is Tool
-> Optional Module Setup -> AD Module.
Invalid average time was defined. This error can be occurred when the module was configured
with inadequate configuration tool. Assure the menu that had been used for configuration is Tool
-> Optional Module Setup -> AD Module.
Invalid average count was defined. This error can be occurred when the module was configured
with inadequate configuration tool. Assure the menu that had been used for configuration is Tool
-> Optional Module Setup -> AD Module.
Calibration error. This error will be occurred in case of inaccurate reference current or voltage
signal is supplied during calibration.

Calibration error. ‘Offset’and ‘Gain’calibration must not be fulfilled simultaneously.

1•

2•

3•

System error. Check the CPU block and expansion cable.

•is replaced with channel number (1 ~ 4 ) which is in trouble.
can be any number between 0 to 3

342

CIMON-PLC

EXTERNAL WIRING

In case of using current input, I+ and V+ terminal must be connected with shunt wire.

PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE

Rung 2

FROM instruction was used to read converted value from BP04EAO module.
It reads converted values of Ch1 to Ch4 on every 0.1 second and stores to D00000
to D00003.
The first operand of this instruction ‘H0001’ means the first expanded block. If
there was another block between CPU and AD, this operand should be ‘H0002’.
The second operand ‘11’ means the address of ‘User Program Memory’where
the converted value is stored in. (Refer to the MAP)
The third operand ‘D00000’ means the device area where the converted
value would be moved to. The converted value of CH1 will be moved to D0000
and CH2 will be moved to D0001 and so on.
The last operand ‘4’ means 4 WORD moving. If you assign ‘1’to this operand,
only a converted value of CH1 would be moved to D0000.

TROUBLE SHOOTING
If there was any trouble with input signal, configuration or module itself, the RUN LED would
blink every 0.2 second. In this case,

Quick Reference Manual

343

the error code can be read by CICON or address 19 of ‘User Program Memory’.
Check following points first :

How to check the error code :
Select Tool -> Optional Module Setup -> AD Module? menu of the CICON.
A dialog box titled with AD module setup? will be popped-up. Assure the ‘Base’
number is ‘0’and ‘Slot’ number is appropriate number (1..3) for the module. Click
the Status? button of this dialog box. Another dialog box titled with AD module
status? will be popped-up, the error code will be displayed in this dialog box.
CICON must be in connected status (On-Line) with PLC.
Erasing error code :
After trouble fixing, click the " Reset Error " button in the dialog box titled with " AD module status
"

FEATURES
▶ CM2-BP04EAO supports analog inputs of voltage and/or current up to 4 channels.
Supported input signal types (I): 0~20mA, 4~20mA,
Supported input signal types (V): 0~5V, 1~5V, -10~10V, 0~10V
Various types of noise filter can be applied by simple configuration with CICON. It
includes average based on sampling count,
average based on time span and 2nd order digital filter algorithm.
Provides high precision digital converted data (1/16000)
RUN LED will blink every 0.3 second in case of abnormal status. Check the error code by
using CICON

INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS
Use the PLC in an environment that meets the general specifications given in the User’s Manual
of the CPU module being used.
Do not bunch the control wires or communication cables with the main circuit or power wires, or
install them close to each other.
They should be installed 100mm (3.94 inch) or more from each other. Not doing so could result
in noise that may cause malfunction.
Switch all phases of the external power supply off when mounting or removing the module. Not
doing so may cause damage to the module.
Do not directly touch the conductive area or electronic components of the module. Doing so may
cause malfunction or failure in the module.

344

CIMON-PLC

DIMENSIONS

3.30

CM2-BP04EOA (Analog Expansion Blocks - DA V/I 4Ch Output)
Modules :
· CM2-BP04EOA (Analog Expansion Blocks - DA V/I 4Ch Output)
Contents :
· GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
· MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
· I/O MAP

Quick Reference Manual

345

· USER PROGRAM MEMORY MAP
· ERROR CODES
· EXTERNAL WIRING
· PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE
· PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE
· PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE
· TROUBLE SHOOTING
· FEATURES
· INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS
· DIMENSIONS

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Item

Specification

Op.Temp.

Reference

Operating Temperature -10 ~65

St.Temp

Storage Temperature

-25 ~

Op.Hum

Operating Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

St.Hum

Storage Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency
10=
57=

Acceleration

f=
57Hz

Amplitude

Sweep

0.075mm

f=
150Hz

9.8m/s2{1G}

Vibration
In case of continuous vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

10=
f
=
57Hz
57=
f=
150Hz

4.8m/s2{0.5G}

Square wave
impulse noise

2,000 V

Electro-static
discharge

Voltage :4kV (Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magneti
c field

27 ~500 MHz,10 V/m

Fast transient

IEC61131-2

0.035mm

Max. shock Acc. :147 m/s{15G}
Time :11㎳
Pulse wave: Half sine wave pulse(3 times in X,Y,Z)

Shock

Noise

Amplitude

10 times
in X,Y,Z

Power

Digital I/O

IEC61131-2

KDT Standard
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-2
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-3

Digital I/O

IEC61131-2

346

CIMON-PLC

Module

(24V or more)

bust noise
2kV

(Less than 24V)
Analog
I/Ocomm..
Interface

1kV

Environ..

No corrosive gas and no dust

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

2 or less

Cooling

Natural Air Cooling

IEC1000-4-4

0.25kV

MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
Items

Specifications

Channels

4 Channels

Analog
Range

-10 ~ 10V

4 ~ 20㎃

Digital Range

0 ~ 16000 (-8000 ~ 8000)

-10 ~ +10V

1.25㎷

4 ~ 20㎃

1.0㎂

Precision
Accuracy

±0.3% (Full Scale)

Conv. Speed

15㎳ / 4 Channels

Max. Output

V : ±12V
I : ±21㎃

Insulation

Photo-Coupler
Between Channels : Not Insulated

Occupied I/O

16 Points

Terminal Block

12 Points Terminal Block X 2

External Power
Power
Consumption

24VDC
70㎃

I/O MAP

Inputs
X0
X1
X2

Direction
CPU← D/A
Descriptions
Module Ready
Reserved

Outputs

Direction
CPU→ D/A
Descriptions

Y0
Y1

Reserved

Quick Reference Manual

347

Conf. Data Stored.

Req. to Store Config. Data

Ch. Selection Completed

Req. to Select Channel

Calib. Data Stored

Req. to Store Calib. Data

Conf. Mode

Req. to Calib.

Reserved

Calib. Mode Select

Error

Req. to Clear Error

USER PROGRAM MEMORY MAP

Address

Descriptions

R/W

DA Conversion Enable/Disable

R/W

CH1 Output Value

R/W

CH2 Output Value

R/W

CH3 Output Value

R/W

CH4 Output Value

R/W

6
Reserved

Error Code

HOLE/CLEAR Setting

R/W

CH1 Output Value Check Code

CH2 Output Value Check Code

CH3 Output Value Check Code

CH4 Output Value Check Code

15
Reserved

10H

HEX

DEC

348

CIMON-PLC

11H

12H

13H

Calib. Data (Offset Value)

R/W

14H

Calib. Data (Gain Value)

R/W

15H

Calib. Mode (Offset/Gail)

R/W

16H

Range of Output Value

R/W

17H

DA Output Enable/Disable

R/W

18H

Type(V/I) of Output Value

R/W

ERROR CODES
•is replaced with channel number (1 ~ 4 ) which is in trouble.
△ can be any number between 0 to 3
1•

I n v a l i d output value assigned (too big value). Check the
must be between -192 to 16191 or -8192 to 8191

2•

I n v a l i d output value assigned (too small value). Check the
They must be between -192 to 16191 or -8192 to 8191

3•

Calibration

4•

Calibration error. ‘Offset’ and ‘Gain’ calibration must not be fulfilled simultaneously.

Calibration error

10△

error. Too big value was designated in

digital output values. They
digital output

values.

offset or gain value.

System error. Check the CPU block and expansion cable.

EXTERNAL WIRING

Output signal types (current/voltage) are configurable with CICON for each channel.
Assure the wired signal type is matched with the configuration for each channel.

Quick Reference Manual

349

PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE

▶ Rung 2
For safety purpose, the module doesn’t output D/A signals without definite command from
sequence program
or CICON. This rung sends signal output enable command to DA module by TO instruction.

PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE

Generally, for unburden CPU’s scan speed, it’s better to output all channel simultaneously than outputs one

350

CIMON-PLC

by one channel.
Following example instruction shows this method.

TO H0001 1 D00000 4

PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE
The first operand ‘H0001’ means the first expanded block. If there was another block between CPU
and DA,
this operand should be ‘H0002’.
The second operand 23 means the address of this enable command buffer in ‘User Program Memory’.
(Refer to the MAP)
The third operand ‘H000F’ means enabling all outputs (CH1 to CH4). Each channel is allocated
bitwisely. If you want to
enable only CH3, this value should be ‘H0004’.
The fourth operand ‘1’ means 1 WORD writing to ‘User Program Memory’.
▶ Rung 4
Write output value of CH1 on every 0.1 second with a TO instruction. The second operand ‘1’ means
the address of
‘User Program Memory’ where the output value should be written to for Ch1. (Refer to the MAP)
The third operand ‘D00000’ means the device which is storing the digital value for signal output.
The last operand ‘1’ means 1 WORD writing.
▶ Rung 6
Shows another example of one channel output. This rung is for Ch2 and the output value is stored in
D00001.
▶ Rung 8
Shows simultaneous output example of multi-channel. This rung output signals to Ch3 and Ch4
simultaneously.
The digital values are stored in D00002 and D00003 for each channel.

TROUBLE SHOOTING
If there was any trouble with sensor, cable, configuration or module itself, the RUN LED would
blink every 0.2 second. In this case,
the error code can be read by CICON or address 31 – 34 of ‘User Program Memory’.
Check following points first :

How to check the error code :

Quick Reference Manual

351

Select "Tool -> Optional Module Setup -> RTD Module? menu of the CICON. A dialog box titled
with "RTD module setup?
will be popped-up. Assure the ‘Base’ number is ‘0’ and ‘Slot’ number is appropriate number (1..3)
for the module.
Click the "Status? button of this dialog box. Another dialog box titled with "RTD module status?
will be popped-up, the error code
will be displayed in this dialog box for each channel. CICON must be in connected status
(On-Line) with PLC.
Erasing error code :
After trouble fixing, click the "Reset Error?button in the dialog box titled with " RTD module status"

FEATURES
CM2-BP04EOA provides the current and/or voltage analog signal outputs up to 4 channels.
Voltage Output Range : -10 ~ 10V
Current Output Range : 4 ~ 20㎃
The analog outputs are high precision DA converted signal, and their resolutions are 1/16000.
DA channel provide HOLD/CLEAR mode. When HOLD mode is selected this module maintains output
even if CPU was stopped.
Disabled DA channel maintains outputs 4㎃ or -10V
When the RUN LED blinks, there might be some error. CICON will be helpful for checking and fixing the
trouble.
DA channels can be manually tested with CICON even if CPU was in STOP mode..

DIMENSIONS

352

3.31

CIMON-PLC

CM2-BP04EAA (Analog Expansion Blocks - Input 2Ch / Output
2Ch)
Modules :
· CM2-BP04EAA (Analog Expansion Blocks)
Contents :
· GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
· MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
· I/O MAP
· USER PROGRAM MEMORY MAP
· ERROR CODES
· EXTERNAL WIRING
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

Quick Reference Manual

353

· PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE
· PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE
· TROUBLE SHOOTING
· FEATURES
· INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS
· DIMENSIONS

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Item

Specification

Op.Temp.

Reference

Operating Temperature -10 ~65

St.Temp

Storage Temperature

-25 ~

Op.Hum

Operating Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

St.Hum

Storage Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency
10=
57=

Acceleration

f=
57Hz

Amplitude

Sweep

0.075mm

f=
150Hz

9.8m/s2{1G}

Vibration
In case of continuous vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

10=
f
=
57Hz
57=
f=
150Hz

Amplitude

4.8m/s2{0.5G}

Square wave
impulse noise

2,000 V

Electro-static
discharge

Voltage :4kV (Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magneti
c field

27 ~500 MHz,10 V/m

Fast transient
bust noise

Power
Module

2kV

IEC61131-2

0.035mm

Max. shock Acc. :147 m/s{15G}
Time :11㎳
Pulse wave: Half sine wave pulse(3 times in X,Y,Z)

Shock

Noise

10 times
in X,Y,Z

Digital I/O
(24V or more)

1kV

IEC61131-2

KDT Standard
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-2
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-3

Digital I/O
(Less than 24V)
Analog
I/Ocomm..
Interface
0.25kV

IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-4

354

CIMON-PLC

Environ..

No corrosive gas and no dust

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

2 or less

Cooling

Natural Air Cooling

MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
Items

A/D Part

D/A Part

Number of Ch

2 Channels

Voltage

0 ~ 5V
1 ~ 5V
0 ~ 10V
-10 ~ 10V

-10 ~ 10V

Current

0 ~ 20㎃
4 ~ 20㎃

4 ~ 20㎃

Signal Range

Digital Value Range

Res
olut
ion

0 ~ 16000 (-8000 ~ 8000)

0 ~ 5V

0.3125㎷

1 ~ 5V

0.25㎷

0 ~ 10V

0.625㎷

-10 ~ +10V

1.25㎷

0 ~ 20mA

1.25㎂

4 ~ 20mA

1.0㎂

Precision

±0.3% (Full Scale)

Conversion Speed

5㎳ /1Ch.

Max. Signal Range

Insulation
Occupied I/O

V : ±12V
I : ±25㎃

V : ±12V
I : ±21㎃

PLC main circuit : Photo Coupler
Between channels : Not Insulated
6 Points

8 Points

Terminal Block

12 points T/B × 2pcs

External Power Supply

24VDC

Power Consumption

50㎃

Quick Reference Manual

355

I/O MAP
Direction : CPU← AD/DA

Direction : CPU→ AD/DA

Input

Descriptions

Output

Descriptions

A/D Ready

Req. to Configure A/D

A/D Converted
Successfully

Req. to Select A/D Channel

A/D Configured Successfully

Req. to Save Offset/Gain

A/D Ch. Selected Successfully

Req. to Enter Offset/Gain Mode

reserved

Req. to Clear Min/Max Log

A/D Offset/Gain Mode

Reserved

A/D Error

Req. to Clear Error

D/A Ready

Req. to Configure D/A

Reserved

Req. to Select D/A Channel

D/A Configured Successfully

Req. to Save D/A Offset/Gain

D/A Ch. Selected Successfully

Req. to Enter D/A Offset/Gain Mode

D/A Calibrated Successfully

Req. to Calib. D/A

D/A Offset/Gain Mode

Reserved

D/A Error

Req. to Clear Error

USER PROGRAM MEMORY MAP
Addr.

Descriptions

R/W

A/D Conversion Enable

R/W

Avr. Time/Count for CH1

R/W

Avr. Time/Count for CH2

R/W

Reserved

Avr. Mode Enable

R/W

Hex.

Dec.

356

CIMON-PLC

A/D Conversion Status Flags

CH1 Converted(Input) Value

CH2 Converted(Input) Value

Reserved

A/D Error Code

Input Range (CH1 ~ CH2)

R/W

A/D Calib.(Offset) Channel Select

R/W

A/D Calib.(Gain) Channel Select

R/W

Range of Converted Value

R/W

10H

11H

12H

Reserved

13H

14H

Max. Converted Value (CH1)

R/W

15H

Min. Converted Value (CH1)

R/W

16H

Max. Converted Value (CH2)

R/W

17H

Min. Converted Value (CH2)

R/W

Decriptions

R/W

Reserved

Addr.
Hex.

Dec.

18H

19H

1AH

1BH

1CH

1DH

1EH

1FH

20H

D/A Converting Enable

R/W

21H

CH1 Output Value

R/W

22H

CH2 Output Value

R/W

23H

24H

Reserved

25H

D/A Error Code

26H

HOLD(1)/CLEAR(0) Mode Select

R/W

27H

Invalid Value was Written to CH1

28H

Invalid Value was Written to CH2

Quick Reference Manual

29H

2AH

2BH

357

Reserved

D/A Calib.(Offset) Channel Select

R/W

2CH

D/A Calib.(Gain) Channel Select

R/W

2DH

Offset/Gain Value

R/W

2EH

Range of Digital Value

R/W

2FH

D/A Signal Output Enable

R/W

30H

Reserved

ERROR CODES
•is replaced with channel number (1 ~ 4 ) which is in trouble.
△ can be any number between 0 to 3

1•

2•

Invalid average time was defined. This error can be occurred when the module was
configured with inadequate configuration tool. Assure the menu that had been used for
configuration is “Tool -> Optional Module Setup -> AD/DA Module”.

3•

Invalid average count was defined. This error can be occurred when the module was
configured with inadequate configuration tool. Assure the menu that had been used for
configuration is “Tool -> Optional Module Setup -> AD/DA Module”.

4•

Calibration error. This error will be occurred in case of inaccurate reference current or
voltage signal is supplied during calibration.

Calibration error. ‘Offset’ and ‘Gain’ calibration must not be fulfilled simultaneously.

10△

System error. Check the CPU block and expansion cable.

EXTERNAL WIRING

Wiring Method

358

CIMON-PLC

CH1
V
INPUT
I
INPUT

CH1 I+
N/C

CH2

CH1 V+
Wire V+

Short CH1 I+ and CH1 V+
Wire I+

CHWire V-

CH2 I+
N/C

CH1
Wire I+

Short CH2 I+ and CH V+
Wire I+

CH3

CH2 V+
Wire V+

CH2Wire V
CH2
Wire I-

CH4

V
OUTPUT

CH3 V+: Wire V+
CH3 V-: Wire V-

CH3 I+:N/C
CH3 I-: N/C

CH4 V+: Wire V+
CH4 V-: Wire V-

CH4 I+:N/C
CH4 I-: N/C

I
OUTPUT

CH3 V+:N/C
CH3 V-: N/C

CH3 I+: Wire I+
CH3 I-: Wire I-

CH4 V+:N/C
CH4 V-: N/C

CH4 I+: Wire I+
CH4 I-: Wire I-

PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE

Rung 1

For safety purpose, the module doesn’t output D/A signals without definite command

from
sequence program or CICON.
This rung sends signal output command to AD/DA module with TO instruction.
The first operand ‘H0001’ means the first expanded block.

Quick Reference Manual

Memory’.

359

If there was another block between CPU and AD/DA, this operand should be ‘H0002’.
The second operand 47 means the address of this command buffer in ‘User Program
(Refer to the MAP)

PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE
The third operand ‘H0003’ means enable output of CH3 and CH4. Each channel is allocated bitwisely.
If you want to enable only CH3, this value should be ‘H0001’. The fourth operand ‘1’ means 1 WORD writing
to ‘User Program Memory’.
▶ Rung 3
Read AD converted value of CH1 and CH2 on every scan. FROM instruction was used, and the first
operand of it has the same
meaning with TO instruction.
The second operand ‘7’ means the address of ‘User Program Memory’ where the measured value is
stored in. (Refer to the MAP)
The third operand ‘D00000’ means which device area the measured value would be moved to. The
measured value of CH1 will be
moved to D0000 and CH2 will be moved to D0001. The last operand ‘2’ means 2 WORD moving. If you
assign ‘1’ to this operand,
only a measured value of CH1 would be moved to D0000.
▶ Rung 5
Write DA values to CH3 and CH4 on every scan simultaneously with a TO instruction. The second
operand ‘33’ means the
address of ‘User Program Memory’ where the output value should be written to. (Refer to the MAP)
The third operand ‘D00100’ means the device which is storing the digital value for signal output.
The last operand ‘2’ means 2 WORD simultaneous writing.

• Assure external power is supplied correctly (DC24V)
• Check expansion cable between blocks.
• Change the CPU to STOP mode, and re-power the entire modules. If LED stops blinking, there will
be some mistake in the sequence program.
If LED still blinks, read following steps.
How to check the error code :
Select " Tool -> Optional Module Setup -> RTD Module? menu of the CICON. A dialog box titled with
"RTD module setup? will be popped-up.
Assure the ‘Base’ number is ‘0’ and ‘Slot’ number is appropriate number (1..3) for the module. Click

360

CIMON-PLC

the "Status? button of this dialog box.
Another dialog box titled with "RTD module status? will be popped-up, the error code will be displayed
in this dialog box for each channel.
CICON must be in connected status (On-Line) with PLC.
Erasing error code :
After trouble fixing, click the

eset Error? button in the dialog box titled with "RTD module status".

FEATURES
CM2-BP04EAA is a hybrid type analog I/O block for BP series CIMON-PLC. It is composed with 2 channels
of voltage/current
AD and 2 channels of voltage/current DA
AD channels support 0~20mA, 4~20mA, 0~5V, 1~5V, 0~10V and -10~10V input signal ranges.
DA Channels support -10~10V and 4~20mA output signal ranges.
Input signal filtering function such as averaging and digital filtering can be selectable by their constant
configuration.
High resolution (1/16000) analog signal or digital value is provided.
AD channels provide additional converted value range to nominal resolution (16000) which is useful in
detecting abnormal
input signal such as overshoot or under-shoot. The real range of converted value is -192 ~ 16191 (or
-8192 ~ 8191)
DA channel provide HOLD/CLEAR mode. When HOLD mode is selected this module maintains output even
if CPU was stopped.
Disabled DA channel maintains outputs 4㎃ or -10V
When the RUN LED blinks, there might be some error. CICON will be helpful for checking and fixing the
trouble.
DA channels can be manually tested with CICON even if CPU was in STOP mode.

INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS
Use the PLC in an environment that meets the general specifications given in the User’s Manual of the CPU
module being used.
Do not bunch the control wires or communication cables with the main circuit or power wires, or install them close
to each other.
They should be installed 100mm (3.94 inch) or more from each other. Not doing so could result in noise that may
cause malfunction.
Switch all phases of the external power supply off when mounting or removing the module. Not doing so may
cause damage to the module.
Do not directly touch the conductive area or electronic components of the module. Doing so may cause malfunction
or failure in the module.

Quick Reference Manual

DIMENSIONS

3.32

CM2-BP04ERO (Analog Expansion Blocks)
Modules :
· CM2-BP04ERO (Analog Expansion Block)
Contents :
· GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
· MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
· I/O MAP
· USER PROGRAM MEMORY MAP
· ERROR CODES

361

362

CIMON-PLC

· EXTERNAL WIRING
· PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE
· TROUBLE SHOOTING
· TROUBLE SHOOTING
· FEATURES
· INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS
· DIMENSIONS

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Item

Specification

Op.Temp.

Reference

Operating Temperature -10 ~65

St.Temp

Storage Temperature

-25 ~

Op.Hum

Operating Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

St.Hum

Storage Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency
10=
57=

Acceleration

f=
57Hz

Amplitude

Sweep

0.075mm

f=
150Hz

9.8m/s2{1G}

Vibration
In case of continuous vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

10=
f
=
57Hz
57=
f=
150Hz
Shock

Noise

10 times
in X,Y,Z

Amplitude
0.035mm

4.8m/s2{0.5G}

Max. shock Acc. :147 m/s{15G}
Time :11㎳
Pulse wave: Half sine wave pulse(3 times in X,Y,Z)
Square wave
impulse noise

2,000 V

Electro-static
discharge

Voltage :4kV (Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magneti
c field

27 ~500 MHz,10 V/m

Fast transient
bust noise

IEC61131-2

Power
Module

2kV

Digital I/O
(24V or more)

1kV

IEC61131-2

KDT Standard
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-2
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-3

Digital I/O
(Less than 24V)
Analog
I/Ocomm..
Interface

IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-4

0.25kV

Quick Reference Manual

Environ..

No corrosive gas and no dust

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

2 or less

Cooling

Natural Air Cooling

MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
Items

Specifications

Supported
RTD

Pt 100 (JIS C1640-1989, DIN 43760-1980)

Rangeof
Temperature

Pt 100 : -200.0°C ~ 600°C (18.48 ~ 313.59W)

Range of
Internal Value

Scaled Value : 0 ~ 16,000 (or -8000 ~ 8000)
Temperature Value : -2000 ~ 6000

JPt100 (KS C1603-1991, JIS C1604-1981)

JPt100 : -200.0°C ~ 600°C (17.14 ~ 317.28W)

Supported
Cable

3-Wire

Accuracy

±0.1 % [Full scale]

Speed

400㎳ / Channel

Channels

4 Channels / 1 Module

Insulation

Photo-coupler (Between Channels : Not Insulated)

Terminal Block

12 points Terminal Block ×2

Occupied I/O

16 points

External Power

24VDC

Power
Consumption

35㎃

I/O MAP

Direction
(CPU ? BP04ERO)

Inputs

Descriptions

Outputs

Module Ready

Measuring Completed

Descriptions
Reserved

363

364

CIMON-PLC

Config. Completed

Req. of Stoing Config. Data

Y8
Reserved

Reserved

Error

Req. to Clear Error

USER PROGRAM MEMORY MAP
Address

Descriptions

R/W

Channel Enable/Disable

R/W

CH1 Temp. ( °C x 10)

CH2 Temp. (°C x 10)

CH3 Temp. (°C x 10)

CH4 Temp. (°C x 10)

Reserved

HEX

DEC

RTD Type

R/W

Reserved

CH1 Temp. (°C x 10)

CH2 Temp. (°C x 10)

CH3 Temp. (°C x 10)

CH4 Temp. (°C x 10)

Reserved

10H

11H

12H

13H

Channel Status

14H

Reserved

Quick Reference Manual

365

15H

CH1 Scaled Value

16H

CH2 Scaled Value

17H

CH3 Scaled Value

18H

CH4 Scaled Value

19H

1AH

1BH

Reserved

1CH

1DH

Range of Scaled Value

R/W

1EH

Average Mode Configuration

R/W

Address

Descriptions

R/W

CH1 Error Code

CH2 Error Code

21H

CH3 Error Code

22H

CH4 Error Code

23H

Reserved

28H

HEX

DEC

1FH
20H

29H

CH1 Min. Temp.

R/W

2AH

CH2 Min. Temp.

R/W

2BH

CH3 Min. Temp

R/W

2CH

CH4 Min. Temp

R/W

2DH

2EH

2FH

Reserved

30H

31H

Ch. Select for Scale Config.

R/W

32H

Scale Config. Error Code

33H

CH1 Min. Temp.

R/W

34H

CH2 Min. Temp.

R/W

35H

CH3 Min. Temp.

R/W

36H

CH4 Min. Temp.

R/W

37H

38H

39H

Reserved

3AH

3BH

CH1 Avr. Param. / Filter Const.

R/W

3CH

CH2 Avr. Param. / Filter Const.

R/W

3DH

CH3 Avr. Param. / Filter Const.

R/W

3EH

CH4 Avr. Param. / Filter Const.

R/W

366

CIMON-PLC

ERROR CODES
Codes

Descriptions

‘A’ terminal was not wired. Check the cable of sensor

‘B’terminal was not wired. Check the cable of sensor.

‘b’or ‘A’and ‘B’ terminals were not wired. Check the cable of sensor.

Scaling error occurred. Check the configuration of the scaling.

Fatal Error

will be replaced by channel number - 1 (0..3)

EXTERNAL WIRING

PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE

Quick Reference Manual

Rung 2

367

This rung reads temperature as centigrade values from the module.
The first operand ‘H0001’ means the first expanded block. If there was another block

between CPU
and BP04ERO, this operand should be ‘H0002’.
The second operand 1 means the address of ‘User Program Memory’ where the
measured temperature
of channel 1 is stored as unit of centigrade. (Refer to the MAP)
The third operand ‘D00000’means the internal device address where the read temperature
value will be stored.

TROUBLE SHOOTING
The fourth operand ‘4’ means 4 WORD reading. That is, the temperature of Ch1 will be stored in D0000, Ch2 in
D00001, Ch3 in D00002, Ch4 in D00003.
Rung 4
This rung executes the same operation as rung 2 except that it reads the temperature values in Fahrenheit and
stores them in D00010 to D00013.
The address of ‘User Program Memory’for temperature in Fahrenheit is 11 to 14. (Ch1 – Ch4, Refer to the MAP)
Rung 6
This rung executes the same operation as rung 2 and rung 4 except that it reads the scaled temperature values
and stores them to D00020 to D00023.
The address of ‘User Program Memory’for scaled temperature is 21 to 24. (Ch1 – Ch4, Refer to the MAP

368

CIMON-PLC

TROUBLE SHOOTING
If there was any trouble with sensor, cable, configuration or module itself, the RUN LED would blink every 0.3
second. In this case,
the error code can be read by CICON or address 31 – 34 of ‘User Program Memory’.
Check following points first :
Assure external power is supplied correctly (DC24V)
Check expansion cable between blocks.
Change the CPU to STOP mode, and re-power the entire modules. If LED stops blinking, there will be some
mistake in the sequence program.
If LED still blinks, read following steps.

•
•
•

How to check the error code :
Select " Tool -> Optional Module Setup -> RTD Module? menu of the CICON. A dialog box titled with "RTD module
setup? will be popped-up.
Assure the ‘Base’ number is ‘0’ and ‘Slot’ number is appropriate number (1..3) for the module. Click the "Status?
button of this dialog box.
Another dialog box titled with "RTD module status? will be popped-up, the error code will be displayed in this dialog
box for each channel.
CICON must be in connected status (On-Line) with PLC.
Erasing error code :
After trouble fixing, click the

eset Error? button in the dialog box titled with "RTD module status".

FEATURES
CM2-BP04ERO module supports PT100 (or JPT100) RTD sensors up to 4 channels. It provides measured
temperature values in unit of Centigrade( )
and Fahrenheit( ) and up to the first decimal place.
14 bits value is provided also to processing the temperature data of each channel. This is a scaled value of
measured temperature, and the range of
scaling is configurable with CICON. It allows more wide applications
The diagnostic function embedded in the module allows to know the trouble on cable or sensor for each channel.
RUN LED will blink every 0.2 second in case of abnormal status. Check the error code by using CICON.

INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS
Use the PLC in an environment that meets the general specifications given in the User’s Manual of the CPU
module being used.
Do not bunch the control wires or communication cables with the main circuit or power wires, or install them close
to each other.
They should be installed 100mm (3.94 inch) or more from each other. Not doing so could result in noise that may
cause malfunction.
Switch all phases of the external power supply off when mounting or removing the module. Not doing so may
cause damage to the module.

Quick Reference Manual

369

Do not directly touch the conductive area or electronic components of the module. Doing so may cause malfunction
or failure in the module.

DIMENSIONS

3.33

CM2-BP04ETO (Analog Expansion Blocks)
Modules :
· CM2-BP04ETO (Analog Expansion Blocks)
Contents :
· GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
· MODULE SPECIFICATIONS

370

CIMON-PLC

· FEATURES
· I/O MAP
· USER PROGRAM MEMORY MAP
· ERROR CODES
· LED Display
· PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE
· TROUBLE SHOOTING
· INSTALLSTION PRECAUTIONS
· EXTERNAL WIRING
· DIMENSIONS

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Item

Specification

Op.Temp.

Reference

Operating Temperature -10 ~65

St.Temp

Storage Temperature

-25 ~

Op.Hum

Operating Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

St.Hum

Storage Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency
10=
57=

Acceleration

f=
57Hz

Amplitude

Sweep

0.075mm

f=
150Hz

9.8m/s2{1G}

Vibration
In case of continuous vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

10=
f
=
57Hz
57=
f=
150Hz
Shock

Noise

Amplitude

10 times
in X,Y,Z

IEC61131-2

0.035mm
4.8m/s2{0.5G}

Max. shock Acc. :147 m/s{15G}
Time :11㎳
Pulse wave: Half sine wave pulse(3 times in X,Y,Z)
Square wave
impulse noise

2,000 V

Electro-static
discharge

Voltage :4kV (Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magneti
c field

27 ~500 MHz,10 V/m

IEC61131-2

KDT Standard
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-2
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-3

Quick Reference Manual

Fast transient
bust noise

Power
Module

Digital I/O
(24V or more)

2kV

Digital I/O
(Less than 24V)
Analog
I/Ocomm..
Interface

1kV

IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-4

0.25kV

Environ..

No corrosive gas and no dust

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

2 or less

Cooling

Natural Air Cooling

MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
Items

Specifications

TC Type

K, J, E, T, B, R, S, N

Meas. Value

•
•

Raw Value : 0 ~ 16000 (or -8000 ~ 8000),
Temp. Value : Real Temp. x 10

Type

Range

DIN

Range(°C)

Range(mV)

-200.0~1200.0

-5891~48828

-200.0~800.0

-7890~45498

-200.0~600.0

-8824~45085

-200.0~400.0

-5602~20869

400.0~1800.0

786~13585

0.0~1750.0

0~21006

0.0~1750.0

0~18612

-200.0~1250.0

-3990 ~43846

T
B

ITS-90

Compensation

Automatically by accompanied RJC sensor

Diag.

Sensor break detection

Accuracy
Speed

± [Full Scale x 0.3% + 1

(includes RJC accuracy)]

500㎳ /Ch.

Ch.

4 Channels

Insulation

Photo-coupler
(Between channels : not insulated)

Terminal Block

12 point Terminal Block ?
2

Ext. Power

24VDC, 35 mA

371

372

CIMON-PLC

FEATURES

CM2-BP04ETO module supports seven different thermocouple types (K,J,E,T,R,S,B). The
converted temperature value can
be processed in Centigrade(℃ ) or Fahrenheit(℉ ) up to the first decimal place.
14 bits value is provided also to processing the temperature data of each channel.
This is a scaled value of measured temperature, and the range of scaling is configurable with
CICON. It allows more wide
applications
The diagnostic function embedded in the module allows to know the trouble on cable or sensor for
each channel.
This module supports up to 4 thermocouple channels.
Temperature compensation is fulfilled automatically with
compensation (RJC) sensor.

accompanied reference Junction

RUN LED will blink every 0.3 second in case of abnormal status. Check the error code by using
CICON.

I/O MAP
Direction
CPU ? BP04ETO

Direction
CPU ? BP04ETO

Inputs

Descriptions

Outputs

Module Ready

Measuring Completed

Config. Store Done

Descriptions

Reserved

Req. to Store Configuration Data

Reserved

Quick Reference Manual

Error

Req. to Clear Error

USER PROGRAM MEMORY MAP
Address

Descriptions

R/W

CH1 Error Code

CH2 Error Code

21H

CH3 Error Code

22H

CH4 Error Code

23H

24H

25H

26H

Reserved

27H

28H

29H

CH1 Max. Temp.

R/W

2AH

CH2 Max. Temp.

R/W

HEX

DEC

1FH
20H

2BH

CH3 Max. Temp.

R/W

2CH

CH4 Max. Temp.

R/W

2DH

2EH

2FH

Reserved

30H

31H

Ch. Select for Scale Config.

R/W

32H

Scale Config. Error Code

33H

CH1 Min. Temp.

R/W

34H

CH2 Min. Temp.

R/W

35H

CH3 Min. Temp.

R/W

36H

CH4 Min. Temp.

R/W

37H

38H

39H

Reserved

3AH

3BH

CH1 Avr. Param. / Filter Const.

R/W

3CH

CH2 Avr. Param. / Filter Const.

R/W

3DH

CH3 Avr. Param. / Filter Const.

R/W

3EH

CH4 Avr. Param. / Filter Const.

R/W

Descriptions

R/W

CH1 Error Code

Address
HEX

DEC

1FH

373

374

CIMON-PLC

20H

CH2 Error Code

21H

CH3 Error Code

22H

CH4 Error Code

23H

24H

25H

26H

Reserved

27H

28H

29H

CH1 Max. Temp.

R/W

2AH

CH2 Max. Temp.

R/W

2BH

CH3 Max. Temp.

R/W

2CH

CH4 Max. Temp.

R/W

2DH

2EH

2FH

Reserved

30H

31H

Ch. Select for Scale Config.

R/W

32H

Scale Config. Error Code

33H

CH1 Min. Temp.

R/W

34H

CH2 Min. Temp.

R/W

35H

CH3 Min. Temp.

R/W

36H

CH4 Min. Temp.

R/W

37H

38H

39H

Reserved

3AH

3BH

CH1 Avr. Param. / Filter Const.

R/W

3CH

CH2 Avr. Param. / Filter Const.

R/W

3DH

CH3 Avr. Param. / Filter Const.

R/W

3EH

CH4 Avr. Param. / Filter Const.

R/W

ERROR CODES
Code

Descriptions

Module cannot detect the sensor. Check the cable of sensor or sensor itself.

Reference junction compensation sensor error. Check the RJC sensor which is accompanied
with the module.

Invalid sensor type is defined. Assure the menu that had been used for configuration is
“Tool -> Optional Module Setup -> TC Module”.

Scaling error occurred. Check the configuration of scaling.

10△

Fatal error.

Quick Reference Manual

375

LED Display

▶ Rung 2

This rung reads temperature as centigrade values from the module.
The first operand ‘H0001’ means the first expanded block. If there was another block
between CPU and BP04ETO, this operand should be ‘H0002’.
The second operand 1 means the address of ‘User Program Memory’ where the measured

temperature
of channel 1 is stored as unit of centigrade. (Refer to the MAP)
The third operand ‘D00000’ means the internal device address where the read temperature
value will be stored.

PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE
The fourth operand ‘4’ means 4 WORD reading. That is, the temperature of Ch1 will be stored in D0000, Ch2 in
D00001, Ch3 in D00002,
Ch4 in D00003.
▶ Rung 4
This rung executes the same operation as rung 2 except that it reads the temperature values in
Fahrenheit and stores
them in D00010 to D00013. The address of ‘User Program Memory’ for temperature in Fahrenheit
is 11 to 14.
(Ch1 – Ch4, Refer to the MAP)
▶ Rung 6
This rung executes the same operation as rung 2 and rung 4 except that it reads the scaled
temperature values and

376

CIMON-PLC

stores them to D00020 to D00023. The address of ‘User Program Memory’ for scaled
temperature is 21 to 24.
(Ch1 – Ch4, Refer to the MAP)

TROUBLE SHOOTING
If there was any trouble with sensor, cable, configuration or module itself, the RUN LED would blink every
0.2 second. In this case,
the error code can be read by CICON or address 31 – 34 of ‘User Program Memory’.

▶ Check following points first :

• Assure external power is supplied correctly (DC24V)
• Check expansion cable between blocks.
• Change the CPU to STOP mode, and re-power the entire

modules. If LED stops blinking, there will be some

mistake in the
sequence program. If LED still blinks,read following steps.
▶ How to check the error code :
Select “Tool -> Optional Module Setup -> TC Module” menu of the CICON. A dialog box titled with “TC
module setup” will be

popped-up.

Assure the ‘Base’ number is ‘0’ and ‘Slot’ number is appropriate number (1..3) for the module. Click the “
Status” button of this dialog box.
Another dialog box titled with “TC module status” will be

popped-up, the error code will be displayed in this

dialog box for each channel.
CICON must be in connected status (On-Line) with PLC.
▶ Erasing error code :
After trouble fixing, click the “Reset Error” button in the dialog box titled with “TC module status”.

INSTALLSTION PRECAUTIONS
Use the PLC in an environment that meets the general specifications given in the User’s Manual of the
CPU module being used.
Do not bunch the control wires or communication cables with the main circuit or power wires, or install
them close to each other.
They should be installed 100mm (3.94 inch) or more from each other. Not doing so could result in
noise that may cause malfunction.
Switch all phases of the external power supply off when mounting or removing the module. Not doing
so may cause damage
to the module.
Do not directly touch the conductive area or electronic components of the module. Doing so may
cause malfunction or failure

Quick Reference Manual

in the module.

EXTERNAL WIRING

DIMENSIONS

377

378

3.34

CIMON-PLC

CM2-BP32A***
Modules :
· CM2-BP32A***

Contents :
· GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
· MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
· COMM. CONFIGURATION
· I/O CONFIGURATION
· COMMUNICATION OPTIONS
· MAIN BLOCK LINE-UP
· COMMUNICATION CABLE WIRING

Quick Reference Manual

379

· EXTERNAL WIRING
· WIRING PRECATIONS
· DIMENSIONS

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Item

Specification

Op.Temp.

Reference

Operating Temperature -10 ~65

St.Temp

Storage Temperature

-25 ~

Op.Hum

Operating Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

St.Hum

Storage Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency
10=
57=

Acceleration

f=
57Hz

Amplitude

Sweep

0.075mm

f=
150Hz

9.8m/s2{1G}

Vibration
In case of continuous vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

10=
f
=
57Hz
57=
f=
150Hz

Amplitude

4.8m/s2{0.5G}

Square wave
impulse noise

2,000 V

Electro-static
discharge

Voltage :4kV (Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magneti
c field

27 ~500 MHz,10 V/m

Fast transient
bust noise

Power
Module

Digital I/O
(24V or more)

2kV

1kV

Environ..

No corrosive gas and no dust

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

2 or less

IEC61131-2

0.035mm

Max. shock Acc. :147 m/s{15G}
Time :11㎳
Pulse wave: Half sine wave pulse(3 times in X,Y,Z)

Shock

Noise

10 times
in X,Y,Z

IEC61131-2

KDT Standard
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-2
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-3

Digital I/O
(Less than 24V)
Analog
I/Ocomm..
Interface
0.25kV

IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-4

380

CIMON-PLC

Cooling

Natural Air Cooling

MODULE SPECIFICATIONS

Analog Input
Current

Voltage

Channels

2 channels

Rated I/O

0 ~ 20 mA,

0~5V , 0 ~10V

Resolution

10bits

Conversion
time

1 scan
Analog Output
Current

Voltage

Channels

2 channels

Rated I/O

4 ~20 mA

0 ~10V

Resolution

8bits

Conversion
time

1 scan
Digital Input

Channels

8 channels

Power

DC 24V

I/O voltage

ON voltage 19V / OFF voltage 11V

COMMON

2 Points/COM(HSC CH1,2), 2Points/COM(HSC CH3,4), 4Points/COM
Digital Output

Channels

8 channels
Relay

Tr Sink

Tr Source

Power

AC220V/DC24V

DC 24V

I/O Current

1 Point 2A/
COM 5A

1 Point 0.2A /
COM2A

COMMON

4 Points/COM

8 Points/COM

Inner 422/485 , 1CH HMI Comm.Only

COMM. CONFIGURATION

Address : D4988 (R/W)

Quick Reference Manual

Parity bit

Data bit

0: NONE
1: EVEN
2: ODD

0
1
2
3

0 : 8 bit
1 : 7 bit

B15~B12

B11~B8

STOP bit

Comm. speed

:
:
:
:

0 : 300 bps
1 : 600 bps
2 : 1200 bps
3 : 2400 bps
4 : 4800 bps
5 : 9600 bps
6 : 19200 bps
7 : 38400 bps

485,
485,
422,
422,

1
2
1
2

bit
bit
bit
bit

B7~B4

381

B3~B0

Address : D4989 (R/W)

•
•
•

Response delay time : 0 ~ 200 ms

Stations : 0 ~ 31

B15~B8

B7~B0

A bit for modifying set values
M2553

A demanding bit for modifying set values

M255B

A completing bit for modifying set values

When M 2553 sets ON, setting values modify. And then M25B sets ON.
After M255B sets ON, setting values run
When M255B sets ON, M2553 must set OFF.

- " A bit for modifying set values" apply with " Comm. configuration" and "Analog input/Output
configuration".

I/O CONFIGURATION

D4990
R/W

Rated input
0 : 0~20mA, 0~5V 1 : 0~10V

Conversion Permission/Ban
0 : Ban
1 : Permission

B15~B12

B11~B8

B7~B4

B3~B0

CH2

CH1

CH2

CH1

Average : 0 ~ 255

B15~B8

B7~ B0

CH2

CH1

D4991
R/W

D4992
R

CH1 digital conversion : 0 ~ 1000

D4993
R

CH2 digital conversion : 0 ~ 1000

D4994

Reserved

D4995

Reserved

D4996
R/W

B15~B0

Conversion Permission/Ban
0 : Ban

382

CIMON-PLC

1 : Permission

D4997
R/W

B15~B8

B7~B4

B3~B0

CH2

CH1

HOLD/CLEAR
0 : CLEAR, 1 : HOLD

Current/Voltage output

0: Voltage ,1: Current

B15~B12

B11~B8

CH2

CH1

B7~B4

B3~B0

CH2

CH1

B15~B0

D4998
R/W

CH1 digital output : 0 ~ 250
B15~B0

D4999
R/W

CH2 digital output : 0 ~ 250

- The data at D4990, D4991, D4996 and D4997 can convert values with Scan-Programs or memory monitor
- The data at D4990, D4991, D4996, D4997 can keep former values in case of the power set ON/OFF or module
controlled RUN<_>STOP.
- The data at D4990, D4991, D4996 and D4997 is stored in inner flash when power set off. And the data read
former data from the flash,
stored in the memory when power set ON.

COMMUNICATION OPTIONS

RS232/422/485

Option (BPnnAxxx-)

-T

-U

-R

-S

Channel Type

RS232C
RS422/485

RS422/485
(2 ports)

RS232C

RS422/485

HMI
Mode

Param

Multi-Drop (max. 32 stations)

Loader

Support

Program

Support

Data Bits

7 or 8 bits

Stop Bits

1 or 2 bits

Parity

Even / Odd / None

Synchronize

Asynchronous

Speed (bps)

300/600/1200/2400/9600/19200/38400

Modem Supp.

Supports External modem unit

Quick Reference Manual

Ethernet
Option (BPnnAxxx-)

-E

Cable Type

10BASE -T

Comm. Speed.

10Mbps

Max. Distance

100m (Node to HUB)

Max. HUB

Max. 4 cascaded HUB

Max. Frame Size

1500 bytes

Protocol

CSMA / CD

MAIN BLOCK LINE-UP

Model Name

Power

Input

CM2-BP32ADTA?
CM2-BP32ADCA?

Output
TR(SINK)

AC 90
~
240V

DC 24V

TR(SRC)

CM2-BP32ADRA?

RELAY

CM2-BP32ADTD?

TR(SINK)

CM2-BP32ADCD?

Option

DC 24V

CM2-BP32ADRD?

DC 24V

TR(SRC)
RELAY

COMMUNICATION CABLE WIRING
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

R : RS232C
T : RS232C
RS422/485
S : RS422/485
U : RS422/485 (2 ports)
E : Ethernet

383

384

CIMON-PLC

EXTERNAL WIRING

CM2-BP32ADTA ?

CM2-BP32ADTD ?

Quick Reference Manual

CM2-BP32ADCA ?
?

385

CM2-BP32ADCD

386

CIMON-PLC

CM2-BP32ADRA ?

CM2-BP32ADRD

Quick Reference Manual

387

CH1, CH2 analog input/output termimals

WIRING PRECATIONS

· Always ground the FG terminal for the PLC. There is a risk of electric shock or malfunction.
· When turning on the power and operating the module after wiring is completed, always attach the
terminal cover that comes with the product.
· Tighten the terminal screws within the range of specified torque. if the terminal screws are loose, it may
result in short circuits or malfunction.

388

CIMON-PLC

· Be careful not to let foreign matters such as sawdust or wire chips get inside the module. These may
cause fires, failure or malfunction

DIMENSIONS

Unit : mm

3.35

CM2-BP32B***
Modules :
· CM2-BP32B***

Contents :
· GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
· MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
· COMM. CONFIGURATION
· I/O CONFIGURATION
· COMMUNICATION OPTIONS
· MAIN BLOCK LINE-UP
· COMMUNICATION CABLE WIRING
· EXTERNAL WIRING
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

Quick Reference Manual

389

· WIRING PRECATIONS
· DIMENSIONS

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Item

Specification

Op.Temp.

Reference

Operating Temperature -10 ~65

St.Temp

Storage Temperature

-25 ~

Op.Hum

Operating Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

St.Hum

Storage Humidity 5 ~95%RH, Not Condensed

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency
10=
57=

Acceleration

f=
57Hz

Amplitude

Sweep

0.075mm

f=
150Hz

9.8m/s2{1G}

Vibration
In case of continuous vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

10=
f
=
57Hz
57=
f=
150Hz

Amplitude

4.8m/s2{0.5G}

Square wave
impulse noise

2,000 V

Electro-static
discharge

Voltage :4kV (Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magneti
c field

27 ~500 MHz,10 V/m

Fast transient
bust noise

Power
Module

Digital I/O
(24V or more)

2kV

1kV

Environ..

No corrosive gas and no dust

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

2 or less

Cooling

Natural Air Cooling

IEC61131-2

0.035mm

Max. shock Acc. :147 m/s{15G}
Time :11㎳
Pulse wave: Half sine wave pulse(3 times in X,Y,Z)

Shock

Noise

10 times
in X,Y,Z

IEC61131-2

KDT Standard
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-2
IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-3

Digital I/O
(Less than 24V)
Analog
I/Ocomm..
Interface
0.25kV

IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-4

390

CIMON-PLC

MODULE SPECIFICATIONS

RTD Input
Input type

Pt100, JPT100

Channels

2 channels

Rated I/O

-200 ~ 200

Resolution

0.5

Conversion
time

/ 10 bits
1 scan

Analog Output
Current
Channels

Voltage
2 channels

Rated I/O

4 ~20 mA

0 ~10V

Resolution

8bits

Conversion
time

1 scan
Digital Input

Channels

8 channels

Power

DC 24V

I/O voltage

ON voltage 19V / OFF voltage 11V

COMMON

2 Points/COM(HSC CH1,2), 2Points/COM(HSC CH3,4), 4Points/COM
Digital Output

Channels

8 channels
Relay

Tr Sink

Tr Source

Power

AC220V/DC24V

DC 24V

I/O Current

1 Point 2A/
COM 5A

1 Point 0.2A /
COM2A

COMMON

4 Points/COM

8 Points/COM

Inner 422/485 , 1CH HMI Comm.Only

COMM. CONFIGURATION

Address : D4988 (R/W)
Parity bit

Data bit

STOP bit

Comm. speed

Quick Reference Manual

0: NONE
1: EVEN
2: ODD

0
1
2
3

0 : 8 bit
1 : 7 bit

B15~B12

B11~B8

:
:
:
:

485,
485,
422,
422,

1
2
1
2

391

0 : 300 bps
1 : 600 bps
2 : 1200 bps
3 : 2400 bps
4 : 4800 bps
5 : 9600 bps
6 : 19200 bps
7 : 38400 bps

bit
bit
bit
bit

B7~B4

B3~B0

Address : D4989 (R/W)

•
•
•

Response delay time : 0 ~ 200 ms

Stations : 0 ~ 31

B15~B8

B7~B0

A bit for modifying set values
M2553

A demanding bit for modifying set values

M255B

A completing bit for modifying set values

When M 2553 sets ON, setting values modify. And then M255B sets ON.
After M255B sets ON, setting values run
When M255B sets ON, M2553 must set OFF.

- " A bit for modifying set values" apply with " Comm. configuration" and "Analog input/Output
configuration".

I/O CONFIGURATION

D4990
R/W

Input type
0 : Pt100 1: JPT100
B15~B12

B11~B8

B7~B4

B3~B0

CH2

CH1

CH2

CH1

Average : 0 ~ 255

B15~B8

B7~ B0

CH2

CH1

D4991
R/W
AD

Conversion Permission/Ban
0 : Ban
1 : Permission

D4992
R

CH1 temperature conversion( ) : -200~200 (-2000~2000)

D4993
R

CH2 temperature conversion( ) : -200~200 (-2000~2000)

B15~B0

D4994R

B15~B0
CH1 digital conversion : 0 ~ 1000
B15~B0
CH2 digital conversion : 0 ~ 1000

D4995R

B15~B0

392

CIMON-PLC

Conversion Permission/Ban
0 : Ban
1 : Permission

D4996
R/W

D4997
R/W

B15~B8

B7~B4

B3~B0

CH2

CH1

HOLD/CLEAR
0 : CLEAR, 1 : HOLD

Current/Voltage output

0: Voltage ,1: Current

B15~B12

B11~B8

CH2

CH1

B7~B4

B3~B0

CH2

CH1

B15~B0

D4998
R/W

CH1 digital output : 0 ~ 250

D4999
R/W

CH2 digital output : 0 ~ 250

B15~B0

COMMUNICATION OPTIONS

RS232/422/485

Option (BPnnBxxx-)
Channel Type

-T

RS232C
RS422/485
RS422/485
(2 ports)

HMI
Mode

Param

-U

-R

-S

RS232C

RS422/485

Multi-Drop (max. 32 stations)

Loader

Support

Program

Support

Data Bits

7 or 8 bits

Stop Bits

1 or 2 bits

Parity

Even / Odd / None

Synchronize

Asynchronous

Speed (bps)

300/600/1200/2400/9600/19200/38400

Modem Supp.

Supports External modem unit

Quick Reference Manual

Ethernet
Option (BPnnBxxx-)

-E

Cable Type

10BASE -T

Comm. Speed.

10Mbps

Max. Distance

100m (Node to HUB)

Max. HUB

Max. 4 cascaded HUB

Max. Frame Size

1500 bytes

Protocol

CSMA / CD

MAIN BLOCK LINE-UP

Model Name

Power

Input

CM2-BP32BDTA?
CM2-BP32BDCA?

Output
TR(SINK)

AC 90
~
240V

DC 24V

TR(SRC)

CM2-BP32BDRA?

RELAY

CM2-BP32BDTD?

TR(SINK)

CM2-BP32BDCD?

Option

DC 24V

CM2-BP32BDRD?

DC 24V

TR(SRC)
RELAY

R : RS232C
T : RS232C
RS422/485
S : RS422/485
U : RS422/485 (2 ports)
E : Ethernet

393

394

CIMON-PLC

COMMUNICATION CABLE WIRING

EXTERNAL WIRING

CM2-BP32BDTA ?

CM2-BP32BDTD ?

Quick Reference Manual

CM2-BP32BDCA ?
?

395

CM2-BP32BDCD

396

CIMON-PLC

CM2-BP32BDRA ?

CM2-BP32BDRD

Quick Reference Manual

397

CH1, CH2 RTD input/output terminals

WIRING PRECATIONS

398

CIMON-PLC

DIMENSIONS

Unit : mm

3.36

CM3-PLCS CPU
Modules :
CM3-PLCS CPU

Contents :
· General Specifications
· PLCS CPU Performance Specification
· Device & Address
· I/O Specification
· Names of Part and Mode Change
· Fautures of CPU
· CPU I/O Pin Map

Quick Reference Manual

· Terminal I/O Pin Map
· Communication Interface
· Built-in Comm. Specification
· Dimension
· Safety Instructions

General Specifications

Items

Specification

Reference

Ambient Temp -10oC ~ 65oC
Storage Temp

-25oC ~ 80oC

Ambient

5 ~95%RH, (Non-condensing)

Humidity
Storage

5 ~95%RH, (Non-condensing)

Humidity
Vibration

Occasional vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

Pul

IEC 61131-2
Times

se
wid
th
10 <= f <

X,Y,Z

57Hz

0.0

Each

direction,

10 times

m
57 <= f <=

9.8m/s2{1G}

150Hz
Continuous vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

Pul
se
wid
th

10 <= f <

57Hz

0.0
35
m

399

400

CIMON-PLC

m
57 <= f

4.9m/s2{0.5G} -

<=150Hz
Shocks

Peak acceleratioin : 147 m/S2

IEC 61131-2

Duration : 11ms

Pulse wave type : Half-sine (3times each
X,Y,Z 3 direction)

Impulse Noise

Square

+-2,000 V

KDT Standard

Electrostatic

Voltage :4kV (Contact

IEC 61131-2

discharge

discharge)

IEC 1000-4-2

Radiated

27 ~500 MHz,10 V/m

IEC 61131-2

wave
impulse
noise

electromagn

IEC 1000-4-3

etic field
noise
Fast

Dig Digital

IEC 61131-2

transient/

Power

ital

I/O(24V or

IEC 1000-4-4

Burst noise

I/O

less)

(24 Analog I/O
V

Comm.

Interface

mo
re)
2 kV

0.25 kV

kV
Voltage
Operation

2KV/1min

0.5KV/1min

Free from corrosive gases and excessive dust

ambience
Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

2 or less

degree
Cooling

Air-cooling

method

PLC-S CPU Performance Specification( Specifications)

Quick Reference Manual

Items
Power
Program Control Method
I/O Control Method
Program language
Data Processing Type
Sequence
Instructions
Application
Processing speed

401

Specifications
DC24V
Stored Program, Process-Driven Interrupt, Time Driven Interrupt
Indirect method, Directed by program instruction
IL(Instruction List), LD(Ladder Diagram)
32 Bit
55 Instruction
389 Instruction

200ns / Step
(Sequence)
Program capacity
10K Step
Max. I/O, Max. expansion 384 pts / 1 main Block + Max. 11 Block
Operation mode
Run, Stop, Remote Run, Remote Stop
Back-up method
Retain Setting Data.
Total program
128
Scan
(127-Program block)
Cyclic task 16
Program types
Special 126
Initial task 2 (_INIT,_H_INIT)
Subroutine 126Count
Self-diagnosis
Detects errors of scan time, memory, I/O and power supply, battery error
Re-start
Cold, Hot re-start
X
1024 pts (X0000 – X063F)
Y
1024 pts (Y0000 – Y063F)
M
8192 pts (M0000 – M511F)
L
4096 pts (L0000 – L255F)
K
4096 pts (K0000 – K255F)
Device memory
F
2048 pts (F0000 – F127F)
capacity
T
512 pts (T0000 – T0511)
C
512 pts (C0000 – C0511)
S
100 states x 100 set (00.00 - 99.99)
D
10000 words (D0000 - D9999)
Z
1024 words (Call Stack : Z0000 - Z0063, Z1000 - Z1063)
R
16 pts (Index)
High Speed Counter
20Kpps, 2 Phase 2Ch.
Positioning
Max. 100Kpps, 2 Axis, Linear interpolation
PID
32 Channels, Auto-Tuning
RTC
Embedded (Battery CR2032 Backup)
Standard : USB Loader, Serial 1(RS232C)
Comm. Channel
Optional : Serial 1Ch(RS485), Ethernet 1Ch
Etc.

402

CIMON-PLC

Device & Address
u Device
- Input : X
- Sub Relay : M

- Output : Y
- Keep Relay : K

- Timer : T

- Counter : C

- Data Device : D

- Sub Data Device : @D

- Link Relay : L

- Step control Relay : S

- Special Relay : F

- Index registor : R

u Device Address
- Bit Data: [Device]+[Card No.]+[Bit No.]
Device : X, Y, M, K, L, F, Card No. : 10Dec(Decimal). 3 Characters
Bit No. : 16Hex. 1 Character
Ex) X0100 -> 10Dec. (word) + 16Hex(Last Bit)
: [10th Address and 0th bit]
- Word Data: [Device]+[Card No.]
Device : D, Z, T, C, Card No. : 10Dec. 4Characters
Ex) D0100 -> 10Dec. (Word) : [100th word Address]
- Timer, Counter Output: [Device]+[Bit No.]
Device : T. C, Bit No. : 10Dec. 4Characters
Ex) T0100 -> 10Dec. (Word) : [T 100th Bit Address]
- Step Controller I/O: [Device]+[Card No.]+[.]+[ Step No.]
Device : S
Card No. : 10Dec. 2Characters, Step No. : 10Dec. 2Characters
Ex) Sxx.xx -> xx is 10Dec. (0~99)
- assign Bit Device to Word: [Device]+[Card No.]+[0]
Device : X, Y, M, K, L, F, Card No. : 10Dec. 3Characters
Ex) X010 -> 10Dec. (Word), [X 10th Address]

I/O Specification

Items

DC Input

Relay Output

TR Output

Quick Reference Manual

403

Rated I/O Voltage

DC 24V

AC 220V / DC 24V

DC 12V / 24V

Rated I/O Current

4mA

1point 2A / COM 5A

1point 0.2A, COM 2A

On V/A

DC19V / 3mA

Off V/A

DC6V / 1mA

Response time

3ms or less

10ms or less

1ms or less

Operation indicator

Input ON, LED ON

Insulation method

Photo coupler insulation

Relay Insulation

Photo coupler insulation

Input method

SINK/SRC

Output method

Relay

Sink

Circuit Diagram

Names of Part and Mode Change

404

CIMON-PLC

u Slot number is assigned in order from left.
ü Max. expansion modules are 11 except CPU.
u Mode change

u Operation mode is changed by mode switch.
u The mode can be changed through CICON but when power reset,
ü RUN/STOP mode is decided through switch position.

Features of CPU
u Built-in Functions
ü PID Control
It operates 32LOOP PID without PID module.
ü RTC
It reads time from RTC and save it in F device address.
ü I/O reservation.
It scans module at designated slot.
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

Quick Reference Manual

405

It refers to reservation function which writes a program without I/O change in case of expansion, damage or
replacement.
ü Online Edit
Program can be edited while Run mode.
u Features
ü SD/MMC Built-in.
Scan program or firmware can be upgraded by SD memory card.
(Stop mode -> Power off -> Insert SD card -> Run -> Stop -> Run -> Stop : firmware will be upgrade
automatically.)
ü 20Kpps High Speed Counter (2Channel) Built-in.
2PH. 2/4Multi. Input mode possible, Voltage input type (Open collector)
ü 100Kpps 2axis Pulse Output built-in. (Positioning)
Pulse+Direction Output, Position/Speed/Speed-Position, Position-Speed Control.
ü Max. 3 communications can work simultaneously. (Ethernet, RS232, RS485)
CIMON HMI, MODBUS RTU/TCP, PLC Link, Protocol program(user protocol), Loader protocol support,
Remote access & up/down load support.
ü Abundant memory (10K Step)
ü Data reserved in case of Power cut
Built-in Flash memory enabling permanent backup of program without any separate battery.

CPU I/O Pin Map
u MDT Inpur

406

CIMON-PLC

u MDT Output

Quick Reference Manual

u SP16MDR, SP16MDRV I/O

407

408

CIMON-PLC

u SP16MDRE, SP16MDRF I/O

Quick Reference Manual

u In case of SP16MDRE and SP16MDRF, relay output is 6 points.

Terminal I/O Pin Map

u Terminal (CM0-TM32M)

409

410

CIMON-PLC

Quick Reference Manual

u Terminal(CM0-TM32M) has its own Terminal Cable.
Terminal Cable : CM0-SCB15M

Communication Interface

411

412

CIMON-PLC

u Power and RS232/485 Terminal map

Built-in Comm. Specification
Items

RS232C

Power
Comm. Mode

RS422/485

Ethernet

Supplied by CPU

Dedicated protocol

HMI protocol (1:n)

Loader protocol

User defined protocol

MODBUS

Quick Reference Manual

PLC Link

DHCP

Types

Data Bit

8Bit

Stop Bit

1 or 2Bit

Parity

Even / Odd / None

Synchronization

Asynchronous

Transmission speed

300~38400

Modem

Long distance comm. is possible
by external modem

Dimension

10/100Mbps

413

414

CIMON-PLC

Quick Reference Manual

415

Safety Instructions
u Use PLC only in the environment specified in PLC manual or general standard of data sheet.
u Do not let any metallic foreign materials inside the products which may cause electric shock, fire or
abnormal operation.
u Do not touch or install the module when PLC power is on.

416

CIMON-PLC

u Do not disassemble or remodel the module.
u When F3,4(Special relay address for battery error) is on, change the battery

Top Level Intro
This page is printed before a new
top-level chapter starts

Part

418

CIMON-PLC

CICON - PLC Loader Program
CICON Loader Program :

1. Menu Bar
2. Tool Bar
3. Project Window
4. Work Windows(Edit Window)
5. Message Window
6. Variable Window

· Provides convenient interface to edit program easily.
· Supports link function of various types by using CPU Loader, RS232C/422/485 and Ethernet.
· Enables to diagnose program errors and system by using debug functions easily.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

419

See :
· Requirements for Installation
· Installation
· CICON Components
· Essential Function
· Programming(Single Programs)
· Programming(Multiple Programs)
· Scan Program
· Communication Setting Program
· Special Program
· SFC Program
· PLC Control
· Special Card Setting
· PLC Simulator
· Downloader
· Appendix

4.1

Requirements for Installation
Recommended hardware specification for CICON installation.

v PC

Pentium 133Mhz CPU or faster, 64MB RAM or more including the expansion memory.

v Serial

More than 1 serial port is required which connect with PLC loader port or RS232C/422/485

Port

module.

v Etherne Ethernet port is required which connect with PLC Ethernet module.
t

v Hard
disk

v Mouse

At least 13MB free hard space is required to install all CICON installation files and use CICON
properly.

To fully use CICON function, a Korea/English Windows compatible mouse is needed that can be
connected to the PC.

v OS

Windows 98SE/2000/XP Korean version is recommended.

420

4.2

CIMON-PLC

Installation
Download
Connect to our web site and download the latest CICON program.
(Visit "Customer Support" -> "General Download.")

Installation
1. Double click the installation file.

2. Select the language used for installation and click the [OK] button.

3. Click the [Next] button when the next window appears.

4. Select your preferred installation location on the "Choose Destination Location" window and click the
[Next (N)] button.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

421

5. To change the "Destination Folder", click the [Browse...] button to select or input new folder.

6. Select the installation type in the "Setup Type" window and click the "Next (N)" button.

7. Select the program folder in the "Select Program Folder" and click the "Next (N)" button.

You will be able to start the CICON program by selecting Start -> All Programs -> CIMON -> CICON, if
you have selected the default installation settings.

422

4.3

CIMON-PLC

CICON Components
Provides convenient interface to edit program easily.

See :
· Screen Configuration
· CICON Menu
· CICON Option

CICON - PLC Loader Program

4.3.1

423

Screen Configuration

Click

Menu bar

Toolbar

Project window

Work window

Edit window

Message

window

Menu bar

Manu names provided by CICON will be displayed.
When you click the menu, the associated dropdown menu will be displayed, and you can use various
CIMON functions.

424

CIMON-PLC

Toolbar
Frequently used menu icon buttons are displayed on the toolbar.
Basic
Edit
Search
View
Online
Tool
Window

Project window

You can check the name of the project that you have opened.
In the project, you can find programs registered in the project, and find and modify PLC parameters, and
check the status of modules mounted online.

Work window
In this window, your working details will be displayed.

Edit window

CICON - PLC Loader Program

425

There are several types of edit window such as Edit Variable, Edit LD, and Edit Parameter window. You can
use these windows to edit program, parameter, and configuration respectively.

Message window
Message window will display the result of compilation, download, and search.
Message list will be displayed. To check the scrolled-up message, move the slide button on the right side.
- Message

- Build

- Found1/2

426

4.3.2

CIMON-PLC

CICON Menu
Click

File

Edit

View

Online

Debug

Tools

Windows

Help

File
Menu

Note

New Project

Creates a new project.

Open Project

Opens the project that was already created.

Close Project

Closes the working project.

New Program

Creates a new program.

Open Program

Opens the program that was already created.

Close Program

Closes the working program.

Save Program

Saves the working program.

Save As

Saves the working program with a different name.

Save All

Saves all programs belonging to the working project.

Insert Program to
project

Adds the existing program to the project.

Remove Program from
Project

Deletes the selected from the project.

Prints out the working program.

Preview

Shows the print preview screen.

Print Setup

Modifies the printer and printer setting.

Page Setup

Adjusts margins of the printing page.

Recent Files

Shows the list of programs that were edited/created recently. When you click
the file, it will be executed.

Recent Project

Shows the list of projects that were edited/created recently. When you click the
file, it will be executed.

Exit

Exits from the program.

Note

Undo

Cancels the job that was made just before.

Redo

Cancels the undoing job that was made just before.

Cut

Copies the selected area in the clipboard first and deletes the selected area.

Copy

Copies the selected area in the clipboard.

Paste

Pastes the clipboard contents into the designated area.

Delete

Deletes the contents of the selected area.

Copy With Variable

Use to copy the IL program that was composed using the variable name.

Edit

CICON - PLC Loader Program

427

Select All

Selects the entire program area.

Find All

Searches for the scan program registered in the project, and displays the result
on the message window.

Find

Searches for the contents in the working program.

Find Previous

Searches for the contents located above the current position.

Find Next

Searches for the contents located below the current position.

Replace

Finds and replaces the selected contents.

Go to

Moves to the designated line number.

Insert Line

Inserts a blank line below the selected position of LD Editor.

Insert Next Line

Inserts a blank line above the selected position of LD Editor.

Delete Line

Deletes the selected line.

Device Comment
Space Column

Moves the selected contact to the right by one column.

Reduce Program

Arranges the program at the selected area of the LD program.

Remove All Comment

Clears all comments of the working program.

View
Menu

Note

Toolbar

Shows/Hides CICON toolbar.

Status Bar

Shows/Hides CICON status bar.

Project Window

Shows/Hides project window.

Message Window

Shows/Hides message window.

IL Edit Toolbar

Shows/Hides the toolbar on the IL Edit window.

IL Edit Help

Shows/Hides IL Edit Help window.

Variable Editor Toolbar

Shows/Hides to toolbar on the Variable Edit window.

Zoom In/Out

Zooms in/out the LD Edit window.

Variable/Comment

Controls displays of device variable name/description on the LD Edit window.

Language

Selects the CICON display language.

Online
Menu

Note

Link+Download
+Monitor

Proceeds connection, download, and monitoring automatically.

Connect

Makes a PLC connection attempt.

Disconnect

Disconnects from PLC in the online state.

Download

Downloads the compiled program.

Upload

Uploads the program that was downloaded to PLC.

Run Edit Start/Cancel

Starts or cancels modification while running.

428

CIMON-PLC

Run Edit Download

Downloads the modified program while running.

Memory monitor

Populates the Memory Monitor.

Start Monitoring
Program

Starts program monitoring.

Stop Monitoring
Program

Stops program monitoring.

Compare/Check
Program

Verifies whether the editing program matches the program downloaded to PLC.

Erase Program

Deletes the program saved in the PLC RAM.

Flash Memory

Changes the mode of PLC RAM/ROM operation, copies the RAM program to
the ROM, or deletes the ROM.

Change Mode

Runs, stops, pauses PLC when the PLC mode switch is in the remote mode.

BP Latch

Saves the BP latch area in the data file, or downloads the file data into the BP.

Enable/Disable Module

Prevents I/O mounting/dismounting error of the specified slot.

PLC Password

Sets the connection password for PLC.

Get Card Property

Reads the information on the module mounted on PLC and displays it on the
Project Window.

PLC Status

Checks the PLC CPU state and sets the time.

Debug
Menu

Note

Run Debugging/
Continue

Starts debugging.

Stop Debugging

Stops debugging.

Run for Scans..

Maintains operation as long as the scanned area.

Assign/Release Break
Point

Sets or clears the break point.

Release All Break
Points

Clears all break point settings.

Enable Forced Input/
Output

Allows forced I/O.

Forced Input/Output
Setup

Sets forced I/O.

Tools
Menu

Note

Compile

Compiles the working file.

Line

Links the compiled file.

Compile+Link

Complies and links sequentially.

Compile+All Link

Compiles and links the entire project.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

IL-LD Conversion

Converts the editing program to IL or LD.

Device Table

Displays the devices used in the project.

PLC Parameter

Opens the PLC Parameter Setting window.

Release I/O

Opens the I/O Reservation Setting window.

Variable Manager

Starts Variable Manager.

Optional Module Setup

Opens the Special Card Setting window.

Position Module

Opens the Position Setting Module window.

Device Trend

Opens Device Trend.

CICON Option

Performs settings related with CICON operation.

Connection Setup

Sets communication for connection to PLC.

Windows
Menu

Note

Next Window

Creates the same window with the working window.

Cascade type

Arranges the editing windows with a cascading layout.

Tile type

Arranges the editing windows with a tiling layout.

Arrange Icons

Arranges the minimized windows under the working window.

Note

Help

Opens the help text on CICON.

About CICON...

Displays the CICON information like the version number.

Help

4.3.3

CICON Option
-Basic
Select the

[Tool]-[CICON

Options]-[Basic] tab.

429

430

CIMON-PLC

Open last project automatically
The project that was opened last will be automatically opened when starting CICON.

Compile before download
If the downloading program was modified, it will be automatically compiled.

Do not download variables
Variables are excluded at the time of compilation. The variable table will not be saved in PLC.

Use auto. save
Automatically saves the project at the specified time period.

Location of project folder
Specifies the default folder for new project

LD Editor
Select the

[Tool]-[CICON

Options]-[LD Editor] tab.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

431

Return arrow after symbol
After entering the symbol, the mouse cursor become " Selecte "? status

Device command dialog in LD
When this option is selected, the Device Description Input window will be automatically populated if the
device is used that is not registered
in the variable table of LD program.

Do not download comments in source
Comments in source programs will be removed at the time of compilation. The comment section of
uploaded source file will be displayed as a blank

Use the old style LD editor(CICON must be restarted.)
Use old style editor (To apply this function is necessary needed to restart the CICON)

Hot Key
Shortcut keys can be specified for all the instructions. Select the
Key] tab.

[Tool]-[CICON

Options]-[Hot

432

CIMON-PLC

a: used to select the menu to specify its shortcut key on the list.
b: used to create a shortcut key for the selected meun.
Click the

4.4

[OK]button..

Essential Function

See :
· Device Memory Export / Import

4.4.1

Device Memory Export Import
You can upload and download device memory of CPU which is online.

Upload Device Memory (CPU -> File)
In order to upload device memory from PLC to PC, click “Upload Device Memory” after PLC is online state.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

433

You can see Upload device memory window as below.
The initial device values and address are based on latch address.

1. File: It shows the path that uploaded device memory will be saved.
2. Path... : In order to make or select the file where uploaded device will be saved, click the ‘Path’. Default
path is project folder.
3. Save: It is used to save the uploaded device memory to file. Click the ‘Save’after editing device value in ‘
Editor’.
4. Device: Select device memory that you want to upload. You can setup starting and ending address.
5. Default: Default is Latch address settings.
6. Clear all: Remove all device memory address.
7. Max. set: Setup all device memory address as maximum
8. Editor: Uploaded device memory is shown in this window. You can edit device value here. It is activated
when you click ‘Upload’.
9. Upload: It is used to upload device value based on selected address.
10. Close: It is used to close the “Upload device memory”
* The starting and ending address are subject to change based on CPU type.
* If you setup the same value both starting and ending address, it automatically become maximum setup.
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

434

CIMON-PLC

You can see the below picture if you click “Editor” after uploading.

Apply: In order to save the changed value, click the ‘Apply’.
After click ‘Apply’, click ‘Save’to save all device memory to file.
Recovery: It is used to change the value to the last state.
Clear: It is used to initialize the value to ‘0’. In order to save this value, click ‘Apply’
Clear All: It is used to initialize all values to ‘0’. In order to save this value, click ‘Apply’

Download Device Memory (File -> CPU)
In order to download device memory to PLC, click “Download Device Memory” after PLC is online.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

435

You can see Download device memory window as below.

1. File: It shows the path that uploaded device memory is saved.
2. Path... : In order to select the file that has saved device memory, click the ‘Path’.
Default path is project folder.
3. Save: It is used to save the uploaded device memory to file.
Click the ‘Save’after editing device value in ‘Editor’.
4. Device: Select device memory that you want to download. You can setup starting and ending address.
* Device address which you can’t download is as following.
[F] / [T] / [C] / [S] / [Z] / [R]
5. Default: It is used to setup maximum value of device among latch address.
6. Clear All: Remove all device memory address.
7. Max. Set: Setup all device memory address as maximum
8. Editor: Downloaded device memory is shown in this window. You can edit device value here.
It is activated when you click ‘Path’.
9. Download : Download device value to PLC based on selected address
10. Close : Close the “Upload device memory”

4.5

Programming (Single Programs)
Contents of Example Programs :
The lamp (Y0010) flashes when the input switch(X0000) is pushed. (Turning on and off are repeated.)
If the switch X0000 is pressed while the lamp is on, the lamp will be turned off. On the contrary, the lamp
will be turned on if the switch X0000 is pressed while the lamp is turned off.

436

CIMON-PLC

Contents :
· Creating a project
· Registering a new program
· Writing Scan Program
· Entering a variable table
· Communication Setting
· Compile/Link
· Download
· Monitoring
· Cross Reference
· Bookmark

4.5.1

Creating a project
Click the New Project sub-menu under the File menu.

· Input the Project Name.
· Select the CPU Type to use. If you don’t select correct CPU type, CICON cannot connect with PLC.
Therefore, make sure to select the correct CPU type.
· Input the User or Description if it is needed.
· Press the [Password] button to set the password. If you set the password, you will be prompted to input
the password whenever you open the project.
If you want to modify the information such as CPU type, composer, program description, and password,

CICON - PLC Loader Program

437

select the Project Properties sub-menu under the File menu.

4.5.2

Registering a new program
If you register a new project, the project name displayed on the Project Window will be changed to the
registered one.

Select Program in the Project Window and click the right mouse button and then, select the New Program
popup menu.

Select Scan Program and input the program name.
If several programs are registered in the project, programs will be executed by the order of smaller Program
ID,

438

CIMON-PLC

For Run Edit(step) allocates space for modification while running the program.

4.5.3

Writing Scan Program

Description of the menu bar
Butt
on

Note

Select

Selects the intended contact or command in the LD program.

Delete

Deletes the selected contact or command.

Horizontal line

Draws a horizontal line at the selected position.

Vertical line

Draws a vertical line at the selected position.

Not

Inverts the result of the previous paragraph.

Normally open contact

Inserts a normally open contact.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

Normally closed contact

439

Inserts a normally closed contact.

Positive
Inserts a positive transition-sensing contact.
transition-sensing contact
Negative
Inserts a negative transition-sensing contact.
transition-sensing contact
Coil

Inputs a coil.

Command

Populates the command input window.

Counter command

Populates the counter command input window.

Comment

Populates the command input window.

Original size

Restores the original size of the LD Edit window.

Zoom in

Zooms in the LD Edit window.

Zoom Out

Zooms out the LD Edit window.

Start/Stop monitoring

Starts or Stops program monitoring.

Convert data

Changes the value to decimal or hexadecimal value that is displayed
when monitoring the LD program.

Start/Stop editing in
running

Starts or Stops modification while the program is running.

Download edited program Downloads the modified program while running.
in running

Steps of writing a program
The example is hot to write a ladder diagram in the registered scan program by using the LD editor.

440

CIMON-PLC

1. Insert a row to input the program pressing the [Ctrl + L] key.
Click the

button on the toolbar to show the positive transition-sensing contact window. Input "X0000"

2. Click the [Select Var] button to use the device registered in the variable table.

Click the [OK] button to finish entering contact (

).
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

3. Click the

button on the toolbar and input "M0000" in the coil dialog.

4. Insert a row using the [Ctrl + L] key and click the
Click the

button to input "M0000" and click the

5. Insert a row using the [Ctrl + L] key and click the
Input "M0000" using the

button to input "Y0010".
button to input "Y0010".?

button to input "Y0010".

button and connect two lines using the

button.

441

442

CIMON-PLC

6. Insert a row using the [Ctrl + L] key and click the

button to input the END command.

7. Click File -> Save Program menu to save the entered program.

4.5.4

Entering a variable table
Variable Table
Menu -> [View] -> [Variable Windows]

CICON - PLC Loader Program

Variable table is activated as below.

1. Search
You can search device address, description, variable name and type in this function.
You do not need to write whole name on [Search]. It searches variable without full name.
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

443

444

CIMON-PLC

2. Save
Save variable table after editing.
After saving variable, message appears in Message window.
*If CICON is closed without saving variable, variable table will be disappeared. Click [Save] before
closing CICON

3. Classified by device
If it is selected, variable table is classified by device.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

If [Classified by device] is not selected, device will be shown in order as below.

4. Variable registered
If [Variable registered] is selected, it shows only registered variables.
In case of device which is not registered, it shows blank and it is editable.

445

446

CIMON-PLC

5. Device
Device is comprised of Bit and Word.
Bit Device : X / Y / M / L / K / T / C / S
Word Device : X / Y / M / L / K / D

6. Copy
You can copy device, description, variable and type.
Drag mouse and click [Copy]
*This function is the same with right click of mouse and copy.
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

Open Microsoft Excel and paste (Ctrl+V)

*If you want to copy device address, drag your mouse from device address.

447

448

CIMON-PLC

7. Paste
After editing Excel, copy the variable and click [Paste] to paste variable table.

*Device address does not need to be in rows by consecutive number.
*If you add new device address, device address, description, variable, type will be made in order of
precedence.
(if description and variable are not used, you should write any text. If it is blank, Pate will not work)
New device, description, variable and type will be added in Variable table as below.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

8. Insert
If you click [Insert], Variable setting pops up. Click "OK" to insert variable after fill out blank.

449

450

CIMON-PLC

9. Delete
After selecting Description or Variable that you want to delete, click "Delete".
* You can delete variable with "Delete" key on keyboard.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

10. Delete(Blocks)
You can delete several blocks as below. Select blocks and click "Delete"

451

452

CIMON-PLC

CICON - PLC Loader Program

*When you delete blocks, Description and variable are deleted only.

11. Print
When you click "Print", Output window pops up as below.

453

454

CIMON-PLC

1. Output Type : you can choose CSV file and Printer type.

2. When variable table is printed, number of output is added.
3. Bit : Selection for Bit Type device
4. Word : Selection for Word Type device?
5. Each Device : Select device which you want to print.
6. Set All : select all devices.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

7. Reset All : reset all devices.

8. Print : When you select CSV, CSV file save dialog pops up.
After writing file name and click "Save", CSV file is made as below.

455

456

4.5.5

CIMON-PLC

Communication Setting
Change the settings of CICON connection to connect to PLC.
Click the Tool -> Connection Setup menu.

RS232C

If you want to connect directly to PLC through the PC COM port, select RS232 and modify the items in the
Communication Setting column.
Select COM port which you want to use in Port item.
Select the baud rate which is identical with the baud rate of PLC in Boad rate item.
The baud rate of CPU loader port is fixed to 38,400 bps. But the baud rate of communication module is
changeable.

Dial-Up

CICON - PLC Loader Program

457

If you want to connect to PLC via dial-up modem, select Dial-Up Modem and modify the Comm. Setup
items properly.
Input the phone number of the PLC connected party into Tel No item
Input the AT command to initialize the modem connected to the PC.

Leased

If you want to connect to PLC via leased line modem, select the Leased and modify the Comm. Setup
items properly.
Select 2-wire or 4-wire for the Link Type filed.

Ethernet

458

CIMON-PLC

If you want to connect to PLC via Ethernet, select the Ethernet and input the PLC IP address.

4.5.6

Compile/Link
Create the program data file to download to PLC using Compile/Link function.
Select Tools -> Compile All+Link to create the file to download to PLC.

The Message window will display the progress and result of "Compile All+Link"

CICON - PLC Loader Program

4.5.7

Download
Use this function to download the complied/linked file.
Select Online -> Download menu to use this function.

click the [OK] button.

Then, the Downloading window will appear that shows the progress of download.
The result of downloading can be checked in the Message window.

4.5.8

Monitoring
Use the

button on the LD Editing window to monitor the program.

459

460

CIMON-PLC

If the status of contact is On, it will be displayed in blue color.
You can modify the status of contact and device values using [Shift + Mouse Double Click].

4.5.9

Find and Replace
Find and Replace
This is used to find or change the device and the String in LD program,
[ Find ]
1. Select the basic row of the direction.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

2. Select the [Search]-[Find/Replace].
3. Select the [Find]tab.

461

462

CIMON-PLC

Find what : used to specify the device find.

Device : This function is used to find the device.

String : This function is used to find the string of rung comment, Application instruction and
label except the device.

Direction : used to specify the location to find or downward form the lins presently selected in
the LD editor.

Type : used to select the device type to find.

Match whole word Only : If All identical checked, it will find the string only exactly identical to
the string specified in the detail to find.

Option : If Option checked, used to find specific contact point, specific coil comment , and
application instruction used in LD editor.

[ Replace ]
1. Select the basic row of the direction.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

2. Select

the

[Search]-[Find/Replace].

3. Select the [Replace] tab.

463

464

CIMON-PLC

· Device : This function is used to find the device.
· String : This function is used to find the string of rung comment, Application instruction and label
except the device.
· Direction : used to specify the location to find or downward form the lins presently selected in the
LD editor.
· Type : used to select the device type to find.
· Range(Step) : If step is selected, find and replace is operated in a range of start step and last
step specified..
· Match whole word Only : If All identical checked, it will find the string only exactly identical to the
string specified in the detail to find.
· Option : If Option checked, used to find specific contact point, specific coil comment , and
application instruction used in LD editor.
· Range : used to specify the number of devices to replace with range.It will be adtive only when.
Quick Search

This is used to quick search the device and the String in LD program,
Check the [View]-[Tool bar]-[Search].

CICON - PLC Loader Program

465

4.5.10 Find All
This is used to find the device and the String in all program.
Find All

Select the

[Search]-[Find All]

· Device : used to specify the device find.
· String : This function is used to find the string of rung comment, Application instruction and
device.
· Output to pane 2 : Basically the result is output to found 1 result window, but if this chect box
is selected,
the result will be [Output to pane 2] result window.
output

4.5.11 Cross Reference
The Cross Reference provides an overview of the use of addresses within the CICON user program.
It makes you obtain a list of the addresses of PLC memory areas according to the report type
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

466

CIMON-PLC

selected.
(It lists the content of a specified PLC memory area according to the six kinds of report type which is
selected.)

1. Detailed usage
Displays information about the usage or any address used within the PLC programs. The
program name, step number, instruction,
start address, end address, variable and description details relating to each usage are shown.
Double click the left-mouse button to
move where the address is used in the ladder diagram.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

467

2. Usage overview
Displays a usage overview the selected device, showing only the addresses that are in use.
For each used device, a usage count is displayed.

468

CIMON-PLC

3. Usage overview with comments
Displays a usage overview the selected device, showing only the addresses that are in use.
For each address, a usage count and its comment are displayed. Usage count used as a
contact or coil in programs is displayed respectively.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

469

4. Usage overview including unused
Displays an overall summary of the usage for the selected device, including devices that are
not used.

470

CIMON-PLC

5. Usage overview with comments including unused
Displays a usage overview the selected device, including devices that are not used.
For each address, a usage count and its comment are displayed. Usage count used as a
contact or coil in programs is displayed respectively.

6. Duplicate usage
Displays information about the usage of device used in more than one time with count.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

4.5.12 Bookmark
This function can make you easy to move where designated rung in the program by user.
The rules of designation of Bookmark are below:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Can designate a Bookmark by Rung
Cannot designate a Bookmark at the comment
Can use this function in the LD only
The maximum count of Bookmark is 512.

Description of Bookmark function is below. (“Tool” – “Bookmark”)

Item

Toolbar Icon

Description

Bookmark
Set/Release

Set or release a bookmark where the cursor located rung

Bookmark Release all

Release all bookmarks in the program

Prev. Bookmark

Move to previous bookmark position

Next Bookmark

Move to next bookmark position

471

472

4.6

CIMON-PLC

Programming (Multiple Programs)
Contents of Example Programs :
Add the following functions to the example program in the chapter 4.
Fill D00000~D00099 with 10 for PLC operation, using the initialization program (Cold).
Turn the lamp (Y0000) on for 5 seconds and turn it off for 3 seconds repetitively, using the timer contact.

Contents :
· Add a new program
· Remove program from project
· Writing / Managing Program
· Parameter Setting
· Reserve I/O

4.6.1

Add a new program
Click the right mouse button on the Program in the Project window, in order to add a new program.

Select the Initialization Program (Cold) and set program name, ID, and free space.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

You can check the newly registered program in the Project window.

4.6.2

Remove program from project
Select the program to delete fist.

473

474

CIMON-PLC

Click the right mouse button on the selected program, and select the "Remove Program From Project"
popup menu.

4.6.3

Writing / Managing Program

Wiring a program ,
1. Double click the Initialization Program in the Project window.

Write the initialization program in the LD Editing window.

2. Insert a row in the Edit window using [Ctrl+L] key and then, click the

button to input the contact

CICON - PLC Loader Program

"F0012".

Click the

button to input the "FMOV" command.

3. Insert a raw using [Ctrl+L] key and click the

button to input "F0012".

475

476

CIMON-PLC

4. Click the

button to input the "INITEND" command.

5. Insert a raw using [Ctrl+L] key and click the

button to input the "END" command

6. Select File -> Save Program menu to save the editing program.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

Double click the Scan Program in the Project window ,

Edit the scan program in the LD Editing window.

1. Insert a raw using [Ctrl+L] key and click the

button to input "T0000".?

477

478

CIMON-PLC

Click the

button to input the "TON" command.

2. Insert a raw using [Ctrl+L] key and click the

button to input "T0001".

CICON - PLC Loader Program

3. Click the

button to input the "TON" command.

479

480

CIMON-PLC

4. Insert a raw using [Ctrl+L] key and click the

5. Click the

button to input "T0001".

button to input "Y0011".

CICON - PLC Loader Program

481

6. Select File -> Save Program menu to save the edited program.

4.6.4

Parameter Setting
PLC parameters are used for settings of PLC operation, whereas PLC link is used for PLC data communication
settings.

PLC parameters

Double click "PLC Parameter" under Parameter in the Project window.

482

CIMON-PLC

Default setting

Normal action on error

If this option is selected, PLC will run normally even though the operation
error occurs while the scan program is running.

Output while debugging

Enables output display during debugging.

Timer

Sets the contact area that will run 100ms or 10ms among 1,024 timer
contacts.

Remote write

Enables PC control using the communication module.

Remote mode change

Enables to change the PLC operation module using the communication
module.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

483

PLC Link (Com/Dual)

Enables automatic PLC link switching function. This option is valid only for

Auto Change

the CPU supporting redundancy.

Watch Dog Timer

If you want to use WDT, check Enable and set Period. If the PLC scan time
exceeds the setting time, the WDT error will be generated.

Hot Restart

If the power supply is resumed within the defined time, the Initialization
Program (hot) will be executed while keeping the PLC memory value. To use
this function, the CPU should be equipped with RTC.

Expansion

Sets PLC increment number as much as you want. If the number in the
increment end is smaller than the setting value, the increment
communication error will occur.

Latch Setup
Sets the PLC latch area. If you click the button with the device name on it, you can set the area.
Latch area values will be maintained even though PLC stops or the power is turned off.

Interrupt
Manages interrupt programs registered in the project. You can modify the interrupt interval and priority in
this window.
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

484

CIMON-PLC

Error Action
Set the actions to be taken when the PLC error occurs.

Comm port

CICON - PLC Loader Program

485

You can modify settings of the reserved communication port of CM1-CP4C/D or block type model -R, or -S
type.
This function is not applicable for other CPU type.

4.6.5

Reserve I/O
You can specify word size and type of module in Reserve I/O dialog.

Base type: Select the base type to set. The setting icon will vary according to type selection.
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

486

CIMON-PLC

Card setting

When you select the base type, the slots that can be set will be activated.
Select the slot to set and then, set the module to set.

If 64 points input is selected, the bar will be displayed in light green color and "DI" will be displayed at the
center, as shown above.
The "Occupied" means how many (4*16=64) addresses are occupied by the specified slot.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

4.7

487

Scan Program
Program Types ,
Select "File -> New Program" menu to create a new program.

Scan Program
Program that processes the signal repeated regularly at every scan.

Sub-routine Program
Program composed of sub-routines that are called by "ECALL" command in the scan program.

Initialization Program (Cold)
Program that is started when the power is supplied or the mode is changed to the Run mode. It also

488

CIMON-PLC

sets the initialization data or initializes the peripheral or special module.

Initialization Program (Hot)
If the power fails temporarily within the setting time when the Hot Restart function is enabled, the
Initialization Program (hot) is executed first while keeping previous values and the scan program is
executed successively.

Periodic Interrupt Program
Program executed at the specified intervals.

Program execution diagram ,

The initialization program runs at the initial state of PLC running, whereas the scan program runs
repetitively while PLC is running. The sub-routine program runs only when it is called by the "ECALL"
command while the scan program is running.

4.7.1

Scan Program
The scan program processes the signal repeated regularly at every scan.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

489

Scan program properties

Program name Displays the name of the program.

Program ID

Decides the priority of program execution, program execution starts from the smaller ID.

For Run Edit

Free space is reserved for the modification function while the program is running.

(Step)

4.7.2

Sub-routine Program

The Sub-routine Program is a collection of programs that are called by the "ECALL" command in the scan
program. The scan program calls SBRT n ~ RET commands in the sub-routine program according to the
"ECALL" command.

4.7.3

Initialization Program (Cold)
Program that is started when the power is supplied or the mode is changed to the RUN mode.
The scan program is executed after running of the initialization program is complete.
It also sets the initialization data to run the scan program or initializes the peripheral or special module.
You must use the "INITEND" command to stop the initialization program.

490

4.7.4

CIMON-PLC

Initialization Program (Hot)

Set the Hot Restart function in the PLC Parameter window. Once this function is selected, it will be started if the
temporary power failure occurs within the setting time.
Run the initialization program (hot) while keeping previous values (device values at the time of power off) and
then, run the scan program.
You must use the "INITEND" command to stop the initialization program.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

4.7.5

491

Periodic Interrupt Program
The selected program will be executed at intervals specified by Interrupt Period.

How to set the interrupt program

Set the unique interrupt ID from 0 to 15.
Free space is reserved for the modification function while the program is running.
The interrupt with lower Interrupt Level will be executed first. The Interrupt Level of the program must not
be same with other program.
Input the Interrupt Period, which is the interval of program execution. The allowable setting range is 10 ~
655,350ms.
If you want to run the interrupt program, use the "GEI" command to enable the usage of the interrupt
program and then, execute the program using the "EI" command.

492

4.8

CIMON-PLC

Communication Setting Program

Contents :
· Protocol Program
· DNP3 Program
· Public Network IP Setting Program
· Field Bus Communication Block Setup Program
· Modbus Master Program
· Ethernet Protocol Program
· CIMONNET Communication Block Setup Program
· CIMONNET Communication Block Slave Setup Program

4.8.1

Protocol Program
The protocol program enables the user to manually define the communication frame of the serial communication
module.

Registering the protocol program
Select "File -> New Program" menu.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

493

Input the Program Name, Program ID, and Program Free Space field.
Click the [OK] button.

Composing protocol program
Example of writing a program : The sample program reads 5 words from %MW100 of Glofa PLC,
and saves it in 5 words from D00100 of CIMON PLC. Communication is established using the channel #1
(RS232) of the serial communication module, which is mounted in local base, slot #0.

494

CIMON-PLC

· Base: Local (Module mounted base)
· Slot: Slot 0 (Module mounted slot)
· CH: Ch1 (Channel to use: Ch1 (RS232) and Ch2 (RS422/485))
· Result: M0000 (Specifying the device to save the communication result)
Available function buttons are as follows.
· Add: Defines and adds new frame.
· Edit: Edits the registered frame.
· Delete: Deletes the registered frame.
· Save+RunEdit: Saves the edited details and instantly applies to PLC, if it is online.
· Save: Saves the modified details.
To move the frame position, Cut (Ctrl+X), move position, and paste it (Ctrl+V).

CICON - PLC Loader Program

When you click the [Add] button, the Define Frame window will appear.

"Input the setting items."
· Frame: Name to separate the frame.
· Tx/Rx: Sets the communication direction – sending or receiving.
· Period: Sending frames will be automatically sent at the specified interval.
· Tx frame by Rx: Specifies the frame that corresponds to the response.

"Functions related with segment editing"
· Add segment: Defines and adds a new segment.
· Edit segment: Edits the registered segment details.
· Delete segment: Deletes the selected segment.
· up: Moves the selected segment upwards.
· down: Moves the selected segment downward.

1. Defining a frame

495

496

CIMON-PLC

(Rx frame of the continuous read command for the direct variable)
Defines the frame contents to interpret the response frame for the continuous read requesting frame of
the Glofa PLC’s direct variable.

· Defining a segment (header)

Sets the header of the protocol.
The header for the ACK response frame is ACK (06H), and should be set as shown above.

· Defining a segment (station number)

Sets the station number area for the protocol.
Input the station number of the counterpart (LG Glofa).
The station number is "01" (1) and should be set as shown above.

· Defining a segment (command + command type)

CICON - PLC Loader Program

497

Continuous read command for the direct variable + command type rSB(r + SB), which should be set
as shown above.

· Defining a segment (number of blocks + number of data)

The number of block is 1 and data is 10 (= 5Word * 2, 0AH), and should be set (01+0A) as shown
above.

· Defining a segment (data)

498

CIMON-PLC

Set as shown above to save 5 word data received from Glofa PLC in 5 words from D00100 of CIMON
PLC.
To display 5 word data as an ASCII code, 20 bytes (= 5 words * 4 characters) are needed.

· Defining a segment (tail)

The tail of the ACK frame is ETX(03H), and set as shown above.

· Defining a segment (BCC)

BCC is the ASCII converted value of the least significant 1 byte out of the ASCII value that adds from
the header to the tail.
Set as above – 2 byte length, 0 ~ 5 segment, SUM error check, hexadecimal ASCII data conversion.

2. Finishing defining a frame
(Rx frame of the continuous read command for the direct variable)

CICON - PLC Loader Program

The communication direction is the receiving frame, and set as shown above.

3. Defining a frame
(Tx frame of the continuous read command for the direct variable)
Defines the request frame of the continuous read command for the direct variable.

· Defining a segment (Header)

499

500

CIMON-PLC

The header of the request frame is ENQ(05H), and set as shown above.

· Defining a segment (station number)

Set the station number as "01"(1).
(See the contents in the "Rx frame of the continuous read command for the direct variable" section.)

· Defining a segment (command + command type)

Set continuous read command for the direct variable + command type as "rSB".?
(See the contents in the Rx frame of the continuous read command for the direct variable?
section.)

· Defining a segment (variable length + variable name + number of data)

CICON - PLC Loader Program

501

Set the variable length as 6 bytes (06H), and direct variable as "%MW100", and the number of data
as 5 words (05H) as shown above. ("06" + "%MW100" + "05")

· Defining a segment (tail)

The tail of the request frame is EOT (04H), and set as shown above.

· Defining a segment (BCC)

502

CIMON-PLC

4. Finishing defining a frame
(Tx frame of the continuous read command for the direct variable)

Set the communication direction as sending frame, and communication interval as 100msec, and
receiving frame for sending as RD_RX_1 as shown above.

5. Finishing frame registration
(Continuous read request of the direct variable, as receiving the response frame)

CICON - PLC Loader Program

Communication will be established by the protocol program only without the separate scan
programming.

4.8.2

DNP3 Program
Connect the device defined in the DNP3 protocol to the PLC device.

Registering the protocol program
Select "File -> New Program" menu.

503

504

CIMON-PLC

Input Program Name, Program ID, and Program Free Space field.
Click the [OK] button.

Writing a DNP3 program
Example of writing a program :
When setting the DNP communication module device at local base, slot #1.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

505

Set 5 words from X0000 in the Binary Input field.
Set 5 words from Y0100 in the Binary Output field.
Set Binary Output type as Pulse On, and Hand Off as 1 second.
Set 20 words from D00000 in the Counter field.
Set 20 words from D00100 in the Analog Input field.
Set 20 words from D00200 in the Analog Output field.
Set Hand Off in Analog Output as 1 second.

4.8.3

Public Network IP Setting Program
If some PLC links use the common network, register the IP and station number in the common network IP setting
program in order to identify the IPs on the network using the station number.

Registering a protocol program
Select "File -> New Program" menu.

506

CIMON-PLC

Input Program Name, Program ID, and Program Free Space field.
Click the [OK] button.

Writing a common network IP setting program
Example of writing a program :
When configuring the common network using the Ethernet module at local base, slot #1.
Set the IP address of the mounted module as "100.100.100.1," and set the station number as 1.
Register the IP "100.100.100.2" in the station number 2.
Register the IP "100.100.100.3" in the station number 3.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

507

Click the [Insert] button to display the "Add IP" window.
Select the station number (1) in the "Add IP" window, and input the IP address (100.100.100.1) and then,
press the [Enter] key.

508

4.8.4

CIMON-PLC

Field Bus Communication Block Setup Program
When controlling the remote I/O using the internal PLC device in the Profibus DP or DeviceNet Master module,
set the I/O area using the field bus communication block setting program.

Registering a protocol program
Select "File -> New Program" menu.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

509

Input Program Name, Program ID, and Program Free Space field.
Click the [OK] button.

Writing a field bus communication block setting program
Example of writing a program :
When controlling the remote I/O using the filed bus (PD01A: Profibus DP) master module at local base, slot
#2, the number of remote I/O connected to the field bus master is 32 point inputs and 16 point outputs.

510

CIMON-PLC

Select local in Base, 2 in Slot, and CM1-PD01A in module type.

When reading the input of the remote I/O as much as 2 words (32 bit) from M0000.
Select the [Input] tab. Click the [Insert] button.

Select M as Device, 0 as Starting Address, and 2 as Buffer Size. Click the [OK] button.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

When setting 1 word (16 bit) data from Y0010 as the output of the remote I/O.
Select the [Output] tab. Click the [Insert] button.

Select Y as Device, 10 as Starting Address, and 1 as Buffer Size. Click the [OK] button.

511

512

4.8.5

CIMON-PLC

Modbus Master Program
Define the communication block (read/write) using the Modbus master special program, in order to read or write
the data from/to the Modbus slave using the serial communication module.

Registering a protocol program
Select "File -> New Program" menu.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

513

Input Program Name, Program ID, and Program Free Space field.
Click the [OK] button.

Writing a Modbus master special program
Example of writing a program
When controlling the remote I/O using the filed bus (PD01A: Profibus DP) master module at local base, slot
#2, the number of remote I/O connected to the field bus master is 32 point inputs and 16 point outputs.

514

CIMON-PLC

Communication block that reads 5 data from the coil status (starting address: 0) of the slave (station
number: 1), and saves it in 5 bits from M0005.

Click the [Add] button.

Input the Counterparty’s Station Number (1).
Select the Function (01 Read Coil Status).
Input the Point Number (1). Input the number that is bigger than Start Address by 1.
If the data to read is bit, the data type is meaningless.
Input the Number of Data (5).
Input the Device (M0005).
If you don’t select "Do not request automatically" option, the communication block will be
automatically processed.
Click the [OK] button.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

515

Communication block that writes 4 words from D00000 at the signal register (starting address: 0) of
the slave (station number: 1).

Click the [Add] button.

Input the Destination No (1).
Select the Function (06 Preset Single Register).
Input the Point Number (1). Input the number that is bigger than Start Address by 0.
Select the Data Type (INT16:High order byte first).
Input the Data Count (1).
Input the Device (D00000).
If you don’t select "Do not request automatically" option, the communication block will be
automatically processed.
Click the [OK] button.

516

CIMON-PLC

You can change the block location using the Up (Up) or Down (Down) button.

4.8.6

Ethernet Protocol Program
Special program that enables the user to define the communication frame of the Ethernet communication
module.

Registering a protocol program
Select "File -> New Program" menu.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

517

Input Program Name, Program ID, and Program Free Space field.
Click the [OK] button.

Composing protocol program
Example of writing a program
The example program reads 5 words from D00100 of the counterparty’s CIMON PLC (100.100.100.20)
using the dedicated service, and saves it in 5 words from D00100 of CIMON PLC. Communication is
established using the Ethernet communication module mounted in local base, slot #0.

518

CIMON-PLC

1. Registering a host
Registers the PLC Ethernet card to read the data.
Click the [Add Host] button.

Input the device (M0000) to save the Communication Result.
Input the counterparty’s IP (100.100.100.20).
Input the Port Number (10262) to use for communication. The port number in the dedicated service
uses TCP (10260) and UDP (10262).
Select "UDP".
Click the [OK] button.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

519

Receive Header/Tail is used if the entire frame has the header and tail but received after split. All
frames are combined from the time when a header is received to the one when a tail is received, and
it is processed as a frame (request or response).

2. Registering a frame

520

CIMON-PLC

Select a host and click the [Add Frame] button, the Define Frame window will appear.
[Input the setting items.]
· Frame name: Name to separate the frame.
· Tx/Rx: Sets the communication direction – sending or receiving.
· Auto Send/Receive: Sending frames will be automatically sent at the specified interval.
· Ts. Of Auto Send: Specifies the frame that corresponds to the response.
[Functions related with segment editing]
· Insert: Defines and adds a new segment.
· Edit: Edits the registered segment details.

3. Defining a frame
(Rx frame for the Word Block Read command)
Defines the frame contents to interpret the response frame against the Word Block Read request frame
of CIMON PLC.

· Defining a segment (ID)

Sets the ID in the protocol.
The ID for the dedicated service is "KDT_PLC_M", and set as shown above.

· Defining a segment (Frame No.)

CICON - PLC Loader Program

521

Set the frame number area in the protocol.
Select "Don’t care" for the segment type since it is not related with the data. The area designated as
on’t care?will not be
compared.
Length is 1 bytes, and set as shown above.

· Defining a segment (Cmd)

The command of the ACK response against Word Block Read is 52h, and set as shown above.

· Defining a segment (Res: Reserved area 00h)

522

CIMON-PLC

The reserved area is 00h, and set as shown above.

· Defining a segment (Data area: Requesting device)

Since 5 words data from D00100 is requested, the requesting device of the response frame is
received as D001000. Set as shown above.

· Defining a segment (Data area: Number of requesting data)

The number of requesting data is received as 005h since 5 data is requested. Set as shown above.

· Defining a segment (Data area: Receiving data)

CICON - PLC Loader Program

523

Set as shown above in order to save the received data in D00100 sequentially, since the requested
data is received by the order.

· Defining a segment (Check Sum)

The checksum area is the entire frame area, and set as shown above.

4. Finishing defining a frame (Rx frame for Word Block Read)

524

CIMON-PLC

The communication direction is the receiving frame, and set as shown above.

5. Defining a frame
(Word Block Read Tx frame)
Defines the request frame for Word Block Read.

· Defining a segment (ID)

Sets the ID in the protocol.
The ID for the dedicated service is "KDT_PLC_M", and set as shown above.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

· Defining a segment (Frame No.)

Set the frame number area in the protocol.
Length is 1 bytes, and set as shown above.

· Defining a segment (Cmd)

The command of the ACK response against Word Block Read is 52h, and set as shown above

· Defining a segment (Res: Reserved area 00h)

525

526

CIMON-PLC

The reserved area is 00h, and set as shown above.

· Defining a segment (Data area: Requesting device)

Since 5 words data from D00100 is requested, the requesting device of the response frame is
received as D001000. Set as shown above.

· Defining a segment (Data area: Number of requesting data)

The number of requesting data is received as 005h since 5 data is requested. Set as shown above.

· Defining a segment (Check Sum)

CICON - PLC Loader Program

527

The checksum area is the entire frame area, and set as shown above.

6. Finishing frame registration
(Tx frame for Word Block Read)

Set the Communication Direction as the sending frame.
Set the Automatic Receiving Frame after Sending so that the system automatically waits for receiving
of the specified frame (0) after sending.
Set the Automatic Sending Interval as 0.1 second so that communication is established at every 0.1
second.

528

CIMON-PLC

7. Finishing frame registration
(Word Block Read request and response frame receiving)

Communication will be established by the protocol program only without the separate scan
programming.

4.8.7

CIMONNET Communication Block Setup Program
This service is to exchange data between CIMONPLCs.
An CIMON-NET Master Module(CM1-CN01M) and CIMON-NET Slave
used

Module(CM1-CN01S) is

Registering a protocol program
Select File->New Program menu

CICON - PLC Loader Program

529

530

CIMON-PLC

Input Program Name, Program ID, and Program free space field.
Click the [OK] button…
Writing a CIMON-NET Communication Block Setting Program
Example of writing a program.
Select Local as Base, 1 as Slot, CM1-CN01S as Module Type, and 0 as Station No.
Input : When sending the 100 words data from M0000 to the Master module.
Output : When storing the 50 words data from D00100 from the Master module.
-Input
Select the [Input] tab
Click the [Add] button

CICON - PLC Loader Program

Select M as Device Type, 0 as Start Address, and 100 as Buffer Size.
Click the [OK] button…

-Output
Select the [Output] tab.
Click the [Add] button…

531

532

CIMON-PLC

Select D as Device Type, 100 as Start Address, and 50 as Buffer Size.
Click the [OK] button…

Click the [Write] button…

4.9

Special Program

Contents :
· Special Card Init. Program

CICON - PLC Loader Program

533

· PID Special Program
· Thermistor setting Program
· Loadcell setting Program
· HSC Program for PLC-S
· Positioning Program for PLC-S
· IO Input Filter Setting Program

4.9.1

Special Card Init. Program
Enter topic text here.

4.9.2

PID Special Program
The PID special program is designed to conveniently use the PID operation function, which is the CPU built-in
function.

Registering the PID program
Select "File -> New Program" menu.

Input Program Name, Program ID, and For Run Edit(step).
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

534

CIMON-PLC

Click the [OK] button.

Writing a PID program
Example of writing a program : Configuration diagram of the control system

This sample program takes measurement of the temperature inside a room using the RTD sensor, and
controls 4 – 20mA output to keep the room temperature as settings. Temperature is measure using the
channel 1 of the RTD module, and the output is controlled using the channel 1 of the DA card.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

535

Number of entire loop(Total Loop)
Sets the number of loops that execute PID operation.
One PID operation loop should be used to control one controlling object. Up to 32 controlling objects can
be set. Set "1" since there is only 1 controlling object. (1 ~ 32)

Number of execution loops for 1 scan(1 Scan Loop)
Sets the number of execution loops in 1 scan when there are several loops.
Set "1" as the number of execution loops for 1 scan since the number of entire loop is 1.

PIDINIT starting area(PIDINIT Start)
Parameters to be referred by PIDINIT command are saved from the specified area. The first loop uses 22
loops including the number of entire loop and execution loops for 1 scan. From second loop, 20 words area
is used whenever a new loop is added. In the above figure, D00000 ~ D00021 area is set for the PIDINIT
parameter area.

PIDCAL starting area(PIDCAL Start)
Parameters to be referred by PIDCAL command and PIDCAL result value are saved from the specified
area. 20 words area is additionally used whenever a new loop is added. In the above figure, D00100 ~
D00119 area is set for the PIDCAL parameter area. Be careful that the area overlaps the PIDINIT area.

Current loop(Now Sel LooPp)
Select the loop to edit or monitor among the entire loop.
"1" is set for the current loop field since there is one loop.

Select operation formula (0: Forward operation, 1: Reverse operation)
· Forward operation: Operation that makes the measurement value to be close to the target value by
outputting the movement volume (MV), if the measurement value (PV) is smaller than the target value
(SV). Heating operation belongs to this operation type.
· Reverse operation: Operation that makes the PV to be close to the target value by outputting the MV, if
the PV is greater than the SV. Cooling operation belongs to this operation type.
Select Forward operation (0) since heating is currently controlled.

536

CIMON-PLC

Sampling time
Sets the interval of executing PID operation. The interval should be set shorter for the system that the
measurement value instantly responds to output variation.
Since it is set to 1 second in the above example, PID operation is performed at 1 second interval and the
MV changes. (0.01 ~ 60)

Proportional integer (Kp)
Constant value that is multiplies by the deviation (Sv –Pv) in the proportional operation "Mv = Kp * (Sv –
Pv)", which performs proportional operation of PID control.
If the proportional integer (kp) is greater in the above formula, the PV reaches the SV faster. However, if
this value is too big, it can negatively affects stabilized control due to vibration.
In the above example, this value is set to 8000. It should be adjusted according to the system while running
the program. (0.01 ~ 100)

Integral integer (Ki)
The integral operation "Mv = P * E + P * 1/Ki *?Edt" adds/deducts the deviation value to/from the
manipulation value depending on the time in order to remove the deviation, if the difference (E) occurs
between Sv and Pv. (0.0 ~ 3000)
Proportional operation for the small difference does not significantly affect the change of the manipulation
value. Therefore, perform integral operation to obtain the difference removal effect.
In the above example, this value is set to 2000. It should be adjusted according to the system while running
the program, like the proportional integer.

Differential integer (Kd)
The differential operation "Mv = Kp * E + Kp * dE/dt" suppresses occurrence of the difference by
computing the manipulation value that is proportional to speed change, in order to remove the difference if
it occurs due to the change of Sv or disturbance.
Differential time or differential integer is the time that the manipulation value of differential operation
becomes that of proportional operation since occurrence of the difference by differential operation.
In the above example, this value is set to 0, which means no differential operation control. (0.00 ~ 300)

Filter coefficient (Filter)
Sets the extent that the filter effect is applied for the measurement value (PV) that is entered from the A/D
card. (0.00 ~ 1)

CICON - PLC Loader Program

537

Lower limit of MV (MV Low Limite)
Sets the lower limit of the MV that is calculated by PID operation at the time of automatic PID operation.
If the MV is smaller than the lower MV limit (MVLL), the MVLL will be applied as the MV.
In the above example, the MVLL is set to 0. Therefore, the MV smaller than 0 will not be displayed in the
automatic operation mode. (0 ~ 16000)

Upper limit of MV (MV High Limite)
Sets the upper limit of the MV that is calculated by PID operation at the time of automatic PID operation.
If the MV is greater than the lower MV limit (MVLL), the MVLL will be applied as the MV.
In the above example, the MVLL is set to 16000. Therefore, the MV bigger than 16000 will not be displayed
in the automatic operation mode. (0 ~ 16000)

Variation ratio limitation of MV (MV Change Limite)
The value set in this field will be applied, if MV variation is bigger than the variation ration limitation of MV,
when compares MV of the previous scan with that of this scan. (0 ~ 16000)
In the above example, the variation ration limitation of MV is set to 6000. Therefore, the variation amount
will be set to 6000 if the operation result is bigger than 6000.

Automatic MV transfer (0: Use, 1: No use)
· Use: If the user changes the PID control mode from automatic to manual, the MV calculated in the
automatic mode will be applied to the manual MV (MVman).
· No use: The value set as MVman will be applied to the MV in the manual mode.
In the above example, this field is set to Use (1), MVman is equal to MV in the automatic operation mode.

SV ramp (0: No use, 1~1000)
To suppress occurrence of overshoot due to abrupt change of the Sv, and control stably, if the Sv is
changed, the change is divided into the setting stage, and applied incrementally by increasing/decreasing it
by the sampling interval (Ts).
If set to ?00" and Sv changes, Sv is incrementally applied internally at the interval of Ts (sampling interval:
1 second), and it reaches the modified setting value after (Sv slope function: 100)*Ts (time).
In the above example, it is set to ?". Therefore, this function will be
disabled.

538

CIMON-PLC

ON/OFF control time(On/Off time)
Sets the On/Off interval time to control PID using On/.Off control function. (If set to On, the upper MV will be
displayed as the MV.)
If the On/Off control time is set, the setting value becomes the on/off interval.
The ratio of On/Off in one interval is set by the current MV.
For example, if the setting value is 0.1 and the current MV is 80000, the On state will be kept for 0.05
second and Off will be kept for 0.05 second. Or, if the MV is set to 32000, the On state will be kept for 0.02
second, and Off state will be kept for 0.08 second.
In the above example, it is set to ?". Therefore, this function will be
disabled.

Setting value (SV)
Input the target value to control.
For example, if 0 ~ 100% is used as the digital value of 0 ~ 16000, set 8000 in order to set 50%.
In the above example, the temperature value is controlled. Therefore, input temperature to set * 10? For
example, if temperature is 35.5

, input 355. (0 ~ 16000)

Procure value (PV)
The current measurement value of the controlling object. The value can be read from the analog input card
by the user, and the value can be updated periodically.
Double click the measurement value. (0 ~ 16000)

· Specify the base that the RTD card to read its value is mounted. (Input 0, since it is the local base.)
· Specify the slot that the TRD card is mounted. (Input 0, since it is the slot #0.)
· Set the RTD card memory area to read. (Input 1 to use the

value in the channel 1 of the TRD

module. See the user memory area of the special card.)
When you click the [OK] button, you can see the complete "FROM" command.

MV (0 ~ 16000)

CICON - PLC Loader Program

539

MV is the result value of PID operation. The user can display it on the controlling object using the analog
output card.
Double click the MV.

· Specify the base that the D/A card for output is mounted. (Input 0, since it is a local base.)
· Specify the slot that the D/A card is mounted. (Input 1, since it is the slot #1.)
· Set the D/A card memory area to write the value. (Input 1, since the D/A module channel #1 will be
used. See the user memory area of the special card.)
When you click the [OK] button, you can see the complete "To" command.

Measurement value after filtering (PVnf)
A filter is used to prevent the temporary difference due to noise of the PV. The PV is filtered and saved in
the measurement value after filtering (PVnf) area. At this time, if the filtering coefficient (? is 0, a filter is not
applied to the PV.

MV Manual
If the PID mode is manual, PID is not controlled, and the value set as MVman will be displayed as the MV.

Auto/Manual selection
Selects whether the controlling object will be controlled automatically using PID, or the value set in the
MVman area will be displayed.

PIDINIT state
Displays the error state occurred while initializing PID operation.

Save, Compile, and Download

540

CIMON-PLC

Click the [Save] button if parameter setting is complete.

· Select "CICON menu -> Tools -> Compile+Link".
· Select "CICON menu -> Online -> Link+Download+Monitor" to download the program down to PLC.
If working is complete normally, the monitoring mode will be selected.
If you click the [Stop Monitoring] button, monitoring will be stopped and the editing mode will be selected.

Monitoring
The monitoring result value will be displayed on the window during monitoring.
If you double click the current value during monitoring, you can modify the value in the specified device
area.
The modified value will be applied to PID control from the following scan.
To change the parameter during operation.
Check whether monitoring is in progress. (The current value is displayed during monitoring.)
Double click the current value of the parameter to modify.

Input the value that fits into the input value range, since it is displayed on the window together with the
specified device.

PID AutoTuning
You can easily find parameters (proportional, integral, and differential integer) that are appropriate for the
system, using the automatic PID tuning function.

[Note] Before starting automatic tuning, the environment should not affect the output value as much as
possible. In the above example, normal temperature is recommended that the heater is not running.

Download the currently working PID program down to PLC.
Click the [Monitor] button in the PID program to enter into the monitoring mode.
Click the [Auto Tuning] button.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

541

Input the setting value. (The setting value should be greater than the measurement value for the forward
control, in order to complete auto tuning normally. On the contrary, it should be smaller than the
measurement value, in case of the reverse control.)\
The input value in the above example (forward direction) should be greater than the value that is being
measured currently. It is recommended to input the temperature set most frequently (50 ).
Click the [OK] button.

Auto Tuning is in Progress, and Auto Tuning Command is Received fields are turned on in blue color,
and auto tuning is started.
The output value is fixed at the upper limit value during auto tuning.
The system response characteristic at the maximum output is checked when processing parameters.
When auto tuning is completed, Auto Tuning is in Progress, and Auto Tuning Command is Received
fields are turned off, and parameters calculated by auto tuning will be displayed on current values of
Proportional Integer, Integral Integer, and Differential Integer.

542

CIMON-PLC

You will see that the current value of proportional integer and integral integer is changed.

[Note] Parameters calculated by automatic tuning on this occasion are not applied to other system. The
system characteristic can also vary if the heater output or sensor location is changed in the system.
Check the message in the "Auto Tuning Complete" message window, and click the [Yes] button to apply
the result value to the program.
Alternatively, click the [No] button and select the completed loop and then, click the [Read Now Value]
button to apply the result value (Now value) of the selected loop to the program.

Setting values that are modified through saving, compilation, and download will be applied to PLD control.
PID auto tuning is performed for each loop. Loops other than the one performing tuning will perform normal
PID control.

Linkage with the trend
Click the [Trend] button at the top of the program to populate the Trend window that shows loop setting
value, measurement value, and manipulation volume.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

543

· Green line: Manipulation volume
· Red line: Setting value
· Yellow line: Measurement value
The above figure shows the screen that monitors the trend of forward direction heating control.

Converting PID program to LD
Click the [LD Convert] button to convert the PID program to LD.

[Note] Once the program is converted to LD, it cannot be restored.

4.9.3

Thermistor setting Program
CM1-TH08A is used to measure the temperature by calibrating thermistor resister. Please refer to the manual of
thermistor module?

Registering NEW Program
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

544

CIMON-PLC

Select [ File – New program..], and input " Program Name"?

Select the [OK] button.

Writing a thermistor program
Example of writing a thermistor program
After Registering NEW program, below the box appear.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

545

Setting Channels
Setting Tab: This is used to set "Status", " Digital Range" ,"Digital Filter", "Average OP" and
"Device"

546

CIMON-PLC

•
•
•

Drag a mouse, you can select many channels.
If you want only one channel, select a channel by clicking a mouse.
By using a ctrl-Key, you can select channels what you want.

1. Select "EDIT", below the box appear

2. Select or unselect the blank, "enable"

CICON - PLC Loader Program

547

Check the blank "Enable", you can change values.
Digital Range : it is used to convert the max/min temperature to digital value by a temperature
converting table.

Digital Filter : It is used to set up in case of hunting by outside noise for converted
temperature.
It is restricted converted ranges before storing converted temperature.

548

CIMON-PLC

Range of set value : 0 ~ 70 %
Example : Values which stored the buffer memory is present values by adjusting Digital Filter.
Present Value = Present value + (formal value – present value) * Digital Filter(%) /
100
Average : ?It is used to set up calibrating value for average times

Range of set value : 0 ~ 255 sec.
Device : It is used to store converted temperature in CPU memory.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

549

- Enable domain: X, Y, M, L, K, D
- Type of stored data: , , digital value
Example: If you set like above the box, you can store

value in D100.

Table Tab : It is used to input the temperature, and resistance of a thermistor

Please register the values refer to temperature-resistance table by provided manual from
thermistor cooperation.
-

Center P. temperature = Max. Temperature – (Max. Temperature – Min. Temperature) / 2

550

CIMON-PLC

- In case of inputting the temperature-resistance table incorrectly, converted temperature value is
out of range (0.3%)
Example : Max. temperature = 100 , Min. temperature = -20
100 – (100 - (- 20) / 2 = 100 – 60 = 40
- Register temperature values (Max. = 100
resistance values of each temperature

4.9.4

, Center = 40

, Min. = -20 ), and then Input

Resistance value is except for a decimal point

Cable resistance: It is used to settle a resistance of cable resistance.

HSC Program for PLC-S
Enter topic text here.

4.9.5

Positioning Program for PLC-S
Enter topic text here.

4.9.6

IO Input Filter Setting Program
Enter topic text here.

4.10

SFC Program
Preparing...

CICON - PLC Loader Program

4.11

PLC Control
PLC Control :
· PLC Status
· PLC Time Setting
· Change operation mode
· RAM Operation
· ROM Operation

4.11.1 PLC Status
You can check the current PLC status, firmware version, and so on.
Select "Online -> PLC Status" menu while connected to PLC.

551

552

CIMON-PLC

4.11.2 PLC Time Setting
You can set the time in the PLC Status window if the CPU is integrated with RTC.

To synchronize the current time in the PC with that of PLC, click [Get PC Time] button and the [OK] button.

4.11.3 Change operation mode
The operation mode can be controlled only when the PC mode switch is set to Remote.

The mode can be changed to Run, Stop, or Pause mode.
To change to the Run mode, select "Online -> Change Mode -> Run Mode" while connected.

4.11.4 RAM Operation
Programs saved in RAM is used to run PLC. RAM data is kept using the battery.

4.11.5 ROM Operation
When running PLC, the ROM data is copied over to the RAM and the RAM program is used. The data will be
kept regardless the battery state but the RAM data should be written to the ROM again to save it. Copying the
data from RAM to ROM should be performed in the STOP mode.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

Related functions

Select "Online -> Flash Memory" menu while connected to use the related functions.

4.12

Type

Note

Erase flash memory

Clears programs and parameters saved in the ROM.

Save RAM -> Flash

Copies the RAM program over to the ROM.

Write to Flash Memory

Copies the working project directly to the ROM.

Convert To ROM Operation Mode

Switches the CPU to the ROM operation mode.

Convert To RAM Operation Mode

Switches the CPU to the RAM operation mode.

Special Card Setting
Double click the module to set in the Module Property of the Project window while connected to PLC,
or select Tools -> Optional Module Setup menu.

See :
· Ethernet Module
· RS232/422 Module
· Logger (RS232) Module
· DNP3 (Ethernet) Module
· DNP3 (232/422) Module
· BACnet (Slave) Module
· AD Conversion Module
· DA Conversion Module
· AD/DA Conversion Module
· RTD Conversion Module

553

554

CIMON-PLC

· TC Conversion Module
· High-speed Counter
· AD MUX Module

4.12.1 Ethernet Module
Select "Tools -> Optional Module Setup -> Ethernet Module" menu.
If several Ethernet modules are mounted, you can select the intended card by specifying base and slot.

Example of setting ,
Take the steps described below to change the Ethernet module setting as follow, which is mounted in local
base and slot number 0.
· IP: 100.100.100.10
· Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
· Gateway: 100.100.100.50

Input as shown in the figure and click the [Write] button.

If processed normally, the confirmation window will be displayed.
Click the [Read] button again to see if there is no error in the settings.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

555

Click the [Status] button to check error codes and communication status of the communication card.

4.12.2 RS232/422 Module
Select "Tools -> Optional Module Setup -> RS232/422" Module.
If several RS232/422 modules are mounted, you can change the target card by specifying base and slot.

Example of settings ,
Set the module as shown below if you want to make the loader connection using the channel number 1 of
RS232/422 module, which is mounted in local base, slot number 1.

Select the [Ch 1] tab.

556

CIMON-PLC

· Select the "Null Modem" communication method to establish 1:1 connection using the cable.
· Select the "CICON (Loader) protocol".
· Set communication speed to 38400,
· error detection to none,
· data bit to 8,
· stop bit to 1.
It is recommended to set the response (transmission) delay time between PC and PLC to approximately
50ms.
Click the [Write] button.
Check the setting completion message.

4.12.3 Logger (RS232) Module
Select "Tools -> Optional Module Setup -> Logger (RS-232)" Module menu.
If several RS232/422 modules are mounted, you can change the target card by specifying base and slot.

Example of setting ,
Set the module as shown below if you want to establish a connection to HMI using the channel number 1 of
logger (RS-232) module, which is mounted in local base, slot number 3.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

557

Select the [Ch 1] tab.

· Select the "Null Modem" communication method to establish 1:1 connection using the cable.
· Select the "HMI protocol".
· Set communication speed to 9600,
· error detection to none,
· data bit to 8,
· stop bit to 1.
It is recommended to set the response (transmission) delay time between PC and PLC to approximately
50ms.

Click the Log tab.

558

CIMON-PLC

· Take the following steps to log the data of D00000.?
· Select the logging method (Sampling).
· Input the logging interval (1000).
· Click the "Delete transmitted log data". option.

Double click the block to designate (block #0).

· Select the device type (D).
· Input the starting address (0).
· Select the data type (word).
· If the data type is word, Deadband/Bit is meaningless. Set any number (0).
Click the [OK] button.
Click the [Write] button.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

559

Check the OK message.

4.12.4 DNP3 (Ethernet) Module
Select "Tools -> Optional Module Setup -> DNP3 (Ethernet)" Module menu.
If several DNP3 (Ethernet) modules are mounted, you can change the target card by specifying base and slot.

Example of settings ,
When establishing a DNP communication by changing settings of the DNP3 (Ethernet) module mounted in
local base, slot 4.

Select the Basic Setup tab.

· IP: 100.100.100.10
· Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
· Gateway: 100.100.100.50

Input parameters as shown above.

560

CIMON-PLC

Select the DNP#0 tab.

[Set "Data Link Layer"]
· DNP address: Input the DNP address to assign to the communication card.
· Timeout (sec): Input the timeout value.
· Retry (times): Input retrial times.
[Set "Application Layer"]
· Request application confirmation: Select this option to request the application confirmation to the host.
· Use unsolicited response: Select this option to use the unsolicited response.
[Set default host]
· DNP Address: Input the address of the host to communicate with.
· IP Address: Input the host IP address.
· Port number: Input the host port number.

Click the [Write] button.
Check the OK message.

4.12.5 DNP3 (232/422) Module
Select "Tools -> Optional Module Setup ->DNP3 (232/422)" Module menu.
If several DNP3 (232/422) modules are mounted, you can change the target card by specifying base and slot.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

561

Example of Settings ,
When establishing a DNP communication by changing settings of the DNP3 (232/422) module mounted in
local base, slot #3.

Select the [Ch 1] tab.

· Select the "Null Modem" communication method to establish 1:1 connection using the cable.
· Set communication speed to 38400,
· error detection to even,
· data bit to 8,
· stop bit to 1.

Select the DNP3.0 tab.

562

CIMON-PLC

[Set data link layer]
· DNP address: Input the DNP address to assign to the communication card.
· Timeout (sec): Input the timeout value.
· Retry : Input retrial times.
[Application layer]
· Application confirmation: Select this option to request the application confirmation to the host.
· Unsolicited response: Select this option to use the unsolicited response.
[Set Dnp Master]
· DNP address: Input the address of the Master to communicate with.

Click the [Write] button.
Check the OK message.

4.12.6 BACnet (Slave) Module
Select "Tools -> Optional Module Setup ->BACnet(Slave)" Module menu
If several BACnet modules are mounted, you can change the target card by specifying base and slot.

Example of Settings ,

CICON - PLC Loader Program

563

When establishing a BACnet communication using BACnet module mounted in local base, slot #1.

Default Setting tab
Sets the IP and other information related with Ethernet communication.
· IP: 100.100.100.10
· Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
· Gateway: 100.100.100.20

BACnet Setting tab:

Register the device according to the BACnet protocol.
To reply to the request of the master station, the device for the request object type should have been
registered.

564

CIMON-PLC

The Network Number filed is used to identify the specific BACnet module when several BACnet modules
exist in the same network. Master separates slaves to request the data, using the network number.
Register a new device using the [Add] button.
Set as described below to set analog input (object type) as 100 words from D00400.

Click the [Add] button.

· Select "Analog Value (Word)" as the object type.
· Input "D00400" in the PLC Device Address field.
· Input "100" in the Number Of Object(s) field.
Click the [OK] button.

Click the [Status] button to check error codes and the communication status of the communication card.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

565

4.12.7 AD Conversion Module
Select "Tools -> Optional Module Setup -> AD" Module menu.
If several AD conversion modules are mounted, you can change the target card by specifying base and slot.

Example of Settings ,
When calculating the average of 4 times sampling after 4 ~ 20mA analog input of the AD conversion
module channel 1, 3, 5, and 7 to 0 ~ 160000, which are mounted in local base, slot #0.

566

CIMON-PLC

Click the channel (1, 3, 5, and 7) to set while pressing down the Shift key.
Click the [Setup] button.
· Select the Input Type (4 – 20mA).
· Select the Digital Value Range (-192 – 16191).
· Select the Signal Processing (Get the sampling average as much as the standard value).
· Input the Value For Average (4).
Click the [OK] button.

Click the [Write] button after checking the contents in the AD Module Setup window.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

567

Click the [Read] button to check whether setting values are correct.
Click the [Status] button to check the current A/D module status.

4.12.8 DA Conversion Module
Select "Tools -> Optional Module Setup -> DA" Module menu.
If several DA conversion modules are mounted, you can change the target card by specifying base and slot.

Example of Settings , 1"
In this example, when -1 ~ 20mA output of setting DA conversion module channel 1, 2, 3, and 4, which are
mounted on local base, slot #0, is set as -8000 ~ 8000, the DA output is cleared in the PLC stop mode.

Click the channel (1, 2, 3, and 4) to set using the mouse. Click the [Setup] button.

· Click the Enable.
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

568

CIMON-PLC

· Select the Digital Value Range (-8192 ~ 8191).
· Input the Output Under Stop (Clear).
Click the [OK] button.

Click the [Write] button after checking the contents in the D/A Module Setting window.
Click the [Read] button to check whether setting values are correct.
Click the [Status] button to check the current D/A module status, and insert the D/A output temporarily.

Example of Settings , 2"
Take the following steps to send 12mA output to the DA module channel #1.
Check whether PLC is in the Run mode.

Click the [Module Status] button to display the "RTD Module Status" window.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

569

Select the channel #1 and click [Set Output] button.
Select the Allow option in the Disable/Enable Output window, and click the [OK] button.

Click the [Set Value] button.
Input the output value (0) on the "set Value" window.
Click the [OK] button.

4.12.9 AD/DA Conversion Module
"Tool -> Option Module Setting -> AD/DA" Module menu.
If several AD/DA conversion modules are mounted, you can change the target card by specifying base and slot.

Example of Settings ,
When setting each channel of the AD/DA conversion module as described below, which is mounted on
local base, slot #0.

AD channel
Ch.

Input Type

Digital Conversion
Range

Signal Processing

Standard Value of
Average Operation

Current (4-20mA)

0 - 16000

Average during the base period

20msec

Voltage (0 – 10V)

0 - 16000

Average during the base period

20msec

570

CIMON-PLC

DA channel
Ch.

Output Type

Digital Input Range

Stop Mode Output

Current (4-20mA)

0 - 16000

Clear

Voltage (0 – 10V)

0 - 16000

Clear

Click the AD channel 1 to set using the mouse. Click the [Setup] button.

· Select the Input Type (4 – 20mA).
· Select the Digital Value Range (0 ~16000).
· Select the Signal Processing (Average by time).
· Input the Value for average (20).
Click the [OK] button.

· Set the AD channel 2 using the same method.
· However, set the Input Signal to 0 – 10V.?

CICON - PLC Loader Program

571

Click the AD channel 1 to set using the mouse. Click the [Setup] button.

· Click the Enable.
· Select the Digital Value Range (-192 ~ 16191).
· Set the Output Type (Current).
· Input the Output Under Stop (Clear).
· Click the [OK] button.
Set the DA channel 2 using the same method.
However, set Voltage as the Select Output Type.

Click the [Write] button after checking the contents in the A/D D/A Module Setting window.
Click the [Read] button to check whether setting values are correct.
Click the [Status] button to check the current A/D D/A module status, and insert the D/A output temporarily.

572

CIMON-PLC

4.12.10 RTD Conversion Module
Select "Tools -> Option Module Setup -> RTD Module" menu.
If several RTD conversion modules are mounted, you can change the target card by specifying base and slot.

Example of Settings , 1"
When measuring the value through 2 seconds average operation after converting the temperature value to
0 ~ 160000, by connecting PT100 sensor to the RTD conversion module channel 1 and 2, which are
mounted on local base, slot #1.

Click the channel (1 and 2) to set while pressing down the Shift key. Click the [Setup] button.

· Select the RTD Type (PT100).
· Select the Digital Value Range (-192 – 16191 or 0 ~ 16000).
· Click Average and input the time (2).
· Click the [OK] button.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

573

Click the [Write] button after checking the contents in the RTD Module Setting window.
Click the [Read] button to check whether setting values are correct.
Click the [Status] button to check the current RTD module status, and set the scale.
Using the scale setting, you can figure out the digital conversion value at the intended temperature range.

Example of Settings, 2"
When setting the digital measurement value of the temperature 0
to 0 ~ 16000.

~ 200

at the RTD module channel #1

574

CIMON-PLC

· Click the [Module Status] button to display the "RTD Module Status" window.
· Select the channel (1) and click the [Set Scale] button.
· Select the Temp. Unit (

· Input "0" as the Temperature at 0.
· Input "200" as the Temperature at 16000.
· Click the [OK] button.

You can see Celsius and Fahrenheit value of each channel, as well as the digital conversion value in the "
RTD Module Status" window.

4.12.11 TC Conversion Module
Select "Tools -> Option Module Setup -> TC Module" menu.
If several TC conversion modules are mounted, you can change the target card by specifying base and slot.

Example of Settings, 1"
When measuring the value through 4 seconds average operation after converting the temperature value to
0 ~ 160000, by connecting K type sensor to the TC conversion module channel 1 and 2, which are
mounted on local base, slot #1.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

575

Click the channel (1 and 2) to set while pressing down the Shift key. Click the [Set Channel] button.

· Select the TC Type (K).
· Select the Digital Value Range (-192 – 16191 or 0 ~ 16000).
· Click Average and input the time (4).
· Click the [OK] button.

Click the [Write] button after checking the contents in the TC Module Setting window.
Click the [Read] button to check whether setting values are correct.
Click the [Status] button to check the current D/A module status, and set the scale.
Using the scale setting, you can figure out the digital conversion value at the intended temperature range.

576

CIMON-PLC

Example of Settings , 2"
When setting the digital measurement value of the temperature -100

~ 300

at the TC module channel

#1 to 0 ~ 16000.

Click the [Module Status] button to display the "TC Module Status" window.

· Select the channel (1) and click the [Set Scale] button.
· Select the Temp. Unit (

· Input "-100" as the Temperature at 0.
· Input "300" as the Temperature at 16000.
· Click the [OK] button.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

577

You can see Celsius and Fahrenheit value of each channel, as well as the digital conversion value in the
"TC Module Status" window.

4.12.12 High-speed Counter
Select "Tools -> Optional Module Setup -> High-speed Counter" menu.
If several high-speed counter modules are mounted, you can change the target card by specifying base and slot.

Example of Settings ,
When counting the input signal using the channel 1 of the high-speed counter mounted in local base, slot
#2, the input type should be "1 phase 1 multiplying" and the counter mode should be a "linear counter".?

578

CIMON-PLC

· Set the Counter Mode of the channel 1 as the linear counter.
· Input "1000" in the Preset. If the free set setting is required, the current counter value is replaced with
the preset setting value.
· Input "2000" in the Value No. 1.
· Input "3000" in the Value No. 2.
· Select "Not Count" in the Counter Function Setup field. Counting will be enables only when both
"Counter Allowing Command" and "Start Counter Function" are on.
· Select the Pulse Type – "1-Ph. Multiple of 1"
.
Click the [Write] button.
Click the [Read] button to check all settings are correct.
Click the [Status] button to check the current status of the high-speed counter.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

579

4.12.13 AD MUX Module
Go to “Special Module Setup” on the “Tools” menu and select “AD MUX Module”
In case there is more than one AD MUX Module, the user can set the base and slot number and select them as
desired modules. (For PLCS, “Base” should always be “Local” on the parameter) For detailed information please
refer to [PLCS AD MUX Module]

Example of Settings ,
This example is to Enable the channels 1,2,3,4 and configure the relay ON time as 500ms of the AD MUX
Module which is installed on the 0th slot of a local base.
1. Hold down the Ctrl key and select desired channels (1,2,3,4)

580

CIMON-PLC

2.Click “Channel Setup” button

Select the check box “Enable” for enabling the channels.
Input “5” for Relay ON Time (100ms)
Click [OK] button.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

581

3.Check the information in AD MUX Module Setup box and click “Write” button on the right-hand side.

4.Click "Read" button to make sure the setup information is correct.

4.13

PLC Simulator
User can monitor and control ladder program through PLC Simulator.

582

CIMON-PLC

· Simulator Features
· Simulator Screen Layout
· Simulator Settings
· CICON - PLC Simulator Manual

4.13.1 Simulator Features
Features
· It is possible to download and upload scan program.

· Online Mode
PLC Online Mode function is supported. Click [Here] for more information.
· All types of PLC available
XP Series / CP Series / BP / PLCS.
Simulator can run without changing CPU type,
· Expansion Base available
Simulator supports Expansion base of XP Series / CP Series and IO starting address settings.
Click [Here] for more information.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

583

· Simulator can run the same device with PLC
I/O Settings & Buffer memory Settings of Special card.
Click [Here] for more information.
· Remain settings of Expansion Base / Module
Once setting value of expansion base and module is saved, it remains in Simulator.
(You do not need to setup again)

Notice
· Before you install CICON(Ver.3.06), remove previous version.
Otherwise, Simulator may not work properly.
[Control Panel] -> [Add or Remove Programs] -> Remove CICON.
· The scan period of PLC Simulator depends on performance of PC.
In case of timer instruction which is affected by scan period, scan speed does not affect Simulator.
· PLC Simulator is the virtual PLC software which runs in PC
Simulator might be interrupted according to performance of PC and other circumstance.
· Simulator is only available to operate scan program.
Special program and Communication program are not available.
· PLC Simulator is a tool to simulate scan program.
Screen and functions of PLC Simulator

4.13.2 Simulator Screen Layout
Screen and functions of PLC Simulator
PLC Simulator Screen Layout
· Basic Screen
· Tool bar
· Module Information Window
· CPU Config
· PLC Mode
· Module Monitor
· Module Setting
· Status Information
· Warnings and Errors

584

CIMON-PLC

4.13.2.1 Basic Screen

Screen Layout
Screen Layout of Simulator.

1) Menu & Toolbar - All functions of Simulator are operated by Toolbar.
2) Module Info Windows - Local & Expansion Base and Slot information are indicated.
3) Work Space – Module Settings window is indicated.
4) Status windows - Description of function and status of Simulator are indicated.

· Menu Layout
- File : Exit
- View : Tool bar / Status / Language
- PLC Power : POWER ON / OFF
- Tool : CPU Config / PLC Mode / Module Monitor / Module Setting
- Window : Next Window / Cascade Type / Tile Type / Arrange Icon
- About : About Simulator...

4.13.2.2 Tool bar

Screen Layout
· Power Toolbar

CICON - PLC Loader Program

585

Power OFF : It is used to make PLC power off.
CPU Config

PLC Mode

Module Monitor

Module Setting

Power ON : It is used to make PLC power On and connect to CICON.
CPU Config

PLC Mode

Module Monitor

Module Setting

* When PLC Power turns OFF, downloaded program will be reset. You have to download
program again after Power Off.

· Basic Toolbar

CPU Config : It is used to set up CPU type when Power is OFF. Click [Here] for more information.
PLC Mode : It is used to set up PLC mode (Run/Stop) when Power is ON. Click [Here] for more
information.

· Module Toolbar

Module Monitor : It is used to open Module Monitor. (It works when Power is ON/OFF) Click [Here] for
more information.
Module Setting : It is used to set up Module. (It works only when Power is OFF) Click [Here] for more
information.

· Status Toolbar

586

CIMON-PLC

PLC Run : PLC Run mode.(It works only when Power is ON)
PLC Stop : PLC Stop mode.(It works only when Power is ON)

4.13.2.3 Module Information Window

Screen Layout
Module Info Windows indicates virtual PLC configuration.
Module Info Windows is similar in interface to Project Windows of CICON.

[Module Info Windows]
Module Info Windows indicates following.
1. CPU type
2. Local Base / Expansion Base information
3. Module settings per Slot
4. IO point Information
[Module Info Windows] is updated and indicates information automatically when [PLC Type] or [Module
Setting] is changed.

Monitor Function
· There are 4 ways to open Module Monitor.
- Double click module list at [Module Info Windows]
- Select module list at [Module Info Windows] and click [Module Monitor] icon at Toolbar.
- Select module list and Click right button of mouse -> [Monitor]

CICON - PLC Loader Program

- Select module list at [Module Info Windows] and click [Tool] -> [Module Monitor]

· There are 3 ways to open Module Setting. (Module Setting only works when Power is OFF)
- Select module list at [Module Info Windows] and click [Module Setting] icon at Toolbar.
- Select module list and Click right button of mouse -> [Module Set]
- Select module list at [Module Info Windows] and click [Tool] -> [Module Setting]

587

588

CIMON-PLC

4.13.2.4 CPU Config

Screen Layout
If CPU type is XP or CP(Except CP4) at [PLC Type], Base slot, expansion base and IO staring address can
be set up.
If CPU type is BP, expansion can be set up limitedly. In case of PLCS, you can only select CPU type(13 Slot
is fixed).
* [CPU Type] is fixed at CICON and cannot be changed in Simulator. In order to change CPU
type, go to CICON [File] -> [Project Properties]

1) CPU Type : [CPU Type] is fixed at CICON and cannot be changed in Simulator.
2) Expansion Setting : It is used to set up expansion base up to Max. 16Base.
CPU Type - CP4 : No Expansion Base
CPU Type - BP4 : Only Available to select number of expansion module.
CPU Type - PLCS : Expansion Setting is fixed.(CPU 1Slot + Exp. Set 12Slot) You can select CPU Type
(32MDT/16MDR)
3) Expansion Setting : "No." / "Exp. No." are indicated automatically.
- Slot Cnt : 3 / 4 / 5 / 8 / 10 / 12Slot can be selected.
- IO Starting Address: It is used to set up IO starting address of Expansion Base.(Write number in tens)
*When IO starting address is set up in Simulator, it must be same with "Base I/O address
Allocation" at [Reserved IO] in CICON.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

Screen Type
· CPU Type : XP Series

589

590

CIMON-PLC

· CPU Type : CP Series

CICON - PLC Loader Program

591

592

CIMON-PLC

· CPU Type : BP

CICON - PLC Loader Program

· CPU Type : PLCS

593

594

CIMON-PLC

4.13.2.5 PLC Mode

Screen Layout
· Stop Mode : Stop PLC operation.

Stop Mode in Toolbar

· Run Mode : Run PLC operation

Run Mode in Toolbar

4.13.2.6 Module Monitor

Screen Layout
[Module Monitor] is used to check IO signal and buffer memory value.
- I/O Module : I/O Monitor
- Special Module : I/O Monitor + Buffer Memory

CICON - PLC Loader Program

595

User can set up ON / OFF for I/O signal (Double click) and write 0~0xFFFF for Buffer memory.
*Buffer memory address is from 0~255. Refer to buffer memory table in Help for each modules.

Each CICON and PLC Simulator can check setting values one another.

Monitor Type
I/O points of Module Monitor is different according to Module Type.
Basic Module Monitor is as below pictures.
Input Module Monitor

596

CIMON-PLC

Output Module Monitor

CICON - PLC Loader Program

Special Card Monitor : AD 8Ch. (Voltage/Current)

597

598

CIMON-PLC

Special Card Monitor : DA 8Ch. (Voltage/Current)

CICON - PLC Loader Program

Special Card Monitor : TC 4Ch.

599

600

CIMON-PLC

Special Card Monitor : ADDA 2/2Ch. (Voltage/Current)

CICON - PLC Loader Program

Special Card Monitor : RTD 4Ch. (PT1000)

601

602

CIMON-PLC

Special Card Monitor : Thermistor 8Ch.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

Special Card Monitor : High Speed Counter 2Ch.

603

604

CIMON-PLC

Special Card Monitor : Positioning 2Ch.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

Special Card Monitor : Load Cell(2Ch.)

605

606

CIMON-PLC

4.13.2.7 Module Setting

Screen Layout
Module Setting is used to set up module.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

1) Current Set : Present module name
Click "Cancel" to close Module Setting without save module.

607

608

CIMON-PLC

2) Type : Select Module
All : It indicates all modules
Power / IO : It indicates power modules and I/O modules
3) I/O Type : Selected I/O type will be indicated in "Card Setting"
4) I/O Points : Selected I/O Points will be indicated in "Card Setting"
5) Available Modules : Available modules are displayed. Select one of modules and click "OK" to save
settings.
Present Module is highlighted in blue at Available Modules.
*The I/O of Special Module is fixed with 16 points.
*If you do not need to select module, select "No Card" in [Type]

· Notice
"Module Setting" is saved as file in below folder.
CICON [Tool] -> [CICON Options] -> [Location of Project Folder] -> "CICON_SIMULATOR" ->

This file affects Simulator operation. If you modify or remove, PLC Simulator may not work properly.
If users set up "PLC Type" or "Module Setting" and save it as file, users can get back saved Setting
value after changing settings.

4.13.2.8 Status Information

Screen Layout
Status Windows shows status of Simulator in real time.

· Communication Status

Communication Status

Connecting with CICON

Disconnecting with CICON

· Power and PLC Status

CICON - PLC Loader Program

Power and PLC Status

PLC Power OFF

PLC Power ON

STOP Mode

RUN Mode

· Present Time

4.13.2.9 Warnings and Errors

Screen Layout
There are some Warnings and Errors in Simulator as following.
When you click PLC OFF while Simulator is connecting to CICON, below message will appear.

When you click Exit in Simulator, below message will appear.

If you click [Tool] -> [Run PLC Simulator] while Simulator is running, below message will appear.

If you run Simulator with "CICON Simulator.exe" in Simulator folder, below message will appear.
(Do not click "CICON Simulator.exe" file)

609

610

CIMON-PLC

When you change language to English, below message will appear.

When you change language to Korean, below message will appear.

When you double click "No card" in [Module Info Windows], below message will appear.

If you click "Module Setting" without selecting module in "Module Info Windows", below message will
appear.
Select module first in "Module Info Windows" and click "Module Setting"

CICON - PLC Loader Program

611

If you do not write address number in tens at "IO Starting Address" in [PLC Type], below message will
appear.

If you write bigger number than Max. number at "IO Starting Address" in [PLC Type], below message will
appear.
Check device range in CICON HELP.

If you write smaller number than "IO Address allocation" of Prior expansion at "IO Starting Address" in [PLC
Type], below message will appear.

If you write bigger number than "IO Address allocation" of Next expansion at "IO Starting Address" in [PLC
Type], below message will appear.

612

CIMON-PLC

If you click "Module Setting" while "Module Monitor" is displayed, below message will appear.

If you click buffer memory in "Module Monitor" when PLC is OFF, below message will appear.

In case of access range of buffer memory in Module Monitor, below message will appear.
Range: 0 ~ 65535

If you select "Special Card" at Slot 0 in [Module Setting] when CPU is BP Type, below message will appear.
Only Power I/O is possible at Slot 0.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

613

If Module Setting is not saved properly, below message will appear.

4.13.3 Simulator Settings
In order to operate PLC Simulator properly, CPU Config. and Module Setting should be set up correctly.
Refer to below instruction.
PLC Simulator Setting Instruction
· CPU Config
· Module Setting

4.13.3.1 CPU Config

If you run PLC Simulator, Simulator monitor appear as below.
There is only CPU module in "Module Info Windows".
You should set up module, Expansion for simulator.

Simulator starts with PLC Power ON and PLC Stop mode.
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

614

CIMON-PLC

In order to set up [CPU Config], turn Off PLC Power.

*When PLC Power is off, download program will be reset. You should download program from
CICON to Simulator.

When PLC Power is off, below message will appear.

Click [CPU Config] to set up Module and Expansion.

Select Expansion number, Slot number, and IO Starting Address.

· Expansion Setting : There are Max. 16 Base expansion.
If Expansion number is selected, Slot 3 is a basic setting.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

615

· Slot number : 3Slot ~ 12Slot

· IO Starting Address : IO Starting Address can be set up from Expansion Base #1.
Write IO Starting Address in tens.
IO Starting Address should be bigger than prior expansion and small than next expansion as below
picture.

616

CIMON-PLC

(Example of IO Starting Address)

After click OK, updated module and expansion information are indicated in [Module Info Windows]
- Local Base : 3Slot (IO Start Address : None)
- Expansion Base #1 : 3Slot (IO Start Address : 100)
- Expansion Base #2 : 3Slot (IO Start Address : 250)
- Expansion Base #3 : 3Slot (IO Start Address : 400)

4.13.3.2 Module Setting

IO Module Setting
In order to set up [Module Setting], Turn PLC Power Off.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

*When PLC Power is off, download program will be reset. You should download program from
CICON to Simulator.
Click one of slots in [Module Info Windows]
Example) Local Base - Slot 2

Click [Tool] -> [Module Setting]

[Module Setting]

617

618

CIMON-PLC

Select "Power / IO" at Type

CICON - PLC Loader Program

I/O Type, I/O Points and Module Setting are activated.

Click "In.Output" and "16points".
Click In.Output_16P(TTL/TrSink) and "OK" to save it.

619

620

CIMON-PLC

There is a selected module in [Module Info Windows]

Special Module Setting
Click one of slots in [Module Info Windows]
Example) Expansion #1 Base - Slot 1

CICON - PLC Loader Program

Click [Tool] -> [Module Setting]

[Module Setting]

Select "Special Card" at [Type].

621

622

CIMON-PLC

Module Setting is activated.
* In case of Special card, I/O 16point is fixed.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

Select DA 4Ch (Voltage/Current) and "OK" to save it.

623

624

CIMON-PLC

There is a selected module in [Module Info Windows]

4.13.4 CICON - PLC Simulator Manual
CICON - PLC Simulator Manual
· Run PLC Simulator
· Connect
· Scan Program Download
· Run Edit
· Online Mode

4.13.4.1 Run Plc Simulator

CICON -> [Tool] -> [Communication Setup], select "PLC Simulator"

CICON - PLC Loader Program

625

In order to start Simulator, go to CICON -> [Tool] -> [Run PLC Simulator]

If you click [Run PLC Simulator] without PLC Simulator setting in [Communication Setup], below message
will appear.

626

CIMON-PLC

Another way to operate PLC Simulator, go to CICON -> [Online] -> [Link+Download+Monitor] or [Connect]

If you click "YES", PLC Simulator will be operated.

4.13.4.2 Connect

CICON [Online] -> [Connect]
If "PLC Simulator" is selected in [Communication Setup], PLC Simulator will be operated when you click
[Connect].

After Simulator operated, there is module information at "Module Info Windows"

CICON - PLC Loader Program

627

There is a message "Connection established with CPU" which means CICON and Simulator are connected.

4.13.4.3 Scan Program Download

After PLC Simulator operated, download scan program from CICON to Simulator.

Click [Online] -> [Download]

628

CIMON-PLC

[Downloading]

Click "YES" to finish download.

You can monitor scan program as below when PLC Simulator is connected to CICON and PLC is Run
mode.

4.13.4.4 Run Edit

Open Scan program in CICON.
- You can monitor scan program when PLC Simulator is connected to CICON and PLC is Run mode.
Online Editing is possible only if Monitor is ON as below picture (See the red box)

CICON - PLC Loader Program

Click [Online Edit Start/Cancel] icon as below picture. (See the red box)
When [Online Edit Start/Cancel] is selected, editing tool is activated. (See the yellow box)

Write value you want to edit.

629

630

CIMON-PLC

After finishing editing, click [Online-Edit Download] icon to download it to PLC. (See the red box)

Changed scan program is downloaded as below picture.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

4.13.4.5 Online Mode

As PLC Simulator is connected to CICON, some Online menu is activated as below.

1) Link + Download + Monitor : It is used to connect to PLC Simulator and download scan program
together.

631

632

CIMON-PLC

2) Connect / Disconnect : It is used to connect or disconnect to PLC Simulator.
3) Download... : It is used to download scan program to PLC Simulator.
4) Upload... : It is used to upload scan program from PLC Simulator to CICON
5) Memory Monitor : It is used to open Memory Monitor.
6) Start Program Monitor / Stop Program Monitor : It is used to start or top monitoring scan program.
7) Compare / Check Program.... : It is used to compare scan program between CICON and PLC Simulator.
If scan program is not matched each others, proper monitoring is not possible.
8) Clear Memory

- Erase Program: It is used to remove scan programs in PLC Simulator.
- Clear All Data from PLC...: It is used to remove all data in PLC Simulator. (Except Module setting
value)
9) Flash Memory : Not supported
10) Change Mode : It is used to change PLC mode in PLC Simulator.

- RUN: PLC Run
- STOP: PLC Stop
- PAUSE: Not supported
11) BP Latch : Not supported
12) Get Card Property : It is used to renew module information.
13) PLC Status... : It is used to show PLC Status.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

4.14

633

Downloader
Downloader lets program files be downloaded to the PLC directly without using CICON.
After completing and compiling a program, a special file for Download Utility can be created through the
"Export Project" function in CICON.
Downloader .exe file can be found through "Start" -> "All Programs" -> "CIMON"
By using Downloader, PLC programs can be downloaded onto the PLC without exposing the contents.

634

CIMON-PLC

· Types of Downloader
· Downloader Screen Configuration
· Creating Downloadable Project File
· Downloading in PLC Downloader

4.14.1 Types of Downloader
CIMON Download Utility has two different programs: CICON Downloader and PLC Downloader.
Essentially, they have the same functions and features except that CICON Downloader relies on the CICON
Software while the PLC Downloader is a separate program that can be utilized without CICON.

CICON Downloader
When installing CICON, CICON Downloader is automatically installed and vice-versa for uninstallation.
CICON Downloader can be found in [CICON Downloader] folder inside of CICON folder.
(Ex. C:\Program Files\CICON\CICON Downloader\CICON Downloader)
OR
CICON Downloader can be executed by "Start" -> "All Programs" -> "CIMON" -> "CICON Downloader"

CICON - PLC Loader Program

635

CICON Downloader cannot be executed only by having the "CICON Downloader.exe" as this program
is dependent on the CICON Software.
In this case, CICON software is used for PLC connection.

PLC Downloader
PLC Downloader needs to be downloaded and installed separately. This program is not included in CICON.
PLC Downloader can be found in [PLC Downloader] folder.
(Ex. C:\Program Files\PLC Downloader)
OR
PLC Downloader can be executed by "Start" -> "All Programs" -> "CIMON" -> "PLC Downloader"
PLC Downloader is an independent software which does not require CICON.
With the PLC Downloader, user can connect and download project files to PLC’s without requiring
other software.
A USB Driver is included in the installation folder so the user can easily install the USB Driver and connect
to the PLC easily.
Example of using PLC Downloader:
1. The integrator finishes a project and converts the file to .DWN file by using "Export Project" function in
CICON.
2. The integrator sends the .DWN project file to the user.
3. The user receives .DWN project file and downloads the project file to the PLC by using PLC Downloader
without knowing the contents of the file.

4.14.2 Downloader Screen Configuration
Screen Layout

636

CIMON-PLC

Screen Configuration
1. Search File: Choose the path of the project file that needs to be downloaded to the PLC.
- The file extension should be ".DWN" format - ".DWN" format files can be created in CICON.
- Please refer to [Creating Downloadable Project File] for detailed information.
2. Connection Setup: Choose a connection method. (same as Communication Setup in CICON)
- Connection types are "Serial Port" / "Dial-up Modem" / "Leased Line Modem" / "Ethernet" / "PLC
Simulator" / "USB Port"
- If the communication method is not correct, the program automatically terminates after an attempt to
connect.
*While attempting to connect, if the connection type is not selected correctly, there might be a delay
period - combination of "Timeout" time and connection time.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

3. Project information: indicates project information of a chosen download file (".DWN")
- Project Name / Project Size / CPU Type / number of registered program files.
- Please check this information before downloading.
4. Program Information: Shows program information of a selected program in the project.
- Program ID (PID) / Program Name / Program Type.
5. Help: Opens PLC Downloader manual.
6. Initialize: Deletes all the selected information.
7. Download: Downloads the project files to the PLC based on the selected settings.
- Please refer to [Downloading in PLC Downloader] for detailed information.

4.14.3 Creating Downloadable Project File
Open CICON to create a new project by selecting "New Project" from the "File" menu.

637

638

CIMON-PLC

CICON - PLC Loader Program

After creating the new project, please register a scan program.
At least one scan program is needed for compiling.

639

640

CIMON-PLC

CICON - PLC Loader Program

Compile the selected project by selecting "Compile All + Link" on the "Tool" menu.

641

642

CIMON-PLC

"Compile All + Link + Export" menu has been added.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

643

After compiling and linking has been successfully completed, a message will show as below.
If there is an error or compiling has failed, an error message would show in the same box as below. In that
case, please check the error and respond accordingly.

Select "Tool" -> "Export Project"

644

CIMON-PLC

"Export Project" function converts already compiled files to a .DWN downloader file. If compiling has failed
or did not compile at all, "Export Project" function cannot be used.
If there has been a change in parameter or program after compiling a project, another compilation is
needed.

After clicking "Export Project", a window pops up and asks the location where the .DWN file would be saved.
Please choose the location and select "Save" button.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

645

If "Export Project" has been successfully completed, a message appears in the message window as below.

"Tool" -> "Run CICON Downloader" menu has been added.

646

CIMON-PLC

4.14.4 Downloading in PLC Downloader
Screen as below appears after starting "Downloader"

CICON - PLC Loader Program

"Search File" button is used to search for a .DWN project file.
Please choose a project file and click "Open"
.DWN project file needs to be already created by "Export Project" from CICON
Please refer to [Creating Downloadable Project File] for detailed information.

Project information gets shown in the Project Information field.
Please check if the project information is correct.
CPU Type cannot be changed and is fixed to what the user selected in CICON.
If the project’s CPU Type and the actual CPU Type does not match, connection will automatically fail.

647

648

CIMON-PLC

After checking the Project information, please click "Connection Setup" button to select communication type.
All the parameters should be changed according to the actual communication settings of the PLC in the
window shown below.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

After the communication setup is completed, click "OK".
Selected "Connection Setup" information appears in the window as below.

649

650

CIMON-PLC

After "Search File" and "Connection Setup" configuration is completed, Start Downloading by clicking
"Download".
If download file is not selected or connection setup is not completed, an error message pops up as below.

Once download is started, the software checks the CPU mode and requests the user to change the mode to
a correct mode in a pop-up window shown as below.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

651

After clicking "Yes", download starts once the CPU mode is in the correct status. During the download, a
message "Downloading... Wait a moment please" appears.
Depending on how big the project file is, it can take from 10 seconds up to 2 minutes.

652

CIMON-PLC

An error message shows when the cable disconnects or the CPU turns off while downloading. Please
proceed with caution since this can cause a malfunction of PLC.

After the download is completed, a message pops up as below. Please click "OK" to complete the
download.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

Lastly, a window pops up asking to change the CPU mode to "Run".

653

654

4.15

CIMON-PLC

Appendix
Appendix :

· Shortcut Key
· Loader Cabling Diagram
· Installation of USB Device Driver

4.15.1 Shortcut Key
Edit menu
Shortcut Key

Note

Ctrl + N

New File

Ctrl + O

Open File

Ctrl + P

Print File

Ctrl + S

Save File

Ctrl + Z

Undo

Ctrl + Y

Redo

Ctrl + F

Find

Ctrl + Shift + F

Find All

Find Next

Shift + F3

Find Previous

Ctrl + H

Find Replace

Ctrl + G

Move

LD Edit Window
Shortcut Key

Note

Input a horizontal Line

Shift + F2

Input a vertical Line

Not Input

Input contact "a"

Input contact "b"

Input rising pulse contact

Input declining pulse contact

Input coil

F10

Input command
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

F11

Input counter command

F12

Input comment

Ctrl + L

Insert Line Before

Ctrl + R

Delete Line

Ctrl + Enter

Insert Line Next

Space

Push One Column

Del

Delete

Ctrl + Home

Move home

Ctrl + Direction Button

Draws a connection line

655

4.15.2 Loader Cabling Diagram

Description on DSUB-9 pins

Description on RJ-11 pins

2: Rx

2: Tx

3: Tx

3: Rx

5: SG

4.15.3 Installation of USB Device Driver
Windows XP : USB device driver is installed automatically when you run CICON after CICON
installation.

Windows 7 : Install USB device driver as following steps :
1. Turn PLC power on and connect PLC to PC with USB cable. Select [Control Panel] -> [Devices and
Printers]
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

656

CIMON-PLC

2. There is CIMON PLC in [Unspecified]. Click the right button of the mouse with cursor on the
[CIMON PLC] and select [Properties]

CICON - PLC Loader Program

657

658

CIMON-PLC

3. Select [Hardware] tap and click [Properties]

4. Click [Change settings]

CICON - PLC Loader Program

5. Select [Driver] tap and click [Update Driver]

659

660

CIMON-PLC

6. Select [Browse my computer for driver software] at [Update Driver Software – CIMON PLC]

CICON - PLC Loader Program

7. Select [Usb_Driver] folder where CICON is installed and click [Next]
* In case of Windows 7 64Bit, Select [Usb_Driver] -> [OS_64Bit] folder.

661

662

CIMON-PLC

8. Select [Install this driver software anyway] at [Windows Security]

9. The Driver Software is being installed.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

10. If USB Driver is installed successfully, [KDT PLC USB Loader CICON] appears.
Click [Close] to finish installation.

663

664

CIMON-PLC

11. If USB Driver is installed successfully, [KDT PLC USB Loader CICON] appears under [Universal
Serial Bus Controllers]

CICON - PLC Loader Program

665

666

CIMON-PLC

12. CICON can connect PLC through USB cable.

CICON - PLC Loader Program

667

Top Level Intro
This page is printed before a new
top-level chapter starts

Part

PLC Common

669

PLC Common
CIMON-PLC CPU :
· Compact and high performance PLC (supports redundant CPU configuration
· CPU embedded PID function (max. 32 loops)
· High compatibility between CPU series : uses the same programming tool (CICON)
· Provides the programming tool (CICON) free.
· Supports floating point instructions. (XP CPU)

Contents :

5.1

· Instruction List - Alphabetic

· Form of Instructions

· Instruction List - Type

· Basic Instruction

· CPU Error Code Table

· Application Instruction

· Internal Flag(Relay) F

· Index Register

Index Register
Index register(R) indicates device indirectly using with device. Index register has 16 ranges for R0 ~ R15,
each range could be inputted by
-32768~32767.
1. The restrictions on using index register
Index register could be only used about application Instructions. Basic Instructions couldn’t use with
it.
Also, device S(Step Relay), T(Timer), C(counter) couldn’t use index register.
2. Action of index register.

Using at the word device.
The value of indicated index is working as word unit.
Example

Description

670

CIMON-PLC

The value of R0 is 3.When the state of
M00 is ON, the value of D10 from MOV
command is to be D(0+R0), not to be
D0. So, the moved value to D10 is the
value of D03 by using MOV command.

Using word commands from bit device.
It works as word unit by catching rest of indicated value that is divided by 16.
Example

Description

R0 value is 100. When the state of M00
is ON, the value of D10 from MOV
command is to be M(00+60). The value
is the quotient of 100 divided by 16 that
is expressed by word unit. So, the
moved value to D10 is the word value
of M60 by using MOV command.

Using bit commands from bit device.
The value of indicated index is working as bit unit.
Example

Description
RO is 7, R1 is 3. When the state of M00
is ON, 3 bits moves to M(20+3) from
M(00+7) by using MOV command.
So, 3 bits move to M23 from M07.

Commands and operands for acting bit device.
The third operand of TEST, TESTP, DTEST, DTESTP
The third operand of DUTY
The first and second operand of BITMOVE, BITMOVP

PLC Common

5.2

671

Instruction List - Type
IN THIS TOPIC :
Contact

Arithmetic
(DWORD)

Rotation (DWORD)

BIT

User Clock

Connection

Arithmetic (BCD)

Rotation (DWORD,
Carry)

TIME

Table

Output

Arithmetic (BCD,
DWORD)

Shift

Timer

Redundant System

Master Control

Arithmetic (Floating
decimal point)

Shift (BIT)

Counter

Scan program
Enable / Disable

Jump

INC / DEC

Shift (WORD)

Read / Write

Occur random
number

Call

Complement

Conversion (BIN ->
BCD)

Communication

Scale

Interrupt

MIN / MAX

Conversion (BCD ->
BIN)

Communication
(SPC Program)

etc

Loop

Transmit Data

Conversion (BIN ->
ASCII)

Watch Dog Tmer

[****]

END

Exchange Data

Conversion (ASCII ->
BIN)

Carry

Compare

Logical

Conversion (BCD ->
ASCII)

Refresh

Compare (DWORD)

Logical (DWORD)

Conversion (Floating
decimal point, XP)

PID

Compare (Block)

Logical (Block)

Decode / Encode

Position (CP, XP)

Compare (Floating

Rotation

7 Segment

Trigonometric (XP
Series)

Rotation (Carry)

Union / Disunion

Exponent, Logarithm
(XP)

decimal point)
Arithmetic

Contact
Instruction Type of Input

Note

LD (S)

Takes ON/OFF Data For a Contact Of One Circuit AS Operation
Result.

LDI

LDI (S)

Takes ON/OFF Data For b Contact Of One Circuit As Operation
Result.

LDP

LDP (S)

If Input Condition Is ON From OFF, Sets For One Scan.

LDF

LDF (S)

If Input Condition Is OFF From ON, Sets For One Scan.

AND

AND (S)

AND-Operates Contact a Of The Assigned Contact And
Connected Contants In Series, And Takes The Result As
Operation Result.

ANDI

ANDI (S)

AND-Operates Contact b Of The assigned Contact And The
Connected Contact In Series, Takes The Result As Operation
Result.

ANDF

ANDF (S)

If Input Condition To Contact To Detect Connection In Series Is
Off From On, Device S Is Set For One Scan.

672

CIMON-PLC

ANDP

ANDP (S)

If Input Condition To Contact To Detect Connection In Series Is
On From Off, Device S Is Set For One Scan.

OR (S)

OR-Operates a Contact Of The Assigned Contact And The
Connected Contact In Parallel And Takes The Result As
Operation Result.

ORI

ORI (S)

OR-Operates b Contact Of the Assigned Contact And The
Connected Contact In Parallel, And Takes The Result As
Operation Result.

ORP

ORP (S)

If Input Condition Of Connection In Parallel Contact Is OFF From
ON, Sets For One Scan.

ORF

ORF (S)

If Input Condition Of Connection In Parallel Contact Is OFF From
ON, Sets For One Scan.

INV

Inverts The Left Circuit, A Contact Circuit To B Contact Circuit
And B Contact Circuit To A Contact Circuit.

Connection
Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

ANB

AND-Operates Blocks And Takes The Result As Operation Result.

ORB

OR-Operates Blocks And Takes The result As Operation Result.

MPS

It IS Used To Branch At First. Stores Operation Result In Memory.

MRD

It Is Used To Relay Branching. Reads The Stored State From
Memory And Operates The Result.

MPP

It Is Used to End Branching. Reads The Stored State From
Memory And Operates The Result.

Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

OUT

OUT (D)

Outputs Operation Result To The Assigned Contact.

SET

SET (D)

If Input Condition Is ON, Keeps Output Contact In ON State.
Though The Input Is OFF, Keeps Setting Output.

PLS

PLS (D)

If INput Condition IS ON From OFF, Sets The Assigned Contact
For One Scan. Otherwise, Resets.

PLF

PLF (D)

If Input Condition Is OFF From ON, Sets The Assigned Contact
For One Scan. Otherwise, Resets.

Output

Master Control
Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

PLC Common

673

MC (n)

If Input Of MC Is ON, Operates Up To Same MCR. If Input
Conditon Is OFF, Does Not Operates.

MCR

MCR (n)

If Input Of MC Is ON, Operates Up To Same MCR. If Input
Conditon Is OFF, Does Not Operates.

Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

JME

JME (n)

If Input Of JMP n Instruction Is On, Jumps Next To JME n And
Does Not Process All The Instructions Up To JME n.

JMP

JMP (n)

If Input Of JMP n Instruction Is On, Jumps Next To JME n And
Does Not Process All The Instructions Up To JME n.

JMPP

JMPP (n)

If JMPP n Instruction Input Is On, Jumps Next To JME n And Does
Not Process All The Instructions Up To JME n.

Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

CALL

CALL (n)

If Input Condition Is ON While Processing Program, Processes
The Program Between The SBRT n To The RET According To
The CALL n.

CALLP

CALLP (n)

If Input Condition Is ON While Processing Program, Processes
The Program Between The SBRT n To The RET According To
The CALL n.

ECALL

ECALL (Progam ID) (n)

Calls Sub-Routine From Other Program File. (Pn-Point Number Of
Sub-Routine)

ECALLP

ECALLP (Program ID)
(n)

Calls Sub-Routine From Other Program File. (Pn-Point Number Of
Sub-Routine)

SBRT

SBRT (n)

If Input Condition Is ON While Running Program, Runs The
Program Between SBRT n And RET Accoding To CALL n.

RET

If Input Condition Is ON While Running Program, Runs The
Program Between SBRT n And RET Accoding To CALL n.

Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

EI (n)

Operates Time Driven Interrrupt Assigned To n.

DI (n)

Stops Operating Time Driven Interrupt Assigned To n.

GEI

Operates Time Driven Interrrupt In Entire Program.

GDI

Stops Operating Time Driven Interrrupt In Entire Program.

Jump

Call

Interrupt

674

CIMON-PLC

IRET

Shows THe End OF Interrupt Program.

Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

FOR

FOR (n)

Runs The Step Next To NEXT Instruction After Has Processed
Between FOR And NEXT At n Times.

BREAK

Comes Out From The FOR ~ NEXT Instruction.

BREAKP

Comes Out From The FOR ~ NEXT Instruction.

Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

END

It Is The Instruction To Inform Ending Main Routine Program. In
Case Jump Instruction Prior To It Is Operated, It Is Not Operated.

CEND

If input condition is turned on, ends main routine program.

CENDP

If input condition is turned on, ends main routine program.

PEND

It Means End Of Program And Is Put On The Last Part.

STOP

To Stop Operation At The Time When Users Want, Converts To
Program Mode After Finishing The Scan In Progress.

INITEND

Ends Initialization Program ANd Runs Scan Program.

Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

LD<

LD< (S1) (S2)

If Data In S1 Is Less Than Data In S2, Sets Result Of The Current
Operation.

LD<=

LD<= (S1) (S2)

If Data In S1 Is Less Than Or Equal To Data In S2, Sets Result Of
The Current Operation.

LD<>

LD<> (S1) (S2)

If Data In S1 Is Not Equal To Data In S2, Sets Result Of The
Current Operation.

LD=

LD= (S1) (S2)

If Data In S1 Is Equal To Data In S2, Sets Result Of The Current
Operation.

LD>

LD> (S1) (S2)

If Data In S1 Is Greater Than Data In S2, Sets Result Of The
Current Operation.

LD>=

LD>= (S1) (S2)

If Data In S1 Is Greater Than Or Equal To Data In S2, Sets Result
Of The Current Operation.

Loop

END

Compare

PLC Common

675

AND<

AND< (S1) (S2)

If Data S1 Is Less Than Data S2, ON. If Greater Than Or Equal
To, OFF. AND-Operates The Result And Result Of The Current
Operation.

AND<=

AND<= (S1) (S2)

If Data S1 Is Less Than Or Equal To Data S2, ON. If Greater
Than, OFF. AND-Operates The Result And Result Of The Current
Operation.

AND<>

AND<> (S1) (S2)

If Data S1 And Data S2 Are Not Equal, ON. If Equal, OFF. ANDOperates The Result And Result Of The Current Operation.

AND=

AND= (S1) (S2)

If Data S1 And Data S2 Are Equal, ON. If TNot Equal, OFF. ANDOperates The Result And Result Of The Current Operation.

AND>

AND> (S1) (S2)

If Data S1 Is Greater Than Data S2, ON. If Less Than Or Equal
To, OFF. AND-Operates The Result And Result Of The Current
Operation.

AND>=

AND>= (S1) (S2)

If Data S1 Is Greater Than Or Equal To Data S2, ON. If Less
Than, OFF. AND-Operates The Result And Result Of The Current
Operation.

OR<

OR< (S1) (S2)

If Data In S1 Is Less Than Data In S2, Sets.If Greater Than Or
Equal To, Resets. OR-Operates The Result And Result Of The
Current Operation.

OR<=

OR<= (S1) (S2)

If Data In S1 Is Less Than Or Equal To Data In S2, Sets. If
Greater Than, Resets. OR-Operates The Result And Result Of
The Current Operation.

OR<>

OR<> (S1) (S2)

If Data In S1 Is Not Equal To Data In S2, Sets. If Equal To, Off.
OR-Operates The Result And Result Of The Current Operation.

OR=

OR= (S1) (S2)

If Data In S1 Is Equal To Data In S2, Sets. If Not Equal To,
Resets. OR-Operates The Result And Result Of The Current
Operation.

OR>

OR> (S1) (S2)

If Data In S1 Is Greater than Data In S2, Sets. If Less than Or
Equal To, Resets. OR-Operates The Result And Result Of The
Current Operation.

OR>=

OR>= (S1) (S2)

If Data InS1 Is Greater Than Or Equal To Data In S2, Sets. If Less
Than, Resets. OR-Operates The Result And Result Of The
Current Operation.

UCMP

UCMP (S1) (S2)

Compare (DWORD)
Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

LDD<

LDD< (S1) (S2)

If Data In S1 Is Less Than Data In S2, Sets Result Of The Current
Operation.

LDD<=

LDD<= (S1) (S2)

If Data In S1 Is Less Than Or Equal To Data In S2, Sets Result Of
The Current Operation.

LDD<>

LDD<> (S1) (S2)

If Data In S1 Is Not Equal To Data In S2, Sets Result Of The
Current Operation.

LDD=

LDD= (S1) (S2)

If Data In S1 Is Equal To Data In S2, Sets Result Of The Current
Operation.

LDD>

LDD> (S1) (S2)

If Data In S1 Is Greater Than Data In S2, Sets Result Of The
Current Operation.

LDD>=

LDD>= (S1) (S2)

If Data In S1 Is Greater Than Or Equal To Data In S2, Sets Result

676

CIMON-PLC

Of The Current Operation.
ANDD<

ANDD< (S1) (S2)

If Double-Word Data S1 Is Less Than Double-Word Data S2, ON.
If Greater Than Or Equal To, OFF. AND-Operates The Result And
Result Of The Current Operation.

ANDD<=

ANDD<= (S1) (S2)

ANDD<= (S1) (S2)" , "If Double-Word Data S1 Is Less Than Or
Equal To Double-Word Data S2, On. If Greater Than, OFF. ANDOperates The Result And Result Of The Current Operation.

ANDD<>

ANDD<> (S1) (S2)

ANDD<> (S1) (S2)" , "If Double-Word Data S1 Is Not Equal To
Double-Word Data S2, ON. If Equal To, OFF. AND-Operates The
Result And Result Of The Current Operation.

ANDD=

ANDD= (S1) (S2)

ANDD= (S1) (S2)" , "If Double-Word Data S1 Is Equal To DoubleWord Data S2, ON. If Not Equal to, OFF.AND-Operates The
Result And Result Of The Current Operation.

ANDD>

ANDD> (S1) (S2)

ANDD> (S1) (S2)" , "If Double-Word Data S1 Is Greater Than
Double-Word Data S2, ON. If Less Than, OFF. AND-Operates
The Result And Result Of The Current Operation.

ANDD>=

ANDD>= (S1) (S2)

ANDD>= (S1) (S2)" , "If Double-Word Data S1 Is Greater Than Or
Equal To Double-Word Data S2, ON. If Less Than, OFF. ANDOperates The Result And Result Of The Current Operation.

ORD<

ORD< (S1) (S2)

If Data In S1 Is Less Than Data In S2, Sets. If Greater Than Or
Equal To, Off. OR-Operates The Result And Result Of The
Current Operation.

ORD<=

ORD<= (S1) (S2)

If Data In S1 Is Less Than Or Equal To Data In S2, Sets. If
Greater Than, Resets. OR-Operates The Result And Result Of
The Current Operation.

ORD<>

ORD<> (S1) (S2)

If Data In S1 Is Not Equal To Data In S2, Sets. If Equal To, resets.
OR-Operates The Result And Result Of The Current Operation.

ORD=

ORD= (S1) (S2)

If Data In S1 Is Equal To Data In S2, Sets. If Not Equal To,
Resets. OR-Operates The Result And Result Of The Current
Operation.

ORD>

ORD> (S1) (S2)

If Data In S1 Is Greater Than Data In S2, Sets. If Less Than Or
Equal To, Resets. OR-Operates The Result And Result Of The
Current Operation.

ORD>=

ORD>= (S1) (S2)

If Data In S1 Is Greater Than Or Equal To Data In S2, Sets. If
Less Than, Resets. OR-Operates The Result And Result Of The
Current Operation.

Compare (Block)
Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

BK=

BK= (S1) (S2) (D) (B) (n)

Compare [n] of 16 bit data from the device designated by [S1] with
[n] of 16 bit data from the device designated by [S2] and stores
the results from bit [n] of the device designated by [D].
Compare 16 bit data with [n] of 16 bit data from the device
designated by [S2] and stores the results from bit [n] of the device
designated by [D].

BK=P

BK=P (S1) (S2) (D) (B)
(n)

PLC Common

677

designated by [D].
BK<>

BK<> (S1) (S2) (D) (B)
(n)

BK<>P

BK<>P (S1) (S2) (D) (B)
(n)

BK<

BK< (S1) (S2) (D) (B) (n)

BK> (S1) (S2) (D) (B) (n)

BK>P

BK>P (S1) (S2) (D) (B)
(n)

BK>=

BK>= (S1) (S2) (D) (B)
(n)

BK>=P

BK>=P (S1) (S2) (D) (B)
(n)

Compare [n] of 16 bit data from the device designated by [S1] with
[n] of 16 bit data from the device designated by [S2] and stores
the results from bit [n] of the device designated by [D].

678

CIMON-PLC

Compare 16 bit data with [n] of 16 bit data from the device
designated by [S2] and stores the results from bit [n] of the device
designated by [D].

Compare (Floating decimal point)
Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

LDE<

LDD< (S1) (S2)

If Float Data In S1 Is Less Than Float Data In S2, Sets Result Of
The Current Operation.

LDE<=

LDD<= (S1) (S2)

If Float Data In S1 Is Less Than Or Equal To Float Data In S2,
Sets Result Of The Current Operation.

LDE<>

LDD<> (S1) (S2)

If Float Data In S1 Is Not Equal To Float Data In S2, Sets Result
Of The Current Operation.

LDE=

LDD= (S1) (S2)

If Float Data In S1 Is Equal To Float Data In S2, Sets Result Of
The Current Operation.

LDE>

LDD> (S1) (S2)

If Float Data In S1 Is Greater Than Float Data In S2, Sets Result
Of The Current Operation.

LDE>=

LDD>= (S1) (S2)

If Float Data In S1 Is Greater Than Or Equal To Float Data In S2,
Sets Result Of The Current Operation.

ANDE<

ANDD< (S1) (S2)

If Float Data In S1 Is Less Than Float Data In S2, Sets Result Of
The Current Operation.

ANDE<=

ANDD<= (S1) (S2)

If Float Data In S1 Is Less Than Or Equal To Float Data In S2,
Sets Result Of The Current Operation.

ANDE<>

ANDD<> (S1) (S2)

If Float Data In S1 Is Not Equal To Float Data In S2, Sets Result
Of The Current Operation.

ANDE=

ANDD= (S1) (S2)

If Float Data In S1 Is Equal To Float Data In S2, Sets Result Of
The Current Operation.

ANDE>

ANDD> (S1) (S2)

If Float Data In S1 Is Greater Than Float Data In S2, Sets Result
Of The Current Operation.

ANDE>=

ANDD>= (S1) (S2)

If Float Data In S1 Is Greater Than Or Equal To Float Data In S2,
Sets Result Of The Current Operation.

ORE<

ORD< (S1) (S2)

If Float Data In S1 Is Less Than Float Data In S2, Sets Result Of
The Current Operation.

ORE<=

ORD<= (S1) (S2)

f Float Data In S1 Is Less Than Or Equal To Float Data In S2,
Sets Result Of The Current Operation.

ORE<>

ORD<> (S1) (S2)

If Float Data In S1 Is Not Equal To Float Data In S2, Sets Result
Of The Current Operation.

ORE=

ORD= (S1) (S2)

If Float Data In S1 Is Equal To Float Data In S2, Sets Result Of
The Current Operation.

ORE>

ORD> (S1) (S2)

If Float Data In S1 Is Greater Than Float Data In S2, Sets Result
Of The Current Operation.

ORE>=

ORD>= (S1) (S2)

If Float Data In S1 Is Greater Than Or Equal To Float Data In S2,
Sets Result Of The Current Operation.

Arithmetic

PLC Common

679

Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

ADD

ADD (S1) (S2) (D)

Adds Data S1 To Data S2, And Stores The Result In Device D.

ADDP

ADDP (S1) (S2) (D)

Adds Data S1 To Data S2, And Stores The Result In Device D.

SUB

SUB (S1) (S2) (D)

Subtracts Data In S2 From Data In S1 And Stores The Result In
Device D.

SUBP

SUBP (S1) (S2) (D)

Subtracts Data In S2 From Data In S1 And Stores The Result In
Device D.

MUL

MUL (S1) (S2) (D)

Multiplies Data In S1 By Data In S2 And Stores The Result In D.

MULP

MULP (S1) (S2) (D)

Multiplies Data In S1 By Data In S2 And Stores The Result In D.

DIV

DIV (S1) (S2) (D)

Divides Data In S1 By Data In S2 And Stores The Resutl In
Device D.

DIVP

DIVP (S1) (S2) (D)

Divides Data In S1 By Data In S2 And Stores The Resutl In
Device D.

WMUL

WMUL (S1) (S2) (D)

Multiplies BIN 32-bit data designated by S1, S1+1 and BIN 32-bit
data designated by S2, S2+1 and stores the result in the device
designated by D, D+1.

WMULP

WMULP (S1) (S2) (D)

Multiplies BIN 32-bit data designated by S1, S1+1 and BIN 32-bit
data designated by S2, S2+1 and stores the result in the device
designated by D, D+1.

WDIV

WDIV (S1) (S2) (D)

This is used to divide the double data in the device assigned to
S1, S1+1 by the DOUBLE data in the device assigned to S2, S2
+1 storing the quotient of the result in the device assigned to D

WDIVP

WDIVP (S1) (S2) (D)

This is used to divide the double data in the device assigned to
S1, S1+1 by the DOUBLE data in the device assigned to S2, S2
+1 storing the quotient of the result in the device assigned to D

WSUM

WSUM (S) (D) (n)

Summed up all 16bit binary data for n words from the device
designated at S, and stored it in the device designated at D

WSUMP

WSUMP (S) (D) (n)

Summed up all 16bit binary data for n words from the device
designated at S, and stored it in the device designated at D

Arithmetic (DWORD)
Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

DADD

DADD (S1) (S2) (D)

Adds Double- Word Data In S2 To Double-Word Data In S1 And
Stores The Result In Device D.

DADDP

DADDP (S1) (S2) (D)

Adds Double- Word Data In S2 To Double-Word Data In S1 And
Stores The Result In Device D.

DSUB

DSUB (S1) (S2) (D)

Subtract Double- Word Data In S2 From Double-Word Data In S1
And Stores The result In D.

DSUBP

DSUBP (S1) (S2) (D)

Subtract Double- Word Data In S2 From Double-Word Data In S1
And Stores The result In D.

DMUL

DMUL (S1) (S2) (D)

Multiplies Double-Word Data In S1 By Double-Word Data In S2
And Stores The Result In D.

DMULP

DMULP (S1) (S2) (D)

Multiplies Double-Word Data In S1 By Double-Word Data In S2
And Stores The Result In D.

680

CIMON-PLC

DDIV

DDIV (S1) (S2) (D)

Divides Double-Word Data In S1 By Double-Word Data In S2 And
Stores The Result In Device D.

DDIVP

DDIVP (S1) (S2) (D)

Divides Double-Word Data In S1 By Double-Word Data In S2 And
Stores The Result In Device D.

DWMUL

WMUL (S1) (S2) (D)

Multiplies BIN 32-bit data designated by S1, S1+1 and BIN 32-bit
data designated by S2, S2+1 and stores the result in the device
designated by D, D+1.

DWMULP WMULP (S1) (S2) (D)

Multiplies BIN 32-bit data designated by S1, S1+1 and BIN 32-bit
data designated by S2, S2+1 and stores the result in the device
designated by D, D+1.

DWDIV

WDIV (S1) (S2) (D)

This is used to divide the double data in the device assigned to
S1, S1+1 by the DOUBLE data in the device assigned to S2, S2
+1 storing the quotient of the result in the device assigned to D

DWDIVP

WDIVP (S1) (S2) (D)

This is used to divide the double data in the device assigned to
S1, S1+1 by the DOUBLE data in the device assigned to S2, S2
+1 storing the quotient of the result in the device assigned to D

Arithmetic (BCD)
Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

BADD

BADD (S1) (S2) (D)

Adds 4 Digits BCD Data In S1 To 4 Digits BCD Data In S2, And
Stores The Result In Device D.

BADDP

BADDP (S1) (S2) (D)

Adds 4 Digits BCD Data In S1 To 4 Digits BCD Data In S2, And
Stores The Result In Device D.

BSUB

BSUB (S1) (S2) (D)

Subtracts 4 Digits BCD Data In S2 From 4 Digits BCD Data In S1
And Stores The Result In Device D.

BSUBP

BSUBP (S1) (S2) (D)

Subtracts 4 Digits BCD Data In S2 From 4 Digits BCD Data In S1
And Stores The Result In Device D.

BMUL

BMUL (S1) (S2) (D)

Mutiplies 4 Digits BCD Data In S1 By 4 Digits BCD Data In S2.

BMULP

BMULP (S1) (S2) (D)

Mutiplies 4 Digits BCD Data In S1 By 4 Digits BCD Data In S2.

BDIV

BDIV (S1) (S2) (D)

Divides 4 Digits BCD Data In S1 By 4 Digits BCD Data In S2 And
Stores The Result In Device D.

BDIVP

BDIVP (S1) (S2) (D)

Divides 4 Digits BCD Data In S1 By 4 Digits BCD Data In S2 And
Stores The Result In Device D.

Arithmetic (BCD, DWORD)
Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

DBADD

DBADD (S1) (S2) (D)

Adds 4 Digits BCD Double-Word Data In S2 To 4 Digits BCD
Double-Word Data In S1 And Stores The Result In Device D.

DBADDP

DBADDP (S1) (S2) (D)

Adds 4 Digits BCD Double-Word Data In S2 To 4 Digits BCD
Double-Word Data In S1 And Stores The Result In Device D.

DBSUB

DBSUB (S1) (S2) (D)

Subtracts 8 Digits BCD Data In S2 From 8 Digits BCD Data In S1.

DBSUBP

DBSUBP (S1) (S2) (D)

Subtracts 8 Digits BCD Data In S2 From 8 Digits BCD Data In S1.

PLC Common

681

DBMUL

DBMUL (S1) (S2) (D)

Multiplies 8 Digits BCD Data In S1 By 8 Digits BCD Data In S2.

DBMULP

DBMULP (S1) (S2) (D)

Multiplies 8 Digits BCD Data In S1 By 8 Digits BCD Data In S2.

DBDIV

DBDIV (S1) (S2) (D)

Divides 8 Digits BCD Data In S1 By 8 Digits BCD Data And Stores
The Result In Device D.

DBDIVP

DBDIVP (S1) (S2) (D)

Divides 8 Digits BCD Data In S1 By 8 Digits BCD Data And Stores
The Result In Device D.

Arithmetic (Floating decimal point, XP)
Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

EADD

EADD (S1) (S2) (D)

This is used to add the floating-point data in the device assigned
to S1 to the floating-point data in the device assigned to S2,
storing the result in the device assigned D.

EADDP

EADDP (S1) (S2) (D)

This is used to add the floating-point data in the device assigned
to S1 to the floating-point data in the device assigned to S2,
storing the result in the device assigned D.

ESUB

ESUB (S1) (S2) (D)

This is used to subtract the Floating-point data in the device
assigned to S2 from the Floating-point data in the device assigned
to S1, storing the result in the device assigned to D.

ESUBP

ESUBP (S1) (S2) (D)

This is used to subtract the Floating-point data in the device
assigned to S2 from the Floating-point data in the device assigned
to S1, storing the result in the device assigned to D.

EMUL

EMUL (S1) (S2) (D)

This is used to multiply the Floating-point data assigned to S1 by
the Floating-point data in the device assigned to S2, storing the
result in the device assigned to D.

EMULP

EMULP (S1) (S2) (D)

This is used to multiply the Floating-point data assigned to S1 by
the Floating-point data in the device assigned to S2, storing the
result in the device assigned to D.

EDIV

EDIV (S1) (S2) (D)

This is used to divide the floating-point data in the device
assigned to S1 to the floating-point data in the device assigned to
S2, storing the result in the device assigned D.

EDIVP

EDIVP (S1) (S2) (D)

This is used to divide the floating-point data in the device
assigned to S1 to the floating-point data in the device assigned to
S2, storing the result in the device assigned D.

Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

INC

INC (D)

Adds 1 To Data Value In D And Stores The Result In D Again.

INCP

INCP (D)

Adds 1 To Data Value In D And Stores The Result In D Again.

DINC

DINC (D)

Adds 1 To Double-Word Data Value In D And Stores The Result
In D Again.

DINCP

DINCP (D)

Adds 1 To Double-Word Data Value In D And Stores The Result
In D Again.

DEC

DEC (D)

Subtracts 1 From Data Value In D And Stores The Result In

INC / DEC

682

CIMON-PLC

Device D Again.
DECP

DECP (D)

Subtracts 1 From Data Value In D And Stores The Result In
Device D Again.

DDEC

DDEC (D)

Subtracts 1 From Double-Word Data Value In D And Stores The
Result In Device D Again.

DDECP

DDECP (D)

Subtracts 1 From Double-Word Data Value In D And Stores The
Result In Device D Again.

Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

NEG

NEG (D)

Sign-Inverts Contents Of Data In D And Stores The Result In D
Again.

NEGP

NEGP (D)

Sign-Inverts Contents Of Data In D And Stores The Result In D
Again.

DNEG

DNEG (D)

Sign-Inverts Contents Of Double-Word Data In D And Stores The
Result In D Again.

DNEGP

DNEGP (D)

Sign-Inverts Contents Of Double-Word Data In D And Stores The
Result In D Again.

Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

MAX

MAX (S) (D) (n)

Stores The Biggest Value Among n Pieces Of Data From Data In
S, Its Location And Number Of The Values In D.

MAXP

MAXP (S) (D) (n)

Stores The Biggest Value Among n Pieces Of Data From Data In
S, Its Location And Number Of The Values In D.

MIN

MIN (S) (D) (n)

Stores The Smallest Value Among n Pieces Of Data From Data In
S, Its Location And Number Of The Values In D.

MINP

MINP (S) (D) (n)

Stores The Smallest Value Among n Pieces Of Data From Data In
S, Its Location And Number Of The Values In D.

DMAX

DMAX (S) (D) (n)

Stores The Biggest Value Among n Pieces Of Data From DoubleWord Data Of S, Its Location And Number Of The Values In D.

DMAXP

DMAXP (S) (D) (n)

Stores The Biggest Value Among n Pieces Of Data From DoubleWord Data Of S, Its Location And Number Of The Values In D.

DMIN

DMIN (S) (D) (n)

Stores The Smallest Value Among n Pieces Of Data From
Double-Word Data Of S, Its Location And Number Of The Values
In D.

DMINP

DMINP (S) (D) (n)

Stores The Smallest Value Among n Pieces Of Data From
Double-Word Data Of S, Its Location And Number Of The Values
In D.

Complement

MIN / MAX

Transmit Data
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

PLC Common

683

Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

MOV

MOV (S) (D)

Transmits Word Data In Device S To Device D.

MOVP

MOVP (S) (D)

Transmits Word Data In Device S To Device D.

DMOV

DMOV (S) (D)

Transmits Double-Word Data In Device S To Device D.

DMOVP

DMOVP (S) (D)

Transmits Double-Word Data In Device S To Device D.

CML

CML (S) (D)

Inverts Each Bit Of Data In Device S And Stores The Result In
Device D.

CMLP

CMLP (S) (D)

Inverts Each Bit Of Data In Device S And Stores The Result In
Device D.

DCML

DCML (S) (D)

Inverts Each Bit Of Double-Word Data In S And Stores The Result
In Device D.

DCMLP

DCMLP (S) (D)

Inverts Each Bit Of Double-Word Data In S And Stores The Result
In Device D.

BMOV

BMOV (S) (D) (n)

Transmits n Pieces Of Data In S To Device D.

BMOVP

BMOVP (S) (D) (n)

Transmits n Pieces Of Data In S To Device D.

FMOV

FMOV (S) (D) (n)

Transmits Data In S To n Pieces Of Device From Device D In Due
Order.

FMOVP

FMOVP (S) (D) (n)

Transmits Data In S To n Pieces Of Device From Device D In Due
Order.

WBMOV

WBMOV (S) (D) (fm)

transfer bit data from S to D, obey fm

WBMOV
P

WBMOVP (S) (D) (fm)

transfer bit data from S to D, obey fm

Exchange Data
Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

XCH

XCH (D1) (D2)

Exchanges Word Data In S With Word Data In D.

XCHP

XCHP (D1) (D2)

Exchanges Word Data In S With Word Data In D.

DXCH

DXCH (S) (D)

Exchanges Double-Word Data In S With Double-Word Data In D
Each Other.

DXCHP

DXCHP (S) (D)

Exchanges Double-Word Data In S With Double-Word Data In D
Each Other.

BXCH

BXCH (D1) (D2) (n)

Exchanges n Pieces Of Data In Device S And n Pieces Of Data In
Device D Each Other.

BXCHP

BXCHP (D1) (D2) (n)

Exchanges n Pieces Of Data In Device S And n Pieces Of Data In
Device D Each Other.

SWAP

SWAP (D)

Exchanges The Upper Byte Of Data In D With The Lower Byte Of
It And Stores The Result In Device D.

SWAPP

SWAPP (D)

Exchanges The Upper Byte Of Data In D With The Lower Byte Of
It And Stores The Result In Device D.

Logical
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

684

CIMON-PLC

Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

WAND

WAND (S1) (S2) (D)

AND-Operates Data In S1 And Data In S2, And Stores In Device
D.

WANDP

WANDP (S1) (S2) (D)

AND-Operates Data In S1 And Data In S2, And Stores In Device
D.

WOR

WOR (S1) (S2) (D)

OR-Operates Data In S1 And Data In S2, And Stores The Result
In Device D.

WORP

WORP (S1) (S2) (D)

OR-Operates Data In S1 And Data In S2, And Stores The Result
In Device D.

WXOR

WXOR (S1) (S2) (D)

Exclusive - OR-Operates Data In S1 And Data In S2, And Stores
The Result In D.

WXORP

WXORP (S1) (S2) (D)

Exclusive - OR-Operates Data In S1 And Data In S2, And Stores
The Result In D.

WXNR

WXNR (S1) (S2) (D)

Exclusive - NOR-Operates Data In S1 And Data In S2, And Stores
The Result In D.

WXNRP

WXNRP (S1) (S2) (D)

Exclusive - NOR-Operates Data In S1 And Data In S2, And Stores
The Result In D.

Logical (DWORD)
Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

DAND

DAND (S1) (S2) (D)

AND-Operates Data In Device S1 And Data In Device S2, And
Stores The Result In Device D.

DANDP

DANDP (S1) (S2) (D)

AND-Operates Data In Device S1 And Data In Device S2, And
Stores The Result In Device D.

DOR

DOR (S1) (S2) (D)

OR-Operates Data In S1 And 32 Bit Data In S2, And Stores The
Result In D.

DORP

DORP (S1) (S2) (D)

OR-Operates Data In S1 And 32 Bit Data In S2, And Stores The
Result In D.

DXOR

DXOR (S1) (S2) (D)

Exclusive - OR-Operates Double-Word Data In S1 And DoubleWord Data In S2, And Stores The Result In D.

DXORP

DXORP (S1) (S2) (D)

Exclusive - OR-Operates Double-Word Data In S1 And DoubleWord Data In S2, And Stores The Result In D.

DXNR

DXNR (S1) (S2) (D)

Exclusive - NOR-Operates Double-Word Data In S1 And DoubleWord Data In S2, And Stores The Result In D.

DXNRP

DXNRP (S1) (S2) (D)

Exclusive - NOR-Operates Double-Word Data In S1 And DoubleWord Data In S2, And Stores The Result In D.

Logical (Block)
Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

PLC Common

685

BKAND

BKAND (S1) (S2) (D) (n)

AND-Operates n Pieces Of Data In Device S1 And n Pieces OF
Data In Device S2, And Stores The Result In Device D.

BKANDP

BKANDP (S1) (S2) (D)
(n)

AND-Operates n Pieces Of Data In Device S1 And n Pieces OF
Data In Device S2, And Stores The Result In Device D.

BKOR

BKOR (S1) (S2) (D) (n)

OR-Operates n Pieces Of Data In S1 And n Pieces Of Data In S2,
And Stores The Result In Device D.

BKORP

BKORP (S1) (S2) (D) (n)

OR-Operates n Pieces Of Data In S1 And n Pieces Of Data In S2,
And Stores The Result In Device D.

BKXOR

BKXOR (S1) (S2) (D) (n)

Exclusive - OR-Operates n Pieces Of Data In S1 And n Pieces Of
Data In S2, And Stores The Result In Device D.

BKXORP

BKXORP (S1) (S2) (D)
(n)

Exclusive - OR-Operates n Pieces Of Data In S1 And n Pieces Of
Data In S2, And Stores The Result In Device D.

BKXNR

BKXNR (S1) (S2) (D) (n)

Exclusive - NOR-Operates n Pieces Of Data In S1 And n Pieces
Of Data In S2, And Stores The Result In Device D.

BKXNRP

BKXNRP (S1) (S2) (D)
(n)

Exclusive - NOR-Operates n Pieces Of Data In S1 And n Pieces
Of Data In S2, And Stores The Result In Device D.

Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

ROL

ROL (D) (n)

Shifts Left 16 Pieces Of Bit In D As Much As n Bits. Shifts The
Uppermost Bit To The Lowest Bit And Carry Flag.

ROLP

ROLP (D) (n)

Shifts Left 16 Pieces Of Bit In D As Much As n Bits. Shifts The
Uppermost Bit To The Lowest Bit And Carry Flag.

ROR

ROR (D) (n)

Shifts Right 16 Pieces Of Bit In D As Much As n Bits. Shifts The
Lowest Bit To Carry Flag And Carry Flag To The Uppermost Bit.

RORP

RORP (D) (n)

Shifts Right 16 Pieces Of Bit In D As Much As n Bits. Shifts The
Lowest Bit To Carry Flag And Carry Flag To The Uppermost Bit.

Rotation

Rotation (Carry)
Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

RCL

RCL (D) (n)

Shifts Left 16 Pieces Of Bit In D As Much As n Bits. Shifts The
Uppermost Bit To Carry Flag And Carry Flag To The Lowest Bit.

RCLP

RCLP (D) (n)

Shifts Left 16 Pieces Of Bit In D As Much As n Bits. Shifts The
Uppermost Bit To Carry Flag And Carry Flag To The Lowest Bit.

RCR

RCR (D) (n)

Shifts Right 16 Pieces Of Bit In D As Much As n Bits. Shifts The
Lowest Bit To Carry Flag And Carry Flag.

RCRP

RCRP (D) (n)

Shifts Right 16 Pieces Of Bit In D As Much As n Bits. Shifts The
Lowest Bit To Carry Flag And Carry Flag.

Rotation (DWORD)
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

686

CIMON-PLC

Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

DROL

DROL (D) (n)

Shifts Left 32 Bits In D As Much As n Bits. Shifts The Uppermost
Bit To The Lowest Bit And Carry Flag.

DROLP

DROLP (D) (n)

Shifts Left 32 Bits In D As Much As n Bits. Shifts The Uppermost
Bit To The Lowest Bit And Carry Flag.

DROR

DROR (D) (n)

Shifts Right 32 Bits In D As Much As n Bits. Shifts The Lowest Bit
To Carry Flag And Carry Flag To The Uppermost Bit.

DRORP

DRORP (D) (n)

Shifts Right 32 Bits In D As Much As n Bits. Shifts The Lowest Bit
To Carry Flag And Carry Flag To The Uppermost Bit.

Rotation (DWORD, Carry)
Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

DRCL

DRCL (D) (n)

Shifts Left 32 Bits In D As Much As n Bits. Shifts The Uppermost
Bit To Carry Flag And Carry Flag To The Lowest Bit.

DRCLP

DRCLP (D) (n)

Shifts Left 32 Bits In D As Much As n Bits. Shifts The Uppermost
Bit To Carry Flag And Carry Flag To The Lowest Bit.

DRCR

DRCR (D) (n)

Shifts Right 32 Bits In D As Much As n Bits. Shifts The Lowest Bit
To The Uppermost Bit And Carry Flag.

DRCRP

DRCRP (D) (n)

Shifts Right 32 Bits In D As Much As n Bits. Shifts The Lowest Bit
To The Uppermost Bit And Carry Flag.

Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

SFL

SFL (D) (n)

Shifts Left Data Bit In D As Much As n Bits. Fills Lower n Bits With
0 And Stores the Result In D.

SFLP

SFLP (D) (n)

Shifts Left Data Bit In D As Much As n Bits. Fills Lower n Bits With
0 And Stores the Result In D.

SFR

SFR (D) (n)

Shifts Right Data Bit In D As Much As n Bits. Fills Upperr n Bits
With 0 And Stores the Result In D.

SFRP

SFRP (D) (n)

Shifts Right Data Bit In D As Much As n Bits. Fills Upperr n Bits
With 0 And Stores the Result In D.

Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

BSFL

BSFL (D) (n)

n Pieces Of Data Are Shifted Left From Data In Device D And The

Shift

Shift (BIT)

PLC Common

687

Shifted Lowest Data Is Filled With 0.
BSFLP

BSFLP (D) (n)

n Pieces Of Data Are Shifted Left From Data In Device D And The
Shifted Lowest Data Is Filled With 0.

BSFR

BSFR (D) (n)

n Pieces Of Data Are Shifted Right From Data In Device D And
The Shifted Uppermost Data Is Filled With 0.

BSFRP

BSFRP (D) (n)

n Pieces Of Data Are Shifted Right From Data In Device D And
The Shifted Uppermost Data Is Filled With 0.

Shift (WORD)
Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

DSFL

DSFL (D) (n)

Shifts Left Double-Word Data Bits In D As Much As n Bits. Fills
Lower n Bits With 0 And Stores Them In D.

DSFLP

DSFLP (D) (n)

Shifts Left Double-Word Data Bits In D As Much As n Bits. Fills
Lower n Bits With 0 And Stores Them In D.

DSFR

DSFR (D) (n)

Shifts Right Double-Word Data Bits In D As Much As n Bits. Fills
Upper n Bits With 0 And Stores Them In D.

DSFRP

DSFRP (D) (n)

Shifts Right Double-Word Data Bits In D As Much As n Bits. Fills
Upper n Bits With 0 And Stores Them In D.

Conversion (BIN -> BCD)
Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

BCD

BCD (S) (D)

Converts BIN Data Value In S To BCD Data And Stores The
Result In Device D.

BCDP

BCDP (S) (D)

Converts BIN Data Value In S To BCD Data And Stores The
Result In Device D.

DBCD

DBCD (S) (D)

Converts BIN DOuble-Word Data Value In S To BCD DoubleWord Data And Stores The Result In Device D.

DBCDP

DBCDP (S) (D)

Converts Double-Word BIN Data Value In S To BCD Data And
Stores The result In Device D.

Conversion (BCD -> BIN)
Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

BIN

BIN (S) (D)

Converts 4 Digits BCD Data Value In S To BIN Data And Stores
The Result In Device D.

BINP

BINP (S) (D)

Converts 4 Digits BCD Data Value In S To BIN Data And Stores
The Result In Device D.

DBIN

DBIN (S) (D)

Converts 8 Digits BCD Data Value In S To BIN Data And Stores

688

CIMON-PLC

The Result In Device D.
DBINP

DBINP (S) (D)

Converts 8 Digits BCD Data Value In S To BIN Data And Stores
The Result In Device D.

Conversion (BIN -> ASCII)
Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

BINDA

BINDA (S) (D)

Converts BIN Data In S To Decimal ASCII Code And Stores The
Result In Device D.

BINDAP

BINDAP (S) (D)

Converts BIN Data In S To Decimal ASCII Code And Stores The
Result In Device D.

DBINDA

DBINDA (S) (D)

Converts BIN Data In S To Decimal ASCII Code And Stores The
Result In Device D.

DBINDAP DBINDAP (S) (D)

Converts BIN Data In S To Decimal ASCII Code And Stores The
Result In Device D.

Conversion (ASCII -> BIN)
Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

DABIN

DABIN (S) (D)

Converts Decimal ASCII Code In Device S To 16bit BIN Data And
Stores The Result In Device D.

DABINP

DABINP (S) (D)

Converts Decimal ASCII Code In Device S To 16bit BIN Data And
Stores The Result In Device D.

DDABIN

DDABIN (S) (D)

Converts Decimal ASCII Code In S To 32 Bit BIN Data And Stores
The Result In Device D.

DDABINP DDABINP (S) (D)

Converts Decimal ASCII Code In S To 32 Bit BIN Data And Stores
The Result In Device D.

Conversion ( BIN -> HEX ASCII)
Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

BINHA

BINHA (S) (D)

Converts BIN Data In S To Hexadecimal ASCII Code And Stores
The Result In Device D.

BINHAP

BINHAP (S) (D)

Converts BIN Data In S To Hexadecimal ASCII Code And Stores
The Result In Device D.

DBINHA

DBINHA (S) (D)

Converts BIN Data In S To Hexadecimal ASCII Code And Stores
The Result In D.

DBINHAP DBINHAP (S) (D)

Converts BIN Data In S To Hexadecimal ASCII Code And Stores
The Result In D.

PLC Common

689

Conversion (HEX ASCII -> BIN)
Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

HABIN

HABIN (S) (D)

Converts Hexadecimal ASCII COde In S To 16 Bit BIN Data And
Stores The Result In D.

HABINP

HABINP (S) (D)

Converts Hexadecimal ASCII COde In S To 16 Bit BIN Data And
Stores The Result In D.

DHABIN

DHABIN (S) (D)

Converts Hexadecimal ASCII Code In S To 32 BIt BIN Data And
Stores The Result In Device D.

DHABINP DHABINP (S) (D)

Converts Hexadecimal ASCII Code In S To 32 BIt BIN Data And
Stores The Result In Device D.

Conversion (BCD -> ASCII)
Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

BCDDA

BCDDA (S) (D)

Converts 4 Digits BCD Data In S To Decimal ASCII Code And
Stores The Result In Device D.

BCDDAP

BCDDAP (S) (D)

Converts 4 Digits BCD Data In S To Decimal ASCII Code And
Stores The Result In Device D.

DBCDDA

DBCDDA (S) (D)

Converts 8 Digits BCD Data In S To Decimal ASCII Code And
Stores The Result In Device D.

DBCDDA
P

DBCDDAP (S) (D)

Converts 8 Digits BCD Data In S To Decimal ASCII Code And
Stores The Result In Device D.

Conversion (Floating decimal point, XP)
Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

FLT

FLT (S) (D)

Converts 16-bit BIN data designated by S to floating decimal point
real number, and stores at device number designated by D .

FLTP

FLTP (S) (D)

Converts 16-bit BIN data designated by S to floating decimal point
real number, and stores at device number designated by D .

DFLT

DFLT (S) (D)

Converts 32-bit BIN data designated by S to floating decimal point
real number, and stores at device number designated by D

DFLTP

DFLTP (S) (D)

Converts 32-bit BIN data designated by S to floating decimal point
real number, and stores at device number designated by D

INT

INT (S) (D)

Converts the floating decimal point real number designated at S
into BIN 16-bit data and stores it at the device number designated
at D

INTP

INTP (S) (D)

Converts the floating decimal point real number designated at S
into BIN 16-bit data and stores it at the device number designated
at D

690

CIMON-PLC

RAD

RAD (S) (D)

Converts units of angle size from angle units designated by S to
radian units, and stores result at device number designated by D.

RADP

RADP (S) (D)

Converts units of angle size from angle units designated by S to
radian units, and stores result at device number designated by D.

DEG

DEG (S) (D)

Converts Unit of angle size from radian units designated by S to
angles, and stores result at device number designated by D.

DEGP

DEGP (S) (D)

Converts Unit of angle size from radian units designated by S to
angles, and stores result at device number designated by D.

EMOV

EMOV (S) (D)

This is used to transfer the Floating-point data in the device
assigned to S to the device assigned to D.

EMOVP

EMOVP (S) (D)

This is used to transfer the Floating-point data in the device
assigned to S to the device assigned to D.

Decode / Encode
Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

DECO

DECO (S) (D) (n)

Decodes Lower n Bits In S And Sets The Contact Corresponding
To Result Of Device D.

DECOP

DECOP (S) (D) (n)

Decodes Lower n Bits In S And Sets The Contact Corresponding
To Result Of Device D.

ENCO

ENCO (S) (D) (n)

Encodes The Uppermost Bit Location Which Is Set As 1 In 2^n Of
S And Stores The Result In D In Numerical Value Data.

ENCOP

ENCOP (S) (D) (n)

Encodes The Uppermost Bit Location Which Is Set As 1 In 2^n Of
S And Stores The Result In D In Numerical Value Data.

Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

SEG

SEG (S) (D)

Decodes n Pieces Of Number From Start Bit In S As 7 Segment
By The Set Format And Stores The Result In D.

SEGP

SEGP (S) (D)

Decodes n Pieces Of Number From Start Bit In S As 7 Segment
By The Set Format And Stores The Result In D.

7 Segment

Union / Disunion
Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

DIS

DIS (S) (D) (n)

Stores n(n=1 Means 4 Bits) Pieces Of Numerical Value Data From
S In Lower Bit As Much As n From D Each.

DISP

DISP (S) (D) (n)

Stores n(n=1 Means 4 Bits) Pieces Of Numerical Value Data From
S In Lower Bit As Much As n From D Each.

PLC Common

691

UNI

UNI (S) (D) (n)

Combines Each Lower 4 Bits Of n(n=1 Means 4 Bits) Pieces Of
Data In S, And Stores the Result In Device D.

UNIP

UNIP (S) (D) (n)

Combines Each Lower 4 Bits Of n(n=1 Means 4 Bits) Pieces Of
Data In S, And Stores the Result In Device D.

Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

TEST

TEST (S1) (S2) (D)

Stores Bit Of The Assigned Order Among Data Bits In S1. If The
Result Is 1, Sets. If 0, Resets.

TESTP

TESTP (S1) (S2) (D)

Stores Bit Of The Assigned Order Among Data Bits In S1. If The
Result Is 1, Sets. If 0, Resets.

DTEST

DTEST (S1) (S2) (D)

Stores The Bit Of Order Assigned to S2 In Double-Word Data Bit
Of S1 In D. If It Is 1, Sets. If 0, Resets.

DTESTP

DTESTP (S1) (S2) (D)

Stores The Bit Of Order Assigned to S2 In Double-Word Data Bit
Of S1 In D. If It Is 1, Sets. If 0, Resets.

BSET

BSET (D) (n)

Sets nth Bit In Data Bits In Device D.

BSETP

BSETP (D) (n)

Sets nth Bit In Data Bits In Device D.

BRST

BRST (D) (n)

Resets nth Bit in Word Data Bits In Device D.

BRSTP

BRSTP (D) (n)

Resets nth Bit in Word Data Bits In Device D.

BITMOV

BITMOV (S) (D) (n)

Sends the data in the device assigned to S as much as n bits from
the start device number in the device assigned to D.

BIT

BITMOVP BITMOVP (S) (D) (n)

Sends the data in the device assigned to S as much as n bits from
the start device number in the device assigned to D.

ANDBT

ANDBT (S1) (S2)

AND-Operates the bit of the order assigned to S2 in the word
device data assigned to S1 and Contact A.

ANDBTI

ANDBTI (S1) (S2)

LDBT

LDBT (S1) (S2)

LDBTI

LDBTI (S1) (S2)

ORBT

ORBT (S1) (S2)

ORBTI

ORBTI (S1) (S2)

SUM

SUM (S) (D)

Counts Number Of Bit Data Which Are Set As 1 In Data Of S And
Stores The Number.

SUMP

SUMP (S) (D)

Counts Number Of Bit Data Which Are Set As 1 In Data Of S And
Stores The Number.

DSUM

DSUM (S) (D)

Counts Number Of Bit Data Which Are Set As 1 In Double-Word
Data Of S And Stores The Number.

DSUMP

DSUMP (S) (D)

Counts Number Of Bit Data Which Are Set As 1 In Double-Word
Data Of S And Stores The Number.

TIME

LD-Operates the bit of the order assigned to S2 in the word device
data assigned to S1 and Contact A.
OR-Operates the bit of the order assigned to S2 in the word
device data assigned to S1 and Contact A.

692

CIMON-PLC

Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

DATE+

DATE+ (S1) (S2) (D)

Adds Hour, Minute And Second Data In S2 To Hour, Minute And
Second Data In S1 Each Other, And Stores The Result In D In
Due Order.

DATE+P

DATE+P (S1) (S2) (D)

Adds Hour, Minute And Second Data In S2 To Hour, Minute And
Second Data In S1 Each Other, And Stores The Result In D In
Due Order.

DATE-

DATE- (S1) (S2) (D)

Subtrats Hour, Minute And Second Data In S2 From Hour, Minute
And Second Data In S1 Each Other, And Stores The Result In D
In Due Order.

DATE-P

DATE-P (S1) (S2) (D)

Subtrats Hour, Minute And Second Data In S2 From Hour, Minute
And Second Data In S1 Each Other, And Stores The Result In D
In Due Order.

SECOND

SECOND (S) (D)

Converts Hour, Minute And Second Data In S To Second Data
Each And Stores The Result In D.

SECOND
P

SECONDP (S) (D)

Converts Hour, Minute And Second Data In S To Second Data
Each And Stores The Result In D.

HOUR

HOUR (S) (D)

Converts Second Data In S To Hour, Minute And Second Data
And Stores The Result In D In Due Order.

HOURP

HOURP (S) (D)

Converts Second Data In S To Hour, Minute And Second Data
And Stores The Result In D In Due Order.

DATERD

DATERD (D)

Reads Year, Month, Day, Hour, Minute, Second And Day Of Week
Data From CPU Clock Device And Stores Them In Device D In
Due Order.

DATERD
P

DATERDP (D)

Reads Year, Month, Day, Hour, Minute, Second And Day Of Week
Data From CPU Clock Device And Stores Them In Device D In
Due Order.

DATEWR DATEWR (S)

Year, Month, Day, Hour, Minute, Second And Day Of Week Data
In S Are Written In CPU Clock Device.

DATEWR DATEWRP (S)
P

Year, Month, Day, Hour, Minute, Second And Day Of Week Data
In S Are Written In CPU Clock Device.

Timer
Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

TON

TON (S) (t)

If Curren Value Is Increased And Reaches Set Value, Timer
Contact Is Set.

TOFF

TOFF (S) (t)

When Input Condition Is Off, The Set Value Is Subtracted. If
Current Value Reaches 0, Output Is Reset.

TMR

TMR (S) (t)

Though Current Value Is Increased And Input Is On-Off
Reapeatly, If The Current Value Is Accumulated Whenever It Is
On And Reaches Set Time, Timer Contact Is Set.

TMON

TMON (S) (t)

Though Output Is Set And Input Is Set-Reset Repeatly, If Current
Value Is Subtracted Whenever It Is Set And Reaches 0, Timer
Output Is Reset.

TRTG

TRTG (S) (t)

If Output Is Set And Current Value Is Subtracted To Reach 0,
Output Is Reset. If Output Is Reset Before Current Value Is 0,
Current Value Is Set Up As Set Value.

PLC Common

693

Counter
Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

CTU

CTU (S) (t)

Adds One By One To Current Value Whenever Pulse Is Input. If
Current Value Is Over Set Value, Sets Output And Counts Up To
Maximum Of Counter.

CTD

CTD (S) (t)

Subtracts One By One From Set Value Whenever Rising Edge Is
Input. If The Value Is 0, Sets Output.

CTUD

CTUD (S) (t)

Adds One By One Whenever Pulse Is Input To Up Terminal.
Substracts One By One Whenever Pulse Is Input To Down
Terminal. If Current Value Is Over Set Value, Sets Output.

CTR

CTR (S) (t)

Adds One By One Whenever Pulse Is Input. If The Value Reaches
Set Value, Sets Output. If Input Signal Is On From Off, Current
Value Is Increased From 0.

Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

FROM

FROM (n1) (n2) (D) (n3)

Reads n3 Pieces Of Word Data In User Program Memory n2 Of
Optional Card n1(SLot Number) And Stores The Result In D.

FROMP

FROMP (n1) (n2) (D)
(n3)

Reads n3 Pieces Of Word Data In User Program Memory n2 Of
Optional Card n1(SLot Number) And Stores The Result In D.

DFRO

DFRO (n1) (n2) (D) (n3)

Reads n3 Pieces Of Double-Word Data In User Program Memory
n2 Of Optional Card n1(Slot Number) And Stores Them In Device
D.

DFROP

DFROP (n1) (n2) (D) (n3) Reads n3 Pieces Of Double-Word Data In User Program Memory
n2 Of Optional Card n1(Slot Number) And Stores Them In Device
D.

TO (n1) (n2) (S) (n3)

Writes n3 Pieces Data In S To User Program Memory n2 Of
Opetional Card n1(Slot Numer).

TOP

TOP (n1) (n2) (S) (n3)

Writes n3 Pieces Data In S To User Program Memory n2 Of
Opetional Card n1(Slot Numer).

DTO

DTO (n1) (n2) (S) (n3)

Writes n3 Pieces Of Double-Word Data In S To User Program
Memory n2 Of Optional Card n1(Slot Number).

DTOP

DTOP (n1) (n2) (S) (n3)

Writes n3 Pieces Of Double-Word Data In S To User Program
Memory n2 Of Optional Card n1(Slot Number).

FREAD

FREAD (n1) (n2) (D) (n3) Read n3 words of data from the address designated by n2 ofthe
(n4)
system memory of the special function module designated by n1.
Then, stores the data in the area starting from the device
designated by D.
The result of instruction is stored to the device designated by n3.

FREADP

FREADP (n1) (n2) (D)
(n3) (n4)

Read / Write

Read n3 words of data from the address designated by n2 ofthe
system memory of the special function module designated by n1.
Then, stores the data in the area starting from the device
designated by D.

694

CIMON-PLC

The result of instruction is stored to the device designated by n3.
FWRITE

FWRITE (n1) (n2) (D)
(n3) (n4)

Write n3 words of data from the device designated by D to the
area starting from the address designated by n2 of the system
memory of the special function module designated by n1.

FWRITE
P

FWRITEP (n1) (n2) (D)
(n3) (n4)

Write n3 words of data from the device designated by D to the
area starting from the address designated by n2 of the system
memory of the special function module designated by n1.

Communication
Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

SND

SND (Slot)(S)(Size)
(Result)

Transmits Data In Device Of Master Atation To Device Of Slave
Station.

SNDP

SNDP (Slot)(S)(Size)
(Result)

Transmits Data In Device Of Master Atation To Device Of Slave
Station.

RCV

RCV (Slot)(D)(Size)
(Result)

Reads And Brings Data In Slave Station To Device Of Master
Station.

RCVP

RCVP (Slot)(D)(Size)
(Result)

Reads Data In Slave Station To Device Of Master Station.

Communication (SPC Program)
Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

RECV

RECV (PID) (F_Name)
(Result)

Compares the data received from master station with the data
(F_Name) set up by Special Function Program(PID), storing them
in the assigned device.

RECVP

RECVP (PID) (F_Name)
(Result)

Compares the data received from master station with the data
(F_Name) set up by Special Function Program(PID), storing them
in the assigned device.

SEND

SEND (PID) (F_Name)
(Result)

Sends the data(F_Name) set up by Special Function Program
(PID) from master station to the device of slave station.

SENDP

SENDP (PID) (F_Name)
(Result)

Sends the data(F_Name) set up by Special Function Program
(PID) from master station to the device of slave station.

Watch Dog Time
Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

WDT

Resets Watch Dog Timer While Operating Program.

WDTP

Resets Watch Dog Timer While Operating Program.

PLC Common

695

Carry
Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

STC

If Input Condition Is On, Sets Carry Flag.

CLC

If Input Condition Is ON, Resets Carry Flag.

Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

RFS

RFS (S) (n)

Refreshes n Pieces Of Device Which Are Assigned To S For One
Scan.

RFSP

RFSP (S) (n)

Refreshes n Pieces Of Device Which Are Assigned To S For One
Scan.

Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

PIDCAL

PIDCAL (S)

Assigns Device Where Result Value Of PID Operation IS Stored
As S.

PIDINIT

PIDINIT (S)

Assigns Device Where The Set Value For PID Operation Is Stored
As S.

Refresh

PID

Trigonometric (XP Series)
Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

SIN

SIN (S) (D)

Calculates SIN (sine) value of angle designated at S and stores
the operation result in the device number designated at D.

COS

COS (S) (D)

Performs COS (cosine) on angle designated by S and stores
operation result at device number designated by D .

TAN

TAN (S) (D)

Performs tangent (TAN) operation on angle data designated by S ,
and stores operation result in device designated by D.

ASIN

ASIN (S) (D)

Calculates angle from sin value designated by S, and stores
operation result at word device designated by D

ACOS

ACOS (S) (D)

Calculates angle from COS value designated by S, and stores
operation result at word device designated by D

ATAN

ATAN (S) (D)

Calculates angle from tan value designated by S, and stores
operation result at word device desig

BSIN

BSIN (S) (D)

Calculates the sin value of the designated value, and stores the

696

CIMON-PLC

sign of the operation result in the device at D, and the operation
result in the device designated at D+1 and D+2.
BCOS

BCOS (S) (D)

Calculates the cos value of the designated value, and stores the
sign of the operation result in the device at D, and the operation
result in the device designated at D+1 and D+2.

BTAN

BTAN (S) (D)

Calculates TAN (tangent) value for value (angle) designated by S ,
and stores the sign for the operation result in the word device
designated by D , and the operation result in the word device
designated by D +1 and D +2.

BASIN

BASIN (S) (D)

Calculates angle from sin value designated by S, and stores
operation result at word device designated by D

BACOS

BACOS (S) (D)

Calculates angle from COS value designated by S, and stores
operation result at word device designated by D

BATAN

BATAN (S) (D)

Calculates angle from sin value designated by S, and stores
operation result at word device designated by D

Exponent, Logarithm (XP Series)
Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

SQR

SQR (S) (D)

Calculates square root of value designated at S , and stores the
operation result in the device number designated at D .

EXP

EXP (S) (D)

Calculates exponent for value designated by S, and stores the
result of the operation at the device designate by D

LOG

LOG (S) (D)

Calculates natural logarithm of value designated by S taking e as
base, and stores operation results at device designated by D.

BSQR

BSQR (S) (D)

Store appointed data to area that is specified by D after square
root arithmetic by S.

BDSQR

BDSQR (S) (D)

Store appointed data to area that is specified by D after square
root arithmetic by S.

Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

DUTY

DUTY (n1) (n2) (D)

Turns scan designated by n1 ON for user timing block designated
by D, and scan designated by n2 OFF.

Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

FPOP

FPOP (DEV) (TBL)

Find Last Data In Table

FINS

FINS (DEV) (TBL) (n)

Insert a Data In Table

FDEL

FDEL (DEV) (TBL) (n)

Delete a Data From Table

FIFR

FIFR (DEV) (TBL)

Read the oldest data from [TBL+1] and stores it at the device
designated by [DEV].

User Clock

Table

PLC Common

697

After the execution of FIFR, the data in the table moves to the
previous device and the last data will be zero.
The number of data of the data table will be decreased.
FIFRP

FIFRP (DEV) (TBL)

Read the oldest data from [TBL+1] and stores it at the device
designated by [DEV].
After the execution of FIFR, the data in the table moves to the
previous device and the last data will be zero.
The number of data of the data table will be decreased.

FIFW

FIFW (DEV) (TBL)

Stores the 16 bit data designated by [DEV] at the end of the data
table designated by [TBL].
The number of data blocks stored at [TBL] will be increased.

FIFWP

FIFWP (DEV) (TBL)

Stores the 16 bit data designated by [DEV] at the end of the data
table designated by [TBL].
The number of data blocks stored at [TBL] will be increased.

Redundant System
Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

ATVP

Swap Active Status in Redundant System

Scan program Enable / Disable
Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

EPGM

EPGM (n)

Permit driving of scan program that correspond to ID that is
established by n.
Change relevant scan program to Enable status in Disable status
by DPGM command.
if Disable Program command is not inputed at Mode conversion, it
is all Enable PBT states

DPGM

DPGM (n)

Occur random number
Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

RND

RND (D)

Generates random number of from 0 to 32767, and stores at
device designated by D

SRND

SRND (D)

Updates random number series according to the 16-bit BIN data
being stored in device designated by S.

Scale

698

CIMON-PLC

Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

SCL

SCL (S) (D) (P) (n)

Converts signed binary data into signed binary data according to
Scale parameter table .

SCLP

SCLP (S) (D) (P) (n)

Converts signed binary data into signed binary data according to
Scale parameter table .

Position (CP, XP)
Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

ABRST1

ABRST1 (Base/Slot) (S)
(D)

ABRST2

ABRST2 (Base/Slot) (S)
(D)

ABRST3

ABRST3 (Base/Slot) (S)
(D)

ABRST4

ABRST4 (Base/Slot) (S)
(D)

PSTRT1

PSTRT1 (Base/Slot) (S)
(D)

PSTRT2

PSTRT2 (Base/Slot) (S)
(D)

PSTRT3

PSTRT3 (Base/Slot) (S)
(D)

PSTRT4

PSTRT4 (Base/Slot) (S)
(D)

TEACH1

TEACH1 (Base/Slot) (S)
(D)

TEACH2

TEACH2 (Base/Slot) (S)
(D)

TEACH3

TEACH3 (Base/Slot) (S)
(D)

TEACH4

TEACH4 (Base/Slot) (S)
(D)

PFWRT

PFWRT (Base/Slot) (S)
(D)

PINT

PINT (Base/Slot) (S) (D)

Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

;

; (notes)

Shows Description.

DESCI

DESCI (notes)

Shows Description.

NOP

As No Operation Instruction, Does Not Influence Operation Result
Of The Corresponding Circuit.

etc

PLC Common

5.3

699

Instruction List - Alphabetic
Instructio
n

Type of Input

Note

;

; (notes)

Shows Description.

ACOS

Calculates angle from COS value designated by S, and stores operation
result at word device designated by D

ACOSP

Calculates angle from COS value designated by S, and stores operation
result at word device designated by D

ADD

ADD (S1) (S2) (D)

Adds Data S1 To Data S2, And Stores The Result In Device D.

ADDP

ADDP (S1) (S2) (D)

Adds Data S1 To Data S2, And Stores The Result In Device D.

ANB

AND-Operates Blocks And Takes The Result As Operation Result.

AND

AND (S)

AND-Operates Contact a Of The Assigned Contact And Connected
Contants In Series, And Takes The Result As Operation Result.

AND<

AND< (S1) (S2)

If Data S1 Is Less Than Data S2, ON. If Greater Than Or Equal To, OFF.
AND-Operates The Result And Result Of The Current Operation.

AND<=

AND<= (S1) (S2)

If Data S1 Is Less Than Or Equal To Data S2, ON. If Greater Than, OFF.
AND-Operates The Result And Result Of The Current Operation.

AND<>

AND<> (S1) (S2)

If Data S1 And Data S2 Are Not Equal, ON. If Equal, OFF. AND-Operates
The Result And Result Of The Current Operation.

AND=

AND= (S1) (S2)

If Data S1 And Data S2 Are Equal, ON. If TNot Equal, OFF. AND-Operates
The Result And Result Of The Current Operation.

AND>

AND> (S1) (S2)

If Data S1 Is Greater Than Data S2, ON. If Less Than Or Equal To, OFF.
AND-Operates The Result And Result Of The Current Operation.

AND>=

AND>= (S1) (S2)

If Data S1 Is Greater Than Or Equal To Data S2, ON. If Less Than, OFF.
AND-Operates The Result And Result Of The Current Operation.

ANDBT

ANDBT (S1) (S2)

AND-Operates the bit of the order assigned to S2 in the word device data
assigned to S1 and Contact A.

ANDD<

ANDD< (S1) (S2)

If Double-Word Data S1 Is Less Than Double-Word Data S2, ON. If
Greater Than Or Equal To, OFF. AND-Operates The Result And Result Of
The Current Operation.

ANDD<=

ANDD<= (S1) (S2)

ANDD<= (S1) (S2)" , "If Double-Word Data S1 Is Less Than Or Equal To
Double-Word Data S2, On. If Greater Than, OFF. AND-Operates The
Result And Result Of The Current Operation.

ANDD<>

ANDD<> (S1) (S2)

ANDD<> (S1) (S2)" , "If Double-Word Data S1 Is Not Equal To DoubleWord Data S2, ON. If Equal To, OFF. AND-Operates The Result And
Result Of The Current Operation.

ANDD=

ANDD= (S1) (S2)

ANDD= (S1) (S2)" , "If Double-Word Data S1 Is Equal To Double- Word
Data S2, ON. If Not Equal to, OFF.AND-Operates The Result And Result
Of The Current Operation.

700

CIMON-PLC

ANDD>

ANDD> (S1) (S2)

ANDD> (S1) (S2)" , "If Double-Word Data S1 Is Greater Than DoubleWord Data S2, ON. If Less Than, OFF. AND-Operates The Result And
Result Of The Current Operation.

ANDD>=

ANDD>= (S1) (S2)

ANDD>= (S1) (S2)" , "If Double-Word Data S1 Is Greater Than Or Equal
To Double-Word Data S2, ON. If Less Than, OFF. AND-Operates The
Result And Result Of The Current Operation.

ANDE<

ANDE< (S1) (S2)

f Float Data S1 Is Less Than float Data S2, ON. If Greater Than Or Equal
To, OFF. AND-Operates The Result And Result Of The Current Operation.

ANDE<=

ANDE<= (S1) (S2)

If Float Data S1 Is Less Than Or Equal To Float Data S2, On. If Greater
Than, OFF. AND-Operates The Result And Result Of The Current
Operation.

ANDE<>

ANDE<> (S1) (S2)

If Float Data S1 Is Not Equal To Float Data S2, ON. If Equal To, OFF.
AND-Operates The Result And Result Of The Current Operation.

ANDE=

ANDE= (S1) (S2)

ANDE>

ANDE> (S1) (S2)

If Float Data S1 Is Equal To Float Data S2, ON. If Not Equal to, OFF.
AND-Operates The Result And Result Of The Current Operation.
If Float Data S1 Is Greater Than Float Data S2, ON. If Less Than, OFF.
AND-Operates The Result And Result Of The Current Operation.

ANDE>=

ANDE>= (S1) (S2)

If Float Data S1 Is Greater Than Or Equal To Float Data S2, ON. If Less
Than, OFF. AND-Operates The Result And Result Of The Current
Operation

ANDF

ANDF (S)

If Input Condition To Contact To Detect Connection In Series Is Off From
On, Device S Is Set For One Scan.

ANDI

ANDI (S)

AND-Operates Contact b Of The assigned Contact And The Connected
Contact In Series, Takes The Result As Operation Result.

ANDP

ANDP (S)

If Input Condition To Contact To Detect Connection In Series Is On From
Off, Device S Is Set For One Scan.

ASIN

ASIN (S) (D)

Calculates angle from sin value designated by S, and stores operation
result at word device designated by D

ASINP

ASIN (S) (D)

Calculates angle from sin value designated by S, and stores operation
result at word device designated by D

ATAN

ATAN (S) (D)

Calculates angle from tan value designated by S, and stores operation
result at word device designated by D

ATANP

ATAN (S) (D)

Calculates angle from tan value designated by S, and stores operation
result at word device designated by D

ATVP

Swap Active Status in Redundant System

BACOS

BACOS (S) (D)

Calculates angle from COS value designated by S, and stores operation
result at word device designated by D

BACOSP BACOSP (S) (D)

Calculates angle from COS value designated by S, and stores operation
result at word device designated by D

BADD

BADD (S1) (S2) (D)

Adds 4 Digits BCD Data In S1 To 4 Digits BCD Data In S2, And Stores The
Result In Device D.

PLC Common

BADDP

BADDP (S1) (S2) (D)

701

Adds 4 Digits BCD Data In S1 To 4 Digits BCD Data In S2, And Stores The
Result In Device D.

BASIN

BASIN (S) (D)

Calculates angle from sin value designated by S, and stores operation
result at word device designated by D

BASINP

BASINP (S) (D)

Calculates angle from sin value designated by S, and stores operation
result at word device designated by D

BATAN

BATAN (S) (D)

Calculates angle from sin value designated by S, and stores operation
result at word device designated by D

BATANP

BATANP (S) (D)

Calculates angle from sin value designated by S, and stores operation
result at word device designated by D

BCD

BCD (S) (D)

Converts BIN Data Value In S To BCD Data And Stores The Result In
Device D.

BCDDA

BCDDA (S) (D)

Converts 4 Digits BCD Data In S To Decimal ASCII Code And Stores The
Result In Device D.

BCDDAP BCDDAP (S) (D)

Converts 4 Digits BCD Data In S To Decimal ASCII Code And Stores The
Result In Device D.

BCDP

BCDP (S) (D)

Converts BIN Data Value In S To BCD Data And Stores The Result In
Device D.

BCOS

BCOS (S) (D)

Calculates the cos value of the designated value, and stores the sign of the
operation result in the device at D, and the operation result in the device
designated at D+1 and D+2.

BCOSP

BCOS (S) (D)

Calculates the cos value of the designated value, and stores the sign of the
operation result in the device at D, and the operation result in the device
designated at D+1 and D+2.

BDIV

BDIV (S1) (S2) (D)

Divides 4 Digits BCD Data In S1 By 4 Digits BCD Data In S2 And Stores
The Result In Device D.

BDIVP

BDIVP (S1) (S2) (D)

Divides 4 Digits BCD Data In S1 By 4 Digits BCD Data In S2 And Stores
The Result In Device D.

BDSQR

Store appointed data in area that is specified by D after square root
arithmetic by S.

BDSQRP

Store appointed data in area that is specified by D after square root
arithmetic by S.

BIN

BIN (S) (D)

Converts 4 Digits BCD Data Value In S To BIN Data And Stores The Result
In Device D.

BINDA

BINDA (S) (D)

Converts BIN Data In S To Decimal ASCII Code And Stores The Result In
Device D.

BINDAP

BINDAP (S) (D)

Converts BIN Data In S To Decimal ASCII Code And Stores The Result In
Device D.

BINHA

BINHA (S) (D)

Converts BIN Data In S To Hexadecimal ASCII Code And Stores The
Result In Device D.

BINHAP

BINHAP (S) (D)

Converts BIN Data In S To Hexadecimal ASCII Code And Stores The

702

CIMON-PLC

Result In Device D.
BINP

BINP (S) (D)

BITMOV

BITMOV (S) (D) (n)

Converts 4 Digits BCD Data Value In S To BIN Data And Stores The Result
In Device D.
Sends the data in the device assigned to S as much as n bits from the start
device number in the device assigned to D.

BITMOV
P

BITMOVP (S) (D) (n)

BKAND

BKAND (S1) (S2) (D)
(n)

Sends the data in the device assigned to S as much as n bits from the start
device number in the device assigned to D.
AND-Operates n Pieces Of Data In Device S1 And n Pieces OF Data In
Device S2, And Stores The Result In Device D.

BKANDP BKANDP (S1) (S2)
(D) (n)

AND-Operates n Pieces Of Data In Device S1 And n Pieces OF Data In

BK=

Compare [n] of 16 bit data from the device designated by [S1] with [n] of 16

BK= (S1) (S2) (D) (B)
(n)

Device S2, And Stores The Result In Device D.
bit data from the device designated by [S2] and stores the results from bit
[n] of the device designated by [D].
Compare 16 bit data with [n] of 16 bit data from the device designated by
[S2] and stores the results from bit [n] of the device designated by [D].

BK=P

BK=P (S1) (S2) (D)
(B) (n)

Compare [n] of 16 bit data from the device designated by [S1] with [n] of 16
bit data from the device designated by [S2] and stores the results from bit
[n] of the device designated by [D].
Compare 16 bit data with [n] of 16 bit data from the device designated by
[S2] and stores the results from bit [n] of the device designated by [D].

BK<>

BK<> (S1) (S2) (D)
(B) (n)

Compare [n] of 16 bit data from the device designated by [S1] with [n] of 16
bit data from the device designated by [S2] and stores the results from bit
[n] of the device designated by [D].
Compare 16 bit data with [n] of 16 bit data from the device designated by
[S2] and stores the results from bit [n] of the device designated by [D].

BK<>P

BK<>P (S1) (S2) (D)
(B) (n)

Compare [n] of 16 bit data from the device designated by [S1] with [n] of 16
bit data from the device designated by [S2] and stores the results from bit
[n] of the device designated by [D].
Compare 16 bit data with [n] of 16 bit data from the device designated by
[S2] and stores the results from bit [n] of the device designated by [D].

BK<

BK< (S1) (S2) (D) (B)
(n)

Compare [n] of 16 bit data from the device designated by [S1] with [n] of 16
bit data from the device designated by [S2] and stores the results from bit
[n] of the device designated by [D].
Compare 16 bit data with [n] of 16 bit data from the device designated by
[S2] and stores the results from bit [n] of the device designated by [D].

BK> (S1) (S2) (D) (B)
(n)

Compare [n] of 16 bit data from the device designated by [S1] with [n] of 16
bit data from the device designated by [S2] and stores the results from bit
[n] of the device designated by [D].
Compare 16 bit data with [n] of 16 bit data from the device designated by
[S2] and stores the results from bit [n] of the device designated by [D].

BK>P

BK>P (S1) (S2) (D)
(B) (n)

Compare [n] of 16 bit data from the device designated by [S1] with [n] of 16
bit data from the device designated by [S2] and stores the results from bit
[n] of the device designated by [D].
Compare 16 bit data with [n] of 16 bit data from the device designated by
[S2] and stores the results from bit [n] of the device designated by [D].

BK>=

BK>= (S1) (S2) (D)
(B) (n)

Compare [n] of 16 bit data from the device designated by [S1] with [n] of 16
bit data from the device designated by [S2] and stores the results from bit
[n] of the device designated by [D].
Compare 16 bit data with [n] of 16 bit data from the device designated by
[S2] and stores the results from bit [n] of the device designated by [D].

BK>=P

BK>=P (S1) (S2) (D)
(B) (n)

Compare [n] of 16 bit data from the device designated by [S1] with [n] of 16
bit data from the device designated by [S2] and stores the results from bit
[n] of the device designated by [D].
Compare 16 bit data with [n] of 16 bit data from the device designated by
[S2] and stores the results from bit [n] of the device designated by [D].

BKOR
BKORP
BKXNR
BKXNRP
BKXOR

BKOR (S1) (S2) (D)
(n)

OR-Operates n Pieces Of Data In S1 And n Pieces Of Data In S2, And

BKORP (S1) (S2) (D)
(n)

OR-Operates n Pieces Of Data In S1 And n Pieces Of Data In S2, And

BKXNR (S1) (S2) (D)
(n)

Exclusive - NOR-Operates n Pieces Of Data In S1 And n Pieces Of Data In

BKXNRP (S1) (S2)
(D) (n)

Exclusive - NOR-Operates n Pieces Of Data In S1 And n Pieces Of Data In

BKXOR (S1) (S2) (D)
(n)

Exclusive - OR-Operates n Pieces Of Data In S1 And n Pieces Of Data In

BKXORP BKXORP (S1) (S2)
(D) (n)

Stores The Result In Device D.
Stores The Result In Device D.
S2, And Stores The Result In Device D.
S2, And Stores The Result In Device D.
S2, And Stores The Result In Device D.
Exclusive - OR-Operates n Pieces Of Data In S1 And n Pieces Of Data In
S2, And Stores The Result In Device D.

704

CIMON-PLC

BMOV

BMOV (S) (D) (n)

Transmits n Pieces Of Data In S To Device D.

BMOVP

BMOVP (S) (D) (n)

Transmits n Pieces Of Data In S To Device D.

BMUL

BMUL (S1) (S2) (D)

Mutiplies 4 Digits BCD Data In S1 By 4 Digits BCD Data In S2.

BMULP

BMULP (S1) (S2) (D)

Mutiplies 4 Digits BCD Data In S1 By 4 Digits BCD Data In S2.

BREAK

Comes Out From The FOR ~ NEXT Instruction.

BREAKP

Comes Out From The FOR ~ NEXT Instruction.

BRST

BRST (D) (n)

Resets nth Bit in Word Data Bits In Device D.

BRSTP

BRSTP (D) (n)

Resets nth Bit in Word Data Bits In Device D.

BSET

BSET (D) (n)

Sets nth Bit In Data Bits In Device D.

BSETP

BSETP (D) (n)

Sets nth Bit In Data Bits In Device D.

BSFL

BSFL (D) (n)

n Pieces Of Data Are Shifted Left From Data In Device D And The Shifted

BSFLP

BSFLP (D) (n)

Lowest Data Is Filled With 0.
n Pieces Of Data Are Shifted Left From Data In Device D And The Shifted
Lowest Data Is Filled With 0.
BSFR

BSFR (D) (n)

BSFRP

BSFRP (D) (n)

n Pieces Of Data Are Shifted Right From Data In Device D And The Shifted
Uppermost Data Is Filled With 0.
n Pieces Of Data Are Shifted Right From Data In Device D And The Shifted
Uppermost Data Is Filled With 0.

BSIN

BSIN (S) (D)

Calculates the sin value of the designated value, and stores the sign of the
operation result in the device at D, and the operation result in the device
designated at D+1 and D+2

BSINP

BSINP (S) (D)

Calculates the sin value of the designated value, and stores the sign of the
operation result in the device at D, and the operation result in the device
designated at D+1 and D+2

BSQR

BSQR (S) (D)

Store appointed data to area that is specified by D after square root
arithmetic by S.

BSQRP

BSQRP (S) (D)

BSUB

BSUB (S1) (S2) (D)

Store appointed data to area that is specified by D after square root
arithmetic by S.
Subtracts 4 Digits BCD Data In S2 From 4 Digits BCD Data In S1 And
Stores The Result In Device D.

BSUBP

BSUBP (S1) (S2) (D)

BTAN

BTAN (S) (D)

Subtracts 4 Digits BCD Data In S2 From 4 Digits BCD Data In S1 And
Stores The Result In Device D.
Calculates TAN (tangent) value for value (angle) designated by S , and
stores the sign for the operation result in the word device designated by D ,
and the operation result in the word device designated by D +1 and D +2

BTANP

BTANP (S) (D)

Calculates TAN (tangent) value for value (angle) designated by S , and
stores the sign for the operation result in the word device designated by D ,
and the operation result in the word device designated by D +1 and D +2

BXCH

BXCH (D1) (D2) (n)

BXCHP

BXCHP (D1) (D2) (n)

Exchanges n Pieces Of Data In Device S And n Pieces Of Data In Device
D Each Other.
Exchanges n Pieces Of Data In Device S And n Pieces Of Data In Device

PLC Common

705

D Each Other.
CALL

CALL (n)

CALLP

CALLP (n)

If Input Condition Is ON While Processing Program, Processes The
Program Between The SBRT n To The RET According To The CALL n.
If Input Condition Is ON While Processing Program, Processes The
Program Between The SBRT n To The RET According To The CALL n.

CEND

If input condition is turned on, ends main routine program.

CENDP

If input condition is turned on, ends main routine program.

CLC

If Input Condition Is ON, Resets Carry Flag.

CML

CML (S) (D)

Inverts Each Bit Of Data In Device S And Stores The Result In Device D.

CMLP

CMLP (S) (D)

Inverts Each Bit Of Data In Device S And Stores The Result In Device D.

COS

COS (S) (D)

Performs COS (cosine) on angle designated by S and stores operation

COSP

COSP (S) (D)

result at device number designated by D
Performs COS (cosine) on angle designated by S and stores operation
result at device number designated by D
CTD

CTD (S) (t)

CTR

CTR (S) (t)

Subtracts One By One From Set Value Whenever Rising Edge Is Input. If
The Value Is 0, Sets Output.
Adds One By One Whenever Pulse Is Input. If The Value Reaches Set
Value, Sets Output. If Input Signal Is On From Off, Current Value Is
Increased From 0.

CTU

CTU (S) (t)

Adds One By One To Current Value Whenever Pulse Is Input. If Current
Value Is Over Set Value, Sets Output And Counts Up To Maximum Of
Counter.

CTUD

CTUD (S) (t)

Adds One By One Whenever Pulse Is Input To Up Terminal. Substracts
One By One Whenever Pulse Is Input To Down Terminal. If Current Value
Is Over Set Value, Sets Output.

DABIN

DABIN (S) (D)

Converts Decimal ASCII Code In Device S To 16bit BIN Data And Stores
The Result In Device D.

DABINP

DABINP (S) (D)

Converts Decimal ASCII Code In Device S To 16bit BIN Data And Stores
The Result In D.

DADD

DADD (S1) (S2) (D)

Adds Double- Word Data In S2 To Double-Word Data In S1 And Stores
The Result In Device D.

DADDP

DADDP (S1) (S2) (D)

Adds Double- Word Data In S2 To Double-Word Data In S1 And Stores
The Result In Device D.

DAND

DAND (S1) (S2) (D)

AND-Operates Data In Device S1 And Data In Device S2, And Stores The
Result In Device D.

DANDP

DANDP (S1) (S2) (D)

AND-Operates Data In Device S1 And Data In Device S2, And Stores The
Result In Device D.

DATE-

DATE- (S1) (S2) (D)

Subtrats Hour, Minute And Second Data In S2 From Hour, Minute And
Second Data In S1 Each Other, And Stores The Result In D In Due Order.

DATE+

DATE+ (S1) (S2) (D)

Adds Hour, Minute And Second Data In S2 To Hour, Minute And Second
Data In S1 Each Other, And Stores The Result In D In Due Order.

706

CIMON-PLC

DATE+P

DATE+P (S1) (S2) (D) Adds Hour, Minute And Second Data In S2 To Hour, Minute And Second
Data In S1 Each Other, And Stores The Result In D In Due Order.

DATE-P

DATE-P (S1) (S2) (D)

Subtrats Hour, Minute And Second Data In S2 From Hour, Minute And
Second Data In S1 Each Other, And Stores The Result In D In Due Order.

DATERD

DATERD (D)

Reads Year, Month, Day, Hour, Minute, Second And Day Of Week Data
From CPU Clock Device And Stores Them In Device D In Due Order.

DATERD
P

DATERDP (D)

DATEW
R

DATEWR (S)

DATEW
RP

DATEWRP (S)

DBADD

DBADD (S1) (S2) (D)

Reads Year, Month, Day, Hour, Minute, Second And Day Of Week Data
From CPU Clock Device And Stores Them In Device D In Due Order.
Year, Month, Day, Hour, Minute, Second And Day Of Week Data In S Are
Written In CPU Clock Device.
Year, Month, Day, Hour, Minute, Second And Day Of Week Data In S Are
Written In CPU Clock Device.
Adds 4 Digits BCD Double-Word Data In S2 To 4 Digits BCD Double-Word
Data In S1 And Stores The Result In Device D.

DBADDP DBADDP (S1) (S2)
(D)

Adds 4 Digits BCD Double-Word Data In S2 To 4 Digits BCD Double-Word

DBCD

Converts BIN DOuble-Word Data Value In S To BCD Double-Word Data

DBCD (S) (D)

Data In S1 And Stores The Result In Device D.
And Stores The Result In Device D.

DBCDDA DBCDDA (S) (D)

Converts 8 Digits BCD Data In S To Decimal ASCII Code And Stores The
Result In Device D.

DBCDDA DBCDDAP (S) (D)
P

Converts 8 Digits BCD Data In S To Decimal ASCII Code And Stores The

DBCDP

Converts Double-Word BIN Data Value In S To BCD Data And Stores The

DBCDP (S) (D)

Result In Device D.
result In Device D.

DBDIV

DBDIV (S1) (S2) (D)

Divides 8 Digits BCD Data In S1 By 8 Digits BCD Data And Stores The
Result In Device D.

DBDIVP

DBDIVP (S1) (S2) (D)

Divides 8 Digits BCD Data In S1 By 8 Digits BCD Data And Stores The
Result In Device D.

DBIN

DBIN (S) (D)

Converts 8 Digits BCD Data Value In S To BIN Data And Stores The Result
In Device D.

DBINDA

DBINDA (S) (D)

Converts BIN Data In S To Decimal ASCII Code And Stores The Result In
Device D.

DBINDA
P

DBINDAP (S) (D)

DBINHA

DBINHA (S) (D)

Converts BIN Data In S To Decimal ASCII Code And Stores The Result In
Device D.
Converts BIN Data In S To Hexadecimal ASCII Code And Stores The
Result In D.

DBINHA
P

DBINHAP (S) (D)

DBINP

DBINP (S) (D)

Converts BIN Data In S To Hexadecimal ASCII Code And Stores The
Result In D.
Converts 8 Digits BCD Data In S To BIN Data And Stores The Result In
Device D.

DBMUL

DBMUL (S1) (S2) (D)

Multiplies 8 Digits BCD Data In S1 By 8 Digits BCD Data In S2.

PLC Common

DBMULP DBMULP (S1) (S2)
(D)

Multiplies 8 Digits BCD Data In S1 By 8 Digits BCD Data In S2.

DBSUB

Subtracts 8 Digits BCD Data In S2 From 8 Digits BCD Data In S1.

DBSUB (S1) (S2) (D)

DBSUBP DBSUBP (S1) (S2)
(D)

Subtracts 8 Digits BCD Data In S2 From 8 Digits BCD Data In S1.

DCML

Inverts Each Bit Of Double-Word Data In S And Stores The Result In

DCML (S) (D)

707

Device D.
DCMLP

DCMLP (S) (D)

DDABIN

DDABIN (S) (D)

Inverts Each Bit Of Double-Word Data In S And Stores The Result In
Device D.
Converts Decimal ASCII Code In S To 32 Bit BIN Data And Stores The
Result In Device D.

DDABIN
P

DDABINP (S) (D)

DDEC

DDEC (D)

Converts Decimal ASCII Code In S To 32 Bit BIN Data And Stores The
Result In Device D.
Subtracts 1 From Double-Word Data Value In D And Stores The Result In
Device D Again.

DDECP

DDECP (D)

DEG

DEG (S) (D)

Subtracts 1 From Double-Word Data Value In D And Stores The Result In
Device D Again.
Converts Unit of angle size from radian units designated by S to angles,
and stores result at device number designated by D.

DEGP

DEGP (S) (D)

DDIV

DDIV (S1) (S2) (D)

Converts Unit of angle size from radian units designated by S to angles,
and stores result at device number designated by D.
Divides Double-Word Data In S1 By Double-Word Data In S2 And Stores
The Result In Device D.

DDIVP

DDIVP (S1) (S2) (D)

DEC

DEC (D)

Divides Double-Word Data In S1 By Double-Word Data In S2 And Stores
The Result In Device D.
Subtracts 1 From Data Value In D And Stores The Result In Device D
Again.

DECO

DECO (S) (D) (n)

DECOP

DECOP (S) (D) (n)

Decodes Lower n Bits In S And Sets The Contact Corresponding To Result
Of Device D.
Decodes Lower n Bits In S And Sets The Contact Corresponding To Result
Of Device D.

DECP

DECP (D)

DFLT

DFLT (S) (D)

Subtracts 1 From Data Value In D And Stores The Result In Device D
Again.
Converts 16-bit BIN data designated by S to floating decimal point real
number, and stores at device number designated by D

DFLTP

DFLTP (S) (D)

Converts 16-bit BIN data designated by S to floating decimal point real

DFRO

DFRO (n1) (n2) (D)
(n3)

Reads n3 Pieces Of Double-Word Data In User Program Memory n2 Of

DFROP

DFROP (n1) (n2) (D)
(n3)

Reads n3 Pieces Of Double-Word Data In User Program Memory n2 Of

DGBIN

DGBIN (S) (D)

Converts Gray code data at device designated by S to BIN 32-bit data and

number, and stores at device number designated by D
Optional Card n1(Slot Number) And Stores Them In Device D.
Optional Card n1(Slot Number) And Stores Them In Device D.

708

CIMON-PLC

stores at device designated by D.
DGBINP

DGBINP (S) (D)

DGRY

DGRY (S) (D)

Converts Gray code data at device designated by S to BIN 32-bit data and
stores at device designated by D.
Converts BIN data at the device designated by S to Gray code, and stores
result at device designated by D

DGRYP

DGRYP (S) (D)

DHABIN

DHABIN (S) (D)

Converts BIN data at the device designated by S to Gray code, and stores
result at device designated by D
Converts Hexadecimal ASCII Code In S To 32 BIt BIN Data And Stores
The Result In Device D.

DHABIN
P

DHABINP (S) (D)

Converts Hexadecimal ASCII Code In S To 32 BIt BIN Data And Stores

DI (n)

Stops Operating Time Driven Interrupt Assigned To n.

DINC

DINC (D)

Adds 1 To Double-Word Data Value In D And Stores The Result In D

The Result In Device D.

Again.
DINCP

DINCP (D)

Adds 1 To Double-Word Data Value In D And Stores The Result In D
Again.

DINT

DINT (S) (D)

Converts floating decimal point type real number designated by S to BIN
32-bit data, and stores the result at the device number designated by D
and D+1.

DINTP

DINTP (S) (D)

Converts floating decimal point type real number designated by S to BIN
32-bit data, and stores the result at the device number designated by D
and D+1.

DIS

DIS (S) (D) (n)

Stores n(n=1 Means 4 Bits) Pieces Of Numerical Value Data From S In
Lower Bit As Much As n From D Each.

DISP

DISP (S) (D) (n)

Stores n(n=1 Means 4 Bits) Pieces Of Numerical Value Data From S In
Lower Bit As Much As n From D Each.

DIV

DIV (S1) (S2) (D)

Divides Data In S1 By Data In S2 And Stores The Resutl In Device D.

DIVP

DIVP (S1) (S2) (D)

Divides Data In S1 By Data In S2 And Stores The Resutl In Device D.

DMAX

DMAX (S) (D) (n)

Stores The Biggest Value Among n Pieces Of Data From Double-Word
Data Of S, Its Location And Number Of The Values In D.

DMAXP

DMAXP (S) (D) (n)

Stores The Biggest Value Among n Pieces Of Data From Double-Word
Data Of S, Its Location And Number Of The Values In D.

DMIN

DMIN (S) (D) (n)

Stores The Smallest Value Among n Pieces Of Data From Double-Word
Data Of S, Its Location And Number Of The Values In D.

DMINP

DMINP (S) (D) (n)

Stores The Smallest Value Among n Pieces Of Data From Double-Word
Data Of S, Its Location And Number Of The Values In D.

DMOV

DMOV (S) (D)

Transmits Double-Word Data In Device S To Device D.

DMOVP

DMOVP (S) (D)

Transmits Double-Word Data In Device S To Device D.

DMUL

DMUL (S1) (S2) (D)

Multiplies Double-Word Data In S1 By Double-Word Data In S2 And Stores

DMULP

DMULP (S1) (S2) (D)

The Result In D.
Multiplies Double-Word Data In S1 By Double-Word Data In S2 And Stores

PLC Common

709

The Result In D.
DNEG

DNEG (D)

DNEGP

DNEGP (D)

Sign-Inverts Contents Of Double-Word Data In D And Stores The Result In
D Again.
Sign-Inverts Contents Of Double-Word Data In D And Stores The Result In
D Again.

DOR

DOR (S1) (S2) (D)

DORP

DORP (S1) (S2) (D)

OR-Operates Data In S1 And 32 Bit Data In S2, And Stores The Result In
D.
OR-Operates Data In S1 And 32 Bit Data In S2, And Stores The Result In
D.

DPGM

DPGM (n)

Disable program.

DRCL

DRCL (D) (n)

Shifts Left 32 Bits In D As Much As n Bits. Shifts The Uppermost Bit To
Carry Flag And Carry Flag To The Lowest Bit.

DRCLP

DRCLP (D) (n)

Shifts Left 32 Bits In D As Much As n Bits. Shifts The Uppermost Bit To
Carry Flag And Carry Flag To The Lowest Bit.

DRCR

DRCR (D) (n)

Shifts Right 32 Bits In D As Much As n Bits. Shifts The Lowest Bit To The
Uppermost Bit And Carry Flag.

DRCRP

DRCRP (D) (n)

Shifts Right 32 Bits In D As Much As n Bits. Shifts The Lowest Bit To The
Uppermost Bit And Carry Flag.

DROL

DROL (D) (n)

Shifts Left 32 Bits In D As Much As n Bits. Shifts The Uppermost Bit To The
Lowest Bit And Carry Flag.

DROLP

DROLP (D) (n)

Shifts Left 32 Bits In D As Much As n Bits. Shifts The Uppermost Bit To The
Lowest Bit And Carry Flag.

DROR

DROR (D) (n)

Shifts Right 32 Bits In D As Much As n Bits. Shifts The Lowest Bit To Carry
Flag And Carry Flag To The Uppermost Bit.

DRORP

DRORP (D) (n)

Shifts Right 32 Bits In D As Much As n Bits. Shifts The Lowest Bit To Carry
Flag And Carry Flag To The Uppermost Bit.

DSFL

DSFL (D) (n)

Shifts Left Double-Word Data Bits In D As Much As n Bits. Fills Lower n
Bits With 0 And Stores Them In D.

DSFLP

DSFLP (D) (n)

Shifts Left Double-Word Data Bits In D As Much As n Bits. Fills Lower n
Bits With 0 And Stores Them In D.

DSFR

DSFR (D) (n)

Shifts Right Double-Word Data Bits In D As Much As n Bits. Fills Upper n
Bits With 0 And Stores Them In D.

DSFRP

DSFRP (D) (n)

Shifts Right Double-Word Data Bits In D As Much As n Bits. Fills Upper n
Bits With 0 And Stores Them In D.

DSUB

DSUB (S1) (S2) (D)

Subtract Double- Word Data In S2 From Double-Word Data In S1 And
Stores The result In D.

DSUBP

DSUBP (S1) (S2) (D)

Subtract Double- Word Data In S2 From Double-Word Data In S1 And
Stores The result In D.

DSUM

DSUM (S) (D)

Counts Number Of Bit Data Which Are Set As 1 In Double-Word Data Of S
And Stores The Number.

DSUMP

DSUMP (S) (D)

Counts Number Of Bit Data Which Are Set As 1 In Double-Word Data Of S

710

CIMON-PLC

And Stores The Number.
DTEST

DTEST (S1) (S2) (D)

Stores The Bit Of Order Assigned to S2 In Double-Word Data Bit Of S1 In

DTESTP

DTESTP (S1) (S2) (D) Stores The Bit Of Order Assigned to S2 In Double-Word Data Bit Of S1 In

D. If It Is 1, Sets. If 0, Resets.
D. If It Is 1, Sets. If 0, Resets.
DTO

DTO (n1) (n2) (S) (n3) Writes n3 Pieces Of Double-Word Data In S To User Program Memory n2

DTOP

DTOP (n1) (n2) (S)
(n3)

Writes n3 Pieces Of Double-Word Data In S To User Program Memory n2

DUTY

DUTY (n1) (n2) (D)

Turns scan designated by n1 ON for user timing block designated by D,

DWDIV

DWDIV (S1) (S2) (D)

Of Optional Card n1(Slot Number).
Of Optional Card n1(Slot Number).
and scan designated by n2 OFF
This is used to divide the double data in the device assigned to S1, S1+1
by the DOUBLE data in the device assigned to S2, S2+1 storing the
quotient of the result in the device assigned to D
DWDIVP

DWDIV (S1) (S2) (D)

This is used to divide the double data in the device assigned to S1, S1+1
by the DOUBLE data in the device assigned to S2, S2+1 storing the
quotient of the result in the device assigned to D

DWMUL

DWMUL (S1) (S2) (D) Multiplies BIN 32-bit data designated by S1, S1+1 and BIN 32-bit data
designated by S2, S2+1 and stores the result in the device designated by
D, D+1.

DWMUL
P

DWMUL (S1) (S2) (D) Multiplies BIN 32-bit data designated by S1, S1+1 and BIN 32-bit data

DXCH

DXCH (S) (D)

designated by S2, S2+1 and stores the result in the device designated by
D, D+1.
Exchanges Double-Word Data In S With Double-Word Data In D Each
Other.

DXCHP

DXCHP (S) (D)

DXNR

DXNR (S1) (S2) (D)

Exchanges Double-Word Data In S With Double-Word Data In D Each
Other.
Exclusive - NOR-Operates Double-Word Data In S1 And Double-Word
Data In S2, And Stores The Result In D.

DXNRP

DXNRP (S1) (S2) (D)

DXOR

DXOR (S1) (S2) (D)

Exclusive - NOR-Operates Double-Word Data In S1 And Double-Word
Data In S2, And Stores The Result In D.
Exclusive - OR-Operates Double-Word Data In S1 And Double-Word Data
In S2, And Stores The Result In D.

DXORP

DXORP (S1) (S2) (D)

EADD

EADDP (S1) (S2) (D)

Exclusive - OR-Operates Double-Word Data In S1 And Double-Word Data
In S2, And Stores The Result In D.
This is used to add the floating-point data in the device assigned to S1 to
the floating-point data in the device assigned to S2, storing the result in the
device assigned D.

EADDP

EADDP (S1) (S2) (D)

This is used to add the floating-point data in the device assigned to S1 to
the floating-point data in the device assigned to S2, storing the result in the
device assigned D.

PLC Common

ECALL

ECALL (Program ID)
(n)

711

Calls Sub-Routine From Other Program File. (Pn-Point Number Of SubRoutine)

ECALLP

ECALLP (Program ID) Calls Sub-Routine From Other Program File. (Pn-Point Number Of Sub(n)
Routine)

EDIV

EDIV (S1) (S2) (D)

This is used to divide the floating-point data in the device assigned to S1 to
the floating-point data in the device assigned to S2, storing the result in the
device assigned D.

EDIVP

EDIVP (S1) (S2) (D)

This is used to divide the floating-point data in the device assigned to S1 to
the floating-point data in the device assigned to S2, storing the result in the
device assigned D.

EI (n)

Operates Time Driven Interrrupt Assigned To n.

EMOV

EMOV (S) (D)

This is used to transfer the Floating-point data in the device assigned to S
to the device assigned to D.

EMOVP

EMOVP (S) (D)

ENCO

ENCO (S) (D) (n)

This is used to transfer the Floating-point data in the device assigned to S
to the device assigned to D.
Encodes The Uppermost Bit Location Which Is Set As 1 In 2^n Of S And
Stores The Result In D In Numerical Value Data.

ENCOP

ENCOP (S) (D) (n)

END

Encodes The Uppermost Bit Location Which Is Set As 1 In 2^n Of S And
Stores The Result In D In Numerical Value Data.
It Is The Instruction To Inform Ending Main Routine Program. In Case
Jump Instruction Prior To It Is Operated, It Is Not Operated.

EPGM

EPGM (n)

Enable program

ESUB

ESUB (S1) (S2) (D)

This is used to subtract the Floating-point data in the device assigned to S2
from the Floating-point data in the device assigned to S1, storing the result
in the device assigned to D.

ESUBP

ESUBP (S1) (S2) (D)

This is used to subtract the Floating-point data in the device assigned to S2
from the Floating-point data in the device assigned to S1, storing the result
in the device assigned to D.

EXP

EXP (S) (D)

Calculates exponent for value designated by S, and stores the result of the
operation at the device designate by D

EXPP

EXPP (S) (D)

Calculates exponent for value designated by S, and stores the result of the
operation at the device designate by D

FDEL

FDEL (DEV) (TBL) (n) Delete A Data From Data Table

FIFR

FIFR (DEV) (TBL)

Read the oldest data from [TBL+1] and stores it at the device designated
by [DEV].
After the execution of FIFR, the data in the table moves to the previous
device and the last data will be zero.
The number of data of the data table will be decreased.

FIFRP

FIFRP (DEV) (TBL)

Read the oldest data from [TBL+1] and stores it at the device designated
by [DEV].
After the execution of FIFR, the data in the table moves to the previous

712

CIMON-PLC

device and the last data will be zero.
The number of data of the data table will be decreased.
FIFW

FIFW (DEV) (TBL)

Stores the 16 bit data designated by [DEV] at the end of the data table
designated by [TBL].
The number of data blocks stored at [TBL] will be increased.

FIFWP

FIFWP (DEV) (TBL)

Stores the 16 bit data designated by [DEV] at the end of the data table
designated by [TBL].
The number of data blocks stored at [TBL] will be increased.

FINS

FINS (DEV) (TBL) (n)

Insert A Data in Data Table

FLT

FLT (S) (D)

Converts 16-bit BIN data designated by S to floating decimal point real

FLTP

FLTP (S) (D)

number, and stores at device number designated by D .
Converts 16-bit BIN data designated by S to floating decimal point real
number, and stores at device number designated by D .
FMOV

FMOV (S) (D) (n)

Transmits Data In S To n Pieces Of Device From Device D In Due Order.

FMOVP

FMOVP (S) (D) (n)

Transmits Data In S To n Pieces Of Device From Device D In Due Order.

FOR

FOR (n)

Runs The Step Next To NEXT Instruction After Has Processed Between
FOR And NEXT At n Times.

FPOP

FPOP (DEV) (TBL)

Find Last Data in Data Table

FREAD

FREAD (n1) (n2) (D)
(n3) (n4)

Read n3 words of data from the address designated by n2 ofthe system
memory of the special function module designated by n1.
Then, stores the data in the area starting from the device designated by D.
The result of instruction is stored to the device designated by n3.

FREADP

FREADP (n1) (n2) (D) Read n3 words of data from the address designated by n2 ofthe system
(n3) (n4)
memory of the special function module designated by n1.
Then, stores the data in the area starting from the device designated by D.
The result of instruction is stored to the device designated by n3.

FROM
FROMP
FWRITE

FROM (n1) (n2) (D)
(n3)

Reads n3 Pieces Of Word Data In User Program Memory n2 Of Optional

FROMP (n1) (n2) (D)
(n3)

Reads n3 Pieces Of Word Data In User Program Memory n2 Of Optional

FWRITE (n1) (n2) (D)
(n3) (n4)

Write n3 words of data from the device designated by D to the area starting

Card n1(SLot Number) And Stores The Result In D.
Card n1(SLot Number) And Stores The Result In D.
from the address designated by n2 of the system memory of the special
function module designated by n1.

FWRITE
P

FWRITEP (n1) (n2)
(D) (n3) (n4)

Write n3 words of data from the device designated by D to the area starting
from the address designated by n2 of the system memory of the special
function module designated by n1.

GBIN

GBIN (S) (D)

Converts Gray code data at device designated by S to BIN 16-bit data and
stores at device designated by D.

GBINP

GBINP (S) (D)

Converts Gray code data at device designated by S to BIN 16-bit data and
stores at device designated by D.

GDI

Stops Operating Time Driven Interrrupt In Entire Program.

PLC Common

713

GEI

Operates Time Driven Interrrupt In Entire Program.

GRY

GRY (S) (D)

Converts BIN data at the device designated by S to Gray code, and stores

GRYP

GRYP (S) (D)

result at device designated by D.
Converts BIN data at the device designated by S to Gray code, and stores
result at device designated by D.
HABIN

HABIN (S) (D)

HABINP

HABINP (S) (D)

Converts Hexadecimal ASCII COde In S To 16 Bit BIN Data And Stores
The Result In D.
Converts Hexadecimal ASCII COde In S To 16 Bit BIN Data And Stores
The Result In D.

HOUR

HOUR (S) (D)

HOURP

HOURP (S) (D)

Converts Second Data In S To Hour, Minute And Second Data And Stores
The Result In D In Due Order.
Converts Second Data In S To Hour, Minute And Second Data And Stores
The Result In D In Due Order.

INC

INC (D)

Adds 1 To Data Value In D And Stores The Result In D Again.

INCP

INCP (D)

Adds 1 To Data Value In D And Stores The Result In D Again.

INITEND

Ends Initialization Program ANd Runs Scan Program.

INT

INT (S) (D)

Converts the floating decimal point real number designated at S into BIN
16-bit data and stores it at the device number designated at D.

INTP

INTP (S) (D)

INV

Converts the floating decimal point real number designated at S into BIN
16-bit data and stores it at the device number designated at D.
Inverts The Left Circuit, A Contact Circuit To B Contact Circuit And B
Contact Circuit To A Contact Circuit.

IRET

Shows THe End OF Interrupt Program.

JME

JME (n)

If Input Of JMP n Instruction Is On, Jumps Next To JME n And Does Not
Process All The Instructions Up To JME n.

JMP

JMP (n)

If Input Of JMP n Instruction Is On, Jumps Next To JME n And Does Not
Process All The Instructions Up To JME n.

JMPP

JMPP (n)

If JMPP n Instruction Input Is On, Jumps Next To JME n And Does Not
Process All The Instructions Up To JME n.

LD (S)

Takes ON/OFF Data For a Contact Of One Circuit AS Operation Result.

LD<

LD< (S1) (S2)

If Data In S1 Is Less Than Data In S2, Sets Result Of The Current

LD<=

LD<= (S1) (S2)

Operation.
If Data In S1 Is Less Than Or Equal To Data In S2, Sets Result Of The
Current Operation.
LD<>

LD<> (S1) (S2)

LD=

LD= (S1) (S2)

If Data In S1 Is Not Equal To Data In S2, Sets Result Of The Current
Operation.
If Data In S1 Is Equal To Data In S2, Sets Result Of The Current
Operation.

LD>

LD> (S1) (S2)

LD>=

LD>= (S1) (S2)

If Data In S1 Is Greater Than Data In S2, Sets Result Of The Current
Operation.
If Data In S1 Is Greater Than Or Equal To Data In S2, Sets Result Of The

714

CIMON-PLC

Current Operation.
LDBT

LDBT (S1) (S2)

LDBTI

LDBTI (S1) (S2)

LD-Operates the bit of the order assigned to S2 in the word device data
assigned to S1 and Contact A.
These are used to read the bit data assigned to S2 among the word
addresses in Device D assigned to S1, starting the operation for Contact A
(LDBT) and the one for Contact B(LDBTI). The information(On/Off) on the
assigned Device are received and taken as the result of their operation

LDD<

LDD< (S1) (S2)

If Data In S1 Is Less Than Data In S2, Sets Result Of The Current
Operation.

LDD<=

LDD<= (S1) (S2)

LDD<>

LDD<> (S1) (S2)

If Data In S1 Is Less Than Or Equal To Data In S2, Sets Result Of The
Current Operation.
If Data In S1 Is Not Equal To Data In S2, Sets Result Of The Current
Operation.

LDD=

LDD= (S1) (S2)

LDD>

LDD> (S1) (S2)

If Data In S1 Is Equal To Data In S2, Sets Result Of The Current
Operation.
If Data In S1 Is Greater Than Data In S2, Sets Result Of The Current
Operation.

LDD>=

LDD>= (S1) (S2)

If Data In S1 Is Greater Than Or Equal To Data In S2, Sets Result Of The

LDF

LDF (S)

If Input Condition Is OFF From ON, Sets For One Scan.

LDI

LDI (S)

Takes ON/OFF Data For b Contact Of One Circuit As Operation Result.

LDP

LDP (S)

If Input Condition Is ON From OFF, Sets For One Scan.

LOG

LOG (S) (D)

Calculates natural logarithm of value designated by S taking e as base,

Current Operation.

and stores operation results at device designated by D.
LOGP

LOGP (S) (D)

Calculates natural logarithm of value designated by S taking e as base,
and stores operation results at device designated by D.

MAX

MAX (S) (D) (n)

Stores The Biggest Value Among n Pieces Of Data From Data In S, Its
Location And Number Of The Values In D.

MAXP

MAXP (S) (D) (n)

Stores The Biggest Value Among n Pieces Of Data From Data In S, Its
Location And Number Of The Values In D.

MC (n)

If Input Of MC Is ON, Operates Up To Same MCR. If Input Conditon Is
OFF, Does Not Operates.

MCR

MCR (n)

If Input Of MC Is ON, Operates Up To Same MCR. If Input Conditon Is
OFF, Does Not Operates.

MIN

MIN (S) (D) (n)

Stores The Smallest Value Among n Pieces Of Data From Data In S, Its
Location And Number Of The Values In D.

MINP

MINP (S) (D) (n)

Stores The Smallest Value Among n Pieces Of Data From Data In S, Its
Location And Number Of The Values In D.

MOV

MOV (S) (D)

Transmits Word Data In Device S To Device D.

MOVP

MOVP (S) (D)

Transmits Word Data In Device S To Device D.

MPP

It Is Used to End Branching. Reads The Stored State From Memory And

PLC Common

715

Operates The Result.
MPS

MPS

It IS Used To Branch At First. Stores Operation Result In Memory.

MRD

It Is Used To Relay Branching. Reads The Stored State From Memory And
Operates The Result.

MUL

MUL (S1) (S2) (D)

Multiplies Data In S1 By Data In S2 And Stores The Result In D.

MULP

MULP (S1) (S2) (D)

Multiplies Data In S1 By Data In S2 And Stores The Result In D.

NEG

NEG (D)

Sign-Inverts Contents Of Data In D And Stores The Result In D Again.

NEGP

NEGP (D)

Sign-Inverts Contents Of Data In D And Stores The Result In D Again.

Runs The Step Next To NEXT Instruction After Has Processed Between
FOR And NEXT At n Times.

NOP

OR (S)

As No Operation Instruction, Does Not Influence Operation Result Of The
Corresponding Circuit.
OR-Operates a Contact Of The Assigned Contact And The Connected
Contact In Parallel And Takes The Result As Operation Result.

OR<

OR< (S1) (S2)

OR<=

OR<= (S1) (S2)

If Data In S1 Is Less Than Data In S2, Sets.If Greater Than Or Equal To,
Resets. OR-Operates The Result And Result Of The Current Operation.
If Data In S1 Is Less Than Or Equal To Data In S2, Sets. If Greater Than,
Resets. OR-Operates The Result And Result Of The Current Operation.

OR<>

OR<> (S1) (S2)

OR=

OR= (S1) (S2)

If Data In S1 Is Not Equal To Data In S2, Sets. If Equal To, Off. OROperates The Result And Result Of The Current Operation.
If Data In S1 Is Equal To Data In S2, Sets. If Not Equal To, Resets. OROperates The Result And Result Of The Current Operation.

OR>

OR> (S1) (S2)

OR>=

OR>= (S1) (S2)

If Data In S1 Is Greater than Data In S2, Sets. If Less than Or Equal To,
Resets. OR-Operates The Result And Result Of The Current Operation.
If Data InS1 Is Greater Than Or Equal To Data In S2, Sets. If Less Than,
Resets. OR-Operates The Result And Result Of The Current Operation.

ORB

OR-Operates Blocks And Takes The result As Operation Result.

ORBT

ORBT (S1) (S2)

OR-Operates the bit of the order assigned to S2 in the word device data
assigned to S1 and Contact A.

ORBTI

ORBTI (S1) (S2)

These are to read the bit data assigned to S2 among the word addresses
in Device D assigned to S1, connecting in a series with Contact A(ANDBT)
and Contact B(ANDBTI). The information(On/Off) on the assigned device
are received and AND-operated with the result of the operation till then.
The results of the AND-operation is taken as their operation.

ORD<

ORD< (S1) (S2)

ORD<=

ORD<= (S1) (S2)

If Data In S1 Is Less Than Data In S2, Sets. If Greater Than Or Equal To,
Off. OR-Operates The Result And Result Of The Current Operation.
If Data In S1 Is Less Than Or Equal To Data In S2, Sets. If Greater Than,
Resets. OR-Operates The Result And Result Of The Current Operation.

ORD<>

ORD<> (S1) (S2)

ORD=

ORD= (S1) (S2)

If Data In S1 Is Not Equal To Data In S2, Sets. If Equal To, resets. OROperates The Result And Result Of The Current Operation.
If Data In S1 Is Equal To Data In S2, Sets. If Not Equal To, Resets. OR-

716

CIMON-PLC

Operates The Result And Result Of The Current Operation.
ORD>

ORD> (S1) (S2)

ORD>=

ORD>= (S1) (S2)

If Data In S1 Is Greater Than Data In S2, Sets. If Less Than Or Equal To,
Resets. OR-Operates The Result And Result Of The Current Operation.
If Data In S1 Is Greater Than Or Equal To Data In S2, Sets. If Less Than,
Resets. OR-Operates The Result And Result Of The Current Operation.

ORE<

ORE (S1) (S2)

ORE<=

ORE<= (S1) (S2)

If Data In S1 Is Less Than Data In S2, Sets. If Greater Than Or Equal To,
Off. OR-Operates The Result And Result Of The Current Operation
If Data In S1 Is Less Than Or Equal To Data In S2, Sets. If Greater Than,
Resets. OR-Operates The Result And Result Of The Current Operation.

ORE<>

ORE<> (S1) (S2)

ORE=

ORE= (S1) (S2)

If Data In S1 Is Not Equal To Data In S2, Sets. If Equal To, resets. OROperates The Result And Result Of The Current Operation
If Data In S1 Is Equal To Data In S2, Sets. If Not Equal To, Resets. OROperates The Result And Result Of The Current Operation.

ORE>

ORE> (S1) (S2)

ORE>=

ORE>= (S1) (S2)

ORF

ORF (S)

ORI

ORI (S)

If Input Condition Of Connection In Parallel Contact Is OFF From ON, Sets
For One Scan.
OR-Operates b Contact Of the Assigned Contact And The Connected
Contact In Parallel, And Takes The Result As Operation Result.

ORP

ORP (S)

If Input Condition Of Connection In Parallel Contact Is OFF From ON, Sets

OUT

OUT (D)

Outputs Operation Result To The Assigned Contact.

PEND

It Means End Of Program And Is Put On The Last Part.

PIDCAL

PIDCAL (S)

Assigns Device Where Result Value Of PID Operation IS Stored As S.

PIDINIT

PIDINIT (S)

Assigns Device Where The Set Value For PID Operation Is Stored As S.

PLF

PLF (D)

If Input Condition Is OFF From ON, Sets The Assigned Contact For One

For One Scan.

Scan. Otherwise, Resets.
PLS

PLS (D)

If INput Condition IS ON From OFF, Sets The Assigned Contact For One
Scan. Otherwise, Resets.

RAD

RAD (S) (D)

Converts units of angle size from angle units designated by S to radian
units, and stores result at device number designated by D.

RADP

RADP (S) (D)

Converts units of angle size from angle units designated by S to radian
units, and stores result at device number designated by D.

RCL

RCL (D) (n)

Shifts Left 16 Pieces Of Bit In D As Much As n Bits. Shifts The Uppermost
Bit To Carry Flag And Carry Flag To The Lowest Bit.

RCLP

RCLP (D) (n)

Shifts Left 16 Pieces Of Bit In D As Much As n Bits. Shifts The Uppermost
Bit To Carry Flag And Carry Flag To The Lowest Bit.

RCR

RCR (D) (n)

Shifts Right 16 Pieces Of Bit In D As Much As n Bits. Shifts The Lowest Bit
To Carry Flag And Carry Flag.

PLC Common

RCRP

RCRP (D) (n)

717

Shifts Right 16 Pieces Of Bit In D As Much As n Bits. Shifts The Lowest Bit
To Carry Flag And Carry Flag.

RCV

RCV (Slot)(D)(Size)
(Result)

Reads And Brings Data In Slave Station To Device Of Master Station.

RCVP

RCVP (Slot)(D)(Size)
(Result)

Reads Data In Slave Station To Device Of Master Station.

RECV

RECV (PID)
(F_Name) (Result)

Compares the data received from master station with the data(F_Name)
set up by Special Function Program(PID), storing them in the assigned
device.

RECVP

RECVP (PID)
(F_Name) (Result)

Compares the data received from master station with the data(F_Name)
set up by Special Function Program(PID), storing them in the assigned
device.

RET

If Input Condition Is ON While Running Program, Runs The Program
Between SBRT n And RET Accoding To CALL n.

RFS

RFS (S) (n)

Refreshes n Pieces Of Device Which Are Assigned To S For One Scan.

RFSP

RFSP (S) (n)

Refreshes n Pieces Of Device Which Are Assigned To S For One Scan.

RND

RND (D)

Generates random number of from 0 to 32767, and stores at device
designated by D

RNDP

RNDP (D)

Generates random number of from 0 to 32767, and stores at device
designated by D

ROL

ROL (D) (n)

Shifts Left 16 Pieces Of Bit In D As Much As n Bits. Shifts The Uppermost
Bit To The Lowest Bit And Carry Flag.

ROLP

ROLP (D) (n)

Shifts Left 16 Pieces Of Bit In D As Much As n Bits. Shifts The Uppermost
Bit To The Lowest Bit And Carry Flag.

ROR

ROR (D) (n)

Shifts Right 16 Pieces Of Bit In D As Much As n Bits. Shifts The Lowest Bit
To Carry Flag And Carry Flag To The Uppermost Bit.

RORP

RORP (D) (n)

Shifts Right 16 Pieces Of Bit In D As Much As n Bits. Shifts The Lowest Bit
To Carry Flag And Carry Flag To The Uppermost Bit.

RST

RST (D)

If Input Condition Is ON, Keeps Output Contact In OFF State. Though The
Input Is OFF, Keeps Resetting Output.

SBRT

SBRT (n)

If Input Condition Is ON While Running Program, Runs The Program
Between SBRT n And RET Accoding To CALL n.

SCL

SCL (S) (D) (P) (n)

Converts signed binary data into signed binary data according to Scale
parameter table .

SCLP

SCLP (S) (D) (P) (n)

Converts signed binary data into signed binary data according to Scale
parameter table .

SECOND SECOND (S) (D)

Converts Hour, Minute And Second Data In S To Second Data Each And
Stores The Result In D.

SECOND SECONDP (S) (D)
P

Converts Hour, Minute And Second Data In S To Second Data Each And

SEG

Decodes n Pieces Of Number From Start Bit In S As 7 Segment By The

SEG (S) (D)

Stores The Result In D.
Set Format And Stores The Result In D.

718

CIMON-PLC

SEGP

SEGP (S) (D)

Decodes n Pieces Of Number From Start Bit In S As 7 Segment By The
Set Format And Stores The Result In D.

SEND
SENDP
SET

SEND (PID)
(F_Name) (Result)

Sends the data(F_Name) set up by Special Function Program(PID) from

SENDP (PID)
(F_Name) (Result)

Sends the data(F_Name) set up by Special Function Program(PID) from

SET (D)

If Input Condition Is ON, Keeps Output Contact In ON State. Though The

master station to the device of slave station.
master station to the device of slave station.
Input Is OFF, Keeps Setting Output.

SFL

SFL (D) (n)

Shifts Left Data Bit In D As Much As n Bits. Fills Lower n Bits With 0 And
Stores the Result In D.

SFLP

SFLP (D) (n)

Shifts Left Data Bit In D As Much As n Bits. Fills Lower n Bits With 0 And
Stores the Result In D.

SFR

SFR (D) (n)

Shifts Right Data Bit In D As Much As n Bits. Fills Upperr n Bits With 0 And
Stores the Result In D.

SFRP

SFRP (D) (n)

Shifts Right Data Bit In D As Much As n Bits. Fills Upperr n Bits With 0 And
Stores the Result In D.

SIN

SIN (S) (D)

Calculates SIN (sine) value of angle designated at S and stores the
operation result in the device number designated at D

SINP

SINP (S) (D)

Calculates SIN (sine) value of angle designated at S and stores the
operation result in the device number designated at D

SND

SND (Slot)(S)(Size)
(Result)

Transmits Data In Device Of Master Atation To Device Of Slave Station.

SNDP

SNDP (Slot)(S)(Size)
(Result)

Transmits Data In Device Of Master Atation To Device Of Slave Station.

SQR

SQR (S) (D)

Calculates square root of value designated at S , and stores the operation
result in the device number designated at D

SQRP

SQRP (S) (D)

Calculates square root of value designated at S , and stores the operation
result in the device number designated at D

SRND

SRND (S)

Updates random number series according to the 16-bit BIN data being
stored in device designated by S

SRNDP

SRNDP (S)

Updates random number series according to the 16-bit BIN data being
stored in device designated by S

STC

If Input Condition Is On, Sets Carry Flag.

STOP

To Stop Operation At The Time When Users Want, Converts To Program
Mode After Finishing The Scan In Progress.

SUB

SUB (S1) (S2) (D)

Subtracts Data In S2 From Data In S1 And Stores The Result In Device D.

SUBP

SUBP (S1) (S2) (D)

Subtracts Data In S2 From Data In S1 And Stores The Result In Device D.

SUM

SUM (S) (D)

Counts Number Of Bit Data Which Are Set As 1 In Data Of S And Stores
The Number.

SUMP

SUMP (S) (D)

Counts Number Of Bit Data Which Are Set As 1 In Data Of S And Stores
The Number.

SWAP

SWAP (D)

Exchanges The Upper Byte Of Data In D With The Lower Byte Of It And

PLC Common

719

Stores The Result In Device D.
SWAPP

SWAPP (D)

TAN

TAN (S) (D)

Exchanges The Upper Byte Of Data In D With The Lower Byte Of It And
Stores The Result In Device D.
Performs tangent (TAN) operation on angle data designated by S , and
stores operation result in device designated by D .

TANP

TANP (S) (D)

TEST

TEST (S1) (S2) (D)

Performs tangent (TAN) operation on angle data designated by S , and
stores operation result in device designated by D .
Stores Bit Of The Assigned Order Among Data Bits In S1. If The Result Is
1, Sets. If 0, Resets.

TESTP

TESTP (S1) (S2) (D)

TMON

TMON (S) (t)

Stores Bit Of The Assigned Order Among Data Bits In S1. If The Result Is
1, Sets. If 0, Resets.
Though Output Is Set And Input Is Set-Reset Repeatly, If Current Value Is
Subtracted Whenever It Is Set And Reaches 0, Timer Output Is Reset.

TMR

TMR (S) (t)

Though Current Value Is Increased And Input Is On-Off Reapeatly, If The
Current Value Is Accumulated Whenever It Is On And Reaches Set Time,
Timer Contact Is Set.

TO (n1) (n2) (S) (n3)

Writes n3 Pieces Data In S To User Program Memory n2 Of Optional Card
n1(Slot Number).

TOFF

TOFF (S) (t)

When Input Condition Is Off, The Set Value Is Subtracted. If Current Value
Reaches 0, Output Is Reset.

TON

TON (S) (t)

If Curren Value Is Increased And Reaches Set Value, Timer Contact Is Set.

TOP

TOP (n1) (n2) (S) (n3) Writes n3 Pieces Data In S To User Program Memory n2 Of Opetional

TRTG

TRTG (S) (t)

Card n1(Slot Numer).
If Output Is Set And Current Value Is Subtracted To Reach 0, Output Is
Reset. If Output Is Reset Before Current Value Is 0, Current Value Is Set
Up As Set Value.
UCMP

UCMP (S1) (S2)

Compares BIN 16-bit data the nth point from the device number designated
by S1 with BIN 16-bit data the nth point from the device number designated
by S2 , and the result are stores Flag F(F0120 ~ F0125)

UCMPP

UCMPP (S1) (S2)

UNI

UNI (S) (D) (n)

Combines Each Lower 4 Bits Of n(n=1 Means 4 Bits) Pieces Of Data In S,
And Stores the Result In Device D.

UNIP

UNIP (S) (D) (n)

Combines Each Lower 4 Bits Of n(n=1 Means 4 Bits) Pieces Of Data In S,
And Stores the Result In Device D.

WAND

WAND (S1) (S2) (D)

AND-Operates Data In S1 And Data In S2, And Stores In Device D.

WANDP

WANDP (S1) (S2) (D) AND-Operates Data In S1 And Data In S2, And Stores In Device D.

WBMOV

WBMOV (S) (D) (fm)

WBMOV
P

WBMOVP (S) (D) (fm) transfer data from S to D, obey fm

transfer data from S to D, obey fm

720

CIMON-PLC

WDIV

WDIV (S1) (S2) (D)

This is used to divide the word data in the device assigned to S1 by the
word data in the device assigned to S2, storing the quotient of the result in
the device assigned to D

WDIVP

WDIVP (S1) (S2) (D)

This is used to divide the word data in the device assigned to S1 by the
word data in the device assigned to S2, storing the quotient of the result in
the device assigned to D

WDT

Resets Watch Dog Timer While Operating Program.

WDTP

Resets Watch Dog Timer While Operating Program.

WMUL

WMUL (S1) (S2) (D)

Multiplies BIN 16-bit data designated by S1 and BIN 16-bit data designated
by S2 , and stores the result in the device designated by D.

WMULP

WMULP (S1) (S2) (D) Multiplies BIN 16-bit data designated by S1 and BIN 16-bit data designated
by S2 , and stores the result in the device designated by D.

WOR

WOR (S1) (S2) (D)

OR-Operates Data In S1 And Data In S2, And Stores The Result In Device
D.

WORP

WORP (S1) (S2) (D)

OR-Operates Data In S1 And Data In S2, And Stores The Result In Device
D.

WSUM

WSUM (S) (D) (n)

Summed up all 16bit binary data for n words from the device designated at
S, and stored it in the device designated at D

WSUMP

WSUMP (S) (D) (n)

Summed up all 16bit binary data for n words from the device designated at
S, and stored it in the device designated at D

WXNR

WXNR (S1) (S2) (D)

Exclusive - NOR-Operates Data In S1 And Data In S2, And Stores The
Result In D.

WXNRP

WXNRP (S1) (S2) (D) Exclusive - NOR-Operates Data In S1 And Data In S2, And Stores The
Result In D.

WXOR

WXOR (S1) (S2) (D)

Exclusive - OR-Operates Data In S1 And Data In S2, And Stores The
Result In D.

WXORP

WXORP (S1) (S2) (D) Exclusive - OR-Operates Data In S1 And Data In S2, And Stores The
Result In D.

XCH

XCH (D1) (D2)

Exchanges Word Data In S With Word Data In D.

XCHP

XCHP (D1) (D2)

Exchanges Word Data In S With Word Data In D.

ABRST1

ABRST1 (Base/Slot)
(S) (D)

ABRST2

ABRST2 (Base/Slot)
(S) (D)

ABRST3

ABRST3 (Base/Slot)
(S) (D)

ABRST4

ABRST4 (Base/Slot)
(S) (D)

PSTRT1

PSTRT1 (Base/Slot)
(S) (D)

PSTRT2

PSTRT2 (Base/Slot)
(S) (D)

PSTRT3

PSTRT3 (Base/Slot)
(S) (D)

PLC Common

5.4

PSTRT4

PSTRT4 (Base/Slot)
(S) (D)

TEACH1

TEACH1 (Base/Slot)
(S) (D)

TEACH2

TEACH2 (Base/Slot)
(S) (D)

TEACH3

TEACH3 (Base/Slot)
(S) (D)

TEACH4

TEACH4 (Base/Slot)
(S) (D)

PFWRT

PFWRT (Base/Slot)
(S) (D)

PINIT

PINIT (Base/Slot) (S)
(D)

Internal Flag(Relay) F
This is used to get information about the state or PLC, time, day and so on.

F Zone

F0000

F0010

F0020

F0030

Function

Description

F0000 : Run Mode

In case of RUN Mode, ON

F0001 : Program Mode

In case of Program Mode, ON

F0002 : Pause Mode

In case of Pause Mode, ON

F0003 : Debug Mode

In case of Debug Mode, ON

F0007 : Remote Mode

In case of Remote Mode, ON

F000F : Execute Stop
Instruction

In case of Executing Stop, ON

F0010 : Always ON

Always ON

F0011 : Always OFF

Always OFF

F0012 : ON at first scan only

ON for a SCAN

F0013 : OFF at first scan only

OFF for a SCAN

F0014 : Toggle at each scan

Invert every scan Unused

Reserved

F0030 : Major Breakdown

In case of major breakdown error, ON

F0031 : Minor Breakdown

In case of minor breakdown error, OFF

F0032 : WDT Error

In case of Watchdog Timer error, ON

F0033 : I/O combined Error

In case of I/O combined Error, ON

F0034 : Battery voltage low

In case of low voltage than standard, ON

F0037 : Forced ON/OFF

In case of forced ON/OFF to I/O, ON

F0040 ~ 7 : I/O Error

If reserved I/O and mounted I/O are different, number of
different SLOT stored. (0 ~ 11)

F0048 ~ F : I/O Error

If reserved I/O and mounted I/O are different, number of
different expansion stored. (0 ~ 11)

Error Code

F0040

F0050

721

722

CIMON-PLC

In case of Dual Port RAM Access Error, Details
F0070

F0070 ~ 7

Number of slot(0 ~ 11) stored.

F0078 ~ F

Number of expansions (0 ~ F) stored.

CM1-CP1A : "1A"
CM1-CP1B : "1B"
CM1-CP1R : "1R"
CM1-CP2A : "2A"
F0080

CM1-CP2B : "2B"
CM1-CP3A : "3A"

Type of PLC is displayed as ASCII value.

CM1-CP3B : "3B"
CM1-CP4A : "4A"
CM1-CP4B : "4B"
CM1-BP : "B0"
F0090 : 0.02s Interval
SYSTEM CLOCK
F0091 : 0.1s Interval SYSTEM
CLOCK
F0092 : 0.2s Interval SYSTEM
CLOCK

F0090

F0093 : 1s Interval SYSTEM
CLOCK
F0094 : 2s Interval SYSTEM
CLOCK

ON / OFF in a constant interval under RUN operation.
(During operation, initial value is 0)

F0095 : 10s Interval SYSTEM
CLOCK
F0096 : 20s Interval SYSTEM
CLOCK
F0097 : 1m Interval SYSTEM
CLOCK
F0100 : USER CLOCK 0
F0101 : USER CLOCK 1
F0102 : USER CLOCK 2
F0103 : USER CLOCK 3
F0100

F0104 : USER CLOCK 4

User can use "DUTY" instruction to cycle On / Off.
(Initial setting is Off)

F0105 : USER CLOCK 5
F0106 : USER CLOCK 6
F0107 : USER CLOCK 7
F0108 - F10F : Not Use

F0110

F0110 : In case of operation
error, ON

To modify whenever operation

F0111 : Zero Flag

Zero Flag

F0112 : Carry Flag

Carry Flag

F0118 : In case all outputs
OFF, ON

In case all outputs OFF, ON

F0119 : DPRAM Access Error

Details are stored in F0007

PLC Common

F0120

F0120 : < Flag

Less, ON

F0121 : = Flag

Less or equal, ON

F0122 : = Flag

Equal, ON

F0123 : > Flag

Greater, ON

F0124 : = Flag

Greater or equal, ON

F0125 : ? Flag

Not equal, ON

F0130

On Slot 0, I/O is mounted

F0140

On Slot 1, I/O is mounted

F0150

On Slot 2, I/O is mounted

F0160

On Slot 3, I/O is mounted

F0170

On Slot 4, I/O is mounted

F0180

On Slot 5, I/O is mounted

F0190

On Slot 6, I/O is mounted

F0200

On Slot 7, I/O is mounted

F0210

On Slot 8, I/O is mounted

F0220

On Slot 9, I/O is mounted

F0230

On Slot A, I/O is mounted

F0240

On Slot B, I/O is mounted

F0250

On Slot C, I/O is mounted

F0260

On Slot D, I/O is mounted

F0270

On Slot E, I/O is mounted

F0280

On Slot F, I/O is mounted

F0290

Reserved

F0300

Minimum Scan Time (Unit : msec)

F0310

Current Scan Time (Unit : msec)

F0320

Maximum Scan Time (Unit : msec)

F0330 ~
F0390

Reserved

F0400

Stored year in clock data (EX : 2001)

F0410

Stored month and date in clock data (Upper : Month , Lower : Date)

F0420

Stored day of the week and jour in clock data (Upper : weekday, Lower : Second)

F0430

Stored minute and second in clock data (Upper : minute, Lower : Second)

F0440

Reserved

F0450

Year when power is On is stored. (EX " 2001)

F0460

Month and day when power is ON is stored.

F0470

Day of the week and Hour when power is ON is stored.

F0480

Minute and Second when power is ON is stored.

F0490

Reserved

F0500

Count AC Fail

F0510

Year in case of AC Fail is stored. (EX : 2001)

F0520

Month and Day in case of AC Fail is stored.

F0530

Day of the week and Hour in case of AC Fail is stored.

723

724

CIMON-PLC

F0540

5.5

Minute and Second in case of AC Fail is stored.

Programming
· Setting up Parameter
· Processing in CPU
· Form of Programs
· Self-Diagnosis
· Built-In Functions

5.5.1

Setting up Parameter
If you select "Parameter -> General" on the project window of the CICON, a Parameter window will appear as
follows.

· Basic
· Latch Area Setup
· Interrupt

PLC Common

5.5.1.1

725

Basic

Action
· Normal Action In Case Of Operation Error
This is used to decide whether CPU is operated continuously in case of error such as operation overflow.
· Output While Debugging
This is the function used to select whether to output and debug actually in debug mode or to change an
internal device without outputting.

Timer Device
Item

Available Device

XP CPU

T0000 ~ T4095

CP CPU

T0000 ~ T1023

BP CPU

T0000 ~ T0255

Watch Dog Time
To protect an error in program operation, it is available to set up WDT from 10 to 60000 as maximum
by 10 . Otherwise, it is not used.

Expansion

726

CIMON-PLC

This is used to set up whether expansion is used or not.

5.5.1.2

Latch Area Setup

When Program(stop) mode is converted to RUN mode or RUN mode is converted to program(Stop) mode after
power is ON, this is used to assign non-volatile devices to keep current data.

5.5.1.3

Interrupt

· This is used to set up constant interval interrupt to decide priority.
· The priority of the interrupt set up as 0 is the highest.
· Set range: 10 ~ 655,350
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

PLC Common

Instructions Relevant to Interrupt
Name

5.5.2

Symbol

Function

Permits Interrupt(By channels)

GEI
GDI

Permits Interrupt(By channels)
Permits Interrupt(By channels)

IRET

Ends Interrupt Program

Processing in CPU
· Processing Operation
· Actions by Modes
· Converting Memory Mode
· Restart Mode

5.5.2.1

Processing Operation

727

728

CIMON-PLC

Refresh Input
This is used to read data from an input module before a program is run, and to store the result in the device
assigned to input(X) in a lump.

Refresh Output
This is used to operate END instruction and to output the data in the device assigned to output(Y) of data
memory to an output module.

5.5.2.2

Actions by Modes
There are four modes. The arrows indicate convertible routes between modes each by a mode-conversion
switch.

5.5.2.3

Converting Memory Mode

Type of Memory Modes
RAM Operation Mode
· This mode is operated by the program stored in the RAM of a CPU card.
· In the characteristic of RAM, power being continuously supplied, the stored programs are not cleared. If
power is OFF, the power from the battery in CPU is supplied.
· In case that the voltage of the battery is less than standard one, the Internal Flag F3.4 is set up. At this
time, the battery is to be replaced. If there is no battery, the programs are kept by the inside super
capacitor for several minutes.
· As the operation time is less than the time to download to flash memory(Around a half or 30%), the RAM

PLC Common

729

operation mode is good to debug IL/LD program.

ROM Operation Mode
· This mode is operated by the program stored in the flash memory of a CPU card.
· If the power is OFF and ON after the ROM operation mode is set up, the program stored in a flash
memory is copied to RAM and is operated. In this case, the program stored in RAM is cleared.
· If a program is stored in flash memory, the one is almost not cleared.
· It is safe to store a program in flash memory after making IL/LD program to operate in the ROM
operation mode.

Setting Up in the CICON
· Clear Flash Memory : This is used to clear the program stored in flash memory.

· Store In Flash Memory From RAM : This is used to copy the program stored in RAM and to store it in
flash memory.
· Store In Flash Memory : This is used to store the PLC operation program

made by LD or IL in a flash

memory directly.
· ROM Operation Mode : This is used to operate with the program stored in flash memory.

· RAM Operation Mode : This is used to operate the program stored in RAM.

5.5.2.4

Restart Mode
This is used to set up how to initialize variables and a system when the operation of a PLC is started in RUN
mode by resuppling power or converting mode. There are two types such as Cold Restart and Hot Restart.

730

CIMON-PLC

If you check the Hot Restart in the Parameter, a PLC is operated in the Hot Restart mode up to the Base Time.
Otherwise, it is operated in the Cold Restart mode.

Cold Restart
· The operation is in this mode if the Hot Restart is not checked in the Parameter.
· This is used to clear all data as ‘0’and to enter the initialization value for only the variables with
initialization values.

Hot Restart
· If the operation is in the RUN mode when power is off and is resupplied, and the time from power failure
to resupply is within the set time to permit the Hot Restart, the operation is in the Hot Restart mode.
· This is used to restore all data and the factors for running a program to the state prior to power failure
and to operate.
· As a program is run again in the state prior to power failure, the program is kept continuously against
instantaneous break-down.
· In case that it is over the set time to permit the Hot Restart, the operation is in the Cold Restart mode.
· In case that the data is not kept against power failure, the operation is in the Cold Restart mode.

PLC Common

5.5.3

731

Type of Programs

Scan Program
· This is used to process constantly repeated signals every one scan.

Sub-Routine Program
· This is the program run by ECALL instruction in a scan program.

Initialization Program(Cold)
· This is run in case power is on and CPU is in RUN mode.
· This is used to set up the initial data for running a scan program, and to initialize other devices or the
Internal Flags.

Constant Interval Interrupt Program
· This is the program run at regular intervals.

5.5.3.1

Scan Program
· This is used to process constantly repeated signals every one scan.
· Properties of Scan Program
a. The input scan program is run in the order of program ID and is not duplicated.
b. The Program Spare is the spare space to online-edit a program
c. Select Scan Program as Program Type.

732

5.5.3.2

CIMON-PLC

Sub-Routine Program

· This is the program run by ECALL instruction in a scan program.
· This is used to operate the instructions between SBRT n and RET in a sub-routine program according to the
ECALL instruction in a scan program.
· Enter sub-routine file ID and sub-routine number to the ECALL instruction.

5.5.3.3

Initialization Program (Cold)
· This is run in case that power is ON and CPU is in RUN mode.
· After an initialization program is run, a scan program is run.
· This is used to set up the initial data for running a scan program, and to initialize other devices or Internal
Flags.
· To end an initialization program, use INITEND instruction.

5.5.3.4

Initialization Program (Hot)
· This is run in case that resuppling time is within set time when power failure occurs under Hot Restart.
· After an initialization program(Hot) is run in the state to keep the former value, a scan program is run.
· After an initialization program is run, a scan program is run.
· To end an initialization program, use INITEND instruction.

PLC Common

5.5.3.5

733

Interrupt Program

· As content interval interrupt, this program is run at regular intervals.
· Setting Up Interrupt Program
a. Assign the Interrupt ID in the range from 0 to 15, not to be duplicated.
b. The Program Spare is the spare space to online-edit a program.
c. Select the Constant Interval as Program Type.
d. The lower number is , the higher priority is. The priority(Interrupt ID) is not to be duplicated with other
program.
e. Input the interval at which a program is run. (Setup Range 10ms ~ 655,350ms )
f. A corresponding interrupt program is run by the EI instruction after it enables the interrupt program to be
used by GEI instruction.

5.5.4

Self-Diagnosis

Scan Watch Dog Timer
· Watch Dog Timer is used to detect the operation delay by an error in user’s program. (Enter a value in
the range from 10 to 6 s as the detecting time of the Watch Dog Timer in the Parameter.)
· While monitoring the scan time elapsed under operation, if it is detected to be over set time, the
operation of a PLC is stopped immediately and all the output is reset.
· The ways to clear the error state of Watch Dog Timer are to resupply power or to convert mode to STOP
mode.
· If an error in Watch Dog Timer occurs, Internal Flag F3.2 is set.

734

CIMON-PLC

Checking whether Module Fixed or Unfixed
· This is the function used to detect whether the slot of the card built in a base is unfixed or connected
incompletely.
· An error is indicated in case that a built module is unfixed or connected incompletely when power is ON.

Memory Check-Sum Error
· In case that there is an error in the flash memory of CPU or an error occurs in accessing Dual Port Ram,
the error is indicated in Internal Flag Device F.

Battery Discharge
· The battery specifications are as follows.
Item

Specification

Rated Voltage

DC 3.0 V

Usage

Program & Data Back-up, RTC Operation in case power failure

Type

Lithum Battery, 3V

· In case that the voltage of the battery is less than standard one, the Internal Flag F3.4 is set. At this time,
the battery is to be replaced. If there is no battery, the programs are kept by an inside super capacitor for
several minutes.

Power Failure
· A CPU module detects the instantaneous power failure when the voltage of input power is lower than the
standard.
· If the CPU detects the instantaneous power failure, the following operation is processed to protect an
error in action.

The case of instantaneous power failure is within 20

PLC Common

735

The case of instantaneous power failure over 20

5.5.5

Built-In Functions
Clock Function
This is used to read a time from RTC and to store the result in the device assigned to F.
Device F

Stored Details

Example

F040

Year of Clock Data

Year 2001

H07d1

F041

Month & Day of Clock Data (Upper:Month, Lower:Day)

July 20

H0714

F042

Hour & Minute of Clock Data (Upper:Hour, Lower:Minute)

12 : 30

H0c1e

F043

Second & Day of the Week
(Upper:Second, Lower:Day of the Week)

10s Friday

H0a05

Indicating Days of the Week
Sun

Mon

Tue

Wed

Tur

Fri

Sat

Setting Up I/O Reservation Function
This is the function used to detect whether a card is inserted to an assigned slot correctly and to reserve
that a program is written without changing the number of I / O when spare parts are substituted in case of
expansion or break-down.

736

CIMON-PLC

· It is available to assign the common points of I/O for each slot by 0 point or 16 points or 32 points or 64
points.
· In case that common points is less than actual points, the I/O points used are reduced. In case that
common points are greater than actual points, the I/O points used are increased to be Dummy points.
· Actual points are occupied in the slots which are not assigned and 16 points are used in common with a
blank slot.
· The case that an inserted module is different type from an set module is processed as major error.
· Example to assign I/O addresses
In case that parameters are not assigned, assigning I/O devices according to the state of I/O
In case of 8 slots
POWER

CPU

00
~ 0F

10
~ 1F

20
~ 2F

30
~ 3F

40
~ 4F

50
~ 5F

60
~ 6F

70
~ 7F

In case parameters are assigned, assigning I/O devices according to the state of I/O
POWER

CPU

Input
16p

Input
32p

Blank

Output
8p

Output
16p

Output
32p

Blank

I.Flag
16p

00
~ 0F

10
~ 2F

30
~ 3F

40
~ 47

50
~ 5F

60
~ 7F

80
~ 8F

90
~ 9F

If you select "Reserve I/O" in a Parameter dialog box or double-click "Reserve I/O" on a Project window,
a "Reserve IO" dialog box will appear. Select the "Base Type" in the dialog box.
If the Automatic is selected, I/O addresses are automatically assigned according to the points of inserted
cards .

PLC Common

737

Reserving I/O

o Reserving I/O by modules is available and the points for I/O devices are secured by the Automatic.
o The case that an inserted module is different type from a set module is processed as major error. For
example, if an output module is inserted after an input module is mounted, it is processed as major
error. The points of assigned cards are indicated on the bottom.

Online-Editing a Program

738

CIMON-PLC

· This is the function to edit the contents of a program while a PLC is in e Run mode.
· Steps to Online-Edit a program
1. Enter the Program Spare in the Program Block dialog box to edit a program while it runs. 100 Steps
are assigned as a initial value.
2. Click the Start Program while running icon while a PLC runs.
3. If you click the Finish icon after a program has been edited, the edited program will be downloaded
and the PLC is operated by the program.

5.6

Instruction Overview
· Types of Instructions
· Configuration of Instructions
· Numerical Values
· Processing in Bit
· Processing in Word
· Error
· Basic Instructions
· Application Instructions

5.6.1

Devices
· Input/Output X, Y
· Auxiliary Relay M
· Keeep Relay K
· Link Relay L
· Timer T
· Counter C
· Data Register D
· Indirect Data Register @D
· Index Qualification R
· Step Control Relay S
· Internal Flag (Relay) F
· Indicating Device Addresses
· CPU device memory capacity

PLC Common

5.6.1.1

739

Input/Output X, Y
Input/Output X, Y are the devices corresponding to outer devices. X, as input part, is used to receive signals
from the push buttons and the limit switches that are used as input devices. Y is used to deliver the result of the
operation to the solenoid valves, motors, lamps and etc that are used as output devices.
As input status is reserved in Input X, Contact a & b of it can be used. In Output Y, only Contact a can be used.

< Configuration of Input/Output Circuit >

< Input/Output Device Setup Process >

As X & Y have the devices corresponding to contacts of each input/output module in a one-to-one ratio in
, in case that a PLC is scanning, an operation will run irrelevantly to the contact status of the
input/output module in the memory(X, Y) of CPU. After the operation, the contents in Memory Device Y
corresponding to the output contact are outputted to an output module. For the next operation, the contact status

740

CIMON-PLC

of the input module is reserved in the Memory Device X corresponding to the input contact.

5.6.1.2

Auxiliary Relay M
Direct output to outside is not available by the relay in a PLC but the output in connection with Input/Output X, Y
is available. In case that power is on and a PLC runs, the devices except the device assigned to non-volatile
device will be cleared as 0. Contact a & b can be used.

5.6.1.3

Keeep Relay K
This is used as same as Auxiliary Relay M. In case that power is on or a PLC runs, Contact a & b can be used as
the device for storing previous data. If the followings are run, data will be cleared.
1. Data initialization program
2. Clear in handy loader
3. Clear in CICON

5.6.1.4

Link Relay L
This is the device used as special contact in case that a computer link module and a data link module are used.
It is not available to output directly to outside. In case that a computer link module and a data link module are not
used, this can be used as same as Auxiliary Relay M.

5.6.1.5

Timer T
The standard timings are 10ms and 100ms. According to 5 instruction types, counting types are different each
other. The value can be set up to max. hFFFF(65535) in decimal or hexadecimal number.

S1 : Timer Contact Number
S2 : Set value

PLC Common

5.6.1.6

741

Counter C
· The value can be set up to max. hFFFF(65535) in decimal or hexadecimal number.
· Type of counter : CTU, CTD, CTUD, CTR
· Reference : Counter Instruction

5.6.1.7

Data Register D
This, in which internal data are stored, is used to read and write in 16 bit & 32 bit. In case of 32 bit, an assigned
number will be Lower 16 bit and the number + 1 will be Upper 16 bit.
[Ex] In case of using 32 bit instruction for D0010,
· D0010 : Lower 16 bit
· D0011 : Upper 16 bit

5.6.1.8

Indirect Data Register @D
This is used to assign the data value in Data Register to the Destination number of an instruction.
[Ex.]

742

5.6.1.9

CIMON-PLC

Index Qualification R
This is issued to notify a new sequence programming scheme of CIMON PLCs (CP and XP CPU). The new
scheme provides another indirect addressing solution by using 16 index registers.

Index Qualification
An index register is used for index qualification (indirect addressing) of a device in sequence program.
Index qualification uses one index register and is specified by 16 bit data (-32767 – 32767 or 0000h –
FFFFh). The index registers are represented as ‘R00’– ‘R15’. Following sample sequence program shows
a simple index qualification example.

The index qualification data type is dependent on the type of referenced device. Following table explains
the data types of the values stored in the index registers.

Device

Qualified data
type

Remark

X, Y, M,

The value in index

If these devices were referenced in the word type instruction, the

L, K, F

remainder of index value divided by 16 is ignored. For example,

the number of bits.

assume that R0 is 18, and following instruction was used :

(bit offset)

MOV M0030R0 D0100
Then, the word value stored in M0040 will be moved to D0100. That is,
any value between 16 and 31 in R0 brings the same result with the
above instruction.
D

The value in index
register represents
the number of
words. (word
offset)

T, C, S,

Cannot be qualified by the index register

PLC Common

743

Supporting CPUs
The index qualification is supported by following version of CPU

· CP Series
o Modules : CM1-CP4A/B/C/D/U, CM1-CP3A/B/P/U
o OS Version : V3.0 or later

· XP Series
o Modules : CM1-XP1A, CM1-XP2A, CM1-XP3A, CM1-XP1R
o OS Version : V3.0 or later

Required CICON
The index qualification is supported by following version of CICON.

· CICON Version : V2.0 or later

5.6.1.10 Step Control Relay S
This is used for Last-in-First- out and sequential control by instructions(OUT, SET). In case that power is on or a
PLC starts to RUN, the devices except the device assigned by a parameter will be cleared as 0.

· OUT S00.30 : The last programmed step has priority in the same condition.

744

CIMON-PLC

· SET S00.02 : Current step runs just in case that the previous step has run.
· SET S00.00 : SET xx.00, which is the condition to clear, runs irrelevantly to order.

5.6.1.11 Internal Flag (Relay) F
This is used to get information about the state or PLC, time, day and so on.
F Zone

F0000

F0010

F0020

F0030

Function

Description

F0000 : Run Mode

In case of RUN Mode, ON

F0001 : Program Mode

In case of Program Mode, ON

F0002 : Pause Mode

In case of Pause Mode, ON

F0003 : Debug Mode

In case of Debug Mode, ON

F0007 : Remote Mode

In case of Remote Mode, ON

F000F : Execute Stop
Instruction

In case of Executing Stop, ON

F0010 : Always ON

Always ON

F0011 : Always OFF

Always OFF

F0012 : ON at first scan only

ON for a SCAN

F0013 : OFF at first scan only

OFF for a SCAN

F0014 : Toggle at each scan

Invert every scan Unused

Reserved

F0030 : Major Breakdown

In case of major breakdown error, ON

F0031 : Minor Breakdown

In case of minor breakdown error, OFF

F0032 : WDT Error

In case of Watchdog Timer error, ON

F0033 : I/O combined Error

In case of I/O combined Error, ON

F0034 : Battery voltage low

In case of low voltage than standard, ON

F0037 : Forced ON/OFF

In case of forced ON/OFF to I/O, ON

PLC Common

F0040 ~ 7 : I/O Error

If reserved I/O and mounted I/O are different, number of
different SLOT stored. (0 ~ 11)

F0048 ~ F : I/O Error

If reserved I/O and mounted I/O are different, number of
different expansion stored. (0 ~ 11)

Error Code

F0040

F0050

In case of Dual Port RAM Access Error, Details
F0070

F0070 ~ 7

Number of slot(0 ~ 11) stored.

F0078 ~ F

Number of expansions (0 ~ F) stored.

CM1-CP1A : "1A"
CM1-CP1B : "1B"
CM1-CP1R : "1R"
CM1-CP2A : "2A"
F0080

CM1-CP2B : "2B"
CM1-CP3A : "3A"

Type of PLC is displayed as ASCII value.

CM1-CP3B : "3B"
CM1-CP4A : "4A"
CM1-CP4B : "4B"
CM1-BP : "B0"
F0090 : 0.02s Interval
SYSTEM CLOCK
F0091 : 0.1s Interval SYSTEM
CLOCK
F0092 : 0.2s Interval SYSTEM
CLOCK

F0090

F0093 : 1s Interval SYSTEM
CLOCK
F0094 : 2s Interval SYSTEM
CLOCK

ON / OFF in a constant interval under RUN operation.
(During operation, initial value is 0)

F0095 : 10s Interval SYSTEM
CLOCK
F0096 : 20s Interval SYSTEM
CLOCK
F0097 : 1m Interval SYSTEM
CLOCK

F0110

F0120

F0110 : In case of operation
error, ON

To modify whenever operation

F0111 : Zero Flag

Zero Flag

F0112 : Carry Flag

Carry Flag

F0118 : In case all outputs
OFF, ON

In case all outputs OFF, ON

F0119 : DPRAM Access Error

Details are stored in F0007

F0120 : < Flag

Less, ON

F0121 : = Flag

Less or equal, ON

F0122 : = Flag

Equal, ON

F0123 : > Flag

Greater, ON

F0124 : = Flag

Greater or equal, ON

745

746

CIMON-PLC

F0125 : ? Flag

Not equal, ON

F0130

On Slot 0, I/O is mounted

F0140

On Slot 1, I/O is mounted

F0150

On Slot 2, I/O is mounted

F0160

On Slot 3, I/O is mounted

F0170

On Slot 4, I/O is mounted

F0180

On Slot 5, I/O is mounted

F0190

On Slot 6, I/O is mounted

F0200

On Slot 7, I/O is mounted

F0210

On Slot 8, I/O is mounted

F0220

On Slot 9, I/O is mounted

F0230

On Slot A, I/O is mounted

F0240

On Slot B, I/O is mounted

F0250

On Slot C, I/O is mounted

F0260

On Slot D, I/O is mounted

F0270

On Slot E, I/O is mounted

F0280

On Slot F, I/O is mounted

F0290

Reserved

F0300

Minimum Scan Time (Unit : msec)

F0310

Current Scan Time (Unit : msec)

F0320

Maximum Scan Time (Unit : msec)

F0330 ~
F0390

Reserved

F0400

Stored year in clock data (EX : 2001)

F0410

Stored month and date in clock data (Upper : Month , Lower : Date)

F0420

Stored day of the week and jour in clock data (Upper : weekday, Lower : Second)

F0430

Stored minute and second in clock data (Upper : minute, Lower : Second)

F0440

Reserved

F0450

Year when power is On is stored. (EX " 2001)

F0460

Month and day when power is ON is stored.

F0470

Day of the week and Hour when power is ON is stored.

F0480

Minute and Second when power is ON is stored.

F0490

Reserved

F0500

Count AC Fail

F0510

Year in case of AC Fail is stored. (EX : 2001)

F0520

Month and Day in case of AC Fail is stored.

F0530

Day of the week and Hour in case of AC Fail is stored.

F0540

Minute and Second in case of AC Fail is stored.

PLC Common

5.6.1.12 Indicating Device Addresses

Bit Data
[Device Symbol] + [Card No.] + [Bit No.]
• Usable Device Symbol : X, Y, M, K, L, F
• Card No. : Decimal 3 Character
• Bit No. : Hexadecimal 1 Character
• Ex. : X000E, Y0012, M034F, K0120, L023C, F0093

Word Data
[Device Symbol] + [Card No.]
• Usable Device Symbol : D, Z, T, C
• Card No. : Decimal 4 Character
• Ex. : D1234, Z0001, T0011, C1023

Timer, Counter Output Contact
[Device Symbol] + [Bit No.]
• Usable Device Symbol : T, C
• Card No. : Decimal 4 Character
• Ex. : T0003, C0567

Step Controller Contact
[Device Symbol] + [Card No.] + [.] + [Bit No.]
• Usable Device Symbol : S
• Card No. : Decimal 2 Character
• Step No. : Decimal 2 Character
• Ex. : S00.00, S12.78

Bit Device in Words(Card)
[Device Symbol] + [Card No.] + [0]
• Usable Device Symbol : X, Y, M, K, L, F

747

748

CIMON-PLC

• Card No. : Decimal 3 Character
• Ex. : X0110, Y0330, M0440, K0000, L0040, F0130

5.6.1.13 CPU device memory capacity

XP CPU
Device Type

XP1R/A

8,192

XP2A

4,096

XP3A

2,048

Device Type

CM1-CP3A/B/P

1,024

16,00
0

2,048

4,096

100
*100

32,00
0

2,048

8192

2,048

1,024

100*
100

2,048

CP CPU

CM1-CP4A/B/C/
D

384

10,000

384

5,000

BP CPU
Device Type

BP32M

128

BP16M

1,024

2,048

256

100*
100

5,000

4,096
7

Z
1,024

1,000

PLCS CPU
Device Type

1,024

8,192

4,096

2,048

512

100*
100

10,00
0

1,024

CM3SP32MDT/V/E
/F
CM3SP16MDR/V/E
/F

5.6.2

Basic Instructions
· Contact Instruction
· Connection Instruction
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

PLC Common

749

· Out Instruction
· Step Control Instruction
· Master Control Instruction
· Termination Instruction
· Program branch Instruction
· Structure Creation Instruction
· Program run control Instruction
· Other Instructions

5.6.2.1

5.6.2.2

Contact Instruction
Group

Instruction
Sign

Symbol

Details of Process

Excution
Condition

No. of
Step

Contact

Starts Logical operation (Contact a)

LDI

Starts Logical operation (Contact b)

AND

Logical product (Contact a
connection in series)

ANDI

Logical product NOT(Contact b
connection in series)

Logical sum (Contact a connection in
parallel)

ORI

Logical sum NOT(Contact b
connection in parallel)

LDP

Starts leading edge pulse operation

LDF

Starts Trailing edge pulse operation

ANDP

Leading edge pulse series
connection

ANDF

Trailing edge pulse series connection

ORP

Leading edge pulse parallel
connection

ORF

Trailing edge pulse parallel
connection

INV

Inverts result of operation. (NOT)

Connection Instruction
Group

Instruction
Sign

Connection

ANB

Symbol

Details of Process
AND between logical BLKs
(Connection in series)

Execution
Condition

No. of
Steps
1

750

5.6.2.3

CIMON-PLC

ORB

OR between logical BLK (Connection
in Parallel)

MPS

Remembers result of operation

MRD

Reads memory in MPS

MPP

Reads and resets memory in MPS

Output Instruction
Group

Instruction
Sign

Symbol

Details of Process

Execution
Condition

No. of
Steps

Output

OUT

Output a device

SET

Sets a device

RST

Resets a device

PLS

Generates the pulse for 1 scan of

program in case input signal is in
rising edge.
PLF

Generates the pulse for 1 scan of

program in case input signal is in
falling edge.

5.6.2.4

Step Control Instruction
Group

Instruction
Sign

Step
Control

OUT Sxx.xx

Symbol

Device

SET Sxx.xx

5.6.2.5

Details of Process

Execution
Condition
Output

No. of
Steps
1

Step Control Device SET

Master Control Instruction
Group

Instruction
Sign

Symbol

Details of Process

Execution
Condition

No. of
Steps

Master
Control

Start a master control

MCR

Ends a master control

PLC Common

5.6.2.6

751

Termination Instruction
Group

Instruction
Sign

Symbol

Details of Process

Execution
Condition

No. of
Steps

END

PEND

Ends a Main Routine Program

END

Ends a Sequence Program

CEND
CENDP

5.6.2.7

Program branch Instruction
Group

Instruction
Sign

Jump

JMP

JMPP

JME

Subroutine

5.6.2.8

Symbol

CALL

Details of Process

Execution
Condition

Executes sub-routine program n when

No. of
Steps

input condition is met.
CALLP

ECALL

ECALLP

SBRT

RET

Structure Creation Instruction
Group

Instruction
Sign

Repeat

FOR

Symbol

Details of Process
Runs the instructions from (FOR) to
(NEXT) n times

NEXT
End

BREAK

Execution
Condition

No. of
Steps
2
1

Forces to end the instruction from
(FOR) to (NEXT)

752

CIMON-PLC

BREAKP

5.6.2.9

Program run control Instruction
Group

Instruction Symbol
Sign

Interrupt
Program

GEI

GDI

IRET

EPGM

DPGM

Scan
Program

[

Details of Process

] EPGM, DPGM

Execution
Condition

No. of
Steps

5.6.2.10 Other Instructions
Group

Instruction Symbol
Sign

Details of Process

Stop

STOP

Converts to program mode after

Execution
Condition

No. of
Steps
1

ending the current scan to stop
running at the desired time
Run

INITEND

Ends an initialization program and run

a scan program
WDT
Reset

WDT

Resets WDT(Watch dog time) in a
sequence Program

WDTP
Carry

1
1

STC

Makes a Carry Flag contact ON

CLC

Makes a Carry Flag OFF

PLC Common

5.6.3

753

Application Instructions
· Comparison Operation Instruction
· Arithmetic Operation Instruction
· Data Conversion Instruction
· Data Transfer Instruction
· Data Table operation Instruction
· Logic operation Instruction
· Rotation Instruction
· Shift Instruction
· Character string Processing Instruction
· Data Processing Instruction
· Bit Processing Instruction
· Clock Instruction
· Timer / Counter
· Buffer Memory Access Instruction
· Instruction for Data Link
· Real number operation Instruction
· Read / Write Instruction
· Search Instruction
· Other Instructions

5.6.3.1

Comparison Operation Instruction
Group

Instruction
Sign

Compare
16 BIT
Data

LD=

Symbol

Details of Process
If (S1)=(S2), Switches ON.
If (S1) (S2), Switches OFF

Execution
Condition

No. of
Steps
3

AND=

OR=

LD<>

If (S1) (S2), Switches ON
If (S1)=(S2), Switches OFF.

AND<>

OR<>

LD>
AND>

If (S1)>(S2), Switches ON.
If (S1)<=(S2), Switches OFF.

3
3

754

CIMON-PLC

OR>
LD>=

If (S1)>=(S2), Switches ON.
If (S1)<(S2), Switches OFF.

AND>=

OR>=

LD<

If (S1)<(S2), Switches ON.
If (S1)>=(S2), Switches OFF

AND<

OR<

LD<=

Compare
32 BIT
Data?

If (S1)<=(S2), Switches ON.
If (S1)>(S2), Switches OFF.

AND<=

OR<=

LDD=
ANDD=

If (S1+1,S1)
=(S2+1,S2), switches ON.
If (S1+1,S1)
(S2+1,S2), switches OFF.

ORD=
LDD<>
ANDD<>

ANDD>

If (S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2),
switches ON.
If (S1+1,S1)=(S2+1,S2),
switches OFF.

ANDD>=

If (S1+1,S1)>(S2+1,S2),
switches ON
If (S1+1,S1)<=(S2+1,S2),
switches OFF.

ANDD<

3
3
3

If (S1+1,S1)>=(S2+1,S2),
switches ON.
If (S1+1,S1)<(S2+1,S2),
switches OFF.

ORD>=
LDD<

ORD>
LDD>=

3
3

ORD<>
LDD>

3
3
3

If (S1+1,S1)<(S2+1,S2),
switches ON.
If (S1+1,S1)>=(S2+1,S2),
Switches OFF

3
3

PLC Common

ORD<
LDD<=
ANDD<=

755

3
If S1+1,S1)<=(S2+1,S2),
switches ON.
If (S1+1,S1)>(S2+1,S2),
switches OFF.

3
3

ORD<=

Compare
16Bit/32Bit
Unsigned
Data

UCMP

UDCMP

Compare
Block

BK=

BK<>

BK>

BK>=

BK<

BK<=

LDE=

ANDE=

ORE=

Compare
Real
number

LDE<>
ANDE<>

((S1,S1+1) ? (S2,S2+1),
switches ON.
(S1,S1+1) = (S2,S2+1),
switches OFF.

ORE<>
LDE>
ANDE>

ANDE>=
ORE>=

3
3

(S1,S1+1) > (S2,S2+1),
switches ON.
(S1,S1+1) <= (S2,S2+1),
switches OFF.

ORE>
LDE>=

3
3
3

(S1,S1+1) >= (S2,S2+1),
switches ON.
(S1,S1+1) < (S2,S2+1),
switches OFF.

3
3
3

756

CIMON-PLC

LDE<

(S1,S1+1) < (S2,S2+1),
switches ON.
(S1,S1+1) <= (S2,S2+1),
switches OFF.

ANDE<

3
3

ORE<

LDE<=

(S1,S1+1) <= (S2,S2+1),
switches ON.
(S1,S1+1) > (S2,S2+1),
switches OFF

ANDE<=

3
3

ORE<=

5.6.3.2

Arithmetic Operation Instruction
Group

Instruction
Sign

Add/Subtrac ADD
t/Multiply/Di
vide BIN
16-bit
ADDP

SUB

Symbol

Details of Process
(S1) + (S2) -> (D)

(S1) - (S2) ->(D)

(S1) * (S2) -> (D.D+1)

(S1) * (S2) -> (D)

(S1) / (S2) -> (D,D+1)

(S1) / (S2) -> (D)

4
4

(S)+(n)Word data -> (D, D+1)

WSUMP
Add/Subtrac DADD
t/Multiply/Di
vide BIN

WDIVP
WSUM

DIVP
WDIV

WMULP
DIV

MULP
WMUL

No. of
Steps

SUBP
MUL

Execution
Condition

4
4

(S1,S1+1) + (S2,S2+1)
-> (D,D+1)

PLC Common

32-bit

DADDP
DSUB

4
(S1,S1+1) - (S2,S2+1)
->(D,D+1)

DSUBP
DMUL

(S1,S1+1) * (S2,S2+1)
-> (D,D+1,D+2, D+3)

(S1, S1+2) * (S2, S2+1)
-> (D,D+1)

(S1,S1+1) / (S2,S2+1)
->(D,D+1. D+2, D+3)

BSUB

(S1,S1+1) / (S2,S2+1)
-> (D,D+1)

(S1) + (S2) -> (D)

(S1) - (S2) ->(D)

(S1) * (S2) ->(D,D+1)

(S1) / (S2) -> (D,D+1)

DBMULP

4
4

(S1,S1+1) + (S2,S2+1)
-> (D,D+1)

4
4

(S1,S1+1) - (S2,S2+1)
-> (D,D+1)

DBSUBP
DBMUL

4
4

DBADDP
DBSUB

4
4

BDIVP
Add/Subtrac DBADD
t BCD
8-Digit

4
4

BMULP
BDIV

4
4

BSUBP
BMUL

4
4

DWDIVP
Add/Subtrac BADD
t/Multiply/Di
vide BCD
16-bit
BADDP

4
4

DDIVP
DWDIV

4
4

DWMULP
DDIV

4
4

DMULP
DWMUL

757

4
4

(S1,S1+1) * (S2,S2+1)
-> (D,D+1)

4
4

758

CIMON-PLC

DBDIV

(S1,S1+1) / (S2,S2+1)
-> (D,D+1)

DBDIVP
Neal
Number

EADD

(S1,S1+1) + (S2,S2+1)
->(D,D+1)

EADDP

ESUB

(S1,S1+1) - (S2,S2+1)
-> (D,D+1)

ESUBP

EMUL

(S1,S1+1) * (S2,S2+1)
->(D,D+1)

EMULP

EDIV

(S1,S1+1) / (S2,S2+1)
-> (D,D+1)

EDIVP
BIN DATA
Increment

INC

D + 1 -> D

INCP

DINC

(D,D+1) + 1 -> (D,D+1)

DINCP
BIN DATA
Decrement

DEC

D – 1 -> D

DECP

DDEC

(D,D+1) – 1 -> (D,D+1)

DDECP

5.6.3.3

Data Conversion Instruction
Group

Instruction
Sign

Symbol

Details of Process

Execution
Condition

No. of
Steps

BIN
->
BCD

BCD

BCDP

DBCD

PLC Common

BCD
->
BIN

Invert
Sign

759

DBCDP

BIN

BINP

DBIN

DBINP

NEG

3
(D) ---(D)

NEGP

DNEG

3
(D,D+1) ---(D,D+1)

DNEGP
Data
Conversi
on

FLT
FLTP
INT
INTP
GRY
GRYP
GBIN
GBINP
DFLT
DFLTP
DINT
DINTP
DGRY
DGRYP
DGBIN
DGBINP

3
(S) : 16bit BIN
?
(D,D+1) : 32bit

(S,S+1) : 32bit
?
(D) : 16bit BIN

(S) : 16bit BIN
?
(D) : 16bit Gray

(S) : 16bit Gray
?
(D) : 16bit BIN

(S,S+1) : 32bit BIN
?
(D,D+1) : 32bit

(S,S+1) : 32bit
?
(D,D+1) : 32bit BIN

(S,S+1) : 32bit BIN
?
(D,D+1) : 32bit Gray

(S,S+1) : 32bit Gray
?
(D,D+1) : 32bit BIN

760

5.6.3.4

CIMON-PLC

Data Transfer Instruction
Group

Instruction
Sign

Transfer

MOV

Symbol

Details of Process
(S)->(D)

MOVP
DMOV

(S,S+1) ?
(D,D+1)

CML

(S,S+1) ?
(D,D+1)

Transfer
Block

BIT Data
Move

Exchange

(S) ?
(D)

3
3

(S,S+1) -> (D,D+1)

DCMLP

BMOV

BMOVP

FMOV

FMOVP

WBMOV

WBMOVP

XCH

(S)->(D)

XCHP
DXCH

BXCH

3
3

(S,S+1) (D,D+1)

DXCHP
Exchange
Block

CMLP
DCML

EMOVP
Transfer
Not

No. of
Steps

DMOVP
EMOV

Execution
Condition

3
3

(S)n (D)n

PLC Common

BXCHP
Exchange
Byte

SWAP

High Byte Low Byte
(D)
High Byte Low Byte

SWAPP

5.6.3.5

2
2

Data Table operation Instruction
Group

Instruction
Sign

Symbol

Details of Process

Execution
Condition

Data Table FIFW
Operation

5.6.3.6

761

No. of
Steps
3

FIFWP

FIFR

FIFRP

FPOP

FPOPP

FINS

FINSP

FDEL

FDELP

Logic operation Instruction
Group

Instruction
Sign

AND

WAND

Symbol

Details of Process
(S1)

(S2)->(D)

WANDP
DAND

WOR
WORP

No. of
Steps
4
4

(D+1,D) (S+1,S)
->(D+1,D)

DANDP
OR

Execution
Condition

4
4

(S1)

(S2)->(D)

4
4

762

CIMON-PLC

DOR

(D+1,D) (S+1,S)
->(D+1,D)

DORP
Exclusive
OR

WXOR

(S1)

(S2) -> (D)

WXORP

DXOR

(S1+1,S1)
->(D+1,D)

(S2+1,S2)

DXORP
Exclusive
NOR

WXNR

(S1) (S2) -> (D)

WXNRP

DXNR

(S1+1,S1)
->(D+1,D)

(S2+1,S2)

DXNRP
AND

BKAND

(S1)

(S2) -> (D)

BKANDP
OR

BKOR

(S1)

(S2) ->(D)

BKORP
Exclusive
OR

BKXOR

(S1)

(S2) ->(D)

BKXORP
Exclusive
NOR

BKXNR

(S1)

(S2) ->(D)

BKXNRP

5.6.3.7

Rotation Instruction
Group

Instruction
Sign

Symbol

Details of Process

Execution
Condition

No. of
Steps

Right
Rotation

ROR

RORP

PLC Common

Left
Rotation

Right
Rotation

Left
Rotation

5.6.3.8

763

RCR

RCRP

ROL

ROLP

RCL

RCLP

DROR

DRORP

DRCR

DRCRP

DROL

DROLP

DRCL

DRCLP

Shift Instruction
Group

Instruction
Sign

Symbol

Details of Process

Execution
Condition

No. of
Steps

764

CIMON-PLC

n BIT
Shift

1 BIT
Shift

1 WORD
Shift

5.6.3.9

SFR

SFRP

SFL

SFLP

BSFR

BSFRP

BSFL

BSFLP

DSFR

DSFRP

DSFL

DSFLP

Character string Processing Instruction
Group

Instruction
Sign

Exchange
ASCII

BINDA

Symbol

Details of Process
Converts to ASCII Code and stores

Execution
Condition

No. of
Steps
3

in D.
BINDAP

DBINDA

DBINDAP

BINHA

Hexadecimalizes, converts to ASCII

Code and stores in D.

PLC Common

765

BINHAP

DBINHA

DBINHAP

BCDDA

Converts BCD 4 digits to ASCII code

and stores in D.

Exchange
BIN Data

BCDDAP

DBCDDA

DBCDDAP

DABIN

Stores Decimal ASCII data as BIN

16-bit data
DABINP

DDABIN

Decimal ASCII data BIN 32Bit

data
DDABINP

HABIN

Stores hexaDecimal ASCII data as

BIN 16Bit data
HABINP

DHABIN

Stores hexaDecimal ASCII data as

BIN 32Bit data
DHABINP

5.6.3.10 Data Processing Instruction
Group

Instruction
Sign

Maximum
value
search

MAX

Symbol

Details of Process
Searches max. in n-block of 16bit

Execution
Condition

No. of
Steps
4

and store in D.
MAXP
DMAX

4
Stores 1st max. in the searched

device.
DMAXP
Minimum
value
search

MIN

4
Searches min, in n-block of 16bit

and stores in D.
MINP
DMIN

4
Stores 1st min. in the searched

device.
DMINP

766

CIMON-PLC

SET bit
check

SUM

Searches sum, in n-block of 16bit

and stores in D.
SUMP

DSUM

Stores 1st sum. in the searched

device.

Segment

Decode
Encode

DSUMP

SEG

SEGP

DECO

DECOP

ENCO

ENCOP

Dissociate DIS
Unite

Data
Scaling

DISP

UNI

UNIPP

SCL

SCLP

DSCL

DSCLP

5.6.3.11 Bit Processing Instruction
Group

Instruction
Sign

Symbol

Details of Process

Execution
Condition

No. of
Steps

PLC Common

TEST

BIT
SET
RESET

767

TEST

TESTP

DTEST

DTESTP

BSET

BSETP

BRST

BRSTP

5.6.3.12 Clock Instruction
Group

Instruction
Sign

Add and
subtract
clock data

DATA+

Symbol

Details of Process

Execution
Condition

(S1)h.m.s+(S2)h.m.s -> in D

DATA+P

DATA-

(S1)h.m.s-(S2)h.m.s -> in D

DATA-P
Convert
time data
format

No. of
Steps

SECOND

(S) h.m.s ->in (D) in sec

SECONDP

HOUR

(S)s -> in (D) in h.m.s

HOURP

Read and DATERD
write clock
data
DATERDP

y.m.d.h.m.s

in CPU -> in (D)

2
2

DATEWR

y.m.d.h.m.s

in (S) -> in CPU

DATEWRP

5.6.3.13 Buffer Memory Access Instruction
Group

Instruction
Sign

Symbol

Details of Process

Execution
Condition

No. of
Steps

768

CIMON-PLC

DATA
Read

DATA
Write

FROM

Reads data in optional unit.

FROMP

DFRO

DFROP

Write data to optional unit.

TOP

DTO

DTOP

5.6.3.14 Instruction for Data Link
Group

Instruction
Sign

Sending
Data

SND

Receiving
Data

Symbol

Details of Process
Sends data to other station.

Execution
Condition

No. of
Steps
5

SNDP

SEND

SENDP

RCV

Receives data from other

station.
RCVP

RECV

RECVP

5.6.3.15 Timer / Counter
Group

Instruction
Sign

TIMER

TON

Symbol

Details of Process
Set value -> Timer ON, OFF

TOFF
TMR

Execution No. of
Condition Steps
3
3

Irreverently to ON, OFF, set value ->

Timer ON, OFF
TMON

PLC Common

COUNTE
R

769

TRTG

Refer to manual

CTU

Add counter -> if over set value, ON.

CTD

Subtract counter -> If 0, ON.

CTUD

Refer to manual

CTR

Refer to manual

5.6.3.16 Real number operation Instruction
Group

Instructi
on Sign

Symbol

Trigonometric SIN
SINP
COS
COSP
TAN
TANP
ASIN
ASINP
ACOS
ACOSP
ATAN
ATANP
Conversion

RAD
RADP
DEG
DEGP

square root

SQR

Details of Process

Executio No. of
n
Steps
Condition

Calculates SIN (sine) value of angle
designated at S and stores the operation
result in the device number designated
at D.

Performs COS (cosine) on angle
designated by S and stores operation
result at device number designated by D
.

Performs tangent (TAN) operation on
angle data designated by S , and stores
operation result in device designated by
D.

Calculates angle from sin value
designated by S, and stores operation
result at word device designated by D

Calculates angle from COS value
designated by S, and stores operation
result at word device designated by D

Calculates angle from tan value
designated by S, and stores operation
result at word device desig

Converts units of angle size from angle
units designated by S to radian units,
and stores result at device number
designated by D.

Converts Unit of angle size from radian
units designated by S to angles, and
stores result at device number
designated by D.

Calculates square root of value
designated at S , and stores the
operation result in the device number

770

CIMON-PLC

Exponent

SQRP

designated at D .

EXP

Calculates exponent for value
designated by S, and stores the result of
the operation at the device designate by
D

EXPP
Logarithm

LOG
LOGP

Occur
random
number

RND
RNDP
SRND
SRNDP

BCD
Logarithm

BSQR
BSQRP

Calculates natural logarithm of value
designated by S taking e as base, and
stores operation results at device
designated by D.
Generates random number of from 0 to
32767, and stores at device designated
by D
Updates random number series
according to the 16-bit BIN data being
stored in device designated by S.
Store appointed data to area that is
specified by D after square root
arithmetic by S.

BDSQR
BDSQR
P
BCD
BSIN
Trigonometric
BSINP
BCOS
BCOSP
BTAN
BTANP

BASIN
BASINP
BACOS
BACOS
P
BATAN

Calculates the sin value of the
designated value, and stores the sign of
the operation result in the device at D,
and the operation result in the device
designated at D+1 and D+2.

Calculates the cos value of the
designated value, and stores the sign of
the operation result in the device at D,
and the operation result in the device
designated at D+1 and D+2.

Calculates TAN (tangent) value for value
(angle) designated by S , and stores the
sign for the operation result in the word
device designated by D , and the
operation result in the word device
designated by D +1 and D +2.

Calculates angle from sin value
designated by S, and stores operation
result at word device designated by D

Calculates angle from COS value
designated by S, and stores operation
result at word device designated by D

Calculates angle from sin value
designated by S, and stores operation
result at word device designated by D

PLC Common

771

BATANP

5.6.3.17 Read / Write Instruction
Group

Instruction
Sign

Symbol

Details of Process

Execution
Condition

No. of
Steps

Special
FREAD
Module
Data Read

Special
FWRITE
Module
Data Write

5.6.3.18 Search Instruction
Group

Instruction
Sign

Symbol

Details of Process

Executio No. of
n
Steps
Condition

SER

SERP

BSER

BSERP

5.6.3.19 Other Instructions
Group

5.6.4

Instruction Symbol
Sign

Details of Process

Execution
Condition

No. of
Steps

DUTY

ATVP

Configuration of Instructions
1) It is available to separate most of instructions into instruction part and device part. The usage is as
follows.
· Instruction part : This is to indicate the function of an instruction.
· Device : This is to indicate the data used in an instruction.

772

CIMON-PLC

2) The configuration of instructions by combination of an instruction part and a device part is classified
as follows.
· (Instruction part) : This is an instruction used not to change the status of a device and to control a program
mainly.
[EX.] END,PEND

· (Instruction part) + (Device) : According to ON/OFF control on a device and the ON/OFF status of a
device, this is used to control an execution condition and to jump in a program.

· (Instruction part) + (Device for source) + (Device for Destination) : This is used to operate the data in a
destination and the data in a source, and to the result in the destination.

· (Instruction part) + (Device for source1) + (Device for source2) + (Device for Destination) : This is
used to operate the data in Source1 and the data in Source2, and store the result in the Destination.

· Source(s)
o Source is the data used in operation.
o The devices to assign are as follows.
a. Integer : This is used to assign numerical value used in operation. As this is set in programming, this
is a fixed value which is not changed during the execution of a program.
b. Bit Device, Word Device : This is used to assign the device where data used in operation is stored.
Accordingly, it is necessary to store the data before operation in the assigned device. During
execution of Program, by changing the data stored in the assigned device, it is available to change the
data for the instruction.

PLC Common

773

· Destination(D)
o The data after operation is stored in a destination. But, For the combination instruction of (Instruction
part) + (source Device) + (Destination Device), it is necessary to store the data used for an operation in
the destination before the operation
o A destination should be the device where data is stored.

· The abbreviations for Source and Destination are as follows.

5.6.5

Numerical Values
This is used to distinguish positive and negative for the upper bit of 16Bit and 32Bit. Accordingly, the numerical
values used for 16Bit and 32Bit are as follows.
· 16Bit : -32768~32767
· 32Bit : -2147483648~2147483647

774

CIMON-PLC

The numerical value for 16Bit and 32Bit over the range (Over – Flow, Under Flow), in case of basic instructions,
are processed as follows.
[Table. Contents of the process in case the numerical value is over the range]

PLC Common

775

Also, in case of Over Flow and Under Flow Carry Flag, Error Flag is not changed.

5.6.6

Error
· In case an operation error occurs while a basic instruction or an application instruction is operated, Error
Flag(F0110) is set.
· When an operation error occurs, whether processing sequence is stopped or continued can be selected in
Parameter setup(3.5 16).

5.6.7

Types of Instructions

Basic Instructions
Types of Instructions

Meaning

Contact Instruction

Operation start, series connection, parallel connection

Connection Instruction

Ladder block connection, creation of pulses from operation results, store/

776

CIMON-PLC

read operation results
Output Instruction

Bit device output, pulse output, output reversal

Step Control Instruction

step control

Master Control Instruction

Master control

Termination Instruction

Program termination

Program branch
Instruction

Program jumps

Structure Creation
Instruction

Repeated operation, subroutine program calls, index qualification in ladder
units.

Program run control
Instruction

Enable of prohibit interrupt programs

Other Instructions

Stop, INITEND, WDT Reset, Carry

Application Instructions
Types of Instructions

Meaning

Comparison Operation
Instruction

Comparisons such as =, >, <

Arithmetic Operation
Instruction

Addition, subtraction, multiplication or divison of BIN or BCD

Data Conversion
Instruction
Data Transfer Instruction
Data Table Operation
Instruction

Read

Logic Operation Instruction

Logical operations such as logical sum, logical product, etc.

Rotation Instruction

Rotation of designated data

Shift Instruction

Shift of designated data

Character string
Processing Instruction

Character string (ASCII code data) processing

Data Processing
Instruction

Data processing including data searches, decoding, encoding, and the like

Bit Processing Instruction

Sets and resets bit data; bit extraction

Clock Instruction

Read / Write clock data

Timer / Counter

Buffer Memory Access
Instruction

Read / Write from buffer memory of special functions modules

Instruction for Data Link
Real number operation
Instruction
Read / Write Instruction

Special Module Data Read / Write

Search Instruction

PLC Common

777

Other Instruction

5.6.8

Processing in Bit
This is to process in bit when a bit device (X, Y, M, L, S, F) is assigned.
In case of using a sequence instruction, the device processed is 1Bit(1Point) in a bit device. It is not available to
assign two or more bits.
[Ex.] LD X0000, OUT Y0020

5.6.9

Processing in Word
This is to process the device operated in word. There are two types to process in word such as 16Bit(1Word)
and 32Bit(2Word).

5.6.10 Form of Instructions
Sequence Instructions, basic Instructions and application Instructions are configured as follows.

778

CIMON-PLC

PLC Common

5.7

779

Basic Instruction
Contents :
· Contact Instruction :
Start Operation, Connect in A Series, Connect in A Parallel : LD, LDI, AND, ANDI, OR, ORI
For Rising-Falling Edge, Start Operation, Connect in Series, Connect in Parallel : LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF,
ORP, ORF
Invert Result of Operation : INV
Start Operation by Bit in Data Device : LDBT, LDBTI, ANDBT, ANDBTI, ORBT, ORBTI
· Connection Instruction :
Connect in Series, Connect in Parallel by Blocks : ANB, ORB
Branch Multiply : MPS, MRD, MPP
· Out Instruction :
Bit Device Timer, Counter : OUT
Bit Device set : SET
Bit Device Reset : RST
Output for a Scan at Rising Edge and Falling Edge : PLS, PLF
· Step Control Instruction :
Step Control : SET Sxx.xx

780

CIMON-PLC

Last-In & First-Out Control : OUT Sxx.xx
· Master Control Instruction :
Set or Reset Master Control : MC, MCR
· Termination Instruction :
End Main Routine Program : END
End Main Roution Program Conditionally : CEND, CENDP
End Sequence Program : PEND
· Program branch Instruction :
Jump : JMP, JMPP, JME
Branch Sub-Routine : CALL, CALLP, SBRT, RET
Call Sub-Routine between Program Files : ECALL, ECALLP, SBRT, RET
· Structure Creation Instruction :
FOR-NEXT : FOR, NEXT
Force FOR-NEXT to End : BREAK, BREAKP
· Program execution Instructions :
Enable or Disable to Interrupt : EI, DI, GEI, GDI
Return : IRET
Enable, Disable PBT : EPGM, DPGM
· Other Instructions :
Stop Sequence Program : STOP
End Initialization Program and Execute Scan Program : INITEND
Reset WDT : WDT, WDTP
Set or Reset Carry Flag : STC, CLC
I/O Refresh : RFS, RFSP

5.7.1

Contact Instruction

Contents :
· Start Operation, Connect in A Series, Connect in A Parallel : LD, LDI, AND, ANDI, OR, ORI
· For Rising-Falling Edge, Start Operation, Connect in Series, Connect in Parallel : LDP, LDF, ANDP,
ANDF, ORP, ORF
· Invert Result of Operation : INV
· Start Operation by Bit in Data Device : LDBT, LDBTI, ANDBT, ANDBTI, ORBT, ORBTI
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

PLC Common

5.7.1.1

781

Start Operation, Connect in A Series, Connect in A Parallel : LD, LDI, AND, ANDI, OR, ORI
Usable Device
Instruction
LD (I)
AND (I)
OR (I)

Flag
No.of
Inte Steps Error Zero
ger

Carry

LD, LDI
Functions :
The LD in used to start the operation of Contact A and the LDI is used to start the operation of Contact B.
The information(ON/OFF) on the assigned device are read, being taken as the result of their operation.

Example of program :
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

782

CIMON-PLC

List Mode
Steps

Instruction

Device

X0001

M0005

X0002

OUT

Y0012

X0003

AND

M0011

ORI

X0004

OUT

Y0013

END

OR, ORI
Functions :
The OR is used to connect in a parallel instruction with Contact A and ORI is used to connect in a parallel
with Contact B. The information(ON/OFF) on the assinged device is read and OR-operated with the result
of the operation till then. The result of the OR-operation is takenas the result of their operation.

Example of program :

PLC Common

783

List Mode
Steps

Instruction

Device

X0001

AND

M0001

LDI

M0004

ANDI

X0002

ORB

ANDI

M0019

OUT

Y0022

X0005

M0008

M0009

ANB

ANDI

M000B

OUT

Y0023

END

AND, ANDI
Functions :
The AND is used to connect in a series with Contact A and the ANDI is used to connect in a series with
Contact B. The information(ON/OFF) on the assigned device are read and AND-operated with the result of
the operation till then. The result of the AND-operation is taken as the result of their operation.
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

784

CIMON-PLC

Example of program :

List Mode

5.7.1.2

Steps

Instruction

Device

X0001

OUT

Y0021

AND

X0002

OUT

Y0022

ANDI

X0003

OUT

Y0023

END

For Rising-Falling Edge, Start Operation, Connect in Series, Connect in Parallel : LDP, LDF,
ANDP, ANDF, ORP, ORF
Usable Device
Instruction
LDP (F)
ANDP (F)
ORP (F)

Flag
No.of
Inte Steps Error Zero
ger

Carry

LDP
Functions :

PLC Common

785

This is used to read the rising edge of a circuit. If an input condition is turned on from off, this is set for one
scan.

LDF
Functions :
This is used to read the falling edge of a circuit. If an input condition is turned off from on, this is set for one
scan.

ANDP
Functions :
This is used as the contact to read the rising edge in connection in series. If an input condition is turned on
from off, this is set for one scan. If the left connection is turned on, the right connection is set for one scan.

ANDF
Functions :
This is used to read the falling edge in connection in series. If an input condition is turned off from on, this
is set for one scan. If the left connection is turned on, the right connection is set for one scan.

ORP
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

786

CIMON-PLC

Functions :
This is used to read the rising edge in connection in parallel. If an input condition is turneded on from off,
this is set for one scan. If the left connection is turned on, the right connection is set for one scan.

ORF
Functions :
This is used to read the falling edge in connection in parallel. If an input condition is turned off from on, this
is set for one scan. If the left connection is turned on, the right connection is set for one scan.

5.7.1.3

Invert Result of Operation : INV
Usable Device
Instruction

INV

Flag
S

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carr
y

INV
Functions :
If you use the INV instruction[NOT], Contact “A” circuit is converted to Contact “B” circuit and Contact “B”
circuit is inverted to Contact “A” circuit(Connection in series circuit to connection in parallel circuit,
connection in parallel circuit to connection in series circuit) for the circuit on the left of the INV instruction.

Example of program :
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

PLC Common

787

Program A and B are examples to output the same result.
· Program A

· Program B

5.7.1.4

Start Operation by Bit in Data Device : LDBT, LDBTI, ANDBT, ANDBTI, ORBT, ORBTI
Usable Device
Instruction

LDBT (I)
ANDBT (I)
ORBT (I)

Flag
S

Inte
ger

No.o
f
Step
s

Error

Zero

Carr
y

LDBT, LDBTI
Functions :
These are used to read the bit data assigned to S2 among the word addresses in Device D assigned to S1,
starting the operation for Contact A(LDBT) and the one for Contact B(LDBTI). The information(On/Off) on
the assigned Device are received and taken as the result of their operation.

788

CIMON-PLC

Example of program :

If the third bit of D0000 is turned on, Output Y0012 is set.

ANDBT, ANDBTI
Functions :
These are to read the bit data assigned to S2 among the word addresses in Device D assigned to S1,
connecting in a pararell with Contact A(ORBT) and Contact B(ORBTI). The information(On/Off) on the
assigned device are received and OR-operated with the result of the operation till then. The results of the
OR-operation is taken as their operation.

Example of program :

If X0000 is turned on or the third bit of D0000 is turned on, Output Y0010 is set.

ORBT, ORBTI
Functions :
These are to read the bit data assigned to S2 among the word addresses in Device D assigned to S1,
connecting in a series with Contact A(ANDBT) and Contact B(ANDBTI). The information(On/Off) on the
assigned device are received and AND-operated with the result of the operation till then. The results of the
AND-operation is taken as their operation.

PLC Common

789

Example of program :

If X0000 is turned on or the third bit of D0000 is turned on, Output Y0010 is set.

5.7.2

Connection Instruction

Contents :
· Connect in Series, Connect in Parallel by Blocks : ANB, ORB
· Branch Multiply : MPS, MRD, MPP

5.7.2.1

Connect in Series, Connect in Parallel by Blocks : ANB, ORB
Usable Device
Instruction

ANB
ORB

Flag
S

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps
1

Error

Zero

Carr
y

790

CIMON-PLC

ANB
Functions :
This is used to AND-operate Block A and Block B, taking the result as the result of the operation. The ANB
is not a contact symbol but a connection symbol. l In case of writing the ANB continuously, maximum 15
instructions(16 blocks) are available.

Example of program :

PLC Common

791

[ List Mode ]
Steps

Instruction

Device

X0000

X0002

X0001

X0003

ANB

X0004

AND

X0005

ORB

OUT

END

PEND

M0000

ORB
Functions :
This is used to OR-operate Block A and Block B, taking the result as the result of the operation. The ORB is
used to connect the circuit block over two contacts in parallel. To connect the circuit block of contacts, use
the OR and the ORI. The ORB is not necessary.

Example of program :

792

CIMON-PLC

[ List Mode ]
Steps

Instruction

Device

X0000

AND

X0001

X0002

AND

X0003

ORB

X0004

OUT

Y0010

The ORB is not a contact symbol but a connection symbol. In case of writing the ORB continuously,
maximum 15 instructions(16 blocks) are available.

5.7.2.2

Branch Multiply : MPS, MRD, MPP
Usable Device
M

Instruction

MPS
MRD
MPP

Flag
S

Inte
ger

No.o
f
Step
s

Error

Zero

Carr
y

PLC Common

793

MPS
Functions :
This is used to start branching in a ladder. This is used to read the result of the operation prior to the MPS
instruction, continuing to operate the next instructions with it.

MRD
Functions :
This is used to relay branching in a ladder. This is used to read the result of the operation prior to the
current MRD instruction, continuing to operate the next instructions with in.

MPP
Functions :
This is used to finish branching in a ladder. This is used to clear the result of the operation prior to the MPP
instruction.

Example of program :
· A program to use the MPS instruction, the MRD instruction and the MPP instruction

794

CIMON-PLC

[ List Mode ]
Steps

Instruction

Device

X0001

MPS

AND

X0002

OUT

Y0030

MPP

OUT

Y0031

X0003

MPS

AND

MPS

AND

X0005

OUT

Y0032

MPP

AND

X0006

OUT

Y0033

MPP

X0004

PLC Common

OUT

Y0034

X0007

AND

X0008

MPS

AND

X0009

OUT

Y0035

MRD

AND

X000A

OUT

Y0036

MRD

AND

M000B

OUT

Y0037

MPP

OUT

END

Y0038

· An example to use the MPS instruction and the MPP instruction

[List Mode]
Steps

Instruction

Device

Steps

Instruction

Device

795

796

5.7.3

CIMON-PLC

MPS

AND

MPS

AND

MPS

AND

MPS

AND

MPS

AND

MPS

AND

MPS

AND

MPS

AND

MPS

AND

OUT

MPP

X0000

OUT

MPP

OUT

MPP

OUT

MPP

OUT

MPP

OUT

MPP

OUT

MPP

OUT

MPP

OUT

MPP

OUT

MPP

X000A

OUT

Y0021

END

X0001
X0002
X0003
X0004
X0006
X0006
X0007
X0008

Y0021
Y0022
Y0023
Y0024
Y0025
Y0026
Y0027
Y0028
Y0029
Y002A

Output Instruction

Contents :
· Bit Device Timer, Counter : OUT
· Bit Device set : SET
· Bit Device Reset : RST
· Output for a Scan at Rising Edge and Falling Edge : PLS, PLF

5.7.3.1

Bit Device Timer, Counter : OUT
Usable Device
Instruction

Inte
ger

Flag
No.o
Error Zero Carry
f
Step
s

PLC Common

OUT

OUT
Functions :
This is used to output the result of the operation prior to the OUT instruction to the assigned device.

Result of
Operation

OUT Instruction
Coil

Contact
Contact A

Contact B

OFF

Example of program :
· A program to output with an output unit

[ List Mode ]
Steps

Instruction

Device

X0001

OUT

Y0010

X0002

OUT

Y0011

OUT

Y0012

797

798

CIMON-PLC

END

· A case that a word device is made of a bit

[ List Mode ]

5.7.3.2

Steps

Instruction

Device

X0001

OUT

X0005

X0002

OUT

M0006

OUT

M0007

END

Bit Device set : SET
Usable Device
M

Instruction

SET

Flag
S

Inte
ger

No.o
f
Step
s

Error

Zero

Carr
y

PLC Common

799

SET
Functions :
This is used to set the assigned device. A turned-on device keeps turn-on status though the SET instruction
is not operated and can be reset by the RST instruction.

Example of program :
· A program to set Y0022 if X0001 is turned on and to reset Y0023 if X0002 is turned on

[ List Mode ]
Steps

Instruction

Device

800

5.7.3.3

CIMON-PLC

X0001

SET

Y0022

X0002

RST

Y0023

END

Bit Device Reset : RST
Usable Device
M

Instruction

RST

Flag
S

Inte
ger

No.o
f
Step
s

Error

Zero

Carr
y

RST
Functions :
If the RST instruction is operated, the status of the assigned devices is as follows.

Device

Status

Y, M, L, S, F

Coil and contact is reset

T, C

The current value is 0. Coil and contact is reset.

If the RST instruction is not operated, the status of a device is not changed.
The state of the RST is the same as the following circuit.

Example of program :
· A program to set 0 as the assigned device

PLC Common

801

[ List Mode ]

5.7.3.4

Steps

Instruction

Device

LDP

X0000

SET

M0005

LDP

X0003

RST

M0005

END

Output for a Scan at Rising Edge and Falling Edge : PLS, PLF
Usable Device
M

Instruction

PLS
PLF

PLS
Functions :
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

Flag
S

Inte
ger

No.o
f
Step
s
1

Error Zero

Carr
y

802

CIMON-PLC

If the PLS instruction is operated, the assigned device is set for one scan. Otherwise, it is reset. In case the
PLS instruction is operated on the device assigned to LATCH LAY(L), if the power is turned on, it is set.

Though the RUN Key Switch is shifted from RUN to STOP and from STOP to RUN again after the PLS
instruction is operated, the PLS instruction is not operated.

Example of program :
· A program to operate the PLS instruction if X0001 is turned on

PLC Common

803

[ List Mode ]
Steps

Instruction

Device

X0001

PLS

M0000

END

PLF
Functions :
If the PLF instruction is turned off from on, the assigned device is set for one scan. Otherwise, it is reset.

Though the Run Key Switch is shifted from RUN to STOP and from STOP to RUN again after the PLF
instruction is operated, the PLF instruction is not operated.

Example of program :
· A program to operate the PLF instruction if X0001 is turned off

804

CIMON-PLC

[ List Mode ]

5.7.4

Steps

Instruction

Device

X0001

PLF

M0000

END

Step Control Instruction

Contents :
· Step Control : SET Sxx.xx
· Last-In & First-Out Control : OUT Sxx.xx

5.7.4.1

Step Control : SET Sxx.xx
Usable Device
M

Instruction

SET

Flag
S

Inte
ger

No.o
f
Step
s

Error Zero

Carr
y

PLC Common

805

SET S
Functions :
· In a group, if previous step number is on, current step number is set.
· In case that current step number is on, though input contact is off, it keeps on status.
· Though input condition contacts in a group are simultaneously on, a step number is set.
· The operation of SET Sxx.xx instruction is initialized by setting Input Contact Sxx.00.

Example of Program :
· The Step Control program using Program Group S01.xx.

· If the previous step and the condition contact of current step are on, the current step contact will be set.

806

5.7.4.2

CIMON-PLC

Last-In & First-Out Control : OUT Sxx.xx
Usable Device
M

Instruction

OUT

Flag
S

Inte
ger

No.o
f
Step
s

Error Zero

Carr
y

OUT S
Functions :
· In a group, though a lot of input condition contacts are on, only a step number is set.
· In case that input conditions are simultaneously on, the last programmed one is set first.
· In case that current step number is on, though input contact is off, it keeps on status.
· The operation of OUT Sxx.xx instruction is initialized by setting Input Contact Sxx.00.

PLC Common

Example of Program :
· The Last-In & First-Out program using Program Group S01.xx.

· Time Chart

5.7.5

Master Control Instruction

Contents :
· Set or Reset Master Control : MC, MCR

807

808

5.7.5.1

CIMON-PLC

Set or Reset Master Control : MC, MCR
Usable Device
M

Instruction

Flag
S

Inte
ger

No.o
f
Step
s

Error Zero

Carr
y

MC, MCR
Functions :
If the input condition of the MC is turned on, the instructions from MC number to the same MCR number as
MC number are operated. If the input condition is turned off, no instructions are operated. Nesting is
available up to 8 couples(n0 ~ 7). In case of nesting. The MC is operated from lower nesting number and
the MCR is operated from higher nesting number. Irrelevant to the operation of the MC instruction, the scan
from the MC instruction to the MCR instruction is run. The MCR is used to release the Master Control and
display that the Master Control is not operated. If the MC-operated block with high order of priority is
released, the MC-operated blocks with low order of priority are released.

Example of program :
· If X0001 is turned on, the MC is set. If it is turned off, the MC is reset

PLC Common

809

In order MC1 is operated, X0001 has to be turned on. In order MC2 is operated, X0003 has to be turned on
after MC1 is operated. In order MC3 is operated, X0005 has to be turned on after MC1 was operated and
MC2 is operated.

5.7.6

Termination Insruction

Contents :
· End Main Routine Program : END
· End Main Roution Program Conditionally : CEND, CENDP
· End Sequence Program : PEND

810

5.7.6.1

CIMON-PLC

End Main Routine Program : END
Usable Device
M

Instruction

END

Flag
S

Inte
ger

No.o
f
Step
s

Error Zero

Carr
y

END
Functions :
This is used to end Main Routine Program.

Example of program :

PLC Common

· A program using the JMP instruction

[ List Mode ]
Steps

Instruction

Device

X0000

OUT

Y0020

X0001

JMP

X0010

OUT

Y0030

X0011

OUT

Y0031

JME

PEND

811

812

5.7.6.2

CIMON-PLC

End Main Roution Program Conditionally : CEND, CENDP
Usable Device
Instruction

Flag
S

CEND (P)

Inte
ger

No.o
Error
f
Step
s

Zer
o

Carr
y

CEND
Functions :
Incase the condition to execute an instruction is truned on, this is used to end a main routine program. The
different point from the END is the condition to execute an instruction(Input condition). The END instruction
should be at the last of a main routine program.

Example of program :
· If X0005 is turned on, a Main Routine Program is ended

PLC Common

813

[ List Mode ]

5.7.6.3

Steps

Instruction

Device

X0000

OUT

Y0020

X0001

OUT

Y0021

X0005

CEND

X0011

OUT

Y0031

END

PEND

End Sequence Program : PEND
Usable Device
M

Instruction

PEND

Flag
S

Inte
ger

No.o
f
Step
s
1

Error Zero

Carr
y

814

CIMON-PLC

PEND
Functions :
This is used to end a program. Scanning is ended at this step and go back to 0 step.

While Main Sequence Program and Sub Sequence Program are run, it is not able to use the PEND
instruction. In case the PEND is needed while a program is run, use the END instruction. In case of Main
Routine Program, Sub Routine Program, Interrupt Program, Sub Sequence Program, how to use the END
instruction and the PEND instruction is as follows.

PLC Common

5.7.7

815

Program branch Instruction

Contents :
· Jump : JMP, JMPP, JME
· Branch Sub-Routine : CALL, CALLP, SBRT, RET
· Call Sub-Routine between Program Files : ECALL, ECALLP, SBRT, RET

5.7.7.1

Jump : JMP, JMPP, JME
Usable Device
M

Instruction

JMP (P)
JME

Flag
S

Inte
ger

No.o
f
Step
s

Error Zero

Carr
y

JMP, JME
Functions :
If the input for the JMP n instruction is turned on, the execution of a program jumps next to JME n and all of
the instructions between JMP n and JME n are not operated.

Several JMP instructions pair with a JME instruction and can be used as a JMP instruction.

816

CIMON-PLC

The number from 0 to 127 can be used as JMP Number n. But, the number should not be the same as the
number of sub-routine(SBRT, RET) function. Please note that the JMP instruction between SBRT-operated
block and RET-operated block is treated as an error.

Example of program :
A program that all of the instructions between JMP1 instruction and JME1 instruction if Input Signal X000F
is turned on.

5.7.7.2

Branch Sub-Routine : CALL, CALLP, SBRT, RET
Usable Device
M

Instruction

Flag
S

Inte
ger

No.o
f
Step
s

CALL (P)

SBRT

RET

Error Zero

Carr
y

PLC Common

817

CALL, SBRT, RET
Functions :
In case an input condition is turned on while an program is executed, this is used to the program between
the SBRT n and the RET according to the CALL n.

CALL No. can be used by nesting. Certainly, the instructions between the SBRT n instruction and the RET
instruction are put next to the END instruction. Condition to be tread as Error : The case n is less than 00 or
bigger than 127, The case there is the CALL n and not the SBRT n, The case there is the SBRT n alone or
there is the RET alone. A CALL can be applied to execute another SBRT between a SBRT. Maximum is 16
times.
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

818

CIMON-PLC

Example of program :

5.7.7.3

Call Sub-Routine between Program Files : ECALL, ECALLP, SBRT, RET
Usable Device
M

Instruction

ECALL (P)

SBRT

Flag
S

Inte
ger

RET

No.o
f
Step
s

Error Zero

Carr
y

3
1
1

ECALL, SBRT, RET
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

PLC Common

819

Functions :
In case an input condition is turned on while a program is executed, this is used to move to the
corresponding ID program according to the ECALL ID n, executing the program between SBRT n and RET
in the program of the corresponding ID.

ECALL ID n can be used by nesting. The SBRT n and RET program of the corresponding number should
exist in the program of the corresponding ID. Condition to be treated as Error : The case n is less than 00
or bigger than 127, The case there is the ECALL ID n and not n in the corresponding file, The case there is
the SBRT n instruction alone or there is the RET instruction alone. A CALL or a ECALL can be applied to
execute another SBRT between a SBRT.

Example of program :

820

CIMON-PLC

If Input Condition X0002 is turned on, the ECALLP is executed and the program between the SBRT 2 and
RET in Sub Routine Program File “AAA” is executed.

5.7.8

Structure Creation Instruction

Contents :
· FOR-NEXT : FOR, NEXT
· Force FOR-NEXT to End : BREAK, BREAKP

5.7.8.1

FOR-NEXT : FOR, NEXT
Usable Device
Instruction

FOR

Flag

Inte
ger

No.o
f
Step
s

2
o

Error Zero

Carr
y

FOR, NEXT
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

PLC Common

821

Functions :
This is used to operate the instructions between the FOR and the NEXT n at n times. After that, the step
next to the NEXT n is executed. n can be assigned to one of the numbers between 1 and 32767. In case
one of the numbers between -32767 and 0 is assigned, this instruction is operated as n=1. The Nesting for
the FOR is available up to 16 times.

Example of program :
A program to operate the FOR - NEXT instruction if X0001 is turned off and not to operate it if X0001 is
turned on.

822

5.7.8.2

CIMON-PLC

Force FOR-NEXT to End : BREAK, BREAKP
Usable Device
M

Instruction

BREAK
(P)

Flag
S

Inte
ger

No.o
f
Step
s

Error Zero

Carr
y

BREAK
Functions :
This is used to force the FOR - NEXT to end repeating.

PLC Common

823

The BREAK can be used while the FOR-NEXT is operated. The BREAK can be in a nesting level. In case it
is operated in multiple nesting levels, BREAK instructions as same as the numbers in them will be
executed.

Example of program :
A program to operated the FOR - NEXT instruction of X0008 is turned off and not to operate it if X0008 is
turned on

5.7.9

Program run control Instruction

Contents :
· Enable or Disable to Interrupt : EI, DI, GEI, GDI
· Return : IRET
· Enable, Disable PBT : EPGM, DPGM

5.7.9.1

Enable or Disable to Interrupt : EI, DI, GEI, GDI
Instruction

Usable Device

Flag
No.o

824

CIMON-PLC

EI, DI

f
Step
s

GEI, GDI

Error

1
1

EI
Functions :
This is used to enable the interrupt ID program assigned to n to operate Time Driven Interrupt. The interrupt
set up by a parameter can be operated after this instruction is operated. If the Mode is converted to RUN,
an interrupt program is in the DI status. To use a interrupt program routine, the GEI should be executed
and then the EI should be executed.

DI
Functions :
This is used to disable the interrupt ID program assigned to n to operate Time Driven Interrupt. After this
instruction is operated, an interrupt ID program assigned to n is not executed.

GEI
Functions :
This is used to enable all the programs that are assigned to interrupt to operate Time Driven Interrupt. The
interrupt set up by a parameter can be operated after this instruction is operated. If the Mode is converted
to RUN, all the interrupt programs are in the DI status. To use all the Interrupt program routines, the GEI
should be executed.

PLC Common

825

GDI
Functions :
This is used to enable all the interrupt ID programs to operate Time Driven Interrupt. After this instruction is
operated, all the interrupt ID program routines are not executed.

5.7.9.2

Return : IRET
Usable Device
Instruction
IRET

Flag
S

No.of

Inte Steps Error
ger

Zer
o

Carr
y

IRET
Functions :
This is used to end an interrupt program. This is used in the interrupt program assigned to Time Driven
Interrupt.

5.7.9.3

Enable, Disable PBT : EPGM, DPGM
Instructio
n
EP
GM
DP

Usable Device
M

Flag
S

Inte
ger

No.of
Step
s

Error

Zero

Usable CPU
Carry

826

CIMON-PLC

EPGM
Functions :
Permit driving of scan program that correspond to ID that is established by n.
Change relevant scan program to Enable status in Disable status by DPGM command.
If Disable Program command is not input at Mode conversion, it is all Enable PBT states

DPGM
Functions :
After this command is executed, ID's program that correspond to n is unpractised
Must do in Enable Program state using EPGM command to run program again.

5.7.10 Other Instructions

Contents :
· Stop Sequence Program : STOP
· End Initialization Program and Execute Scan Program : INITEND
· Reset WDT : WDT, WDTP
· Set or Reset Carry Flag : STC, CLC
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

PLC Common

827

· I/O Refresh : RFS, RFSP

5.7.10.1 Stop Sequence Program : STOP
Usable Device
M

Instruction

STOP

Flag
S

Inte
ger

No.o
f
Step
s

Error Zero

Carr
y

STOP
Functions :
This is used to stop the operation of instructions by resetting output Y if input is turned on. (The function is
the same as the case that the RUN Key Switch is shifted to STOP.) To restart the operation of instructions
after the STOP instruction is operated, the RUN Key Switch is shifted to STOP and to RUN. Do not put the
STOP instruction in Interrupt Program, Sub Routine Program and FOR ~ NEXT.

Example of program :
· A program to stop a PLC if X0001 is turned on

828

CIMON-PLC

[ List Mode ]
Steps

Instruction

Device

X0001

STOP

X0011

OUT

Y0030

X0012

OUT

Y0031

END

5.7.10.2 End Initialization Program and Execute Scan Program : INITEND
Usable Device
M

Instruction

INITEND

Flag
S

Inte
ger

No.o
f
Step
s

Error Zero

Carr
y

INITEND
Functions :
This is used to end an initialization program after the current scan, executing a scan program. To run a
scan program, the INITEND instruction should be used. Unless this instruction is not used, the initialization
program will be run continuously. The INITEND instruction can not be used in any program except an
initialization program.

Example of program :
· A program to end an initialization program

PLC Common

829

5.7.10.3 Reset WDT : WDT, WDTP
Usable Device
Instruction

WDT

Flag
S

No.of
Inte Step Error
ger
s

Zero

Carry

WDT
Functions :
This is used to reset Watch Dog Timer in a Sequence Program. This is used for the case that the time from
Step 0 to END(FEND) is over the set value as Watch Dog Timer according to conditions in a Sequence
Program. In case Scan Timer is over every set value as Scan Watch Dog Timer, the set value should be
changed as Watch Dog Timer in Parameter setup of other devices. Please note neither T1, which is from 0
Step to a WDT instruction, nor T2, which is from the WDT instruction to an END(FEND) instruction, is over
the set value for Watch Dog Timer.

830

CIMON-PLC

Please note that it takes too long to reset the output in case of error, though the WDT instruction can be
used over twice for one scan.
Operating condition
The condition to operate the WDT Reset is as follows.

Example of program :
A program that Watch Dog Timer is set up as much as 150 and it takes 300 from 0 to PEND(END)
instruction according to the execution condition of Program

PLC Common

831

5.7.10.4 Set or Reset Carry Flag : STC, CLC
Usable Device
M

Instruction

STC, CLC

Flag
S

STC
Functions :
If an input condition is turned on, Carry Flag(F112) is set.

CLC
Functions :
If an input conditon is turned on, Carry Flag(F112) is reset.

Example of program :
· A program to set Carry Flag(F112) if input X0001 is turned on

Inte
ger

No.o
f
Step
s
1

Error Zero

Carr
y
o

832

CIMON-PLC

5.7.10.5 I/O Refresh : RFS, RFSP
Usable Device
M

Instruction

RFS (P)

S
n

Flag

Inte
ger

No.o
f
Step
s

Error Zero

Carr
y

RFS
Functions :
In case the condition to execute an instruction is turned on, this is used to refresh the devices of input
modules and output modules while scanning.

If the condition for the RFS instruction is turned on while scanning as the above order, input and output are
enviously refreshed again. Executing the refresh instruction, the new input and output while scanning can
be understood. After the refresh instruction is executed, the instruction according to the new input is
executed.

PLC Common

833

Example of program :
If M0000 is turned on, 8 input devices from X0000 are refreshed.

5.8

Application Instruction
Contents :
· Comparison operation Instruction :
Compare 16 Bit and 32 Bit Data : LDx, LDDx, ANDx, ANDDx, OR, ORDx
16 Bit, 32 Bit Unsigned Data Comparisons : UCMP, UDCMP
INT 16 Block Data Comparison : BK=, BK<>, BK>, BK<=, BK<, BK>=, BK=P, BK<>P, BK>P, BK<=P,
BK=P
· Arithmetic operation Instruction :
ADD BIN : ADD, DADD, ADDP, DADDP
ADD BCD : BADD, BADDP, DBADD, DBADDP
Floating-point four arithmetical operations arithmetic(Addition) : EADD, EADDP
Subtract BIN : SUB, SUBP, DSUB, DSUBP
Subtract BCD : BSUB, BSUBP, DBSUB, DBSUBP
Floating-point four arithmetical operations arithmetic(Subtraction) : ESUB, ESUBP
Multiply BIN : MUL, MULP, DMUL, DMULP
BIN 16 Bit and BIN 32 Bit multiplication operations : WMUL, WMULP, DWMUL, DWMULP
Multiply BCD : BMUL, BMULP, DBMUL, DBMULP
Floating-point four arithmetical operations arithmetic(Multiplication) : EMUL, EMULP
Divide BCD : BDIV, BDIVP, DBDIV, DBDIVP
Divide BIN : DIV, DIVP, DDIV, DDIVP
Floating-point four arithmetical operations arithmetic(Division) : EDIV, EDIVP
BIN 16 Bit, 32 Bit division operations : WDIV, WDIVP, DWDIV, DWDIVP
Increase 16 and 32 Bit BIN Data : INC, INCP, DINC, DINCP
Decrease BIN Data : DEC, DECP, DDEC, DDECP

834

CIMON-PLC

Calculation of totals for 16bit data : WSUM, WSUMP
· Data conversion Instruction :
Convert BCD : BCD, BCDP, DBCD, DBCDP
Convert BIN : BIN, BINP, DBIN, DBINP
Invert Sing for BIN 16 Bit and 32 Bit Data : NEG, NEGP, DNEG, DNEGP
Conversion from BIN 16 and 32 Bit Data to floating decimal point : FLT, FLTP, DFLT, DFLTP
Conversion from floating decimal point data to BIN 16 and 32 Bit Data : INT, INTP, DINT, DINTP
Conversion from BIN Data to Gray Code : GRY, GRYP, DGRY, DGRYP
Conversion from Gray code to BIN Data : GBIN, GBINP, DGBIN, DGBINP
· Data transfer Instruction:
Transfer 16 Bit or 32 Bit Data : MOV, MOVP, DMOV, DMOVP
Transfer Block : BMOV, BMOVP
Floating-point data transfer Instruction : EMOV, EMOVP
Invert 16 Bit Data Bit : CML, CMLP, DCML, DCMLP
Exchange 16 Bit and 32 Bit Data : XCH, XCHP, DXCH, DXCHP
Exchange Block Data : BXCH, BXCHP
Transfer Identical 16 Bit Data Block : FMOV, FMOVP
Bit data transfer : WBMOV, WBMOVP
Transfer Bit Data : BITMOV, BITMOVP
Exchange Upper and Lower Byte : SWAP, SWAPP
· Data Table operation Instruction :
Writing data to the data table : FIFW, FIFWP
Reading the first data from the data table : FIFR, FIFRP
Reading the last data from the data table : FPOP, FPOPP
Inserting a data in the data table : FINS, FINSP
Deleting a data from the data table : FDEL, FDELP
· Logic operation Instruction :
Word AND : WAND, WANDP, DAND, DANDP
Word OR : WOR, WORP, DOR, DORP
Word Exclusive OR : WXOR, WXORP, DXOR, DXORP
Word Exclusive NOR : WXNR, WXNRP, DXNR, DXNRP
Block Logical Product : BKAND, BKANDP
Block Logical Sum : BKOR, BKORP
Block Exclusive OR : BKXOR, BKXORP
Block Non-Exclusive Logical Sum : BKXNR, BKXNRP
· Rotation Instruction :
Rotate Right : ROR, RORP, DROR, DRORP
Rotate Right With Carry : RCR, RCRP, DRCR, DRCRP
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

PLC Common

Rotate Left : ROL, ROLP, DROL, DROLP
Rotate Left With Carry : RCL, RCLP, DRCL, DRCLP
· Shift Instruction :
Shift Right or Shift Left 16Bit Data as n Bits : SFR, SFRP, SFL, SFLP
Shift Right or Shift Left 16 Bit Data as 1 Bit : BSFR, BSFRP, BSFL, BSFLP
Shift Right or Shift Left n Word Data as 1 Word : DSFR, DSFRP, DSFL, DSFLP
· Character String Processing Instruction :
Convert BIN 16 Bit or 32 Bit Data to Decimal ASCII : BINDA(p), DBINDA(P)
Convert BIN 16 Bit or 32 Bit Data to Hexadecimal ASCII : BINHA(P)), DBINHA(P)
Convert BCD 4 Digit or 8 Digit to Decimal ASCII Data : BCDDA(P), DBCDDA(P)
Convert Decimal ASCII to BIN 16 Bit or 32 Bit Data : DABIN(P), DDABIN(P)
Convert hexadecimal ASCII to BIN 16 bit Data : HABIN(P), DHABIN(P)
· Data Processing Instruction :
Search 16 Bit and 32 Bit Data for Maximum Value : MAX, MAXP, DMAX, DMAXP
Search for 16 Bit and 32 Bit Data for Minimum Value : MIN, MINP, DMIN, DMINP
Check 16 Bit and 32 Bit Data : SUM, SUMP, DSUM, DSUMP
Decode in 7-Segment : SEG, SEGP
Decode 8 Bit Data or Encode 256 Bit Data : DECO, DECOP, ENCO, ENCOP
Dissociate or Unite 16 Bit Data : DIS, DISP, UNI, UNIP
Data Scaling according to the specified linear function : SCL, SCLP
· Bit Processing Instruction :
Move Bit Device : TEST(P), DTEST(P)
Set or Reset Bit in Word Device : BSET, BSETP, BRST, BRSTP
· Clock Instruction :
Add Clock Data : DATE+, DATE+P
Subtract Clock Data : DATE-, DATE-P
Convert Clock Data Format : SECOND(P), HOUR(P)
Reading Clock Data : DATERD, DATERDP
Writing Clock Data : DATEWR, DATEWRP
· Timer / Counter :
Set after Delay : TON
Reset after Delay : TOFF
Accumulate Time : TMR
Redecrease Time Relevantly to Input (OFF to ON) : TRTG
Decrease Time Irrelevantly to Input : TMON
Count : CTU

835

836

CIMON-PLC

Count Down : CTD
Count and Count Down : CTUD
Count and Set Conditionally : CTR
· Buffer Memory Access Instruction :
Read 1 Word or 2 Word Data in Optional Unit : FROM, FROMP, DFRO, DFROP
Write 1 Word or 2 Word Data in optional Unit : TO, TOP, DTO, DTOP
· Instruction for Data Link :
Receive Data : RCV, RCVP
Receive Data : RECV, RECVP
Send Data : SEND, SENDP
Send Data : SND, SNDP
· Read / Write Instruction :
Setting Data Memory Access Instruction Special function module Setting Data Read : FREAD, FREADP
Setting Data Memory Access Instruction Special function module Setting Data Write : FWRITE, FWRITEP
· Real number operation Instruction :
SIN operation on floating decimal point Data : SIN, SINP
COS Operation on floationg decimal point data : COS, COSP
TAN operation on floating decimal point Data : TAN, TANP
SIN-1 Operation on floating point data : ASIN, ASINP
COS-1 Operation on floating point data : ACOS, ACOSP
TAN-1 Operation on floating point data : ATAN, ATANP
Conversion form floating decimal point angle to radian : RAD, RADP
Conversion from floating decimal point radian to angle : DEG, DEGP
Square root operations for floating decimal point Data : SQR, SQRP
Exponent operation on floating decimal point dataInstruction : EXP, EXPP
Natural logarithm operations on floating decimal point Data : LOG, LOGP
Random number generate and series Update : RND, RNDP, SRND, SRNDP
BCD of 4 Digit, Square root of 8 Digit : BSQR, BSQRP, BDSQR, BDSQRP
BCD Type SIN-1 Operation : BASIN, BASINP
BCD Type COS Operation : BCOS, BCOSP
BCD Type TAN Operation : BTAN, BTANP
BCD type SIN operation : BSIN, BSINP
BCD type COS-1 Operation : BACOS, BACOSP
BCD Type TAN-1 Operation : BATAN, BATANP
· etc:
Timing pulse generation : DUTY
Swap Active Status in Redundant System : ATVP

PLC Common

5.8.1

837

Comparison operation Instruction

Contents :
· Compare 16 Bit and 32 Bit Data : LDx, LDDx, ANDx, ANDDx, OR, ORDx
· 16 Bit, 32 Bit Unsigned Data Comparisons : UCMP, UDCMP
· INT 16 Block Data Comparison : BK=, BK<>, BK>, BK<=, BK<, BK>=, BK=P, BK<>P, BK>P, BK<=P,
BK=P

5.8.1.1

Compare 16 Bit and 32 Bit Data : LDx, LDDx, ANDx, ANDDx, OR, ORDx
Usable Device
Instruction
LDx,
LDDx
ANDx,
ANDDx,
ORx,
ORDx

Flag
No.of
Steps

Inte
ger

Error (F110)

Error

Zero

Carry

In case That a Device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

LD x, LDDx ( x : =, <, >, <=, >=, <> )
Functions :
These are used to compare the data in the device assigned to S1 with the data in the device assigned to
S2, turning on the result of the current operation, if it coincides with Condition x. The comparison of S1 and
S2 executes SIGNED operation. Accordingly, the result of LD x is h8000 (-32768) ~ hFFFF (-1) < 0 ~
h7FFF (32767) and the result of LDD x is h80000000 (-2147483648) ~ hFFFFFFFF (-1) < 0 ~ h7FFFFFFF
(2147483647)

Condition x

Condition

Result of Operation

S1 = S2

S1 ? S2

S1 < S2

838

CIMON-PLC

S1 > S2

The results of the operation beside the aboves are turned off

Example of program :
· A program to compare the word data in X0000 and the word data in D0001

If the data in X0000 and the data in D0001 are same, Y0010 is set.

· A program to compare Integer 1000 with the data in D0001

If the data in D0001 is greater than or equal to 1000, Y0010 is set.
· A program to compare the double-word data in the device assigned to D0010 with Integer 1,000,000

If the data in D0010 is less than or equal to 1,000,000, Y0000 is turned on.

AND x, ANDD x ( x : =, <, >, <=, >=, <> )
Functions :
These are used to compare the data in the device assigned to S1 with the data in the device assigned to
S2, turning on the result of the current operation, if it coincides with Condition x and turing the result of the
current operation, if it coincides with Condition x. And these are used to AND-operate the result of the
comparison and the result of the current operation, taking the result of AND-operation as the result of the
entire operation. The comparison of S1 and S2 executes SIGNED operation. Accordingly, the result of AND
x is h8000 (-32768) ~ hFFFF (-1) < 0 ~ h7FFF (32767) and the result of ANDD x is h80000000 (2147483648) ~ hFFFFFFFF (-1) < 0 ~ h7FFFFFFF (2147483647)

Condition x

Condition

Result of Operation

S1 = S2

PLC Common

S1 = S2

S1 ? S2

S1 < S2

S1 > S2

839

Irrevalently the results of the current operation. The result of the operations beside the aboves are turned
off.

Example of program :
· A program to compare 100 with the word data in D0002

If M0011 is turned on and the data in D0002 is 100, Y0010 is turned on.

· A program to compare the double-word data in D0000 with the double-word data in D0002

If X0000 is turned on and the double-word data in D0000 is different from the double-word data in D0002,
Y0020 is turned on.

OR x, ORD x ( x : =, <, >, <=, >=, <> )
Functions :
These are used to compare the data in the device assigned to S1 with the data in the device assigned to
S2, turning on the result of the current operation, if it coincides with Condition x and turing the result of the
current operation, if it coincides with Condition x. And these are used to OR-operate the result of the
comparison and the result of the current operation, taking the result of OR-operation as the result of the
entire operation. The comparison of S1 and S2 executes SIGNED operation.
Accordingly, the result of OR x is h8000 (-32768) ~ hFFFF (-1) < 0 ~ h7FFF (32767) and the result of ORD
x is h80000000 (-2147483648) ~ hFFFFFFFF (-1) < 0 ~ h7FFFFFFF (2147483647).

840

CIMON-PLC

Condition x

Condition

Result of Operation

S1 = S2

S1 ? S2

S1 < S2

S1 > S2

Irevalently the result of the current operation. The results of the operations beside the aboves are turned
off.

Example of Program :
· A program to compare the word data in M0030 with the word data in D0002

If M001A is turned on or the data in M0030 is greater than or equal to the data in D0002, Y0011 is turned
on.

· A program to compare the data in D0000 with the data in D0002

If X0000 is turned on or the double-word data in D0000 is less than the data in D0002, Y0031 is turned on.

5.8.1.2

16 Bit, 32 Bit Unsigned Data Comparisons : UCMP, UDCMP
Usable Device
Instruction
UCMP
UDCMP

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

PLC Common

841

Comparison data or data save the number

Paralleled data or data save the number

Error (F110)

In case That a Device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

UCMP(P)
Explanation :
Compares BIN 16-bit data the nth point from the device number designated by S1 with BIN 16-bit data the
nth point from the device number designated by S2 , and the result are stores Flag F(F0120 ~ F0125)

· the result are stores Flag F(F0120 ~ F0125)

A condition

Result

S1 < S2

F0120

S1 = S2

F0121

S1 = S2

F0122

S1 > S2

F0123

S1 = S2

F0124

S1 ? S2

F0125

Example of Program:
A comparison operation When M0000 goes ON, comparing the data for the number of points D00100 with
the data the number of points D00090 ,when the result is equal flag F0120 set On.

842

CIMON-PLC

UDCMP(P)
Explanation :
Compares BIN 32-bit data the nth point from the device number designated by S1,S1+1 with BIN 32-bit
data the nth point from the device number designated by S2 ,S2+1 , and the result are stores Flag F(F0120
~ F0125)

· the result are stores Flag F(F0120 ~ F0125)

A condition

Reslut

S1 < S2

F0120

S1 = S2

F0121

S1 = S2

F0122

S1 > S2

F0123

S1 = S2

F0124

S1 ? S2

F0125

Example of Program :
A comparison operation When M0000 goes ON, comparing the data for the number of points D00100 with
the data the number of points D00090 ,when the result is equal flag F0120 set On.

5.8.1.3

INT 16 Block Data Comparison : BK=, BK<>, BK>, BK<=, BK<, BK>=, BK=P, BK<>P, BK>P,
BK<=P, BK=P
Flag

Usable Device
Instructio
n

BK
(P)

Inte
ger

No.o
f
Step
s

Erro
r

Zero

Usable CPU
Carry

PLC Common

D1
D2
n

843

Assigned data or number of device

Number of the device to which the data compared is assigned

Number of the device to store the result of block comparison

D2
n

Number of the blocks compared

Error (F110)

In case That a Device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

BK
Functions :
· This is used to compare n number of word data in the device assigned to S1 with n number of word data
in the device assigned to S2, storing the result in the device assigned to D.
· If the result of comparison is true, the device assigned to D is set.
· If the result of comparison is false, the device assigned to D is reset.
· Comparison is operated in word.
· S1 is the value between –32768 and 32767.
· The result of comparison operation according to each instruction
Instruction

Condition

Result

Instruction

Condition

Result

BK=

s1 = s2

ON(1)

BK=

s1 ? s2

OFF(0)

BK<>

s1 ? s2

BK<>

s1 = s2

BK>

s1 > s2

BK>

s1 = s2

BK<=

s1 = s2

BK<=

s1 > s2

BK<

s1 < s2

BK<

s1 = s2

BK>=

s1 = s2

BK>=

s1 < s2

Example of Program :
The program used to compare 8 word data from the word data in the device assigned to M0000 with 8 word
data from the word data in the device assigned to M0100 each.

844

CIMON-PLC

If X0000 is on and 8 word data from the word data in the device assigned to M0000 is greater than or equal
to 8 word data from the word data in the device assigned to M0100, Y0011 is set.

5.8.2

Arithmetic operation Instruction

Contents :
· ADD BIN : ADD, DADD, ADDP, DADDP
· ADD BCD : BADD, BADDP, DBADD, DBADDP
· Floating-point four arithmetical operations arithmetic(Addition) : EADD, EADDP
· Subtract BIN : SUB, SUBP, DSUB, DSUBP
· Subtract BCD : BSUB, BSUBP, DBSUB, DBSUBP
· Floating-point four arithmetical operations arithmetic(Subtraction) : ESUB, ESUBP
· Multiply BIN : MUL, MULP, DMUL, DMULP
· BIN 16 Bit and BIN 32 Bit multiplication operations : WMUL, WMULP, DWMUL, DWMULP
· Multiply BCD : BMUL, BMULP, DBMUL, DBMULP
· Floating-point four arithmetical operations arithmetic(Multiplication) : EMUL, EMULP
· Divide BCD : BDIV, BDIVP, DBDIV, DBDIVP
· Divide BIN : DIV, DIVP, DDIV, DDIVP
· Floating-point four arithmetical operations arithmetic(Division) : EDIV, EDIVP
· BIN 16 Bit, 32 Bit division operations : WDIV, WDIVP, DWDIV, DWDIVP
· Increase 16 and 32 Bit BIN Data : INC, INCP, DINC, DINCP
· Decrease BIN Data : DEC, DECP, DDEC, DDECP
· Calculation of totals for 16bit data : WSUM, WSUMP

PLC Common

5.8.2.1

845

ADD BIN : ADD, DADD, ADDP, DADDP
Usable Device
Instruction
ADD(P)
DADD(P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

S1, S2

Assigned data or number of device

Number of destination device

Error (F110)

In case That a Device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

ADD
Functions :
This is used to add the word data in the device assigned to S1 to the word data in the device assigned to
S2, storing the result in the device assigned D.

Example of program :
A program to add the data in the device assigned to D0000 to the data in the device assigned to D0001,
output the result to Y0060 when program input signal X0002 is turned on

846

5.8.2.2

CIMON-PLC

ADD BCD : BADD, BADDP, DBADD, DBADDP
Usable Device
Instruction
BADD(P)
DBADD(P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

S1, S2

Assigned data or number of device

Number of destination device

Error (F110)

In case That a Device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

BADD
Example of program :
A program to add the data in the device assigned to D0000 to the data in the device assigned to D0001,
outputting the result to Y0060 when program input signal X0002 is turned on

5.8.2.3

Floating-point four arithmetical operations arithmetic(Addition) : EADD, EADDP
Usable Device
Instruction

Flag
C

@D Inte
ger

No.o
f

Err
or

Zer Car
o
ry

Usable CPU
XP

PLC Common

847

Step
s
EADD(P)

S1, S2

Assigned data or number of device

Number of destination device

Error (F110)

In case That a Device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

EADD(P)
Functions :
This is used to add the floating-point data in the device assigned to S1 to the floating-point data in the
device assigned to S2, storing the result in the device assigned D.
The result of the operation to add S1 to S2 is stored in D.
According to the result of an operation, error flag(F110) is set.

Example of program :
· A program to add the floating-point data in the device assigned to D00000 to the floating-point data in the
device assigned to D00004, output the result to Y0040 when program input signal X0002 is turned on.

· A program to add the floating-point data 0.23 to the floating-point data in the device assigned to D00002,
outputing the result to D00040 when program input signal M0000 is turned on.

848

5.8.2.4

CIMON-PLC

Subtract BIN : SUB, SUBP, DSUB, DSUBP
Usable Device
Instruction
SUB(P)
DSUB(P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

S1, S2

Assigned data or number of device

Number of destination device

Error (F110)

In case That a Device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

SUB
Functions :
This is used to subtract the word data in the device assigned to S2 from the word data in the device
assigned to S1, storing the result in the device assigned to D.

Example of program :
A program to subtract the data in the device assigned to D0002 from the data in the device assigned to
D0001, storing the result in M0020 when an input signal X0001 is turned on

PLC Common

5.8.2.5

849

Subtract BCD : BSUB, BSUBP, DBSUB, DBSUBP
Usable Device
Instruction
BSUB(P)
DBSUB(P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

S1, S2

Assigned data or number of device

Number of destination device

Error (F110)

In case That a Device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

BSUB
Functions :
This is used to subtract the BCD word data in the device assigned to S2 from the BCD word data in the
device assigned to S1, storing the result in the device assigned to D.

Example of program :
A program to subtract the data in the device assigned to D0002 from the data in the device assigned to
D0001, storing the result in Y0020 when an input signal X0001 is turned on

850

5.8.2.6

CIMON-PLC

Floating-point four arithmetical operations arithmetic(Subtraction) : ESUB, ESUBP
Usable Device
M

Instruction

ESUB(P)

Flag
C

No.o
@D Inte
f
ger Step
s

Err
or

Usable CPU

Zer Car
o
ry

S1, S2

Assigned data or number of device

Number of destination device

Error (F110)

In case That a Device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

ESUB(P)
Functions :
This is used to subtract the Floating-point data in the device assigned to S2 from the Floating-point data in
the device assigned to S1, storing the result in the device assigned to D.

Example of program :
A program to subtract the Floating-point data in the device assigned to D00004 from the Floating-point data
in the device assigned to D00000, storing the result in Y0040 when an input signal X0002 is turned on.

5.8.2.7

Multiply BIN : MUL, MULP, DMUL, DMULP
Usable Device
Instruction
MUL(P)
DMUL(P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

PLC Common

S1, S2

Assigned data or number of device

Number of destination device

Error (F110)

In case That a Device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

851

MUL
Functions :
This is used to multiply the word data assigned to S1 by the word data in the device assigned to S2, storing
the lower 16 bits of the result in the device assigned to D and the upper 16 bits of the result in the device
assigned to D+1.

Example of program :
A program to multiply the data in the device assigned to D0001 by the data in the device assigned to
D0002, storing the lower Hex 4 digit number in D0020 and the upper Hex 4 digit number in D0021 when
program input signal X0010 is turned on

852

5.8.2.8

CIMON-PLC

BIN 16 Bit and BIN 32 Bit multiplication operations : WMUL, WMULP, DWMUL, DWMULP
Usable Device
M

Instruction

WMUL(P)
DWMUL
(P)

Flag
C

No.o
@D Inte
f
ger Step
s

Err
or

Usable CPU

Zer Car
o
ry

S1, S2

Assigned data or number of device

Number of destination device

Error (F110)

In case That a Device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

WMUL
Functions :
Multiplies BIN 16-bit data designated by S1 and BIN 16-bit data designated by S2 , and stores the result in
the device designated by D.

Example of program :
A program to multiply the word data in the device assigned to D00000 by the word data in the device
assigned to D00010, storing the result in the device assigned to D00020 when program input signal M0000
is turned on
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

PLC Common

853

DWMUL
Functions :
Multiplies BIN 32-bit data designated by S1, S1+1 and BIN 32-bit data designated by S2, S2+1 and stores
the result in the device designated by D, D+1.

Example of program :
A program to multiply the word data in the device assigned to D00000, D00001 by the word data in the
device assigned to D00010, D00011 storing the result in the device assigned to D00020, D00021 when
program input signal M0000 is turned on

5.8.2.9

Multiply BCD : BMUL, BMULP, DBMUL, DBMULP
Usable Device
Instruction
BMUL(P)
DBMUL(P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

854

CIMON-PLC

S1, S2

Assigned data or number of device

Number of destination device

Error (F110)

In case That a Device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

BMUL
Functions :
This is used to multiply the BCD word data in the device assigned to S1 by the BCD word data in the device
assigned to S2, storing the low 16 bits of the result in the device assigned to D and the high 16 bits of the
result in the device assigned to D+1.

The result of the operation to multiply S1 D0000 by S2 D0001 is stored in D Y0020. According to the result
of an operation, error(F110) and Zero(F111) are set.

Example of program :
A program to multiply the data in the device assigned to D0001 by the data in the device assigned to
D0002, storing the lower Hex 4 digit number in M0004 and the upper Hex 4 digit number in M0005 when
program input signal X0020 is turned on

PLC Common

855

5.8.2.10 Floating-point four arithmetical operations arithmetic(Multiplication) : EMUL, EMULP
Usable Device
Instruction
EMUL(P)

Flag

@D Inte
ger

Usable CPU

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

S1, S2

Assigned data or number of device

Number of destination device

Error (F110)

In case That a Device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

EMUL(P)
Functions :
This is used to multiply the Floating-point data assigned to S1 by the Floating-point data in the device
assigned to S2, storing the result in the device assigned to D.

856

CIMON-PLC

The result of the operation to multiply S1 by S2 is stored in D.
According to the result of an operation, error(F110) is Set.

Example of program :
A program to multiply the Floating-point data in the device assigned to D00000 by the Floating-point data in
the device assigned to D00004, storing the result in the device assigned to Y0040 when program input
signal X0002 is turned on

5.8.2.11 Divide BIN : DIV, DIVP, DDIV, DDIVP
Usable Device
Instruction
DIV(P)
DDIV(P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

S1, S2

Assigned data or number of device

Number of destination device

Error (F110)

In case That a Device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

DIV
Functions :
This is used to divide the word data in the device assigned to S1 by the word data in the device assigned to
S2, storing the quotient of the result in the device assigned to D and the remainder of the result in D+1.

PLC Common

857

In the result of the operation to divide S1 D0000 by S2 D0001, the quotient is stored in D Y0040 and the
remainder is stored in D+1 Y0050. l According to the result of an operation, error(F110) is set.

Example of program :
A program to the data in the device assigned to D0000 by the data in the device
assigned to D0001, storing the quotient of the result in Y0040 and the remainder of the result in Y0050
whenever program input signal X0000 Is turned on

5.8.2.12 BIN 16 Bit, 32 Bit division operations : WDIV, WDIVP, DWDIV, DWDIVP
Usable Device
X

Flag

Instruction

WDIV(P)
S1
DWDIV(P)
S2

No.o
@D Inte
f
ger Step
s

Error

Zero

Usable CPU
Carry

858

CIMON-PLC

S1, S2

Assigned data or number of device

Number of destination device

Error (F110)

In case That a Device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.
Divide "0" in the case. (S2="0")

WDIV
Functions :
This is used to divide the word data in the device assigned to S1 by the word data in the device assigned to
S2, storing the quotient of the result in the device assigned to D

Example of Program :
Program that divide D0000's data and D0010's data whenever input signal M0000 does ON and store
share to D0020

DWDIV
Functions :

PLC Common

859

This is used to divide the double data in the device assigned to S1, S1+1 by the DOUBLE data in the
device assigned to S2, S2+1 storing the quotient of the result in the device assigned to D

Example of Program :
Program that divide D0000, D0001's data and D0010, D0011's data whenever input signal M0000 does ON
and store share to D0020, D0021

5.8.2.13 Divide BCD : BDIV, BDIVP, DBDIV, DBDIVP
Usable Device
Instruction
BDIV(P)
DBDIV(P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

S1, S2

Assigned data or number of device

Number of destination device

Error (F110)

In case That a Device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

860

CIMON-PLC

BDIV
Functions :
This is used to divide the BCD word data in the device assigned to S1 by the BCD word data in the device
assigned to S2, storing the quotient of the result in the device assigned to D and the remainder of the result
in D+1.

In the result of the operation to divide S1 D0000 by S2 D0001, the quotient is stored in D Y0020 and the
remainder is stored in D+1 Y0030. According to the result of an operation, error(F110) is set.

Example of program :
A program to the data in the device assigned to D0000 by the data in the device assigned to D0001, storing
the quotient of the result in Y0020 and the remainder of the result in Y0030 whenever program input signal
X0002 is turned on

PLC Common

861

5.8.2.14 Floating-point four arithmetical operations arithmetic(Division) : EDIV, EDIVP
Usable Device
Instruction

EDIV(P)

Flag
C

No.o
@D Inte
f
ger Step
s

Err
or

Usable CPU

Zer Car
o
ry

S1, S2

Assigned data or number of device

Number of destination device

Error (F110)

In case That a Device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

EDIV(P)
Functions :
This is used to divide the floating-point data in the device assigned to S1 to the floating-point data in the
device assigned to S2, storing the result in the device assigned D.

The result of the operation to divide (Division) S1 to S2 is stored in D.
According to the result of an operation, error flag(F110) is set.

Example of program :
A program to divide (Division) the floating-point data in the device assigned to D00000 to the floating-point
data in the device assigned to D00004, output the result to Y0040 when program input signal X0002 is
turned on.

862

CIMON-PLC

5.8.2.15 Increase 16 and 32 Bit BIN Data : INC, INCP, DINC, DINCP
Usable Device
Instruction
INC (P)
DINC (P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Number of the device to increase the data corresponding to its own as 1

Error (F110)

In case That a Device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

Carry

INC
Functions :
This is used to add 1 to the data corresponding to D, storing the result to D. In case the operation condition
of INCP/ DINCP is changed from OFF to ON, they are operated for one scan. The operation object for
DINC / DINCP is 32BIT data.

Example of program :
A program to increase the data in the device assigned to Y0010 as 1 from h0018 to h0019 when an
program input signal X0001 is turned on

5.8.2.16 Decrease BIN Data : DEC, DECP, DDEC, DDECP
Usable Device
Instruction

Flag
C

Inte

No.of

Error

Zero

Carry

PLC Common

INC (P)
DINC (P)

ger

Steps

Number the device to decrease the data corresponding to its own as 1

Error (F110)

In case That a Device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

863

DEC
Functions :
This is used to subtract 1 from the data corresponding to D, storing the result to D. In case the operation
condition of INCP/ DINCP is changed from OFF to ON, they are operated for one scan. The operation
object for DDEC / DDECP is 32BIT data.

Example of program :
A program to decrease the data in the device assigned to Y0000 as 1 from h0009 to h0008 when a
program input signal X0002 is ON

5.8.2.17 Calculation of totals for 16bit data : WSUM, WSUMP
Usable Device
M

Instruction

WSUM
WSUM(P)

Flag
C

No.o
@D Inte
f
ger Step
s

Err
or

Usable CPU

Zer Car
o
ry

864

CIMON-PLC

First device number of devices where data for calculating total value is stored

First device number of devices storing total value

Number of data blocks

Error (F110)

In case that a device is assigned to @S or @D, if overflow is generated, it is set
The range n points from the device assigned to S exceeds the relevant device

WSUM, WSUMP
Functions :
Summed up all 16bit binary data for n words from the device designated at S, and stored it in the device
designated at D

Example of program :
A program to sum up the 16bit binary data from D0000 to D0005 when X0000 goes on,
and stores it in DD0010 and D0011

PLC Common

5.8.3

865

Data conversion Instruction

Contents :
· Convert BCD : BCD, BCDP, DBCD, DBCDP
· Convert BIN : BIN, BINP, DBIN, DBINP
· Invert Sing for BIN 16 Bit and 32 Bit Data : NEG, NEGP, DNEG, DNEGP
· Conversion from BIN 16 and 32 Bit Data to floating decimal point : FLT, FLTP, DFLT, DFLTP
· Conversion from floating decimal point data to BIN 16 and 32 Bit Data : INT, INTP, DINT, DINTP
· Conversion from BIN Data to Gray Code : GRY, GRYP, DGRY, DGRYP
· Conversion from Gray code to BIN Data : GBIN, GBINP, DGBIN, DGBINP

5.8.3.1

Convert BCD : BCD, BCDP, DBCD, DBCDP
Usable Device
Instruction
BCD (P)

DBCD (P)

Flag

Inte
ger

Number of the device where BIN Data is stored or BIN Data

Device for storing the converted data in BCD

Error (F110)

If S is over Hex 270F, flag is set.

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

BCD
Functions :
This is used to convert S BIN Data or the data corresponding to the device to which BIN Data is stored in
BCD, storing the result in the device assigned to D.

866

CIMON-PLC

Instruction

Length of Data
Range of BIN Data

BCD
BCDP

16 Bit

0 ~ H270F
0 ~ 9999

DBCD
DBCDP

32 Bit

0 ~ H05F5E0FF
0 ~ 99999999

If BCD Data exceed the range, Error Flag(F110) is set.

Example of program :
A program convert the data in the device assigned to D0001in BCD, output the result to D0010 when input
signal X0001 is turned on

PLC Common

5.8.3.2

867

Convert BIN : BIN, BINP, DBIN, DBINP
Usable Device
Instruction
BIN (P)

DBIN (P)

Flag

Inte
ger

Number of the device where BCD Data is stored or BCD Data

Device for storing the converted data in BIN

Error (F110)

Unless S is not a data in the type of BCD, Flag is set.

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

BIN
Functions :
This is used to convert BCD Data in the device assigned to S1 or the data corresponding to the Data in
BCD-stored device in BIN, storing the result in the device assigned to D.

Instruction

Length of Data
Range of BIN Data

868

CIMON-PLC

BIN
BINP

16 Bit

0 ~ 9999
0 ~ H270F

DBIN
DBINP

32 Bit

0 ~ H05F5E0FF
0 ~ 99999999

If BCD data exceed the range, Error Flag(F110) is set.

Example of program :
A program convert the data in the device assigned to D0001in BIN, storing the result in D0010 when input
signal X0001 is ON

5.8.3.3

Invert Sing for BIN 16 Bit and 32 Bit Data : NEG, NEGP, DNEG, DNEGP
Usable Device
Instruction
NEG(P)
DNEG(P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

First number of device storing data for the complement of 2 operation

Error (F110)

There are no operation errors associated with the NEG(P) or DNEG(P) instruction.

NEG
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

PLC Common

869

Functions :
This is used to invert the sign of the data corresponding to the device assigned to D, storingthe result to D.

Example of program :
A program to convert the data in the device assigned to D0000 in a negative number to store in D0000

5.8.3.4

Conversion from BIN 16 and 32 Bit Data to floating decimal point : FLT, FLTP, DFLT, DFLTP
Usable Device
M

Instruction

Flag
C

FLT (P)

DFLT (P)

No.o
@D Inte
f
ger Step
s
o
o
4
o
-

Error

Zero

Usable CPU
Carry

870

CIMON-PLC

First device number where integer data for the purpose of conversion to floating decimal point
data is being stored

First device number that will store converted floating decimal point data

Error (F110)

There are no errors associated with the FLT(P) of DFLT(P) instructions.

FLT(P)
Functions :
Converts 16-bit BIN data designated by S to floating decimal point real number, and stores at device
number designated by D .

BIN values between -32768 and 32767 can be designated by S .

Example of program :
Store data 1234 to change to D00090.
Convert from D00090's data to floating point data and store to D00100.

DFLT(P)
Functions :
Converts 32-bit BIN data designated by S to floating decimal point real number, and stores at device
number designated by D .

BIN values between -2147483648 and 2147483647 can be designated by S +1 and S .

PLC Common

871

Example of program :
Store data 1234 to change to D00090.
Convert D00090's data to floating point data and store to D00100.

5.8.3.5

Conversion from floating decimal point data to BIN 16 and 32 Bit Data : INT, INTP, DINT,
DINTP
Usable Device
M

Instruction

Flag
No.o
Erro Zero
@D Inte
f
r
ger Step
s

INT(P)

DINT(P)

Usable CPU
Carry

First device number storing floating decimal point data that will be converted to BIN value

First device number to store BIN value after conversion

Error (F110)

In the following cases an operation error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns On, and an error
code is stored at SD0.
· The floating decimal point type data designated by S when the INT instruction was used
outside the -31768 to 32767 range.
· The floating decimal point type data designated by S when the DINT instruction was used
was outside the -2147483648 to 2147483647 range.

INT(P)
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

872

CIMON-PLC

Functions :
Converts the floating decimal point real number designated at S into BIN 16-bit data and stores it at the
device number designated at D.

The range of floating decimal point type real numbers that can be designated at S+1 or S is from -32768 to
32768.
After conversion, the first digit after the decimal point of the real number is rounded off.

Example of program :
The following program converts the floating decimal point type real number at D00080 and D00081 to BIN
16-bit data, and stores the result at D00090.

DINT(P)
Functions :
Converts floating decimal point type real number designated by S to BIN 32-bit data, and stores the result
at the device number designated by D and D+1.

The range of floating decimal point type real numbers that can be designated at S+1 or S is from 2147483648 to 2147483647.
After conversion, the first digit after the decimal point of the real number is rounded off.

Example of program :
The following program converts the floating decimal point type real number at D00080 and D00081 to BIN
32-bit data and stores the result at D00090 and D00091.

PLC Common

5.8.3.6

873

Conversion from BIN Data to Gray Code : GRY, GRYP, DGRY, DGRYP
Usable Device
M

Instruction

GRY(P)
DGRY(P)

Flag
C

No.o
@D Inte
f
ger Step
s

Error

Zero

Usable CPU
Carry

BIN data, or first number of the device where BIN data is stored

First number of device to store Gray code after conversion

Error (F110)

In the following cases an operation error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns On, and an error
code is stored an SD0.
· The data at S is a negative number

GRY
Functions :
Converts BIN data at the device designated by S to Gray code, and stores result at device designated by D.

874

CIMON-PLC

Gray code Conversion table :

5.8.3.7

Hexadecimal digit

BCD code

Gray code

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F

0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111

0000
0001
0011
0010
0110
0111
0101
0100
1100
1101
1111
1110
1010
1011
1001
1000

Conversion from Gray code to BIN Data : GBIN, GBINP, DGBIN, DGBINP
Usable Device
M

Instruction

GBIN(P)
DGBIN(P)

Flag
C

No.o
@D Inte
f
ger Step
s

Error

Zero

Usable CPU
Carry

Gray code data or the first number of device where Gray code data is being stored

First number of the device to store BIN data after conversion

Error (F110)

In the following cases an operation error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns On, and an error
code is stored an SD0.
· Data at S when GBIN instruction was issued is outside the 0 to 32767 range.
· Data at S when DGBIN instruction was issued is outside the 0 to 2147483647 range.

PLC Common

875

GBIN
Functions :
Converts Gray code data at device designated by S to BIN 16-bit data and stores at device designated by
D.

5.8.4

Data transfer Instruction

Contents :
· Transfer 16 Bit or 32 Bit Data : MOV, MOVP, DMOV, DMOVP
· Transfer Block : BMOV, BMOVP
· Floating-point data transfer Instruction : EMOV, EMOVP
· Invert 16 Bit Data Bit : CML, CMLP, DCML, DCMLP
· Exchange 16 Bit and 32 Bit Data : XCH, XCHP, DXCH, DXCHP
· Exchange Block Data : BXCH, BXCHP
· Transfer Identical 16 Bit Data Block : FMOV, FMOVP
· Bit data transfer : WBMOV, WBMOVP
· Transfer Bit Data : BITMOV, BITMOVP
· Exchange Upper and Lower Byte : SWAP, SWAPP

5.8.4.1

Transfer 16 Bit or 32 Bit Data : MOV, MOVP, DMOV, DMOVP
Usable Device
Instruction
MOV(P)

DMOV(P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

876

CIMON-PLC

Source data or first number of device storing data

Number of destination device

Error (F110)

There are no operation errors associated with the MOV(P) or DMOV(P) instructions.

MOV
Functions :
This is used to transfer the data in the device assigned to S to the device assigned to D. MOV(P)
instruction and DMOV(P) instruction transfer the data of 1Word(16-bit).

DMOV(P) instruction transfer the data of2Word(32 Bit).

Example of program :
A program that the data in the device assigned to M0000 CARD is transferred to the device assigned to
M0010 CARD by using MOV instruction when input signal X0001 is turned on

PLC Common

5.8.4.2

877

Transfer Block : BMOV, BMOVP
Usable Device
Instruction
BMOV(P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

First number of device storing data to be transferred

First number of destination device

Number of transfers

Error (F110)

In the following cases an operation error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error
code is stored a SD0.
· The device range n-points from S or D exceeds the relevant device.
· The number of transfers exceeds 6144 when a special direct device is used.

BMOV
Functions :
This is used to transfer the word data in n devices from the device assigned to S to n word data devices
from the device assigned to D.

Example of program :
Whenever input signal X0001 is turned on, the word data in 4 devices from the device assigned to M0000
are transferred to the devices from the one assigned to M0100 to the one assigned to M0130.
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

878

5.8.4.3

CIMON-PLC

Floating-point data transfer Instruction : EMOV, EMOVP
Usable Device
Instruction

EMOV(P)

Flag
C

No.o
@D Inte
f
ger Step
s

Err
or

Usable CPU

Zer Car
o
ry

S1, S2

Assigned data or number of device

Number of destination device

Error (F110)

In case That a Device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

EMOV(P)
Functions :
This is used to transfer the Floating-point data in the device assigned to S to the device assigned to D.

PLC Common

879

Example of program :
A program that the Floating-point data in the device assigned to D00090 is transferred to the device
assigned to D00100 by using MOV instruction when input signal X0003 is turned on.

5.8.4.4

Invert 16 Bit Data Bit : CML, CMLP, DCML, DCMLP
Usable Device
Instruction
CML(P)
DCML(P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

Data to be inverted, or number of device storing this data

Number of device that will store results of inversion

Error (F110)

In case That a Device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

CML
Functions :
This is used to invert each bit in the data corresponding to Device S, storing the result in D.

880

CIMON-PLC

Example of program :
A program invert the data in the device assigned to Y0100, storing the result in device Y0100 when input
signal X0001 is turned on

5.8.4.5

Exchange 16 Bit and 32 Bit Data : XCH, XCHP, DXCH, DXCHP
Usable Device
Instruction
XCH(P)
DXCH(P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

D1, D2

First number of device storing data to be exchanged

Error (F110)

There are no errors associated with the XCH(P) and DXCH(P) instructions

XHC
Functions :
This is used to exchange the data in the device assigned to M0000 and the data in the device assigned to

PLC Common

881

M0010 with each other.

Example of program :
A program to exchange Y0020 and Y0080 with each other when input signal X0001 is ON

The data in the device assigned to Y0020 and the data in the device assigned to Y0080 are exchanged
with each other.

5.8.4.6

Exchange Block Data : BXCH, BXCHP
Usable Device
Instruction

Flag

Inte
ger

BXCH

BXCHP

D1, D2

First number of device storing data to be exchanged

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

882

CIMON-PLC

Number of exchanges

Error (F110)

In case That a Device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

BXCH
Functions :
This is used to exchange the data in n devices from the device assigned to D1and the data in n devices
from the device assigned to D2 with each other.

Example of program :
A program to exchange the data in 3 devices from the device assigned to Y0000 and the data in 3 devices

PLC Common

883

from the device assigned to Y0200 with each other when input signal F0012 is turned on

5.8.4.7

Transfer Identical 16 Bit Data Block : FMOV, FMOVP
Usable Device
Instruction

Flag

Inte
ger

FMOV

FMOVP

Data to transfer, or first number of device storing data to transfer

First number of destination device

Number of transfers

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

884

CIMON-PLC

Error (F110)

In the following cases an operation error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error
code is stored at SD0.
· The device range n-points from D exceeds the device range.
· The number of transfers exceeds 6144 when a special direct device is used.

FMOV
Functions :
This is used to transfer the data in the device assigned to S to the device assigned to D from the start
device in the order of number at n times. This is used to initialize a specific device for data mainly.

If the range of n exceeds the assigned device, error flag(F110) is set. The corresponding instruction is not
operated.

Example of program :
A program to store the word data in the device assigned to M0000 in the devices assigned to M0100,
M0110, M0120 whenever input signal X0001 is turned on

PLC Common

5.8.4.8

885

Bit data transfer : WBMOV, WBMOVP
Usable Device
M

Instruction

Flag
C

No.o
@D Inte
f
ger Step
s

WBMOV

WBMOVP

Err
or

Zer Car
o
ry

Set up data or number of Area

Start BIT and transfers BIT numbers of S(Source), D(destination)

Error (F110)

In case That a Device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

WBMOV(P)
Explanation :
Transfer data from S to D, obey fm

· fm : Copying rule

Usable CPU

886

CIMON-PLC

Example of Program :
When M0000 is On, transfer data from D00100 to D00090 , obey h3504

5.8.4.9

Transfer Bit Data : BITMOV, BITMOVP
Usable Device
Instruction

Flag

Inte
ger

BITMOV

BITMOVP

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

Source used to transfer data (By Bits)

Number of the start one among destination devices to which data is transferred (By Bits)

Number of the bits transferred from the device assigned to S to the device assigned to D

Error (F110)

If the range of n exceeds the assigned device, it is set. A corresponding instruction is not
operated.

BITMOV

PLC Common

887

Functions :
This is used to transfer the data in the device assigned to S as much as n bits from the start device number
of the device assigned to D.

Example of program :
A program to store 3 bit data from M0005 among the word data in M0000 in the device from M0107 in due
order

5.8.4.10 Exchange Upper and Lower Byte : SWAP, SWAPP
Usable Device
Instruction
SWAP(P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

888

CIMON-PLC

First number of device where data is stored

Error (F110)

There are no operation errors associated with the SWAP(P) Instructions.

SWAP
Functions :
This is used to exchange the upper byte and the lower byte of the data in the device assigned to D with
each other, storing the result in the device assigned to D.

Example of program :
A program to exchange the upper 8 bit and the lower 8 bit of the data in the device assigned to Y0000,
storing the result in Y0000 when input signal X0001 is turned on

PLC Common

5.8.5

889

Data Table operation Instruction

Contents :
· Writing data to the data table : FIFW, FIFWP
· Reading the first data from the data table : FIFR, FIFRP
· Reading the last data from the data table : FPOP, FPOPP
· Inserting a data in the data table : FINS, FINSP
· Deleting a data from the data table : FDEL, FDELP

5.8.5.1

Writing data to the data table : FIFW, FIFWP
Usable Device
Instruction
FIFW (P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

Data to write to table or number of device storing such data

First number of table

Error (F110)

In case That a Device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set. if the number of
the devices assigned to D is over the range of the corresponding device, it is set.

FIFW
Function :
Stores the 16 bit data designated by [DEV] at the end of the data table designated by [TBL].
The number of data blocks stored at [TBL] will be increased.

890

CIMON-PLC

Error :
If data table range when the FIFW instruction was executed exceeds the relevant device range, a error flag
F110 turns on.

Example of program :
If X10 turns ON, the value stored at D300, 632 will be store at D107 which is the end of the data table and
the value stored at D100 will increased to 7.

PLC Common

5.8.5.2

891

Reading the first data from the data table : FIFR, FIFRP
Usable Device
Instruction
FIFR (P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

Initial number of storage device for data read from table

Initial number of table

Error (F110)

In case That a Device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set. If the number of
the devices assigned to D is over the range of the corresponding device, it is set.

FIFR
Function :
Read the oldest data from [TBL+1] and stores it at the device designated by [DEV].
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

892

CIMON-PLC

After the execution of FIFR, the data in the table moves to the previous device and the last data will be
zero.
The number of data of the data table will be decreased.

Error :
If FIFR is executed when the value of [TBL] is 0, the error flag F110 turns ON.
You should attempt to avoid executing FIFR if the value stored at [TBL] is 0.

Example :
If X10 turns ON, the value of D101 in the data table will be stored at D300.
After execution of FIFRP, the value of D100 reduces to 6 and the data in the table moves to the previous
device.
The value of the last device of the data table will be 0.

PLC Common

5.8.5.3

893

Reading the last data from the data table : FPOP, FPOPP
Usable Device
Instruction
FPOP(P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

Initial number of storage device for data read from table

Initial number of table

Error (F110)

In case That a Device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set. If the number of
the devices assigned to D is over the range of the corresponding device, it is set.

FPOP
Function :
Read the last data from the end of the data table and stores it at the device designated by [DEV].
After the execution of FPOP, the last data will be zero and the number of data of the data table will be
decreased.

894

CIMON-PLC

Error :
If FPOP is executed when the value of [TBL] is 0, the error flag F110 turns ON.
You should attempt to avoid executing FPOP if the value stored at [TBL] is 0.

Example of program :
If X10 turns ON, 159 which is the value of D200 will be stored at D107 which is the end device of the data
table and the value of D100 will be increased to 7.
If X11 turns ON continuously, 159 which is the value of D107 will be stored at D300 and the value of D107
will be 0 and the value of D100 will be decreased to 6.

PLC Common

5.8.5.4

895

Inserting a data in the data table : FINS, FINSP
Usable Device
Instruction
FINS (P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

Inserted data or first device number of devices that will store inserted data Fist devices
number of devices that will store deleted data

Initial number of table

Table position for data for insertion of deletion

Error (F110)

In case That a Device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set. If the number of
the devices assigned to D is over the range of the corresponding device, it is set.

FINS
Function :
Inserts the 16 bit data designated by [DEV] at the device [TBL+n].
After the execution of FINS, the data in the table following the deleted device will move backward by one
device.
The value of the device [TBL] will be increased.

896

CIMON-PLC

Error :
If n is less than 1 or greater than the value of [TBL] plus 1, the error flag F110 turns ON.

Example of program :
If X10 turns ON, 951 which is the value of D300 will be inserted at D105.
Data of the data table following D105 will move backward by one device and the value of D100 will be 7.

5.8.5.5

Deleting a data from the data table : FDEL, FDELP
Usable Device
Instruction
SUB(P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

PLC Common

DSUB(P)

897

Inserted data or first device number of devices that will store inserted data Fist devices
number of devices that will store deleted data

Initial number of table

Table position for data for insertion of deletion

Error (F110)

In case That a Device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set. If the number of
the devices assigned to D is over the range of the corresponding device, it is set.

FDEL
Function :
Delete the value of [TBL+n] and store it at the device designated by [DEV].
After the execution of FDEL, the data in the table following the deleted device will move forward by one
device and the value of the end device will be 0.

898

CIMON-PLC

Error :
If n is less than 1 or greater than the value of [TBL], the error flag F110 turns ON.
If FDEL is executed when the value of [TBL] is 0, the error flag F110 turns ON.
You should attempt to avoid executing FDEL if the value stored at [TBL] is 0.

Example :
If X10 turns ON, -23 which is the value of D105 will be stored at D300.
The data of the data table following D106 moves forward and the value of D107 will be 0 and the value of
D100 will be decrease.

5.8.6

Logic operation Instruction

Contents :
· Word AND : WAND, WANDP, DAND, DANDP
· Word OR : WOR, WORP, DOR, DORP
· Word Exclusive OR : WXOR, WXORP, DXOR, DXORP
· Word Exclusive NOR : WXNR, WXNRP, DXNR, DXNRP
· Block Logical Product : BKAND, BKANDP
· Block Logical Sum : BKOR, BKORP
· Block Exclusive OR : BKXOR, BKXORP
· Block Non-Exclusive Logical Sum : BKXNR, BKXNRP

5.8.6.1

Logical products with 16-bit and 32-bit data : WAND(P), DAND(P)
Instruction

Usable Device

Flag
No.of
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

PLC Common

M
WAND(P)

DAND(P)

Steps

Error

899

*Available in case a computer link module and a data link module are not used.
S1, S2

Data from which logical product will be determined, or initial number of devices storing such
data

Initial number of devices where logical product operation results will be stored

Error (F110)

In case That a Device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

WAND
Functions :
This is used to AND-operate each bit data in the device assigned to S1 and each bit data in the device
assigned to S2, storing 1 in case the data of each data are 1 simultaneously and, otherwise, 0 in each bit of
the assigned device. The WANDP instruction and the DANDP instruction are operated for a scan in case
the input condition to operate these instructions is changed (From OFF to ON). The DAND instruction and
the DANDP instruction are operated for 32Bit data.

Example of program :
A program to operate the WAND instruction for data in the device assigned to D0000 and D0001, outputing
the result to the device assigned to Y0020

900

5.8.6.2

CIMON-PLC

Word OR : WOR, WORP, DOR, DORP
Usable Device
Instruction

Flag

Inte
ger

WOR(P)

DOR(P)

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

*Available in case a computer link module and a data link module are not used.
S1, S2

Data or device where data is stored

Device where the data from the operation of OR instruction is stored

Error (F110)

In case That a Device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

WOR
Functions :

PLC Common

901

This is used to OR-operate each bit data in the device assigned to S1 and each bit data in the device
assigned to S2, storing 1 in case the data of each data are 1 simultaneously and, otherwise, 0 in each bit of
the assigned device. The WOR instruction and the DORP instruction are operated for a scan in case the
input condition to operate these instructions is changed (From OFF to ON). The DOR instruction and the
DORP instruction are operated for 32Bit data.

Example of program :
A program to operate the WOR instruction for data in the device assigned to X0000 and D0001, storing the
result in the device assigned to Y0020

5.8.6.3

Word Exclusive OR : WXOR, WXORP, DXOR, DXORP
Usable Device
Instruction

Flag

Inte
ger

WXOR (P)

DXOR (P)

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

902

CIMON-PLC

*Available in case a computer link module and a data link module are not used.
S1, S2

Data or device where data is stored

Device where the data from the operation of XOR instruction is stored

Error (F110)

In case That a Device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

WXOR
Functions :
This is used to XOR-operate each bit data in the device assigned to S1 and each bit data in the device
assigned to S2, storing 1 in case the data of each data are 1 simultaneously and, otherwise, 0 in each bit of
the assigned device. The WXORP instruction and the DXORP instruction are operated for a scan in case
the input condition to operate these instructions is changed (From OFF to ON). The DXOR instruction and
the DXORP instruction are operated for 32Bit data.

Example of program :
A program to operate the WXOR instruction for data in the device assigned to X0000 and D0001, storing
the result in the device assigned to M0020

PLC Common

5.8.6.4

903

Word Exclusive NOR : WXNR, WXNRP, DXNR, DXNRP
Usable Device
Instruction

Flag

Inte
ger

WXNR (P)

DXNR (P)

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

*Available in case a computer link module and a data link module are not used.
S1, S2

Data or device where data is stored

Device where the data from operation of XNOR instruction is stored

Error (F110)

In case That a Device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set. A corresponding
instruction is not operated.

WXNR
Functions :

904

CIMON-PLC

This is used to Exclusive NOR-operate each bit data in the device assigned to S1 and each bit data in the
device assigned to S2, storing 1 in case the data of each data are 1 simultaneously and, otherwise, 0 in
each bit of the assigned device. The WXNRP instruction and the DXNRP instruction are operated for a
scan in case the input condition to operate these instructions is changed (From OFF to ON). The DXNR
instruction and the DXNRP instruction are operated for 32Bit data.

Example of program :
A program to operate the Exclusive NOR instruction for data in the device assigned to X0000 and D0001,
outputing the result in the device assigned to Y0020

5.8.6.5

Block Logical Product : BKAND, BKANDP
Usable Device
Instruction

Flag

Inte
ger

BKAND

BKANDP

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

PLC Common

905

First number of the devices where the data subjected to the logical product operation is
stored

First number of the logical operation data or the devices where the logical operation data is
stored

First number of the devices where the operation result are stored

Number of operation data bits

Error (F110)

In case That a Device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

BKAND
Functions :
This is used to AND-operate the n-sized device assigned to S1 and the n-sized device assigned to S2,
storing the result in the device assigned to D.

Example of program :
A program to AND-operate the three devices from D0000 and the three devices from D0100, storing the
result in the device assigned to D0200 when X0001 assigned to S1 is turned on

906

5.8.6.6

CIMON-PLC

Block Logical Sum : BKOR, BKORP
Usable Device
Instruction

Flag

Inte
ger

BKOR

BKORP

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

First number of the devices where the data subjected to the logical product operation is
stored

First number of the logical operation data or the devices where the logical operation data is
stored

First number of the devices where the operation result are stored

Number of operation data bits

PLC Common

907

BKOR
Functions :
This is used to OR-operate the n-sized device assigned to S1 and the n-sized device assigned to S2,
storing the result in the device assigned to D.

Example of program :
A program to OR-operate the three devices from D0000 and the three devices from D0100, storing the
result in the device assigned to D0200 when X0001 assigned to S1 is turned on

908

5.8.6.7

CIMON-PLC

Block Exclusive OR : BKXOR, BKXORP
Usable Device
Instruction

Flag

Inte
ger

BKXOR

BKXORP

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

First number of the devices where the data subjected to the logical product operation is
stored

First number of the logical operation data or the devices where the logical operation data is
stored

First number of the devices where the operation result are stored

Number of operation data bits

Error (F110)

In case That a Device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

BKXOR
Functions :

PLC Common

909

This is used to XOR-operate the n-sized device assigned to S1 and the n-sized device assigned to S2,
storing the result in the device assigned to D.

Example of program :
A program to XOR-operate the three devices from D0000 and the three devices from D0100, storing the
result in the device assigned to D0200 when X0001 assigned to S1 is ON

910

5.8.6.8

CIMON-PLC

Block Non-Exclusive Logical Sum : BKXNR, BKXNRP
Usable Device
Instruction

Flag

Inte
ger

BKXNR

BKXNRP

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

First number of the devices where the data subjected to the logical product operation is
stored

First number of the logical operation data or the devices where the logical operation data is
stored

First number of the devices where the operation result are stored

Number of operation data bits

Error (F110)

In case That a Device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

BKXNR
Functions :
This is used to XNR-operate the n-sized device assigned to S1 and the n-sized device assigned to S2,
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

PLC Common

911

storing the result in the device assigned to D.

Example of program :
A program to XNR-operate the three devices from D0000 and the three devices from D0100, storing the
result in the device assigned to D0200 when X0001 assigned to S1 is turned on

912

5.8.7

CIMON-PLC

Rotation Instruction

Contents :
· Rotate Right : ROR, RORP, DROR, DRORP
· Rotate Right With Carry : RCR, RCRP, DRCR, DRCRP
· Rotate Left : ROL, ROLP, DROL, DROLP
· Rotate Left With Carry : RCL, RCLP, DRCL, DRCLP

5.8.7.1

Rotate Right : ROR, RORP, DROR, DRORP
Usable Device
Instruction
ROR (P)
DROR (P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

* Available in case a computer link module and data link module are not used.
D

Initial number of devices to perform rotation

Number of rotations Functions

Error (F110)

In case that a device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, flat is set. the
corresponding instruction is not operated.

Carry (F112)

While rotating right, if carry occurs, carry flag is set.

ROR
Functions :
This is used to rotate right 16 bits in a word data as much as n bits. The lowest bit is rotated to carry flag (F
112) and the uppermost bit. (Rotated within a word). The RORP instruction and the DRORP instruction are
operated for one scan in case the operation condition of them is changed from OFF to ON. The DROR
instruction and the DRORP instruction are operated for 32BIT data.

Example of program :
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

PLC Common

913

A program to rotate right the data in the device assigned to Y0020 a bit by a bit, setting carry flag(F112)
when input signal X0000 is turned on

The data in the device assigned to Y0020 is rotated right.

5.8.7.2

Rotate Right With Carry : RCR, RCRP, DRCR, DRCRP
Usable Device
Instruction
RCR (P)
DRCR (P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

* Available in case a computer link module and data link module are not used.
D

Device where the data rotated right is stored

Number of the bits rotated right

Error (F110)

In case that a device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, flat is set. the
corresponding instruction is not operated.

Carry (F112)

While rotating right, if carry occurs, carry flag is set.

Zero

Carry

914

CIMON-PLC

RCR
Functions :
This is used to rotate right 16 bits in a word data as much as n bits. The lowest bit is rotated to carry flag (F
112) and carry flag (F112) is rotated to the uppermost bit. The RCRP instruction and the DRCRP instruction
are operated for a scan in case the operation condition of them is turned on from off. The DRCR instruction
and the DRCRP instruction are operated for 32BIT data.

Example of program :
A program to rotate right the data in the device assigned to Y0020 including carry flag (F112) according to
the status of Input Signal F0093 of which clock cycle is a second.

The data in the device assigned to Y0020 including carry flag(F112) is rotated right.

5.8.7.3

Rotate Left : ROL, ROLP, DROL, DROLP
Usable Device
Instruction
ROL (P)
DROL (P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

* Available in case a computer link module and data link module are not used.
D

Device where the data rotated right is stored

Number of the bits rotated right
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

PLC Common

Error (F110)

915

In case that a device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, flat is set. the
corresponding instruction is not operated.

Carry (F112)

While rotating right, if carry occurs, carry flag is set.

ROL
Functions :
This is used to rotate left 16 bits in a word data as much as n bits. The lowest bit is rotated to carry flag (F
112) and the uppermost bit. (Rotated within a word). The ROLP instruction and the DROLP instruction are
operated for a scan in case the operation condition of them is turned on from off. The DROL instruction and
the DROLP instruction are operated for 32BIT data.

Example of program :
A program to rotate left the data in the device assigned to M0020 a bit by a bit, setting carry flag(F112)
when input signal X0000 is turned on

The data in the device assigned to Y0020 is rotated left.

916

5.8.7.4

CIMON-PLC

Rotate Left With Carry : RCL, RCLP, DRCL, DRCLP
Usable Device
Instruction
RCL (P)
DRCL (P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

Device where the data rotated right is stored

Number of the bits rotated right

Error (F110)

In case that a device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, flat is set. the
corresponding instruction is not operated.

Carry (F112)

While rotating right, if carry occurs, carry flag is set.

RCL
Functions :
This is used to rotate left 16 bits in a word data as much as n bits. The lowest bit is rotated to carry flag (F
112) and carry flag (F112) is rotated to the uppermost bit. The RCLP instruction and the DRCLP instruction
are operated for one scan in case the operation condition of them is turned on from off. The DRCL
instruction and the DRCLP instruction are operated for 32BIT data.

Example of program :
A program to rotate left the data in the device assigned to Y0020 including carry flag (F112) according to
the state of input signal F0093 of which clock cycle is a second.

PLC Common

917

The data in the device assigned to Y0020 including carry flag(F112) is rotated left.

5.8.8

Shift Instruction

Contents :
· Shift Right or Shift Left 16Bit Data as n Bits : SFR, SFRP, SFL, SFLP
· Shift Right or Shift Left 16 Bit Data as 1 Bit : BSFR, BSFRP, BSFL, BSFLP
· Shift Right or Shift Left n Word Data as 1 Word : DSFR, DSFRP, DSFL, DSFLP

5.8.8.1

Shift Right or Shift Left 16Bit Data as n Bits : SFR, SFRP, SFL, SFLP
Usable Device
Instruction
SFR (P)
SFL (P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

First device number of devices where shift data is being stored

Number of Shifts

Error (F110)

In case that a device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

Carry (F112)

If the result of an operation is overflow, it is set.

SFR

Functions :
This is used to shift right 16bit data in the device assigned to D as much as n bits

918

CIMON-PLC

The data from the uppermost bit to nth bit are 0. When the data in the device assigned to T or C is shifted,
the current values are shifted. (Set values are not shifted.)

Example of program :
A program to shift right the data in the device assigned to D0002 as much as 5 bits when X0001’s on

SFL
Functions :
This is used to shift left 16bit data in the device assigned to D as much as n bits.

The data from the lowest bit to nth bit are 0. In case of the data in the device assigned to T or C, the current
value is shifted.(Not set values)

Example of program :
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

PLC Common

919

A program to shift left the data in the device assigned to M0000 as much as 2 bits when X0001’s on

5.8.8.2

Shift Right or Shift Left 16 Bit Data as 1 Bit : BSFR, BSFRP, BSFL, BSFLP
Usable Device
Instruction
BSFR (P)
BSFL (P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

First device number of devices to shift

Number of devices where shift will be conducted

Error (F110)

In case that a device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

Carry (F112)

If the result of an operation is overflow, it is set.

BSFR
Functions :
This is used to shift right n a-bit-devices as much as a-bit-device from the device assigned to D.

920

CIMON-PLC

Example of program :
A program to shift right the data in the devices from the one assigned to M0462 to the one assigned to
M0470 when X008F is turned on

BSFL
Functions :
This is used to shift left n a-bit-devices as much as a-bit-device from the device assigned to D.

Example of program :
A program to shift left the data in the devices from the one assigned to Y0050 to the one assigned to
Y005F when X000C is turned on.

PLC Common

5.8.8.3

921

Shift Right or Shift Left n Word Data as 1 Word : DSFR, DSFRP, DSFL, DSFLP
Usable Device
Instruction
DSFR (P)
DSFL (P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

First device number of devices to shift

Number of devices where shift will be conducted

Error (F110)

In case that a device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

Carry (F112)

If the result of an operation is overflow, it is set.

DSFR
Functions :
This is used to shift right n devices as much as a device from the device assigned to D.

The uppermost device is 0. In case of the data in the device assigned to T or C, the current value is shifted.

922

CIMON-PLC

(Not set values)

Example of program :
A program to shift right the data in the devices from the one assigned to D0063 to the one assigned to
D0069 when X0001 is turned on

DSFL
Functions :
This is used to shift left n devices as much as a device from the device assigned to D.

The lowest device is 0. In case of the data in the device assigned to T or C, the current value is shifted.(Not
set values)

Example of program :
A program to shift left the data in the devices from the one assigned to D0063 to the one assigned to
D0069 when X0001 is turned on

PLC Common

5.8.9

923

Character String Processing Instruction

Contents :
· Convert BIN 16 Bit or 32 Bit Data to Decimal ASCII : BINDA(p), DBINDA(P)
· Convert BIN 16 Bit or 32 Bit Data to Hexadecimal ASCII : BINHA(P)), DBINHA(P)
· Convert BCD 4 Digit or 8 Digit to Decimal ASCII Data : BCDDA(P), DBCDDA(P)
· Convert Decimal ASCII to BIN 16 Bit or 32 Bit Data : DABIN(P), DDABIN(P)
· Convert hexadecimal ASCII to BIN 16 bit Data : HABIN(P), DHABIN(P)

5.8.9.1

Convert BIN 16 Bit or 32 Bit Data to Decimal ASCII : BINDA(P), DBINDA(P)
Usable Device
Instruction
BINDA (P)
DBINDA (P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

BIN data to be converted to ASCII

First device number of devices where conversion results will be stored

Error (F110)

In case that a device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

BINDA
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

924

CIMON-PLC

Functions :
This is used to hexadecimalize the numbers of BIN-16 bit data in the address assigned to S to convert
them to each ASCII code, storing the result from the address assigned to D.

Example of program :
if a value in S is -12345, the result of the operation is stored in D as follows.

The range of BIN data in S is from -32768 to 32767. The result is stored in D as follows. If BIN data is a
positive number, sign 20H is stored. Otherwise, 2DH is stored. 0 in the left of the significant digits are
stored as 20H.

DBINDA
Functions :
This is used to decimals the numbers of BIN-32 bit data in the address assigned to S to convert them to
each ASCII code, storing the result from the address assigned to D.

PLC Common

925

For example, if a value in S is ?12345678, the result of the operation is stored in D as follows.

The range of BIN data in S is form -2147483648 to 2147483647. The result is stored in D as follows. If BIN
data is a positive number, sign 20H is stored.
Otherwise, 2DH is stored. 0 in the left of the significant digits are stored as 20H.

Example of program :
A program to decimalize BIN 16bit Data in the device assigned to D0000 to convert them to each ASCII
code, outputting the result to Y0000 when X0001 is turned on.

926

5.8.9.2

CIMON-PLC

Convert BIN 16 Bit or 32 Bit Data to Hexadecimal ASCII : BINHA(P)), DBINHA(P)
Usable Device
Instruction
BINHA (P)
DBINHA (P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

BIN data to be converted to ASCII

First device number of devices where conversion results will be stored

BINHA
Functions :
This is used to hexadecimalize the numbers of BIN-16 bit data in the address assigned to S to convert
them to each ASCII code, storing the result from the address assigned to D.

Example of program :
if a value in S is 02A6H, the result of the operation is stored in D as follows.

The range of BIN data in S is from 0 to FFFFH. The result stored in D is in a four-digit hexadecimal value. 0
in the left of the significant digits are stored as 0.

PLC Common

927

DBINHA
Functions :
This is used to decimalize the numbers of BIN-32 bit data in the address assigned to S to convert them to
each ASCII code, storing the result from the address assigned to D.

For example, if a value in S is 03AC625EH, the result of the operation is stored in D as follows.

The range of BIN data in S is from 0 to FFFFFFFFH. The result stored in D is in a four-digit hexadecimal
value. 0 in the left of the significant digits are stored as 0.

Example of program :
A program to hexadecimals BIN 16bit Data in the device assigned to D0000 to convert them to each ASCII
code, outputting the result to Y0000 when X0001 is turned on

5.8.9.3

Convert BCD 4 Digit or 8 Digit to Decimal ASCII Data : BCDDA(P), DBCDDA(P)
Usable Device
Instruction
BCDDA (P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

928

CIMON-PLC

DBCDDA
(P)

BCD data which will be converted to ASCII

First device number of devices where conversion results will be stored

Error (F110)

In case that a device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

BCDDA
Functions :
This is used to hexadecimalize the numbers of BCD four-figure in the address assigned to S to convert
them to each ASCII code, storing the result from the address assigned to D.

Example of program :
if a value in S is 9105, the result of the operation is stored in D as follows.

The range of BCD data in S is from 0 to 9999. The result of the operation is stored in D, 0 in the left of the
significant digits are stored as 20H.

PLC Common

929

DBCDDA
Functions :
This is used to hexadecimals the numbers of BCD eight digits in the address assigned to S to convert them
to each ASCII code, storing the result from the address assigned to D.

Example of program :
if a value in S is 01234056, the result of the operation is stored in D as follows.

The range of BCD data in S is from 0 to 99999999. The result of the operation is stored in D, 0 in the left of
the significant digits are stored as 20H.

Operation Error :
An error occurs in the following cases. Error flag is turned on and Error Code is stored in SD0. When
BCDDA instruction is operated, the case data is less than 0 or greater than 9999. When DBCDDA

930

CIMON-PLC

instruction is operated, the case data is less than 0 or greater than 9999.
Example of program : A program to decimalize BCD four digits in the device assigned to D0000 to convert
them to each ASCII code, outputting the result to Y0000 when X0001 is turned on

5.8.9.4

Convert Decimal ASCII to BIN 16 Bit or 32 Bit Data : DABIN(P), DDABIN(P)
Usable Device
Instruction
DABIN (P)
DDABIN (P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

First device number of devices where ASCII data that will be converted to BIN value is being
stored

First device number of devices where conversion results will be stored

Error (F110)

In case that a device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

DABIN
Functions :
This is used to store the decimal ASCII data, which is in the address assigned to S, in the address
assigned to D in BIN 16-Bit data.

PLC Common

931

Example of program :
if the ASSCII code in S is ?25018H, the result of the operation is stored in D as follows.

The range of the ASCII data in the addresses assigned to S and S+2 is from -32768 to 32767. Sign “20H”
is stored when it is a positive number and “2DH” is stored when is a negative number. The range of ASCII
codes is from “30H” to “39H”. If the address of ASCII code is 20H or 00H, it is operated as 30H.

DDABIN
Functions :
This is used to store the decimal ASCII data, which is in the address assigned to S, in the address
assigned to D in BIN 32-Bit data.

932

CIMON-PLC

Example of program :
if the ASSCII code in S is -123454321, the result of the operation is stored in D+1 and D as follows.

The range of the ASCII data in the addresses assigned to S and S+5 is from -2147483648 to 2147483647.
Additionally, the data stored in the upper byte of S+5 is disregarded. If the value of the converted data is a
positive number ,”sign” data is 20H. If a negative number, 2DH. The range of ASCII codes is from “30H” to
“39H”. If the address of ASCII code is 20H or 00H, it is operated as 30H.

Operation Error :
An error occurs in the following cases. Error flag is turned on and Error Code is stored in SD0.
· The case the range of the ASCII codes in the addresses from the one is assigned to S to the one
assigned to S+5, are not from 30H to 39H or 20H or 00H.
· The ASCII data in the addresses from the one assigned to S to the one assigned to S+5 are out of
range.
· Range of DABIN instruction : -32768 to 32767
Range of DDABIN instruction : -2147483648 to 2147483647

PLC Common

933

Example of program :
A program to convert decimal 5 digits-ASCII data and the signs for the addresses from the one assigned to
D0000 to the one assigned to D0002 to Bin, storing the result in D0020

A program to convert decimal 10 digits-ASCII data and the signs for the addresses from the one assigned
to D0000 to the one assigned to D0005 to Bin, storing the result in D0020 and D0021

934

5.8.9.5

CIMON-PLC

Convert hexadecimal ASCII to BIN 16 bit Data : HABIN(P), DHABIN(P)
Usable Device
Instruction
HABIN (P)
DHABIN (P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

First device number of devices where ASCII data that will be converted to BIN value is being
stored

First device number of devices where conversion results will be stored

Error (F110)

In case that a device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

HABIN
Functions :
This is used to store the hexadecimal ASCII data, which is in the address assigned to S, in the address
assigned to D in BIN 16-Bit data.

Example of program :
if the ASCII code in S is 5A8DH, the result of the operation is stored in D as follows.

The range of the ASCII data in the addresses assigned to S and S+1 is from 0000H to FFFH. The range of
ASCII codes is from “30H” to “39H” and from “41H” to “46H”.

PLC Common

935

DHABIN
Functions :
This is used to store the hexadecimal ASCII data, which is in the address assigned to S, in the address
assigned to D in BIN 32-Bit data.

Example of program : if the ASCII code in S is 5CB807E1H, the result of the operation is stored in D+1 and
D as follows.

The range of the ASCII data in the addresses assigned to S and S+3 from 00000000H to FFFFFFFFH. The
range of ASCII codes is from “30H” to “39H” and from “41H” to “46H”.

Operation Error :
An error occurs in the following cases. Error flag is turned on and Error Code is stored in SD0. The case
the range of the ASCII codes in the addresses from the one assigned to S to the one assigned to S+3 are
not from 30H to 39H or from “41H” to “46H”.
Example of program : A program to convert the hexadecimal 4 digits-ASCII data, which is in the addresses
from the one assigned to D0000 to the one assigned to D0001, to BIN data, storing the result in D0020.

936

CIMON-PLC

A program to convert the hexadecimal 8 digits-ASCII data, which is in the addresses from the one assigned
to D0000 to the one assigned to D0003, to BIN data, storing the result in D0020 and D0021.

5.8.10 Data Processing Instruction

Contents :
· Search 16 Bit and 32 Bit Data for Maximum Value : MAX, MAXP, DMAX, DMAXP
· Search for 16 Bit and 32 Bit Data for Minimum Value : MIN, MINP, DMIN, DMINP
· Check 16 Bit and 32 Bit Data : SUM, SUMP, DSUM, DSUMP
· Decode in 7-Segment : SEG, SEGP
· Decode 8 Bit Data or Encode 256 Bit Data : DECO, DECOP, ENCO, ENCOP
· Dissociate or Unite 16 Bit Data : DIS, DISP, UNI, UNIP
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

PLC Common

937

· Data Scaling according to the specified linear function : SCL, SCLP

5.8.10.1 Search 16 Bit and 32 Bit Data for Maximum Value : MAX, MAXP, DMAX, DMAXP
Usable Device
Instruction
MAX (P)
DMAX (P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

First number of devices for Maximum value search

First number of devices where results of maximum value search are stored

Number of data blocks searched

MAX
Functions :
The MAX instruction is used to search the n pieces of 16-bitdata-device assigned to S for maximum value,
storing it in the device assigned to D.

The DMAX instruction is used to search the n pieces of 32bit-data-device assigned to S for maximum
value, storing it in the device assigned to D.

938

CIMON-PLC

Example of program :
A program to search the data in the n pieces of device from D0010 for maximum value, storing the
maximum value, the order of the start device and the number of the devices among the devices assigned to
D from D0200.

A program to search the 32bit-data devices from D0000 to D0007 for maximum value, storing the
information on it in the devices from D0100 to D0103 when X0001 is turned on

5.8.10.2 Search for 16 Bit and 32 Bit Data for Minimum Value : MIN, MINP, DMIN, DMINP
Usable Device
Instruction
MIN (P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

PLC Common

DMIN (P)

First device number of devices subject to search for minimum value

First device number of devices that will store the results of the minimum value search

Number of data blocks searched

939

MIN
Functions :
The MIN instruction is used to search the n pieces of 16-bitdata-device assigned to S for minimum value,
storing it in the device assigned to D.

The DMIN instruction is used to search the n pieces of 32bit-data-device assigned to S for maximum value,
storing it in the device assigned to D.

Example of program :
A program to search the data in the n pieces of device from D0010 for minimum value, storing the
maximum value, the order of the start device and the number of the devices among the devices assigned to
D from D0200.

940

CIMON-PLC

A program to search the 32bit-data devices from D0000 to D0007 for minimum value, storing the
information on it in the devices from D0100 to D0103 when X0001 is turned on

5.8.10.3 Check 16 Bit and 32 Bit Data : SUM, SUMP, DSUM, DSUMP
Usable Device
Instruction
SUM (P)
DSUM (P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

Number of the start one among the device where Shift Data are stored

Number of the start device where the result is stored

PLC Common

941

SUM
Functions :
This is used to check the number of set bit data among the word data bits in the device assigned to S,
storing the number in the word data device assigned to D.

Example of program :
A program to check the number of set bit data among the word data of M0000, storing the number in
D0000, if X0001 is turned on

DSUM
Functions :
This is used to check the number of set bit data among the double-word data in the device assigned to S,
storing the number in the word data device assigned to D.

942

CIMON-PLC

Example of program :
A program to check the number of set bit data among the double-word data in the device assigned to
D0000, storing the number in the device assigned to D0010, if X0001 is turned on

5.8.10.4 Decode in 7-Segment : SEG, SEGP
Usable Device
Instruction
SEG
SEGP

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

Decoded data or first device number of devices where decoded data is being stored

First device number of devices where decoding results are stroed
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

PLC Common

Error (F110)

943

In case that a device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

SEG
Functions :
This is used to convert the data in the word device assigned to S to 7segment-decoded data in the order of
digit, storing the result in double words device.

7-segment decode display :

944

CIMON-PLC

5.8.10.5 Decode 8 Bit Data or Encode 256 Bit Data : DECO, DECOP, ENCO, ENCOP
Usable Device
Instruction
DECO (P)
ENCO (P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

PLC Common

945

The data decoded or the data encoded, or number of the device where the data decoded or
the data encoded is stored

Number of device where encoding results will be stored

Valid bit length (1 - 8)

Error (F110)

In case that a device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

DECO
Functions :
This is used to decode the lower n bit data in the device assigned to S, storing the result in the device
assigned to D in 2 n bit. In case n is 0, data is not decoded. The 2n bit data in the device assigned to D is
not changed. A bit device is treated as 1 bit and a word device is treated as 16 bits. n is available from 1 to
8.

Example of program :

ENCO
Functions :

946

CIMON-PLC

This is used to encode the 2n bit data in the device assigned to S, storing the result in D. n is available from
1 to 8. In case n is 0, data is not decoded. The data in the device assigned to D is not changed. A bit
device is treated as 1 bit and a word device is treated as 16 bits. n is available from 1 to 8. A plural number
of 1 bit is encoded in the last bit device.

Example of program :

5.8.10.6 Dissociate or Unite 16 Bit Data : DIS, DISP, UNI, UNIP
Usable Device
Instruction
DIS (P)
UNI (P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

First device number of devices where data to be dissociated is stored

First device number of devices where dissociated data is stored

Number of dissociations (1 - 4)

PLC Common

Error (F110)

947

In case that a device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

DIS
Functions :
This is used to store the lower n digits(n digits 4 bits) of the 16 bit data, which is in the device assigned to
S, in the lower 4 bits of the n pieces of device from the device assigned to D. The upper 12 bits of the data,
which is in the n pieces of device from the device assigned to D, is 0. n is available from 1 to 4. In case n is
0, data is not decoded. The data in the device assigned to D is not changed.

Example of program :
A program to store the 16 bit data in the device assigned to D0000 every 4 bits in the devices from the one
assigned to D0020 to the one assigned to 0023 when X0001 is turned on

948

CIMON-PLC

UNI
Functions :
This is used to unite the lower 4 bits of the 16 bit data, which is in the n pieces of device from the device
assigned to S, to the 16 bit device assigned to D. The upper(4-n) bits of the data in the device assigned to
D is 0. n is available from 1 to 4. In case n is 0, data is not decoded. The data in the device assigned to D is
not changed.

Example of program :
A program to store the lower 4 bit data, which is in the devices from the one assigned to D0020 to the one
assigned to 0022, in the device assigned to D0010 when X0003 is turned on

PLC Common

949

5.8.10.7 Data Scaling according to the specified linear function : SCL, SCLP
Usable Device
M

Instruction

Flag
C

No.o
@D Inte
f
ger Step
s

SCL

SCLP

Error

Zero

Scaling according to the Data

Scaling changed Data

Scaling Data saved Table

Number of Scaling according Data

Error (F110)

In case that a device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.
Src.Start , Src.End same case, it is set. (not operation instruction)

SCL(P)
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

Usable CPU
Carry

950

CIMON-PLC

Explanation :
Converts signed binary data into signed binary data according to Scale parameter table .

[ Scale parameter table(4 word) ]

[ A scaling formula ]

[ Graph ]

PLC Common

When S get out of Source Data range, Destination Data is stored Dest.Start or Dest.End.

Src.End < Src.Start , Dest.End < Dest.Start

951

952

CIMON-PLC

Example of program :
When X0000 is set, Convert signed binary data(D00000) into signed binary data(D00100) according to
scale parameter table(D00200).

[ Scale parameter table D00200 ]

PLC Common

953

5.8.11 Bit Processing Instruction

Contents :
· Move Bit Device : TEST(P), DTEST(P)
· Set or Reset Bit in Word Device : BSET, BSETP, BRST, BRSTP

5.8.11.1 Bit tests : TEST, TESTP, DTEST, DTESTP
Usable Device
Instruction

Flag

Inte
ger

TEST (P)

DTEST (P)

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

Number of device storing extracted bit data

Location of extracted bit data

Number of bit device storing extracted bit data

Error (F110)

In case That a Device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

TEST
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

954

CIMON-PLC

Functions :
This is used to select a bit data at the location expressed as S2 in the word device assigned to S1, storing it
in bit the device assigned to D. If the bit device assigned to D is 0, it is reset. If 1, it is set. S2 indicates the
location of an individual bit in the device assigned to S1. (0~15)

Example of program :
A program to set or reset M0000 according to the state of 10th bit in a word device

A program to set or reset Y0020 according to the state of 19th bit in two word devices, which are M0010
and M0020.

PLC Common

955

DTEST
Functions :
This is used to select a bit data at the location expressed as S2 in the two word devices assigned to S1 and
S2, storing it in the bit device assigned to D. If the bit device assigned to D is 0, it is reset. If 1, it is set. S2
indicates the location of an individual bit in the two devices assigned to S1 and S2. (0~31)

5.8.11.2 Set or Reset Bit in Word Device : BSET, BSETP, BRST, BRSTP
Usable Device
Instruction
BSET (P)
BRST (P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

956

CIMON-PLC

Device number where bit set or reset will be conducted

Bit number where bit or reset will be conducted

Error (F110)

In case that a device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

BSET

Functions :
This is used to set the nth bit in the word device assigned to D. n is available from 0 to 15. If n is over 15,
this instruction is operated for the lower 4 bits.

BRST
Functions :
This is used to reset the nth bit in the word device assigned to D. n is available from 0 to 15. If n is over 15,
this instruction is operated for low 4 bits.

PLC Common

957

Example of program :
A program to reset the 8th bit(B8) in the device assigned to D0008 when X000B is turned on, setting the
3rd bit(B3) in the device assigned to D0008 when X000B is turned on

5.8.12 Clock Instruction

Contents :
· Add Clock Data : DATE+, DATE+P
· Subtract Clock Data : DATE-, DATE-P
· Convert Clock Data Format : SECOND(P), HOUR(P)
· Reading Clock Data : DATERD, DATERDP
· Writing Clock Data : DATEWR, DATEWRP

958

CIMON-PLC

5.8.12.1 Add Clock Data : DATE+, DATE+P
Usable Device
Instruction
DATE+
DATE+P

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

Time data to be added to

Added time (clock) data

First device number of devices where addition results of clock (time) dta

Error (F110)

In case that a device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

DATE+
Functions :
This is used to add the clock data in the devices from the one assigned to S2 to the clock data in the
devices from the one assigned to S1, storing the result in the devices from the one assigned to D.

For example, the result of adding 7:48:10 to 6:32:40 is as follows.

If the result of adding clock data is over 24 hours, 24 hours are subtracted from the one. For example, in
case of adding 20:20:20 to 14:20:30, the result is not 34:40:50 but 10:40:50.

PLC Common

959

Operation Error :
If the data in S1 and S2 is over the range, error flag is turned on.

Example of program :
A program to add an hour to a clock data in clock device D0003, storing the result in D100 when X0001 is
turned on.

[ Operation ]
The DATERDP is an instruction to read clock data from a clock device.

The DATE+P is an instruction to add a clock data.

960

CIMON-PLC

5.8.12.2 Subtract Clock Data : DATE-, DATE-P
Usable Device
Instruction
DATEDATE-P

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

First device number of devices where time data to be subtracted from is being stored

First device number of devices where subtraction time (clock time) data is being stored

First device number of devices where clock time (time) data of results of subtraction
operation is being stored

Error (F110)

In case that a device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

DATEFunctions :
This is used to subtract the clock data in the devices from the one assigned to S2 from the clock data in the
devices from the one assigned to S1, storing the result in the devices from the one assigned to D.

For example, the result of subtracting 3:50:10 from 10:40:20 is as follows.

PLC Common

961

If the result of subtracting clock data is a negative number, 24 hours are added to the one. For example, in
case of subtracting 10:42:12 from 4:50:32, the result is not -1:8:20 but 18:8:20.

Operation Error :
If the data in S1 and S2 is over the range, error flag is turned on.

Example of Program :
A program to subtract the clock data in clock device D0010 from the clock data in clock device D0100,
storing the result in D0200 when X0001 is turned on.

[ Operation ]
The DATEDP is an instruction to read clock data from a clock device.

962

CIMON-PLC

The DATE-P is an instruction to subtract a clock data.

5.8.12.3 Convert Clock Data Format : SECOND(P), HOUR(P)
Usable Device
Instruction
SECOND(P
)
HOUR(P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

The start address among the addresses where the clock data before converted is stored

The start address among the addresses where the clock data after converted is stored

Error (F110)

In case that a device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

SECOND
Functions :
This is used to convert the clock data in the devices from the one assigned to S1 to seconds, storing the
result in the device assigned to D.

For example, if 4 hours 24 minutes 31 seconds are changed in seconds, the result is as follows.

PLC Common

963

HOUR
Functions :
This is used to convert the seconds data in the device assigned to S to hours-minutes-seconds, storing the
result in the address assigned to D.

For example, if 45325 seconds are assigned, they are converted to hours-minutes-seconds as follows.

Operation Error :
If the data in S is over the range, error flag is turned on.

Example of program :
A program to convert the clock data, which is in the clock device assigned to D0013, to seconds, storing
the result in the device assigned to D0100 and D0101 when X0001 is turned on

[ Operation ]
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

964

CIMON-PLC

The DATERDP is an instruction to read clock data from a clock device.

The SECONDP is an instruction to convert a hours-minutes-seconds clock data to seconds.

A program to convert the seconds clock data, which is in the clock device assigned to D0100 and D0101,
to hours-minutes-seconds, storing the result in the devices from the device assigned to D0020 when X0002
is turned on

[ Operation ]
The HOURP is an instruction to convert a seconds clock data to hours-minutes-seconds.

5.8.12.4 Reading Clock Data : DATERD, DATERDP
Usable Device
Instruction
DATERD(P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

PLC Common

Address where the clock data read is stored

Error (F110)

In case that a device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

965

DATERD
Functions :
This is used to read the clock data in a clock device, bringing it to the data in the devices for year, month,
day, hour, minute, second and day of week from the device assigned to D.

The “year” in the device assigned to D is indicated in four digits. The day of week in the device assigned to
D+6 is stored in the data from 0 to 6 to indicate days of week from Sunday to Saturday.

A leap year is compensated automatically.

Example of program :
A program to read a clock data, outputting the result in BCD
Year........... Y0000 to Y000F
Month......... Y0018 to Y001F
Day............ Y0010 to Y0017
Hour........... Y0028 to Y002F
Minute........ Y0020 to Y0027
Second....... Y0038 to Y003F

966

CIMON-PLC

Week.......... Y0034 to Y0037

[ Operation ]

PLC Common

967

5.8.12.5 Writing Clock Data : DATEWR, DATEWRP
Usable Device
Instruction
DATEWR(P
)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

First device number of devices that is storing clock data to be written to the clock device.

Error (F110)

In case that a device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

DATEWR
Functions :
This is used to write the clock data, which is in the devices from the one assigned to S, to CPU Clock
Device.

968

CIMON-PLC

The values are inputted in BIN. The year in the device assigned to S is indicated in four digits between
2000 to 2099. The month in the device assigned to S+1 is indicated in a number between 1 and 12
(1M~12M). The day in the device assigned to S+2 is indicated in a number between 1 and 31. The hour in
the device assigned to S+3 is indicated in a number between 0 to 23. The minute in the device assigned to
S+4 is indicated in a number between 0 and 59. The second in the device assigned to S+5 is indicated in a
number between 0 and 59. The day of week in the device assigned to S+6 is indicated in a number
between 0 and 6. (Sunday~Saturday)

Example of program :
A program to write clock data in a clock device in BCD when X0100 is turned on
Year........... Y0030 to Y003F
Month......... Y0028 to Y002F
Day............ Y0020 to Y0027
Hour........... Y0018 to Y001F
Minute........ Y0010 to Y0017
Second....... Y0008 to Y000F
Week.......... Y0004 to Y0007

PLC Common

[ Operation ]

5.8.13 Timer / Counter

Contents :
· Set after Delay : TON
· Reset after Delay : TOFF
· Accumulate Time : TMR
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

969

970

CIMON-PLC

· Redecrease Time Relevantly to Input (OFF to ON) : TRTG
· Decrease Time Irrelevantly to Input : TMON
· Count : CTU
· Count Down : CTD
· Count and Count Down : CTUD
· Count and Set Conditionally : CTR

5.8.13.1 Set after Delay : TON
Usable Device
Instruction
TON

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

Set time(t) = Basic interval (0.1 sec or 0.001 sec) * Set value (0 ~ 65535)
S

Timer contact number

Set value on a timer

TON
Functions :
This is used to increase the current value from when an input condition is turned on, setting a timer if it
reaches the set value(t) on the timer. If an input condition is turned off or the reset instruction is operated,
the timer is reset and the current value is 0.

Example of program :
The timer is set if the current value of it is as same as the set value in 10 seconds after X0000 is turned on.
The current value is 0 if an input condition is turned off before it reaches the set value. The current value is
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

PLC Common

971

0 if X0001 is turned on.

5.8.13.2 Reset after Delay : TOFF
Usable Device
Instruction
TOFF

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

Set time(t) = Basic interval (0.1 sec or 0.001 sec) * Set value (0 ~ 65535)
S

Timer contact number

Set value on a timer

TOFF
Functions :
The current value of a timer is the set value and it is set while an input condition is turned on. This is used
to decrease the current value of the timer from the set value when an input condition is turned off, resetting
the timer if the value reaches 0. If the reset instruction is operated, a timer is reset and the current value is
0.

972

CIMON-PLC

Example of program :
When Contact X0000 is turned on, Contact T0010 is set and Y0020 is set. When Contact X0000 is turned
off, the value of the timer start on being decreased. If the current value reaches 0, the timer contact is
reset. The timer is reset and the current value is 0 if X0001 is turned on.

5.8.13.3 Accumulate Time : TMR
Usable Device
Instruction
TMR

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

Set time(t) = Basic interval (0.1 sec or 0.001 sec) * Set value (0 ~ 65535)
S

Timer contact number

Set value on a timer

TMR
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

PLC Common

973

Functions :
This is used to increase the current value from whenever an input condition is turned on, setting a timer if it
reaches the set value(t) on the timer. To keep the current value of the timer in case of power failure, a nonvolatile device is used. If the input condition to reset is turned on, the timer is reset and the current value is
0.

Example of program :
When T0001 is turned on after Contact X0000 has turned ON-OFF-ON, Contact Y0020 is set for 30
seconds(=t1 + t2). If Reset Signal X0002 is turned on, the current value is 0 and Y0020 is reset.

5.8.13.4 Decrease Time Irrelevantly to Input : TMON
Usable Device
Instruction

Flag
C

Inte

No.of

Error

Zero

Carry

974

CIMON-PLC

ger
TMON

Steps
3

Set time(t) = Basic interval (0.1 sec or 0.001 sec) * Set value (0 ~ 65535)
S

Timer contact number

Set value on a timer

TMON
Functions :
This is used to decrease the current value of a timer from the set value when an input condition is turned on
to set the timer, resetting the timer if the value reaches 0. After the timer is set, it is disregarded to change
the input condition from ON to OFF. If the input condition to reset is turned on, the timer is reset and the
current value is 0.

Example of program :
When Contact X0000 is turned on, Contact T0001 is set and the current value of the timer is decreased.
Though X0000 repeats turning on and off while the current value is decreased, it continues to be
decreased. If Reset signal X0001 is turned on, the current value is 0 and Y0020 is reset.

PLC Common

975

5.8.13.5 Redecrease Time Relevantly to Input (OFF to ON) : TRTG
Usable Device
Instruction
TRTG

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

Set time(t) = Basic interval (0.1 sec or 0.001 sec) * Set value (0 ~ 65535)
S

Timer contact number

Set value on a timer

TRTG
Functions :
This is used to decrease the current value of a timer from the set value when an input condition is turned on
to set the timer, resetting the timer if the value reaches 0. If the input condition is turned on from off again
before the current value is 0, this instruction reset the current value as the set value. If the input condition to
reset is turned on, the timer is reset and the current value is 0.

976

CIMON-PLC

Example of program :
When X0000 is turned on, Contact T0001 is set. If the current value of the timer is decreased to reach 0,
Y0020 is set. If the input condition of X0000 is turned on from off before the current value reaches 0, the
current value is to be the current value and is decreased again. If Reset signal X0001 is turned on, the
current value is 0 and Y0020 is reset.

5.8.13.6 Count : CTU
Usable Device
Instruction
CTU

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

Set time(t) = Basic interval (0.1 sec or 0.001 sec) * Set value (0 ~ 65535)
S

Timer contact number

Set value on a counter

CTU
Functions :

PLC Common

977

This is used to increase the current value of a counter 1 by 1 whenever the rising edge of a pulse is input. If
the value is over the set value, the counter is set and the value is counted up to maximum (65535). If the
input condition to reset is turned on, the counter is reset and the current value is 0.

Example of program :
When the current value and the set value are the same by counting the rising edge input to Contact X0000,
Y0030 is set. If Reset signal X0001 is turned on, the current value is 0 and Y0030 is reset.

5.8.13.7 Count Down : CTD
Usable Device
Instruction
CTD

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

978

CIMON-PLC

Set time(t) = Basic interval (0.1 sec or 0.001 sec) * Set value (0 ~ 65535)
S

Timer contact number

Set value on a counter

CTD
Functions :
This is used to decrease the current value of a counter 1 by 1 whenever the rising edge of a pulse is input,
setting the counter if the value is 0. If the input condition to reset is turned on, the counter is reset and the
current value is 0.

Example of Program :
If the current value is 0 by counting down the rising edge input to Contact X0000 at 5 times, Y0030 is set. If
Reset signal X0001 is turned on, the current value is the set value and Y0030 is reset.

PLC Common

979

5.8.13.8 Count and Count Down : CTUD
Usable Device
Instruction
CTUD

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

Set time(t) = Basic interval (0.1 sec or 0.001 sec) * Set value (0 ~ 65535)
S

Timer contact number

Set value on a counter

CTUD
Functions :
This is used to increase the current value of an up-counter 1 by 1 whenever the rising edge of a pulse is
input. If the value is over the set value, the counter is set and the value is counted up to maximum (65535).
This is used to decrease the current value of a down-counter 1 by 1 whenever the rising edge of a pulse is
input. If the input condition to reset is turned on, the current value is 0. IF the rising edge of a pulse is input
to up-counter and down-counter simultaneously, the current value is not changed.

980

CIMON-PLC

Example of Program :
When the current value and the set value are the same by counting up the rising edge input to Contact
X0000, Y0030 is set. The current value is counted down by inputting the rising edges of pulses to Contact
X0001. If the input condition to reset is ON, the counter is reset and the current value is 0.

5.8.13.9 Count and Set Conditionally : CTR
Usable Device
Instruction
CTR

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

PLC Common

981

Set time(t) = Basic interval (0.1 sec or 0.001 sec) * Set value (0 ~ 65535)
S

Timer contact number

Set value on a counter

CTR
Functions :
This is used to increase the current value of an counter 1 by 1 whenever the rising edge of a pulse is input,
resetting the current value when the input signal is turned on from off after the current value reaches the set
value. If the current value reaches the set value, the counter is set. If the current value is less than the set
value or th input condition to reset is turned on, the counter is reset.

Example of Program :
When the current value and the set value are the same by counting up the rising edge input to Contact
X0000, Y0030 is set. If the rising edge input to Contact X0000 is counted down at 6 times, Y0030 is turned
off and the current value is set as 0. If Reset signal X0001 is turned on, the current value is reset as 0.

982

CIMON-PLC

5.8.14 Buffer Memory Access Instruction

Contents :
· Read 1 Word or 2 Word Data in Optional Unit : FROM, FROMP, DFRO, DFROP
· Write 1 Word or 2 Word Data in optional Unit : TO, TOP, DTO, DTOP

5.8.14.1 Read 1 Word or 2 Word Data in Optional Unit : FROM, FROMP, DFRO, DFROP
Usable Device
Instruction
FROM (P)
DFRO (P)

Flag

Inte
ger

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

Head I/O number of intelligent function module/special function module

First address of data to read

First device number of devices which will store read data

Number of the read data

Error (F110)

In case that a device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

FROM
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

PLC Common

983

Functions :
This is used to read n3 pieces of word data in the address assigned to n2, which is in the buffer memory
assigned to n2 of the optional unit assigned to n1, and to store the result in the devices from the device
assigned to D.

Example of Program :
A program to read Word Data D0000 in Address 0, which is in Buffer Memory of AD Card fixed on the 0
Slot of a base unit

DFRO
Functions :
This is used to read (n3*2) pieces of word data in the address assigned to n2, which is in the optional unit
buffer memory assigned to n2, storing the result in the devices from the device assigned to D.

Operation condition :
The operation conditions of the Read instruction are as follows.

984

CIMON-PLC

Operation Error :
In case of the following operation error, error flag is turned on. The case not to access an optional unit, the
case the unit assigned to n1 is not an optional one, and the case n3 pieces of word data in the device
assigned to D are over its own range.

Example of Program :
A program to read Word Data D0002 in Address 10, which is in Buffer Memory of AD Card fixed on the 0
Slot of a base unit

5.8.14.2 Write 1 Word or 2 Word Data in optional Unit : TO, TOP, DTO, DTOP
Usable Device
Instruction

Flag

Inte
ger

TO (P)

DTO (P)

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

Head I/O number of intelligent function module/special function module

PLC Common

First address for the data write operation

Start device number among the devices where written data are atored

Number of read data

Error (F110)

In case that a device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

985

TO
Functions :
This is used to write n3 pieces of word data, which is in the device assigned to S, to the addresses from the
buffer memory assigned to n2 of the optional unit assigned to n1.

Example of Program :
A program to write Word Data D0000 to Address 0, which is in the Buffer Memory of AD Card fixed on Slot
0 of a base unit when X0001 is turned on

DTO
Functions :
This is used to write (n3*2) pieces of word data, which is in the device assigned to S, to the addresses from
the buffer memory assigned to n2 of the optional unit assigned to n1.

986

CIMON-PLC

Operation condition :
The operation conditions of the Write instruction are as follows.

Operation error :
In case of the following operation error, error flag is turned on. The case not to access an optional unit, the
case the unit assigned to n1 is not an optional one, and the case n3 pieces of word data in the device
assigned to D are over its own range.

Example of Program :
A program to write Word Data D0001 to Address 1 and Word Data D0002 to Address 2, which are in the
Buffer Memory of AD Card fixed on Slot 1 of a base unit when X0002 is turned on

PLC Common

987

5.8.15 Instruction for Data Link

Contents :
· Receive Data : RCV, RCVP
· Receive Data : RECV, RECVP
· Send Data : SEND, SENDP
· Send Data : SND, SNDP

5.8.15.1 Send Data : SND, SNDP
Usable Device
Instruction
SND

Flag
No.of
Inte Steps
ger

Slot-chan

Size

Result

SNDP

Slot-chan

Communication-card-mounted slot number and form of communication

Address of the start device where the prime data is stored

Size

Length of the frame sent in Byte

Result

Word device to which a sent result is noticed

Error (F110)

In case that a device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

Error

Zero

Carry

SND
Functions :
This is a instruction to send the data in the device, which is in a mater unit and assigned to S, to a slave
unit..
How to assign a slot number for the Slot-chan and type of communication.
a. Express in hexadecimal number
b. Select the upper byte(Bit 8 ~ F) as extension number(Local device : 0, extended devices : 1~F )

988

CIMON-PLC

c. Assign a bit from 5th bit to 8th bit(Bit 4 ~ 7) in the lower byte as type of communication. (0 : RS232C, 1 :
RS422)
How to assign a device to S(Tx Data) : Assign the start address among the addresses for the devices
where the prime data sent is stored
How to assign the Size : Assign the length of the frame sent in Byte (Maximum 500Bytes)
Result : Assign the word device to which the sent result in noticed
Result format : 1st Bit(Bit 0) - If a piece of data is sent, it is set for a scan. Otherwise, it is always set. 2nd
Bit(Bit 1) - If a piece of data is not sent, it is always set. 3rd Bit to 8th Bit(Bit 2~7) - OFF. 9th Bit to 16th Bit
(Bit 8~F) - Error Code (0 = No Error)

Example of Program :
A program to send the data in the devices, which is in a master unit, from the one assigned to D0100 to the
one assigned to D0103(4 words) to a slave unit by using the RS232C communication card fixed on the 3rd
slot of the 2nd extended device. The sent result is stored in M0100.

5.8.15.2 Receive Data : RCV, RCVP
Usable Device
Instruction
RCV

Flag
No.of
Inte Steps
ger

Slot-chan

Size

Result

RCVP

Slot-chan

Communication-card-mounted slot number and form of communication

Address of the start device where the prime data received is stored

Size

Length of the frame received in Byte

Error

Zero

Carry

PLC Common

Result

Word device to which a received result is noticed

Error (F110)

In case that a device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

989

RCV
Functions :
This is a instruction to receive the data, which is in the device of a mater unit, in the device which is in a
slave unit and assigned to D.
· How to assign a slot number for the Slot-chan and type of communication
a. Express in hexadecimal number.
b. Select the upper byte(Bit 8 ~ F) as extension number(Local device : 0, extended devices : 1~F ).
c. Assign a bit from 5th bit to 8th bit(Bit 4 ~ 7) in the lower byte as type of communication. (0 : RS232C, 1 :
RS422)
d. Assign a bit from 1st bit to 4th bit(Bit 0 ~ 3) as Slot number
· How to assign a device to D(Rx Data) : Assign the start address in the addresses for the devices
where the prime data received is stored.
· How to assign the Size : Assign the length of the frame received in Byte (Maximum 500Bytes)

· Result : Assign the word device to which the received result is noticed.

· Result format :
a. 1st Bit(Bit 0) : If a piece of data is received, it is set for a scan. Otherwise, it is always set.
b. 2nd Bit(Bit 1) : If a piece of data is not received, it is always set.
c. 3rd Bit to 8th Bit (Bit 2~7) : OFF.
d. 9th Bit to 16th Bit (Bit 8~F) : Error Code (0 = No Error)

Example of Program :
A program to received the data, which is in the device of a master unit, in the devices of a slave unit from
the one assigned to D0000 to the one assigned to D0007(8 words) by using the RS232C communication
card fixed on the 12th slot of the 8th extended device. The sent result is stored in M0100.

990

CIMON-PLC

5.8.15.3 Send Data : SEND, SENDP
Usable Device
Instruction
SEND
SENDP

Flag

Inte
ger

PID

F-Name

Result

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

PID

Name of special program or program ID

F_Name

Frame name or frame number

Result

Word device receiving a sent result

Error (F110)

In case that a device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

SEND
Functions :
This is used to send a user frame data from a master station to slave stations. To use this instruction, the
protocol of the action mode in the RS232C/422 card setup should be the user protocol and the download
button be pressed. User frame can be edited by using the frame editor of special program.(Refer to the
communication module or CICON manual for the details.)
· Assigned PID : Special program name or special program ID.

· Assigned F_Name :
a. Frame name or frame number can be assigned. In case of frame number, it should be assigned
according to the following form.
b. Format in case of frame number : Upper byte(Bit 8~F) is Communication form(0 : RS232C, 1 :
RS422/485), Lower byte(Bit 0~7) is Frame number in special program

Ex.) In case Fram 3 is sent by using RS232C ? SEND (PID) h0003 (Result)

PLC Common

991

· Result :
Word device receiving the sent result should be assigned.
Result format : 1st Bit(Bit 0) - When the data have been sent, it is turned on for one scan. 2nd Bit(Bit 1) When the data have not been sent, it is always turned on. 3rd Bit ~ 8th Bit(Bit 2~7) - Turned off. 9th Bit ~
16th Bit(Bit 8~F) - Error Code (0 = No Error)

Example of Program :
A program to read the frame name data of a master station by using a RS232C/422 communication card,
sending the frame assigned with the frame editor(Frame assigned to“TEST1”) in the special program
assigned to SENDING(PID:1) to a slave station. The sent result is stored in M0010.

5.8.15.4 Receive Data : RECV, RECVP
Usable Device
Instruction
RECV
RECVP

Flag

Inte
ger

PID

F-Name

Result

PID

Name of special program or program ID

F_Name

Frame name or frame number

No.of
Steps

Error

Zero

Carry

992

CIMON-PLC

Result

Word device receiving a received result

Error (F110)

In case that a device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

RECV
Functions :
This, which is use in slave stations, is used to receive a frame data from a master station. In case the
received frame coincide with user frame and is normal frame, the flag indicating received is turned on. To
use this instruction, the protocol of the action mode in the RS232C/422 card setup should be the user
protocol and the download button be pressed. User frame can be edited by using the frame editor of
special program.(Refer to the communication module or CICON manual for the details.)
· Assigning PID : Special program name or special program ID

· Assigning F_Name
a. Frame name or frame number can be assigned. In case of frame number, it should be assigned
according to the following form.
b. Format in case of frame number : Upper byte (Bit 8~F) is Communication form (0 : RS232C, 1 :
RS422/485), Lower byte (Bit 0~7) is Frame number in special program.

Ex.) In case Frame 5 is received by using RS422 ? RECV (PID) h0105 (Result)
· Result :
a. A word device receiving th received result should be assigned
b. Result fromat : 1st Bit(Bit 0) - When the data have been received, it is turned on for one scan. 2nd Bit
(Bit 1) - When the data have not been received, it is always turned on. 3rd Bit ~ 8th Bit(Bit 2~7) :
Turned off. 9th Bit ~ 16th Bit(Bit 8~F) : Error Code (0 = No Error)

Example of Program :
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

PLC Common

993

Data are received from a master station by using RS232C/422 communication card. After the data are
received, the assigned frame name data is read. The following is a program to receive the frame asisgned
with the frame editor(Frame assigned to “TEST2”) in the special program assigned to RECEIVING(PID:2) in
a slave station. The received result is stored in M0020.

5.8.16 Real number operation Instruction

Contents :
· SIN operation on floating decimal point Data : SIN, SINP
· COS Operation on floationg decimal point data : COS, COSP
· TAN operation on floating decimal point Data : TAN, TANP
· SIN-1 Operation on floating point data : ASIN, ASINP
· COS-1 Operation on floating point data : ACOS, ACOSP
· TAN-1 Operation on floating point data : ATAN, ATANP
· Conversion form floating decimal point angle to radian : RAD, RADP
· Conversion from floating decimal point radian to angle : DEG, DEGP
· Square root operations for floating decimal point Data : SQR, SQRP
· Exponent operation on floating decimal point dataInstruction : EXP, EXPP
· Natural logarithm operations on floating decimal point Data : LOG, LOGP
· Random number generate and series Update : RND, RNDP, SRND, SRNDP
· BCD of 4 Digit, Square root of 8 Digit : BSQR, BSQRP, BDSQR, BDSQRP
· BCD Type SIN-1 Operation : BASIN, BASINP
· BCD Type COS Operation : BCOS, BCOSP
· BCD Type TAN Operation : BTAN, BTANP
· BCD type SIN operation : BSIN, BSINP
· BCD type COS-1 Operation : BACOS, BACOSP
· BCD Type TAN-1 Operation : BATAN, BATANP

5.8.16.1 SIN operation on floating decimal point Data : SIN, SINP
Usable Device
Instruction

Flag
C

No.o
@D Inte
f

Error

Zero

Usable CPU
Carry

994

CIMON-PLC

ger
SIN
SINP

Step
s
3

First device number of devices where angle data on which SIN(sine) operation will be
performed is being stored

First device number of the devices where the operation result is stored

Error (F110)

When the specified device contains -0

SIN(P)
Explanation :
Calculates SIN (sine) value of angle designated at S and stores the operation result in the device number
designated at D.

Angles designated at S are set in radian units (degrees

π/180).

For conversion between degrees and radian values, see the RAD and DEG instructions.

Example of Program :
Input angles for SIN operation
Convert input angles to floating decimal point type real numbers
Convert angles to radian values
Perform sine operation on converted radian values

PLC Common

995

5.8.16.2 COS Operation on floationg decimal point data : COS, COSP
Usable Device
M

Instruction

COS
COSP

Flag
C

No.o
@D Inte
f
ger Step
s

Error

Zero

Usable CPU
Carry

First device number of devices where angle data on which COS(cosine) operation will be
performed is being stored

First device number of the devices where the operation result is stored

Error (F110)

When the specified device contains -0

COS(P)
Functions :
Performs COS (cosine) on angle designated by S and stores operation result at device number designated
by D .

Angles designated at S are set in radian units (degrees × /180).
Angle <- -> Radian For conversion between degrees and radian values, see the RAD and DEG

996

CIMON-PLC

instructions.

Example of Program :
Input angle D00070 to do COS arithmetic to D00080.
Change from D00080's data to floating point data and input to D00090.
Change from D00090's floating point data to Radian data and put to D00100.
Store D00100's cos arithmetic result to D00200.

5.8.16.3 TAN operation on floating decimal point Data : TAN, TANP
Usable Device
M

Instruction

TAN
TANP

Flag
C

No.o
@D Inte
f
ger Step
s

Error

Zero

Usable CPU
Carry

First device number of devices where angle data on which TAN(tangent) operation is to be
performed is being stored

First device number of the devices where the operation result is stored

Error (F110)

· Operation result are "0", or are outside the range shown below :
±2-127

operation result 1 < ±2-129

· When the specified device contains -0

TAN(P)
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

PLC Common

997

Explanation :
Performs tangent (TAN) operation on angle data designated by S , and stores operation result in device
designated by D .

Angles designated at S are set in radian units (degrees π /180).
For conversion between degrees and radian values, see the RAD and DEG instructions.

Example of Program :
Input angle data(D00070) for TAN operation(D00080))
Convert input angles(D00080) to floating decimal point type real numbers(D00090)
Convert angles(D00090) to radian values(D00100)
TAN operation(D00100) with converted radian value(D00200)

5.8.16.4 SIN-1 Operation on floating point data : ASIN, ASINP
Usable Device
M

Instruction

ASIN
ASINP

Flag
C

No.o
@D Inte
f
ger Step
s

Error

Zero

Usable CPU
Carry

First device number of devices where angle data on which SIN-1(inverse sine) operation is to

998

CIMON-PLC

be performed is being stored
D

First device number of the devices where the operation result is stored

Error (F110)

· The value designated by S is outside the range of from -1.0 to 1.0
· When the specified device contains -0

ASIN(P)
Functions :
Calculates angle from sin value designated by S, and stores operation result at word device designated by
D

The sin value designated by S must be inside of the range from -1.0 to 1.0.
The angle stored at D is a value in radian units.
For more information about the conversion between radian and degree, refer to descriptions of DEG and
RAD

Example of Program :
sin-1 operation calculates angle in radian from D00100 and stores the result to D00090.
Converts the radian value in D00090 to degree and stores it to D00080.
Converts the floating point value in D00080 to integer and store it to D00070.

5.8.16.5 COS-1 Operation on floating point data : ACOS, ACOSP
Usable Device
Instruction

Flag
C

No.o
@D Inte
f
ger Step

Error

Zero

Usable CPU
Carry

PLC Common

999

s
ACOS
ACOSP

First device number of devices where COS value on which COS-1 (inverse cosine) operation
is to be performed is stored

First device number of the devices where the operation result is stored

Error (F110)

· The value designated by S is outside the range of from -1.0 to 1.0
· When the specified device contains -0

ACOS(P)
Function :
Calculates angle from COS value designated by S, and stores operation result at word device designated
by D

The COS value designated by S must be inside of the range from -1.0 to 1.0.
The angle stored at D is a value in radian units.
For more information about the conversion between radian and degree, refer to descriptions of DEG and
RAD

Example of Program :
cos-1 operation calculates angle in radian from D00100 and stores the result to D00090.
Converts the radian value in D00090 to degree and stores it to D00080.
Converts the floating point value in D00080 to integer and store it to D00070.

1000

CIMON-PLC

5.8.16.6 TAN-1 Operation on floating point data : ATAN, ATANP
Usable Device
M

Instruction

ATAN
ATANP

Flag
C

No.o
@D Inte
f
ger Step
s

Error

Zero

Usable CPU
Carry

First device number of devices storing TAN value on which TAN-1 (inverse tangent) value will
be performed

First device number of the devices where the operation result is stored

Error (F110)

When the specified device contains -0

ATAN(P)
Function :
Calculates angle from tan value designated by S, and stores operation result at word device designated by
D

The tan value designated by S must be inside of the range from -1.0 to 1.0.
The angle stored at D is a value in radian units.
For more information about the conversion between radian and degree, refer to descriptions of DEG and
RAD

PLC Common

1001

Example of Program :
tan-1 operation calculates angle in radian from D00100 and stores the result to D00090.
Converts the radian value in D00090 to degree and stores it to D00080.
Converts the floating point value in D00080 to integer and store it to D00070.

5.8.16.7 Conversion form floating decimal point angle to radian : RAD, RADP
Usable Device
M

Instruction

RAD
RADP

Flag
C

No.o
@D Inte
f
ger Step
s

Error

Zero

Usable CPU
Carry

First device number of devices storing angle to be converted to radian

First device number of devices where radian value will be stored after conversion

Error (F110)

When the specified device contains -0

RAD(P)
Function :
Converts units of angle size from angle units designated by S to radian units, and stores result at device
number designated by D.

1002

CIMON-PLC

Conversion from degree to radian units is performed according to the following equation

Example of Program :
Conversion of input data to floating point type real number.
The following program converts the angle at D90 to radians, and stores results as floating decimal point
type real number at D80.

5.8.16.8 Conversion from floating decimal point radian to angle : DEG, DEGP
Usable Device
M

Instruction

DEG
DEGP

Flag
C

No.o
@D Inte
f
ger Step
s

Error

Zero

Usable CPU
Carry

First device number of devices storing radian angle to be converted to degrees

First device number of devices where degree value will be stored after conversion

Error (F110)

When the specified device contains -0

DEG(P)

PLC Common

1003

Explanation :
Converts Unit of angle size from radian units designated by S to angles, and stores result at device number
designated by D.

The conversion from radians to angle is performed according to the following equation.
[ Angle unit = Radian unit * (180 / π) ]

Example of program :
Convert radian(D00100) value to angle(D00090).
convert floating decimal point type real number angle(D00090) to integer value(D00080).

5.8.16.9 Square root operations for floating decimal point Data : SQR, SQRP
Usable Device
M

Instruction

SQR
SQRP

Flag
C

No.o
@D Inte
f
ger Step
s

Error

Zero

Usable CPU
Carry

First device number of devices storing data on which square root operation will be conducted

First device number of devices where degree value will be stored after conversion

Error (F110)

· The value designated by S is a negative number
· When the specified device contains -0

1004

CIMON-PLC

SQR(P)
Explanation :
Calculates square root of value designated at S , and stores the operation result in the device number
designated at D .

Only positive values can be designated by S (Operation cannot be performed on negative numbers.)

Example of Program :
Conversion of input data to floating decimal point type real number
Calculation of square root

5.8.16.10 Exponent operation on floating decimal point dataInstruction : EXP, EXPP
Usable Device
M

Instruction

EXP
EXPP

Flag
C

No.o
@D Inte
f
ger Step
s

Error

Zero

Usable CPU
Carry

First device number of devices storing data on which exponent operation will be performed

First device number of the devices where the operation result is stored

PLC Common

Error (F110)

Operation result are not within the range indicated : ±2-127

When the specified device contains -0

1005

(operation results) < ±2129

EXP(P)
Function :
Calculates exponent for value designated by S, and stores the result of the operation at the device
designate by D

Exponent operations are calculated talking the base e to be“2.71828”

Example of Program :
Compares decimal value 0 to the data at D100, and establishes continuity if the D100 data is less than 0.
(Check of the range of values for operation)
Conversion of input data to floating point type real number.
Performs an exponent operation on the value at D90, and stores the result as a floating decimal point real
number at D0 and D1.

5.8.16.11 Natural logarithm operations on floating decimal point Data : LOG, LOGP
Usable Device
Instruction

Flag
C

No.o
@D Inte
f
ger Step
s

Error

Zero

Usable CPU
Carry

1006

CIMON-PLC

LOG
LOGP

First device number of devices storing data for natural logarithm operation

First device number of the devices where the operation result is stored

Error (F110)

· The value designated be S is negative
· Operation result are not within the range indicated : ±2-127

(operation results) < ±2129

· When the specified device contains -0

LOG(P)
Function :
Calculates natural logarithm of value designated by S taking e as base, and stores operation results at
device designated by D.

Only positive values can be designated by S. (Operation cannot be performed on negative numbers.)

Example of Program :
The following program seeks the natural logarithm of the value "10" set by D00080.
Conversion of input data to floating point type real number. Stores the result at D00100.

PLC Common

1007

5.8.16.12 Random number generate and series Update : RND, RNDP, SRND, SRNDP
Usable Device
M

Instruction

RND(P)
SRND(P)

Flag
C

No.o
@D Inte
f
ger Step
s

Error

Zero

Usable CPU
Carry

First device number of devices to store random number

Random number serial data or first device number of devices where such data is being stored

Error (F110)

There are no operation errors associated with the RND(P) or SRND(P) instructions

RND(P)
Explanation :
Generates random number of from 0 to 32767, and stores at device designated by D

Example of Program :
The following program stores random number at D00100 when M0000 is ON.

SRND(P)
Explanation :
Updates random number series according to the 16-bit BIN data being stored in device designated by S

1008

CIMON-PLC

Example of Program :
The following program updates a random number series according to the contents of D00100 when M0000
goes ON.

5.8.16.13 BCD of 4 Digit, Square root of 8 Digit : BSQR, BSQRP, BDSQR, BDSQRP
Usable Device
M

Instruction

BSQR (P)
BDSQR
(P)

Flag
C

No.o
@D Inte
f
ger Step
s

Error

Zero

Usable CPU
Carry

Data on which square root calculation will be performed, or number of device where such
data is being stored

First device number of devices that will store square root calculation results

Error (F110)

The data designated by S is not a BCD value

BSQR(P)
Functions :
Store appointed data to area that is specified by D after square root arithmetic by S.

PLC Common

1009

Appointed value is between 9999 from 0 by BCD value by S.
D, D+1 relationship value by each BCD value 0 ~ 9999 store .
Value of D+1, D+2 is - 1.0000 ~ 1.0000 extent's BCD data.
Arithmetic result amounts to value that round off to the nearest whole number decimal fifth figure.
Therefore, there is error of ± 1 with the decimal department 4th figure.

Example of Program :
Store BCD data 1234 to do square root arithmetic to D00090.
Store D00090's data to D00100 after square root arithmetic.
Integer with arithmetic result is stored to D00100 and decimal is stored to D00101.

BDSQR(P)
Functions :
Store appointed data in area that is specified by D after square root arithmetic by S.

Store appointed data in area that is specified by D after square root arithmetic by S.
Appointed value is between 99999999 from 0 by BCD value by S, S+1.
D, D+1 relationship value stores 0 ~ 9999 by each BCD value.
Arithmetic result amounts to value that round off to the nearest whole number decimal department fifth
figure. Therefore, error of ± 1 of the decimal department 4th figure occur.

Example of Program :
Store to BCD data 12345678 Reul D00090s to do square root arithmetic.
Store D00090's data to D00100 after square root arithmetic.
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

1010

CIMON-PLC

Integer with arithmetic result is stored to D00100 and decimal is stored to D00101.

5.8.16.14 BCD Type SIN operation : BSIN, BSINP
Usable Device
M

Instruction

BSIN
BSINP

Flag
C

No.o
@D Inte
f
ger Step
s

Error

Zero

Usable CPU
Carry

Data on which SIN (sine) operation will be performed, or number of device where such data is
being stored

First device number of the devices where the operation result is stored

Error (F110)

· The data designated by S is not a BCD value
· The data designated by S is not in the range of from 0 to 360

BSIN(P)
Function :
Calculates the sin value of the designated value, and stores the sign of the operation result in the device at
D, and the operation result in the device designated at D+1 and D+2.

PLC Common

1011

The value designated at S is a BCD value which can be between 0 to 360 degrees
The sign for the operation result stored in D will be "0" if the result is a positive value, and "1" if the result is
a negative value.
The operation results stored in D+1 and D+2 are BCD values between -1.0000 and 1.0000
The operation results are rounded off from the fifth decimal place.

Example of Program :
Stores 123 to D00080.
Convert the value at D00080 to BCD and stores it at D00090
Calculates the cos value from the value D00090 and stores it at D00100 , D00101 , D00102.

5.8.16.15 BCD Type COS Operation : BCOS, BCOSP
Usable Device
M

Instruction

BCOS
BCOSP

Flag
C

No.o
@D Inte
f
ger Step
s

Error

Zero

Usable CPU
Carry

Data on which COS (cosine) operation will be performed, or first device number of devices
storing such data

First device number of the devices where the operation result is stored Functions

Error (F110)

· The data designated by S is not a BCD value
· The data designated by S is not in the range of from 0 to 360

1012

CIMON-PLC

BCOS(P)
Function :
Calculates the cos value of the designated value, and stores the sign of the operation result in the device at
D, and the operation result in the device designated at D+1 and D+2.

Example of program :
Stores 320 to D00080.
Convert the value at D00080 to BCD and stores it at D00090
Calculates the cos value from the value D00090 and stores it at D00100 , D00101 , D00102.

5.8.16.16 BCD Type TAN Operation : BTAN, BTANP
Usable Device
M

Instruction

BTAN
BTANP

Flag
C

No.o
@D Inte
f
ger Step
s

Error

Zero

Usable CPU
Carry

PLC Common

1013

Data on which TAN (tangent) operation is to be performed, or first device number of devices
where such data is being stored

First device number of the devices where the operation result is stored

Error (F110)

· The data designated by S is not a BCD value
· The data designated by S is not in the range of from 0 to 360
· The data designated by S is 90o or 270o

BTAN(P)
Functions :
Calculates TAN (tangent) value for value (angle) designated by S , and stores the sign for the operation
result in the word device designated by D , and the operation result in the word device designated by D +1
and D +2.

The value designated at S is a BCD value which can be between 0 and 360 degrees (in units of degrees).
The sign for the operation result stored in D will be "0" if the result is a positive value, and "1" if the result is
a negative value.
The operation results stored at D +1 and D +2 are BCD values within the range of from -57.2900 and
57.2900.
Operation results are rounded off from the fifth decimal place.

Example of Program :
Store angle 320 to D00080.
Convert D00080's data to BCD data and store to D00090.
Store cos arithmetic result of D00090's BCD data to D00100, D00101, D00102.

1014

CIMON-PLC

5.8.16.17 BCD Type SIN-1 Operations : BASIN, BASINP
Usable Device
M

Instruction

BASIN
BASINP

Flag
C

No.o
@D Inte
f
ger Step
s

Error

Zero

Usable CPU
Carry

Data on which SIN-1 (inverse sine) operation will be performed, or device number where such

data is being stored
D

First device number of the devices where the operation result is stored

Error (F110)

· The data designated by S is not a BCD value
· The data designated by S is not in the range of from -1.000 to 1.000

BASIN(P)
Function :
Calculates angle from sin value designated by S, and stores operation result at word device designated by
D

A sign for the operation data is set at S: (positive=0, negative=1)
The part before the decimal point and fraction part are stored at S+1, S+2 respectively as BCD value.
(Settings can be between 0 and 1.0000)
The Operation results stored at D will be a BCD value in the range of 0~180°
The Calculation results are a value from which the decimal fraction part has been rounded.

Example of Program :
The result of sin-1 0.1234 is stored at D00200.

PLC Common

1015

5.8.16.18 BCD Type COS-1 Operation : BACOS, BACOSP
Usable Device
M

Instruction

BACOS
BACOSP

Flag
C

No.o
@D Inte
f
ger Step
s

Error

Zero

Usable CPU
Carry

Data on which COS-1 (inverse cosine) operation will be performed, or first device number of

devices where such data is being stored
D

First device number of the devices where the operation result is stored

Error (F110)

· The data designated by S is not a BCD value
· The data designated by S is not in the range of from -1.000 to 1.000

BACOS(P)
Function :
Calculates angle from COS value designated by S, and stores operation result at word device designated
by D

A sign for the operation data is set at S: (positive=0, negative=1)
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

1016

CIMON-PLC

The part before the decimal point and fraction part are stored at S+1, S+2 respectively as BCD value.
(Settings can be between 0 and 1.0000)
The Operation results stored at D will be a BCD value in the range of 0~180°
The Calculation results are a value from which the decimal fraction part has been rounded.

Example of Program :
The result of cos-1 0.1234 is stored at D00200.

5.8.16.19 BCD Type TAN-1 Operation : BATAN, BATANP
Usable Device
M

Instruction

BATAN
BATANP

Flag
C

No.o
@D Inte
f
ger Step
s

Error

Zero

Usable CPU
Carry

Data on which TAN-1 (inverse tangent) operation is to be performed, or first device number of

devices storing such data
D

First device number of the devices where the operation result is stored

Error (F110)

· The data designated by S is not a BCD value

BATAN(P)
Function :
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

PLC Common

1017

Calculates angle from sin value designated by S, and stores operation result at word device designated by
D

Example of Program :
The result of tan-1 -4321.1234 is stored at D00200.

5.8.17 Read / Write Instruction

Contents :
· Setting Data Memory Access Instruction Special function module Setting Data Read : FREAD, FREADP
· Setting Data Memory Access Instruction Special function module Setting Data Write : FWRITE,
FWRITEP

5.8.17.1 Setting Data Memory Access Instruction Special function module Setting Data Read : FREAD,
FREADP
Usable Device
Instruction

Flag
C

No.o
@D Inte
f
ger Step

Error

Zero

Usable CPU
Carry

1018

CIMON-PLC

s
FREAD

FREADP

Start I/O number of a optional unit

Head number of the device storing the data

First device number of devices which will store read data

Number of read data

Word device to which the FREAD result is notice

Error (F110)

In case that a device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

FREAD(P)
Functions :
Read n3 words of data from the address designated by n2 of the system memory of the special function
module designated by n1.
Then, stores the data in the area starting from the device designated by D.
The result of instruction is stored to the device designated by n3.

How to assign a Base/Slot number(n1)
· Express in hexadecimal number.
· Select the upper byte(Bit8~F) as Base(Extension) number (Local:0, Extended:1~F)
· Assign the lower byte(Bit0~7) as Slot number(00h

0Bh)

How to assign a Offset(n2)
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

PLC Common

1019

· Assign the first address of data to read. (See the special function module's Memory map)
How to assign a Size(n3)
· Assign the number of data to read.
· In the case, the value designated by n3 is must be conform to 0 < Size(n3) < 32,767, an operation error
occurs.
· If n3(Size)=0, there will be no operation.
How to assign a Result(n4)
· Assign the word device to which FREAD result is noticed.
· Result format
Bit No.

Note

When the instruction is in progress, it is set

When the instruction is completed, it is set

When the Error is occurred, it is set

3~7

0 (Not used)

8 ~ 15

[Error Code]
00h : No error
01h : Overflow of 1 Scan dealing capacity
02h : Exceeds the relevant device range
03h : Offset value assign by n3 is out of range

Example of Program :
The program used to read 10 words of data in Address 0, which is in the System Memory of the special
function module fixed on the 1st slot of the 1st extended device, and stores data in the area starting frump
the device designated by D0000.
A FREAD result is stored in M0000.

5.8.17.2 Setting Data Memory Access Instruction Special function module Setting Data Write :
FWRITE, FWRITEP
Usable Device
Instruction

Flag
C

No.o
@D Inte
f
ger Step
s

Error

Zero

Usable CPU
Carry

1020

CIMON-PLC

FWRITE

FWRITEP

Start I/O number of a optional unit

First address of data to write

First device number of devices which will store write data

Number of write data

Word device to which the FWRITE result is notice

Error (F110)

In case that a device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

FWRITE(P)

Functions :
Write n3 words of data from the device designated by D to the area starting from the address designated
by n2 of the system memory of the special function module designated by n1.

How to assign a Base/Slot number (n1)
· Express in hexadecimal number.
· Select the upper byte(Bit8~F) as Base(Extension) number (Local:0, Extended:1~F)
· Assign the lower byte(Bit0~7) as Slot number(00h

0Bh)

How to assign a Offset (n2)
· Assign the first address of data to write. (See the special function module's Memory map)
How to assign a Size (n3)

PLC Common

1021

· Assign the number of data to write.
· In the case, the value designated by n3 is must be conform to 0 < Size(n3) < 32,767, an operation error
occurs.
· If n3(Size)=0, there will be no operation.
How to assign a Result (n4)
· Assign the word device to which FREAD result is noticed.
· Result format
Bit No.

Note

When the instruction is in progress, it is set

When the instruction is completed, it is set

When the Error is occurred, it is set

3~7

0 (Not used)

8 ~ 15

[Error Code]
00h : No error
01h : Overflow of 1 Scan dealing capacity
02h : Exceeds the relevant device range
03h : Offset value assign by n3 is out of range

Example of Program :
The program used to write 20 words of data from the device designated by D0020 to the area starting from
the Address 28, which is in the System Momory of the special function module fixed on the 5th slot of the
3rd extended device.
A FWRITE result is stored in M0000.

5.8.18 Instruction for High Speed Counter
See :
· Operating/Preset High Speed Counter : HSC
· Operating/Preset/SW-Adding or Subtracting High Speed Counter : HSCSW

1022

CIMON-PLC

5.8.18.1 Enable/Preset High Speed Counter : HSC
Usable Device
Instruction
M

HSC

@
D

No.of
Inte Steps

-ger
3

Error Zero

Carr
y

Channel used for HSC instruction

Device, which is assigned to D, where counted values are stored

Error(F110)

Flag

In case that a device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

Functions and Features
·
·

This requires two execution conditons like enable and preset.
Counting and counting-down by Phase B(SW input)can not be controlled.

Counted values are signed 32-bit binary(-2147483648 ~ 2147483647) and are stored in
the device assigned to double-word D.

If enable signal is on, the pulses inputted from the terminal of the corresponding channel
can be counted.
If enable signal is off, the pulses inputted from the terminal of the corresponding channel
is not counted.
If enable signal is on again, pulses are continuously counted with the value in the device
assigned to D.
To keep counting status, enable signal is to be on continuously.

·
·
·
·

If preset signal is on, the value counted on a corresponding channel is converted to the
preset value assigned in the
bulit-in HSC setup.

Instructions according to input condition

Input Condition

Status

Enable

Description
Enabes HSC.

PLC Common

Preset

Off

Disables HSC.

Converts the current value to prest value.

1023

Example of Program
If X0005 is turned on, the pulses inputted from the terminal corresponding to Channel 1
are counted and the counted
result is stored in Double-word D0000. If X0006 is on, the counted value is conveted to a
preset value.And, in case that the
counted value is over the value set up as Coincidence 1, the falg indicating coincidence
output(F0372) is on and the
output to Y0010 is on.(Refer to flag indicating coincidence ouput)

5.8.18.2 Operating/Preset/SW-Adding or Subtracting High Speed Counter : HSCSW
Usable Device
Instruction
M

HSCSW

Ch
D

@
D

No.
of
Inte- Step
s
ger

3
-

Flag
ERR
OR

ZER
O

Carry

1024

CIMON-PLC

Channel used for HSC instruction.

Device, which is assigned to D, where counted values are stored

(F110)

In case that a device is assigned to @D, if overflow is generated, it is set.

Function and Features
·

This requires 3 execution conditions like enable, preset and up/down. Phase A is used to
receive high speed pulse
input with a terminal and Phase B is used to control up/down counting by SW input.

This is used in only case built-in HSC, 1-phase 1-multiple(PhaseB: SW input), 1-phase
2-multiple(Phase B: SW input)
are set in the PLC patameter.

Counted values are signed 32-bit binary(-2147483648 ~ 2147483647) and are stored in
the device assigned to double-word D.

If enable signal is on, the pulses inputted from the terminal of the corresponding channel
can be counted.

If enable signal is off, the pulses inputted from the terminal of the corresponding channel
is not counted.

If enable signal is on again, pulses are continuously counted with the value in the device
assigned to D.

To keep counting status, enable signal is to be on continuously.

If preset signal is on, the value counted on a corresponding channel is converted to the
preset value assigned in
the bulit-in HSC setup.

To count down, the up/down, which is an input condition, is to be continuously on. If it is
off, pulses are counted.

Instructions according to input condition
Input Condition

Status

Description

Enabes HSC.

Off

Disables HSC.

Up /
Down

Counts down

Off

Counts

Preset

Converts the current value to prest value.

Enable

Example of Program
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

PLC Common

1025

· If X0004 is turned on, the pulses inputted from the terminal corresponding to Channel 1
are counted and the counted result
is stored in Double-word D0010. If X0005 is on, counting is converted to counting-down. If
X0006 is on, counted value is
conveted to a preset value.
· And, in case that counted value is over the value set up as Coincidence 1, the falg
indicating coincidence output(F0379, F037A)
is on and the output to Y0010 is on.(Refer to flag indicating coincidence ouput)

5.8.19 Other Instructions

Contents :
· Timing pulse generation : DUTY
· Swap Active Status in Redundant System : ATVP

5.8.19.1 Timing pulse generation : DUTY
Usable Device
M

Instruction

DUTY

Flag
C

No.o
@D Inte
f
ger Step
s

Number of scans forcing ON

Number of scans forcing OFF

Error

Zero

Usable CPU
Carry

1026

CIMON-PLC

Timing clock for use by user (F0100 ~ F0107)

DUTY
Functions :
Turns scan designated by n1 ON for user timing block designated by D, and scan designated by n2 OFF.

Scan execution type programs use F0100 through F0107.

Example of Program :
USER CLOCK The following program turns F0100 ON for 10 scan, and OFF for 20 scans.

5.8.19.2 Swap Active Status in Redundant System : ATVP
Usable Device

Flag

Instruction

ATVP

No.of
@D Inte Steps
ger
-

Usable CPU

Error

Zero

Carry

ATVP
Function :
Exchange active and standby state in redundant system.

PLC Common

Error :
If standby CPU is abnormal, error flag F110 turns ON.

Example of Program :
If X10 will be turned ON, A active CPU goes standby and A standby CPU goes active.

1027

1028

5.9

CIMON-PLC

PID CONTROL
Contents :
· PID2 notice
· PID fundamental notions
· PID Instruction

5.9.1

PID2 notice
CICON version 4.01 supports PID control for all types of CIMON PLC.
However New PID2 functions are available with below PLC type and firmware.

5.9.2

PID Control Function
The PID control process showing as above configuration receives the process variable (PV) and controls the
manipulation variable (MV) in order to adjust the PV to match the set value (SV). D/A conversion module is
used for MV output.

5.9.3

PID Basics
Direct action and Reverse action

PLC Common

1029

Direct action: It will lead the MV to increase when the PV is larger than the SV.
Reverse action: It will lead the MV to decrease when the PV is larger than the SV.

Proportional (P) control action
Proportional control (P) generates the MV in proportion to the error (E: difference between SV and PV).
In the P control action, the MV is calculated as follows.
MV=KP + E
KP : Proportional gain
If the KP value is too large, the control process is getting fast but the system will be in danger to oscillate. If
the value is too small, the control process is getting slow to make it stable.
Under proportional control, the offset (residual error) will remain until the operator manually changes the
bias on the controller’s output to remove the offset.

Integral (I) control action
Integral (I) control will generate the MV in proportion to the time-integral of the error (E). Integral action
eliminates offset. If the integral time is set too long, the controller will be sluggish, if it is too short, the control
lop will oscillate and become unstable.
The Integral (I) action is used with PI control or PID control. It is not used by itself.

Derivative (D) control action
Derivative (D) control will generate the MV in proportion to the rate of change in the error (E). By adding the
D control, quick corrective action can be obtained at the beginning of upset condition.
If the derivative time is set too long, oscillations will occur and the control loop will run unstable. If the
derivative time is set 0, the derivative control does not function.
The Derivative control is used with PI and PID control. It is never used alone.

5.9.4

PID Control formula

PID Formula :
[Forward Action]
·

MVn = MVn-1 + Kp{(En–En-1) + (Ts/Ki)*En + (Kd/Ts)*(2PVnf-1–PVnf–PV nf-2)}

En = SV – PVnf

1030

CIMON-PLC

[Reverse Action]
·

MVn = MVn-1 + Kp{(En–En-1) + (Ts/Ki)*En –(Kd/Ts)*(2PVnf-1–PVnf–PV nf-2)}

En = PVnf– SV

[Filtered Present Value]
·

PVnf = PVn + α(PVnf-1 – PVn)

En : Currently Sampling Deviation
En-1 : Deviation at an Interval before
Kp : Propotional Integer
Ki : Integral Integer
Kd : Differential Integer
Ts : Sampling Interval
α : Filter Coefficient
MVn : Present manipulation value
MVn-1 : Manipulation value of the preceding sampling cycle
SV : Set Value
PVn : Process value of the present sampling cycle.
PVnf : Process value of the present sampling cycle (after filtering).
PVnf-1 : Process value of the preceding sampling cycle (after filtering).
PVnf-2 : Process value of the sampling cycle two cycles before (after filtering).

5.9.5

PID Instruction
Specifications
Item
Range
to Set
PID
Constan
t

Specification

Remarks

Proportional
Constant(Kp)

1 – 10000 (0.01 – 100.00)

Integral Constant (Ki)

0 – 30000 (0.0s – 3000.0s)

0 : No Integral Operation

0 – 30000
300.00s)

0
:
No
Operation

Differential Constant (K
d)

(0.00s

Sampling Interval (Ts)

1 – 6000 (0.01s – 60.00s)

Range of Set Value(SV)

0 – 16,000

Range of Current Value(PV)

0 – 16,000

Range
of
Value(MV)

0 – 16,000

Manipulated

Output

Range of Manually Manipulated
Value

–

Differential

0 – 16,000

PLC Common

PID Control Loop

32 Loop

Control Operation

Normal/Reverse Operation

Type of Operation

Differentiates
values

1031

measured

PID Special Program :

Automatically created PID program by above dialog box uses two data tables for the loop control. As shown
in the above picture,
one table (‘A’) is manipulated for PID initialization and the other table (‘B’) is used for the actual PID
calculation. These two tables are summarized as followings. These device memory areas should not
be overlapped by the other program memory area.

PIDINIT Instruction (A)
Instruction Operation
This is used to check the items set up for PID operation, and to initialize the devices for PID
operation.
PIDINIT instruction is to be operated once initially in an initialization program. If an error occurs in
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

1032

CIMON-PLC

a set value or etc.
while initializing, the PIDCAL instruction in a main program is not operated. But, in case of several
loops, corresponding
loops only are not operated.
Instruction Form
PIDINIT " The start address among the devices where set values are stored "
Ex) If the set values of PID are stored from D0008 => PIDINIT D0008
Set Items
Offset

Item

Description

Range

Number of Loops

1 – 32

Number of Loops for a Scan

1 – 32

2(0)

Operation Expression

Normal(0)/Reverse(
0/1
1)

3(1)

Sampling Interval (Ts)

0.01 – 60.00s

1 – 6000

4(2)

Proportional Integer (Kp)

0.01 – 100.00

1 – 10000

5(3)

Integral Integer (Ki)

0.01 – 300.00s

0 – 30000

6(4)

Differential Integer (Kd)

0.00 – 300.00s

0 – 30000

7(5)

Filter Coefficient (α )

0.00 – 1.00

0 – 100

0 – 16000

8 (6)

Min. Manipulated
(MVLL)

Value

9 (7)

Max. Manipulated
(MVHL)

Value

10 (8)

Variation Rate Limit of
Manipulated Value (?MVL)

0 – 16000

11 (9)

MV Transfer

Not Use(0)/Use(1)

0/1

12 (10)

SV Steadiness

Not Use(0)/Use(1)

0/1

13 (11)

States of PIDINIT

Indicates Errors

*Table

Devices for PID operation

Not Available
Users

Remarks
Common for entire
loops

By loops

14 (12)
15 (13)
16 (14)
17 (15)
18 (16)

19 (17)
20 (18)
21 (19)

Statuses of PIDINIT

PLC Common

COD
E

Item

Description

No Error

Error in Operation Expression

In the case a value except 0 and
1 is selected

Error in Sampling Interval (Ts)

In the case a value is out of the
range(1~6000)

Error in Proportional Integer (Kp)

In the case a value is out of the
range(1~10000)

Error in Integral Integer (Ki)

In the case a value is out of the
range(0~30000)

Error in Differential Integer (Kd)

In the case a value is out of the
range(0~30000)

Error in Filter Coefficient (α )

In the case a value is out of the
range (0~100)

Error in Min. Manipulated Value (MVLL)

In the case a value is out of the
range(0~16000)

Error in Max. Manipulated Value (MVHL)

In the case a value is out of the
range(0~16000)

Error in Variation
Manipulated Value
(?MVL)

Rate

Limit

1033

Range

By Loops

In the case a value is out of the
range(0~16000)

Error in MV Transfer

In the case a value except 0 and
1 is selected

Error in SV Steadiness

In the case a value except 0 and
1 is selected

Error in Number of Loops

Error in Number of Loops for a Scan

In the case a value is out of the Common for all
range(1~32)
the
loops,
Though there is no error in the Stored in the
Loop
value, PID operation is omitted start
Status
device
due to small number.

1. Number of Loops
This is used to set up the number of loops to operate PID. To control an object, one PID
operation loop is used.
2. Number of Loops for a Scan
This is used to set up the number of loops for one scan in case of several loops at sampling
intervals.
3. Operation Expression
Normal(0) : This is the operation to output a manipulated value(MV) to get a current value to
a target value in case that the
current value(PV) is less than the target value(SV).
Reverse(1) : This is the operation to output a manipulated value(MV) to get a current value
near to a target value in case
the current value(PV) is greater than the target value(SV).
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

1034

CIMON-PLC

4. Sampling Interval(Ts)
This is used to set up the interval at which PID is operated.
5. Proportional Integer (Kp)
This, as the constant which is multiplied to a deviation(Sv – Pv ) in the proportional operation
" Mv = Kp * (Sv –Pv) " , is the constant for the proportional operation of PID control. In the
above expression, a current value
reaches a target value fast if a proportional integer(Kp) is big. But, if this value is too big, that
gives bad influence on a stable control.
6. Integral Integer (Ki)
This is the constant to add deviation to a manipulated value or subtract deviation from the
manipulated value according
to time continuously in the integral operation "Mv = P * E + P * 1/Ki *∫ Edt? in order to clear
the deviation, in case that the deviation(E)
between a target value(Sv) and a current value(Pv) occurs. As proportional operation is not
big influence on the variation of a manipulated
value, in case of small deviation, the effect to clear the deviation can be gotten by integral
operation. Integral time is the one for which the
manipulated value in integral operation is to be the value in proportional operation after
deviation occurs in the integral operation.
7. Differential Integer (Kd)
This is the constant used to operate a manipulated value in proportion to variation speed,
and to control the variation of the deviation in the differential operation "Mv = Kp * E + Kp *
dE/dt"? in order to clear the deviation, in case that the deviation occurs. Integral time is the
one for which the manipulated value in differential operation is to be the value in proportional
operation after deviation occurs in the differential operation.
8. Filter Coefficient (α )
This is used to set up the range of the filtering effect on the measured value(PV), which is
inputted from an A/D card. The closer it goes to 0, the less filtering effect is.
9. Min. Manipulated Value (MVLL)
This is used to set up the min. manipulated value from the PID operation in auto mode. In case
that a manipulated value(MV) is less than the min. manipulated value (MVLL), the value is
applied as the minimum.
10. Max. Manipulated Value (MVHL)
This is used to set up the max. manipulated value from the PID operation in auto mode. In case a
manipulated value(MV) is greater than the min. manipulated value(MVHL), the value is applied
as the maximum.
11. Variation Rate Limit of Manipulated Value (?MVL)
This is used to apply the set value for Variation Rate Limit of Manipulated Value if a variation
value, comparing the manipulated value(MV) for the previous scan to the manipulated
value(MV) for current scan, is greater than the set value for Variation Rate of Manipulated
Value.
12. MV Transfer
MV Transfer Use(1) : This is used to apply the manipulated value(MV) in auto mode to a
manually manipulated value(MVMAN) in case
that PID control is operated in auto mode and is converted to manual
mode.

PLC Common

1035

MV Transfer Use(0) : This is used to apply the manipulated value(MV) in manual mode to a
manually manipulated value(MVMAN).
13. SV Steadiness
To control the occurrence of over shoot due to a sharply changed target value(SV) and to
keep stable control, this is used to divide a variation value into 10 steps, and to increase or
decrease the value progressively at sampling intervals(Ts) when a target value is changed.
14. States of PIDINIT
This is used to indicate the status of error while PID operation is initialized.

PIDCAL Instruction(B)
Instruction Operation
This is used to execute PID operation.
Form of Instruction
PIDCAL " The start address among the devices where the result values of PID operation are
stored "
Ex) If the result values of PID operation are stored from D0100 => PIDCAL D0100
Result Items
Offset

Item

Description

Set Value (SV)

0 – 16000

Measured Value (PV)

0 – 16000

Manipulated Value (MV)

0 – 16000

Measured Value
Filtering (PVnf)

0 – 16000

Manually
Manipulated
0 – 16000
Value (MVMAN)

Manual/Auto

State Code

7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

after

Auto(0)
Manual(1)

Range

Remarks

By loops

1036

CIMON-PLC

17
18
19

1. Set Value (SV : 0 ~ 16,000)
This is used to input the target value controlled.
2. Measured Value (PV : 0 ~ 16,000)
This is the current value of the object controlled, which is read from an A/D card. The value in the
device where a measured
value is stored, is to be read from the A/D card using "FROM"? instruction and be updated
periodically.
3. Manipulated Value (MV : 0 ~ 16,000)
This is the result value of the PID operation, which is output to the object controlled through a D/A
card.
4.?Measured Value after Filtered (PVnf : 0 ~ 16,000)
The filter is used to protect the instantaneous deviation of the measured value(PV) caused by noise.
The measured value(PV) is filtered and stored in the device assigned to the measured value after
filtered(PVnf).
At this time, if the filter coefficient(α) is 0, the measured value(PV) is not filtered.
5.? Manually Manipulated Value (MVMAN)
The value set up as manually manipulated value (MVMAN) is outputted as manipulated value (MV).
6. Manual/Auto (0 / 1)
This is used to select whether the object controlled is controlled by using PID or the value set up in a
manually manipulated
value (MVMAN ) is output to the object controlled.
7.? Status Code
Each of set values is initialized for PID operation. To check that, PID initialization instruction(PID INIT)
is used. At this time,
if there is an error in the set value or during PID operation, the error is stored in the device assigned to
status code. Also,
in case of an error, PID operation instruction(PIDCAL) cannot be operated.

Example of PIDINIT Program and PIDCAL Program
Assumption is to store the set values in the devices from D0000 each and the result values in the
devices from D0020 each,
and is to operate a loop. And an AD card is fixed on the 7th slot and a DA card on the 8th.

PLC Common

1037

Setting LOOP

F0012
0

MOV

D0001

MOV

D0002

MOV

D0003

MOV

D0004

MOV

D0005

MOV

D0006

MOV

D0007

MOV

D0008

MOV

16000

D0009

MOV

16000

D0010

MOV

D0011

MOV

D0012

MOV

3200

D0100

MOV

3200

D0104

MOV

D0105

D0000

Number of Loops for a Scan
1
Operation Expression Normal(0)/Reverse(1)
2
Setting Sampling Interval
3
Inputting Proportional
Integer

Inputting Integral Integer
5
Inputting Differential Integer
6
Setting application of filter effect on measured value
7
Setting Min. Manipulated Value
8
Setting Max. Manipulated Value
9
Setting Variation Rate of Manipulated Value
10
Setting MV Transfer
11
Setting SV Steadiness
12
Inputting Target Value Controlled
13
Setting Manipulated Value in manual Mode
14
Selecting Auto or Manual
15
F0013

Assigning the device where the set value for PID
Operation is stored

PIDINIT
F0013

D0000

Measured Value from
A/D Card
FROM

17
M0000

D0101

PIDCAL

D0100

D0102

Executing PID Operation by set value

18
Outputting Result Value of PID Operation to Object Controlled
19

1038

5.10

CIMON-PLC

TROUBLE SHOOTING
Trouble Shooting :

· CPU Error Code Table

5.10.1 CPU Error Code Table
Error

Error

Code

additional info.

A point of error time

CPU

LED

Solution

(F70)

run

to clear

0xXX0 0x00XX

state

RUN

STOP

error.

0
0x010

RAM fault

Power On

STOP

off

blinking

Flash Memory fault

Flash Memory Read/

STOP

off

blinking

Power On

STOP

off

blinking

Power On

STOP

off

blinking

Power On

STOP

off

blinking

STOP

off

blinking

STOP

off

blinking

1
0x010
2

Write

0x010

User Program error

(RAM)

0x010

User Program error

(Flash Memory)

0x010

Parameter, PBT

checksum error

0x010

Flash Data error,

STOP->RUN , Power

Backup Data load fail

0x010

Program error in ROM

STOP->RUN , Power

pack, program loading

canceled
0x020

RTC fault

SCAN

RUN

blinking

User WDT error

At all time

STOP

off

blinking

0x020

Batter fault (low

At all time

RUN

blinking

voltage)

0x030

Base type is

Power On

STOP

off

blinking

mismatched with the
Slot

At all time

STOP

off

blinking

Slot

At all time

STOP

off

blinking

Power On

STOP

off

blinking

1
0x020
3

reservation
0x030

Module was unplugged Base

(or plugged)

0x030

Module type reservation Base

error

0x030

I/O capacity reservation

PLC Common

error

0x030

Error in initializing

special function module

0x030

Error in reading/writing

system memory of

Base

Slot

Power On

STOP

off

blinking

Base

Slot

At all time

RUN/

on/off

blinking

on/off

blinking

STOP

special function module
0x030

Error in reading/writing

user memory of special

Base

Slot

At all time

RUN/
STOP

function module
0x030

Communication fault in

Base

expansion system

0x030
A
0x030

NAK from expansion

Base

0x030

FROM/TO instruction

Base

error (no special

Slot

At all time

STOP

off

blinking

I/O fault in expansion

Extension

STOP

off

blinking

base.

communication
At all time

STOP

off

blinking

When called FROM/

RUN/

on/off

blinking

TO command.

STOP

Power On

STOP

off

blinking

At all time

RUN/

on/off

blinking

on/off

off

B
Slot

function module)
0x030

Two or more RM

modules are detected

0x030

DO(Digital output) error Base

(please refer to the

Slot

STOP

memory F0070)
0x030

Timeout in expansion

communication

0x031

Special function module

access error (user
memory) from
expansion

0x031

Fail to read/write

special function module
in expansion base

0x031

Error in initial mode

switch position of RM.
Please check the
Primary/Secondary
mode

0x031

Fail to read/write

special function module

Base

in expansion base
during performing
instruction for special

Slot

Power On

RUN/
STOP

1039

1040

CIMON-PLC

module
0x031

Module was unplugged Base

(or plugged) on a

Slot

At all time

STOP

off

blinking

Slot

Power On

STOP

off

blinking

At all time

STOP

off

STOP

off

blinking

expansion base
0x031

Unknown module is

detected
Designation of "Base IO

Base

address allocation" is
0x316

duplicate with last IO
address of preceding
base.
SP16EOR Expansion

0x317

cards are more than 4.
Up to four can be used.

0x040

Unknown or invalid

STOP->RUN , Power

instruction

0x040

Too large user program

Compile

STOP

off

blinking

size

0x040

Error in reading/writing

Step (WORD)

Compile

STOP

off

blinking

D memory

0x040

FOR/NEXT syntax error Step (WORD)

Compile

STOP

off

blinking

JMP/CALL syntax error Step (WORD)

Compile

STOP

off

blinking

0x040

JME/SBRT index

Step (WORD)

Compile

STOP

off

blinking

cannot exceed 127

0x040

Duplicated JME/SBRT

Step (WORD)

Compile

STOP

off

blinking

index

0x040

Invalid location of JME

Step (WORD)

Compile

STOP

off

blinking

instruction

0x040

Invalid location of JMP

Step (WORD)

Compile

STOP

off

blinking

instruction

0x040

SBRT nesting error

Compile

STOP

off

blinking

0x040

No RET instruction

Compile

STOP

off

blinking

found in subroutine
Compile

STOP

off

blinking

STOP

off

blinking

4
0x040
5

(SBRT)
0x040

FOR loop nesting limit

error

0x040

The No. of base/slot of

STOP->RUN , Power

a special module in a

special program is

PLC Common

wrong
0x050

Invalid instruction

Step (WORD)

when command called STOP

off

blinking

0x050

CALL level (nested

Step (WORD)

when command called STOP

off

blinking

CALL) error

0x050

@D out of range

Step (WORD)

when command called STOP

off

blinking

STOP -> RUN

STOP

off

blinking

Compile

STOP

off

blinking

3
0x050

There is no scan

program to execute

0x050

Accessed out of device

range

1041

Top Level Intro
This page is printed before a new
top-level chapter starts

Part

XP / CP Series(CM1)

XP / CP Series(CM1)
Contents :
· Brochure
· Serial Communication Module
· Ethernet Module
· A/D Converters
· D/A Converters
· RTD Module
· TC Module
· Weighing
· High-speed Counter
· Positioning

6.1

Brochure

Contents :
· Description Specifications
· Redundant System
· CPU
· Base
· Power
· Communication
· Digital I/O
· Analog I/O
· Temperature
· High-Speed Counter
· Load Cell
· Data Logger
· Positioning Module
· Expansion
· Accessories
· Training Kit

1043

1044

6.1.1

CIMON-PLC

Description Specifications
Item

Specification

Operating
Temperature

-10 ~ 65

Storage Temperature

-25 ~ 80

Operating Humidity

5 ~ 95%RH, Not condensed.

Storage Humidity

5 ~ 95%RH, Not condensed.

Vibration

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

Amplitude

Sweep

f< 57Hz

0.075mm

f < 150 Hz

9.8m/s2

10 times in each
direction (X,Y,Z)

{1G}

In case of continuous vibration

Shock

Frequency

Acceleration

Amplitude

Sweep

f < 57Hz

0.035mm

f < 150 Hz

4.9m/s2

10 times in each
direction (X,Y,Z)

- Max. Shock Acc.: 147 m/s2

{1G}

{15G}

- Time : 11 (3 times in X, Y, Z)
- Pulse Wave : Half sine wave pulse
Noise

Impulse noise

Communication modules : ±1500V
Except by communication Module : ± 2000

Environment
Altitude

6.1.2

Electrostatic
discharge

Voltage: 4 kV(Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magnetic field

27 ~ 500 MHz. 10 V/m

Fast Transient Bust
Noise

Item

Power Digital I/O
Modul (24V or more)
e

Digital I/O(Less than 24V)
Analog I/O Comm.
interface

Voltage

2KV

0.25KV

1KV

No corrosive gas and no dust.
2,000m or less

Redundant System
· Redundancy of CPU module, power modules, bases, and communication modules is available.
· CPU redundancy system is composed of separate bases for ideal redundancy structure.
· In case an error occurs in an active CPU module, a back-up module is automatically converted to active one
for continuous operation.
· Furnishes a test button to check and maintain a system easily.
· Enables the configuration of network redundancy.
· Enables backup within the control scan delay time of 50ms and high-speed active conversion.
· Enables to construct redundancy network with a high-ranking computer.
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

· Supports Power redundancy.

Contents :
· Basic Composition of Redundancy Base.
· System Configuration
· CM1-RPW (Redundant Power Monitoring Module)
· Bases for power redundancy

Basic Composition of Redundancy Base :

Base

Composition Unit

Applicable Module

CPU

Base

All base modules

Power

All power modules

CPU

CM1-XP1R

Redundancy Interface

CM1-RM01A

Redundancy Comm. Module

CM1-RC01A

Redundancy Cable

CM0-CBE

Communication Module

CM1-All comm. modules including CM1-EC01A

Expansion Cable

CM0-CBE

Expansion 1

CM1-EP03A or CM1-EP02A

Expansion 2 or More

CM1-EP02A or CM1-EP01A

Base / Power / I/O

Modules of all kinds

Expansion

System Configuration :
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

1045

1046

CIMON-PLC

CM1-RPW (Redundant Power Monitoring Module) :
· Power status is visualized by LEDs.
· Power status signals are provided by digital output (DC 24V, Transistor, Sink)

· LED status window
A Line
B Line
OK
5
+15
-15
PF

Status LEDs for Power "A"
Status LEDs for Power "B"
ON when all powers are good
ON when main power output is good
ON when analog power (+15V) is good
ON when analog power (-15V) is good
ON when there is no internal power fail signal

ON when service power (24V) is good

· Status Output (4 points, 0.5A, ...)
A_OK
B_OK
A_NG

ON when analog power (+15V) is good
ON when analog power (-15V) is good
ON when there is no internal power fail signal

B_NG

ON when service power (24V) is good

Base for power redundancy :
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1047

· Three types of bases are provided for power redundancy

6.1.3

Model

No. of slots

Size (mm)

CM1-BS05R

5 slots

314.7 * 108

CM1-BS08R

8 slots

411.7 * 108

CM1-BS10R

10 slots

475.7 * 108

CPU
Click

XP CPU

CP CPU

XP CPU :
· High speed processing(75 ns/step) by 32bit PLC processor
· Provides more than 400 instructions
· Abundant range of device limit provided : Maximum Input & Output of 8192 point,
Data limit of 32000 Word variable(M-domain, K-domain, L-domain)
· Compact sized high efficient unit.
· Supports floating point instructions

Item

Specification

1048

CIMON-PLC

CM1-XP1R / A

CM1-XP2A

CM1-XP3A

Program Control Type

Stored Program, Cyclic Operation, Time Driven Interrupt

Program Language

IL (Instruction List), LD (Ladder Diagram)

Data Processing

32 Bits

Instructions

55 basic instructions + 389 extended instructions

Processing Speed

75 nsec / step

Program Memory

128 Ksteps

64 Ksteps

I/O Capacity

8192

4096

Data Memory

1 MB

Timer

4096 (10mS, 100mS Selectable : 0.01 ~ 6553.5 Sec)

Counter

4096

Internal Flash Memory

2 MB

Expansion

Max. 16 Bases

Functions

Redundant (XP1R), Max. 128 Program, Floating Point, RTC, USB

Model

XP1R/A

8,192

XP2A

4,096

XP3A

2,048

M
16,000

16,000 16,000 2,048

2048

4,096

S
100
*100

D
32,000

Z
2,048

CP CPU :
· Self-dianosic system gives easy error manipulation
· Maximum of 16 base expansion
· A separate communication port mounted (CM1-CP4C:RS232C, CM1-CP4D:RS422/485)
· Supports variable types of programming
· Provides more than 300 instruction

Item

Specification
CM1-CP3 A / B / P / U

CM1-CP4 A / B / C / D / U

Program Control Type

Stored Program, Cyclic Operation, Time Driven Interrupt

Program Language

IL (Instruction List), LD (Ladder Diagram)

Data Processing

16 Bits

Instructions

55 basic instructions + 293 extended instructions

Processing Speed

200 nsec / step

Program Memory

32 Ksteps

16 Ksteps

XP / CP Series(CM1)

I/O Capacity

1024

384

Data Memory

512 Kbyte

256 Kbyte

Timer

1024 (10mS, 100mS Selectable : 0.01 ~ 6553.5 Sec)

Counter

1024

Internal Flash Memory

512 KB

256 KB

Expansion

Max. 16 Bases

Not Expansible

Optional Functions

RTC, Communication Port (RS232C or RS422/485), USB

Model

6.1.4

1049

8192

2,048

1,024

100
*100

10,000

2,048

CM1-CP3A/B/P

1,024

CM1-CP4A/B/C/
D

384

5,000

Base

Feature :
Innovative I/O expansion by high speed communication.
· Expansion distance : up to 100m (base to base)
· Max. 16 bases expansion

Various Types of Base :
Base types as 3, 4, 5, 8, 10 and 12 slots allow optimal system configuration.
Model

IO slots

Size (mm)

Weight(g)

CM1 - BS03A

3 slots

183 x 108

259

CM1 - BS04A

4 slots

216 x 108

304.5

CM1 - BS05A

5 slots

247 x 108

345.5

CM1 - BS08A

8 slots

344 x 108

478

CM1 - BS10A

10 slots

408 x 108

573

CM1 - BS12A

12 slots

473 x 108

683

Minimization of Mounting Space :
Even high-performance, the size is as minimized as it could be to save the mounting space.

1050

6.1.5

CIMON-PLC

Power

Feature :
· Internal Power disturbance detection circuitary prevents data damage or malfunction.
· Provides 24Vdc service power output (0.2A)
· Supports redundant power configuration (SPR)
o Power modules are monitored by CM1-RPW
o Three types of base are provided for power redundancy

Item

CM1 - SPA

CM1 - SPC

CM1 - SPR

CM1 - SPB

XP / CP Series(CM1)

Input

1051

Input Voltage

AC 100 - 240 V, 50/60Hz

DC 24V

Input Current

0.25A MAX for 220VAC

1.8A MAX for 24VDC

Inrush Current

30A or less

Efficiency

70 % or more (Reated Input / Load)

Power

20ms or less

Disturbance
Susceptibility
Output

Output Voltage /

+5V (3.5A)

Output Current

+24V (0.5A)

+15V (0.5A)

-15V (0.3A)

+24V (0.5A)
Operating Indicator

LED ON / OFF

Current Consumption :
Capacity of the power module must be checked using following table

Item

Model

Current
Consumption

Item

Model

Current
Consumption

CPU

CM1-CP**

130 mA

A/D Convert

CM1-AD04VI

50 mA

Redundancy
Module

CM1-RM01A

70 mA

CM1-AD08V

50 mA

CM1-RC01A

290 mA

CM1-AD08I

55 mA

Expansion

CM1-EP**

270 mA

CM1-DA04V

40 mA

DC Input

CM1-XD16A

60 mA

CM1-DA08V

50 mA

CM1-XD32C

100 mA

CM1-DA04I

40 mA

CM1-XA08A

30 mA

CM1-DA08I

50 mA

CM1-XA08B

30 mA

CM1-RD04A

50 mA

I/O Hybrid

CM1-XY16ER

180 mA

CM1-RD04B

50 mA

Relay

CM1-YR16A

250 mA

TC Measuring

CM1-TC04A

60 mA

Transistor

CM1-YT16A

110 mA

Commnunication

CM1-SC02A

190 mA

CM1-YT16B

110 mA

CM1-SC01A

170 mA

CM1-YT32A

130 mA

CM1-SC01B

170 mA

CM1-YT32B

130 mA

CM1-SC01DNP

170 mA

SSR Output

CM1-YS08A

120 mA

CM1-EC01A

290 mA

High-Speed

CM1-HS02B

290 mA

CM1-EC01DNP

290 mA

AC Input

D/A Convert

RTD Measuring

v Analog modules must be used with SPC or SP2B type power (AD, DA, RTD, TC modules)

1052

6.1.6

CIMON-PLC

Communication
· Simple and easy configuration with dialog box
· Provides user protocol programming function for communication with other devices
· Supports the connection through the internet (Ethernet)
· Data link between PLSs through RS232C, RS 485 Ethernet or internet
· Feature
o Ethernet : Support PLC Link function for high-speed data communication among CIMON-PLC modules
and enable to communicate with 64 stations as maximum at the same time.
o RS232C/422/485 : Enable to control a PLC at a long distance with modem communication function.
allows setting up diverse baud rate from 300bps to 76800bps
o Profibus : Supports various communication speed(9.6kbps ~ 12Mbps). 1Kbyte input data can be
transferred within 2ms.
o DeviceNET : Multi-drop and T-type branch is available and improves flexibility of network installation.
enables real time managing of lowest level input/output machines within network system. Able to connect
with various types of slave I/O.
o BACnet :Supports BACnet which is the standard of BAS. Supports the functionality of BACnet class 3
servers.

Ethernet :
· IComply with IEEE802.3 code
· Support protocols like SRP, ICMP, IC, TCP, UDP
· No limit on the number of the units mounted on a base.
· Support PLC Link function for high-speed data communication among
CIMON-PLC modules and enable to communicate with 64 stations as
maximum at the same time.

Item

CM1-EC01A

CM1-EC01DNP

CM1-EC04DNP

CM1-EC10A

CM1-EC10B

XP / CP Series(CM1)

Media Interface

10BASE-T

10BASE-T
100BASE-TX

Baudrate

10 Mbps

100 Mbps

Media

UTP/STP
Category5

Node Distance

100m (Node<->Hub)

Service Capacity

UDP 9 Services
TCP 9 Services

S
E
R
V
I
C
E

Loader

Yes

HMI Protocol

Yes

UTP/STP
Category5

UTP/STP
Category5
Auto MIDX

1053

100BASE-FX

SC,
Multi-Mode
(1310nm)
2km

Single Host

4Hosts

UDP 16 Services
TCP 16 Services

Yes

MODBUS/TCP
PLC Link
(Public Net)
PLC Link
(Private Net)

High-Speed Link
(Private Net)

DNP 3.0

Yes
Yes

RS232C / 422 / 485 :
· Read and write data by using an HMI protocol
· Provide communication function suitable for multi-drop configuration which is able to link
32 units as maximum
· Enable to control a PLC at a long distance with modem communication function
· Allows setting up diverse baud rate from 300bps to 76800bps
· Enable to use RS232C / RS422 (RS485)) communication port by setting p as a
independent channel or a linked channel.
· Support 1:1 / 1:N / N:M communication (In case of using RS422 channel)
· Support full-duplex (RS422) and half-duplex (RS485) communication form
· Enable to use RS485 channel as RS485 multi-drop communication channel through the
parameter setup
· Support DNP 3.0 protocol (CM1-SC01DNP)
· Equipped with self-diagnosis function and loop-back diagnosis function for diagnosing a
breakdown simply

Model

CM1-SC01A

CM1-SC01B

CM1-SC02A

CM1-SC01DNP

Interface

RS232C

RS422/485

RS232C/422/485

RS232C

1054

CIMON-PLC

Comm
Mode

Form
of
Data

HMIMode

CIMON HMI Protocol(Supports 1 : n Communication)

Loader Mode

CICON Communication

MODBUS

MODBUS RTU Mode(Slave and Master)

DNP

DNP 3.0 Protocol

User definition
Mode

Protocol Program

Data Bit

7 or 8 Bit

Stop Bit

1 or 2 Bit

Parity

Even / odd / None

Sync

Asynchronous

Baud Rate

300 / 600 / 1200 / 2400 / 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 76800

Modem Link

Long-distance communication by linking with a modem unit

Profibus DP module :
Profibus is manufacturer selective (vendor independence) and is used vastly for work Automization as an open
type fieldbus. The characteristics of open type are sated in Europe standard EN501070 and EN50204. Profibus
enables communication between different manufacturer’s devices without any special interface required.
Profibus is very efficient and highly on conditions where careful consideration is required to communicate in
complex and high speed environment. Even when more advanced technology comes in effect, Profibus will be
the industrial communication system who will be ready for the futrure.

· Suitable to communicate between Master Automation Machine and Scatter Slave I/O
Machine.
· Supports various communication speed (9.6kbps - 12Mbps)
· RS485 Communication method is used
· Field construction made easier due to use of Twisted Pair Cable
· Supports Maximum of 127 station (32 per segment)
· Network setup is done with Configuration tool
· 1Kbyte input data can be transferred within 2ms
· Data transition can be done with order or without order
· Individual or Multi master network function available

CM1-PD01A

CM1-PD01B

Interface

RS 485

Network

Profibus DP

XP / CP Series(CM1)

Media Access

Token Passing & Polling

Cable

Two wire Shielded twisted pair cable

Number of Max slave connection/network

127

Number of Max slave connection/segment

Max. I/O Data slave

244 Byte

Max. I/O Data

I/O 3,584 Byte each

1055

I/O 512 Byte each

Configuration Tool

Sycon-PB

Configuration Port

RS232C

Communication Parameter setting

High-speed link parameter communication setting

Transmission

9.6K(bps)

19.2K

93.75K

187.5K

500K

1,500K

12,000K

Distance

1200m

1000m

400m

200m

100m

DeviceNet module :
Open type communication standard DeviceNet enables compatibility among different manufactures' similar typed
components.

· Machine I/O is high speed network of open structure by choosing Global Standard
DeviceNet.
· Multi-drop and T-type branch is available and improves flexibility of network installation
· One network module can manage 63 slave modules and maximum 57334 points of I/O
· Enables real time managing of lowest level input/output machines within network system
· Functions such as seguence managing, processing managing and motion managing can
be used in many different fields of managing sites.
· Able to connect with various types of slave I/O
· Max 4 master modules are applicable with one CPU.

Model

CM1-DN01A

Transmission speed

Speed

Network Max. Length

Max length

Total distance

125K

500m(1640feet)

6m(20feet)

156m(512feet)

250

250m(820feet)

78m(256feet)

500K

100m(328feet)

39m(128feet)

Number of connect

64 stations

1056

CIMON-PLC

station
Cable

24V+ / 24V- / Shield / CAN H / CAN L(5lines)

Number of Max. Node

MAC ID (Nod Address) of Max. 64

Diagnosis function

ID duplication check, inferior station check. Detect operating status by LED

BACnet module :
Abbreviation of Building Automation and Control Networks and is open-type standard protocol for the building
auto-control.

· Supports BACnet which is the standard of building automated system.
· Supports the functionality of BACnet class 3 servers.
· chose Ethernet for communication Physical layer.

6.1.7

Model

CM1-BN01A

Protocol size

ANSI / ASHRAE 135-1995 (KS X 6909)

Protocol stack

UDP/IP

Physical Standard

ISO / IEC8802-3 (IEEE 802.3, CSMA/CD, 10BASE-T)

Data transfer speed

10 Mbps

Transfer method

Base Band

Max/ Segment length

100m

Max. I/O data slave

244 Byte

Digital I/O
· Internal circuitary is insulated by photo-coupler of relay.
· Furnish a LED Indicator.
· DC Inputs , AC Inputs, Combination I/O, Relay Output & SSR Output, Transistor Output

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1057

DC Inputs :

Model

CM1-XD16A

CM1-XD32C

CM1-XD64C

CM1-XD16B

CM1-XD32B

No. of Input Points

Rated Input Voltage

DC 24V

Rated Input Current

4mA

ON Voltage / ON Current

DC 19V / 4mA

DC 15V / 4mA

OFF Voltage / OFF Current

DC 11V / 1mA

DC 12V / 1mA

Response
Time

OFF ->> ON

5ms or less

ON ->> OFF

5ms or less

Common Type

8 Points

Operation Indication

LED is turned on when there is input signal

Insulation Type

Photo Coupler

Input Type

SINK / SOURCE

AC Inputs :

1058

CIMON-PLC

Model

CM1 – XA08A

CM1 – XA08B

No. of Input Points

8 Points

Rated Input Voltage

AC 200 ~ 240V

AC 90 ~ 130V

Rated Input Current

9mA

5mA

ON Voltage / ON Current

AC 160V

AC 80V

OFF Voltage / OFF Current

AC 60V

AC30V

Response Time

OFF ->> ON

5ms or less

ON ->> OFF

5ms or less

Common Type

8 Points

Operation Indication

LED is turned on when there is input signal

Insulation Type

Photo Coupler

Combination I/O :

XP / CP Series(CM1)

Model

1059

Combination I/O
CM1 - XY16DR

No. of I/O Points

8 points

SINK / SRC

Relay

DC 24V

DC 12 / 24V

AC 220V

Rated I/O Current

4 mA

On Voltage / On Current

DC 19V / 4mA

Off Voltage / Off Current

DC 11V / 1mA

Response
Time

Off -> On

5 ms or less

On -> Off

5 ms or less

Rated I/O Voltage

Common Type

8 Points

Operation Indication

LED is turned on in case input is turned on.

Insulation Type

Photo Coupler

Realy

Relay Output & SSR Output :

Relay Output

SSR Output

CM1-YR16A

CM1-YR32A

CM1-YS08A

No. of Output Points (Point)

16 Points

32 Points

8 Points

Rated Load Voltage

DC 12/24V

AC100 ~ 240V

AC 220V

50 /60 Hz

1 Point

1Com

Rated Load
Current

1060

CIMON-PLC

Response Time

OFF ->> ON

10ms or less

1ms or less

ON ->> OFF

5ms or less

0.5 cycle + 1ms or less

Common Type

8 Points

Operation Indication

LED is turned ON when there is output signal

Insulation Type

Relay

Photo Coupler

Transistor Outputs :

6.1.8

CM-YT16A

CM1-YT16B

CM1-YT32A

CM1-YT32B

CM-YT64A

No. of Output Points

16/SINK

16/SRC

32/SINK

32/SRC

64/SINK

Rated Load Voltage

DC 12 ~ 24V

Rated Load
Current

1Point

0.5A

0.2A

0.1A

1Com

Response
Time

OFF ->> ON

1ms or less

ON ->> OFF

1ms or less
16 Points

32 Points

64 Points

Common Type

16 Points

Operation Indication

LED is turned on when there is output signal

Insulation Type

Photo Coupler

Analog I/O
High resolution : 1 / 16,000 (14 bits)
Simple and easy configuration with dialog box.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

Module Name

Type

1061

Specification

CM1 - AD04VI

4 Ch : Voltage / Current Input (Selectable) : 14 bits
AI

CM1 - AD08V

8 Ch : Voltage Input : 14 bits

CM1 - AD08I

8 Ch : Current Input : 14 bits

CM1 - DA04V

4 Ch : Voltage Output : 14 bits : -10V ~ +10V

CM1 - DA08V

8 Ch : Voltage Output : 14 bits : -10V ~ +10V

CM1 - DA04I

CM1 - DA08I

4 Ch : Current Output : 14 bits : 4 ~ 20mA
8 Ch : Current Output : 14 bits : 4 ~ 20mA

CM1 - DA04VA

4 Ch : Voltage Output : 14 bits : 0V ~ +10V

CM1 - DA08VA

8 Ch : Voltage Output : 14 bits : 0V ~ +10V

A / D converters :
· 8/4 channels per module
· Converts ratings variously by setting offset and gain value
· Selectable digital converted range from -8000 or 8000 or 0 to 16000 per channel
· Realizing lower current consumption per channel
· Must be used with SPC or SP2B power module

Model

CM1-AD04VI

CM1-AD08V

CM1-AD16V

CM1-AD08I

CM1-AD16I

No. of Input Channel

Analog
Input

Voltage

0 ~ +5V
1 ~ +5V
0 ~ +10V
-10V ~ +10V

Current

0 ~ 20mA
4 ~ 20mA

Digital Output
Max. Resolution

-192~16192, -8000~8000, 0~16000, -8000~8000 (14bit)
Input

Range of Input

Max. Resolution

Digital Output

1062

CIMON-PLC

Voltage

Current

0 ~ +5V

0.3125mV

1 ~ +5V

0.25mV

0 ~ +10V

0.625mV

-10V ~ +10V

1.25mV

0 ~ 20mA

1.25mA

4 ~ 20mA

1mA

Precision

0.3%(Full Scale)

Max. Conversion
Rate

5mS/1ch

Absolute
Max. Input

Voltage

12V

Current

25mA

Insulation Type

12V

0 ~ 16000
-8000 ~ 8000

25mA
25mA

Photo Coupler

D / A converters :
· 8/4 channels per module
· Selectable digital converted range from -8000 or 8000 or 0 to 16000 per channel
· Realizing lower current consumption per channel
· Various / Flexible output modules by output range
· Must be used with SPC or SP2B power module

Model

DA04V

No. of
4
Input Ch.

DA08V

DA16V

DA04I

DA08I

DA16I

Analog
Output

-10V ~ +10V

Digital

-192 ~ 16191(-8192~8191)

4 ~ 20mA

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1063

Input
Max.
Resoluti
on

Output

Digital Input

Range ofAnalog Output

Max. Resolutions

Voltage

0 ~ 16000 (-8000~8000)

-10V ~ +10V

1.25mV

0 ~ 16000 (-8000~8000)

0 ~ 10V

0.625mV

0 ~ 16000 (-8000~8000)

4 ~ 20mA

1.0mA

Current
Precision

6.1.9

0.1%(Full Scale)

Conversi
on Rate

10ms

16ms

28ms

Absolute
Max.
Output

Voltage : 15V / Current : +24mA

Insulatio
n Type

Photo Coupler

10ms

16ms

28ms

Temperature
· High resolution : 1 / 16,000 (14 bits)
· Simple and easy configuration with dialog box.
· RTD, TC, NTC module

RD**A/B module :
· Compatible with 3-wired Pt. 100/DIN and JIS standard type
· Self-diagnostic function detecting sensor's breakdown per channel
· High accuracy (less than 0.1% of full scale)
· Must be used with SPC or SP2B power module

RTD Type

RD04A / RD08A

Pt100 (KS C1640-1989, DIN 43760-1980)
JPt100 (KS C1603-1991, JIS C1604-1981)

1064

CIMON-PLC

RD04B / RD08B

Pt1000 (DIN EN 60751)
Ni1000 (DIN 43760)

Range of Input

RD04A / RD08A

Pt100 : -200.0 to 600oC (18.48 to 313.59W)
JPt100 : -200.0oC to 600oC (17.14 to 317.28W)

Temperatures
RD04B / RD08B

Pt1000 : -200.0oC to 600oC (184.8 to 3135.9W)
Ni1000 : -50.0oC to 160oC (695.2 to 1986.3W)

Digital Output

Digitally Converted Value : 0 ~ 16,000(-8000~8000)
Detected Temperature Value : -2000~6000(Value of the first decimal Place X 10)

Breakdown Dtection

3 Wires by Channels

Precision

0.1 %(Full Scale)

Max. Conversion Rate

50ms / Channel

No. of Input Channels

RD04A, B

4 Channel

RD08A, B

8 Channel

Insulation Type

Photo Coupler (No Insulation between channels)

Connection Terminal

18 Points Terminal

Current
Consumption
(mA)

+5V

+15V

-15V

TC04A module :
· Direct input from temperature sensor's eliminates the external transducer
· Thermocouple sensors compatible with K-J-E-B-R-S Type
· Self-diagnostic function detecting sensor's breakdown per channel
· Cold junction compensation is also equipped (automatic)
· Acceptable for worldwide standard as ANSI, DIN, BS, JIS and KS
· Must be used with SPC or SP2B power module

Model

CM1-TC04A

Available TC

K, J, E, T, B, R, S

Digital Ouput

Digitally Converted value : 0 ~ 16000(-8000~8000),
Converted Temperature Value : (Range of Measured Temperature X 10)

XP / CP Series(CM1)

Range of Input
Temperatures

1065

Type of TC

Standard

Range of Measured
Temperatures( )

Range of Measured Voltage

KS
ANSI
DIN
BS
JIS

-200.0 ~ 1200.0

-5891 ~ 48828

-200.0 ~ 800.0

-7890 ~ 45498

-200.0 ~ 600.0

-8824 ~ 45085

-200.0 ~ 400.0

-5602 ~ 20869

400.0 ~ 1800.0

786 ~ 13585

0.0 ~ 1750.0

0 ~ 21006

0.0 ~ 1750.0

0 ~ 18612

J
E

Compensation Type

Automatic Compensation

Breakdown Detection

Detection by Channels

Precision

[(Full Scale)x0.3%+1oC(error for base contact compensation)]

Max. Conversion Rate

50ms / Chennel

No. of Input Ch

4 Channel / Module

Connection Terminal

18 Points Terminal

Current
Consumption
(mA)

+5V

+15V

-15V

Thermistor module :
· Max. 8 channel NTC thermistor with one module
· Possible to measure NTC (Negative Temperature Coefficient) type Thermistor
· Temperature data accuracy of one decimal place.
· For each channel, this unit could detect any thermistor's single line input and assuming
over setting of input.
· In the use of the Thermistor temperature-resistance table, it is able to input desired
maximum, medium and minimum temperature(C) point and Resistance(Q) to measure.

Model

CM1-TH08A

Thermistor

NTC TYPE

Range of Thermistor Input Resistance

0 ~ 1M?

Resolution of Thermistor Input
Resistance

0? ~ 40k? : 1?
40k? ~ 400k? : 10?
400k? ~ 1M? : 30?

1066

CIMON-PLC

Convert
range

Temperature Convert
value

oC, oF

(0.1oC Resolution)

Digital value

0 ~ 16000, -8000 ~ 8000

Resistance-Temperature Calculation

Steinhart-Hart thermistor polynomial

Precision

0.3%(Full Scale)

Max. Conversion Rate

1Sec(8ch)

Temperature Input Point

8 Points

Insulation method

Photo Coupler

Connection Terminal

18 Points

6.1.10 High-Speed Counter

Operation Outline :

Features of High-Speed Counter :

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1067

1) Pulses in a wide range can be counted.( -2147483648 ~ 2147483647 )
A counted value is stored in buffer memory in signed 32-bit binary value.
2) Pulse input type can be selected.
1-p input 1-m, 1-p input 2-m, CW/CCW, 2-p input 1-m, 2-p input 2-m, 2-p input 4-m
3) Counting form can be selected.
One between the following forms can be selected.
· Linear counting : Input pulses can be counted from -2147483648 to 2147483647. In case
that a value is out of the range, overflow occurs.
· Ring counting : Input pulses are counted repeatedly between the maximum value and the
minimum value of ring counting.

4) Coincidence output is available.
Comparing a current value with a set coincidence comparison value, output can be on/off.
5) Four counting functions can be selected.
· Latch counting : A currently counted value is stored in buffer memory (04H, 05H, 24H and 25H) according
to the signal to start to count (Y06 and Y0E).
· Sampling counting : The value counted for the time set by the signals to start to count (Y06, Y0E) is stored
in buffer memory (06H, 07H, 26H and27H). If a set time is passed, the value counted before signals (Y06,
Y0E) are inputted will be kept.
· Periodic pulse counting : The values (08H, 09H, 28H and 29H) counted before the time set up by signals
(Y06, Y0E) and currently counted values (0AH, 0BH, 2AH and 2BH) are stored in buffer memory.
· Disabling to count : If signals (Y06, Y0E) or the signals to enable to count (Y04, Y0C) are off, pulses will
not be counted. The counted values are accumulated in buffer memory for storing current count (00H, 01H).
6) Presetting and counting function can be processed by outer control signals.

CM1-HS02B

CM1-HS02D

No. of I/O points

16 Points

No. of Channels

2 Channels

Counting
Input Signal

Phase

1-Phase Input/ 2-Phase Input

Signal Level(A, B)

5/12/24 V DC (2~5mA)

Counting

Counting Rate

200 kPPS

Counting Range

Signed 32-bit binary value (-2147483648~2147483647)

Form

Up/Down Presetting Counting + Ring Counting

RS-422 Line Drive

1068

CIMON-PLC

Coincidence
Output

Range of Comparison

Signed 32-bit binary values

Result of Comparison

Set Value < Counted Value
Set Value = Counted Value
Set Value > Counted Value

Outer Input

Presetting

5/12/24 V DC 2~5mA

Starting Function
Outer Output

Coincidence Output

Transistor(Sink Type) Output Operating Voltage 12~24V

6.1.11 Load Cell
WG02A and WG04A modules provide the functionality for weighing system. These modules can be connected
with various kinds of loadcell units. WG04A can be connected with up to 4 independent loadcell signals at the
same time.

Operation Outline :

Load Cell modules have following characteristics :
· Max. 4 Channels of independent signal inputs. (WG04A)
· Supplies 5Vdc power to the connected loadcells for generating input signals.
· 24 bits A/D converter

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1069

· Provides 1 / 6,000,000 effective resolution.
· Provides 6 internal ready to use batch programs.
Item

Specifications
WG02A

WG04A

Channel

2 Channels

4 Channels

Supported L/C Type

Strain Gage

Insulation

Photo-Coupler

External Power Supply

DC24V, 2 Watts

L/C Excitation Voltage

5Vdc (Up to 4 x 350 Ohm loadcells / Channel)

Full Scale Input Signal

3.6mV / V (18mV)

A/D Converter Resolution

24 bits (1 / 1,600,000,000)

A/D Program Resolution

1 / 6,000,000

A/D Conversion Speed

20 Times / Sec.

10 Times / Sec.

6.1.12 Data Logger
· Equipped with large capacity and non-combustible log memory (32MB or
64MB)
· Standalone real time data sampling & preserving
· Upon restoration of communication system, upper level system(HMI) data can
be obtained
· Maximum of 32 word data can be sampled at the same time with maximum of
10mSec interval.
· Built-in HMI protocol : no necessary of optional communication card (RS232C,
Support Modem) Self-diagnostic function (communication error, memory error,
capacity check, etc)
· Trigger Logging by Sequence program
· Provide event logging (COS, VOC)

CM1-LG32A
Communication
Mode

HMI Mode

CIMON HMI Protocol

Terminal Mode

Text transmission

Data Mode

Data bit

7/8

Stop bit

1/2

Parity

Even / Odd / None

Synchronous

Asynchronous

CM1-LG64A

1070

CIMON-PLC

Transmission Speed

300 / 600 / 1200 / 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400

Communication method

RS232C

Modem

Cable modem or dial up modem

Log memory capacity

32 Mbytes

Sampling interval

10mSec ~ 327,670mSec

Max. Logging data size

32 Words

Log data

Block sampling or Event Data

Logging method

Periodic, Trigger, Event (COS / VOC)

Built in function

· Memory condition check

64Mbytes

· Communication error check
· Memory capacity check

6.1.13 Positioning Module
CM1-PSnnX module is a pulse output modules for CP and XP series of CIMON PLCs. PS02A type supports
differential driver system pulse output. PSnnX is capable of driving not only servo motor but also stepping motor

· Enable to set max. 600 positioning data include positioning address and operating method.
· Possible to operate position control, speed control, position/speed switch control, or
speed/position switch control by control method designed according to positioning data.
· Positioning control of the each axis : speed control, arc/linear interpolation,
separate/synchronous operation
· Origin point return method
- Search origin point after approximate origin point OFF
- Search origin point after reducing speed when approximate origin point ON
- Search origin point by origin point and upper/lower limit switch
· Enable to set immovable origin point

CM1-PS202A
Number of Axis

Interpolation

2axis linear / arc interpolation

Control method

Position, locus, speed, speed/position, position/speed control

Setting Unit

Pulse, mm, inch, degree

Positioning Data

600 / axis

Positioning Method

Absolute or relative method

Backup

Flash Rom Backup (parameter, positioning data, block data, condition
data

XP / CP Series(CM1)

Position address
method

1071

Position control absolute/relative coordinate method
Position/Speed switching control-relative coordinate method
Speed/Position switching control-absolute/relative coordinate method
Locus control-absolute/relative coordinates method

Position address
range

· Absolute coordinates method
Ø -2147478364.8 ~ 214748364.7
Ø -21474.83648 ~ 21474.83647 inch
Ø 0 ~ 359.9999 degree
Ø -2147483648 ~ 2147483647 pulse
· Relative coordinate method
Ø -214748364.8 ~ 214748364.7
Ø -21474.83648 ~ 21474.83647 inch
Ø -21474.83648 ~ 21474.83647 degree
Ø -2147483648 ~ 2147483647 pulse

Position
address

· Speed/Position Switching control(relative coordinate method),
Position/seed switching control
Ø 0 ~ 214748364.7
Ø 0 ~ 21474.83647 inch
Ø 0 ~ 21474.83647 degree
Ø 0 ~ 2147483647 pulse
· Speed/Position Switching control (Absolute coordinate method)
Ø 0 ~ 359.9999 degree
Positioning speed
range

0.1 ~ 20,000,000.00 (mm/min)
0.001 ~ 2,000,000.000 (inch / min)
0.001 ~ 2,000,000.000 (degree/min)
1 ~ 1,000,000 (pulse/sec)

Acceleration/Decelerat Trapezoidal / S-curve
ion pattern
Acceleration/Decelerat 125 ~ 1*106 PPS/sec
ion time
External disconnection method

40 Pin Connector

Connector of external

40 Pin Male (Fujitsu)

Max. Output pulse

1 MPPS (Line Driver Pulse Output)

Max. Distance

10m / B Type : 2m

Number of Flash Rom saving

25 times after power on

1072

CIMON-PLC

6.1.14 Expansion
Module Name

Type

Specification

CM1 - EP01A

Expansion

1 expansion port, no expansion hub

CM1 - EP02A

2 expansion ports, expansion hub embedded

CM1 - EP03A

3 expansion ports, for redundant CPU configuration

Series CP allows expanding a base up to 16 :

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.1.15 Accessories
· Dummy Module for empty slot

· Flash memory pack

Model Name

CM0-DM

Model Name

CM1-FM512

Note

Dummy

Note

Flash memory

1073

1074

CIMON-PLC

· Loader Cable

· Expansion Cable for XP/CP Series

Model Name

CM0-CBL15/30

Model Name

CM0-CBE05

Note

1.5m/3.0m

Note

0.5m

· Expansion Cable for BP Series

· CPU battery for data backup

Model Name

CM2-CBE05

Model Name

CM0-BAT

Note

5cm

Note

Battery

· Base Slot Cover
Model Name

CM2-CBE05

Note

5cm

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1075

6.1.16 Training KIT
· To Study basic knowledge and applications on PLC
· To improve applicable capability of trainees at site
· To master the capability to use PLC application instructions
· To master the capability to control analog signals
· To understand how to configure RS232C/422/485
· To master the capability to configure and operate a site monitoring & operation
system

Features of Training Kit :
· Compose of high-performance module type PLC components.
· Enables to practice the advanced functions of various types like on-line editing, forced input/output,
initialization program by using an exclusive loader program (CICON)
· Enable to perform PLC training without connection with other devices.
· Equipped with toggle switches, push buttons and so on to use output lamps and an display for a simulation
load.
· Equipped with an analog input signal generator and a level meter to make sure analog output signals.
· Enable to practice PID control by using analog converters.
· Equipped with a photo sensor and an encoder to detect easily the number of revolutions by using.
· Enables computer link in series communication type through computer exclusive terminal of CPU
· Enables remote control and monitoring in connection with HMI S/W
· Composed of a system with very suitable input/output points in module type to improve the capability of
programming for site situation.
· Composed of attachable-detachable type to switch input, output and optional modules freely, if necessary.
· Enables training from basic to application

Accessories :
· Power Cable (Rated 7A 250V)
· CM0-CBL15 . 1.5m Loader Cable
· Users Manual
· RS-232C cable
· CD including CICON, application program samples & CIMON HMI S/W Demo

1076

CIMON-PLC

PLC Module Composition :

Module Name

Type

Specification

CM1-CP4A

CPU

16K step program memory capacity

CM1-SPC

Power

Voltage output 5 / 24 / +15 / -15 V

CM1-BS08A

Base

8-slot Base

CM1-XD32C

Digital input

32 point input module

CM1-YT32B
CM1-YR16A

32 point source output module
16 point relay output module

CM1-AD08V

Analog input

14 bit 8ch voltage Analog Input

CM1-DA04V

Analog output

14 bit 4ch voltage Analog Output

CM1-SC02A
CM1-EC01A
CM1-HS02A

6.2

Digital output

Communication
HSC

RS232C / 422 / 485
10 Mbps Ethernet
200 kpps 2 Ch high speed Counter

Serial Communication Module
This manual is the technical details about RS232C/422(Computer Network) module among the network modules
for CIMON-PLC system.
In this module, the function of the link with diverse communication devices, such as other makers’PLC and PC,
with the protocols of different types and the function of modem communication to control a PLC at a long
distance are furnished. The features are as follows.

Features :
· As other makers’protocols are written to use RS-232 channel and RS-422(RS-485) channel each,
independent operation is available by protocols.
· It is available to use an exclusive protocol to read/write data.
· The function of the exclusive communication suitable for multi-drop configuration of 32 units access as
maximum is offered.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1077

· As modem communication function is built in, a PLC at a long distance can be controlled through
exclusive communication.
· Baud rate can be set up in the range from 300bps to 38400bps variously.
· It is available to set up RS232C / RS422(RS485) communication port as independent channel or linked
channel.
· 1:1 / 1:N / N:M communication (In case RS422 channel is used) are supported.
· Full – Duplex(RS422) and Half-Duplex(RS485) communication method are supported.
· RS485 multi-drop communication system can be configured, using RS485 channel.

See :
· Specifications

· Communication Services

· Operation Setup

· Installing and Testing

· Internal I/O

· Trouble Shooting

· Shared Memory

· Appendix

· Network Example

6.2.1

Specifications
RS 232C/422/485 Specifications :

· SC02A Dimensions
· SC01A Dimensions
· SC01B Dimensions
· General Specifications
· Module Specifications
· Cable Specifications
· Termination Register

1078

6.2.1.1

CIMON-PLC

General Specifications
The general specifications for CIMON PLC communication modules are as follows.

Item

Specification

Operating
Temperature

-10 ~ 65oC

Storage Temperature

-25 ~ 80oC

Operating Humidity

5 ~ 95%RH, Not condensed.

Storage Humidity

5 ~ 95%RH, Not condensed.

Vibration

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

Amplitude

Sweep

f< 57Hz

0.075mm

f < 150 Hz

9.8m/s2

10 times in each
direction (X,Y,Z)

{1G}

In case of continuous vibration

Shock

Frequency

Acceleration

Amplitude

Sweep

f < 57Hz

0.035mm

f < 150 Hz

4.9m/s2

10 times in each
direction (X,Y,Z)

- Max. Shock Acc.: 147 m/s2

{1G}

{15G}

- Time : 11 (3 times in X, Y, Z)
- Pulse Wave : Half sine wave pulse
Noise

6.2.1.2

Square wave impulse
noise

±1500V

Electrostatic
discharge

Voltage: 4 kV(Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magnetic field

27 ~ 500 MHz. 10 V/m

Fast Transient Bust
Noise

Item

Power Digital I/O
Modul (24V or more)
e

Digital I/O(Less than 24V)
Analog I/O Comm.
interface

Voltage

2KV

0.25KV

Environment

No corrosive gas and no dust.

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

Less than 2

Cooling

Natural Air cooling

1KV

Module Specifications

Model
Interface
Null Modem

CM-SC02A

CM1-SC01A

CM1-SC01B

RS232C / 422 / 485

RS232C

RS422 / 485

Direct communication between a PC and RS232C/RS422 port
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

Communication
Method

Operation Mode

Data Type

6.2.1.3

Leased-Line Modem

Communication using a leased-line modem

Dial-up Modem

Remote communication using a dial-up modem

User Protocol

Communication using user protocol

HMI Protocol

Communication using exclusive protocol

MODBUS Protocol

Communication using Modicon protocol

Graphic Loader Mode

Controls a PLC, using link function in the CICON

Data Bit

7 or 8 bits

Stop Bit

1 or 2 bits

Parity

Even / Odd / None

1079

Synchronous Type

Asynchronous

Baud Rate

300bps / 600 / 1200 / 2400 / 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400bps

Modem Link Function

Long-distance communication linking modem

Cable Specifications
In case of communication, especially, communication distance and baud rate is to be considered among items.
In case of the communication using RS-232C port and RS-422/RS-485 port provided from a PLC, to minimize
the noise received from outside, a twisted-fair cable for RS-232 is to be used.

6.2.1.4

Termination Register
In case of communication through RS-422 channel, a termination register is to be connected to outside. As
termination register protects the signal from the distortion by reflected wave in case of a long-distance
communication, the register (1/2W) with the same value as the feature impedance of a cable is to be connected
to the termination of a network. In case of recommended cable, connect the termination register of 120? to both
ends of the line.

6.2.1.5

SC02A Dimensions
Unit : mm

1080

6.2.1.6

CIMON-PLC

Name

Description

LED Indicator

Indicates operation status.

RS232C Connector

RS232C connector to connect with an
outer device

RS422/485 Connector

RS422/485 connector to connect with
an outer device

SC01A Dimensions
Unit : mm

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.2.1.7

SC01B Dimensions
Unit : mm

6.2.2

Operation Setup
Operation Setup :

· Operation Mode Setup
· Series Interface Method

6.2.2.1

Operation Mode Setup
Independent mode and linked mode are used as communication operation mode.
Default is independent mode.

Independent Mode of Channel Operation

1081

1082

CIMON-PLC

As RS-232C channel and RS-422 channel are operated independently each other, sending and receiving
are available as individual sending standard at one time. By channels, the sending standard can be set up,
and the operation can be started and stopped.

Linked Mode of Channel Operation
The data received through RS-232C channel and RS-422 channel are sent through RS-232C channel.
In the linked mode, RS-232C channel is automatically set up as main channel and the station number is the
same as the main channel. The data received through RS-232C channel is both received in RS232C/422
module and sent through RS-422 channel. The data received through RS-422 channel is not received in
RS232C/422 module but is automatically sent through RS-232C channel.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.2.2.2

1083

Series Interface Method
RS-232C channel is communicated with other device with a 9-pin connector.
It is directly communicated with a long-distance device, using a modem, as well as with other device.

Pin Function

Nam
e

Direction of
Signal

Description

Carrier Detect

Inside to
outside

Signal wire that DCE informs DTE about the detection of carrier

Received Data

RXD

Outside to
inside

Signal wire receiving data

Transmitted
Data

TXD

Inside to
outside

Signal wire sending data

Data Terminal

DTR

Inside to

Signal wire that DTE informs DCE about the state that DTE is

1084

CIMON-PLC

Ready

outside

able to send and receive

Both
directions

Ground wire for signal

Data Set Ready DSR

Outside to
inside

Signal wire that DCE informs DTE about the state that DCE is
able to send and to receive

Request To
Send

RTS

Inside to
outside

DTE is ready and requests DCE to send data.

Clear To Send

CTS

Outside to
inside

Signal wire that DCE inform DTE about the state that DCE is
able to send

Ring

Outside to
inside

Signal wire that DCE inform DTE of receiving RING

Signal Ground

Connection with a modem
A long-distance communication is available.
modem interface is described.

PLC(RS-232C)
Pin

Signal Direction

Modem

Name

RXD

TXD

DTR

DSR

RTS

CTS

Connection with a null modem
· PLC and Computer/Communication device: There are 3-wire type and 7-wire type.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1085

· In case that a PC is connected with a RS-232C connector, RXD, TXD and SG is to be connected in
3-wire type.

RS-422 Interface
A 6-pin connector is used for RS-422 interface. The functions and names of the pin and the flow of data are
described as follows.

Name
PLC

Direction of Signal
Device

Function

SDA

Sends data. (+)

SDB

Sends data. (-)

RDA

Receives data. (+)

RDB

Receives data. (-)

S.G

Ground wire of signal

1086

CIMON-PLC

F.G

Ground wire of frame

RS-422 channel can be connected with other device for RS-422 and RS-485 (Multi-drop).

Computer Link
PLC

Direction of Signal
Device

Outside Communication Device

Name

SDA

RDA

SDB

RDB

RDA

SDA

RDB

SDB

S.G

F.G

The following is an example to connect RS-485 channel with an outside device. At this time, as a sending
wire shares with a receiving one (Half Duplex), the channel mode is to be set up as RS-485.

Computer Link

6.2.3

PLC

Direction of Signal
Device

Outside Device

Name

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

S.G

F.G

Internal I/O
Device

Description For Signal

Device

Description For Signal

X0000

Error in module

Y0000

Clear error

X0001

Initialized (Card Ready)

Y0001

X0002

Y0002

X0003

Y0003

X0004

Rx Data Existing(Ch1)

Y0004

Clear Rx Buffer (Ch1)

XP / CP Series(CM1)

X0005

Tx Buffer Empty(Ch1)

Y0005

Clear Tx Buffer (Ch1)

X0006

Rx Data Existing(Ch2)

Y0006

Clear Rx Buffer (Ch2)

X0007

Tx Buffer Empty(Ch2)

Y0007

Clear Tx Buffer (Ch2)

X0008

Y0008

X0009

Y0009

X000A

Modem Initialized

Y000A

Modem Initialization Request

X000B

Dialing

Y000B

Dialing Request(Line Connection)

X000C

Detect DCD Signal

Y000C

Connection Release Request

X000D

Detect DSR Signal

Y000D

X000E
X000F

6.2.4

1087

Y000E
Parameter Applied

Y000F

Parameter Setup Request

Shared Memory
Offset

Description

R/W

Remarks

Status Code (0=Normal, Others=Error)

Mode

CH1 Port Parameter

CH2 Port Parameter

Number of Retrying Dialing

1–5

Interval of Retrying Dialing

20 – 300 secs

Modem Initialization/Dialing Timeout

1 – 60 secs

Number of Retrying Modem Initialization

1 – 5 times

Station Number

0 – 31(Ch1=High,Ch2=Low)

SND Command Timeout

0 – 3000 sec

RCV Command Timeout

0 – 3000 sec

11 ~31

Modem Initialization Command

…
37

PLC Link Station Number

Not Link Join(0xFF)

PLC Link Connection

Stn0 ~ Stn15

PLC Link Connection

Stn16 ~ Stn31

Dial Number (H)

R/W

…
49

Dial Number (L)

Response Delay Time(CH1)

R/W

Delay Time(0~200ms)

Response Delay Time(CH2)

R/W

Delay Time(0~200ms)

…
62

1088

CIMON-PLC

OS Version

64 - 255

User Message

R/W

216 Word (432 Bytes)

The user data memory device is divided into the contents set up to an optional card and the memory indicating
error code. And set contents are stored in buffer memory and finally are stored in Eprom by I/O Point Map.

See :
· Mode

6.2.4.1

Mode

Code

RS232C

0x00--

Independent (User)

0x01--

Independent (HMI Protocol)

0x02--

Independent (MODBUS Protocol)

0x03--

Independent (PLC LINK Protocol)

0x04--

Independent (Graphic Loader I/F)

RS422/485

0x--00

Independent (User)

0x--01

Independent (HMI Protocol)

0x--02

6.2.4.2

· Parameter

Independent (MODBUS Protocol)

0x--03

Independent (PLC LINK Protocol)

0x--04

Independent (Graphic Loader I/F)

0x80FF

Linked (User)

0x81FF

Linked (HMI Protocol)

0x82FF

Linked (MODBUS Protocol)

0x84FF

Linked (Graphic Loader I/F)

Parameter

Bit
0

Data Bit : 0=7, 1=8

Parity : 0=Even, 1=Odd

Parity : 0=None, 1=

(Bit 1

)

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1089

Stop Bit : 0=1 Bit, 1=2

4
(0=300, 1=600, 2=1200, 3=2400, 4=4800, 5=9600, 6=19200, 7=38400, 8=76800)

5
6
7
8

Network Type

Code

Channel 1

Channel 2

NULL Modem

RS422

11~15

6.2.5

RS485

Dial-Up Modem

N/A

3-7

N/A

System (Reserved)

Network Example
System Configuration :

· 1:1 Communication between CIMON PLC and PC
· 1:1 Communication between CIMON PLC and 3rd vendor device
· 1:2 Communication with 3rd vendor device via modem
· 1:2 Communication with 3rd vendor device
· 1:N long distance communication via modem
· 1:N Multi-drop communication
· 1:N Multi-drop communication between various devices via modem
· 1:N Multi-drop communication between various devices
· An example of CIMON PLC network
· An example of CIMON PLC network including 3rd vendor devices

6.2.5.1

1:1 Communication between CIMON PLC and PC
The following is to use RS-232C channel or RS-422 channel, and the exclusive protocol of the CIMON PLC to
configure a network.

1090

CIMON-PLC

Components and parameters of computer link module,

6.2.5.2

Component

Name of Module

Parameter

Ex. of Station No.

Built-in RS-232C

PLC

CM1-SC02A

Exclusive Comm., Independent Mode

1:1 Communication between CIMON PLC and 3rd vendor device
The following is the network configuration when linking other maker’s PLC with a computer module.

Components and parameters of computer link module,

Component

Name of Module

Parameter

Ex. of Station No.

PLC

CM1-SC02A

User Communication, Independent Mode

XP / CP Series(CM1)

Other maker’s PLC

6.2.5.3

CM1-SC02A

1:2 Communication with 3rd vendor device via modem
RS-232C and a modem are used for a long-distance communication.

Components and parameters of computer link module,

Component

Name of Module

Parameter

Ex. of Station No.

Built-in RS-232C

PLC

CM1-SC02A

RS-232C

Exclusive Comm.

RS-485

User Comm.

Independent Mode
Other maker’s PLC

1091

1092

6.2.5.4

CIMON-PLC

1:2 Communication with 3rd vendor device
A RS-232C cable is used for interface.

Components and parameters of computer link module,

Component

Name of Module

Parameter

Ex. of Station No.

Built-in RS-232C

PLC

CM1-SC02A

RS-232C

Exclusive Comm.

RS-422

User Comm.

Independent Mode
Other maker’s PLC

6.2.5.5

1:N long distance communication via modem
A modem and RS-232C are used for a long-distance communication.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1093

Components and parameters of computer link module,

Component

Name of Module

Parameter

Ex. of Station No.

Built-in RS-232C

PLC NO.1

CM1-SC02A

RS-232C

Exclusive Comm. (RS-232C Mode) 0

RS-422

Exclusive Comm.

Linked Mode
PLC NO.2

CM1-SC02A

RS-232C

Exclusive Comm.

RS-422

Exclusive Comm.

Independent Mode
PLC NO.N

CM1-SC02A

RS-232C

Exclusive Comm.

RS-422

Exclusive Comm.

Independent Mode

6.2.5.6

1:N Multi-drop communication
A RS-232C cable is used to connect a PC with a PLC. RS-422 cables are used to connect between PLCs.

1094

CIMON-PLC

Components and parameters of computer link module,

Component

Name of Module

Parameter

Ex. of Station No.

Built-in RS-232C

PLC NO.1

CM1-SC02A

RS-232C

Exclusive Comm.

RS-422

Exclusive Comm.

Linked Mode
PLC NO.2

CM1-SC02A

RS-232C

Exclusive Comm.

RS-422

Exclusive Comm.

Independent Mode
PLC NO.3

CM1-SC02A

RS-232C

Exclusive Comm.

RS-422

Exclusive Comm.

Independent Mode
PLC NO.N

CM1-SC02A

RS-232C

Exclusive Comm.

RS-422

Exclusive Comm.

Independent Mode

6.2.5.7

1:N Multi-drop communication between various devices via modem
A RS-232C cable is used to connect a PC with a PLC. RS-422 cables are used to connect between PLCs.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1095

Components and parameters of computer link module,

Component

Name of Module

Parameter

Ex. of Station No.

Built-in RS-232C

PLC NO.1

CM1-SC02A

RS-232C

Exclusive Comm. (RS-232C Mode)

RS-422

User Comm.

Independent Mode
PLC NO.2

CM1-SC02A

RS-232C

RS-422

PLC NO.3

CM1-SC02A

RS-232C

RS-422

PLC NO.N

CM1-SC02A

RS-232C

RS-422

6.2.5.8

1:N Multi-drop communication between various devices
A RS-232C cable is used to connect a PC with a PLC. RS-422 cables are used to connect between PLCs.

1096

CIMON-PLC

Components and parameters of computer link module,

Component

Name of Module

Parameter

Ex. of Station No.

Built-in RS-232C

PLC NO.1

CM1-SC02A

RS-232C

HMI Comm. (RS-232C Mode)

RS-422

User Comm.

Independent Mode
PLC NO.2

CM1-SC02A

RS-232C

RS-422

PLC NO.3

CM1-SC02A

RS-232C

RS-422

PLC NO.N

CM1-SC02A

RS-232C

RS-422

6.2.5.9

An example of CIMON PLC network
A RS-232C cable is used to connect a PC with a PLC. A modem can be used in case of long-distance
communication. RS-422 cables are used to connect between PLCs.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1097

Components and parameters of computer link module,

Component

Name of Module

Parameter

Ex. of Station No.

PC NO.1

Built-in RS-232C

PC NO.N

Built-in RS-232C

PLC NO.1

CM1-SC02A

RS-232C

Exclusive Comm.

RS-422

Exclusive Comm.

Linked Mode
PLC NO.2

CM1-SC02A

RS-232C

User Comm.

RS-422

Exclusive Comm.

Independent Mode
PLC NO.2

CM1-SC02A

RS-232C

Exclusive Comm.

RS-422

Exclusive Comm.

Independent Mode
PLC NO.M

CM1-SC02A

RS-232C

Exclusive Comm.

RS-422

Exclusive Comm.

Independent Mode

6.2.5.10 An example of CIMON PLC network including 3rd vendor devices
A RS-232C cable is used to connect a PC with a PLC. A modem can be used in case of long-distance
communication. RS-422 cables are used to connect between PLCs

1098

CIMON-PLC

Components and parameters of computer link module,

Component

Name of Module

Parameter

Ex. of Station No.

PC NO.1

Built-in RS-232C

PLC NO.1

CM1-SC02A

RS-232C

Exclusive Comm.

RS-422

Exclusive Comm.

Linked Mode
PLC NO.2

CM1-SC02A

RS-232C

User Comm.

RS-422

Exclusive Comm.

Independent Mode
PLC NO.N

CM1-SC02A

RS-232C

User Comm.

RS-422

Exclusive Comm.

Independent Mode

6.2.6

Other maker’s PLC NO.2

Other maker’s PLC NO.M

Communication Services
Communication Services :
1. User Communication (SND, RCV)

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1099

2. User Communication (SEND, RECV)
· Operation Procedure of User Communications
· Registering and Editing a Special Program
· Instructions for User Program
· Error Codes for User Communications
· Example of Programming for User Communications
· Example of Application of MODICON (MODBUS) protocol
· Sending/Receiving communication frames at communication intervals
3. CIMON PLC - HMI Protocol
· Structure of Frame
· Details of Command
4. Dial-Up Modem Communication
5. Leased Line Modem Communication
6. MODBUS Protocol Service
7. RS485 PLC Link Service

6.2.6.1

User Communication (SND, RCV)

Exclusive Commands for Computer Communication,
This is used when the communication frame defined in a user program is used to send and receive data in
a program.

SND
This is used to send data as much as the length of the data requested from a computer link module.

CMD

Usable Device
M

Integer

Base

Chan

Slot

Addr

Leng
Result

O
O

COMMAND

Description

Base-Chan-Slot

Base: The number of the base where a computer link module is mounted is
indicated. In case of expansion base, the number (1~16) of a corresponding base is

1100

CIMON-PLC

indicated. In case of local one, the number is ‘0’.
Channel Mode: Ch 1(RS232:0) and Ch 2(RS422:1).
Slot No.: The number of the slot where a computer link module is mounted
[Ex.] In case of local base, Slot 2, Channel 1(RS232) -> h0002 : RS-232C
[Ex.] In case of expansion base (1), Slot 1, Channel 2(RS422) -> h0111 : RS-422
Addr

Address of the data sent

Leng

Length of the data sent (BYTE), Decimal figure, Max. 500BYTE
The address where the result of sending is noticed is assigned.
(X,Y,M,L,K,T,C,D,@D,Z)
Result Format :

Result

· Bit 0 : When sending completed, 1Scan ON. When failed, always ON.
· Bit 1 : When sending failed, always ON.
· Bit 2-7 : OFF
· Bit 8-F : Error Code (0=No Error)

FORMAT

RCV
This is used to store data as much as the length of the data requested from a computer link module.

CMD

Usable Device
M

Integer

Base

ChNo

Slot

Addr

Leng
Result

O
O

COMMAND

Description

Base-Chan-Slot

Base: The number of the base where a computer link module is mounted is
indicated. In case of expansion base, the number (1~16) of a corresponding base is

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1101

indicated. In case of local one, the number is ‘0’.
Channel Mode: Ch 1(RS232:0) and Ch 2(RS422:1).
Slot No.: The number of the slot where a computer link module is mounted
[Ex.] In case of local base, Slot 0, Channel 1(RS232)-> h0000 : RS-232C
[Ex.] In case of expansion base (1), Slot 4, Channel 2(RS422)-> h0114 : RS-422
Addr

Address where data are received and stored

Leng

Length of the data received (BYTE), Decimal figure, Max. 500BYTE
The address where the result of receiving is noticed is assigned.
(X,Y,M,L,K,T,C,D,@D,Z)
Result Format :

Result

· Bit 0 : When receiving completed, 1Scan ON. When failed, always ON
· Bit 1 : When receiving failed, always ON
· Bit 2-7 : OFF
· Bit 8-F : Error Code (0=No Error)

FORMAT

6.2.6.2

User Communication (SEND, RECV)
This is used to define communication frames in the protocol editor, sending or receiving the frames in a program.
User communications is the mode that other companies’protocols can be defined in the CIMON PLC to
communicate communications modules with other devices. Diverse communications protocols are used
according to manufacturers and all the protocols cannot be built in. And if a protocol is defined properly to an
application field and a program is written, communications with other devices is available according to a defined
protocol. If a protocol editor is used to define protocol frames (In the CICON), it is available to write and edit
other manufacturers’protocols. To use as user communication mode for correct data communication, the
information about the contents of the protocol used is to be correct and a program using the instructions to
control sending/receiving in a PLC as well as editing frames be written. This chapter explains the communication
specifications and the directions for use of user protocols.
The modes of communications modules operated as a user protocol are as follows.

Module Name

RS232C

RS422/485

Remarks

CM1-SC01A

User Protocol

1102

CIMON-PLC

CM1-SC01B

User Protocol

CM1-SC02A

User Protocol

Linked

User Protocol

Independent

User Protocol

HMI User Protocol

Independent

User Protocol

Modbus RTU User Protocol

Independent

User Protocol

PLC Link User Protocol

Independent

User Protocol

CICON User Protocol

Independent

HMI User Protocol

User Protocol

Independent

Modbus RTU User Protocol

User Protocol

Independent

PLC Link User Protocol

User Protocol

Independent

CICON User Protocol

User Protocol

Independent

But, Make sure the version before using user protocol (SEND, RECV) function.

Version

CICON

CM1-CPXXX(CPU)

CM1-SCXXX (RS232C/422/485)

1.83.0043

V 1.56

V 1.20

To use user protocols, a version should be higher than the versions described above.
Otherwise, consult with the head office to upgrade.

See :

· Operation Procedure of User Communications
· Registering and Editing a Special Program
· Instructions for User Program
· Error Codes for User Communications
· Example of Programming for User Communications
· Example of Application of MODICON (MODBUS) protocol
· Sending/Receiving communication frames at communication intervals

6.2.6.2.1 Operation Procedure of User Communications

As user communications require to use a frame editor and write a CICON program, it is set up as the following
order.

Programming Order for User Communications ,

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1. Register a special program to define frames.

2. Edit the protocol in the special program.

3. Write a PLC program for sending/receiving in the CICON.

4. Download the PLC program and the special program.

5. Convert CPU status to RUN mode.

6. Normal communication starts.

6.2.6.2.2 Registering and Editing a Special Program

1. Select the add/write new program in the CICON.

2. If you select the add/write new program, the program block
dialog box will appear as follows.
· Program: This is used to define the name of special program. Up to 12 letters can be entered.
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

1103

1104

CIMON-PLC

· Program ID: This is used to define ID for each program.
· Program Spare: This is to indicate the max. size for editing the protocols in a special program while
CPU status is run.
· Program Type: This is used to select the type of the program registered at this time. Here, select the
special program.
If you finish registering the parameters, press the [OK] button.

3. If you press the [OK] button, the dialog box for registering
protocols will appear.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1105

In a created PROTOCOL.SPC file, protocols can be registered.
· Base: This is used to select the base where a communication card (CM1- SCXXX) is mounted.

· Slot: This is used to select the slot where a communication card (CM1-SCXXX) is mounted. Slot number
is counted from the slot next to a CPU module.
· Channel: This is used to select the communication port between a master and a slave.

· Result: This is used to send data without SEND command as sending interval is set up and, if a
receiving frame is defined, to indicate whether a defined receiving frame is normally received. (Memory
device: M0000)
a. Received: The bit corresponding to the frame number in M0000 is on for 1 scan.
b. Not Received: The bit corresponding to the frame number in M0020 is on for 1 scan.

4. If you select the add button, the dialog box for adding a frame
will appear.
· Frame Name: This is used to register a frame name. (Max. 20 letters)
· Comm. Direction: This is used to select whether the frame registered is the one sent or the one
received.

1106

CIMON-PLC

· Comm. Interval: Frames are automatically sent at intervals without SEND command in a PLC program.
If Comm. interval is ‘0’, frames will be sent only by SEND command. A PLC program is not needed in
case of sending/receiving frames by using comm. interval.
[Receiving frame for sending] This corresponds to the case comm. frames are sending ones.
If a corresponding frame is sent and the receiving frame for the sending frame is registered, the
registered frame will be received without RECV command in the PLC program.

· Auto-send after Receiving: This is operated in case that comm. direction is the frame received. If a
corresponding frame is received, the frame registered for sending will be automatically sent without the
command to send in a PLC program.
· Use Code: This is used to distinguish a special data from the data in the frames sent/received. In case
that there is the same letter as the corresponding distinguishes among the data in the frames
sent/received, registered data are attached next to the distinguishes to be sent or received.
For example, the case hexadecimal FEh is registered to a distinguishes and FFh to special data.

Header

Length

Cmd

MSG

Checksum

FEh

03h

3Ch

3Fh

FEh

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1107

Header

Length

Cmd

MSG

Checksum

Special Data

FEh

03h

3Ch

3Fh

FEh

FFh

Up to 4 special data can be registered. If 4 special data are registered, they will be sent/received
continuously next to a distinguisher.
· Add: This is used to add segments to write a frame. Up to 10 segments can be registered.
· Edit: This is used to edit the segments in a made frame.
· Delete: This is used to delete the segments in a made frame.
· Move Up: This is used to switch the location of the segments in a made frame. A selected one is
moved up one step by one step.
· Move Down: This is used to switch the location of the segments in a made frame. A selected one is
moved down one step by one step.

5. To make a frame, segments should be added.

SEGMENT0

SEGMENT1

........

SEGMENT8

SEGMENT9

1. Type

[Fixed Value (Header)]
This means the first data in the frame made. The value is to be assigned in the type of ASCII or Binary.
In case that data is in Binary type, assign in hexadecimal number and a byte data in 2-place
hexadecimal number. In case of ASCII type, a letter is processed as byte data.

1108

CIMON-PLC

[Fixed Value (Others)]
This is the segment assigning general data in the frame made.

Assign constant value in the type of ASCII or Binary.
In case that data is in Binary type, assign in hexadecimal number and a byte data in 2-place
hexadecimal number. In case of ASCII type, a letter is processed as byte data.
· Fixed Value (Header, Tail, Others) Data Sent
PLC

12345678

XP / CP Series(CM1)

Data Conversion

Binary

ASCII

Other Device

12345678

3132333435363738

1109

· Fixed Value (Header, Tail, Others) Data Received
Other Device

12345678

3132333435363738

Data Conversion

Binary

ASCII

PLC

12345678

3132333435363738

[Ignore]
This segment is used to ignore assigned-length data after receiving, irrelevantly to the value of received
data. This can be set up in case of only the frame received. If the use code is applied, it is distinguished
that the letters like the distinguisher of special data are continuously received and the data next to the
distinguisher are disregarded. It is available to apply the use code.

[Memory Link]
This segment is used to send the data stored in the memory of CPU as much as an assigned length or
store received data in the memory device of CPU as much as assigned length. The maximum data size
is 250Byte. If the use code is applied, it is distinguished that the letters like the distinguisher of the
special data are continuously received and the data next to the distinguisher are disregarded. It is
available to apply the use code.
· Convert to ASCII
No(Binary)

This is used to send/receive the data in the memory device of CPU as they are.

1110

CIMON-PLC

Hexadecimal

This is used to convert the data in the memory device of CPU to hexadecimal

Integer

ASCII data, sending the result. And to convert received hexadecimal ASCII data to
binary data, storing the result in the memory of CPU.

Decimal Interger

This is used to convert the data in the memory device of CPU to decimal ASCII
data, sending the result. And to convert the received decimal ASCII data to binary
data, storing the result in the memory of CPU.

Real

This is used to scale the data in the memory of CPU(Ratio.1-10000), sending the

Number(Float)

result. And to scale the received data(Ratio.1-10000), storing the result in the
memory of CPU.

If you select the swap word data, upper 1 byte data and lower 1 byte data of the data sent/received are
swapped. For example, if the data stored in the memory of CPU is h1234(ASC:1234), the actual data
sent will be h3412(ASC:3421). If a received data is h1234(ASC:1234), the actually received data
h3412(ASC:3412) will be stored in the memory of CPU.
· Memory Link Data Sent
PLC

1234h

Data Conversion

No(Binary)

Hexadecimal Integer

Decimal Integer

Real Number
(Scaling:10)

Other Device

1234h

31323334

34363630

01D2h

· Memory Link Data Received
Other Device

1234h

31323334

34363630

1234h

Data Conversion

No(Binary)

Hexadecimal Integer

Decimal Integer

Real Number

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1111

(Scaling:10)
PLC

1234h

B608h

2. Error Check Type
This is used to check whether the data of a frame are correctly sent/received. It is available to distinguish
special data.
[SUM]
This is used to binary-sum an edited frame from the first of a selected range to the last of it and to
send/receive data as much as a set length (Byte). Enter a range in the error check range (Range of
segments). Refer to the memory link for ASCII data conversion.

[SUM+MASK]
This is used to binary-sum an edited frame from the first of a selected range to the last of it, masking the
binary-summed data with masking value (FFh) and to send/receive data as much as a set length (Byte).
Refer to the memory link for ASCII data conversion.

1112

CIMON-PLC

[XOR]
This is used to binary-or an edited frame from the first of a selected range to the last of it and to
send/receive the data as much as a set length (Byte). Refer to the memory link for ASCII data
conversion.

[XOR+MASK]
This is used to binary-or an edited frame from the first of a selected range to the last of it, masking the
binary-summed data with masking value (FFh) and to send/receive the data as much as a set length

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1113

(Byte). Refer to the memory link for ASCII data conversion.

[MUL]
This is used to binary-mul an edited frame from the first of a selected range to the last of it and to
send/receive the data as much as a set length (Byte).

[MUL+MASK]
This is used to binary-mul an edited frame from the first of a selected range to the last of it, masking the

1114

CIMON-PLC

binary-summed data with masking value (FFh) and to send/receive the data as much as a set length
(Byte).

[CRC16]
This is used to CRC16 an edited frame from the first of a selected range to the last of it.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1115

6.2.6.2.3 Instructions for User Program

SEND(P)
Function
This is the instruction used to send frame data of user type from a master station to slave stations. To use
this instruction, a user protocol is to be selected as action mode protocol and to be downloaded in the
RS232C/422/485 card setup. SEND instruction is to be executed by pulse.

FORAMT

· PID: This is used to assign the name or the ID of special program.

· F_NAME
1. This is used to enter a frame name or to assign a frame number. The number is to be assigned
according to the following form.
2. Format in case of assigning a frame number
a. Upper byte(Bit 8-F): Assigning communication form(0: RS232C, 1: RS422/485)
b. Lower byte(Bit 0-7): Frame number in special program

Assigning communication form (Upper byte)

Frame number (Lower byte)

[Ex.] In case communication form is RS232C and the frame of which number is 3 is sent,
SEND

(PID)

h0003

(Result)

Result
· The word device informed of the result of sending is assigned.
· Result Format
a. First Bit(Bit 0): In case of having been sent, 1 Scan On.

1116

CIMON-PLC

b. Second Bit(Bit 1): In case of having not been sent, always On.
c. Third Bit – Eighth Bit(Bit 2-7): Always Off.
d. Ninth Bit – Sixteenth Bit(Bit 8-F): Error Code.(0=No Error)

Error Code

Not Use

In case of an error in sending,
On

In case of having been sent,
1Scan On

Bit 8 ~ F

Bit 2 ~ 7

Bit 1

Bit 0

Example of Application
The following is an example of PLC program that a frame is sent to a slave station, in case that the special
program file name of a master station is SENDING and the frame name registered to a protocol editor is
TEST1.

RECV(P)
Function
This is the instruction used in slave stations to receive frame data from a master station. In case that a data
accords with the frame of user form and is normal frame, the flag indicating received(Bit 0) is turned on. To
use this instruction, a user protocol is to be selected as action mode protocol and to be downloaded in the
RS232C/422/485 card setup. RECV instruction is to be executed by pulse.

FORAMT

· PID: This is used to assign the name or the ID of special program.

· F_NAME
1. This is used to enter a frame name or to assign a frame number. The number is to be assigned
according to the following form.
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1117

2. Format in case of assigning a frame number
a. Upper byte(Bit 8-F): Assigning communication form(0: RS232C, 1: RS422/485)
b. Lower byte(Bit 0-7): Frame number in special program

Assigning communication form (Upper byte)

Frame number (Lower byte)

[Ex.] In case communication form is RS422/485 and the frame of which number is 5 is sent,
RECV

(PID)

h0105

(Result)

Result
· The word device informed of the result of sending is assigned.
· Result Format
e. First Bit(Bit 0): In case of having been sent, 1 Scan On.
f. Second Bit(Bit 1): In case of having not been sent, always On.
g. Third Bit – Eighth Bit(Bit 2-7): Always Off.
h. Ninth Bit – Sixteenth Bit(Bit 8-F): Error Code.(0=No Error)

Error Code

Not Use

In case of an error in
receiving, On

In case of having been received,
1Scan On

Bit 8 ~ F

Bit 2 ~ 7

Bit 1

Bit 0

Example of Application
Using RS232C/422/485 card, slave stations receive data from a master station. After receiving the data, the
slave stations compare them with assigned frame data. The following is an example of PLC program that
the frame is sent to a slave station, in case that a special program file name is RECEVING and the frame
name registered in a protocol editor is TEST2.

1118

CIMON-PLC

6.2.6.2.4 Error Codes for User Communications

Error Code

Description

18 (12h)

The range to check errors is wrongly set up.

19 (13h)

There is no registered frame.

20 (14h)

Segments are not registered to the frame.

21 (15h)

The communication direction of the frame is wrongly set up.

22 (16h)

Sending/receiving frames are disabled.

23 (17h)

Access to buffer memory is failed.

24 (18h)

The size of each segment data is over.

25 (19h)

When swapping word data, the size of the data is wrong.

26 (20h)

The entire length of sending/receiving frame is over 600Byte.

27 (21h)

The size of data is wrongly assigned.

6.2.6.2.5 Example of Programming for User Communications

The following shows an example of configuration of communication system and frame between a CIMON-PLC
and other manufacturer’s PLC to explain the programming method for user communication. It is the case that the
18-byte data in Memory D0000 of the CIMON-PLC are written to other manufacturer’s PLC and the 24-byte data
of other manufacturer’s PLC are read and stored in Memory D0020 of the CIMON-PLC.

PLC protocol of other manufacturer,
Frame requesting to write (CIMON-PLC -> Other manufacturer’s PLC)
Header

Station
(H)

Station
(L)

Command

Size
(H)

Size
(L)

Data

Tail

Error
Check(H)

Error
Check(L)

ENQ

18Byte

EOT

Frame responding to request to read (Other manufacturer’s PLC -> CIMON-PLC)
Header

Station
(H)

Station
(L)

Command

Size
(H)

Size
(L)

Data

Tail

Error
Check (H)

Error
Check (L)

STX

24Byte

ETX

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1119

Description for Protocols,
1) Frame Requesting to Write
ENQ and EOT, which are the control letters of ASCII code, are used at the header and the tail.
Command ‘W’is used.
The length of data indicates 18 bytes(12h).

Order of Sending

Start -------------------------------------------------------> End

Type of Frame

Header Fixed Value (Others)

Data

Tail

Error Check

Frame sent

ENQ

Variable Data

EOT

Binary

05h

30h

31h

57h

31h

32h

D0000

04h

‘0’

‘1’

‘W’

‘1’

‘2’

D0000

ASCII

12-byte data in the memory for sending data of CPU (CIMON-PLC D0000) are sent.
The error check is to binary-sum ASCII code values from the header to the tail. Calculated data is
varied according to frame.
To make the above frame sent in a protocol editor, binary or ASCII can be selected as fixed value. In
case of binary like the above table, enter a hexadecimal value. In case of ASCII, enter letters. But,
hexadecimal 2-digit number occupies 1 byte and a letter occupies 1 byte.

1120

CIMON-PLC

Using the protocol editor, make the frame sent of other manufacturer’s protocol as the
following procedure.
1. Fixed Value (Header): This is the first data of a frame.

Binary 05h is ENQ. Hexadecimal 2-digit number occupies 1 byte.

2. Fixed Value (Others): As a data is displayed in ASCII, a letter occupies 1 byte.

Binary data (30 31 57 31 32) can be displayed.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1121

3. Memory Link: If an address is selected as D0000 with the length of 18 bytes, the 18-byte data
stored in D0000 will be sent without ASCII conversion.

Convert to ASCII Data :
· No(Binary): The data stored in the memory of CPU is sent without conversion. For example, if
the length of a data is 2 bytes and the value is 0x1234(2Byte), Data 1234 will be sent.
· Hexadecimal Integer: A data is converted to ASCII data and the result is sent. As actually sent
data are ‘1’,’2’,’3’,’4’, in case that a data value is 0x1234, 4 bytes is to be set up as the length
of the data.
· Decimal Integer: 0x1234 is equivalent to decimal 4660. As actually sent data are ‘4’,’6’,‘6’,’0’,
4 bytes is to be set up as the length of the data.
· Real Number: In case that scaling is 10, Data Value 0x1234 is divided by 10 and the result is
sent in binary data. The actual sent data is 0x01D2.

4. Fixed Value (Tail): This is the last data of a frame.

1122

CIMON-PLC

Binary 04h is EOT. Hexadecimal 2-digit number occupies 1 byte.

5. Error Check: The data of the frame sent are binary-summed as much as a set value in the range
of error check. Refer to the memory link for ASCII data conversion.

6. The frame sent has been edited.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1123

2) Frame Responding to Request to Read
Order of Sending

Start ----------------------------------------------------------------------------> End

Type of Frame

Header Fixed Value (Others)

Data

Tail

BCC

Frame sent

STX

Variable Data

ETX

Binary

02h

30h

31h

57h

31h

38h

D0000

03h

‘0’

‘1’

‘R’

‘1’

‘8’

D0000

ASCII

STX and ETX, which are the control letters of ASCII code, are used at the header and the tail.
Command ‘R’is used.
The length of a data displays 24 bytes(18).
24-byte data in the memory for sending data of CPU are sent.
Error check is to binary-sum ASCII code values from the header to the tail. A calculated data is varied
according to frame.
To make the above frame received in a protocol editor, binary or ASCII can be selected as fixed
value. In case of binary like the above table, enter a hexadecimal value. In case of ASCII, enter
letters. But, hexadecimal 2-digit number occupies 1 byte and a letter occupies 1 byte.

Using a protocol editor, make the frame sent of other manufacturer’s protocol as the following
procedure.

1124

CIMON-PLC

1. Fixed Value (Header): This is the first data of a frame.

Binary 02h is STX. Hexadecimal 2-digit number occupies 1 byte.

2. Fixed Value (Others): As a data is displayed in ASCII, a letter occupies 1 byte.

Binary data (30 31 52 31 38) can be displayed.

3. Memory Link: As D0020 is selected as address, 24-byte data is sent without ASCII conversion.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1125

Convert to ASCII Data
· No(Binary): A received data is stored in the memory of CPU without conversion. For example,
if the length of a data is 2 bytes and the value is 0x1234(2Byte), Data h1234 will be stored in
the memory of CPU.
· Hexadecimal Integer: A received data is converted to hexadecimal integer and the result is
stored. And Data ‘1’,’2’,’3’,’4’are received. In this case, the actually stored data is 0x1234.
But, 4 bytes are set up as the length of the data.
· Decimal Integer: A received data is converted to decimal integer and the result is stored. And
Data ‘4’,’6’,‘6’,’0’are received. In this case, the actually stored data is 0x1234. But, 4 bytes are
set up as the length of the data.
· Real Number: In case that scaling is 10, Data Value 0x1234 is multiplied by 10 and the result
is received in binary data. The actual sent data is 0xB608.

4. Fixed Value (Tail): This is the last data of a frame.

1126

CIMON-PLC

Binary 04h is ETX. Hexadecimal 2-digit number occupies 1 byte.

5. Error Check: The data of the frame sent are binary-summed as much as a set value in the range
of error check. Refer to the memory link for ASCII data conversion.

Range of Error Check (Segment) : Start: 0 / End: 3

Segment 0

Segment 1

Segment 2

Segment 3

Error Check = Segment 0 + Segment 1 + Segment 2 + Segment 3

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1127

6. The frame received has been edited.

PLC Program: Use a protocol editor to send a registered frame every second. If the frame is
sent, M0000 is turned on for one scan to execute Receive command. Send/Receive command is
to be turned on for one scan.

1128

CIMON-PLC

6.2.6.2.6 Example of Application of MODICON (MODBUS) protocol

It is available to configure a communication system and frames between a CIMON-PLC and other manufacturer’
s PLC using Modbus Protocol.
The following is an example for request to read 16-bit data from other manufacturer’s PLC using Modbus
Protocol to a CIMON-PLC. If a requesting frame is received from other manufacturer’s PLC, the received frame
will be evaluated. If correct, it will be sent automatically.

Structure of Modbus Protocol Request (Other manufacturer’s PLC)
Slave
Address

Function

Starting
Address(H)

Start
Address(L)

No.
Point(H)

BCC(H)

BCC(L)

Structure of Modbus Protocol Response (CIMON-PLC)
Slave
Address

Function

Byte Count

Data

BCC(H)

BCC(L)

Setting up the requesting frame received from other manufacturer’s PLC
Select the auto-send after receiving. But, the frame sent automatically is to be registered.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

Setting up a responding frame

1129

1130

CIMON-PLC

PLC Program:
If Data Value L0000 is ‘1’, the received data is evaluated. The frame registered to the auto-send after
receiving is sent without SEND command. Also, M0000 is or-operated and the above will be
continuously processed if a frame is received.

6.2.6.2.7 Sending/Receiving communication frames at communication intervals

The following is the example of a communication system and frame composition between a master CIMON-PLC
and a slave CIMON-PLC by using CIMON-PLC exclusive protocol.
A master PLC requests 5-word data of Memory Device ‘D0000’at every 100ms.
Enter parameters as follows.
· Master PLC : User Protocol
· Slave PLC : HMI Protocol

Request Frame Format of CIMON-PLC Exclusive Protocol
ENQ Stn
H

Stn
L

Cmd Len
g
H

Len
g
L

Data

BCC BCC EOT
H
L

ENQ 0

D0000000 05

EOT

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1131

Response Frame Format of CIMON-PLC Exclusive Protocol
STX

Stn
H

Stn
L

Cmd Len
g
H

Len
g
L

Data

BCC BCC ETX
H
L

STX

0000 0000 0000 0000 0000

ETX

Response frame of master side
This is used to define the response frame received from a slave CIMON-PLC.
Sending frames are sent from a master PLC and expected receiving frames are registered.

Request frame of master side
This is used to define the request frames sent to a slave CIMON-PLC.
Sending frame is sent from a master PLC at every 100ms and the above-defined receiving frame is
registered to the receiving frame for sending.
If a sending frame is sent and a registered frame is received, the bit corresponding to the frame
number of communication result memory device(If frame number is 1, communication result bit is
M0001) will be on for one scan.

1132

6.2.6.3

CIMON-PLC

CIMON PLC - HMI Protocol
This service is used to have a PC and other devices read and write the information and data in a PLC, and to
have them control a PLC (RUN, STOP, PAUSE). In the system composing of a Master and a Slave, if station
numbers are assigned, multi-drop communication is available.

See :

· Structure of Frame
· Details of Command

6.2.6.3.1 Structure of Frame

Request Frame (Master) :
The frame that an outside communication device requests to a computer link module

ENQ

Stn
H

Stn
L

Cmd Leng
H

Leng
L

Data

BCC
H

BCC
L

EOT

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1133

Response Frame (Slave) :
The frame that a computer link module responds to an outside communication device

STX

Stn
H

Stn
L

Cmd Leng
H

Leng
L

Data

BCC
H

BCC
L

ETX

1) The structure of a sending frame and the one of a receiving frame are same.
2) The same as the command codes received from a request frame (Master) are used for response frame.
But, if there is an error in communication or process, Code E is responded.
3) Description for Codes
Code

Hex Value

Description

ENQ

05H

Master Frame Header

EOT

04H

Master Frame Tail

STX

02H

Slave Header

ETX

03H

Slave Tail

Stn

00H~1FH, FFH

PLC Station Number

Cmd

Command

Leng

Length of Data Device (Length Bytes), Hexadecimal

Data

Data Device according to Command (Length Bytes)

BCC

Remainder value when dividing the binary-sum from Cmd to the end of
data by 256

4) Commands
The commands used for exclusive communication service are as follows.

Command

Code

ASCII

Function

Read Word Data

52H

Reads Word Memory Device.

Write Word Data

57H

Writes to Word Memory Device.

Read Bit Data

72H

Reads Bit Memory Device.

Write Bit Data

77H

Writes to Bit Memory Device.

Change PLC Mode

4DH

Changes PLC Mode.

58H

Registers Monitoring Device.

Read Monitoring Device

59H

Reads Registered Monitoring Device

Respond Error

45H

Responds Error in PLC.

1134

CIMON-PLC

6.2.6.3.2 Details of Command

List :

· Read Word Data
· Write Word Data
· Read Bit Data
· Write Bit Data
· Change PLC Mode
· Register Monitoring Device
· Read Monitoring Device
· Error Response

Read Word Data
Function
· This is used to read the data in the word device of a PLC. (Max. 63 words)
· Device Symbol: X, Y, M, L, K, F, Z, TC, TS, CC, CS, D, S

Request Frame (Master)
· COMMAND: ‘R’
· Data Device Format
Address
8 Char

Size (Word)
Hexadecimal, 2 Char

......

Address
8 Char

Size (Word)
Hexadecimal, 2 Char

[Master(Request Format)]
HEADER

Stn
H

ENQ
05H

Stn
L
02

30H

Cmd

Leng
H

R
32H

52H

Leng
L
0A

30H

Data

BCC
H

D0000001 01
41H

4430303030303031
3031H

BCC
L
B9

42H

EOT
EOT

39H

04H

Leng is the length of a data and its value means the length of a data (D0000001 01).

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1135

Data means the address really read (D0000001) and the length of the word data read (01).
BCC is the remainder value when dividing the binary-sum from Cmd to the end of data by 256.

Response Frame (Slave)
· COMMAND (In completed case: ‘R’ / In failed case: ‘E’)
· Format of Data Device
[Completed Case]
PLC Data
Word Data
4 Char

Word Data
4 Char

......

Word Data
4 Char

Slave(Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H

Stn
L
02

30H

Cmd

Leng
H

R
32H

52H

Leng
L
04

30H

Data

BCC
H

F4AC
34H

46344143H

BCC
L
B4

42H

ETX
ETX

34H

03H

The request frame received from a master is used as the response frame of a PLC.
BCC is the remainder value when dividing binary-sum from Cmd to the end of data by 256.
As the response frame is processed, Cmd is ‘R’. (* Leng means the length of a data (F4AC).

[Failed Case]
Error Code
Error Code
2 Char
Slave(Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H

Stn
L
02

30H

Cmd

Leng
H

E
32H

45H

Leng
L
02

30H

Error Code

BCC
H

02
32H

3032H

BCC
L
09

30H

ETX
ETX

39H

03H

The request frame received from a master is used as the response frame of a PLC.
BCC is the remainder value when dividing the binary-sum from Cmd to the end of data by 256.
As the response frame is not processed, Cmd is ‘E’. (*Leng means the length of error code(02).)
* Error code displays the type of an error. Please refer to the ‘ERROR RESPONSE’.

1136

CIMON-PLC

[Ex.] Read data from Address D00040 of Station 02H.
Master (Request Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

ENQ
05H

Stn
L

Cmd

32H

52H

02
30H

Leng
H

Leng
L

Data

41H

4430303030303430
3031H

0A
30H

BCC
H

D0000040 01

BCC
L

EOT
EOT

42H

43H

04H

BCC
H

BCC
L

ETX

Completed Case> reads 1-word data ‘F4AC’
Slave(Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H

Stn
L

Cmd

32H

52H

Cmd

02
30H

Leng
H

Leng
L

Data

30H

34H

46344143H

42H

34H

03H

Leng
H

Leng
L

Error Code

BCC
H

BCC
L

ETX

F4AC

ETX

Failed Case> Error in BCC
Slave(Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H

Stn
L
02

30H

E
32H

45H

02
30H

02
32H

3032H

09
30H

ETX
39H

03H

Write Word Data
Function
· This is used to write a data to the word device of a PLC.
· Device Symbol: X, Y, M, L, K, F, Z, TC, TS, CC, CS, D, S

Request Frame
· COMMAND: ‘W’
· Format of Data Device
Address
8 Char

Size (Word)
Hexadecimal,
2 Char

Word Data
Hexadecimal,
Size*4 Char

.......

Address
8 Char

Size (Word)
Hexadecimal,
2 Char

Word Data
Hexadecimal,
Size*4 Char

[Master (Request Format)]
HEADER

Stn
H

Stn
L

Cmd

Leng
H

Leng
L

Data

BCC
H

BCC
L

EOT

XP / CP Series(CM1)

ENQ
05H

02
30H

32H

57H

0E
30H

D0000010 01 FA34
45H

1137

4430303030303130
3031 46413334H

42H

EOT
30H

04H

Leng is the length of a data and its value means the length of the Data (D0000010 01 FA34).
The address really written (D0000010), the length of the data (01) and the data written (FA34) are
input in the Data (D1000 02 FA34).
BCC is the remainder value (F3) when dividing the binary-sum from Cmd to the end of data by 256.

Response Frame
· COMMAND ( In completed case: ‘W’ / In failed case: ‘E’)
· Format of Data Device
[Completed Case]
No Data
Slave (Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX

Stn
L

Cmd

32H

57H

02H

30H

Leng
H

Leng
L

BCC
H

30H

42H

00
30H

BCC
L
B7

ETX
ETX

37H

03H

[Failed Case]
Error Code
Error Code
2 Char
Slave (Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H

Stn
L
02

30H

Cmd

Leng
H

E
32H

45H

Leng
L
02

30H

Error Code

BCC
H

01
32H

3031H

BCC
L
08

30H

ETX
38H

The request frame received from a master is used as the response frame of a PLC.

ETX

03H

1138

CIMON-PLC

BCC is the remainder value when dividing the binary-sum from Cmd to the end of data by 256.
As the response frame is not processed, Cmd is ‘E’.
Leng(02) means the length of Error Code(01).
Error code displays the type of an error. Please refer to the ‘ERROR RESPONSE’.

[ [Ex.] Write FA34H to Address D0010 and 8D41H to Address D0020. ]
Master (Request Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

Stn
L

ENQ
05H

02
30H

Cmd

Leng
H

W
32H

Leng
L
12

57H

31H

Data

BCC
H

D0000010 02 FA34
8D41
32H

4430303030303130
3032 46413334
38443431H

BCC
L
AF

EOT
EOT

41H

46H

04H

BCC
H

BCC
L

ETX

Completed Case>
Slave (Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

Stn
L

STX
02H

Cmd

02
30H

Leng
H

Leng
L

W
32H

57H

30H

B7
30H

ETX

42H

37H

03H

BCC
H

BCC
L

ETX

Failed Case>Receiving unknown command code (01H).
Slave (Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H

Stn
L

Cmd

32H

45H

02
30H

Leng
H

Leng
L

Error Code

32H

3031H

02
30H

08
30H

ETX
38H

03H

Read Bit Data
Function
· This is used to read the data in the bit device of a PLC.
· Device Symbol: X, Y, M, L, K, F, Z, T, C

Request Frame
· COMMAND: ‘r’
· Format of Data Device

XP / CP Series(CM1)

Address
8 Char

Size (Bit)
Hexadecimal,
2 Char

.......

Address
8 Char

1139

Size (Bit)
Hexadecimal,
2 Char

Master(Request Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

ENQ
05H

Stn
L
03

30H

Cmd

Leng
H

r
33H

72H

Leng
L
0A

30H

Data

BCC
H

M000010F 02
41H

4D303030313030
46 3032H

BCC
L
F9

46H

EOT
EOT

39H

04H

Leng is the length of a data and its value means the length of Data (M000010F 02H).
The address really read(M000010F) and the length of the data(02) are input in the Data.
BCC is the remainder value when dividing the binary-sum from Cmd to the end of data by 256.

Response Frame
· COMMAND ( In completed case: ‘r’ / In failed case: ‘E’ )
· Format of Data Device
[Completed Case]
PLC Data
Bit Data
1 Char

Bit Data
1 Char

......

Bit Data
1 Char

Slave (Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H

Stn
L
01

30H

Cmd

Leng
H

r
31H

72H

Leng
L
02

30H

Data

BCC
H

01
32H

30 31H

BCC
L
35

33H

ETX
ETX

35H

03H

[Failed Case]
Error Code
Error Code
2 Char

1140

CIMON-PLC

Slave(Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H

Stn
L

Cmd

33H

45H

03
30H

Leng
H

Leng
L

Error Code

32H

3031H

02
30H

BCC
H

BCC
L
08

30H

ETX
ETX

38H

03H

The request frame received from a master is used as the response frame of a PLC.
BCC is the remainder value when dividing the binary-sum from Cmd to the end of data by 256.
As the response frame is not processed, Cmd is ‘E’.
Leng(02) means the length of Error Code(01).
Error code indicates the type of an error. Please refer to the ‘ERROR RESPONSE’.

[Ex.] Read the bit data in Address M0104 and Address M0105 of Station 03 PLC.
Master (Request Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

ENQ
05H

Stn
L
03

30H

Cmd

Leng
H

r
33H

Leng
L
0A

72H

Data

BCC
H

M0000104 02

BCC
L
E7

EOT
EOT

30H

41H

4D3030303031
3034 3032H

45H

37H

04H

Leng
H

Leng
L

Data

BCC
H

BCC
L

ETX

Completed Case > Reads Data ‘0 1’.
Slave (Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H

Stn
L
03

30H

Cmd
r

33H

ETX

72H

30H

32H

30 31H

33H

35H

03H

Cmd

Leng
H

Leng
L

Error Code

BCC
H

BCC
L

ETX

Failed Case > Error in BCC
Slave (Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H

Stn
L
03

30H

E
33H

45H

02
30H

02
32H

3032H

09
30H

ETX
39H

03H

Write Bit Data
Function
· This is used to write data to the bit device of a PLC.
· Device Symbol : X, Y, M, L, K, F, Z, T, C

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1141

Request Frame
· COMMAND : ‘w’
· Format of Data Device
Address
8 Char

Size (Bit)
Hexadecimal,
2 Char

Bit Data
Size*1 Char

.......

Address
8 Char

Size (Bit)
Hexadecimal,
2 Char

Bit Data
Size*1 Char

Master(Request Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

ENQ
05H

Stn
L
03

30H

Cmd

Leng
H

w
33H

77H

Leng
L
0D

30H

42H

Data

BCC BCC
H
L

EOT

M0000101 03 110

EOT

4D303030303130 31
3033 313130H

38H

32H

04H

Leng(0B) is the length of data and its value means the length of Data (M0000101 03 110).
The address really written(M0000101), the length of the data(03) and the data written(110) are input in
the Data.
BCC is the remainder value when dividing the binary-sum from Cmd to the end of data by 256.

Response Frame
· COMMAND ( In completed case: ‘w’ /

In failed case: ‘E’)

· Format of Data Device
[Completed Case]
No Data
Slave(Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H

Stn
L

Cmd

33H

77H

03
30H

Leng
H

Leng
L

BCC
H

30H

44H

00
30H

BCC
L
D7

ETX
ETX

37H

03H

1142

CIMON-PLC

[Failed Case]
Error Code
Error Code
2 Char

Slave(Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H

Stn
L
02

30H

Cmd

Leng
H

Leng
L

E
32H

45H

Error Code

BCC
H

30H

32H

BCC
L
0B

3034H

30H

ETX
ETX

42H

03H

The request frame received from a master is used as the response frame of a PLC.
BCC is the remainder value when dividing the binary-sum from Cmd to the end of data by 256.
As the response frame is not processed, Cmd is ‘E’.
Leng(02) means the length of Error Code (04).
Error code indicates the type of an error. Please refer to the ‘ERROR RESPONSE’.

[Ex.] Write bit data to Bit Address M0104.
Master(Request Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

ENQ
05H

Stn
L
01

30H

Cmd

Leng
H

w
31H

Leng
L

Data

BCC
H

M0000104 03 110

77H

30H

44H

Cmd

Leng
H

Leng
L

4D303030303130
34 3033 313130H

BCC
L
82

38H

EOT
EOT

32H

04H

Completed Case
Slave(Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H

Stn
L
01

30H

w
31H

77H

BCC
H

BCC
L

ETX

D7
44H

ETX

30H

37H

Leng
H

Leng
L

Error Code

32H

3034H

03H

Failed Case> Data Size Overflow
Slave (Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H

Stn
L

Cmd

31H

45H

01
30H

02
30H

BCC
H

BCC
L
0B

30H

ETX
ETX

42H

03H

Change PLC Mode

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1143

BCC
H

EOT

Function
· This is used to change the operation mode of a PLC.

Request Frame
· COMMAND : ‘M’
· Format of Data Device
Mode Code

Mode

Code

Run

Program

Pause/Remote

Master(Request Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

ENQ
05H

Stn
L

Cmd

31H

4DH

01
30H

Leng
H

Leng
L

Data

31H

30H

01
30H

BCC
L
DE

44H

EOT
45H

04H

Leng(01) is the length of data.
Mode code value(0) is input in the Data(0).
BCC is the remainder value when dividing the binary-sum from Cmd to the end of data by 256.
Only the case CPU is under REMOTE status is available.

Response Frame
· COMMAND ( In completed case: ‘M’ / In failed case: ‘E’)
· Format of Data Device
[Completed Case]
No Data
Slave(Response Format)
HEADER
STX

Stn
H

Stn
L
01

Cmd
M

Leng
H

Leng
L
00

BCC
H

BCC
L
AD

ETX
ETX

1144

CIMON-PLC

02H

30H

31H

4DH

30H

41H

44H

03H

[Failed Case]
Error Code
Error Code
2 Char

Slave(Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H

Stn
L
02

30H

Cmd

Leng
H

E
32H

45H

Leng
L

Error Code

02
30H

BCC
H

03
32H

BCC
L

ETX

3033H

30H

ETX
41H

03H

The request frame received from a master is used as the response frame of a PLC.
BCC is the remainder value when dividing the binary-sum from Cmd to the end of data by 256.
As the response frame is not processed, Cmd is ‘E’.
Leng(02) means the length of Error Code (03).
Error code indicates the type of an error. Please refer to the ‘ERROR RESPONSE’.

[Ex.] Change the operation mode of a PLC to PAUSE/REMOTE mode.
Master(Request Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

ENQ
05H

Stn
L

Cmd

31H

4DH

Cmd

01
30H

Leng
H

Leng
L

Data

30H

31H

32H

Leng
H

Leng
L

BCC
H

BCC
L
E0

45H

EOT
EOT

30H

04H

Completed Case
Slave(Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H

Stn
L
01

30H

M
31H

4DH

BCC
H

00
30H

BCC
L
AD

30H

41H

ETX
ETX

44H

03H

Failed Case > Invalid mode
Slave(Response Format)
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

HEADER

Stn
H

STX

Stn
L

Cmd

02H

30H

Leng
H

E
31H

Leng
L

Error Code

45H

30H

BCC
H

03
32H

BCC
L
0A

3033H

1145

ETX
ETX

30H

41H

03H

Register Monitoring Device
Function
· This is used to register a monitoring device.
· 16 devices can be registered as maximum. (Distinguishing by Frame No., 0h – Fh)
· Individual device should be continuous and is limited to 63 words as maximum.

Request Frame
· COMMAND : ‘X’
· Format of Data Device
Frame No.
1 Char

Word Address
8 Char

Word Size
Hexadecimal,
2 Char

Master(Request Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

Stn
L

Cmd

ENQ

05H

30H 31H

58H

Leng
H

Leng
L

Data

42H

30H 4430303030 3032H
303031H

0B
30H

D0000001

BCC
H

BCC
L

C0
43H

EOT

EOT
30H

04H

Leng(0B) is the length of a data.
The Mode code(0), the Address(D0000001) and the Size(02) are input in the Data (0 D00001 02).
BCC is the remainder value when dividing the binary-sum from Cmd to the end of data by 256.

Response Frame
· COMMAND ( In completed case: ‘X’ / In failed case: ‘E’)
· Format of Data Device
[Completed Case]
No Data

1146

CIMON-PLC

Slave(Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H

Stn
L
01

30H

Cmd

Leng
H

X
31H

Leng
L

BCC
H

58H

30H

BCC
L

ETX

B8
30H

42H

ETX
38H

03H

[Failed Case]
Error Code
Error Code
2 Char

Slave(Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H

Stn
L
01

30H

Cmd

Leng
H

E
31H

45H

Leng
L
02

30H

Error Code

BCC
H

07
32H

BCC
L

ETX

3037H

30H

ETX
45H

03H

The request frame received from a master is used as the response frame of a PLC.
BCC is the remainder value when dividing the binary-sum from Cmd to the end of data by 256.
As the response frame is not processed, Cmd is ‘E’.
Leng(02) means the number of Error Codes (07).
Error code indicates the type of an error. Please refer to the ‘ERROR RESPONSE’.

[Ex.] Register Frame 1 and Addresses from D0011 to D0014 to Station 1.
Master(Request Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

ENQ
05H

Stn
L
01

30H

Cmd

Leng
H

X
31H

58H

Leng
L
0B

30H

Data

BCC
H

1 D0000011 04
42H

31 443030303030
3131 3034H

BCC
L
C5

43H

EOT
EOT

35H

04H

Completed Case
Slave(Response Format)

XP / CP Series(CM1)

HEADER

Stn
H

Stn
L

STX
02H

Cmd

01
30H

Leng
H

X
31H

58H

Leng
L

BCC
H

00
30H

BCC
L

ETX

B8
30H

42H

1147

ETX
38H

03H

Failed Case > Invalid Monitor Frame No.(0h~Fh)
Slave(Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H

Stn
L

Cmd

01
30H

Leng
H

E
31H

45H

Leng
L

Error Code

02
30H

BCC
H

07
32H

BCC
L
0E

ETX
ETX

3037H

30H

45H

03H

Leng
L

Data

BCC
H

BCC
L

EOT

31H

30H

Read Monitoring Device
Function
· This is used to read the registered monitoring device.

Request Frame
· COMMAND : ‘Y’
· Format of Data Device
Frame No.
1 Char

Master(Request Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

ENQ
05H

Stn
L

Cmd

31H

59H

01
30H

Leng
H

01
30H

EA
45H

EOT
41H

04H

Leng(01) is the length of a data.
Frame No. is input in the Data(0).
BCC is the remainder value when dividing the binary-sum from Cmd to the end of data by 256.

Response Frame
· COMMAND ( In completed case: ‘Y’ / In failed case: ‘E’)
· Format of Data Device
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

1148

CIMON-PLC

[Completed Case]
Frame No.

Word Data
4 Char

......

Word Data
4 Char

Slave(Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

Stn
L

ENQ
05H

01
30H

Cmd

Leng
H

Y
31H

59H

Leng
L
05

30H

Data

BCC
H

0 87F3
35H

30 38374633H

BCC
L
D6

44H

EOT
EOT

36H

04H

[Failed Case]
Error Code
Error Code
2 Char

Slave(Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H

Stn
L
01

30H

Cmd

Leng
H

E
31H

45H

Leng
L
02

30H

Error Code

BCC
H

08
32H

3038H

BCC
L
0F

30H

ETX
ETX

46H

03H

The request frame received from a master is used as the response frame of a PLC.
BCC is the remainder value when dividing the binary-sum from Cmd to the end of data by 256.
As the response frame is not processed, Cmd is ‘E’.
Leng(02) means the length of Error Code(08H).
Error code indicates the type of an error. Please refer to the ‘ERROR RESPONSE’.

[Ex.] If Frame 2h, Address D1005 and Address D1006 are registered as a monitoring device,
read the registered device.

Master(Request Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

Stn
L

Cmd

Leng
H

Leng
L

Data

BCC
H

BCC
L

EOT

XP / CP Series(CM1)

ENQ

05H

30H

Y
31H

1149

EOT

59H

30H

31H

32H

45H

43H

04H

Cmd

Leng
H

Leng
L

Data

BCC
H

BCC
L

EOT

Completed Case
Slave(Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

ENQ
05H

Stn
L
01

30H

Y
31H

59H

09
30H

2 87F3 32E7
39H

32 38374633
33324537H

EOT

42H

44H

04H

BCC
H

BCC
L

ETX

Failed Case > Number of the unregistered(Not initialized) frame
Slave(Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H

Stn
L
01

30H

Cmd

Leng
H

E
32H

45H

Leng
L
02

30H

Error Code
08

32H

3038H

0F
30H

ETX
46H

03H

Error Response
Function
· This is the function to inform a master of error occurring in the process of a communication frame or a
request frame and is used in a response frame only.

Request Frame
· All request frames

Response Frame
· COMMAND : ‘E’
· Format of Data Device
Error Code
Error Code
2 Char

1150

6.2.6.4

CIMON-PLC

Error Code

Description

Receives unknown command code.

An error occurs in BCC.

CPU does not respond.

Receives unknown device code.

Exceeds the device read.

Invalid address.

Internal error

Receives the number of invalid data

Invalid data

Unregistered (Not initialized) frame number

Invalid Monitor Frame No. (0h – Fh) Invalid frame number

CPU is not in REMOTE status.

Invalid CPU status is assigned.

An error occurs in the size of the data written.

It is disabled to write.

It is disabled to change mode.

Dial-Up Modem Communication

Outline
This function is to use the public network for a long-distance network.

Modem Specifications
In case of modem communications, it is required to use the modem complying with the recommendable
specifications for reliability.
According to the performance of a modem and the state of a public network, the case that a line is not
linked or the case that a link is cut off while exchanging data may occur.

· Baud Rate

Over 14400 bps

· DTE Interface

CTS / RTS Flow Control

· Command

Hayes Exchange AT Command

XP / CP Series(CM1)

· Error Correction

Error Correction Function while Sending data

· Controlling carrier

Controls to send carrier

1151

Modem Link
Order of Modem Installation
1. Use RS-232C interface cable to connect a computer link module and an external type RS-232C
modem.
2. Connect a RS-232C interface cable to the RS-232C port of the computer link module and DTE link
terminal.
3. Connect the telephone line of a public network to the line terminal of the modem.
4. If there is a telephone set, connect the phone terminal of the modem with the telephone set.
5. Turning on the power for the PLC and the modem, make sure the modem is initialized.

Parameters Setup for Modem Communications
As all modems provide the functions discriminated by manufacturers, the parameters for modems are
to be set up.
The modem operation mode is set up with the initialization command of a modem. The same
operation mode is to be set up for the two modems used.
1. Select the menu to run the graphic loader(CICON).
2. Select menu to set up communication parameters such as communication channel, modem, baud
rate, parity bit, stop bit, station number and communication type.
3. If a modem is set up, it will be available to set up the initialization command. Enter the modem
initialization command set up.
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

1152

CIMON-PLC

4. Enter the default value for basic parameters such as station number, communication method, parity
bit, stop bit and initialization command. Baud rate is to be set up according to the maximum rate of
a modem.

CICON Link Service through Modem
· This function is used to write programs, to download user programs, to debug programs and to
monitor in the network system that a PLC is linked through a computer link module by remote
control without moving the physical link of the CICON.

When a master(CICON) is far away from a slave(PLC), using the function of the modem link, a PLC
can be linked with the CICON.
As it is available to link with the PLC located at the place difficult to access as well as to link with a
PLC at a long distance without moving the contents of the PLC, using the communication service of
the CICON, programming is easy after installation. This function reduces the time and efforts taken
when installing and modifying.

· CICON-Modem Link Method
This service is to link a computer link module with the CICON through a modem. After the CICON is
connected with a telephone, the order of remote link is as follows.
1. Select the menu to set up a dial-up modem and the CICON protocol as the parameters of a
computer link module. And select the menu to set up baud rate.
2. After connecting a modem with a computer link module and a telephone wire to the modem, turn
the power on.
3. Select the menu to initialize the modem.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1153

4. After the CICON is run, select the environment setup in the tools.
5. Select the dial-up and set the values for other parameters.
6. If the CICON dials, the message that the dial-up link is completed will appear.
7. It is available to control the PLC at a remote place.

6.2.6.5

Leased Line Modem Communication

Outline
A computer link module is used for the long-distance communication using a leased line through a leased
line modem of external type and the control of the modem for communication.

Leased Line Modem Specifications
The performance of the leased line modem communication using a computer link module is decided
according to the state of a leased line. For reliable communication, the modem complying with a
recommended standard is to be used.

· Baud Rate

Over 1200 bps

· DTE Interface

CTS / RTS Flow Control

· Error Correction

Corrects error when sending data

· Carrier Control

Controls to send carrier

· Line Control

Full duplex/Half duplex(2-wire, 4-wire)

· RTS/CTS Delay Time

Within 500ms

Modem Link Method
Order to Link a Computer Link Module with a Modem

1154

CIMON-PLC

1) Connect a RS-232C cable to an external type modem and a computer link module.
2) Select the menu to set up the leased modem method as the communication method in the CICON.

3) Make sure the modem is initialized after inputting the power to it.
4) If the modem is not initialized normally, make sure the communication method is set up as the leased
line modem communication and the wiring of the RS-232C cable.
5) The wiring of the RS232C cable is 1:1 connection.

6.2.6.6

RS485 PLC Link Service

Outline
CM1-SC01A/SC01B/SC02A card are used for this service, which is the protocol using a RS485 Network to
exchange data between the CIMON PLCs. The specifications are as follows.
· Maximum connected PLCs : 32 units
· Up to 32 sending blocks per PLC can be assigned.
· The interval of communication for each sending block can be set up in the range from 50ms to 3s.
· The data of up to 64 words per one sending block can be sent.
· The number of the communication blocks assigned to each PLC, summing receiving blocks and sending
blocks, is up to 64.
· The necessary blocks selected among the sending blocks of other PLCs in a network are assigned to
receiving blocks.

Link Points

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1155

Max. Comm. Points

Max. Sending Points

Max. Block No.

Max. Points per Block

4,096

2,048

64Points (0~63)

Processing the Sent Data and the Received Data under PLC Link
An Example is taken to explain how data are processed when they are sent or received under PLC Link.
· Sending Party : This is used to set up the data read, the number of the block where data is sent, data
size and sending interval to a sending party in broadcasting method.
· Receiving Party : This is used to set up the station number and block number for the sent data to a
receiving party in broadcasting method to receive a desired data.

[Ex.] Station 0 sends the data of Device D0000 and Station 1 stores received data in Device
Y0000.

Sending Party (Station: 0)
Type

Block Number

Sending Interval

Address

Size

Sending Block

100ms

D0000

10 Words

Type

Station Number

Block Number

Address

Size

Receiving Block

Y0000

4 Words

Receiving Party (Station: 1)

The block number of a sending party and the one of a receiving party are the same as 0, and the station
number of the sending party is set up as 0 like the one of the receiving party. In this condition, the receiving
party can receive every 100ms and the data sent from the sending party every 100ms. Though the sending
party sends the data of 10-word size, the receiving party selects and receives the necessary data of 4-word
size. But, if the size of received data is greater than the size of sent data, the PLC will receive the data as
much as the size of the sent data.

Setting up PLC Link Parameter
To run PLC Link and to exchange data between communication modules, the parameter is to be set up in

1156

CIMON-PLC

the CICON.

1) Creating a Project in the CICON
Select the menu to run the CICON and to open a corresponding project.
[Picture 6-1]

2) Setting up PLC Link Parameter
1. Selecting PLC Link Parameter:
If you select the PLC Link on the window like [Picture 6-1], a PLC link dialog box
will appear. In the dialog box, up to 4 communication modules can be set up for
one CPU. To set up the PLC Link to a mounted communication module, select Link(0), Link(1),
Link(2) and Link(3) on the top of the dialog box and enter the values for each communication module

a. Setting up PLC Link Type:
PLC Link Type is used to set up basic items such as network type, base, slot number, station number
and so on.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1157

[Picture 6-2. PLC Link Setup]

Network

This is used to set up the type of the communication module for PLC Link. If you do
not use PLC Link, select the Not Use.
Here, select the RS232C/485.

Base

This is used to select the base where the communication module for PLC Link is
mounted. For example, if there is no expansion base (The base where a expansion
card is mounted), select the Local. If there is expansion base (The base where a
expansion card is mounted), select the Expansion Base where the communication
module is mounted.

Slot

This is used to select the slot number of the base where a communication module is
mounted.

b. Setting up the communication block for PLC Link:
Communication Block is used to register the information about sending/receiving real data. If you
select RS232C/422 as Network and the Add button in [Picure 6-2. PLC Link Setup], a Communication
Block dialog box will appear like [Picture 6-3. Communication Block Setup].

1158

CIMON-PLC

[Picture 6-3. Communication Block Setup]

Sending

When communication modules communicate each other, this is used to send a
selected block.

Receiving

When communication modules communicate each other, this is used to receive a
selected block.

Station No.

When communication modules communicate each other, in case of sending data, it
is not necessary to set up station number. But, in case of receiving data, the station
number of a receiving communication module is to be selected. The station number
can be set up in the range from 0 to 63.

Block No.

The communication modules for a sending party communicate with each peculiar
block number. In the same way, the communication modules for a receiving party
have each peculiar block number to receive data. The receiving block number is
used to detect the data that a receiving party wants together with the station number
when the party communicates with a sending party. But, the block number can be set
up in the range from 0 to 31. To receive the data of a sending party, the same
number is to be set up as the block number for the sending party and the block
number for a receiving party.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1159

Sending

The sending interval, the parameter for deciding the interval at which data are sent,

Interval

can be set up in the range from 50ms to 3sec according to users’need. For example,
if 50 ms is set up as sending interval, the data will be sent every 50ms.

Device to Pick up Data Sent & Device to Store The Received Data (Address):
· When sending: This is used to set up the device where the data sent are read.
· When receiving: This is used to set up the device where received data are stored.
Device to Pick up Data Sent & Device to Store The Received Data (Size):
This, the size of the data sent or received, can be set up by the word. But, the size is
from one word to 64 words. If the data size of a sending device is greater than the
size of the data set up to a receiving device, the necessary data as much as the size
of the one set up to the receiving device can be received selectively and used.

[Ex.] The communication module of Station 1 sends Block 0, 1, 2 and 3, and receives Block 4,
5, 6 and 7. And the communication module of Station 2 sends Block 4, 5, 6, and 7, receives 0,
1, 2 and 3. An RS232C/422 card is mounted on Slot 4. Each data size is one word and the
interval is 50 ms each.
Such case is taken as an example and the PLC link parameter for it is configured as follows.
[Station 1]

Station 1 sends the data of the sending devices from D0000 to D0003 by the word at each interval.
The received data will be written to the corresponding addresses in the receiving devices from Y0000
to Y0030, if the corresponding station and blocks are in accord.

1160

CIMON-PLC

[Station 2]

Enter 2 as the sending station number and 4, 5, 6, 7 as the block number to send at each interval. If
so, the RS232C/422 module of Station 1 receives, comparing the receiving station and the blocks.
In the same way, Station 2 compares the numbers of the blocks in the received frames with Block 0,
1, 2, and 3 of Station 1. And if they are the same, Station 2 receives them and writes the data to the
devices from Y0000 to Y0030.

6.2.6.7

MODBUS Protocol Service

Outline
This is to access CPU data, using MODBUS protocol in a PC.

Parameter Setup

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1161

Select the MODBUS RTU Protocol as the protocol in the Action Mode and enter the station number of the
communication card as the station number. If the parameters are set up, press the download button. If they
are downloaded and you press the upload button, the downloaded value will be uploaded.

Modbus Command
Command

Description

Remarks

1 (Read Coil)

Accesses the bit device where data can be read
and written.

Read Bit

2 (Read Input)

Accesses the bit device where data can be read.

Read Bit

3 (Read Holding)

Accesses the word device where data can be
read and written.

Read Word

4 (Read Input)

Accesses the word device where data can be read.

Read Word

5 (Force Single Coil)

Accesses the bit device where data can be written.

Write Bit

6 (Preset Single Register)

Accesses the word device where data can be written.

Write Word

15 (Force Multiple Coils)

Accesses the bit device where data can be written.

Write Bit

16 (Preset Multiple Regs)

Accesses the word device where data can be written.

Write Word

Address Map
Device Memories of all kinds can be corresponded.

Bit / Word

Modicon Address

CIMON-PLC Address

Size CIMON-PLC

Bit Read Input

100001 ~ 104096

X 0000 ~

4096 Bits

104097 ~ 106144

F 0000 ~

2048 Bits

106145 ~ 107168

T 0000 ~

1024 Bits

1162

CIMON-PLC

Bit Read Coil

Word Input Register

Word Holding Register

107169 ~ 108192

C 0000 ~

1024 Bits

000001 ~ 004096

Y 0000 ~

4096 Bits

004097 ~ 012288

M 0000 ~

8192 Bits

012289 ~ 014336

K 0000 ~

2048 Bits

014337 ~ 016384

L 0000 ~

2048 Bits

400001 ~ 400256

X 0000 ~

256 Words

400257 ~ 400384

F 0000 ~

128 Words

400385 ~ 401408

TC 0000 ~

1024 Words

401409 ~ 402432

CC 0000 ~

1024 Words

402433 ~ 402482

S 0000 ~

50 Words

300001 ~ 300256

Y 0000 ~

256 Words

300257 ~ 300384

K 0000 ~

128 Words

300385 ~ 301408

TS 0000 ~

1024 Words

301409 ~ 302432

CS 0000 ~

1024 Words

302433 ~ 302560

L 0000 ~

128 Words

302561 ~ 303072

M 0000 ~

512 Words

303073 ~ 313072

D 0000 ~

10000 Words

Bit(Read Inputl, Read Coil) occupies Modicon Address bit by bit.
[Ex.] Read Input -> 100001: X0000, 100002: X0001,....., 100017: X0010,.....
[Ex.] Read Coil -> 000001: Y0000, 000002: Y0001,..... , 000017: Y0010,.....

Word(Input Register, Holding Register) occupies Modicon Address word by word.
[Ex.] Input Register ->

400001: X0000, 400002->X0010, 400003->X0020,.....

[Ex.] Holding Register -> 302561: M0000, 302562: M0010, 302563: M0020,......

[Note] Some MODBUS Master devices can read and write the devices from 1 to 9999 in the range of the
address of each data type. In this case, as the part corresponding to the device greater than Modicon
Address 9999 in the data of a PLC cannot be accessed, the access memory of the user program may be
controlled.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.2.6.8

1163

MODBUS Master Special module program Service

Outline
1.1 General information
CM1-SC01A/SC01B/SC02A cards are used for this service, which is the protocol using
RS232/485 MODBUS Master to
exchange data between the Slaves. The specifications are as follows.

•
•
•
•
•

Maximum connectable Slaves: 128 units.
Easy to recognize to communicate successful or not with result bits of communication.
Sequnce program is not necessary when periodic communication.
It is Flexible for Slaves supported variable commands
To communication in special events is possible with command, "SEND"?

CAUTION, identify a version of program for MODBUS Master special program. If it cannot
support program as lower version,
please make sure whether it is the recommend version

Version

1.2

CICON

CM1-CPxx(CPU)

CM1-SC0xx

V1.89

V1.56

V1.40

Supported MODBUS RTU commands

Command

Substance

Remark

1 (Read Coil)

Read the bit device coil

Read Bit

Domain
0X

2 (Read Input)

Read the bit device input

Read Bit

3 (Read Holding)

Read the word device
holding register

Read Word

4 (Read Input)

Read the word device input

Read Word

Write the bit device coil

Write Bit

Write Word

5 (Force Single
Coil)
6 (Preset Single
Register)
16 (Preset Multiple
Regs.)

Write Accesses the word
device register
Write the word device
register

SETTING UP COMMUNICATION CARD
To run MODBUS Master function, the parameter have to be set up in the special module setup. After
running the CICON, select the
menu [ tool - Special Module Setup – RS232C/422 module...]
Please select "MODBUS Master Program".

1164

CIMON-PLC

REGISTER SPECIAL PROGRAM
3.1 Start scan program
- Select [NEW program – MODBUS/RTU Master Program], and register program name.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

Select the [OK] button.
3.2 MODBUS_RTU dialog box will appear, set up a device.

•

Base: This is used select the base of MODBUS/RTU Master module configured.

1165

1166

CIMON-PLC

•
•
•

Slot: This is used select the slot of MODBUS/RTU Master module configured.
Ch : This is used select the channel of MODBUS/RTU Master module configured.
Result: This is used to appear the send/receive data’s result of communication frame.

result

M0000

The comm. Result Flag

The comm. Result Flag Running

Succeed

Fail

Succeed

M0000

M0080

M000B

127

M007F

Frame
No.

Fail

On at all times
1 Scan On Off at communication
flag success

Example of configuration " result " M0000

3.4 REGISTER COMM. BLOCK

•
•
•
•

Dest. Station. : This is used to select a station number of RTU MODBUS Slave configured,
In case of connecting between several slaves used through RS422/485
communication, the station number
have to be different between slaves each other.
Function : This is used to select a suitable function when a data read/write between slaves.
Please refer to the manual
of "Command"
Point Number : Resister read/write domains referred to a address table of slaves. Please refer
to
" Address table in SLAVE "
Start Address: It is used to register the address of a read/write domain which is referred to
address tables of slave.
Please refer to the manual of " Address table of slave "

XP / CP Series(CM1)

•

Data Type : This is used to select a type of send/receive data between slaves. Only selected
analog data (Function 3, 4, 6, 16),
they are valid

Data Type

•
•
•

Valid Data(Byte)

Result Data(Byte)

INT16(High-Order
byte first)

INT16(Low-Order byte
first)

INT32(High-Order
byte first)

INT32(Low-Order byte
first)

Float(High-Order byte
first)

Float(Low-Order byte
first)

Scale Vector: Not Necessary
Data Count: This is used to set up a count of read/write slaves data.

Command(Function)

•

Data Size

1 - Read Coil Status
2 - Read Input Status

Bit Size

3 – Read Holding Registers
4 – Read Input Registers

Word Size

5 – Force Single Coil

Not Necessary.(1Bit Write)

6 – Preset Single Registers

Not Necessary.(2Byte Write)

16 - Preset Multiple Registers

Word Size

device: This is used to select a device address of send/receive data stored.

Function
Read Function
Write Function

•

1167

device

Substance

D0000

Address stored receive data between slaves

D0010

Address stored send data between slaves

Do not transmit Automatically : This is used to communicate the block configured MODBUS

1168

CIMON-PLC

RTU Master
program sequencely(0~15). When you don’t use this function, check the blank. It is possible
to receive data if only
SEND command when check the blank,

Example of MODBUS RTU Master Special Programming Communication

Following picture shows slaves, communication system and frame structure which supported
CIMON-PLC and MODBUS RTU Protocol.

[Information of slave ]
Parameter of slave

Substance

Comm. Protocol

MODBUS RTU protocol(Slave)

Comm. Type

RS232C

Station

Baud Rate

9600bps

Parity

None

Data bit

Stop bit

[ Address table of slave ]
Address

Substance

PLC device address

00001

PV(present)

D00000

XP / CP Series(CM1)

00002

SV(set value)

D00010

…

1169

4-1. EXAMPLE OF REGISTE
1.

Register " a communication parameter of slave" . Please compare to " special module setup "
whether it’s the same or not.

1170

CIMON-PLC

Complete to register two communication blocks ,‘a’and ‘b’

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.2.7

Download PLC program. After downloading, please change the mode to " RUN "

Program PLC scan program for debugging.
a.

In case of succeed in receiving PV value, Increase a data in D00100..

In case of succeed in sending SV value, Increase a data in D00101.

Installing and Testing
Installing and Testing :

· Order of Installation
· Safety Precautions
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

1171

1172

CIMON-PLC

· Testing

6.2.7.1

Order of Installation
1. Prepare the components for system configuration.
2. Mount a communication module in the state that the power for a PLC is not supplied.
3. Make sure there are dust and remains in the connecter of the base where the communication module will be
mounted and whether the connecter pins of the communication module are broken.
4. The maximum number of modules mounted on one base is 8.
When you mount this module, insert the connecting part on the bottom of the module to the slot of a base
exactly in the state that the communication cable is not connected and press the power sufficient to lock the
module to the base completely. Otherwise, an error in the interface with CPU may occur.
5. Tighten the screws at both ends of the RS232C cable to secure connection.
6. Input the power after connecting the communication cable. Make sure whether the module is operated
normally, observing the operation of the LED. In case of normal operation, select the menu to set up various
parameters for the communication module and to download the program to run.

6.2.7.2

Safety Precautions
1. Select communication method correctly.
2. Select the action mode of a computer link module correctly and click it to set up. If the action mode is set up
wrongly, the communication may be disabled.
3. If the station number is duplicated in the state that the action mode is set up as the exclusive communication
mode, there will be an error in communication.
4. Use the cable of the assigned standard as the communication cable.
5. Check where the communication cable is broken.
6. Tighten the screws to fix the communication cable connecter.
7. Connect the cable of Channel 2(RS422/RS485) correctly.

· Installation of RS422 Cable :
Connect TX with RX between the first two stations. Connect TX with TX and RX with RX, between other
stations.
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1173

· Installation of RS485 Cable :
Connect SDA with SDB and RDA with RDB each other in 2-wire type connection.

6.2.7.3

Testing

Check Points before Testing ,
Check Point

Description

Mount of This Module

Is it all right the mounted state of this communication module on the base?

Mount of Standard
Modules

Does the power used for the power module comply with its specifications?
Is it all right the mounted state of the standard modules?
Does a battery connect with the CPU module?

Connection of Comm.
Cable

Is it all right the connected state of the communication cable?

1174

CIMON-PLC

Testing ,
Start
Supplying the Power :
1) Make sure the input power.
2) Make sure the connection of the communication cable.
3) Supply the power.
4) Make sure whether the power LED lamp of the power module is on.
5) Make sure the state of the LED in the CPU module
6) Make sure whether the state of the LED is operated normally.

Select the menu in the CICON to set up the communication parameters of RS232/422 and to download
them to the communication module.

Write user program in the CICON and select the menu to download it to the CPU.

Make sure whether the communication module is operated according to the program.

Finish

6.2.8

Trouble Shooting
Trouble Shooting :

· Error Codes
· Error in Hardware
· Error in Exclusive Communications
· Error in Modem Link when Linking CICON

6.2.8.1

Error Codes
Error Code

Description

Remarks

Hexa(Deci)

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.2.8.2

0x0000 (0)

No error

0x0001 (1)

A module is not initialized.

0x0005 (5)

A CPU module does not respond.

0x0006 (6)

Not able to access buffer memory.

0x0007 (7)

A CPU module is dismounted from a base plate.

0x0009 (9)

CTS signal does not come from modem.

0x000A (10)

A modem is not initialized.

0x000D (13)

Station number for PLC Link is duplicated.

0x0010 (16)

Link between modems is failed.

0x0012 (18)

SND command is duplicated.

0x0013 (19)

RCV command is duplicated.

0x0014 (20)

Invalid serial port is used.

0x0016 (22)

Unregistered frame for sending/receiving

0x0017

A segment is not registered to a frame.

0x0018

The registration of Sending/receiving frame is wrong.

0x001D

Sending/receiving size is over the maximum.

Error in Hardware
This corresponds to Error Code 1, 2, 3, 6 and 7.

1175

1176

6.2.8.3

CIMON-PLC

Error in Exclusive Communications
This corresponds Error Code 5.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1177

1178

6.2.8.4

CIMON-PLC

Error in Modem Link when Linking CICON
This corresponds Error Code 4, 9 and10.

6.2.9

Appendix
Appendix :

· Definitions
· ASCII Code Table

6.2.9.1

Definitions

Communication Method
Simplex

This communication method is that the flow of information is always constant in one
direction. Information cannot be transferred in reverse direction.

Half Duplex

As one-wire cable is used, this communication method is that information can be
transferred in both directions not at the same time, but at regular intervals.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

Full Duplex

1179

As two-wire cable is used, this communication method is that data can be sent and
received at the same time.

Sending Method
According to rate, safety and economical efficiency when data are sent, sending method is classified into
series sending and parallel sending. Advantage, disadvantage and features for each method are described
as follows.

Series sending

This method is to send data bit by bit through one cable. Though baud rate is slow,
installation cost is cheap and software is simple.

Parallel sending

This method is used for a video card or a hard disc in a computer and is to transfer
data by one byte (8 bits). Though baud rate is fast and data is transferred exactly,
there is disadvantage that the longer sending distance is, the higher installation cost
is.

Protocol

This is the communication rule prescribed in advance between a sending party and a
receiving party to send and receive efficient and confident information without error
among more than two (2) computers and terminal units.

Asynchronous

This method is to send word by word in synchronism in case of series sending. Start

method

bit is sent in front of one character and the character code is sent. Finally, Stop bit is
sent.

Node

This is the location where the data in the tree structure of a network is. Each node is
composed of the device storing data and the pointer device for sub-node.

BPS and CPS

· BPS : Bits Per Second
· CPS : Characters Per Second
BPS means the number of sending bits in a second. CPS, the abbreviation for
characters per second, is the unit of printer speed and means the number of the
characters printed by a printer in a second.

Packet

This is a bundle of the data used when sending data. The data communicated
between two stations is divided into suitable-size Packets and the packets are sent
one by one. Packet includes the information about control such as receiving party,
address or control code as well as a certain-size data.

Port

This is the part of the computer used to communicate with other devices. In case of
computer link communication, this means RS-232C port or RS-422(485) port.

1180

CIMON-PLC

RS232C

This, one of the communication interface codes established by Electronics Industry
Association (EIA), is mainly used to link with diverse devices such as computer,
terminal unit, printer, floater and modem. And this is a synchronous series
communication interface or an asynchronous series communication interface. There
is the disadvantage that sending distance is short and only one to one communication
is available, but cost is cheap.

RS422 / RS485

This, one of series communication interfaces such as RS-232C, is used in longer
sending distance than the one of RS-232C and one to N access is available.
RS-422(1:N) is used for Full Duplex communication with 4 signal lines and
RS-485(N:M) is used for Half Duplex communication with 2 signal lines.

BCC

Block Check Character
As series sending may send distorted signal due to the influence of noise to sending
line, this is the data that is for a receiving party to decide whether signal is normal or
distorted. A receiving party calculates the data received up to the front of BCC and
compares the result with received BCC to decide whether signal is normal or not.

FRAME

This, the constant-size data sent in data communication, includes additional
information such as destination code, control character for synchronism, parity or
CRC to detect an error as well as data.

6.2.9.2

CIMON-PLC/HMI Protocal
CIMON-PLC / HMI Protocal Manual.

See :
Structure of Frame

Exclusive Communication

Error Response

6.2.9.2.1 Structure of Frame

Request Frame (Master) : The frame that an outside communication device requests to a computer
link module
ENQ

Stn

Cmd

Leng

Data

BCC

EOT

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1181

Response Frame (Slave) : The frame that a computer link module responds to an outside
communication device
STX

Stn

Cmd

Leng

Data

BCC

ETX

1) The structure of a sending frame and the one of a receiving frame are same.
2)

The same as the command codes received from a request frame (Master) are used for
response frame.
But, if there is an error in communication or process, Code E is responded.

Description for Codes
Code

Hex Value

Description

ENQ

05H

Master Frame Header

EOT

04H

Master Frame Tail

STX

02H

Slave Header

ETX

03H

Slave Tail

Stn

00H~1FH, FFH

PLC Station Number

Cmd

Command

Leng

Length of Data Device (Length Bytes), Hexadecimal

Data

Data Device according to Command (Length Bytes)

BCC

Remainder value when dividing the binary-sum from Cmd to the
end of data by 256

Commands :

The commands used for exclusive communication service are as follows
Code

ASCII

Read Word Data

52H

Reads Word Memory Device.

Write Word Data

57H

Writes to Word Memory Device.

Read Bit Data

72H

Reads Bit Memory Device.

Write Bit Data

77H

Writes to Bit Memory Device.

Mode Change

4DH

Changes PLC Mode.

58H

Registers Monitoring Device.

Monitor Read

59H

Reads Registered Monitoring Device

Error Response

45H

Responds Error in PLC.

Command

Monitoring

Function

1182

CIMON-PLC

6.2.9.2.2 Exclusive Communications

IN THIS TOPIC :
READ Word Data
Write Word Data
Read Bit Data
Write Bit Data
Change PLC Mode
Register Monitoring Device
Read Monitoring Device

READ WORD DATA

Function
· This is used to read the data in the word device of a PLC. (Max. 63 words)
· Device Symbol : X, Y, M, L, K, F, Z, TC, TS, CC, CS, D, S
Request Frame (Master)
· COMMAND : ‘R’
· Data Device Format
Address
8 Char

......

Size (Word)
Hexadecimal,
2 Char

Address
8 Char

Size (Word)
Hexadecimal,
2 Char

Master(Request Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

ENQ
05H

Stn
L
02

30H

Cmd

Leng
H

R
32H

52H

Leng
L
0A

30H

Data

BCC
H

D0000001 01
41H

4430303030303031
3031H

BCC
L
B9

42H

EOT
EOT

39H

04H

Leng is the length of a data and its value means the length of a data (D0000001 01).
Data means the address really read (D0000001) and the length of the word data read (01).
BCC is the remainder value when dividing the binary-sum from Cmd to the end of data by
256
Response Frame (Slave)
· COMMAND ( In completed case: ‘R’ / In failed case: ‘E’)
· Format of Data Device

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1183

[Completed Case]
PLC DATA
Word Data
4 Char

Word Data
4 Char

......

Word Data
4 Char

Slave(Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H

Stn
L
02

30H

Cmd

Leng
H

R
32H

52H

Leng
L

Data

04
30H

BCC
H

F4AC
34H

46344143H

BCC
L
B4

42H

ETX
ETX

34H

03H

Stn
H

STX
02H

Stn
L
02

30H

Cmd

Leng
H

E
32H

45H

Leng
L

Error Code

02
30H

BCC
H

02
32H

3032H

BCC
L
09

30H

ETX
ETX

39H

03H

The request frame received from a master is used as the response frame of a PLC.
BCC is the remainder value when dividing the binary-sum from Cmd to the end of data by 256.
As the response frame is not processed, Cmd is ‘E’.
Leng means the length of error code(02).
Error code displays the type of an error. Please refer to the ‘ERROR RESPONSE’.
Ex.) Read data from Address D00040 of Station 02H.
Master(Request Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

ENQ
05H

Stn
L
02

30H

Cmd

Leng
H

R
32H

52H

Leng
L
0A

30H

Data

BCC
H

D0000040 01
41H

BCC
L

EOT
EOT

4430303030303430
3031H

42H

43H

04H

Data

BCC
H

BCC
L

ETX

Completed Case> reads 1-word data ‘F4AC’
Slave(Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

Stn
L

Cmd

Leng
H

Leng
L

1184

CIMON-PLC

STX
02H

02
30H

R
32H

F4AC

ETX

52H

30H

34H

46344143H

42H

34H

03H

Cmd

Leng
H

Leng
L

Error Code

BCC
H

BCC
L

ETX

Failed Case> Error in BCC
Slave(Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H

Stn
L
02

30H

E
32H

45H

02
30H

02
32H

3032H

30H

ETX
39H

03H

Write WORD DATA ?
Function
· This is used to write a data to the word device of a PLC.
· Device Symbol : X, Y, M, L, K, F, Z, TC, TS, CC, CS, D, S
Request Frame
· COMMAND : ‘W’
· Format of Data Device
Address Size (Word)
8 Char Hexadecima
l, 2 Char

Word Data
Hexadecimal,
Size*4 Char

.....

Address
8 Char

Size (Word)
Hexadecimal,
2 Char

Word Data
Hexadecimal,
Size*4 Char

Master(Request Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

ENQ
05H

Stn
L

Cmd

32H

57H

02
30H

Leng
H

Leng
L

Data

45H

4430303030303130
3031 46413334H

0E
30H

BCC
H

D0000010 01 FA34

BCC
L
B0

42H

EOT
EOT

30H

04H

Leng is the length of a data and its value means the length of the Data (D0000010 01 FA34).
The address really written (D0000010), the length of the data (01) and the data written (FA34)
are input in the Data (D1000 02 FA34).
BCC is the remainder value (F3) when dividing the binary-sum from Cmd to the end of data by
256.
Response Frame
· COMMAND (In completed case:

‘W’ / In failed case : ‘E’)

· Format of Data Device
[Completed Case]
No Data?
Slave(Response Format)

XP / CP Series(CM1)

HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H

Stn
L
02

30H

Cmd

Leng
H

W
32H

57H

Leng
L

BCC
H

00
30H

BCC
L
B7

30H

42H

1185

ETX
ETX

37H

03H

The request frame received from a master is used as the response frame of a PLC.
BCC is the remainder value when dividing the binary-sum from Cmd to the end of data by 256.
As the response frame is processed, Cmd is ‘W’.
Leng means the length of a data.
[Failed Case]
ERROR CODE
Error Code
2 Char
Slave(Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H

Stn
L

Cmd

32H

45H

02
30H

Leng
H

Leng
L

Error Code

32H

3031H

02
30H

BCC
H

BCC
L
08

ETX
ETX

30H

38H

03H

The request frame received from a master is used as the response frame of a PLC.
BCC is the remainder value when dividing the binary-sum from Cmd to the end of data by 256.
As the response frame is not processed, Cmd is ‘E’.
Leng(02) means the length of Error Code(01).
Error code displays the type of an error. Please refer to the ‘ERROR RESPONSE’.

Ex.) Write FA34H to Address D0010 and 8D41H to Address D0020.
Master(Request Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

ENQ
05H

Stn
L
02

30H

Cmd

Leng
H

W
32H

57H

Leng
L
12

Data

BCC
H

D0000010 02 FA34
8D41

31H

32H

4430303030303130
3032 46413334
38443431H

Leng
H

Leng
L

BCC
H

Completed Case > No Data?
Slave(Response Format)
HEADER
STX

Stn
H

Stn
L
02

Cmd
W

BCC
L
B7

ETX
ETX

BCC
L
80

38H

EOT
EOT

30H

04H

1186

CIMON-PLC

02H

30H

32H

57H

30H

42H

37H

03H

Failed Case>Receiving unknown command code (01H).
Slave(Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H

Stn
L
02

30H

Cmd

Leng
H

E
32H

Leng
L

Error Code

45H

30H

BCC
H

01
32H

BCC
L
08

3031H

30H

ETX
ETX

38H

03H

Read BIT DATA

Function
· This is used to read the data in the bit device of a PLC.
· Device Symbol : X, Y, M, L, K, F, Z, T, C
Request Frame
·
·

COMMAND : ‘r’
Format of Data Device
Address
8 Char

.......

Size (Bit)
Hexadecimal,
2 Char

Address
8 Char

Size (Bit)
Hexadecimal, 2
Char

Master(Requset Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

ENQ
05H

Stn
L

Cmd

33H

72H

03
30H

Leng
H

Leng
L

Data

41H

4D303030313030
46 3032H

0A
30H

BCC
H

M000010F 02

BCC
L
F9

46H

EOT
EOT

39H

04H

• Leng is the length of a data and its value means the length of Data (M000010F 02H).
• The address really read(M000010F) and the length of the data(02) are input in the Data.
• BCC is the remainder value when dividing the binary-sum from Cmd to the end of data by
256.
Response Frame
· COMMAND (In completed case: ‘r’/ In failed case: ‘E’)
· Format of Data Device
[Completed Case]
PLC Data
Bit Data

Bit Data

......

Bit Data

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1 Char

1187

1 Char

Slave(Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ

Stn
L
01

30H

Cmd

Leng
H

r
31H

72H

Leng
L
02

30H

Data

BCC
H

01
32H

30 31H

BCC
L
35

33H

ETX
ETX

35H

03H

[ Failed Case ]
Error Code
Error Code
2 Char
Slave(Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H

Stn
L
03

30H

Cmd

Leng
H

E
33H

45H

Leng
L
02

30H

Error Code

BCC
H

01
32H

3031H

BCC
L
08

30H

ETX
ETX

38H

03H

Ÿ The request frame received from a master is used as the response frame of a PLC.
Ÿ BCC is the remainder value when dividing the binary-sum from Cmd to the end of data by 256.
Ÿ As the response frame is not processed, Cmd is ‘E’.
Ÿ Leng(02) means the length of Error Code(01).
ŸError code indicates the type of an error. Please refer to the ‘ERROR RESPONSE’.

Ex.) Read the bit data in Address M0104 and Address M0105 of Station 03 PLC.
Master(Request Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

ENQ
05H

Stn
L
03

30H

Cmd

Leng
H

r
33H

72H

Leng
L
0A

Data

BCC
H

M0000104 02

BCC
L
E7

EOT
EOT

30H

41H

4D3030303031 3034
3032H

45H

37H

04H

Leng
H

Leng
L

Data

BCC
H

BCC
L

ETX

32H

30 31H

Completed Case > Reads Data ‘0 1’.
Slave(Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H

Stn
L

Cmd

33H

72H

03
30H

02
30H

35
33H

ETX
35H

03H

1188

CIMON-PLC

Failed Case > Error in BCC
Slave (Response Format)
HEADER Stn
Stn
Cmd
H
L
STX
02H

03
30H

Leng
H

E
33H

45H

Leng
L

Error Code

02
30H

BCC
H

02
32H

BCC
L
09

3032H

30H

ETX
ETX

39H

03H

Write BIT DATA
Function

· This is used to write data to the bit device of a PLC
· Device Symbol : X, Y, M, L, K, F, Z, T, C
Request Frame
· COMMAND : ‘w’
· Format of Data Device
·
Address
Size (Bit)
8 Char Hexadecimal,

Bit Data
Size*1 Char

…

Address
8 Char

2 Char

Size (Bit)
Hexadecimal,
2 Char

Bit Data
Size*1 Char

Master(Request Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

ENQ
05H

Stn
L
03

30H

Cmd

Leng
H

w
33H

77H

Leng
L
0D

30H

Data

BCC
H

M0000101 03 110
44H

4D303030303130 31
3033 313130H

BCC
L
7F

37H

EOT
EOT

46H

04H

• Leng(0B) is the length of data and its value means the length of Data (M0000101 03 110).
• The address really written(M0000101), the length of the data(03) and the data written(110)
are input in the Data.
• BCC is the remainder value when dividing the binary-sum from Cmd to the end of data by
256.
Response Frame
· COMMAND ( In completed case:

‘w’ / In failed case:

‘E’)

· Format of Data Device
[Completed Case]
No Data
Slave(Response Format)
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H

Stn
L

Cmd

03
30H

Leng
H

w
33H

77H

Leng
L

BCC
H

00
30H

BCC
L
D7

30H

44H

1189

ETX
ETX

37H

03H

Ÿ The request frame received from a master is used as the response frame of a PLC.
Ÿ BCC is the remainder value when dividing the binary-sum from Cmd to the end of data by 256.
Ÿ As the response frame is processed, Cmd is ‘w’.
Ÿ Leng(00) means the length of the data.
[Failed Case]
Error Code
Error Code
2 Char
Slave(Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H

Stn
L
02

30H

Cmd

Leng
H

E
32H

45H

Leng
L

Error Code

BCC
H

30H

32H

BCC
L
0B

3034H

30H

ETX
ETX

42H

03H

• The request frame received from a master is used as the response frame of a PLC.
• BCC is the remainder value when dividing the binary-sum from Cmd to the end of data by
256.
• As the response frame is not processed, Cmd is ‘E’.
• Leng(02) means the length of Error Code (04).
• Error code indicates the type of an error. Please refer to the ‘ERROR RESPONSE’.

Ex.) Write bit data to Bit Address M0104.
Master(Request Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

ENQ
05H

Stn
L

Cmd

31H

77H

Cmd

01
30H

Leng
H

Leng
L

Data

30H

44H

4D303030303130 34
3033 313130H

Leng
H

Leng
L

BCC
H

M0000104 03 110

< Completed Case >
Slave(Response Format)
HEADER
STX

Stn
H

Stn
L
01

BCC
L
D7

ETX
ETX

BCC
L
82

38H

EOT
EOT

32H

04H

1190

CIMON-PLC

02H

30H

31H

77H

30H

Leng
H

Leng
L

44H

37H

03H

Failed Case > Data Size Overflow
Slave(Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX

Stn
L
01

02H

30H

Cmd
E

31H

45H

Error Code

02
30H

BCC
H

04
32H

3034H

BCC
L
0B

ETX
ETX

30H

42H

03H

BCC
H

BCC
L

EOT

Change PLC Mode
Function
· This is used to change the operation mode of a PLC. .

Request Frame
· COMMAND : ‘M’
· Format of Data Device
Mode Code

Mode

Code

Run

Program

Pause / Remote

Master(Request Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

ENQ
05H

Stn
L
01

30H

Cmd

Leng
H

M
31H

4DH

Leng
L
01

30H

Data
0

31H

30H

DE
44H

EOT
45H

04H

• Leng(01) is the length of data.
• Mode code value(0) is input in the Data(0).
? • BCC is the remainder value when dividing the binary-sum from Cmd to the end of data by
256.
• Only the case CPU is under REMOTE status is available.
Response Frame
· COMMAND ( In completed case: ‘M’/ In failed case: ‘E’)
· Format of Data DEvice

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1191

[Completed Case] No Date?

Slave(Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H

Stn
L
01

30H

Cmd

Leng
H

M
31H

4DH

Leng
L

BCC
H

00
30H

BCC
L
AD

30H

41H

ETX
ETX

44H

03H

• The request frame received from a master is used as the response frame of a PLC.
• BCC is the remainder value when dividing the binary-sum from Cmd to the end of data by
256.
• As the response frame is processed, Cmd is ‘M’.
• Leng(00) means the length of the data.
[Failed Case]
Error Code
Error Code
2 Char
Slave(Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H

Stn
L
02

30H

Cmd

Leng
H

E
32H

45H

Leng
L

Error Code

02
30H

BCC
H

03
32H

BCC
L
0A

3033H

30H

ETX
ETX

41H

03H

Ÿ The request frame received from a master is used as the response frame of a PLC.
Ÿ BCC is the remainder value when dividing the binary-sum from Cmd to the end of data by 256.
Ÿ As the response frame is not processed, Cmd is ‘E’.
Ÿ Leng(02) means the length of Error Code (03).
Ÿ Error code indicates the type of an error. Please refer to the ‘ERROR RESPONSE’.

Ex.) Change the operation mode of a PLC to PAUSE/REMOTE mode.
Master(Requset Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

ENQ
05H

Stn
L
01

30H

Cmd

Leng
H

M
31H

Leng
L

Data

BCC
H

4DH

30H

31H

Cmd

Leng

32H

45H

Completed Case
Slave(Response Format)
HEADER

Stn

BCC

BCC
L

ETX

EOT
EOT

30H

04H

1192

CIMON-PLC

H
STX
02H

01
30H

M
31H

4DH

L
AD

30H

Leng
H

Leng
L

41H

ETX
44H

03H

< Failed CAse > Invalid mode
Slave(Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H

Stn
L

Cmd

01
30H

E
31H

Error Code

45H

30H

BCC
H

03
32H

BCC
L
0A

3033H

30H

ETX
ETX

41H

03H

Word Size
16 , 2 Char

Master(Request Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

ENQ
05H

Stn
L
01

30H

Cmd

Leng
H

X
31H

58H

Leng
L
0B

30H

Data
0

42H

D0000001

BCC
H
02

30H 44303030303 3032
03031H
H

BCC
L
C0

43H

EOT
EOT

30H

04H

• Leng(0B) is the length of a data.
• The Mode code(0), the Address(D0000001) and the Size(02) are input in the Data (0
D00001 02).
• BCC is the remainder value when dividing the binary-sum from Cmd to the end of data by
256.
Response Frame
· COMMAND ( In completed case:

‘X’ / In failed case: ‘E’)

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1193

· Format of Data Device
[Completed Case]
No Data
Slave(Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H

Stn
L
01

30H

Cmd

Leng
H

X
31H

58H

Leng
L

BCC
H

00
30H

BCC
L
B8

30H

42H

ETX
ETX

38H

03H

• The request frame received from a master is used as the response frame of a PLC.
• BCC is the remainder value when dividing the binary-sum from Cmd to the end of data by
256.
• As the response frame is processed, Cmd is ‘X’.
• Leng(00) means the length of the data.
[Failed Case]
Error Code
Error Code
2 Char
Slave(Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H

Stn
L
01

30H

Cmd

Leng
H

E
31H

45H

Leng
L
02

30H

Error Code

BCC
H

07
32H

3037H

BCC
L
0E

30H

ETX
ETX

45H

03H

The request frame received from a master is used as the response frame of a PLC.
BCC is the remainder value when dividing the binary-sum from Cmd to the end of data by 256.
As the response frame is not processed, Cmd is ‘E’.
Leng(02) means the number of Error Codes (07).
Error code indicates the type of an error. Please refer to the ‘ERROR RESPONSE’.
Ex.) Register Frame 1 and Addresses from D0011 to D0014 to Station 1.
Master(Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

ENQ
05H

Stn
L
01

30H

Cmd

Leng
H

X
31H

< Completed Case >

58H

Leng
L
0B

30H

Data

BCC
H

1 D0000011 04
42H

31 443030303030
3131 3034H

BCC
L
C5

43H

EOT
EOT

35H

04H

1194

CIMON-PLC

Slave(Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H

Stn
L

Cmd

31H

58H

01
30H

Leng
H

Leng
L

BCC
H

30H

42H

00
30H

BCC
L
B8

ETX
ETX

38H

03H

Failed CAse > Invalid Monitor Frame No.(0h~Fh)
Slave(Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H

Stn
L

Cmd

01
30H

Leng
H

E
31H

45H

Leng
L

Error Code

02
30H

BCC
H

07
32H

3037H

BCC
L
0E

ETX
ETX

30H

45H

03H

BCC
H

BCC
L

EOT

Read Monitoring Device
Function
· This is used to read the registered monitoring device..

Request Frame
· COMMAND : ‘Y’
· Format of Data Device
Frame No.
1 Char
Master(Request Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

ENQ
05H

Stn
L
01

30H

Cmd

Leng
H

Y
31H

59H

Leng
L

Data

01
30H

0
31H

30H

45H

EOT
41H

04H

Leng(01) is the length of a data.
Frame No. is input in the Data(0).
BCC is the remainder value when dividing the binary-sum from Cmd to the end of data by 256.

Request Frame
· COMMAND ( In completed case: ‘Y’/ In failed case:

‘E’)

· Format of Data Device
[Completed Case]
Frame No.

Word Data
4 Char

.....

Word Data
4 Char

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1195

Slave(Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

ENQ
05H

Stn
L

Cmd

31H

59H

01
30H

Leng
H

Leng
L

Data

35H

30 38374633H

05
30H

BCC
H

0 87F3

BCC
L
D6

44H

EOT
EOT

36H

04H

· The request frame received from a master is used as the response frame of a PLC.
· BCC is the remainder value when dividing the binary-sum from Cmd to the end of data by 256.
· As the response frame is processed, Cmd is ‘Y’.
· Leng(05) means the length of the Data(0 87F3).
[Failed Case]
Error Code
Error Code
2 Char
Slave(Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H

Stn
L
01

30H

Cmd

Leng
H

E
31H

45H

Leng
L
02

30H

Error Code

BCC
H

08
32H

3038H

BCC
L
0F

30H

ETX
ETX

46H

03H

Ÿ The request frame received from a master is used as the response frame of a PLC.
Ÿ BCC is the remainder value when dividing the binary-sum from Cmd to the end of data by 256.
Ÿ As the response frame is not processed, Cmd is ‘E’.
Ÿ Leng(02) means the length of Error Code(08H).
ŸError code indicates the type of an error. Please refer to the ‘ERROR RESPONSE’.

Ex.) If Frame 2h, Address D1005 and Address D1006 are registered as a monitoring device,
read the registered device.
Master(Request Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

ENQ
05H

Stn
L
01

30H

Cmd

Leng
H

Y
31H

Leng
L
01

Data

BCC
H

BCC
L
EC

EOT
EOT

59H

30H

31H

32H

45H

43H

04H

Stn
L

Cmd

Leng
H

Leng
L

Data

BCC
H

BCC
L

ETX

31H

59H

39H

32 38374633
33324537H

< Completed Case >
Slave(Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H

01
30H

09
30H

2 87F3 32E7

BD
42H

ETX
44H

03H

1196

CIMON-PLC

< Failed Case > Number of the unregistered(Not initialized) frame
Slave(Response Format)
HEADER

Stn
H

STX
02H

Stn
L

Cmd

01
30H

Leng
H

E
32H

45H

Leng
L

Error Code

02
30H

BCC
H

08
32H

3038H

BCC
L
0F

30H

ETX
ETX

46H

03H

6.2.9.2.3 Error Response

Function
· This is the function to inform a master of error occurring in the process of a communication
frame or a request frame and is
used in a response frame only.
Request Frame
· All request frames
Response Frame
· COMMAND : ‘E’
· Format of Data Device
· Error Code
Error Code
2 Char

Error Code

Description

No error.

Receives unknown command code.

An error occurs in BCC.

CPU does not respond.

Receives unknown device code.

Exceeds the device read.

Invalid address.

Internal error

Receives the number of invalid data

Invalid data

Unregistered (Not initialized) frame number
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.2.9.3

Invalid Monitor Frame No. (0h – Fh) Invalid frame number

CPU is not in REMOTE status.

Invalid CPU status is assigned.

An error occurs in the size of the data written.

It is disabled to write.

It is disabled to change mode.

1197

ASCII Code Table
BIN

Hex

Symbol

BIN

Hex

Symbol

BIN

Hex

Symbol

BIN

Hex

Symbol

NUL

(space)

SOH

STX

ETX

EOT

100

ENQ

101

ACK

102

BEL

103

(

104

TAB

)

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

DLE

112

DC1

113

DC2

114

DC3

115

DC4

116

NAK

117

SYN

118

ETB

119

CAN

120

121

SUB

122

ESC

;

[

123

{

124

]

125

}

1198

6.3

CIMON-PLC

126

127

Ethernet Module
CIMON-PLC Ethernet :
· Support protocols like ARP, ICMP, IP, TCP, UDP.
· No limit on the number of the units mounted on a base.
· Support PLC Link function for high-speed data communication among CIMONPLC modules and enable to communicate with 64 stations as maximum at the
same time.
· Support DNP3.0 protocol. (CM1-EC01DNP)

Item

CM1-EC01A

Media Interface

CM1-EC10A

CM1-EC10B

10BASE-T

10BASE-T
100BASE-TX

100BASE-FX

Baudrate

10 Mbps

100 Mbps

Media

UTP/STP
Category5

Node Distance

100m (Node<->Hub)

Service Capacity

UDP 9 Services
TCP 9 Services

S
E
R
V
I
C
E

Loader

Yes

HMI Protocol

Yes

MODBUS/TCP

Yes

PLC Link
(Public Net)

Yes

High-Speed Link
(Private Net)

Yes

DNP 3.0

Yes

PLC Link
(Private Net)

CM1-EC01DNP

CM1-EC04DNP

UTP/STP
Category5

Single Host

UTP/STP
Category5
Auto MIDX

SC,
Multi-Mode
(1310nm)
2km

4Hosts

UDP 16 Services
TCP 16 Services

Contents :
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

·
·
·
·

6.3.1

Specifications
Internal I/O Table
Installing and Testing
Buffer Memory

·
·
·
·

1199

System Configuration
Communication Funcions
CIMON PLC HMI Protocol Service
Trouble Shooting

New Products : EC10A /B
New Modules
Fast Ethernet modules for CP/XP PLC series :

· CM1-EC10A : 100BASE-TX
· CM1-EC10B : 100BASE-FX (Fiber Optic)

What’s New?
These new modules include and support all functions of CM1-EC01A. Moreover, these modules provide
additional functions as described below.

PLC Link Enhancements
· One CPU system can manage more than 4 different PLC link networks at the same time.
· Fast data processing speed.

Service Capacity Enhancements
· EC01A : 18 channels (UDP 9 channels + TCP 9 channels)
· EC10A/B : 32 channels (UDP 16 channels + TCP 16 channels)

Auto media detection (CM1-EC10A)
· Auto MDI / MDIX (no need to prepare twisted cable)
· Auto Negotiation (10 Mbps / 100 Mbps)

Specification
Items

Specifications

1200

CIMON-PLC

CM1-EC10A

CM1-EC10B

Media Interface

10BASE-T / 100BASE-TX

100BASE-FX

Services

· CICON (programming tool) service
· PLC Link (private/public network) service
· HMI protocol service (TCP/IP, UDP/IP)
· MODBUS/TCP service
· User protocol programming function

6.3.2

Service Channels

UDP/IP : 16 ch

TCP/IP : 16 ch

Max. Segment Distance

100 m

Max. Frame Size

1500 Bytes

Media

UTP/STP Category 5
Auto MDIX

2 km

SC, Multimode (1310nm)

CIMON Ethernet PLC Link Performance Test
Test Overview
· Purpose : Measuring the data transmission delay in Ethernet PLC Link of CIMON PLC.
· Protocol : The Ethernet PLC link configured by the special program of CICON.
· Tested Module : CM1-XP3A, CM1-EC10A
· Test Period : 07th Dec. 2006 – 11th Dec. 2006
· Test Network : The network is a data link system between 13 stations. A master station has three
Ethernet modules. Each of these modules served a CIMON-SCADA system, a CICON and the PLC link
network. Following picture explains above network configuration.

Measuring

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1201

Stn0
1. STN0 had additional two Ethernet modules for CIMON-SCADA and CICON service (Total 3 EC10As).
2. STN0 manipulated two bit flags for other PLC stations each in network. One bit for transmit (Tx bit) and
another bit for received flag (Rx bit).
3. Controlled the Tx bit not to be the same state with Rx bit.
4. Measured the time span between Tx bit control and Rx bit change.
5. The average and maximum delay were calculated from above measured time span data.
6. The time span was measured by means of the 10 mSec. timer of CPU.

Stn1 – Stn12
1. The sequence program copied the Rx bit to Tx bit.
(Note) The Tx period of all stations are configured as 20mSec.

Measured
The measured values after 96 hours (4 days) continuous test are as follows.
· Maximum Delay : 110 – 130 mSec. (110mSec. for 11 stations, 130mSec. for 1 station)
· Average Delay : 40 – 50 mSec.

Conclusion
Above measured time delays include both two directions of data transmission. Consequently, the delay
time of single direction can be induced as followings. (a half of above measured values)

· Maximum Delay : 55 – 65 mSec.
· Average Delay : 20 – 25 mSec.

Notice that this test is based on the 20mSec. transmission period. That is, above delay time cannot be
necessarily the minimum delay of CIMON PLC link system. If the test was progressed under 10mSec
period, the measured delay would be smaller than above.

1202

6.3.3

CIMON-PLC

Specifications

CIMON-PLC Ethernet Module Specifications :
· General Specifications
· Module Specifications
· Cable Specifications
· Dimensions

6.3.3.1

General Specifications
The general specifications for CIMON PLC communication modules are as follows.

Item

Specification

Operating
Temperature

-10 ~ 65oC

Storage Temperature

-25 ~ 80oC

Operating Humidity

5 ~ 95%RH, Not condensed.

Storage Humidity

5 ~ 95%RH, Not condensed.

Vibration

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

Amplitude

Sweep

f< 57Hz

0.075mm

f < 150 Hz

9.8m/s2

10 times in each
direction (X,Y,Z)

{1G}

In case of continuous vibration

Shock

Frequency

Acceleration

Amplitude

Sweep

f < 57Hz

0.035mm

f < 150 Hz

4.9m/s2

10 times in each
direction (X,Y,Z)

- Max. Shock Acc.: 147 m/s2

{1G}

{15G}

- Time : 11 (3 times in X, Y, Z)
- Pulse Wave : Half sine wave pulse
Noise

Square wave impulse
noise

±1500V

Electrostatic
discharge

Voltage: 4 kV(Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magnetic field

27 ~ 500 MHz. 10 V/m

Fast Transient Bust
Noise

Item

Power Digital I/O
Modul (24V or more)
e

Digital I/O(Less than 24V)
Analog I/O Comm.
interface

Voltage

2KV

0.25KV

Environment

No corrosive gas and no dust.

Altitude

2,000m or less

1KV

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.3.3.2

Pollution

Less than 2

Cooling

Natural Air cooling

Module Specifications
Item

Specification ( 10BASE-T)

Sending Specification

Basic Specification

6.3.3.3

Baud Rate

10 Mbps

Sending Type

Base Band

Max. Segment Length

100m(Node – Hub)

Max. Protocol Size

1500 Byte

Communication Access Type

CSMA / CD

Internal 5V power Consumption( )

280mA

Weight(g)

460g

Cable Specifications
Twisted-Pair Cable(UTP)

Item

Unit

Value

Conductor Resistance (Maximum)

? / km

93.5

Insulation Resistance (Minimum)

M? . km

2500

Internal Voltage

V / min

AC 500

Characteristic Impedance

? (1 ~ 100MHz)

100 ± 15

Attenuation

Less than dB / 100m

Near-end Cross talk
Attenuation

Less than dB / 100m

6.5

8.2

9.3

As the cables for Ethernet connection are different according to system configuration and cable type,
consultation with an expert is required to install them..

6.3.3.4

1203

Dimensions
Unit : mm

1204

CIMON-PLC

LED Indicator

6.3.4

LED No,

Indication

Description

RUN

ON in case of Power supply.

ERR

Blinking in case of error in system.

Blinking in case of receiving.

Blinking in case of sending.

Internal I/O Table
Device

Description of Signal

Device

Description of Signal

X0000

Error In Module

Y0000

Request To Clear Error

X0001

Initialized

Y0001

X0002

Y0002

X0003

Y0003

X0004

Y0004

X0005

Y0005

X0006

Y0006

X0007

Y0007

X0008

Y0008

X0009

Y0009

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.3.5

X000A

Y000A

X000B

Y000B

X000C

Y000C

X000D

Y000D

X000E

Y000E

X000F

Parameter Has Been Saved

Y000F

Request To Save Parameter

1205

Shared Memory
Offset

Description

R/W

Status Code (0=Normal, Others=Error Code)

IP Address

R/W

IP Address

R/W

Net Mask

R/W

Net Mask

R/W

PLC Link Station

PLC Link Connection

The Last HMI Service IP Address

The Last HMI Service Port

The Last Loader Service IP Address

The Last Loader Service Port

TCP Modbus Unit ID

R/W

Dest IP Address

Dest Port

Source IP Address

Source Port

Gate Way

R/W

Gate Way

R/W

Remarks

1
2
3

…
30

DNP Host IP Address (Upper)

Ethernet DNP3.0

1206

CIMON-PLC

DNP Host IP Address (Lower)

DNP Host Station

DNP My Station

DNP Flags

DNP DataLink Rty(Upper)/DNP DataLink T.O(Lower)

DNP Application Rty(Upper)/DNP Application T.O(Lower)

…
37~127

User Message

R/W

182 Byte

128

PLC Link Number 0 Station IP Address(Upper)

R/W

129

PLC Link Number 0 Station IP Address(Lower)

R/W

130

PLC Link Number 1 Station IP Address(Upper)

R/W

In case of common
network PLC link, IP
Address of the
corresponding station

131

PLC Link Number 1 Station IP Address(Lower)

R/W

…

6.3.6

R/W

254

PLC Link Number 63 Station IP Address(Upper)

R/W

255

PLC Link Number 63Station IP Address(Lower)

R/W

System Configuration

Contents :
· CIMON PLC Network SYSTEM
· CIMON PLC Ethernet SYSTEM
· CIMON PLC Ethernet SYSTEM (Exclusive)
· CIMON PLC Ethernet SYSTEM (Exclusive+Other)
· CIMON PLC Ethernet SYSTEM (Internet+Exclusive)
· CIMON PLC Ethernet SYSTEM (Internet+Exclusive+Other)

6.3.6.1

CIMON PLC Network SYSTEM
v Communication with 16 station as maximum is available

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1207

1208

CIMON-PLC

6.3.6.2

CIMON PLC Ethernet SYSTEM

6.3.6.3

CIMON PLC Ethernet SYSTEM (Exclusive)

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.3.6.4

CIMON PLC Ethernet SYSTEM (Exclusive+Other)

6.3.6.5

CIMON PLC Ethernet SYSTEM (Internet+Exclusive)

1209

1210

CIMON-PLC

6.3.6.6

CIMON PLC Ethernet SYSTEM (Internet+Exclusive+Other)

6.3.7

Communication Funcions

Exclusive Service for CIMON PLC Ethernet
· Transport Layer: UDP/IP, TCP/IP
· Half-Duplex (UDP/IP, TCP/IP)
· Service Port: 10262(UDP/IP), 10260(TCP/IP)

PLC Link in Exclusive Network
This link is the protocol used to exchange high baud rate and large capacity data between CIMON PLCs.
An Ethernet card is used. The specifications are as follows.
· Transport Layer : UDP/IP (IP Broadcasting)
· Port : 10264
· Maximum number of Ethernet Modules connected: 64 modules
· Each sending block has its peculiar communication interval and sends in broadcasting type.
· Up to 64 words data can be sent, using a sending block.
· The communication block set up to each PLC (Ethernet Module) can be assigned up to 64 blocks,
putting sending blocks and sending blocks together.
· A necessary block among other PLCs (Ethernet Module) in a network can be selected and assigned to a
receiving block.
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1211

PLC Link Service in Common Network
This link is the protocol used to exchange low baud and large capacity data between CIMON PLCs. An
Ethernet card is used. The specifications are as follows.
· Transport Layer : UDP/IP
· Port : 10268
· Maximum number of Ethernet Modules connected: 64 modules
· Up to 32 blocks per PLC can be assigned to sending blocks.
· Up to 32 blocks per PLC can be assigned to receiving blocks.
· Each receiving block has its peculiar communication interval.
· Up to 64 words data can be sent, using a sending block.
· The communication block set up to each PLC (Ethernet Module) can be assigned up to 64 blocks,
putting sending blocks and sending blocks together.
· A necessary block among other PLCs (Ethernet Module) in a network can be selected and assigned to a
receiving block.
· The IP Address of other node is stored in User Program Memory device (From 128th word), using
Instruction TO. But, if there is not the block requesting to receive, the IP Address of the other may be
stored.

Graphic Loader Service
Ethernet module is used to link with Graphic Loader (CICON). The specifications are as follows.
· Transport Layer : UDP/IP (IP Broadcasting)
· Service Port : 10266

TCP Modbus Service
Open Modbus Protocol is used to access the corresponding device. The specifications are as follows.
· Transport Layer : TCP/IP
· Service Port : 502

1212

6.3.7.1

CIMON-PLC

Graphic Loader Service
· Transport Layer: UDP/IP
· Port: 10266
This function is to write a program, to download and upload users’program, to debug and to monitor remotely
without moving physical connection in Ethernet network system, using the CICON.
Especially, this is a convenient function to access each device easily at a place, in case that the devices
connected to a network are scattered away.

Setting Up to link with the CICON
All the PLCs linked with the CICON network can access each other through the CICON communication
service.

1. Setting up
a. Select the Environment Setup in the Tools of the CICON menu bar.

But, the environment is to be set up in unlinked state.
b. As the above picture, click the Communication Setup. The following dialog box will appear.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1213

c. Enter the values in the dialog box.
· Select Link Type: This is used to select link type with the CICON. Select Ethernet.
· Comm. Setup: Enter the same as the IP address of the Ethernet module connected with the CICON.
And Enter the TIMEOUT and the Retry.
d. Press the OK button.

2. Linking : The CICON runs to link.

3. Press the "OK" button.

1214

6.3.7.2

CIMON-PLC

Exclusive Service for CIMON PLC Ethernet
· Transport Layer : UDP/IP, TCP/IP
· Half-Duplex (UDP/IP, TCP/IP)
· Service Port : 10262(UDP/IP), 10260(TCP/IP)
To use this service, which uses the protocol built in the module of the CIMON PLC, TCP port 10260 and UDP
port 10262 are to be used.
This service is used to download and upload a PLC program, and to control a PLC. And it is used to read the
information and the data in a PLC from a PC and other devices, and to write the information and the data in a
PLC to a PC and other devices.
Though the exclusive service, the communication between a PC and an Ethernet module is available.

Types of Data
Types of Memory Device

M (Internal Memory)
This is used not to output but to configure a logic circuit.

X (Input)
This is the input part receiving data directly.

Y (Output)
This is the output part transferring the result of an operation.

K (Keep)
This is used like M but is used as the device conserving the precious data when the power is ON or the
RUN starts. The data is conserved till the power is ON again though it is OFF. It can be processed with
ata Clear?function in the Loader to delete the
data.

L (Link)
It is unable to output to outside directly for data link with upper device and lower one. When the power is
ON and the RUN starts, the part except the device assigned to a parameter is deleted as 0 and there is no

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1215

default non-volatile device. In case that this is not used for link and high-speed counter, this can be used
like M.

F (Internal Flag)
This has the device having the operation state, setting type, card number, system clock contact and user
clock contact for a PLC. It is available to input an instruction with only Operand.

T (Timer)
There are the instructions of 5 types and the counting method is different according to instruction. If input
condition is realized, a timer will start to count. And if timer reaches set time or 0, contact output is ON. The
maximum set value is FFFFh and the value can be expressed in decimal figure or in hexadecimal figure.
ON Delay, Off Delay, Accumulation ON Delay, Monostable, Retriggerable

C (Counter)
Counter counts at the rising edge of input condition and stop counting at reset input to delete current value
as 0 or to substitute it as set value. According to the instructions of 4 types, counting method is different.
The maximum set value is FFFFh and the value can be expressed in decimal figure or in hexadecimal
figure.
Up Counter, Down Counter, Up/Down Counter, Ring Counter

S (Step Control)
This, which is the relay for step control, is classified into the priority of Last-In and the step control
according to using the instructions (OUT, SET). This is composed of 2-step instruction. The device except
the one assigned to a parameter when the power is ON and the RUN starts is deleted as the first step, 0.

D (Data Register)
This is used to store the internal data. It is available to read and write in 32-bit.

Type of Data

Example of Use

Bit

X013F, Y0028, L0119

Word

Y0120, M0040, K0100

1216

6.3.7.3

CIMON-PLC

PLC Link in Exclusive Network
This service is to exchange high baud rate and large capacity data between CIMON PLCs. An Ethernet card is
used.
PLC Link, a communication method between CIMON PLC communication modules, is used to exchange data
and information with the other party at a certain time periodically. Sending/Receiving Data Size, Interval and
Device in the Parameter of the CICON to exchange data can be set up. This is the PLC Link service to regard
the network speed as important.

Features :
· The total of 64 blocks, 32 Sending blocks and 32 Receiving blocks each, can be set up for each
communication module.

Link Points
Max. Comm. Points

Max. Sending Points

Max. Block Points

Max. Points Per Block

4,096

2,048

64(0~63)

64-word data can be sent for each block.
· Users can use the CICON to set up a peculiar sending interval. The sending interval can be set up in the
range from 50ms to 3sec.
· Users can use the CICON to set up a specific device and data size for sending/receiving data.

Contents :
· Processing Sent/Received Data under PLC Link
· Setting up PLC Link Parameter

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1217

6.3.7.3.1 Processing Sent/Received Data under PLC Link

An Example is taken to explain how data are processed when they are sent or received under PLC Link.
· Sending Party : This is used to set up the data read, what number data is sent to, data size and sending
interval to a sending party in broadcasting method.
· Receiving Party : This is used to set up station number and the block number of sent data to a receiving
party in broadcasting method to receive desired data.

[Ex.]
Station 0 sends the data of Device D0000,
Station 1 requests the received data every 100ms and stores them in Device Y0000.

Sending Party (Station : 0)
Type

Block Number

Sending

Address

Size

Sending Block

Interval

D0000

10 Words

100ms

Receiving Party (Station : 1)
Type
Station Number
Receiving Block
0

Block Number
0

Address
Y0000

Size
4 Words

The block number of a sending party and the one of a receiving party are the same as 0, and the station
number of a sending party is set up like the one of the receiving party as 0. In this condition, the receiving
party can receive every 100ms the data sent from the sending party every 100ms. Though the sending
party sends the data of 10-word size, the receiving party selects and receives the necessary data of 4-word
size. But, the size of the sent data is to be as same as or less than the one of the received data.

6.3.7.3.2 Setting up PLC Link Parameter

To run PLC Link and to exchange data between communication modules, the parameter is to be set up in the
CICON.

Creating a Project in the CICON

1218

CIMON-PLC

Select the menu to run the CICON and to open a corresponding project.
Picture . Select the "PLC Link"

Setting up PLC Link Parameter
1) Selecting PLC Link Parameter :
If you select the PLC Link on the window as [Picture. Select the "PLC Link"], a PLC Link dialog box will
appear. In the dialog box, up to 4 communication modules can be set up for one CPU. To set up PLC
Link to a mounted communication module, select Link(0), Link(1), Link(2) and Link(3) on the top of the
dialog box and enter the values for each communication module.

2) Setting up PLC Link Type :
PLC Link Type is used to set up basic items such as network type, base, slot number, station number
and so on.
Picture. PLC Link Setup

XP / CP Series(CM1)

Network

1219

This is used to set up the type of the communication module for PLC Link. If you do not
use PLC Link, select the Not Use. Here, select the Ethernet(Exclusive).

Base

This is used to select the base where the communication module for PLC Link is
mounted. For example, if there is no base expansion (The base where a expansion card
is mounted), select the Local. If there is base expansion (The base where a expansion
card is mounted), select the Expansion Base where the communication module is
mounted.

Slot

This is used to select the slot number of the base where the communication module is
mounted.

3) Setting up the communication block for PLC Link :
Communication Block is used to register the information about sending/receiving real data. If you select
the Ethernet(Exclusive) as the Network and the Add button in "Picure. PLC Link Setup", a
Communication Block dialog box will appear like follows.
Picture. Communication Block Setup

1220

CIMON-PLC

Sending

When communication modules communicate each other, this is used to send a
selected block.

Receiving

When communication modules communicate each other, this is used to receive a
selected block.

Station No.

When communication modules communicate each other, in case of sending data, it is
not necessary to set up station number. But, in case of receiving data, the station
number of a receiving communication module is to be selected. The station number can
be set up in the range from 0 to 63.

Block No.

The communication modules for a sending party communicate with each peculiar block
number. In the same way, the communication modules for a receiving party have each
peculiar block number to receive the data. The receiving block number is used to detect
the data that a receiving party wants together with station number when a party
communicates with a sending party. But, the block number can be set up in the range
from 0 to 31. To receive the data of a sending party, the same number is to be set up as
the block number for the sending party and the block number for a receiving party.

Sending

Sending interval, a parameter to decide the interval at which data are sent, can be set

XP / CP Series(CM1)

Interval

1221

up in the range from 50 ms to 3 sec according to users’need. For example, if 50 ms is
set up as sending interval, data will be sent every 50ms.

Device To Pick Up Data Sent & Device To Store The Received Data (Address)
· When sending : This is used to set up the device where the data sent are read.
· When receiving : This is used to set up the device where the received data are
stored.

Device To Pick Up Data Sent & Device To Store The Received Data (Size)
This, the size of the data sent or received, can be set up by the word. But, the size is
from one word to 64 words. If the data size of a sending device is greater than the size
of the data set up to a receiving device, the necessary data as much as the size of the
one set up to the receiving device can be received selectively and used.
[Ex.] The communication module of Station 1 sends Block 0, 1, 2 and 3, and receives Block 4, 5, 6 and
7. And the communication module of Station 2 sends Block 4, 5, 6, and 7, receives 0, 1, 2 and 3.
An Ethernet card is mounted on Slot 4. Each data size is one word and the interval is 50 ms each.
Such case is taken as an example and the PLC link parameter for it is configured as follows.
a. Station 1

Station 1 sends the data of the sending devices from D0000 to D0003 by the word at each interval.

1222

CIMON-PLC

The data received to corresponding addresses will be written in the receiving devices from Y0000 to
Y0030, if the corresponding station and blocks are in accord.
b. Station 2

Enter 2 as the sending station number and 4, 5, 6, 7 as the block number to send at each interval. If so,
the Ethernet module of Station 1 receives, comparing the receiving station and the blocks.
In the same way, Station 2 compares the numbers of the blocks in the received frames with Block 0, 1,
2, and 3 of Station 1. And if they are same, Station 2 receives them and writes the data to the devices
from Y0000 to Y0030.

6.3.7.3.3 IP Configuration

When you use PLC link in common network, you must configure IP address of receiving data station.
Configured IP address is used to reply IP address when required receiving data.

IP Configuration in CICON
·

Use TO command for saving IP address at the user program.

Example: Saving IP address of receiving station at the each Ethernet module PLC Link constructed.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

Station

Ethernet module IP Address

PLC Address

100.100.100.10

D00000~1

100.100.100.11

D00002~3

100.100.100.12

D00004~5

100.100.100.13

D00006~7

0 Row : Input IP address of Ethernet module configured link station 0. (D0: h6464, D1: h640A)
1 Raw : Input IP address of Ethernet module configured link station 1. (D2: h6464, D3: h640B)
2 Raw : Input IP address of Ethernet module configured link station 2. (D4: h6464, D5: h640C)
3 Raw : Input IP address of Ethernet module configured link station 3. (D6: h6464, D7: h640D)
4 Raw : Save stored memory from D0 to D7 at the instructed buffer memory area (Offset 128).
More details of the using TO command refer the CPU command.

IP Configuration at the CICON program
· Configure IP address at the each Ethernet module constructed PLC link.
· It is not need to make user program at the CICON.
· Example - Make new CICON project and add new program.

1223

1224

CIMON-PLC

Come out the dialog box to make an entry program block.
Program name : Make an entry program name that will be registered project window.
Sort of Program : Select program to be registered. The sort of program to be Registered is
Public network IP setup program.
Confirm the program name and the sort of program.

· Come out the IP_SAVE.SPC dialog box.
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1225

1226

CIMON-PLC

- Base : Select the base adapted Ethernet module that will be constructed PLC link.
- Slot : Select the base slot adapted Ethernet module that will be constructed PLC link.
- Address : It is the number of PLC link parameter configured.
- IP Address : When PLC parameter had configured, it was the selected Ethernet module IP.

If you configure the above explanations, it will be same the program at the programmed in user
program.

6.3.7.4

PLC Link Service in Common Network
This service is to exchange high baud rate and large capacity data between CIMON PLCs. An Ethernet card is
used.
PLC Link, a communication method between CIMON PLC communication modules, is used to exchange data
and information with the other party at a certain time periodically. Users can assign the Sending/Receiving Data
Size, the Interval and the Device in the Parameter of the CICON to exchange data. This PLC Link service
regards network itself as important.

Features :
· The total of 64 blocks, 32 Sending blocks and 32 Receiving blocks each, can be set up for each
communication module.

Link Points
Max. Comm. Points

Max. Sending Points

Max. Block Points

Max. Points Per Block

4,096

2,048

64(0~63)

64-word data can be sent for each block.
· Users can use the CICON to set up a peculiar receiving interval. The receiving interval can be set up in
the range from 50ms to 3sec.
· Users can use the CICON to set up a specific device and data size for sending/receiving data.
· Users refer to User Data Memory Map in the CIOCN to set up the IP of a corresponding station.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1227

Contents :
· Processing Sent/Received Data under PLC Link
· Setting up PLC Link Parameter

6.3.7.4.1 Processing Sent/Received Data under PLC Link

An Example is taken to explain how data are processed when they are sent or received under PLC Link.
· Sending Party : This is used to set up the data read, what number data is sent to, data size and sending
interval to a sending party.
· Receiving Party : This is used to set up station number and the block number of the data read from a
corresponding station at receiving intervals to a receiving party to receive desired data. The IP address
of the station requesting to receive is to be stored in the buffer memory (128th word).

[Ex.]
Station 0 sends the data of Device D0000,
Station 1 requests the received data every 100ms and stores them in Device Y0000.

Sending Party (Station : 0)
Type

Block Number

Sending

Address

Size

Sending Block

Interval

D0000

10 Words

Receiving Party (Station : 1)
Type
Station Number
Receiving Block
0

Block Number
0

Receiving
Interval
100ms

Address
Y0000

Size
4 Words

The block number of a sending party and the one of a receiving party are the same as 0, and the station
number of a sending party is set up like the one of the receiving party as 0. In this condition, the receiving
party sends data every 100 ms, and the sending party receive the data makes sure whether there is a
corresponding block. If there is the block, the sending party will send the corresponding data. Though the
sending party sends the data of 10-word size, the receiving party selects and receives the necessary data

1228

CIMON-PLC

of 4-word size.

6.3.7.4.2 Setting up PLC Link Parameter

To run PLC Link and to exchange data between communication modules, the parameter is to be set up in the
CICON.

Creating a Project in the CICON
Select the menu to run the CICON and to open a corresponding project.
Picture. Select the "PLC Link"

Setting up the PLC Link Parameter
1) Selecting the PLC Link Parameter
If you select the PLC Link on the window like [Picture. Select the "PLC Link"], a PLC Link dialog box to
set up the parameters will appear.
Link(0), Link(1), Link(2) and Link(3) on the top of [Picture 6-2. PLC Link Setup] mean the maximum
number of mounted communication modules according to PLC CPU.
Up to 4 communication modules can be set up for one CPU.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1229

2) Setting up the PLC Link Type
The PLC Link Type is used to set up basic items such as network type, base, slot number, station
number and so on.
Picture. PLC Link Setup

Network

This is used to set up the type of the communication module for PLC Link. If you do not
use PLC Link, select the Not Use. Here, select the Ethernet (Exclusive).

Base

This is used to select the base where the communication module for PLC Link is
mounted. For example, if not base expansion (The base where a expansion card is
mounted), select the Local. If base expansion (The base where a expansion card is
mounted), select the Expansion Base where the communication module is mounted.

Slot

This is used to select the slot number of the base where a communication module is
mounted.

3) Setting up the communication block for PLC Link
Communication Block is used to register the information about sending/receiving real data. If you select

1230

CIMON-PLC

the Ethernet (Exclusive) as the Network and the Add button in Picure. PLC Link Setup, a
Communication Block dialog box will appear like Picture. Communication Block Setup.
Picture. Communication Block Setup

Sending

When communication modules communicate each other, this is used to send a
selected block.

Receiving

When communication modules communicate each other, this is used to receive a
selected block.

Station No.

When communication modules communicate each other, in case of sending data, it is
not necessary to set up station number. But, in case of receiving data, the station
number of a receiving communication module is to be selected. The station number can
be set up in the range from 0 to 63.

Block No.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1231

from 0 to 31. To receive the data of a sending party, the same number is to be set up as
the block number for the sending party and the block number for a receiving party.

Receiving

Receiving interval, a parameter to decide the interval at which data are sent, can be set

Interval

up in the range from 50 ms to 3 sec according to users’need. For example, if 50 ms is
set up as sending interval, data will be sent every 50ms.

Device To Pick Up Data Sent & Device To Store The Received Data (Address)
· When sending: This is used to set up the device where the data sent are read.
· When receiving: This is used to set up the device where the received data are stored.

[Ex.] The communication module of Station 0 sends Block 0, 1, 2 and 3, and receives Block 4, 5, 6 and
7. And the communication module of Station 1 sends Block 4, 5, 6, and 7, receives 0, 1, 2 and 3. An
Ethernet card is mounted at Slot 4. Each data size is one word and the interval is 50 ms, 100 ms, 150
ms and 200 ms. Such case is taken as an example and the PLC link parameter for it is configured as
follows.

a. Station 0

1232

CIMON-PLC

· Sending Station : If the frame requesting to receive is sent from other station, the station number and
the block numbers of the received frame will be compared with sending blocks. If they are in accord,
the data for the corresponding sending blocks are sent to the station requesting to receive.
· Receiving Station : The receiving frames are sent to the corresponding station at each receiving
interval. The station receiving a sent frame makes sure whether there are corresponding blocks. If
yes, the station sends the corresponding blocks. The receiving station stores the received data in the
corresponding receiving device.
· The IP address of a corresponding station is to be stored in user data device. (Refer to No. 128 User
Data Device in the user data memory map.)

b. Station 1

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1233

· Sending Station : If the frame requesting to receive is sent from other station, the station number and
the block numbers of a received frame will be compared with sending blocks. If they are in accord, the
data for the corresponding sending blocks are sent to the station requesting to receive.
· Receiving Station : The receiving frames are sent to the corresponding station at each receiving
interval. The station receiving a sent frame makes sure whether there are corresponding blocks. If
yes, the station sends the corresponding blocks. The receiving station stores the received data in the
corresponding receiving device.
· The IP address of a corresponding station should be stored in user data device. (Refer to No. 128
User Data Device in the user data memory map.)

6.3.7.5

TCP Modbus Service
This function is to access CPU data memory with a PC through TCP Modbus protocol.
· Transport Layer: TCP/IP
· Half-Duplex (TCP/IP)

1234

CIMON-PLC

· Service Port: 502

TCP Modbus Command
Command

Description

Remarks

1 (Read Coil)

Accesses the bit device where data can be read and written.

Bit Read

2 (Read Input)

Accesses the bit device where data can be read.

Bit Read

3 (Read Holding)

Accesses the word device where data can be read and written.

Word Read

4 (Read Input)

Accesses the word device where data can be read.

Word Read

5 (Force Single Coil)

Accesses the bit device where data can be read.

Bit Write

6 (Preset Single Register)

Accesses the word device where data can be written.

Word Write

15 (Force Multiple Coils)

Accesses the bit device where data can be written.

Bit Write

16 (Preset Multiple Regs)

Accesses the word device where can be written.

Word Write

Address Map
TCP Modbus can correspond to the device memories of all types.
Bit / Word

Bit Read Input

Bit Read Coil

Word Input Register

Word Holding Register

Modicon Address

CIMON-PLC Address

Size CIMON-PLC

100001 ~ 104096

X 0000 ~

4096 Bits

104097 ~ 106144

F 0000 ~

2048 Bits

106145 ~ 107168

T 0000 ~

1024 Bits

107169 ~ 108192

C 0000 ~

1024 Bits

000001 ~ 004096

Y 0000 ~

4096 Bits

004097 ~ 012288

M 0000 ~

8192 Bits

012289 ~ 014336

K 0000 ~

2048 Bits

014337 ~ 016384

L 0000 ~

2048 Bits

300001 ~ 300256

X 0000 ~

256 Words

300257 ~ 300384

F 0000 ~

128 Words

300385 ~ 301408

TC 0000 ~

1024 Words

301409 ~ 302432

CC 0000 ~

1024 Words

302433 ~ 302482

S 0000 ~

50 Words

400001 ~ 400256

Y 0000 ~

256 Words

400257 ~ 400384

K 0000 ~

128 Words

400385 ~ 401408

TS 0000 ~

1024 Words

401409 ~ 402432

CS 0000 ~

1024 Words

402433 ~ 402560

L 0000 ~

128 Words

402561 ~ 403072

M 0000 ~

512 Words

403073 ~ 413072

D 0000 ~

10000 Words

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1235

Bit (Read Input, Read Coil) occupies the Modicon Address bit by bit.
[Ex.] Read Input -> 100001 : X0000, 100002: X0001, ... , 100017: X0010, ....
[Ex.] Read Coil -> 000001 : Y0000, 000002: Y0001, ..., 000017: Y0010, ....

Word(Input Register, Holding Register) occupies the Modicon address word by word.
[Ex.] Input Register

-> 300001 : X0000, 300002->X0010, 300003->X0020, ....

[Ex.] Holding Register -> 402561 : M0000, 402562: M0010, 402563: M0020, ....

[Note] Some MODBUS Master devices can read/write the devices from 1 to 9999 in the range of each
data type address. In this case, as the part corresponding to the devices that are greater than Modicon
Address 9999 among PLC data cannot access, user programs may need to be processed.

6.3.8

Installing and Testing

Safety Precautions :
· The maximum Ethernet communication modules mounted on the PLC standard base are four (4).
· Make sure the basic components necessary for the configuration of a system and mount suitable
communication modules. Select the cable used for this communication module.
· When you mount this communication module, make sure whether there is dust and remains in the base
connector to mount and whether the connector pins of this module are broken.
· Mount the modules in the state of the power-off.
· When you mount this module, insert the connecting part on the bottom of the module to the slot of a
base exactly in the state that the communication cable is not connected and press the power sufficient to
lock the module to the base completely. Otherwise, an error in the interface with CPU may occur.
· The cable used for this communication module is 10BASE-T cable.

Contents :
· Installing 10BASE-T
· Testing
· Maintenance and Check up

1236

6.3.8.1

CIMON-PLC

Installing 10BASE-T

· The maximum segment length of 10 BASE-T is 100m (Length between a module and a hub). Generally, the
straight cable that sending (TD) and receiving (RD) are twisted inside is used. In case you connect two
communication modules one to one, use in the cross cable type.
· When you connect a hub to an optional card (Ethernet card), use one to one (Straight cable) connecting
cable.
The connection is like the following table. But, as the jack is for 8 pins, the remaining lines are connected as
they are.
Pin Number

Signal

Straight Cable Between Hub and Module

TD+

1–1

TD-

2–2

XP / CP Series(CM1)

RD+

3–3

RD-

6-6

4, 5, 7, 8

Not Used

1237

· Twist Line RD(+) – Line TD(+) and Line RD(-) – Line TD(-) to make one to one Cross cable.
Pin Number

Signal

One to One Cross Cable

TD+

1–3

TD-

2–6

RD+

3–1

RD-

6-2

4, 5, 7, 8

Not Used

· As 10 BASE-T cable is structurally weak against external noise, twist the lines for Pin 1 and Pin 2, which are
TD+ and TD-, and the lines for Pin 3 and Pin 6, which are RD+ and RD-, each other. After that, assemble the
two twisted lines to make the wiring resistant against noise.
· The power for a hub is to be separated from the power for a PLC. Use the power resistant against noise as the
power for a hub.
· The cable is to be installed 100 away from the line on which high current flows such as power line.
· Please consult with an expert to process and manufacture cable terminal.

6.3.8.2

Testing

Suggestions for system configuration
· The PLC Link station numbers of all other communication modules as well as Ethernet module should be
different each other.
· If duplicated station number is accessed in case of PLC Link, an error will occur in communication.
· In case of normal operation, the mode switch of the CPU should be shifted to the RUN mode.
· Use the communication cable of the assigned standard.
· Check whether the communication cable is cut or short.
· The use of other cable except the assigned may cause serious communication obstruction.
· Tighten up the communication cable connecter to fix cable connection. Otherwise, the serious
obstruction to communication may occur.
· As the flexibility of a coaxial cable is low, it should be branched over 30 cm down from the connecter of a
communication module. If you bend a coaxial cable perpendicularly or transform it unreasonably, the
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

1238

CIMON-PLC

cable may be cut and the connecter of the communication module may be broken.
· In case of a long-distance communication cable, the cable should be wired away from the power line or
the induced noise.
· If the ERR LED the communication module is ON, make sure and take action for the reason of an error
in the module, referring to Chapter 9 Troubleshooting. If you follow-up as the manual, please call an A/S
center.

Items Confirmed Before Test
The following is the explanation for the contents confirmed before you test.

Communication Module Mounted on a PLC
Item

Description

S/W

Is the CICON installed and operated well?

Communication Cable

Are the connection of the communication cable and the state of tap all right?
Is the connection of each cable open roof type?

Module

Is the communication module mounted on the base?

Order of Test
The following shows the order from post-installation for a PLC to test.

Start
Inputting Power
· Make sure input power
· Make sure the connection of communication cable
· Input Power
· Make sure whether the power LED of the power is ON
· Make sure the state of the LED of the CPU module
· Make sure whether the state of the LED of the communication module is normal.

Programming :
· After programming in the CICON, to write the result to CPU.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1239

Checking Sequence :
· Make sure the operation of the communication module according to the program.

Editing Program :
· If there is an error in the sequence program, edit.

Preserving Program
· To store the program in a floppy disc or a hard disc.
· To print the program and the list with a printer.
· To store the program in a memory module, if necessary.
Finish

If an error code of optional card is received in the CICON, and the ERR Led of an Ethernet card is ON or
blinks, please call an A/S center.

6.3.8.3

Maintenance and Check up
The checkups for the following items are needed every three-month. Please take action, if necessary.

Item
Ambience

Temperature
Humidity
Pollution level

Standard

Action

Thermometer
/Hygrometer

0 ~ 55

Adjust according to
general standard.

5 ~ 95%RH

Measuring Corrosive No Corrosive gas
Gas

Loosening, shaking

Moving
communication
Module.

Mounted tightly

Dust, remains

Inspection with the
naked eye

No dust,
no remains

Loosening terminal
screw

Tightening with a
driver

No loosening

Tighten.

Compressed
terminal

Inspection with the
naked eye

Suitable gap

Correct.

Connecter loosened

Inspection with the
naked eye

No loosening

Tighten the connecter
fixing screw.

Module

Connection

Method

Power voltage

Tighten nuts.

Measuring voltage
between the terminal AC 85 ~ 132V
for AC 110 and the
AC 170 ~ 264V
terminal for 220V

Change the power
supply.

1240

6.3.9

CIMON-PLC

Trouble Shooting

Contents :
· Error Codes for System
· Error in Hardware
· Error in Interface
· Error in Network
· Error in the Interface with CPU while Operating
· Error in PLC Link Parameter
· Error in PLC Link Operation

6.3.9.1

Error Codes for System
Error Code

Description

Remarks

Deci

Hexa

0x0000

No error

0x0001

A specialty module is not initialized.

0x0002

EEPROM is not initialized.

0x0003

0x0004

0x0005

Not able to write to buffer memory.

0x0006

Not able to read buffer memory.

0x0007

A CPU module is dismounted.

0x0008

Station number for PLC LINK is duplicated.

0x0009

0x000A

0x000B

0x000C

0x000D

Buffer is overflowed.

0x000E

0x000F

Accesses Graphic Loader over the maximum.

0x0010

Not able to access EERROM.

0x0011

Sending/receiving data size for PLC LINK is exceeded.

0x0012

Not able to send specialty program.

0x0013

0x0014

No. of PLC LINK stations is over the Maximum.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.3.9.2

Error in Hardware
This corresponds to Error Code 1, 2, 6 and 7.

6.3.9.3

Error in Interface
This corresponds to Error Code1, 3, 5, 6 and 7.

1241

1242

6.3.9.4

CIMON-PLC

Error in Network
Communication and networking are bad.
This corresponds to Error Code 3, 4 and 6.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.3.9.5

Error in the Interface with CPU while Operating
This corresponds to Error Code 3, 6 and 7.

1243

1244

CIMON-PLC

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.3.9.6

Error in PLC Link Parameter

1245

1246

6.3.9.7

CIMON-PLC

Error in PLC Link Operation
This corresponds to Error Code 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 and 14.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1247

6.3.10 CIMON PLC HMI Protocol Service

Contents :
· Structure of Frames
· Word Block Read
· Word Block Write
· Bit Block Read
· Bit Block Write
· Error Codes for Exclusive Service

6.3.10.1 Structure of Frames

Application Frame of CIMON PLC Ethernet Module
Application Data Format
Application Header Format

Application Instruction Format

Master Frame Format (PC Party)

Frame

Cmd

No.

Res.

Length

Data

Item

Size (Byte)

Description

Company ID

Frame No.

Frame Number

Cmd

Command

Res.

Reserved Device

Length

Length of Data Field

Data

1456

Data Device

Check Sum

Accuracy Check of Data

a) ID
This is a 9-byte string like ?KDT_PLC_M
”
.
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

Check Sum

1248

CIMON-PLC

b) Frame No.
This, 1-byte data with the range from 0 to 127, is the number of the frame controlled by Master party. The
start of this number can be any one within the range. But, when a new frame is sent, the number should be
the value that ‘1’is increased to the number given to the previous frame. If the frame of the same number is
received in Slave party in the state that the response frame to the previous frame is not sent, the frame will
be disregarded. If the response frame to the previous frame is sent and the frame of the same number is
received, Slave party will respond normally.

c) Cmd
In Master, 1-byte command as the following table can be used and the format of ‘Data’field is selected
according to each command.

Cmd

Function

Remarks

52h

Code

Word Block Read

Reads data by the word.

57h

Word Block Write

Writes data by the word.

72h

Bit Block Read

Reads data by the bit.

77h

Bit Block Write

Writes data by the bit.

d) Res.
Reserved. (1 Byte, 00h) – Reserved device

e) Length
This is the 2-byte value indicating the size of ‘Data’field. (Hexadecimal Figure)

f) Check-Sum
This is used to check the accuracy of data. After the data are received one by one and are summed, they
are compared with the last coming check-sum to check whether an error occurs.
This is 2-byte value. After the entire frame is binary-summed by the byte, the lower 2-byte in the result
value is used.

Slave Frame (Ethernet Module Party)

Frame

Cmd

Res.

Length

Data

Check Sum

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1249

No.

a) ID
This is a 9-byte string like ?KDT_PLC_S
”
.

b) Frame No.
This is 1-byte data. The value that 128 are added to the number of the command frame received from the
Master is used. As the Master receiving response frame expects the number of the response frame from
the frame number used to command frame, it can be checked whether a frame is normal, using this Frame
No.

c) Cmd
In Slave, 1-byte command as the following table can be used and the format of ‘Data’field is selected
according to each command.

Cmd

Code

Function

52h

Word Block Data

72h

Bit Block Data.

41h

ACK Resp.

Remarks

d) Res.
Reserved. (1 Byte, 00h) – Reserved Device

e) Length
This is the 2-byte value indicating the size of ‘Data’field. (Hexadecimal Figure)

f) Check-Sum
This is used to check the accuracy of data. After data are received one by one and are summed, they are
compared with the last coming check-sum to check whether an error occurs.
This is 2-byte value. After the entire frame is binary-summed by the byte, the lower 2-byte in the result
value is used.

1250

CIMON-PLC

6.3.10.2 Word Block Read
This function is to assign PLC device memory directly to read according to memory data type. The data can be
assigned up to 16 pieces repeatedly. The total sum of the word data should be not over 512 words.

Requested Format (PC -> PLC)
· Word Block Read (Master sends.)
· Cmd – 52h

Frame
No.

Cmd

Res.

Length

Data

Check Sum

ID : This is a 9-byte string like ?KDT_PLC_M
”
.
FrameNo : This, a 1-byte data with the range from 0 to 127, is the number of the frame controlled by
Master party.
Cmd : 1 Byte, 52h(Word Block Read)
Res : 1 byte of the reserved device (00h)
Length : Total number of the bytes of a frame data device
Data : (Ex.) The case to read 128 words from ‘Y00000’
Offset (Byte)

Meaning of Data

Ex.

Remarks

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1251

Main Device Prefix
(ASCII)

‘Y’

Assigns the ASCII Prefix of the word device supported
from a PLC.

Sub-Device Prefix
or ‘0’(ASCII)

‘0’

Sub-Prefix in case of the 2-character prefix device

‘0’

4
5

Device Address
(ASCII)

‘0’
‘0’

‘0’

8
9

Read Size (Word)

00h
80h

The word address or the card number of a corresponding
device is used. That is, in case of bit device such as X/Y,
the last number should be ‘0’.

Value in the range from 0001h to 0200h (1~512)

Check Sum : This is 2-byte value. After the entire frame is binary-summed by the byte, the lower 2-byte in
the result value is used.

Responded Format
ACK Response
This is the frame sending the data of the word block that Master requests to read, in case of receiving
Master’s request correctly and responding.
Cmd – 52h

Data Device:
Offset (Byte)

Meaning of Data

0~9

Block Address

The first 10 bites of the data in the block assigned to a
Master frame are copied and stored.

Word Data #0

The first word data of Read Block

Word Data #1

The second word data of Read Block

Word Data #n

The last word data of Read Block

10
11
12
13

Ex.

Remarks

......
m-1
m

NACK Response
In case that the service to ‘Word Block Read’cannot be given due to an error in a system or other reason,
Cmd – 41h

1252

CIMON-PLC

In the case of responding to Error Code (Refer to the Error Code table for the Exclusive Service.)

Data Device
Offset (Byte)

Meaning of Data

Ex.

Remarks

Error Code

00h

Error Code (Error in the size of a requested data)

04h

6.3.10.3 Word Block Write
This function is to assign PLC device memory directly to write according to memory data type. The data can be
assigned up to 16 pieces repeatedly.
But, The total sum of word data is not to be over 64 words.

Requested Format (PC -> PLC)
· Word Block Write (Master sends.)
· Cmd – 57h

Frame
No.

Cmd

Res.

Length

Data

Check Sum

ID : This is a 9-byte string like ?KDT_PLC_M
”
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1253

.
FrameNo : This, 1-byte data with the range from 0 to 127, is the number of the frame controlled by Master
party.
Cmd : 1 Byte, 57h(Word Block Read)
Res : 1 byte of reserved device (00h)
Length : Total number of the bytes of a frame data device
Data : The case to write 2 words as 1 and 256 each from ‘Y0000’
Offset (Byte)

Meaning of Data

Ex.

Remarks

Main Device Prefix
(ASCII)

‘Y’

Assigns the ASCII Prefix of the word device supported
from a PLC.

Sub-Device Prefix
or ‘0’(ASCII)

‘0’

Sub-Prefix in case of the 2-character prefix device (TC,
TS, CC, CS)

‘0’

4
5

Device Address
(ASCII)

‘0’
‘0’

‘0’

8
9
10
11
12
13

Write Size (Word)
Write Data (Word)
Write Data (Word)

00h
02h
00h
01h
01h
00h

The word address or the card number of a corresponding
device is used. That is, in case of bit device such as X/Y,
the last number is to be ‘0’.

Value in the range from 0001h to 0040h (1~64)
Write Value
Write Value

Check Sum : This is 2-byte value. After the entire frame is binary-summed by the byte, the lower 2-byte in
the result value is used.

Responded Format
ACK Response
This is the frame responding to ‘Word Block Write’that Master requests to write, in case of receiving
Master’s request correctly and responding.
Cmd – 41h

1254

CIMON-PLC

Data Device
Offset (Byte)
0
1

Meaning of Data
Error Code

Ex.
00h
00h

Remarks
Error Code (Non Error Code)

NACK Response
In case that the service to ‘Word Block Write’cannot be given due to error in a system or other reason,
Cmd – 41h
In the case of responding to Error Code (Refer to the Error Code table for the Exclusive Service.)

Data Device
Offset (Byte)

Meaning of Data

Ex.

Remarks

Error Code

00h

Error Code (Over Number of the Write Blocks)

06h

6.3.10.4 Bit Block Read
This function is to assign PLC device memory directly to read bit block. The data can be assigned up to 16
pieces repeatedly.
But, The total sum of the word data is not to be over 1024 bits.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1255

Requested Format (PC -> PLC)
· Bit Block Read(Master sends.)
· Cmd – 72h

Frame
No.

Cmd

Res.

Length

Data

Check Sum

ID : This is a 9-byte string like ?KDT_PLC_M
”
.
FrameNo : This, 1-byte data with the range from 0 to 127, is the number of the frame controlled by Master
party.
Cmd : 1 Byte, 72h(Word Block Read)
Res : 1 byte of a reserved device (00h)
Length : Total number of the bytes of a frame data device
Data : (Ex.) The case to read 128 bits from ‘T0000’
Offset (Byte)

Meaning of Data

Ex.

Remarks

Main Device Prefix
(ASCII)

‘T’

Assigns the ASCII Prefix of the bit device supported from a
PLC.

Sub-Device Prefix
or ‘0’(ASCII)

‘0’

Sub-Prefix in case of the 2-character prefix device (TC, TS,
CC, CS)

Device Address
(ASCII)

‘0’

The bit address of a corresponding device is used.

‘0’

7
8

‘0’
Read Size (Bit)

00h

Value in the range from 0001h to 0400h (1~1024)

80h

Check Sum : This is 2-byte value. After the entire frame is binary-summed by the byte, the lower 2-byte in
the result value is used.

Responded Format

1256

CIMON-PLC

ACK Response
This is the frame sending the data of the bit block that Master requests to read, in case of receiving Master’
s request correctly and responding.
Cmd – 72h

Data Device
Offset (Byte) Meaning of Data

Ex.

Remarks

0~9

Block Address

The first 10 bites in the data of the block assigned to a
Master frame are copied and stored.

Bit Data #0

‘1’

The first bit data of Read Block

Bit Data #1

‘1’

The second bit data of Read Block

.......
m

Bit Data #n

The last bit data of Read Block

NACK Response
In case that the service to ‘Word Block Read’cannot be given due to error in a system or other reason,
Cmd – 41h
In the case of responding to Error Code (Refer to the Error Code table for the Exclusive Service.)

Data Device
Offset (Byte)
0
1

Meaning of Data
Error Code

Ex.
00h
04h

Remarks
Error Code (Error in the size of the requested data)

6.3.10.5 Bit Block Write
This function is to assign PLC device memory directly to write the bit block. The data can be assigned up to 16
pieces repeatedly.
But, The total sum of the word data is not to be over 256 bits.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1257

Requested Format (PC -> PLC)
· Bit Block Write (Master sends.)
· Cmd – 77h

Frame
No.

Cmd

Res.

Length

Data

Check Sum

ID : This is a 9-byte string like ?KDT_PLC_M
”
.
FrameNo : This, a 1-byte data with the range from 0 to 127, is the number of the frame controlled by
Master party.
Cmd : 1 Byte, 77h(Bit Block Write)
Res : 1 byte of a reserved device (00h)
Length : Total number of the bytes of a frame data device
Data : (Ex.) ‘The case to write 4 bits as 1, 0, 0, 1 from Y0000D’
Offset(Byte)

Meaning of Data

Ex.

Remarks

Main Device Prefix
(ASCII)

‘Y’

Assigns the ASCII Prefix of the bit device supported from a
PLC.

Sub-Device Prefix
or ‘0’(ASCII)

‘0’

Sub-Prefix in case of the 2-character prefix device

Device Address

‘0’

The bit address of a corresponding device is used.

1258

CIMON-PLC

‘0’

(ASCII)

‘0’

‘D’

8
9

Write Size (Bit)

00h
04h

Number of bits, Value in the range from 0001h to 0100h
(1~256)

Bit Data

‘1’

Bit Value (ASCII, Set=’1’, Reset=’0’)

Bit Data

‘0’

Bit Value (ASCII, Set=’1’, Reset=’0’)

Bit Data

‘0’

Bit Value (ASCII, Set=’1’, Reset=’0’)

Bit Data

‘1’

Bit Value (ASCII, Set=’1’, Reset=’0’)

Check Sum : This is 2-byte value. After the entire frame is binary-summed by the byte, the lower 2-byte in
the result value is used.

Responded Format
ACK Response
This is the frame responding to ‘Bit Block Write’that Master requests to write, in case of receiving Master’s
request correctly and responding.
Cmd – 41h

Data Device
Offset(Byte)
0
1

Meaning of Data
Error Code

Ex.
00h
00h

Remarks
Error Code (Non Error Code)

NACK Response
In case that the service to ‘Bit Block Write’cannot be given due to error in a system or other reason,
Cmd – 41h
In the case of responding to Error Code (Refer to the Error Code table for the Exclusive Service.)

Data Device
Offset(Byte)

Meaning of Data

Ex.

Remarks

Error Code

00h

Error Code (Error in Bit Write Data)

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1259

0Dh

6.3.10.6 Error Codes for Exclusive Service

6.4

Code

Description

0000h

No Error (Cmd=57h/77h, the response in case that the command is successfully processed.)

0001h

Error in system (No link with CPU)

0002h

Invalid Device Prefix

0003h

Invalid Device Address

0004h

UDP_ERR_READ_DATASIZE (Error in requested data size)

0005h

UDP_ERR_BLOCK_SIZE (Over 16 requested blocks)

0006h

The case that buffer memory send an error in data and size

0007h

Over receiving buffer capacity

0008h

Over sending time

0009h

UDP_ERR_INVALID_HEADER (Error in header)

000Ah

Error in Check-Sum (Check-Sum of received data)

000Bh

Error in the information on Frame Length (Total received frame size)

000Ch

UDP_ERR_WRITE_DATASIZE (Error in the size to write)

000Dh

Unknown Bit Value (Error in Bit Write Data)

000Eh

Unknown Command

000Fh

Disabling state from writing

0010h

Error in CPU process

A/D Converters
A/D Modules are used to convert analog signals (Direct voltage or current) from the outside to signed 16-bit
binary digital values.

Features :
· CM1-AD04VI is the A/D module used to input 4-Channel voltage and 4-Channel current.
CM1-AD08I is the A/D module used to input 8–Channel current.
CM1-AD08V is the A/D module used to input 8-Channel voltage.
· CM1-AD04VI 0~20mA,4~20mA,0~5V,1~5V,-10~10V,0~10V
CM1-AD08I 0~20mA, 4~20mA
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

1260

CIMON-PLC

CM1-AD08V 0~5V, 1~5V, -10~10V, 0~10V
An input signal is converted to a digital value from 0 to 16000 or from –8000 to 8000.
· Average or sampling is the method used to process input signal.
· As the resolution for digital value is selected as 1/16000, high-resolution digital values will be gotten.
· The number of the modules used for one base is not limited.

Contents :

6.4.1

· General Idea

· Wiring

· Specifications

· Internal I/O Table

· Features of I/O Conversion

· Buffer Memory

General Idea

Digital Value - D

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1261

The value shown as number such as 0, 1, 2 and 3, and varied non-continuously is called digital value. ON
signal and OFF signal are shown as the digital value of 0 and 1. BCD values and binary values are also
digital values.
To operate with digital values, analog values cannot be inputted directly to a CPU module.
Therefore, analog values are to be converted to digital values like Picture 1.4, and to be inputted to a CPU.
To output analog values, it is necessary to convert the digital values in a CPU to analog values.

6.4.2

Specifications
· General Specification
· Technical Specification
· Dimensions

1262

6.4.2.1

CIMON-PLC

General Specification
Item

Specification

Operating
Temperature

-10 ~ 65oC

Storage Temperature

-25 ~ 80oC

Operating Humidity

5 ~ 95%RH, Not condensed.

Storage Humidity

5 ~ 95%RH, Not condensed.

Vibration

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

Amplitude

Sweep

f< 57Hz

0.075mm

f < 150 Hz

9.8m/s2

10 times in each
direction (X,Y,Z)

{1G}

In case of continuous vibration

Shock

Frequency

Acceleration

Amplitude

Sweep

f < 57Hz

0.035mm

f < 150 Hz

4.9m/s2

10 times in each
direction (X,Y,Z)

{1G}

- Max. Shock Acc.: 147 m/s2

{15G}

- Time : 11 (3 times in X, Y, Z)
- Pulse Wave : Half sine wave pulse
Noise

6.4.2.2

Square wave impulse
noise

±1500V

Electrostatic
discharge

Voltage: 4 kV(Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magnetic field

27 ~ 500 MHz. 10 V/m

Fast Transient Bust
Noise

Item

Power Digital I/O
Modul (24V or more)
e

Digital I/O(Less than 24V)
Analog I/O Comm.
interface

Voltage

2KV

0.25KV

Environment

No corrosive gas and no dust.

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

Less than 2

Cooling

Natural Air cooling

1KV

Technical Specification
Model Item

CM1-AD04VI

CM1-AD08V

CM1-AD08I

No. of Analog Input

4 points

8 points

0 ~ 20mA

0 ~ +5V

0 ~ 20mA

4 ~ 20mA

1 ~ +5V

4 ~ 20mA

0 ~ +5V

0 ~ +10V

1 ~ +5V

-10V ~ +10V

Points
Analog Input

0 ~ +10V
-10V ~ +10V
Digital Output

0~16000(-8000~8000)

XP / CP Series(CM1)

Maximum Resolution

Input

Range of Analog Input

Max. Resolution

Digital Output

Voltage

0 ~ +5V

0.25mV

0 ~ 16000

1 ~ +5V

0.3125mV

0 ~ +10V

0.625mV

-10V ~ +10V

1.25mV

Conversion Rate

Current
0 ~ 20mA
±0.3%(Full Scale)
4 ~ 20mA
5mS/1ch

Absolute Maximum

Voltage : ±12V

Input

Current : ±25mA

Type of Insulation

Between input terminal and PLC : Photo Coupler Insulation

Precision

-8000 ~ 8000

1.25mA
1mA
±12V

±25mA

Between Channels : No Insulation

6.4.2.3

Occupied Points

16 points

Contact Terminal

18-point Terminal Block

Internal

+5V

Current

+15V

(mA)

Dimensions
Unit : mm

1263

1264

6.4.3

CIMON-PLC

Features of I/O Conversion
Features of I/O conversion mean the gradient of the straight line connecting offset values and gain values when
the analog signals (Voltage or current) from the outside of a PLC are converted to digital values.
An offset value is the analog input value(Voltage or current) corresponding to the digital output value of 0(-8000)
and a gain value is the analog input value(Voltage or Current) corresponding to the digital output value of
16000(8000).

Contents :
· Feature of Voltage Input (AD04VI)
· Feature of Voltage Input (AD08I)
· Feature of Voltage Input (AD08V)

6.4.3.1

AD04VI

No.

Range of Analog Input

Offset

Gain

Digital Output Value

Max. Resolution

1 ~ 5V

0 ~ 16000 (-8000~8000)

0.25mV

0 ~ 5V

0.3125mV

0 ~ 10V

10V

0.625mV
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

-10 ~ 10V

-10V

10V

1265

1.25mV

In case that the analog inputs corresponding to the digital output values out of the range come, the maximum
and the minimum of the digital output values are fixed as –192 and 16191(-8192 & 8191).

6.4.3.2

AD08I

No.

Range of Analog Input

Offset

Gain

0 ~ 20mA

0mA

20mA

4 ~ 20mA

4mA

20mA

Digital Output Value
0 ~ 16000(-8000~8000)

Max. Resolution
1.25mA
1mA

In case that the analog inputs corresponding to the digital output values out of the range come, the maximum
and the minimum of the digital output values are fixed as –192 and 16191(-8192 & 8191).

1266

6.4.3.3

CIMON-PLC

AD08V

No.

Range of Analog Input

Offset

Gain

Digital Output Value

Max. Resolution

1 ~ 5V

0 ~ 16000(-8000~8000)

0.25mV

0 ~ 5V

0.3125mV

0 ~ 10V

10V

0.625mV

-10 ~ 10V

-10V

10V

1.25mV

In case that the analog inputs corresponding to the digital output values out of the range come, the maximum
and the minimum of the digital output values are fixed as –192 and 16191(-8192 & 8191).

6.4.4

Wiring

Safety Precautions :
· Use separate cables for AC and outside input signals of an A/D converter module to keep from the serge
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1267

or the induced noise occurring from the AC.
· Select a wire, considering ambient temperature and allowable current. AWG22(0.3 ) or more is
recommended as the thickness of the wire.
· Keep the wire out of heat-generating device, toxic substance and oil. They may cause breakdown or
malfunction.
· Make sure polarity before inputting analog value to a terminal block.
· The wiring together with high-voltage line or power line may cause malfunction or breakdown.

Contents :
· AD04VI

6.4.4.1

· AD08V

· AD08I

AD04VI
Measured values are inputted to all the channels grouped as Terminal 1-2-3, 5-6-7, 9-10-11 and 13-14-15.

1268

CIMON-PLC

[ In case of voltage input ]
+ Terminal

- Terminal

Ch 1

Terminal 1

Terminal 3

Ch 2

Terminal 5

Terminal 7

Ch 3

Terminal 9

Terminal 11

Ch 4

Terminal 13

Terminal 15

[ In case of current input ]
+Terminal

- Terminal

Action

Ch 1

Terminal 2

Terminal 3

Connect 1-2

Ch 2

Terminal 6

Terminal 7

Connect 5-6

Ch 3

Terminal 10

Terminal 11

Connect 9-10

Ch 4

Terminal 14

Terminal 15

Connect 13-14

· +15V and -15V are used for AD04VI, AD08I and AD08V.
· POWER module is to be CM1-SPB or CM1-SPC.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.4.4.2

AD08I

Terminal 17 and Terminal 18 are not used.

+ Terminal

- Terminal

Ch 1

Terminal 1

Terminal 2

Ch 2

Terminal 3

Terminal 4

Ch 3

Terminal 5

Terminal 6

Ch 4

Terminal 7

Terminal 8

Ch 5

Terminal 9

Terminal 10

Ch 5

Terminal 11

Terminal 12

Ch 7

Terminal 13

Terminal 14

Ch 8

Terminal 15

Terminal 16

1269

1270

6.4.4.3

CIMON-PLC

AD08V

Terminal 17 and Terminal 18 are not used.

6.4.5

+ Terminal

- Terminal

Ch 1

Terminal 1

Terminal 2

Ch 2

Terminal 3

Terminal 4

Ch 3

Terminal 5

Terminal 6

Ch 4

Terminal 7

Terminal 8

Ch 5

Terminal 9

Terminal 10

Ch 6

Terminal 11

Terminal 12

Ch 7

Terminal 13

Terminal 14

Ch 8

Terminal 15

Terminal 16

Internal I/O Table
Direction of Signal(CPU ?A/D Module)

Direction of Signal(CPU ?A/D Module)

Input

Name of Signal

Output

Name of Signal

X00

A/D module ready

Y00

Not use

X01

Flag indicating A/D-converted

Y01

X02

Flag indicating operation condition set up

Y02

Requesting to set up operation condition

X03

Flag indicating the channel switched

Y03

Requesting to switch an channel

X04

Flag indicating offset or gain calibration
mode

Y04

Requesting to calibrate offset or gain

X05

Not use

Y05

Assigning offset or gain calibration mode

X06

Y06

Not use

X07

Y07

X08

Y08

X09

Y09

X0A

Y0A

X0B

Y0B

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1271

X0C

Y0C

X0D

Y0D

X0E

Y0E

Requesting to reset max. value/min. value

Y0F

Requesting to clear the error

X0F

Flag indicating an error in A/D module

The numbers of I/O signals is for the case an A/D module is mounted on Slot 0 of a local base.

Contents :
· Input Signals

6.4.5.1

· Output Signals

Input Signals
Devic Signal Name

Description

e NO.
X00

A/D module
ready

1) If the power is inputted to a CPU or a CPU is reset, A/D conversion will be ready. At
this time, this signal is set and A/D conversion is processed.
2) When this signal is off, A/D conversion is not processed. In the following case, A/D
module ready will be reset.
· During Offset/Gain calibration mode

X01

Flag indicating

If all the enabled channels convert, this signal will be set.

A/D-converted
X02

Flag indicating
operation

1) This is used as the interlock condition to set/reset request to set up operation
condition(Y02) when enabling/disabling to A/D-convert is switched.

condition set up 2) When this signal(X02) is reset, A/D conversion is not processed. In the following
case, flag indicating operation condition set up will be reset.
· When module ready is reset.
· When requesting to set up operation condition is set.

X03

Flag indicating
the channel

1) This is used as the interlock condition to set/reset request to switch a channel (Y03)
when the channel for calibrating offset and gain is switched.

1272

CIMON-PLC

X04

switched

2) Refer to Chapter 7 for offset/gain calibration.

Flag indicating

1) This is used as the interlock condition to set/reset requesting to calibrate

Offset or Gain
calibration

offset/gain(Y04) when registering value after an offset/a gain are calibrated.
2) Refer to Chapter 7 for offset/gain calibration.

mode

X0F

Flag indicating

1) If an error occurs in writing to buffer memory, this flag will be set.

an error in A/D

2) To clear error code, request to clear the error(Y0F) is be set.

module

6.4.5.2

Output Signals
Devi
ceN
O.

Signal Name

Description

Y02

Requesting to

1) This is set when the contents of enabling/disabling to A/D-convert, assigning

set up operation

average process, the average time and the average number of times when

condition

average process is assigned are available.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1273

2) Refer to X02(Flag indicating operation condition set up) for set/reset timing.
Y03

Requesting to

1) This is set when switching the channel for offset/gain calibration.

switch an

2) Refer to X03(Flag indicating channel switched) for set/reset timing

channel
Y04

Requesting to

1) This is set when the calibrated values of offsets/gains are registered to A/D

calibrate offset
Y05

module.

or gain

2) Refer to X04(Flag indicating offset/gain calibration mode) for set/reset timing.

Assigning offset

1) This is set when assigning offset/gain calibration mode.

or gain mode

2) When it is reset, normal mode(A/D Conversion mode.
3) If offsets/gains are set up, this is to be reset.

Y0E

Requesting to

1) If the request to reset maximum value and minimum value is set, the maximum

reset maximum
value and

value and minimum value stored in buffer memory will be cleared.
2) After this is set, this is to be reset.

minimum value
Y0F

6.4.6

Requesting to

1) This is set to clear the error.

clear an error

2) Refer to X0F(Flag indicating an error in A/D module) for set/reset timing.

Buffer Memory
Address

Description

Hexa

Deci

Enabling/disabling to
A/D-convert setup

Address

Description

Hexa

Deci

R/W

17H

Channel to calibrate gain

R/W

Average time & average
number of times of CH1

R/W

18H

Setting up digital output 1

R/W

Average time & average
number of times of CH2

R/W

19H

Setting up digital output 2

R/W

Average time & average
number of times of CH3

R/W

1AH

Not use

Average time & average
number of times of CH4

R/W

1BH

Average time & average
number of times of CH5

R/W

1CH

Average time & average
number of times of CH6

R/W

1DH

Average time & average
number of times of CH7

R/W

1EH

Max. value of CH1

Average time & average
number of times of CH8

R/W

1FH

Min. value of CH1

Assigning averaging process

R/W

20H

Max. value of CH2

Flag indicating A/D-converted

21H

Min. value of CH2

Digital output value of CH1

22H

Max. value of CH3

Digital output value of CH2

23H

Min. value of CH3

Digital output value of CH3

24H

Max. value of CH4

1274

CIMON-PLC

Digital output value of CH4

25H

Min. value of CH4

Digital output value of CH5

26H

Max. value of CH5

10H

Digital output value of CH6

27H

Min. value of CH5

11H

Digital output value of CH7

28H

Max. value of CH6

12H

Digital output value of CH8

29H

Min. value of CH6

13H

Error code

2AH

Max. value of CH7

14H

Set range(CH1 ~ CH4)

R/W

2BH

Min. value of CH7

15H

Set range(CH5 ~ CH8)

R/W

2CH

Max. value of CH8

16H

Channel to calibrate offset

R/W

2DH

Min. value of CH8

· Each data is word type.
· Buffer memory from CH.5 to CH.8 cannot be used for 4-channel module.
· R/W indicates whether reading/writing from a PLC is enabled. (R : Reading is enabled. / W : Writing is
enabled.)

6.4.6.1

Enabling / Disabling to A/D Convert (Address "0")
Buffer Memory Address "0"

· This is used to set up whether enabling or disabling to A/D-convert by the channels.
· To make it available to set up enabling/disabling to A/D-convert, requesting to set up operation condition (Y02)
is to be set and reset.
· Default value is set up as disabling A/D conversion.
· As a set value is stored in EEPROM, the A/D module is operated as previously set value even though the
power is on and off.

The data from b4 to b15 of AD04VI and the data from b8 to b15 of AD08I and ADO8V are fixed as "0".

Example :
In case that the channels for A/D conversion are 2,4,6,8, 00AAH(170) is to be written to Buffer Memory Address
"0" and requesting to set up operation condition (Y02) is to be set and reset.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.4.6.2

1275

Average Time / Average Number of Times (Address "1 - 8")
Buffer Memory Address "1 ~ 8"

· These are used to set up the average time and the average number of times for an assigned channel.
· To make the setup available, requesting to set up operation condition (Y02) is to be set and reset.
· The ranges available to set up are as follows.
( Average process by number of times: 4 ~ 62500 times / Average process by time: 20 ~ 5000ms )
· Default value is fixed as "0".
· As a set value is stored in EEPROM, the A/D module is operated as previously set value even though the
power is on and off.

6.4.6.3

Assigning Average Process (Address "9")
Buffer Memory Address "9"

· Use the CICON to select sampling process or average process, and to write a set value to Buffer Memory "9"
· To make the setup available, requesting to set up operation condition (Y02) is to be set and reset.
· In case that average process is selected, use the CICON to select average time or number of times.
· Default value is set up as the sampling process and averaging number of times for all channels.
· As a set value is stored in EEPROM, the A/D module is operated as previously set value even though the
power is on and off.

Assigning the channels for average process

Assigning time and number of times

1 : Average Process

1 : Averaging Time

0 : Sampling Process

0 : Averaging Number of Times

1276

CIMON-PLC

Example :
In case that Channel 1 and 5 are assigned to averaging number of times, Channel 2 and 7 to averaging time and
the rest to the sampling process, requesting to set up operation condition(Y02) is set and reset after
5342H(21314) is stored in Buffer Memory Address "9".

6.4.6.4

A/D Converted (Address "10")
Buffer Memory Address "10"

· If an assigned channel is A/D-converted first, the memory for A/D-converted will be set. And, flag indicating
A/D-converted (X02) will be set if all channels are A/D-converted first
· If requesting to set up operation condition (Y03) is on, the memory will be reset. And if a corresponding
channel is A/D-converted, the memory will be set.
· In case of 4-channel module, the data from b4 to b7(CH5 ~ CH8) are disregarded.

1 : A/D Converted / 0 : A/D Converting or not use

The data from b4 of AD04VI and the data from b8 to b15 of AD08I and AD08V are fixed as "0".

Example :
When Channel 1,2 and 6 are enabled to A/D-convert and all the channels A/D-convert, 0023H(35) is stored in
Buffer Memory Address ?0?as
follows.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.4.6.5

1277

Digital OutPut Value (Address "11 - 18")
Buffer Memory Address "11 ~ 18"

· A/D-converted digital output values are stored in buffer memory addresses from 11 to 18 by channels.
· Digital output values are indicated in signed 16-bit binary value.
· The range of output values is from 0(-8000) to 16000(8000). In case that values are out of the range, they are
outputted in the range from –192 to 16191 or –8192 to 8191.

6.4.6.6

Error Codes (Address "19")
Buffer Memory Address "19"

· The error codes detected from an A/D module are stored in these addresses.
· is from 1 to 4 for AD04VI and from 1 to 8 for AD08I and AD08V(The number means the channel.). ?is from 1
to 3.
· If an error occurs, it will be kept till it is cleared or the power is off. If an error is not cleared after it occurs, an
newly occurring error will be disregarded. (To clear an error, use the CICON to set or reset the YOF
(Requesting to clear error).)
[ Error codes are decimal figure.]

Error code

Description

The case that the range of input setup is wrong
The case that current is set up in AD08V or voltage is set up in AD08I

The case that average process time is out of range

The case that number of average process times is out of range

The case that an offset value is greater than a gain value

The case that offset channels and gain channels are calibrated at the same time

Error in system (A/S required)

1278

6.4.6.7

CIMON-PLC

Range of Input Setup (Address "20, 21")
Buffer Memory Address "20","21"

· These are used to set up the range of inputs by channels for an A/D converter module.
· To make the setup available, requesting to set up operation condition(Y02) is to be set and reset.
· The set values of the channels from 1 to 4 are stored in Buffer Memory Address "20" and the set values of the
channels from 5 to 8 are stored in Buffer Memory Address "21".
· In case of 4-channel module, Buffer Memory Address "21" is disregarded.
· The range of the default values for AD04VI, AD08I is from 4 to 20(mA) and the range for AD08V is from 1 to
5V.
· As a set value is stored in EEPROM, the A/D module is operated as previously set value even though the
power is on and off.

b15 ~ 12

b11 ~ b8

b7 ~ b4

b3 ~ b0

Buffer Memory Address "20"

CH 4

CH 3

CH 2

CH 1

Buffer Memory Address "21"

CH 8

CH 7

CH 6

CH 5

The set values are as follows.

6.4.6.8

Range of Input

Set Value

4 ~ 20(mA)

0 ~ 20(mA)

1 ~ 5(V)

0 ~`5(V)

-10 ~ 10(V)

0 ~ 10(V)

Offset/Gain Calibration Mode (Address "22, 23")
Buffer Memory Address "22", "23"

· These are used to assign the channel of which offset/gain are calibrated.
· The channel to calibrate an offset is assigned to Buffer Memory Address "22" and the channel to calibrate an
gain is assigned to Buffer Memory Address "23".
· It is available to set up two channels at the same time. But, an offset and a gain is to be calibrated each. (One
of Buffer Memory Address "22" and "23" should be set up as "0".) If both are set up at the same time, an
error(Error code "49") occurs in offset/gain calibration mode.
· In case of a 4-channel module, the data from b4 to b7(For channels from 5 to 8) are disregarded.
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.4.6.9

1279

Digital Output Setup Mode (Address "24, 25")
Buffer Memory Address "24, 25"

· This is used to decide whether the range of digital output value is -192 ~ 16191, -8192 ~ 8191, 0 ~ 16000,
-8000 ~ 8000.
· To make this setup available, requesting to set up operation condition (Y02) is to be set and reset.
· If the corresponding bit of each channel is 0, the range of values is from –192 to 16191. If it is 1, the range of
values is from -8192 to 8191.
· Default value is set up as 0(-192~16191).
· As a set value is stored in EEPROM, the A/D module is operated as previously set value even though the
power is on and off.

Address 24

Address 25

Digital Output

-192 ~ 16191

-8192 ~ 8191

0 ~ 16000

-8000 ~ 8000

1280

CIMON-PLC

6.4.6.10 Devices to Strore Max. and Min. (Address "30 - 45")
Buffer Memory Address "30 - 45"

· These are used to store the maximum value or the minimum value of converted digital output values by
channels.
· If requesting to set up operation condition (Y02) is set and setup is changed, or requesting to reset the
maximum value and the minimum value, the values stored in all the channels will be cleared as "0". The
maximum value and the minimum value are stored from when they are cleared and A/D conversion starts.
· The maximum value and the minimum value are also stored in the channel assigned to average process
according to the time for sampling process.

6.5

D/A Converters
D/A Modules are used to convert signed 16-bit binary digital values to analog signals (Direct voltage or direct
current).

Features :
· DA16I is a 16-channel current (4~20mA) output DA module.
DA08I is an 8-channel current (4~20mA) output DA module.
DA04I is a 4-channel current (4~20mA) output DA module.
DA16V is a 16-channel current (-10~10V) output DA module.
DA08V is an 8-channel voltage (-10~10V) output DA module.
DA04V is a 4-channel voltage (-10~10V) output DA module.
· As the resolution for digital values is selected as 1/16000, high-resolution analog values will be gotten
· DA converter modules are used to convert the digital values for signed 16-bit binary data (Data: 14 bits)
set up in a CPU to analog signals (Voltage or current). The digital values in the range from 0 to
16000((-8000~8000) are converted to the analog values in the range from 4 to 20mA(-10~10V).
· If you use the CICON to set up hold or clear, a DA output value will be outputted as offset
value(4mA,-10V) or a current DA output value will be kept in case that a PLC is switched from RUN
mode to STOP mode or an error occurs in a CPU.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1281

· The channel disabled to convert outputs offset value(4mA,-10V).
· The number of modules on one base is not limited.
(But, they can be used within the range satisfying the capacity of a power module.)

Contents :

6.5.1

· General Idea

· Wiring

· Specifications

· Internal I/O Table

· Features of I/O Conversion

· Buffer Memory

General Idea

Digital Value - D

The values shown as number such as 0, 1, 2 and 3, and varied non-continuously are called digital values. ON
signal and OFF signal are shown as the digital value of 0 and 1. BCD values and binary values are also digital
values.
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

1282

CIMON-PLC

To operate in digital value, analog values cannot be inputted directly to a CPU module.
Therefore, analog value is to be converted to digital value like Picture 1.4, being inputted to a CPU.
To output analog values, it is necessary to convert the digital values in a CPU to analog values.

6.5.2

Specifications

CIMON-PLC D/A Converters :
· General Specification
· Technical Specification
· Dimensions

6.5.2.1

General Specification
Item

Specification

Operating
Temperature

-10 ~ 65oC

Storage Temperature

-25 ~ 80oC

Operating Humidity

5 ~ 95%RH, Not condensed.

Storage Humidity

5 ~ 95%RH, Not condensed.

Vibration

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

Amplitude

Sweep

f< 57Hz

0.075mm

f < 150 Hz

9.8m/s2

10 times in each
direction (X,Y,Z)

{1G}

In case of continuous vibration

Shock

Frequency

Acceleration

Amplitude

Sweep

f < 57Hz

0.035mm

f < 150 Hz

4.9m/s2

10 times in each
direction (X,Y,Z)

- Max. Shock Acc.: 147 m/s2

{1G}

{15G}

- Time : 11 (3 times in X, Y, Z)
- Pulse Wave : Half sine wave pulse
Noise

Square wave impulse
noise

±1500V

Electrostatic
discharge

Voltage: 4 kV(Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magnetic field

27 ~ 500 MHz. 10 V/m

Fast Transient Bust

Item

Power Digital I/O

Digital I/O(Less than 24V)

XP / CP Series(CM1)

Noise
Voltage

6.5.2.2

Environment

No corrosive gas and no dust.

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

Less than 2

Cooling

Natural Air cooling

Modul
e

(24V or more)

Analog I/O Comm.
interface

2KV

1KV

0.25KV

Technical Specification
DA04V

DA08V

DA16VI

DA16I

DA04I

DA08I

Analog Output
Points

4Point

8Point

16Points

16Point

4Point

8Point

Analog Output

-10V ~ +10V

Digital Input

-192 ~ 16191(-8192~8191)

Maximum
Resolution

0 ~ 10V

4 ~ 20mA

Output

Digital Input Value

Range of Analog Output

Max. Resolution

Voltage

0 ~ 16000 (-8000~8000)

-10V ~ +10V

1.25mV

0 ~ 16000 (-8000~8000)

0 ~ 10V

0.625mV

0 ~ 16000 (-8000~8000)

4 ~ 20mA

1.0mA

Current
Precision

±0.1%(Full Scale)

Conversion Rate

10ms/4CH

/ 15ms/8CH

10ms/4CH

Absolute Maximum · Voltage : ±15V
Input
· Current : +24mA
Type of Insulation

· Between input terminal and PLC : Photo Coupler Insulation
· Between output channels : No Insulation
· Between the externally supplied power and analog output: No Insulation

6.5.2.3

1283

Supplied power

None

Occupied Points

16Points

Contact Terminal

18Point Terminal Block

Internal
Current
(mA)

+5V

+15V

-15V

+24V

Dimensions
Unit : mm

+24V

100

15ms/8CH

1284

6.5.3

CIMON-PLC

Features of I/O Conversion
Features of I/O conversion mean the gradient of the straight line connecting an offset value and a gain value
when the analog signals(Voltage or current) from the outside of a PLC are converted to digital value.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1285

Offset value is the analog input value(Voltage or current) corresponding to the digital output value of 0(-8000)
and Gain value is the analog input value(Voltage or Current) corresponding to the digital output value of
16000(8000).
value(Voltage or Current) corresponding to the digital output value of 16000(8000).

Contents :
· Features of Voltage Output (DA04V, DA08V)
· Features of Current Output (DA04I, DA08I)
· Features of Voltage and Current Output (DA04VA, DA08S)

6.5.3.1

Features of Voltage Output (DA04V, DA08V)

Range of Analog Outputs

Offset

Gain

Digital Input Value

Max. Resolution

-10 ~ 10V

-10V

10V

0 ~ 16000 (-8000~8000)

1.25mV

1286

6.5.3.2

CIMON-PLC

Features of Current Output (DA04I , DA08I)

Range of Analog Outputs

Offset

Gain

Digital Input Value

Max. Resolution

4 ~ 20V

4mA

20mA

0 ~ 16000 (-8000~8000)

1.0mV

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.5.3.3

6.5.4

1287

Features of Voltage and Current Output (DA04VA , DA08VA)

Range of Analog Outputs

Offset

Gain

Digital Input Value

Max. Resolution

0 ~ 10V

10V

0 ~ 16000 (-8000~8000)

0.625mV

Wiring

Safety Precautions :
· Use separate cables for AC and outside input signals of a D/A converter module to keep from the serge
or the induced noise occurring from AC.
· Select wires, considering ambient temperature and allowable current. AWG22(0.3 ) or more is
recommended as wire thickness.
· Keep wires out of heat-generating device, toxic substance and oil. They may cause breakdown or
malfunction.
· Make sure polarity before inputting an analog value to a terminal block.
· The wiring together with high-voltage line or power line may cause malfunction or breakdown.

1288

CIMON-PLC

Contents :
· DA04V, DA08V, DA04VA, DA08VA

6.5.4.1

· DA04I, DA08I

DA04I, DA08I
The channels from 5 to 8 of DA04I are not used.
DC +24V is to be supplied to Ch. 17 and 18.

+ Terminal

- Terminal

Ch 1

Terminal 1

Terminal 2

Ch 2

Terminal 3

Terminal 4

Ch 3

Terminal 5

Terminal 6

Ch 4

Terminal 7

Terminal 8

Ch 5

Terminal 9

Terminal 10

Ch 5

Terminal 11

Terminal 12

Ch 7

Terminal 13

Terminal 14

Ch 8

Terminal 15

Terminal 16

External Input 24V

Terminal 17

Terminal 18

In case of DA04I and DA08I, the voltage of +5V through the base and the voltage of +24V from the outside is
necessary. The external power (24V) is to be supplied by CM1-SPA or CM1-SPC or other power supply device.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.5.4.2

1289

DA04V, DA08V, DA04VA, DA08VA
The channels from 5 to 8 of the DA04V are not used.
Terminal 17 and Terminal 18 are not used in case that the
power is outputted.

+ Terminal

- Terminal

Ch 1

Terminal 1

Terminal 2

Ch 2

Terminal 3

Terminal 4

Ch 3

Terminal 5

Terminal 6

Ch 4

Terminal 7

Terminal 8

Ch 5

Terminal 9

Terminal 10

Ch 5

Terminal 11

Terminal 12

Ch 7

Terminal 13

Terminal 14

Ch 8

Terminal 15

Terminal 16

** DA04VA, DA08VA "0 ~ 10V"

In case of DA04V and DA08V, the voltage of +5V, +15V and -15V are used through the base. CM-SPB or
CM1-SPC is required.

6.5.5

Internal I/O Table
Signal Direction (CPU ?D/A Module)

Signal Direction (CPU ?D/A Module)

Input

Signal Name

Output

Signal Name

X00

D/A module ready

Y00

Not use

X01

Not use

Y01

X02

Y02

X03

Y03

X04

Y04

X05

Y05

X06

Y06

X07

Y07

X08

Y08

X09

Y09

X0A

Flag indicating operation condition set up

Y0A

Requesting to set up operation condition

1290

CIMON-PLC

X0B

Flag indicating the channel switched

Y0B

Requesting to switch an channel

X0C

Flag indicating the set value modified

Y0C

Requesting to modify an set value

X0D

Flag indicating offset or gain calibration
mode

Y0D

Requesting to calibrate offset or gain

X0E

Not use

Y0E

Assigning offset or gain calibration mode

X0F

Flag indicating an error in D/A module

Y0F

Requesting to clear an error

The numbers of I/O signal are the ones of the case that a D/A module is mounted on Slot 0 of a local base.

Contents :
· Input Signals

6.5.5.1

· Output Signals

Input Signals
Devic Signal Name

Description

e NO.
X00

D/A module
ready

1) If the power is inputted to a CPU or a CPU is reset, D/A conversion will be ready.
At this time, this signal is set and D/A conversion is processed.
2) When this signal is off, D/A conversion is not processed. In the following case, D/A
module ready will be reset.
During offset/gain calibration mode

X0A

Flag indicating 1) This is used as the interlock condition to set/reset request to set up operation
operation
condition(Y0A) when enabling / disabling to D/A- convert is switched.
condition set up
2) In the following case, flag indicating operation condition set up will be reset.
When module ready(X00) is reset.
When requesting to set up operation condition(Y0A) is set.

X0B

Flag indicating
the channel
switched

1) This is used as the interlock condition to set/reset request to switch a channel
(Y03) when the channel of which offset and gain are calibrated is switched.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

X0C

X0D

X0F

1291

Flag indicating
the set value
modified

1) This is used as the interlock condition to set/reset Requesting to modify a set

Flag indicating
offset or gain
calibration
mode

1) This is used as the interlock condition to set/reset Requesting to calibrate

Flag indicating
an error in D/A
module

1) If an error occurs in writing to buffer memory, the flag is set.

value(Y0C) when offset/gain are calibrated.

offset/gain when offset/gain are calibrated.

2) To clear error code, requesting to clear an error(Y0F) is set.

1292

6.5.5.2

CIMON-PLC

Output Signals
Devi
ce
NO.

Name of Signal

Description

Y0A

Requesting to

1) This is set when the contents of enabling/disabling to D/A- convert, hold/clear are

set up operation
Y0B

effective.

condition

2) Refer to X0A(Flag indicating operation set up) for set/reset timing.

Requesting to

1) This is set when the channel for offset/gain calibration is changed.

switch an

2) Refer to X0B(Flag indicating channel switched) for set/reset timing

channel
Y0C

Requesting to
modify an set
value

1) This is set and reset if an analog output value is increased or decreased when
offset/gain are calibrated.
2) According to the value set up to Buffer Memory Address 21, analog output is
increased or decreased.

Y0D

Requesting to

1) This is used to calibrate offset/gain and store the value.

calibrate offset

2) Refer to X0D for set/reset timing.

or gain
Y0E

Assigning offset
or gain

1) This is used to set when it is started to calibrate offset/gain and to reset when they
has been calibrated.

calibration
mode
Y0F

6.5.6

Requesting to

1) This is set to clear the error.

clear an error

2) Refer to X0F(Flag indicating error occurring in D/A module) for set/reset timing.

Buffer Memory
Address

Description

Default value

R/W

Enabling/disabling to D/A convert setup

R/W

Digital value of CH.1

R/W

Digital value of CH.2

R/W

Digital value of CH.3

R/W

Digital value of CH.4

R/W

Digital value of CH.5

R/W

Digital value of CH.6

R/W

Digital value of CH.7

R/W

Digital value of CH.8

R/W

Error code

Hold/Clear

R/W

Set value check code of CH1

Hexa

Deci

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1293

Set value check code of CH2

Set value check code of CH3

Set value check code of CH4

Set value check code of CH5

10H

Set value check code of CH6

11H

Set value check code of CH7

12H

Set value check code of CH8

13H

Channel to calibrate offset

R/W

14H

Channel to calibrate gain

R/W

15H

Calibrated offset value and gain value

R/W

16H

Setting up digital input type

R/W

17H

Enabling / Disabling D/A output setup

R/W

· The channels from 5 to 8 are not used for a 4-channel module.
· The type of every data is word.
· R/W indicates whether reading/writing from a PLC is enabled. (R : Reading is enabled / W : Writing is
enabled)

6.5.6.1

Enabling / Disabling to D/A Convert (Address "0")
Buffer Memory Address "0"

· This is used to set up whether enabling or disabling to D/A-convert by the channels.
To make it available to set up enabling/disabling to D/A-convert, requesting to set up operation condition
(Y0A) is to be set and reset.
· Default value is set up as disabling D/A conversion.
· As a set value is stored in EEPROM, the A/D module is operated as previously set value even though the
power is on and off.

1294

6.5.6.2

CIMON-PLC

Digital Value by Channels (Address "1 - 8")
Buffer Memory Address "1 ~ 8"

· These are the devices where signed 16-bit binary values are written to D/A-convert.
· In case that the values within and except the range of setup are written, the values that a D/A module gets are
as follows.
Range of Output

Range of Setup

In case that the value except setup range, the
value that a D/A module gets

-10V ~ 10V

-192 ~ 16191 (Actual: 0 ~ 16000)

16191(8192) or more: 16191(8191)

0 ~ 10V

-8192 ~ 8191 (Actual:-8000~8000)

-192(-8193) or less: -192(-8192)

4mA ~ 20mA

· When digital values are inputted, it is not necessary to set/reset requesting to set up operation condition
(Y0A).

6.5.6.3

Error Codes (Address "9")
Buffer Memory Address "9"

· The error codes detected from a D/A module are stored in these addresses.
· is from 1 to 4 for DA04I, DA04V and DA04VA and from 1 to 8 for DA08I, DA08V and DA08VA(The number
means the channel.)
·

is from 1 to 3

· If an error occurs, it will be kept till it is cleared or the power is off. If an error is not cleared after it occurs, a
newly occurring error will be disregarded

[ Error codes are decimal figure. ]

Error code

Description

The case that a set digital input value is out of maximum range (16191, 8191)

The case that a set digital input value is out of minimum range (-192, -8192)

The case that an offset value is greater than a gain value

The case that both an offset and an gain are calibrated or two channels are set up at the
same time

The case that a calibrated digital value is out of range when offset/gain is calibrated

Error in system (A/S required)

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.5.6.4

1295

Setting up Hold / Clear (Address "10")
Buffer Memory Address "10"

· This is used to keep analog output values as previous values or output an offset value when a PLC stops or
an error occurs in it.
· 0 : Clear , 1 : Hold
· To make hold/clear setup available, requesting to set up operation condition(Y0A) is to be set and reset.
· Default value is clear.
· As a set value is stored in EEPROM, the A/D module is operated as previously set value even though the
power is on and off.

The combination of analog output statuses is as follows.

CM1-DA04I, CM1-DA08I
Enabling / Disabling to D/A convert

Enable

Disable

(Buffer Memory Address "0")
Enabling / Disabling output by

Enable

Disable

4mA

channels
(Buffer Memory Address "23")
Setting up Hold & Clear

Hold

Clear

(Buffer Memory Address "10")
PLC CPU RUN, PAUSE

A digital value is D/A converted and
the result is output in analog value.

PLC CPU STOP

Keep

4mA

PLC CPU Heavy-Error

Keep

4mA

CM1-DA04V, CM1-DA08V
Enabling / Disabling to D/A convert
(Buffer Memory Address "0")

Enable

Disable

Enabling / Disabling output by
channels

Enable

Disable

(Buffer Memory Address "23")
Setting up Hold & Clear
(Buffer Memory Address "10")

Hold

Clear

1296

CIMON-PLC

Digital Input Type
(Buffer Memory Address "22")

-192
~16191

-8192
~8191

-192
~16191

-8192
~8191

-192~
16191

-8192
~8191

-10V

A digital value is D/A converted and

PLC CPU RUN, PAUSE

the result is output in analog value.

PLC CPU STOP

Keep

-10V

PLC CPU Heavy-Error

Keep

-10V

CM1-DA04VA, CM1-DA08VA
Enabling / Disabling to D/A convert
(Buffer Memory Address "0")

Enable

Disable

Enabling / Disabling output by
channels

Enable

Disable

(Buffer Memory Address "23")
Setting up Hold & Clear
(Buffer Memory Address "10")

Hold

Clear

A digital value is D/A converted and

6.5.6.5

PLC CPU RUN, PAUSE

the result is output in analog value.

PLC CPU STOP

Keep

PLC CPU Heavy-Error

Keep

Set Value Check Code by Channels (Address "11 - 18")
Buffer Memory Address "11 ~ 18"

· These are the devices where the result of checking whether set digital values are within the range of setup or
not is stored.
· In case of the digital value except the range of setup, the following check codes are stored.
Check code

Description

000FH

The case that a digital value is greater than the maximum

00F0H

The case that a digital value is less than the minimum

00FFH

The case, in the state that the value less than the minimum is written and not
cleared, the digital value greater than the maximum is written or the case contrary to
that

· A stored check code is not reset though a digital value is within the range of setup.
· To reset set value check codes by channels, after the digital values are changed to the values within the range
of setup, requesting to clear error(Y0F) is to be set.
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.5.6.6

1297

Channel to Calibrate Offset / Gain (Address " 19, 20")
Buffer Memory address "19","20"

· These are used to set up the channels for calibrating an offset and a gain.
· One between an offset and a gain, and one among channels can be assigned.
If the channels for calibrating both an offset and a gain are assigned at the same time or two channels are
assigned, Error 41 will occur.

6.5.6.7

Calibrated Offset Value and Gain Value (Address "21")
Buffer Memory Address "21"

· This is used to calibrate an offset value and a gain value little by little.
· Refer to Chapter 7 for offset/gain calibration.

6.5.6.8

Set up Digital Input Type (Address "22")
Buffer Memory Address "22"

· This is used to set up digital input type.
· To make it available to set up digital input type, requesting to set up operation condition (Y0A) is to be set and
reset.

Type of Digital Input

Analog Output

-192 ~ 16191(Actual : 0 ~ 16000)

4 ~ 20mA

1298

CIMON-PLC

-8192 ~ 8192(Actual : -8000 ~ 8000

-10 ~ 10V
0 ~ 10V

· Default value is 0 (-192~16191).
· As a set value is stored in EEPROM, the A/D module is operated as previously set value even though the
power is on and off.

6.5.6.9

Enabling / Disabling D/A Output (Address "23")
Buffer Memory Address "23"

· This is used to set up whether D/A output is enabled or disabled.
· In case that D/A output is disabled, it is not necessary to set and reset requesting to set up operation condition
(Y0A).
· Default value is to disable D/A output.

6.6

RTD Module
RTD converter modules are used to receive inputs from a resistance temperature detector of Pt100 or jPt100 or
Pt1000 to measure their temperatures and to convert the temperatures to signed 16-bit binary digital values.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1299

· The temperatures converted by the platinum resistance temperature detector of Pt100 or JPt100 or
Pt1000

can be displayed in centigrade or Fahrenheit(oC, oF) and the temperature values can be

processed as digital values up to the first decimal place.
· Converted temperature data are converted to 16-bit binary data, which can be processed as digital
values. The temperatures in the range from -200oC to 600oC are converted to the values from 0
to16000(-8000~8000).
· The range of temperatures is from -250oC to 650oC and the range of digital values is from –192 to
16191.
· If a minimum temperature value and a maximum temperature value are set up, the minimum value will
be converted to 0(-8000) and the maximum value to 16000(8000).
· The breaking of resistance temperature detectors and cables, and the excess of measuring range are
detected by channels.
· It is available to connect four points of a Pt100 or a JPt100(RD04A) or a Pt1000(RD04B) to one module.
· The number of the modules mounted on one base is not limited.
· LED is lighted in case of normal status and blinks at the intervals of 0.3 second in case of error

Click :

· General Idea

· Shared Memory

· Specifications

· CICON - Setting up RTD Card

· Installing and Wiring

· Trouble Shooting

· Internal I/O Table

1300

6.6.1

CIMON-PLC

General Idea

Analog Value - A,

The value varied continuously such as voltage, current, temperature, speed, pressure, flow and so on are
called analog values. For the example of temperature, it is continuously varied with time like Picture 1.1.
Varied temperatures like this are processed as digital values by the RTD module in a PLC.

Digital Value - D,
The value shown as number such as 0, 1, 2 and 3, and varied non-continuously are called digital values.
ON signal and OFF signal are shown as the digital value of 0 and 1. BCD values and binary values are also
digital values.

To operate with digital values, analog values cannot be inputted directly to a CPU module.
Therefore, analog values is to be converted to digital values like Picture 1.4, being inputted to a CPU.
To output analog values, it is necessary to convert the digital values in a CPU to analog values.

Platinum Resistance Temperature Detector,
This is a sensor used to detect temperatures in the type of a resistance.
RTD Pt100 and RTD jPt100 indicate the output of 100.00 ? for 0oC.
RTD Pt1000 indicates the output of 1000.00 ? for 0oC.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1301

Characteristics of Temperature Conversion,

· The resistance values of a Pt100 are varied according to the variation of the temperature around it.
· RTD modules linearize the non-linear resistance input of RTD as the above diagram.
· Temperature values are stored in the memory of a RTD module in the converted temperature values.
· A PLC CPU reads the converted temperature values stored in the memory of the RTD module.

Enabling/Disabling to RDT-Convert
1) It is available to assign enabling/disabling to RTD-convert to input channels.
2) As unused channels can be assigned to disabling to RDT-convert, the time for sampling is reduced.

Detected Temperature Values
1) The centigrade or the Fahrenheit values of converted temperatures are stored in a memory.(Actual
Temperature * 10)

1302

CIMON-PLC

2) Converted temperatures are converted to the values in the range from 0 to 16000.

Information about Operating Channels
1) The information on the currently operating channels is indicated.
2) In case of the breaking of the wires among the currently enabled channels, the corresponding bit is 0.
3) The bit corresponding to disabled channels is 0.

Detecting the Breaking of Wires
1) The breaking of the wires connected to a RTD for each channel can be checked.
2) If the breaking of wires is detected, a RTD module will keep the temperature value before broken and not
convert anymore. Error code is indicated and LED blinks at the intervals of 0.3 sec.
3) In case that a shield line is connected or disconnected due to bad contact, a RTD module converts when
connected and keeps current temperature value when disconnected. Error code is indicated and LED
blinks at the intervals of 0.3 sec.

Setting up Digital Output
1) The range of the digital output values stored in a buffer memory can be selected as -192~16191 or
-8192~8191.

Setting up Maximum and Minimum Temperature
1) RTD modules convert the temperatures from –200 to 600 to the digital values from 0(-8000) to
16000(8000). The maximum value and the minimum value of temperatures can be set up.
2) If a maximum and a minimum value are set up, RDT modules convert the minimum to 0(-8000) and the
maximum to 16000(8000).

6.6.2

Specifications
· General Specifications
· Module Specifications
· Outward View and Dimensions

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.6.2.1

1303

General Specifications

Item

Specification

Operating
Temperature

-10 ~ 65oC

Storage Temperature

-25 ~ 80oC

Operating Humidity

5 ~ 95%RH, Not condensed.

Storage Humidity

5 ~ 95%RH, Not condensed.

Vibration

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

Amplitude

Sweep

f< 57Hz

0.075mm

f < 150 Hz

9.8m/s2

10 times in each
direction (X,Y,Z)

{1G}

In case of continuous vibration

Shock

Frequency

Acceleration

Amplitude

Sweep

f < 57Hz

0.035mm

f < 150 Hz

4.9m/s2

10 times in each
direction (X,Y,Z)

- Max. Shock Acc.: 147 m/s2

{1G}

{15G}

- Time : 11 (3 times in X, Y, Z)
- Pulse Wave : Half sine wave pulse
Noise

6.6.2.2

Square wave impulse
noise

1500V

Electrostatic
discharge

Voltage: 4 kV(Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magnetic field

27 ~ 500 MHz. 10 V/m

Fast Transient Bust
Noise

Item

Power Digital I/O
Modul (24V or more)
e

Digital I/O(Less than 24V)
Analog I/O Comm.
interface

Voltage

2KV

0.25KV

Environment

No corrosive gas and no dust.

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

Less than 2

Cooling

Natural Air cooling

1KV

Module Specifications
Item

Specification

Available RTD

RD04A

Pt 100 (JIS C1640-1989, DIN 43760-1980)
JPt100 (KS C1603-1991, JIS C1604-1981)

RD04B

Pt1000 (DIN EN 60751)

1304

CIMON-PLC

Range of Temperature
Input

RD04A

JPt100 : -200.0oC to 600oC (17.14 to 317.28W)
RD04B

Digital Output

Pt 100 : -200.0oC to 600oC (18.48 to 313.59W)

Pt1000 : -200.0oC to 600oC (185.201 to 3137.080W)

Digitally Converted Value : 0 ~ 16,000(-8000~8000)
Detected Temperature Value : -2000~6000(First Decimal Place Value X 10 times)

Detecting the breaking of 3 wires by channels available
wires
Accuracy

0.3%(Full Scale)

Max. Conversion Rate

50ms / channel

Number of Temperature
Input Points

4 channels / module

Insulation Type

Between input terminal and PLC : Photo Coupler Insulation
Between output channels : No Insulation

Contact Terminal
Internal Current
(mA)

6.6.2.3

18-point Terminal Block
+5V

+15V

-15V

Outward View and Dimensions
Unit :mm

6.6.3

Installing and Wiring

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1305

Conditions
· Install in a waterproof and dust proof control panel.
· Install at the place without continuous shock or vibration.
· Keep out of the direct rays of the sun.
· No dew caused by sudden temperature variation.
· Keep ambient temperature from 0 to 55 C.

Works
· In case of making bolthole or wiring, keep a PLC from dust and dregs.
· Install at the place for easy operation.
· Do not install together with high-voltage device and same panel.
· The distance between ducts and modules is to be over 50 .
· Ground at the place where the environment of noise is good.

Cautions
· Do not drop or shock.
· Do not separate a PCB from a case. That may be the reason of breakdown.
· In case of wiring, take care that dregs come into the top of a module. If there are, remove them.
· Mount or take out a module after turning off the power.

Safety Precautions
· Use separate cables for AC and outside input signals of an RTD converter module to keep from the
serge or the induced noise occurring from the AC.
· Select the wire, considering ambient temperature, allowable current. AWG22(0.3 mm2) or more is
recommended as the thickness of the wire.
· Keep the wire out of heat-generating device, toxic substance and oil. They may cause breakdown or
malfunction.
· Make sure polarity before inputting analog value to a terminal block.
· The wiring together with high-voltage line or power line may cause malfunction or breakdown.

Example of Wiring
Measured values are inputted to all the channels grouped as Terminal 1-2-3, 5-6-7, 9-10-11 and 13-14-15.

1306

CIMON-PLC

[Wiring Method]
Channel

Terminal
A

Terminal
B

Terminal
b

Terminal
FG

Ch 1

Terminal
1

Terminal
2

Terminal
3

Terminal
18

Ch 2

Terminal
5

Terminal
6

Terminal
7

Terminal
18

Ch 3

Terminal
9

Terminal
10

Terminal
11

Terminal
18

Ch 4

Terminal
13

Terminal
14

Terminal
15

Terminal
18

· Connect the shields of a RTD and a wire to the FG of a RTD
input module.
· The difference between the values of the wires is to be 1? or
less.

6.6.4

Internal I/O Table
Signal Direction (CPU <- RTD Module)

Signal Direction (CPU -> RTD Module)

Input

Signal Name

Output

Signal Name

X00

RTD module ready

Y00

Not use

X01

Flag indicating RTD-converted

Y01

X02

Flag indicating operation condition set up

Y02

Requesting to set up operation condition

XP / CP Series(CM1)

X03

Not Use

Y03

X04

Y04

X05

Y05

X06

Y06

X07

Y07

X08

Y08

X09

Y09

X0A

Y0A

X0B

Y0B

X0C

Y0C

X0D

Y0D

X0E

Y0E

X0F

Flag indicating an error in RTD Module

Y0F

1307

Not use

Requesting to clear an error

** The numbers of I/O signal are the ones of the case that a RTD module is mounted on Slot 0 of a local base.

6.6.4.1

Input Signals
NO

Name of Signal

Description

X00

RTD module ready

· If power is inputted to a CPU or a CPU is reset, RTD conversion will be ready.
At this time, this signal is set and RTD conversion is processed.

X01

Flag indicating

· If all the enabled channels convert, this signal will be set.

RTD-converted
X02

Flag indicating
operation condition
set up

· This is used as the interlock condition to set/reset request to set up operation
condition (Y02) when enabling/disabling to RTD-convert is switched.
· When this signal(X02) is reset, RTD conversion is not processed.
In the following case, flag indicating operation condition set up will be reset.
When requesting to set up operation condition is set.

1308

CIMON-PLC

X0F

6.6.4.2

Flag indicating an

· If an error occurs in writing to buffer memory, this flag will be set.

error in RTD module

· To clear error code, request to clear an error(Y0F) is be set.

Output Signals
NO.

Name of Signal

Description

Y02

Requesting to set up

· This is set when the contents of enabling/disabling to RTD-convert, assigning

operation condition

RTD set data and the max./min. temperature setup are available.
· Refer to X02 for set/reset timing.

Y0F

6.6.5

Requesting to clear

· This is set to clear an error.

an error

· Refer to X0F(Flag indicating an error in RTD module) for set/reset timing

Shared Memory
Address

Description

R/W

Address

Description

R/W

Hexa

Deci

Hexa

Deci

Enabling/disabling to RTD-convert
setup

R/W

1EH

Assigning Average Process

R/W

Detected temp. value of CH.1(°C)

1FH

Error code value of CH.1

Detected temp. value of CH.2(°C)

20H

Error code value of CH.2

Detected temp. value of CH.3(°C)

Error code value of CH.3

Detected temp. value of CH.4(°C)

Error code value of CH.4

Detected temp. value of CH.5(°C)

Error code value of CH.5

Detected temp. value of CH.6(°C)

Error code value of CH.6

Detected temp. value of CH.7(°C)

Error code value of CH.7

Detected temp. value of CH.8(°C)

Error code value of CH.8

1)Assigning RTD type

R/W

Not use

Detected temp. value of CH.1 (°F)

Max. temp. input value of CH.1

R/W

Detected temp. value of CH.2 (°F)

Max. temp. input value of CH.2

R/W

Detected temp. value of CH.3 (°F)

Max. temp. input value of CH.3

R/W

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1309

Detected temp. value of CH.4 (°F)

Max. temp. input value of CH.4

R/W

Detected temp. value of CH.5 (°F)

Max. temp. input value of CH.5

R/W

10H

Detected temp. value of CH.6 (°F)

Max. temp. input value of CH.6

R/W

11H

Detected temp. value of CH.7 (°F)

Max. temp. input value of CH.7

R/W

12H

Detected temp. value of CH.8 (°F)

Max. temp. input value of CH.8

R/W

13H

Information on operating channels

Max./min. temp. setup data

R/W

14H

Not use

Error in max./min. setup

15H

Digitally converted value of CH.1

Min. temp. input value of CH.1

R/W

16H

Digitally converted value of CH.2

Min. temp. input value of CH.2

R/W

17H

Digitally converted value of CH.3

Min. temp. input value of CH.3

R/W

18H

Digitally converted value of CH.4

Min. temp. input value of CH.4

R/W

19H

Digitally converted value of CH.5

Min. temp. input value of CH.5

R/W

1AH

Digitally converted value of CH.6

Min. temp. input value of CH.6

R/W

1BH

Digitally converted value of CH.7

Min. temp. input value of CH.7

R/W

1CH

Digitally converted value of CH.8

Min. temp. input value of CH.8

R/W

1DH

Digital output setup

R/W

3B-3E

59-62

Setting up average time /filter
coefficient for CH1-CH4

R/W

Note 1) Only RD04A is for R/W and RD04B cannot be used.
· The buffer memory from CH.5 to CH.8 cannot be used for 4-channel module.
· Each data is word type
· R/W indicates whether reading/writing from a PLC is enabled. (R : Reading is enabled.

W : Writing is

enabled.)

6.6.5.1

Enabling/Disabling to RTD-Convert ("0")

Buffer Memory Address "0"
· This is used to set up whether enabling or disabling to RTD-convert by the channels.
· To make it available to set up enabling/disabling to RTD-convert, requesting to set up operation condition
(Y02) is to be set and reset.
· Disabling to RTD-convert is set up as default value.
· As a set value is stored in EEPROM, a RTD module is operated as previously set value even though power is
on and off.

1310

CIMON-PLC

· [Ex. ] In case that the channels for A/D conversion are 2,4, 00AAH(170) is to be written to Buffer Memory
Address "0" and requesting to set up operation condition (Y02) is to be set and reset.

6.6.5.2

Detected Temperature Values °C ("1-8")

Buffer Memory Address "1~8"
· The temperature values detected by RTD conversion are indicated.
The values stored in a memory are actual temperature value * 10.
· The range of the temperatures converted is from -200oC to 600oC. In case that they are over the range, they
are fixed within the range from –250oC to 650oC.

6.6.5.3

Assigning RTD Type ("9")

Buffer Memory Address "9" for RD04A only, not for RD04B
· To make it available to set up enabling/disabling to RTD-convert, requesting to set up operation condition
(Y02) is to be set and reset.
· Default value is Pt100 for the RD04A and Pt1000 for the RD04B.
· As a set value is stored in EEPROM, a RTD module is operated as previously set value even though power is
on and off. 0 : Pt100 1 : jPt100

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.6.5.4

1311

Detected Temperature Values °F ("11-18")

Buffer Memory Address "11 ~ 18"
· The temperature values detected by RTD conversion are indicated.
The values stored in a memory are actual temperature value * 10.
· The range of the temperatures converted is from –392 to 1112 oF . In case that they are over the range, they
are fixed within the range from –482 to1202 oF .

6.6.5.5

Information about Operating Channels ("19")

Buffer Memory Address "19"
· The information about currently operating channels is indicated.
· Among enabled channels, 0 is stored as the bit of the channels to which the wires connected are broken and 1
is stored as the bit of operating channels.
· The bit corresponding to disabled channel is 0.

6.6.5.6

Digitally Converted Values ("21-28")

Buffer Memory Address "21"~"28"
· When the temperature measured by a RTD is -200oC, the value is stored as 0(-8000). When the temperature
is 600oC, the value is stored as 16000(8000).

· If a maximum and a minimum temperature value are inputted, the minimum value will be stored as 0(-8000)
and the maximum as16000 (8000).

6.6.5.7

Digital Output Setup ("29")

Buffer Memory Address "29"

1312

CIMON-PLC

· This is used to select whether the range of digital output values is from 0 to 16000 or from –8000 to 8000.
· If 0 is set up, the range is from 0 to 16000. If 1, it is from –8000 to 8000.
· To make digital output setup available, requesting to set up an operation condition (Y02) is to be set and reset.
· The range from 0 to 16000 is set up as default value.
· As a set value is stored in EEPROM, the RTD module is operated as previously set value even though power
is on and off.

6.6.5.8

Assigning Average Process ("30")

Buffer Memory Address "30"
· This is used to enable or disable the average process of a RTD module.
· To make enabling/disabling average process, requesting to set up an operation condition(Y02) is to be set and
reset.
· Disabling average process is set up as default value.
· As a set value is stored in EEPROM, a RTD module is operated as previously set value even though power is
on and off.

6.6.5.9

Error Codes ("31-38")

Buffer Memory Address "31 ~ 38"
· The error codes detected from a RTD module are stored in these addresses.
·

is from 1 to 3.

· If an error occurs, it will be kept till it is cleared or power is off. If an error is not cleared after it occurs, a newly
occurring error will be disregarded.
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1313

· Error codes are decimal figure.
01

In case that A is broken

In case that B is broken

In case that b or both A and B is broken

In case that a measured temperature is over the range of max. and min. temperature

10?

Error in system (A/S required)

6.6.5.10 Buffer Memory Address ("41-58")

Maximum Temperature Input Values (Buffer Memory Address "41"~"48")
Max./Min. temperature setup data (Buffer Memory Address "49")
Error in max./min. setup (Buffer Memory Address "50")
Minimum temperature input value (Buffer Memory Address "51"~"58")

6.6.5.11 Setting up Average Time/Filter Coefficeient for Ch1-Ch4 ("59-62")

Buffer Memory Address "59~62"
· This is used to store a set filter coefficient value and a set average time value.
· In 1 word, lower 1 byte : Set average time value : 1~255 sec.
Upper 1 byte: Set filter coefficient value : 0~70 %
In case that filtering function is not used, set value is 0.
· [Ex. ] If the average process value of Channel 1 is 2sec. and the filter coefficient of it is 50, 3202H(12802) is
stored in Buffer Memory 49.

1314

6.6.6

CIMON-PLC

CICON - Setting up RTD Card
If you select the RTD in the Optional Card Setup dialog box of the Tool, a RTD Module Setup dialog box will
appear. The number of the base and slot where an RTD module is mounted are automatically shown. And if you
double-click the corresponding RTD module in the project window, the following dialog box will appear, too. The
values that are currently set up in the RTD module are shown.

Click :

· Setting up Channels
· Initialization Program on a Local Base
· Comparing Converted Values on an Expansion Base

6.6.6.1

Setting up Channels

1. If you double-click the corresponding channel on the above window or click

after

selecting a channel, a Channel Features Setup dialog box will appear as follows.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1315

· RTD Type : PT100 and JPT100 for RD04A / PT1000 for RD04B
· Range of Digitally Converted Values : -192~16191, -8192~8191
· Digital Filter : 0~70%
· Average Operation : 1~255sec.

If you click

, the icon is changed to

. Click the channel in the AD Module Setup dialog box to

revise the set values for a corresponding channel.

2. Click 'OK' after the channel is set up.

3. If you select all channels with the mouse as follows and
the channels.

, it will be available to set up all

1316

CIMON-PLC

4. Click

to operate the RTD card with set values.

The message "Set values are recorded in module" is shown in the message bar.
After the set values are stored in EEPROM, even power is on/off, analog input values are converted with
currently set channel values.

is used to read the currently set values in the AD card.

Status

If you click

in the RTD Module Setup dialog box, the OS version, you can make sure the

converted values and the Error Code for the RTD card and the scale of the converted temperature values can be
set up.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

If you select a channel and click

1317

, the following dialog box will appear.

· The default digital value scale for -200oC ~ 600oC is 0(-8000) ~16000(8000). To revise the maximum and
minimum temperature value, the Scale Setup is to be selected and the temperature when digital values
are 0 and 16000 is be set up.
· A set scale value is not stored in EEPROM. To apply this setup in case that power is on/off, write the part
for applying the scale value in SCAN program.

1318

6.6.6.2

CIMON-PLC

Initialization Program on a Local Base

Configuration :
The case that a RD04A is mounted on Slot 4 of a local base (5-slot base)

Initial Setup :
Used Channel

Channel 1

Channel 2

RTD Type

PT100

jPT100

Digital Output Type

-192~16191

-8192~8191

Max. Temp. Input Value

600

500

Min. Temp. Input Value

-200

Explanation for Program :
1. The value set up to buffer memory is inputted as TO command.
2. Channel 1 uses the initially set value(-200~600oC) as max. and min. temp. and Channel 2 uses the
range (0~500oC).(The min. and max. value are converted to digital values from 0 to 16000.)
3. Flag requesting to set up an operation condition is on.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1319

4. After making sure that flag indicating operation condition set up of the AD module is 0, flag requesting
operation condition is off.

Point
· If flag requesting to set up an operation condition is set and reset, a RTD module is operated with the
set values inputted to buffer memory by TO command. Otherwise, it is continuously operated with
previously set values.
· The initialization of an analog module can be set up in the optional card setup.

Program :

1320

CIMON-PLC

Row 0 : Converting Channel 1 and 2 is enabled.
Row 1 : Channel 1: PT100, Channel 2: jPT100
Row 2 : Channel 1: -8192~8191, Channel 2: -192~16191 Setting up digital input type
Row 3 : Maximum temperature input value for Channel 2 -> 500oC
Row 4 : Minimum temperature input value for Channel 2 -> 0oC
Row 5 : The set maximum and minimum temperature data is for Channel 2.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1321

Row 6 : Requesting to set up operation condition(Y42) is set.
Row 7 : When Indicating operation condition set up(X4A) is on falling edge, requesting to set up operation
condition(Y4A) is reset-> The set values of the RTD module has been changed.
Row 8 : end

6.6.6.3

Comparing Converted Values on an Expansion Base

Configuration :
· 5-slot local base : On Slot 0, mount an YR16A.
· 5-slot expansion : On Slot 0, mount a RD04A.
· 5-slot expansion : On Slot 0, mount a RD04A.

1322

CIMON-PLC

Initial Setup :
Used Channel

Channel 1

Type of RTD

PT100

Type of Digital Output

-192~16191

Max. Temp. Input Value

400oC

Min. Temp. Input Value

-100oC

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1323

Explanation for Program(Scan Program) :
1. The value set up to buffer memory is inputted as TO command.
2. Flag requesting to set up an operation condition is on.
3. After making sure that flag indicating operation condition set up of the RTD module is 0, flag requesting
operation condition is off.
4. After being initialized, the RTD module starts to be converted according to the set values.
5. If the value of Buffer Memory 1 where converted temperature value is stored is
· more than -100oC and less than or equal to 0oC, Y0000 is on.
· more than 0oC and less than or equal to 300oC, Y0001 is on.
· more than 300oC and less than 400oC, Y0002 is on.
6. In case that the wire is cut-off after reading the information about the operation channel, Y0003 is on and
Operation Outputs(Y0000~Y0002) are off.
7. Select the menu to register Scan program in the CICON.

Scan Program :

1324

CIMON-PLC

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1325

Row 0 : Expansion 1-Slot 0-Channel 1: Enable to convert
Row 1 : Channel 1: PT100
Row 2 : Channel 1: -192~16192 is set up as digital input.
Row 3 : Channel 1: Maximum temperature input value is 400oC.
Row 4 : Minimum temperature input value: -100oC
Row 5 : Data for setting up temperature
Row 6 : Requesting to set up operation condition(Y52) is set.
Row 7 : When Indicating operation condition set up(X5A) is on falling edge, requesting to set up operation
condition(Y5A) is reset-> The set values of the RTD module has been changed.
Row 8 : To start the comparison program after the set values of RTD have been revised, M0000 is set.
Row 9 : The converted temperature value of Channel 1 is read and stored in D0000.
Row 10 : The information about operating channel is read and stored in D0001.
Row 11 : Through the information about the operating channel, it is checked whether the wire for Channel
1 is cut-off.
Row 12 : If the converted temperature value of Channel 1 is more than -100oC and less than 100oC, Y0000
is output.
Row 13 : If the converted temperature value of Channel 1 is more than 100oC and less than or equal to
300oC, Y0001 is output.

1326

CIMON-PLC

Row 14 : If the converted temperature value of Channel 1 is more than 300oC and less than or equal to
400oC, Y0002 is output.
Row 15 : In case the wire is cut-off, Y0003 is output.
Row 16 : END

Explanation for Program(Scan Program) :
Comparing Temperature Values
The value actually stored in buffer memory is "Actual Temperature * 10?and is indicated up to the first
decimal place.
Accordingly, to compare with the temperature value in the buffer memory, you multiply the temperature
value compared by 10 and compare the result with the read value.
If the value read from a buffer memory and stored in the D0000 is 3304, it is actually 330.4oC.
To compare with 330oC, compare 3304 with 3300(330*10).

Comparing Digital Values
The RD04A module converts the temperatures from –200 to 600oC to the digital values from 0 to16000.
If a max. and a min. temperature value are set up, the input max. and min. temperature value are converted
to 0 and 16000.
As the max. and min. temperature value are –100 and 500oC, -100oC is converted to 0 and 500oC to
16000.
600(oC) : 16000(Digital Value) = 1(oC) : X(Digital Value)
X = 26.66 The digital value per one oC is about 26.666.
Accordingly,
when –100oC, the digital value is 0
when 300oC, the digital value is 26.666*(100+300) = 10666.
when 400oC, the digital value is 26.666*(100+400) = 13333.

6.6.7

XP / CP Series(CM1)

· RUN LED is out
· CPU module cannot read converted temperature values
· RTD input values do not correspond to detected temperature values
· RTD Converter module breaks down

6.6.7.1

RUN LED blinks

6.6.7.2

RUN LED is out

1327

1328

6.6.7.3

CIMON-PLC

CPU module cannot read converted temperature values

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.6.7.4

RTD input values do not correspond to detected temperature values

6.6.7.5

RTD Converter module breaks down

1329

The hardware of the RTD module breaks down.
Please call to a distributor.
6.7

TC Module
TC converter modules are used to receive inputs from thermocouples (K, J, E, T, B ,R,S), to measure their
temperatures and to convert the temperatures to signed 16-bit binary digital value.
Seven kinds of thermocouple can be directly connected to a TC converter module to convert temperature(oC)
data to the digital values used in PLCs.

Features :
· The temperatures converted in the state that 7 kinds(K, J, E, T, R, S, B) of thermocouple are connected
to a TC module can be indicated in Centigrade or Fahrenheit(oC, oF) and the temperature values can be
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

1330

CIMON-PLC

processed as digital values up to the first decimal place.
· Converted temperature data are converted to 16-bit binary data, which can be processed as digital
values. The min. value and the max. value of each thermocouple are converted to 0 and
16000(-8000~8000).
· Temperatures are expressed up to min. value of -50oC and max. value of +50oC and digital values are
expressed in the range from –192 to 16191(- 8192~8191).
· If a minimum temperature value and a maximum temperature value are set up, the minimum value will
be converted to 0(-8000) and the maximum value to 16000(8000).
· The breaking of thermocouples and cables and the excess of measuring range are detected by
channels..
· It is available to connect 4 thermocouples with one module.
· The number of the modules used on one base is not limited.
· Reference junction compensation by the temperature sensor mounted on a terminal is automatically
performed.

Click :

· General Idea

· Shared Memory

· Specifications

· CICON - Setting up TC Card

· Installing and Wiring

· Trouble Shooting

· Internal I/O Table

6.7.1

Specifications
· General Specifications
· Module Specifications
· Outward View and Dimensions

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.7.1.1

1331

General Specifications

Item

Specification

Operating
Temperature

-10 ~ 65oC

Storage Temperature

-25 ~ 80oC

Operating Humidity

5 ~ 95%RH, Not condensed.

Storage Humidity

5 ~ 95%RH, Not condensed.

Vibration

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

Amplitude

Sweep

f< 57Hz

0.075mm

f < 150 Hz

9.8m/s2

10 times in each
direction (X,Y,Z)

{1G}

In case of continuous vibration

Shock

Frequency

Acceleration

Amplitude

Sweep

f < 57Hz

0.035mm

f < 150 Hz

4.9m/s2

10 times in each
direction (X,Y,Z)

- Max. Shock Acc.: 147 m/s2

{1G}

{15G}

- Time : 11 (3 times in X, Y, Z)
- Pulse Wave : Half sine wave pulse
Noise

6.7.1.2

Square wave impulse
noise

1500V

Electrostatic
discharge

Voltage: 4 kV(Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magnetic field

27 ~ 500 MHz. 10 V/m

Fast Transient Bust
Noise

Item

Power Digital I/O
Modul (24V or more)
e

Digital I/O(Less than 24V)
Analog I/O Comm.
interface

Voltage

2KV

0.25KV

Environment

No corrosive gas and no dust.

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

Less than 2

Cooling

Natural Air cooling

1KV

Module Specifications

Specification
Available
Thermocouple

Type K, J, E, T, B, R, S ,N

Digital Output

· Digitally Converted Value : 0 ~ 16000(-8000~8000),
· Converted Temperature Value:(Range of Measured Temp.X10)

1332

CIMON-PLC

Range of
Temperature

Type of
Thermocouple

DIN Code

Range of Measured
Temp.(oC)

Range of (mV)

-200.0~1200.0

-5891~48828

-200.0~800.0

-7890~45498

-200.0~600.0

-8824~45085

-200.0~400.0

-5602~20869

400.0~1800.0

786~13585

0.0~1750.0

0~21006

0.0~1750.0

0~18612

-200 ~1250.0

-3990~43846

RJC

Automatic

Detecting the breaking
of wires

By channels

ITS-90

[(Full Scale)x0.3%+1oC(RJC Error)]

Accuracy
Max. converted Rate

50ms / channel

No. of Input Channels

4 channels / module

Type of Insulation

· Between input terminal and PLC : Photo Coupler Insulation
· Between output channels : No Insulation

6.7.1.3

Connection Terminal

18-point Terminal

Current
Consumtion
(mA)

+5V

+15V

-15V

Outward View and Dimensions
Unit : mm

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.7.2

Installing and Wiring

Installation Environment
Conditions
· Install in a waterproof and dustproof control panel.
· Install at the place without continuous shock or vibration.
· Keep out of the direct rays of the sun.
· No dew caused by sudden temperature variation.
· Keep the ambient temperature from 0 to 55 oC.

Works
· In case of making bolthole or wiring, keep a PLC from dust and dregs.
· Install at the place to operate easily.
· Do not install together with high-voltage device and same panel.
· The distance between ducts and modules is to be over 50 oC.
· Ground at the place where the environment of noise is good.

Cautions
· Do not drop or shock.

1333

1334

CIMON-PLC

· Do not separate a PCB from a case. That may be the reason of breakdown.
· In case of wiring, take care that dregs come into the top of a module. If there are, remove them.
· Mount or take out a module after turning off power.

Safety Precautions
· Use separate cables for AC and outside input signals of a TC converter module to keep from the serge
or the induced noise occurring from the AC.
· Select the wire, considering ambient temperature, allowable current. AWG22(0.3 mm2) or more is
recommended as the thickness of the wire.
· Keep the wire out of heat-generating device, toxic substance and oil. They may cause breakdown or
malfunction.
· Make sure polarity before inputting analog value to a terminal block.
· The wiring together with high-voltage line or power line may cause malfunction or breakdown.

Example of Wiring
Measured values are inputted to all the channels grouped as Terminal 7-8, 9-10, 11-12, 13-14.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1335

[Wiring Method]

Channel

Terminal +

Terminal -

Terminal FG

Ch 1

Terminal 7

Terminal 8

Terminal 18

Ch 2

Terminal 9

Terminal 10

Terminal 18

Ch 3

Terminal 11

Terminal 12

Terminal 18

Ch 4

Terminal 13

Terminal 14

Terminal 18

Cable is to be used as conducting wires.
Connect the shield part of a wire to FG terminal(No. 18) and ground it.
Connect RJC to Terminal 1, 3 and 5.

6.7.3

Internal I/O Table
Signal Direction (CPU <- TC Module)

Signal Direction (CPU -> TC Module)

Input

Signal Name

Output

Signal Name

X00

TC module ready

Y00

Not use

X01

Flag indicating TC-converted

Y01

X02

Flag indicating operation condition set up

Y02

Requesting to set up operation condition

X03

Not Use

Y03

Not Use

X04

Y04

X05

Y05

X06

Y06

X07

Y07

X08

Y08

X09

Y09

X0A

Y0A

1336

CIMON-PLC

X0B

Y0B

X0C

Y0C

X0D

Y0D

X0E

Y0E

X0F

Flag indicating an error in RTD Module

Y0F

Requesting to clear an error

** The numbers of I/O signal are the one of the case that a TC module is mounted on Slot 0 of a local base.

6.7.3.1

Input Signals
NO.

Name of Signal

Description

X00

TC module Ready

· If power is inputted to a CPU or a CPU is reset, TC conversion will be ready. At
this time, this signal is set and TC conversion is processed.

X01

Flag indicating

· If all enabled channels convert, this signal will be set..

TC-converted
X02

Flag indicating
operation condition
set up

· This is used as the interlock condition to set/reset request to set up operation
condition(Y02) when enabling/disabling to TC-convert is switched.
· When this signal(X02) is reset, TC conversion is not processed.
In the following case, flag indicating operation condition set up will be reset.
When requesting to set up operation condition is set.

X0F

Flag indicating an

· If an error occurs in writing to buffer memory, this flag will be set.

error in TC module

· To clear error code, request to clear the error(Y0F) is be set.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.7.3.2

1337

Output Signals
NO.

Name of Signal

Description

Y02

Requesting to set up

· This is set when the contents of enabling/disabling to TC-convert, assigning

operation condition

TC set data and the max./min. temperature setup are available.
· Refer to X02 for set/reset timing.

Y0F

6.7.4

Requesting to clear

· This is set to clear an error.

an error

· Refer to X0F(Flag indicating an error in TC module) for set/reset timing

Shared Memory
Address
Hexa

Description

R/W

Deci

Address

Description

R/W

Hexa

Deci

R/W

1EH

Assigning Average Process

Enabling/disabling to TC-convert
setup

Detected temp. value of
CH.1(°C)

1FH

Error code value of CH.1

Detected temp. value of
CH.2(°C)

20H

Error code value of CH.2

Detected temp. value of
CH.3(°C)

21H

Error code value of CH.3

Detected temp. value of
CH.4(°C)

22H

Error code value of CH.4

Detected temp. value of
CH.5(°C)

23H

Error code value of CH.5

Detected temp. value of
CH.6(°C)

24H

Error code value of CH.6

Detected temp. value of
CH.7(°C)

25H

Error code value of CH.7

Detected temp. value of
CH.8(°C)

26H

Error code value of CH.8

Assigning TC type(CH.1~CH.4)

R/W

27H

Not use

Assigning TC type(CH.5~CH.8)

R/W

28H

Detected temp. value of CH.1
(°F)

29H

Max. temp. input value of CH.1

R/W

Detected temp. value of CH.2
(°F)

2AH

Max. temp. input value of CH.2

R/W

Detected temp. value of CH.3
(°F)

2BH

Max. temp. input value of CH.3

R/W

Detected temp. value of CH.4
(°F)

2CH

Max. temp. input value of CH.4

R/W

1338

CIMON-PLC

Detected temp. value of CH.5
(°F)

2DH

Max. temp. input value of CH.5

R/W

10H

Detected temp. value of CH.6
(°F)

2EH

Max. temp. input value of CH.6

R/W

11H

Detected temp. value of CH.7
(°F)

2FH

Max. temp. input value of CH.7

R/W

12H

Detected temp. value of CH.8
(°F)

30H

Max. temp. input value of CH.8

R/W

13H

Information on operating channels

31H

Assigning temp. setup data

R/W

14H

Assigning type setup data

R/W

32H

Error in temp. setup

15H

Digitally converted value of CH.1

33H

Min. temp. input value of
CH.1

R/W

16H

Digitally converted value of CH.2

34H

Min. temp. input value of
CH.2

R/W

17H

Digitally converted value of CH.3

35H

Min. temp. input value of
CH.3

R/W

18H

Digitally converted value of CH.4

36H

Min. temp. input value of
CH.4

R/W

19H

Digitally converted value of CH.5

37H

Min. temp. input value of
CH.5

R/W

1AH

Digitally converted value of CH.6

38H

Min. temp. input value of
CH.6

R/W

1BH

Digitally converted value of CH.7

39H

Min. temp. input value of
CH.7

R/W

1CH

Digitally converted value of CH.8

3AH

Min. temp. input value of
CH.8

R/W

1DH

Digital output setup

R/W

3B-3E

59-62

Setting up average time
/filter coefficient for
CH1-CH4

R/W

· The buffer memory from CH.5 to CH.8 cannot be used for 4-channel module.
· Each data is word type
· R/W indicates whether reading/writing from a PLC is enabled. (R : Reading is enabled. / W : Writing is
enabled.)

6.7.4.1

Enabling/Disabling to TC-Convert ("0")

Buffer Memory Address "0"
· This is used to set up whether enabling or disabling to TC-convert by the channels.
· To make it available to set up enabling/disabling to TC-convert, requesting to set up operation condition(Y02)
is to be set and reset.
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1339

· The default value is set up as disabling to TC-convert.
· As a set value is stored in EEPROM, the TC module is operated as previously set value even though power is
on and off.

6.7.4.2

Detected Temperature Values °C ("1-8")

Buffer Memory Address "1~8"
· The temperature values detected by TC conversion are indicated.
The values stored in a memory are actual temperature value * 10.

· Range of the temperatures converted
TC Type

Rated Range of Measured
Temperatures(oC)

Max. Indicated Range of
Measured Temperatures(oC)

-200.0~1200.0

-250.0~1250.0

-200.0~800.0

-250.0~850.0

-200.0~600.0

-250.0~650.0

-200.0~400.0

-250.0~450.0

400.0~1800.0

350.0~1850.0

0.0~1750.0

-50.0~1800.0

0.0~1750.0

-50.0~1800.0

· In case of the temperatures out of the rated range, they are outputted up to 50 less than as the minimum and
50 greater than the range as the maximum.

1340

6.7.4.3

CIMON-PLC

Assigning TC Type ("9")

Buffer Memory Address "9"
· To make the TC type setup available, after a type is set up, the bit corresponding to the type setup data
(Buffer Memory Address 20) is to be 1 and requesting operation condition setup (Y02) is to be set and reset.
· Default value is assigned to Type K.
· As a set value is stored in EEPROM, a TC module is operated as previously set value even though power is
on and off.
[Set values according to TC type]
TC Type

Set Value

Buffer Memory Address "9"

6.7.4.4

b15 - b12

b11 - b8

b7 - b4

b3 - b0

CH.4

CH.3

CH.2

CH.1

Detected Temperature Values °F ("11-18")

Buffer Memory Address "11 ~ 18"
· The Fahrenheit temperature values detected by TC conversion are indicated.
· The values stored in memory are actual temperature value * 10.

6.7.4.5

Information about Operating Channels ("19")

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1341

· The bit corresponding to disabled channel is 0.

6.7.4.6

Digitally Converted Values ("21-28")

Buffer Memory Address "21~28"
· The temperatures measured by a TC are stored as the digital values in the range from 0(-8000) to
16000(8000). In case of the values out of the range, they are stored as the values in the range from
-192(-8192) to 16191(8191).
· If a maximum and a minimum temperature value are input, the minimum value will be stored as 0(-8000) and
the maximum as16000(8000).

6.7.4.7

Digital Output Setup ("29")

Buffer Memory Address "29"
· This is used to select whether the range of digital output values is from 0 to 16000 or from –8000 to 8000.
· If 0 is set, the range is from 0 to 16000. If 1, it is from –8000 to 8000.
· To make the digital output setup available, requesting to set up an operation condition(Y02) is to be set and
reset.
· Default value is set up as the range from 0 to 16000.
· As a set value is stored in EEPROM, a TC module is operated as previously set value even though power is
on and off.

6.7.4.8

Assigning Average Process ("30")

Buffer Memory Address "30"
· This is used to enable or disable the average process of a TC module.
· To make enabling/disabling average process, requesting to set up an operation condition (Y02) is to be set
and reset.

1342

CIMON-PLC

· Disabling average process is set up as default value.
· As a set value is stored in EEPROM, a TC module is operated as previously set value even though power is
on and off.

6.7.4.9

Error Codes ("31-38")

Buffer Memory Address "31~ 38"
· The error codes detected from a TC module are stored in these addresses.
· If an error occurs, it will be kept till it is cleared or power is off. If an error is not cleared after it occurs, a newly
occurring error will be disregarded.
·

is from 1 to 3.

· Error codes are decimal figure.
01

In case of the breaking of wires

Error in RJC

In case that TC type is wrongly set up

In case that measured temp. is over range

Error in system (A/S required)

6.7.4.10 Buffer Memory Address ("41-58")

Maximum Temperature Input Values(Buffer Memory Address "41"~"48")
Max./Min. temperature setup data(Buffer Memory Address "49")
Error in max./min. setup(Buffer Memory Address "50")
Minimum temperature input value(Buffer Memory Address "51"~"58")

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1343

· This is used to input the max. value and min. value of desired temperatures.
· To make the max. value or min. value setup available, the bits corresponding to the temperature setup
data(Address 49) of a set channel is to be set and requesting to set up an operation condition(Y02) be set and
reset.
· The error in max./min. setup is to enter the bits of the corresponding channel if an input minimum value is
greater than an input maximum value.
· Initial values are set up as the max. value and the min. value of the rated measured range.
· The max. value and the min. value changed by users are not stored in EEPROM. If you turn off and on power,
they will be the initial values(Refer to "Detected Temperature Values oC"). To use an input maximum value
and an input minimum value, it is necessary to program then directly.

6.7.4.11 Setting up Average Time/Filter Coefficient for Ch1-Ch4 ("59-62")

Buffer Memory Address "59 ~ 62"
· This is used to store a set filter coefficient value and a set average time value.

· In 1 word, lower 1 byte : Set average time value : 1~255 sec.
Upper 1 byte: Set filter coefficient value : 0~70 %
In case the filtering function is not used, the set value is 0.

· [Ex.] If the average process value of Channel 1 is 2sec. and the filter coefficient of it is 50, 3202H(12802) is
stored in Buffer Memory 49.

1344

6.7.5

CIMON-PLC

CICON - Setting up TC Card
If you select the TC in the Optional Card Setup dialog box of the Tool, a TC Module Setup dialog box will appear.
The number of the base and slot where a TC module is mounted are automatically shown. And if you
double-click the corresponding TC module in the project window, the following dialog box will appear, too. The
values that are currently set up in the TC module are shown.

Click :

· Setting up Channels
· Initialization Program on a Local Base
· Comparing Converted Values on an Expansion Base

6.7.5.1

Setting up Channels

1. If you double-click the corresponding channel on the above window or click

after

selecting a channel, a Channel Features Setup dialog box will appear as follows.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1345

· TC Type : K,J,E,T,R,S,B
· Range of Digitally Converted Values : -192~16191, -8192~8191
· Digital Filter : 0~70%
· Average Operation : 1~255sec.

If you click

, the icon is changed to

. Click the channel in the AD Module Setup dialog box to

revise the set values for a corresponding channel.

2. Click 'OK' after the channel is set up.

3. If you select all channels with the mouse as follows and
the channels.

, it will be available to set up all

1346

CIMON-PLC

4. Click

to operate the TC card with set values.

is used to read the currently set values in the AD card.

Status

If you click

in the TC Module Setup dialog box, the OS version, you can make sure the

converted values and the Error Code for the TC card and the scale of the converted temperature values can be
set up.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

If you select a channel and click

1347

, the following dialog box will appear.

· If the scale is not set up, the temperature values of each thermocouple are converted to the range
{0(-8000) ~16000(8000)}. To revise the maximum and minimum temperature value, the Scale Setup is to
be selected and the temperature when the digital value is 0 and 16000 is to be set up.
· A set scale value is not stored in EEPROM. To apply this setup in case that power is on/off, write the part
for applying the scale value in SCAN program.

6.7.5.2

Initialization Program on a Local Base

Configuration :
The case that TC04A is mounted on Slot 4 of a local base (5-slot base)

1348

CIMON-PLC

Initial Setup :
Used Channel

Channel 1

Channel 2

TC Type

Digital Output Type

-192~16191

-8192~8191

Max. Temp. Input Value

1200oC

600oC

Min. Temp. Input Value

-200oC

-100oC

Explanation for Program :
1. The value set up to buffer memory is inputted as TO command.
2. Channel 1 uses an initially set value (-200~1200oC) as max. and min. temp. and Channel 2 uses the
range (-100~500oC).(The min. and max. value are converted to digital values from 0 to 16000.)
3. Flag requesting to set up operation condition is on.
4. After making sure
Flag indicating operation condition set up of the AD module is 0, flag requesting operation condition is
off.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1349

Point
· If flag requesting to set up an operation condition is set and reset, a TC module is operated with the set
values inputted to buffer memory by TO command. Otherwise, it is continuously operated with
previously set values.
· The initialization of an analog module can be set up in the optional card setup.

Program :

Row 0 : Converting Channel 1 and 2 is enabled.
Row 1 : Channel 1: Type K, Channel 2: Type J
Row 2 : Data for setting up TC type

1350

CIMON-PLC

Row 3 : Channel 1: -192~16191, Channel 2: -8192~8191 Setting up digital input type
Row 4 : Maximum temperature input value for Channel 2 -> 600oC
Row 5 : Minimum temperature input value for Channel 2 -> -100oC
Row 6 : Set maximum and minimum temperature data is for Channel 2.
Row 7 : Requesting to set up operation condition(Y42) is set.
Row 8 : When indicating operation condition set up(X4A) is on falling edge, requesting to set up operation
condition(Y4A) is reset-> The set values of a TC module has been changed.
Row 9 : end

6.7.5.3

Comparing Converted Values on an Expansion Base

Configuration :
· 5-slot local base : Mount an YR16A on Slot 0.
· 5-slot expansion : Mount a TC04A on Slot 0.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

Initial Setup :
Used Channel

Channel 1

TC Type

Digital Output Type

-8192~8191

Max. Temp. Input Value

1200oC

Min. Temp. Input Value

-200oC

1351

1352

CIMON-PLC

Explanation for Program(Initialization Program) :
1. The value set up to buffer memory is inputted as TO command.
2. After making sure that TC module ready is 1 and flag indicating operation condition set up is 1,
requesting to set up operation condition is set.
3. After making sure that TC module ready is 1 and flag indicating operation condition set up is 0,
requesting to set up operation condition is reset.
4. After being initialized, a TC module starts to be converted according to set values.
5. If the value of Buffer Memory 1 where a converted temperature value is stored is
more than -100oC and less than or equal to 0oC, Y0000 is on.
more than 0oC and less than or equal to 300oC, Y0001 is on.
more than 300oC and less than 400oC, Y0002 is on.
6. In case that a wire is cut-off after reading the information about an operation channel, Y0003 is on and
Operation Outputs(Y0000~Y0002) are off.

Scan Program :

XP / CP Series(CM1)

Row 0 : Expansion 1-Slot 0-Channel 1: Enable to convert
Row 1 : Channel 1: Type K
Row 2 : Data for setting up TC type of Channel 1

1353

1354

CIMON-PLC

Row 3 : Setting up digital output type : -192~16191
Row 4 : Requesting to set up operation condition(Y52) is set.
Row 5 : Row 7 : When indicating operation condition set up(X5A) is on falling edge, requesting to set up
operation condition(Y5A) is reset-> The set values of the TC module has been changed.
Row 6 : To start the comparison program after the set values of TC have been revised, M0000 is set.
Row 7 : The converted temperature value of Channel 1 is read and stored in D0000.
Row 8 : The information about an operating channel is read and stored in D0001.
Row 9 : Through the information about the operating channel, it is checked whether the wire for Channel 1
is cut-off.
Row 10 : If the converted temperature value of Channel 1 is more than -100oC and less than or equal to
100oC, Y0000 is output.
Row 11 : If the converted temperature value of Channel 1 is more than 100oC and less than or equal to
300oC, Y0001 is output.
Row 12 : If the converted temperature value of Channel 1 is more than 300oC and less than or equal to
400oC, Y0002 is output.
Row 13 : In case the wire is cut-off, Y0003 is outputted.
Row 14 : END

Explanation for Program(Scan Program) :
Comparing Temperature Values
The value actually stored in buffer memory is ctual Temperature * 10?and is indicated up to the first
decimal place.
Accordingly, to compare with the temperature value in the buffer memory, you multiply the temperature
value compared by 10 and compare the result with the read value.
If the value stored in D0000, being read from buffer memory, is 3304, it is actually 330.4oC.
To compare with 330oC, compare 3304 with 3300(330*10).

Comparing Digital Values
A TC04A module converts the min. value and the max. value of inputted temperatures for every
thermocouple(K,J,E,T,R,S,B) to the digital value of 0 and 16000. If a max. and a min. temperature value are
set up, the inputted max. and min. temperature value are converted to 0 and 16000.
As the min. and the max. temperature value are set up as initial values in the following program, -200oC is
converted to 0 and 1200oC to 16000.
1400(oC) : 16000(Digital Value) = 1(oC) : X(Digital Value)
X = The digital value per one oC is about 11.428

XP / CP Series(CM1)

Accordingly,
when –100oC, the digital value is 11.428*(100) = 1142
when 300oC, the digital value is 11.428*(200+300) = 5714
when 400oC, the digital value is 11.428*(200+400) = 6856

6.7.6

Trouble Shooting
· RUN LED blinks
· RUN LED is out
· CPU Module cannot read converted temperature values
· Converted temperature values fluctuate
· TC input values do not conrrespond to detected temperature values
· TC converter module breaks down

6.7.6.1

RUN LED blinks

1355

1356

6.7.6.2

CIMON-PLC

RUN LED is out

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.7.6.3

CPU Module cannot read converted temperature values

6.7.6.4

Converted temperature values fluctuate

1357

1358

CIMON-PLC

6.7.6.5

TC input values do not conrrespond to detected temperature values

6.7.6.6

TC converter module breaks down

The hardware of the TC module breaks down.
Please call to a distributor.
6.7.7

General Idea

Analog Value

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1359

The values varied continuously such as voltage, current, temperature, speed, pressure, flow and so on are
called analog value. For the example of temperature, it is continuously varied with time like Picture 1.1.
Varied temperature like this is processed as digital values by the TC module in a PLC.

Digital Value
The values shown as the number such as 0, 1, 2 and 3, and varied non-continuously are called digital
values. ON signal and OFF signal are shown as the digital value of 0 and 1. BCD values and binary values
are also digital values.

Conducting Wire for Compensation
This is the conducting wire used to compensate the error(Variation of temperature) caused by the distance
between the terminal of a thermocouple and the input terminal of a TC module. In the range of
temperatures(G TYPE: -20~90

H TYPE: 0~150 ), almost same feature of thermal electromotive force

is gotten at both terminals.

Thermocouple
This is a temperature sensor to join the metals of two kinds and to use the thermal electromotive effect that
electromotive force is generated between the two metals and thermal current flows if temperature
difference is given at the joined point. The magnitude of electromotive force depends on the kind of joined
metals and the temperature of both joined points, not the shape or the size of metals, or variation of
temperature.

Features of Temperature Conversion
As the thermal electromotive force for the temperature of a thermocouple has non-linear feature, the
TC-converted digital values are processed linearly and are output as the detected temperature values.
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

1360

CIMON-PLC

Detecting the Breaking of Wires
When the joined thermocouple or a certain part of a conducting wire for compensating is broken, the
voltage over the measured range is input by the internal circuit to detect the breaking of the wires and the
breaking of wires are detected.

RJC : Reference Junction Compensation
As the tables of thermal electromotive forces in several codes are based on 0 , the difference between
the current temperature at the measured point(Input terminal) and the actual base temperature(0 ) is
compensated.

Characteristics of Temperature Conversion

· The thermal electromotive forces of each thermocouple are varied according to the variation of the
temperature around them.
· TC converter modules linearize non-linear thermal electromotive forces as the above diagram.
· Temperature values are stored in the memory of a TC module in converted temperature values.
· A PLC CPU reads the converted temperature values stored in the memory of a TC module.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1361

Enabling/Disabling to TC-convert
1) It is available to assign input channels to enabling/disabling to TC-convert.
2) As unused channels can be assigned to disabling to TC-convert, the time for sampling is reduced.

Detected Temperature Values
1) The centigrade or Fahrenheit values of converted temperatures are stored in memory.(Actual
Temperature * 10).
2) Converted temperatures are converted to the values in the range from 0 to 16000.

Information about Operating Channels
1) The information about currently operating channels is indicated.
2) In case of the breaking of the wires among currently enabled channels, a corresponding bit is 0.
3) The bit corresponding to disabled channels is 0.

Setting up Digital Output
1) The range of the digital output values stored in buffer memory can be selected as -192~16191 or
-8192~8191.

Setting up Maximum and Minimum Temperature
1) TC modules convert the allowed temperatures of each thermocouple to the digital values from 0(-8000)
to 16000(8000). The maximum value and the minimum value of temperatures can be set up.
2) If a maximum and a minimum value are set up, TC modules convert the minimum to 0(-8000) and the
maximum to 16000(8000).

1362

6.8

CIMON-PLC

Weighing

WGnnX modules provide the functionality for weighing system. These modules can be connected with various
kinds of loadcell units. WG04A can be connected with up to 4 independent loadcell signals at the same time.

Weighing modules have following characteristics. :
· Max. 4 Channels of independent signal inputs. (WG04A)
· Supplies 5Vdc power to the connected loadcells for generating input signals.
· 24 bits A/D converter
· Provides 1 / 40,000 effective resolution.
· Provides 8 internal ready to use batch programs.

Contents :
· Technical Specification

· Configure

· Front View

· Batch Program

· Wiring

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.8.1

1363

Specifications
Specifications :

· General Specifications
· Module Specifications
· Front View

6.8.1.1

General Specification

Item

Specification

Operating
Temperature

-10 ~ 65oC

Storage Temperature

-25 ~ 80oC

Operating Humidity

5 ~ 95%RH, Not condensed.

Storage Humidity

5 ~ 95%RH, Not condensed.

Vibration

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

Amplitude

Sweep

f< 57Hz

0.075mm

f < 150 Hz

9.8m/s2

10 times in each
direction (X,Y,Z)

{1G}

In case of continuous vibration

Shock

Frequency

Acceleration

Amplitude

Sweep

f < 57Hz

0.035mm

f < 150 Hz

4.9m/s2

10 times in each
direction (X,Y,Z)

{1G}

· Max. Shock Acc. : 147 m/s2

{15G}

· Time : 11 (3 times in X, Y, Z)
· Pulse Wave : Half sine wave pulse
Noise

Square wave impulse
noise

2000V

Electrostatic
discharge

Voltage: 4 kV(Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magnetic field

27 ~ 500 MHz. 10 V/m

Fast Transient Bust
Noise

Item

Power Digital I/O
Modul (24V or more)
e

Digital I/O(Less than 24V)
Analog I/O Comm.
interface

Voltage

2KV

0.25KV

Environment

No corrosive gas and no dust.

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

Less than 2

1KV

1364

CIMON-PLC

Cooling

6.8.1.2

Natural Air cooling

Module Specification

Item

Channel

Specifications
WG02A

WG04A

WG02C

WG02D

WG02E

2 Channels

4 Channels

2Ch.
Standard

2Ch.
Dynamic
Weighing

2Ch.
Wide Range

Supported L/C Type

Strain Gage

Insulation

Photo-Coupler

External Power Supply

DC24V, 2 Watts

L/C Excitation Voltage
Full Scale Input Signal

5Vdc (Up to 4 x 350 Ohm loadcells / Channel)
3.6mV / V (18mV)

A/D Converter
Resolution
A/D Program Resolution
A/D Conversion Speed

6.8.1.3

2.0mV / V

3.6mV / V

24 bits
1 / 10,000
20 Times / Sec.

10 Times /
Sec.

1 / 40,000
1,000 Times / Sec.

Front View

[ WG02A / WG04A ]

XP / CP Series(CM1)

LED
RUN

1365

Description
Turn on after successful initialization when powered. If there is any error on hardware or
configuration, this lamp will blink at every 0.2 second.

Z (Zero)

Turned on when measured weight is within the range of zero. Otherwise this lamp will be
turned off.

S (Stable)

Turned on when measured weight variation is within the range of stable. Otherwise this
lamp will be turned off.

[ WG02C / WG02D / WG02E ]

1366

CIMON-PLC

CM 1-WG 02 C/D/E
CM 1- WG 02 C
Z

RUN
S
CH 1

S
CH 2

CH 2

CH 1

CH 1 DI
CH 2 DI

+ 24 V

FG
LED
RUN

Description
Turn on after successful initialization when powered. If there is any error on hardware or
configuration, this lamp will blink at every 0.2 second.

Z (Zero)

Turned on when measured weight is within the range of zero. Otherwise this lamp will be
turned off.

S (Stable)

Turned on when measured weight variation is within the range of stable. Otherwise this
lamp will be turned off.

Turned on when 24Vdc input signal is detected on DI pin of each channel. Otherwise this
lamp will be turned off.

6.8.2

Wiring

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1367

All 4 channels have the same pin-out that of above diagram. If 4-wire type loadcell is used, just leave the SEN+
and SEN- pin as opened.

WGnnX module needs the external power supply. The power module should have the capacity of 2 Watts or
more, and be separated with other power.

6.8.3

Internal I/O and Shared Memory
Internal I/O Table
Input Signals

Output Signals

Point

Description

Point

X00

Module Ready

Y00

X01

Zero/Tare Req. Processed

Y01

X02

Ch1 Command Ack.

Y02

Ch1 Command

X03

Ch2 Command Ack.

Y03

Ch2 Command

X04

Ch3 Command Ack.

Y04

Ch3 Command

X05

Ch4 Command Ack.

Y05

Ch4 Command

X06

Ch1 Batch Running

Y06

Ch1 Zero Command (Req.)

X07

Ch2 Batch Running

Y07

Ch2 Zero Command (Req.)

X08

Ch3 Batch Running

Y08

Ch3 Zero Command (Req.)

X09

Ch4 Batch Running

Y09

Ch4 Zero Command (Req.)

X0A

Ch1 Error

Y0A

Ch1 Tare Command (Req.)

X0B

Ch2 Error

Y0B

Ch2 Tare Command (Req.)

X0C

Ch3 Error

Y0C

Ch3 Tare Command (Req.)

X0D

Ch4 Error

Y0D

Ch4 Tare Command (Req.)

X0E

Y0E

X0F

Y0F

Description

WG0nA module has its own internal I/O signals. These signals are not actually connected to real inputs
and outputs. But those signals provide a simple method for command issuing and status monitoring
between CPU and WG0nA.

1368

CIMON-PLC

Input signals provide the most frequently referencing status flags of WG0nA module, not only the module
ready signal (X0), but also the command acknowledge (X2/3/4/5), batch control status (X6/7/8/9) and error
status (XA/B/C/D) of each channel. X1 signal is a response(OK) signal of zero/tare command(request,
Y6..YD). X1 is turned on when the zero/tare command was processed successfully, and turned off when all
zero/tare command(request) signals are turned off.

Output Signals
Outputs are used as a command issuing signals from CPU. Three kinds of commands can be issued by
these outputs.
· General Purpose Command (Y2/3/4/5) :
Most of commands are issued by this signal. Before issuing this signal, the command code should be
assigned to the command main code (offset 7, 22, 37 or 52) and command sub code (offset 8-9, 23-24, 3839 or 53-54) fields of shared memory. Following table shows the possible command main codes.
Command

Name

Function

H0001 (1)

Error Clear

Clear the current error code and state. If the trouble which
caused the error was removed, the error code will be cleared to
zero and error signal (XA/B/C/D) will be turned off.

H0002 (2)

Batch Start

Starts the batch process. Before issuing this command the
weighing mode and the related configurations should be set in
shared memory.

H0003 (3)

Batch Stop

Stops the current executing batch process. After this
command, all the output signals will be turned off.

H0004 (4)

Calibration

The measured raw value at the time when this command was
issued will be treated as the zero.

H0005 (5)

Set Span

To perform a span calibration place the calibration mass onto
the scale, and then issue this command with the size of the
calibration mass in command sub-code.
Span calibration must be performed after zero calibration.

H0006 (6)

Store the
Calibration
Data

All the calibration data will be stored in non-volatile memory of
WG0nA module. These calibration data will be restored
automatically at every power on.

H0007 (7)

Zero Reset

Reset the current zero. This command makes the gross weight
be same with the measured weight.

H0008 (8)

Tare Reset

Reset the current tare. This command makes the net weight be
same with the gross weight.

Following timing chart shows the step of issuing the command to the WG0nA module.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1369

· Zero Command (Y6/7/8/9) :
When the zero output signal changes from off to on, current measured weight (offset 0, 15, 30, 45) will be a
origin of gross weight (offset 5, 20, 35, 50) zero. X1 will be turned on if zeroing process was completed
successfully. For successful zero, the weighing status must be stable. The status of stability can be acquired
from status flags (offset 2, 17, 32, 47) of shared memory. After this command, the new origin of zero is
stored in non-volatile memory and automatically restored at power on.
· Tare Command (Y6/7/8/9) :
When the tare output signal changes from off to on, current gross weight (offset 5, 20, 35, 50) will be a origin
of net weight (offset 10, 25, 40, 55) zero. X1 will be turned on if tare process was completed successfully.
For successful tare operation, the weighing status must be stable. The status of stability can be acquired
from status flags (offset 2, 17, 32, 47) of shared memory. Tare data are stored in the volatile memory and
net weight is the same with gross weight at initial state such as power on.

6.8.4

Shared Memory
Data in this memory is shared with CPU through the system bus in base unit. All these data can be accessed by
using the instruction (D)FROM and (D)TO instructions. Please refer to the CPU manual for more information of
those instructions.

OFFSET

Description

Ch1

Ch2

Ch3

Ch4

Measured weight (low word)

Measured weight (high word)

Status flags (bit mapped)

Control outputs (bit mapped)

Gross weight (Zero applied, low word)

Gross weight (Zero applied, high word)

Command main code

R/W

Command sub code (low word)

R/W

1370

CIMON-PLC

OFFSET

Description

Ch1

Ch2

Ch3

Ch4

Command sub code (high word)

R/W

Net weight (Tare applied, low word)

Net weight (Tare applied, high word)

AD data (raw value, low word)

AD data (raw value, high word)

Error Code

OS Version

60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70

116

162

208

Weighing Mode

117

163

209

Min. Scale Value

R/W

118

164

210

Max. weight (low word)

119

165

211

Max. weight (high word)

120

166

212

Zero range

1% of Max. weight

R/W

121

167

213

Motion detect range

1% of Max. weight

R/W

122

168

214

Motion detect time

100 mSec.

R/W

123

169

215

Auto zero range

1% of Max. weight

R/W

124

170

216

Auto zero time period

100 mSec.

R/W

125

171

217

Hysteresis range

1% of Max. weight

R/W

126

172

218

Hysteresis time limit

100 mSec.

R/W

127

173

219

Avr. Window size and Time

3 - 13

R/W

128

174

220

Digital filter constant

0 - 90%

R/W

129

175

221

130

176

222

131

177

223

132

178

224

133

179

225

134

180

226

135

181

227

136

182

228

137

183

229

138

184

230

139

185

231

R/W
R/W

XP / CP Series(CM1)

OFFSET

Description

Ch1

Ch2

Ch3

Ch4

140

186

232

141

187

233

142

188

234

Min. hopper weight (low word)

143

189

235

Min. hopper weight (high word)

144

190

236

Dribble weight, high set point or set point #1
(low word)

145

191

237

Dribble weight, high set point or set point #1
(high word)

100

146

192

238

Full flow weight, low set point or set point #2
(low word)

101

147

193

239

Full flow weight, low set point or set point #2
(high word)

102

148

194

240

Over weight, High-High set point or set point
#3 (low word)

103

149

195

241

Over weight, High-High set point or set point
#3 (high word)

104

150

196

242

Under weight, Low-Low set point or set point
#4 (low word)

105

151

197

243

Under weight, Low-Low set point or set point
#4 (high word)

106

152

198

244

107

153

199

108

154

109

Max. Weight

R/W

Max. Weight

R/W

Max. Weight

R/W

Max. Weight

R/W

Max. Weight

R/W

Comparator inhibit time after full flow start or
set point #5 (low word)

100 mSec.

R/W

245

Comparator inhibit time after full flow stop or
set point #5 (high word)

100 mSec.

R/W

200

246

Gate open time for compensation or set point
#6 (low word)

100 mSec.

R/W

155

201

247

Gate closing time for compensation or set
point #6 (high word)

100 mSec.

R/W

110

156

202

248

Target weight for compensation or set point
#7 (low word)

Max. Weight

R/W

111

157

203

249

Target weight for compensation or set point
#7 (high word)

112

158

204

250

Batch complete delay

100 mSec.

R/W

113

159

205

251

Batch limit time

100 mSec.

R/W

114

160

206

252

Max. hopper weight (low word)

Max. Weight

R/W

115

161

207

253

Max. hopper weight (high word)

254
255

6.8.4.1

1371

Monitoring Data
offset 0-69

1372

CIMON-PLC

· Measured Weight (offset 0, 15, 30, 45)
· Status Flags (offset 2, 17, 32, 47)
· Control Outputs (offset 3, 18, 33, 48)
· Gross Weight (offset 5, 20, 35, 50)
· Tare Weight (offset 10, 25, 40, 55)
· AD data (offset 12, 27, 42, 57)
· Error Code (offset 14, 29, 44, 59)

Measured Weight (offset 0, 15, 30, 45)
This weight is the most primitive weight. It is not affected by any
other commands during normal operation. Only the calibration
and span (command main code : 5 and 6) commands can
change its property. Left figure shows all the weight values
provided by WG0nA module and their characteristics.

Status Flags (offset 2, 17, 32, 47)
Following table shows the bit mapped flags of WG0nA module. The flags from bit 8 to F can be used as
input only for the batch control.
Bit

Flag

ON condition

Zero

On when net weight is within the zero range
This flag is affected by the set value of zero range (offset 74, 120, 166, 212)

Stable

On when current weight is within the motion detection range during motion
detection time. This flag is affected by the set value of motion detect range
(offset 75, 121, 167, 213) and time (offset 76, 122, 168, 214)

Over weight

On when gross weight is above the Max. weight set value.
(offset 72, 118, 164, 210)

3
4
5
6
7
8

Over

On when net weight is above the ‘over weight’ set value.
(offset 102, 148, 194, 240)

XP / CP Series(CM1)

Bit

Flag

ON condition

Under

On when net weight is below the ‘under weight’ set value.

1373

(offset 104, 150, 196, 242)
A

Hopper-Full

On when gross weight is above the Max. hopper weight.

Batch Completed

On at the end of batch process.

Batching time over

On when the time of batching process is over the set period.

(offset 114, 160, 206, 252)

(offset 113, 159, 205, 251)
D
E
F

Control Outputs (offset 3, 18, 33, 48)
Following table shows the bit mapped outputs of WG0nA module. These outputs have their meaning only
for the batch control.

Bit

Flag

ON condition

Full Flow

Full-Flow gate signal output

Dribble Flow

Dribble-Flow gate signal output

High-High

Net Weight >= High High set point

High

Net Weight >= High set point

Low

Net Weight <= Low set point

Low-Low

Net Weight <= Low Low set point

Hopper gate

Hopper gate signal output

Micro Flow

Micro-Flow gate signal output

Weight 0

Net Weight < Set point #1

Weight 1

Set point #1 <= Net Weight < Set point #2

Weight 2

Set point #2 <= Net Weight < Set point #3

Weight 3

Set point #3 <= Net Weight < Set point #4

Weight 4

Set point #4 <= Net Weight < Set point #5

Weight 5

Set point #5 <= Net Weight < Set point #6

Weight 6

Set point #6 <= Net Weight < Set point #7

Weight 7

Set point #7 <= Net Weight

Gross Weight (offset 5, 20, 35, 50)
This weight is the zero applied measured weight (offset 0, 15, 30, 45). Zero can be applied by Y6/7/8/9
output signals.

1374

CIMON-PLC

Tare Weight (offset 10, 25, 40, 55)
This weight is the tare applied gross weight (offset 5, 20, 35, 50). Tare can be applied by YA/B/C/D output
signals.

AD data (offset 12, 27, 42, 57)
24 bits raw data from ad converter. This value is used for calculating the measured weight. (offset 0, 15, 30,
45)

Error code (offset 14, 29, 44, 59)
The error code of each channel is stored in this field. In normal state this field holds zero. When an error is
occurred, non-zero value is stored in this field and error input signal (XA/B/C/D) of relevant channel is
turned on. The error code and signal can be cleared by ‘error clear (1)’ command after removing the fault
reason. Following table shows the detailed error code summary.

Code

Error

Description

H0000

No error

H0001

No sensor

Check the loadcell cable and its connection

H0002

Batch time out

Batch control is not completed within the period of setting (offset 113,
159, 205, 251)

H0003

H0004

H0005

Unstable at zero

Zero operation (Y6/7/8/9) is issued at unstable state. Zero operation

operation

can be re-issued with this error.

Unstable at tare

Tare operation (YA/B/C/D) is issued at unstable state. Tare operation

operation

can be re-issued with this error.

No external power

Check the external 24Vdc power supply.

supply
H0010

Unknown command

Check the version of WG0nA and CPU module.

from sequence
H0011

Parameter error on

Check the parameter of WGBATCH instruction in sequence program.

instruction

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.8.4.2

1375

Basic Configuration Data
Offset 70–95, 116-141, 162-187, 208-233
The shared memory area of offset 70-235 holds the basic configuration data for operation. Those
configuration data can be modified through the CICON or sequence program of CPU. The case of CICON
is described in the previous section (3.2 Basic configuration with the special program).

Weighing Mode (offset 70, 116, 162, 208)
This field holds the encoded operating mode. For more information of each operating mode, please refer to
the section of ‘Batch Program’

Set Value

Mode

H0000

Indicator Mode

H0001

Automatic Normal Batch

H0002

Automatic Loss in Weight Batch

H0003

User Controlled Normal Batch

H0004

User Controlled Loss in Weight Batch

H0005

Comparator Mode

H0006

Weight Sorting

H0007

Dynamic Weighing (Fluid material)

H0008

Dynamic Weighing (Solid material)

H0009

Disabled

Other Parameters :
Please refer to the section of ‘Basic configuration with the special program’.

6.8.4.3

Batch Control Parameters
Offset 96-115, 142-161, 188-207, 234-253
This area of shared memory holds the parameters for batch control. WGnnX module supports 8 different
kinds of batch control modes and 1 simple indicator mode. Each batch control needs their operating
parameters. That is, each data in this shared memory area has different meaning according to the ‘weighing
mode’assigned in offset 70, 116, 162, 208. Following table summarizes the parameter according to the
each weighing mode.
For more information of each parameter, please refer to the section of ‘4. Batch Program.’

1376

CIMON-PLC

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.8.5

1377

Batch Program

Contents :
· Automatic Normal Batch
· Automatic Loss in Weight Batch
· User Controlled Normal Batch
· User Controlled Loss in Weight Batch
· Comparator Mode
· Weight Sorting Mode
· Dynamic Weighing(Fluid Material)
· Dynamic Weighing(Solid Material)

6.8.5.1

Automatic Normal Batch
This batch control is weighted automatically by controlling the full flow and dribble flow signals. The batch control
is started by ‘Start (Y2/3/4/5)’ signal or “WGBATCH” instruction. The batching data must firstly be configured by
special program (load cell setting program) or written into the shared memory area of WG0nA module by
sequence program. Following captured screen shows the parameters needed for configuring the ‘Automatic
Normal Batch’ control. This dialog box can be shown in ‘Load cell setting program’.

1378

CIMON-PLC

Dribble Flow Weight
offset 98, 144, 190, 236
If the net weight is above this weight, the dribble flow gate signal is turned off.

Full Flow Weight
offset 100, 146, 192, 238
If the net weight is above this weight, the full flow gate signal is turned off.

Over Weight
offset 102, 148, 194, 240
If the net weight is above this weight, the over signal is turned on.

Under Weight
offset 104, 150, 196, 242
If the net weight is below this weight, the under signal is turned on.

Comparator Inhibit Time after full flow start / stop
Start offset 106, 152, 198, 244
Stop offset 107, 153, 199, 245
The comparator inhibit functions are to prevent gate vibration (or other factors) from causing jitter on the
comparator, which may result in incorrect batching. The comparator is inhibited for the times specified after
the full flow is started and stopped.
The unit of this field is 100 milli-seconds. That is, the value of 10 means 1 second.

Batching Complete Delay

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1379

offset 112, 158, 204, 250
This sets the delay time before compensation begins. The delay time is measured from the time that the
dribble flow is turned off. If no compensation is required the batch will be complete after this delay has
elapsed.
The unit of this field is 100 milli-seconds. That is, the value of 10 means 1 second.

Batching Limit Time
offset 113, 159, 205, 251
If the weighing does not finish within the set time after the start of the batch the error signal (XA/B/C/D) will
be turned on and the batching time out flag (bit 12th) of status word will be turned on. These signals will go
off when the error clear command is issued.
This function may be disabled by specifying 0 for the time limit. And the unit of this field is 100 milliseconds. That is, the value of 10 means 1 second.

Gate Open / Closing Time and Target Weight : Compensation

1380

CIMON-PLC

Gate open time offset : 108, 154, 200, 246
Gate close time offset : 109, 155, 201, 247
Target weight offset : 110, 156, 202, 248
If the weight is below the under weight set point after the dribble flow has been turned off, compensation is
performed. The dribble flow signal is turned on (for the gate open time) and off (for the gate closing time)
repeatedly until the compensation target is reached. The net weight is compared against the target weight
after the gate closing time has elapsed. If the gate open or closing times are set to zero compensation will
not be performed.
Micro flow gate signal has special operation patterns for each compensation mode. Following table shows
the difference for each compensation mode.
Mode

No Compensation

Condition

Micro Flow Gate

• Target Weight is set as zero
Micro Flow Gate has the same operation

• ‘Under’signal ON
• All compensation parameters
ON/OFF Compensation

pattern as Dribble Flow Gate (Fig. A)

are non-zero (Target Weight,
Gate Open Time, Gate Close
Time)

Continuous Compensation

• Target Weight is non-zero
• Gate Open/Close Time is zero

Micro Flow Gate operates independently with
Dribble Flow Gate (Fig. B)

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1381

The units of ‘Gate Open / Closing Time’fields are 100 milli-seconds. That is, the value of 10 means 1
second.

1382

6.8.5.2

CIMON-PLC

Automatic Loss in Weight Batch
This batch control is weighed automatically by controlling the full flow and dribble flow signals. The batch is
weighed by measuring the loss in weight as the material is discharged from the weighing hopper. The batch
control is started by ‘Start (Y2/3/4/5)’ signal or “WGBATCH” instruction. And also, this batch needs ‘Tare (YA/
B/C/D)’ input from sequence program during the progress. The batching data must firstly be configured by
special program (load cell setting program) or written into the shared memory area of WG0nA module by
sequence program. Following captured screen shows the parameters needed for configuring the ‘Automatic
Loss in Weight Batch’ control. This dialog box can be shown in ‘Load cell setting program’.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

Dribble Flow Weight
offset 98, 144, 190, 236
If the net weight is below this weight, the dribble flow gate signal is turned off.

Full Flow Weight
offset 100, 146, 192, 238
If the net weight is below this weight, the full flow gate signal is turned off.

Over Weight
offset 102, 148, 194, 240
If the net weight is below this weight, the over signal is turned on.

Under Weight
offset 104, 150, 196, 242

1383

1384

CIMON-PLC

If the net weight is above this weight, the under signal is turned on.

Batching Complete Delay
offset 112, 158, 204, 250
This sets the delay time before compensation begins. The delay time is measured from the time that the
dribble flow is turned off. If no compensation is required the batch will be complete after this delay has
elapsed.
The unit of this field is 100 milli-seconds. That is, the value of 10 means 1 second.

Min. Hopper Weight / Max. Hopper Weight
Min. Hopper Weight offset 96, 142, 188, 234
Max. Hopper Weight offset 114, 160, 206, 252

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1385

After the starting with Y2/3/4/5 signal of automatic loss in weight batch, WG0nA module checks the gross
weight of hopper. If the gross weight is under the ‘Min. Hopper Weight’, the ‘Hopper Gate’ bit (Bit 6) of
control signal (offset 3, 18, 33, 48) is turned on. This signal is turned on until the gross weight is increased
to the value of ‘Max. Hopper Weight’.
If the gross weight is above of the Min. Hopper Weight, the ‘Tare’ (YA/B/C/D) signal should be turned on for
the progress of batch control. Remaining batch control is performed based on net weight (offset 10, 25, 40,
55).

Gate Open / Closing Time and Target Weight : Compensation
Gate open time offset : 108, 154, 200, 246
Gate close time offset : 109, 155, 201, 247
Target weight offset : 110, 156, 202, 248
If the net weight is above the under weight set point after the dribble flow has been turned off,
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

1386

CIMON-PLC

compensation is performed. The dribble flow signal is turned on (for the gate open time) and off (for the
gate closing time) repeatedly until the compensation target is reached. The net weight is compared against
the target weight after the gate closing time has elapsed. If the gate open or closing times are set to zero
no compensation is performed.
The units of ‘Gate Open / Closing Time’ fields are 100 milli-seconds. That is, the value of 10 means 1
second.
See the section ‘Automatic Normal Batch’for Micro Flow Gate operation pattern.

The units of ‘Gate Open / Closing Time’fields are 100 milli-seconds. That is, the value of 10 means 1
second.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.8.5.3

1387

User Controlled Normal Batch
This mode performs normal batch weighing but the comparator output is dependant only on the net weight data.
This mode, while being more flexible than the automatic mode described in section "Automatic Normal Batch", is
more difficult to implement as the actual full flow and dribble flow outputs must be controlled by a sequence
program. No compensation is performed in this mode.
After starting of this mode batch control, the batching signal (X6/7/8/9) is turned on until when the WGSTOP
instruction or ‘Batch Stop’ command (code 3) with Y2/3/4/5 signal is issued by sequence program.

1388

CIMON-PLC

Dribble Flow Weight
offset 98, 144, 190, 236
If the net weight is above this weight, the dribble flow gate signal is turned off.

Full Flow Weight
offset 100, 146, 192, 238
If the net weight is above this weight, the full flow gate signal is turned off.

Over Weight
offset 102, 148, 194, 240
If the net weight is above this weight, the over signal is turned on.

Under Weight
offset 104, 150, 196, 242

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1389

If the net weight is below this weight, the under signal is turned on.

6.8.5.4

User Controlled Loss in Weight Batch
This mode performs loss in weight batching but the comparator output is dependant only on the net weight data.
This mode, while being more flexible than the automatic mode described in section "Automatic Loss in Weight
Batch", is more difficult to implement. No compensation is performed in this mode.
After starting of this mode batch control, the batching signal (X6/7/8/9) is turned on until when the WGSTOP
instruction or ‘Batch Stop’ command (code 3) with Y2/3/4/5 signal is issued by sequence program.

1390

CIMON-PLC

Dribble Flow Weight
offset 98, 144, 190, 236
If the net weight is below of this weight, the dribble flow gate signal is turned on.

Full Flow Weight
offset 100, 146, 192, 238
If the net weight is below of this weight, the full flow gate signal is turned on.

Over Weight
offset 102, 148, 194, 240
If the net weight is below of this weight, the over signal is turned on.

Under Weight
offset 104, 150, 196, 242

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1391

If the net weight is above of this weight, the under signal is turned on.

Max. Hopper Weight
Max. Hopper Weight offset 114, 160, 206, 252
If the gross weight is above of this weight, the ‘Hopper Gate’ bit (Bit 6) of control signal (offset 3, 18, 33, 48)
is turned on.

1392

6.8.5.5

CIMON-PLC

Comparator Mode
This mode performs only comparison between set values and net weight.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

High
offset 98, 144, 190, 236
If the net weight is above of this weight, the ‘High’ bit (Bit 3) of control output is turned on.

High High
offset 102, 148, 194, 240
If the net weight is above of this weight, the ‘High-High’ bit (Bit 2) of control output is turned on.

Low
offset 100, 146, 192, 238
If the net weight is below of this weight, the ‘Low’ bit (Bit 4) of control output is turned on.

Low Low
offset 104, 150, 196, 242

1393

1394

CIMON-PLC

If the net weight is below of this weight, the ‘Low-Low’ bit (Bit 5) of control output is turned on.

6.8.5.6

Weight Sorting Mode
This mode gets 7 different boundaries (set values) for classifying the 8 different ranges of weight. Each 8 ranges
have their output bits in control outputs (offset 3, 18, 33, 48). At any time, only one bit of control outputs is set
according to the current measured net weight.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1395

Weight 1
offset 98, 144, 190, 236
If the net weight is lower than this value, the ‘weight 0’ bit (bit 8) in control outputs is set.

Weight 2
offset 100, 146, 192, 238
If the net weight is between ‘Weight 1’ set value and this value, the ‘weight 1’ bit (bit 9) in control outputs is
set.

Weight 3
offset 102, 148, 194, 240
If the net weight is between ‘Weight 2’ set value and this value, the ‘weight 2’ bit (bit A) in control outputs is
set.

Weight 4

1396

CIMON-PLC

offset 104, 150, 196, 242
If the net weight is between ‘Weight 3’ set value and this value, the ‘weight 3’ bit (bit B) in control outputs is
set.

Weight 5
offset 106, 152, 198, 244
If the net weight is between ‘Weight 4’ set value and this value, the ‘weight 4’ bit (bit C) in control outputs is
set.

Weight 6
offset 108, 154, 200, 246
If the net weight is between ‘Weight 5’ set value and this value, the ‘weight 5’ bit (bit D) in control outputs is
set.

Weight 7
offset 110, 156, 102, 248
If the net weight is between ‘Weight 6’ set value and this value, the ‘weight 6’ bit (bit E) in control outputs is
set. Or if the net weight is higher than this
value, the ‘weight 7’ bit (bit F) in control outputs is set.

Control Outputs

Range

Weight 0

Net Weight < Weight 1

Weight 1

Weight 1 <= Net Weight < Weight 2

Weight 2

Weight 2 <= Net Weight < Weight 3

Weight 3

Weight 3 <= Net Weight < Weight 4

Weight 4

Weight 4 <= Net Weight < Weight 5

Weight 5

Weight 5 <= Net Weight < Weight 6

Weight 6

Weight 6 <= Net Weight < Weight 7

Weight 7

Net Weight > Weight 7

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1397

1398

6.8.5.7

CIMON-PLC

Dynamic Weighing(Fluid Material)

This dynamic weighing batch program is supported by WG02D model only. WG02D model is specially tuned
for weighing fluid object like egg, filled bottle etc at high speed (typical speed : 0.5 sec). Measured weight of
fluid object has a special characteristic. Series of measured values have wave pattern. A measuring idea
can be suggested by this characteristic. Actual weight of the object would be located at the middle point of
minimum and maximum wave cycle approximately.

Total Sampling Size (1..100)
offset 98, 144, 190, 236
Designate the total number of wave cycles for processing the dynamic weighing. WG02D module
samples maximum and minimum value pairs of each cycle up to this set value. This parameter can be
decided by heuristic method.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1399

offset 99, 145, 191, 237
If there can be unstable cycles during the beginning of measurement, this parameter can be used for
discarding them. It can be useful for enhancing accuracy. WG02D module calculates the final weight
with remaining cycle data.

External Trigger Input Debounce Time (0..100 mSec)
offset 100, 146, 192, 238
This parameter is useful for rejecting the noise on external trigger input. The input pulse which has
shorter pulse width than this value will be ignored.

Use External Trigger Input
offset 101, 147, 193, 239
It should be set as ‘1’which enables the external trigger input port.

Minimum Effective Weight
offset 102, 148, 194, 240
It is useful to remove the initial unstable data of each weighing object from average calculation.
Designate the lower limit weight for average calculation here.

6.8.5.8

Dynamic Weighing(Solid Material)

Future implementation.

6.8.6

Instructions for Weighing

Contents :

6.8.6.1

· WGBATCH

This instruction initiates a batch control.

· WGSTOP

This instruction stops a running batch control.

WGBATCH
This instruction initiates a batch control.

1400

CIMON-PLC

· n1 : The base number and its slot number where the WG0nA module installed. This parameter gets a word
value. The base number (00H - 10H) must be assigned to the high byte of the word and the low byte of the
word must be the slot number (00H – 0BH). For example, 0105H of n1 parameter means, the WG0nA module
is installed in the 6th slot of the first expansion base.
· n2 : A channel number of WG0nA. (1 – 4)

· n3 : A word sized memory device can be used as the n3 parameter. This memory device will hold the result
code of execution. Before issuing instruction this memory device should be cleared to zero.
The result code includes error code and other flags as following figure.

6.8.6.2

WGSTOP
This instruction stops a running batch control.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1401

· n2 : A channel number of WG0nA. (1 – 4)

6.8.7

Calibration

Contents :
· How to calibratebrate
· Save and download a configuration data

6.8.7.1

How to calibrate

Double click the loadcell module in the Card Properties of Project windows.

Then Status window will be activated below.

1402

CIMON-PLC

In case of calibrating channel 1
i.
Set the weight to zero when the module is wired with loadcell unit.
ii.
If you press the “Calib.” Button then “Set Value”± window will be activated.

Press the “OK” button when the converted value is stable.
iii.

Then following dialog box will appear.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1403

Press the “OK” button.
C.

Then configuration dialog box of span weight will be appeared below.

Set the span weight and press the “OK" button when the measuring value is stable.

How to set the span weight

1404

CIMON-PLC

To set the proper span weight in the above dialog box, two kind of resolutions should be
considered together.
One of them is the resolution of the loadcell itself.
Assume the specification of the loadcell is 100Kg, 2mV/V ±¾ 0.1% for further discussion.
As written in the above example specification, the resolution of loadcell is 0.1%, such that the
actual resolution of the loadcell can be calculated from the percentage.

100g (100Kg * 0.1%)

The other resolution to be considered is WGnnA module. This module provides 1/6000(±¾
0.016%) resolution, when the signal is 2mV/V. This value imply the actual weight resolution as

16g (100Kg * 0.016%)

You can understand the final and effective resolution of this example is 100g. This means high
resolution(16g) of the module(WGnnA) cannot be utilized, since the signal from the loadcell
sensor has 100g resolution.
Put this final resolution in your mind, and then choose the weight to load for span calibration.
The loading weight should be at least 20% of maximum capacity of the loadcell.
If you choose 20Kg for span calibration, set the “°Weight”± field of the above dialog box as 200.
The “°200”± is the induced value of 20Kg from your system resolution(100g) as calculated
before.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1405

After the calibration, you can get this measured value using “DFRO” instruction or batch
control.

ii.

6.8.7.2

All 4 channels (or 2 channels) are configured with same way.

Save and download a configuration data

The configuration data can be stored as a file. This function can make using the same configuration data
to another weighing module.
Save and download a configuration data accomplish all 4 channels (or 2 channel). So please do configure
all channels before storing a configuration data.
A.

Save a configuration data
If you want to store a configuration data as a file, press the “Calib. Save in File”± button
after configuration. The file is stored with ‘wcd’ extension (‘*.wcd’).

Give a file name to store and press ‘OK’. The following dialog box will appears.

1406

CIMON-PLC

Download a configuration data
If you want to download a configuration data which is stored as a file, press “Calib.
Write” button.

Select a configuration data file to download and press “OK”. The following dialog box
will appears.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.8.8

1407

Configure

Create a Special Program :
The first step is configuring the WG0nA module. This configuration
can be done by one of the ‘special program’ of CICON. Following
picture shows the dialog box creating a new program for weighing
module. Choose the ‘Load Cell setting program’ type in this dialog
box.

1408

CIMON-PLC

After the confirming of above dialog box, a new dialog box will be opened. This new dialog box is a
configuration programming tool for weighing module.

Contents :
· Basic Configuration with Special Program

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.8.8.1

1409

Basic Configuration with Special Program

· Weighing Mode (70, 116, 162, 208)
· Min. Scale (71, 117, 163, 209)
· Max. Weight (72, 118, 164, 210)
· Near Zero Range (74, 120, 166, 212)
· Digital Filter Constant (82, 128, 174, 220)
· Avr. Window Size and Time (81, 127, 173, 219)
· Stable Range & Time (75, 121, 167, 213), (76, 122, 168, 214)
· Auto Zero Range & Time (77, 123, 169, 215), (78, 124, 170, 216)
· Hysteresis Range & Time (79, 125, 171, 217), (80, 126, 172, 218)

Weighing Mode
[Configuration data location] Offset 70, 116, 162, 208 of shared memory.
WGnnX module provides 7 different operating modes. Choose one of following modes. The more precise
information of each batch control will be described in next section. (Batch Program section)
· Indicator Mode : Most simple operating mode. This mode provides the measured weight only and has
no control functionality.

1410

CIMON-PLC

· Automatic normal batching : A batch is weighed automatically by controlling the full flow and dribble
flow signals.
· Automatic loss in weight batching : A batch is weighed automatically by controlling the full flow and
dribble flow signals. The batch is weighed by measuring the loss in weight as the material is discharged
from the weighing hopper.
· User controlled normal batching : This mode performs normal batch weighing but the comparator
output is dependant only on the current weight data. This mode, while being more flexible than the
automatic mode, is more difficult to implement as the full flow and dribble flow signals must be turned off
by a sequence program before the hopper is discharged. No compensation is performed.
· User controlled loss in weight batching : This mode performs loss in weight batching but the
comparator output is dependant only on the current weight data. This mode, while being more flexible
than the automatic mode, is more difficult to implement. No compensation is performed.
· Comparator Mode : This mode performs comparison only. 4 set points (low-low, low, high, high-high)
and 4 comparator output signals are provided. These output signals can be used as a kind of alarm
signal.
· Weight Sorting : This mode performs comparison only. But, 7 set points and 8 comparator output
signals are provided. And at anytime, only one of 8 output signals will be turned on.

Min. Scale
[Configuration data location] Offset 71, 117, 163, 209 of shared memory.
Set the display digit span value. For example, if set value was ‘5’, measured weight will be displayed as 0, 5,
10, 15 ... so on.

Max. Weight
[Configuration data location] Offset 72, 118, 164, 210 of shared memory.
Maximum weight that the loadcell can measure.

Near Zero Range
[Configuration data location] Offset 74, 120, 166, 212 of shared memory.
Valid set range : within 1% of Max. Weight.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1411

If current measured weight is within this range, the zero signal will be turned on.

Digital Filter Constant
[Configuration data location] Offset 82, 128, 174, 220 of shared memory.
Valid set value (%) : 0 - 90 %
WG0nA module has a digital filter for removing the noise from loadcell output signal. This filter can be
described as the following fomula.

Dnf = Dn + α(Dnf-1 – Dn)
Dn : Current Sampling Data
Dnf : Current Filtered Data
Dnf-1 : Previous Filtered Data
α : Filter Constant (%)

This field requires the value of α in percent. If this value is zero, the digital filter will not be applied to the
measured data.

Avr. Window Size and Time
[Configuration data location] Offset 81, 127, 173, 219 of shared memory.
Avr . Window Size (3.. 15 or 0.. 250 )

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10

Avr . Time (1.. 250 mSec .)

Valid set value for Windows Size :
3 - 15 Samples (WGnnA)
0 - 250 SAmples (WG02C/D/E)
Valid set value for Time :
1 -250 mSec.
The weight data that can be used in batch control and sequence program is the average of a number of AD
samples. This parameter sets the number of samples for the average and the sampling time between each
sampled data. The number of samples used does not affect the update rate of the weight data, because the
average is a ‘moving window’type as shown in following figure.
If the set value is zero, the averaging function will not be activated.

1412

CIMON-PLC

Window Size = 7

Sampling Time

Stable Range & Time
[Configuration data location] Offset 75, 121, 167, 213 of shared memory.
Valid set range : within 1% of Max. Weight.
[Configuration data location] Offset 76, 122, 168, 214 of shared memory.
Valid set time (unit of 100 msec) : 1 – 100 (100msec – 10,000msec)
A weight which does not change within the specified range for the time specified is considered to be stable
and the stable output will be set to ON.
If one of these set values is zero, the stable detect function will not be activated.

Auto Zero Range & Time
[Configuration data location] Offset 77, 123, 169, 215 of shared memory.
Valid set range : within 1% of Max. Weight.
[Configuration data location] Offset 78, 124, 170, 216 of shared memory.
Valid set time (unit of 100 msec) : 1 – 100 (100msec – 10,000msec)
The auto zero function removes the zero drift in the system by periodically rezeroing the measured weight
when it is near zero. The auto zero range is the maximum zero shift that will be corrected and the time
period is the minimum time between corrections. If the measured weight shifts from zero to a value outside
the auto zero range (within the zero time period) the weight will not be rezeroed.
If one of these set values is zero, the auto zeroing function will not be activated.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1413

Hysteresis Range & Time
[Configuration data location] Offset 79, 125, 171, 217 of shared memory.
Valid set range : within 1% of Max. Weight.
[Configuration data location] Offset 80, 126, 172, 218 of shared memory.
Valid set time (unit of 100 msec) : 1 – 100 (100msec – 10,000msec)
The hysteresis function suppresses flicker of the measured weight data. If the weight changes, within the
range specified, and returns to the previous value within the time limit specified the measured weight data
will not be affected.
If one of these set values is zero, the hysteresis function will not be activated.

6.9

High-speed Counter
Features :
1) Pulses in a wide range can be counted.( -2147483648 ~ 2147483647 )
A counted value is stored in buffer memory in signed 32-bit binary value.
2) Pulse input type can be selected.
1-p input 1-m, 1-p input 2-m, CW/CCW, 2-p input 1-m, 2-p input 2-m, 2-p input 4-m
3) Counting form can be selected.
One between the following forms can be selected.
· Linear counting : Input pulses can be counted from -2147483648 to 2147483647. In case that a
value is out of the range, overflow occurs.
· Ring counting : Input pulses are counted repeatedly between the maximum value and the minimum
value of ring counting.

1414

CIMON-PLC

4) Coincidence output is available.
Comparing a current value with a set coincidence comparison value, output can be on/off.
5) Four counting functions can be selected.
· Latch counting : A currently counted value is stored in buffer memory (04H, 05H, 24H and 25H)
according to the signal to start to count (Y06 and Y0E).
· Sampling counting : The value counted for the time set by the signals to start to count (Y06, Y0E) is
stored in buffer memory (06H, 07H, 26H and27H). If a set time is passed, the value counted before
signals (Y06, Y0E) are inputted will be kept.
· Periodic pulse counting : The values (08H, 09H, 28H and 29H) counted before the time set up by
signals (Y06, Y0E) and currently counted values (0AH, 0BH, 2AH and 2BH) are stored in buffer
memory.
· Disabling to count : If signals (Y06, Y0E) or the signals to enable to count (Y04, Y0C) are off, pulses
will not be counted. The counted values are accumulated in buffer memory for storing current count
(00H, 01H).
6) Presetting and counting function can be processed by outer control signals.

Table of contents ,

· Overview

· Basic Functions

· Specifications

· Counting Functions

· Installing and Wiring

· CICON - Setting up HSC Card

· Internall I/O

· Trouble Shooting

· Shared Memory

6.9.1

Overview

The specifications of CM1-HS02 are as follows.

Item

CM1-HS02**

XP / CP Series(CM1)

I/O Type

DC Input, Line Drive Input, PNP Open Collector Output

Max. Counting Rate

200Kpps

Number of Channels

2 Channels

1415

The following input method can be selected for HS02 module.

· 1-phase input 1-multiple

· 1-phase input 2-multiple

· CW/CCW
· 2-phase input 1-multiple

· 2-phase input 2-multiple

· 2-phase input 4-multiple

The entire operation of HS02 is as follows.

1) The pulses coming to a pulse input terminal are counted.
2) The module presets a counted value and starts to counting function by outer control signal.
3) Comparing the current value with a set coincidence comparison value, the module outputs coincident
signal.(2 points)
4) The I/O signals and the contents of buffer memory can be confirmed by a scan program.
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

1416

6.9.2

CIMON-PLC

Specifications
Specifications :

· General Specifications
· Module Specifications
· Outward view and Dimensions

6.9.2.1

General Specifications

Item

Specification

Operating
Temperature

-10 ~ 65oC

Storage Temperature

-25 ~ 80oC

Operating Humidity

5 ~ 95%RH, Not condensed.

Storage Humidity

5 ~ 95%RH, Not condensed.

Vibration

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

Amplitude

Sweep

f< 57Hz

0.075mm

f < 150 Hz

9.8m/s2

10 times in each
direction (X,Y,Z)

{1G}

In case of continuous vibration

Shock

Frequency

Acceleration

Amplitude

Sweep

f < 57Hz

0.035mm

f < 150 Hz

4.9m/s2

10 times in each
direction (X,Y,Z)

{1G}

· Max. Shock Acc. : 147 m/s2

{15G}

· Time : 11 (3 times in X, Y, Z)
· Pulse Wave : Half sine wave pulse
Noise

Square wave impulse
noise

2000V

Electrostatic
discharge

Voltage: 4 kV(Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magnetic field

27 ~ 500 MHz. 10 V/m

Fast Transient Bust
Noise

Item

Power Digital I/O
Modul (24V or more)
e

Digital I/O(Less than 24V)
Analog I/O Comm.
interface

XP / CP Series(CM1)

Voltage

6.9.2.2

Environment

No corrosive gas and no dust.

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

Less than 2

Cooling

Natural Air cooling

2KV

1KV

0.25KV

Module Specifications

CM1-HS02B
No. of I/O points

16 Points

No. of Channels

2 Channels

Counting Input Phase
Signal
Signal Level(фA,фB)

1-Phase Input/ 2-Phase Input
5/12/24 V DC (2~5mA)

CM1-HS02D

RS-422 Line Drive

Counting Rate

200 kPPS

Counting Range

Signed 32-bit binary value (-2147483648~2147483647)

Form

Up/Down Presetting Counting + Ring Counting

Counting
Min. Interval of
Counting Pulse(uS)
(Duty ratio 50%)

Coincidence
Output

Outer Input
Outer Output

Range of Comparison

Signed 32-bit binary values

Result of Comparison

Set Value < Counted Value
Set Value = Counted Value
Set Value > Counted Value

Presetting
Starting Function
Coincidence Output

5/12/24 V DC 2~5mA
Transistor(Sink Type) Output Operating Voltage 12~24V

1417

1418

6.9.2.3

CIMON-PLC

Dimensions

LED

Use

RUN

The module is operating.

ERR

An error occurs.

Voltage is being input to A-phase input terminal.

Voltage is being input to B-phase input terminal.

DEC

Input pulses are being counted down.

FUNC

Voltage is being input to the terminal for starting function.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.9.3

1419

Installing and Wiring
Installing and Wiring :

· Installing
· Wiring - Safety Precautions
· Arrangement of HS02B pin
· Arrangement of HS02D pin
· Examples of Wiring

6.9.3.1

Arrangement of HS02B pin

CH1

Signal

Terminal
Pin No.

Signal

Terminal
Pin No.

Phase A Pulse Input 24V

Phase A Pulse Input 12V

Phase A Pulse Input 5V

AB common

Phase B Pulse Input 24V

Phase B Pulse Input 12V

CH2

1420

CIMON-PLC

Phase B Pulse Input 5V

Presetting Input 24V

Presetting Input 12V

Presetting Input 5V

Presetting, Starting Function Input
common

Starting Function Input 24V

Starting Function Input 12V

Starting Function Input 5V

Coincidence Output 1

Coincidence Output 2

24V

36,18

37,19

Signal

Terminal
Pin No.

Phase A Pulse Input

Power Input for Coincidence Output(CH1, CH2)

6.9.3.2

Arrangement of HS02D pin

CH1

Signal

Terminal
Pin No.

Phase A Pulse Input

Phase A- Pulse Input

Phase B Pulse Input

Phase B- Pulse Input

N.C

CH2

XP / CP Series(CM1)

N.C

Presetting Input 24V

Presetting Input 12V

Presetting Input 5V

Presetting, Starting Function Input
common

Starting Function Input 24V

Starting Function Input 12V

Starting Function Input 5V

Coincidence Output 1

Coincidence Output 2

24V

36,18

37,19,9

Power Input for Coincidence Output(CH1, CH2)

6.9.3.3

1421

Installing

Works
· In case of making bolthole or wiring, keep a PLC from dust and dregs.
· Install at the place for easy operation.
· Do not install together with high-voltage device and same panel.
· The distance between a duct and a module is to be over 50 mm.
· Ground at the place where noise environment is good.
·

Cautions
1. Do not drop or shock.
2. Do not separate a PCB from a case. That may cause breakdown.
3. In case of wiring, take care that dregs come into the top of a module. If there are, remove them.
4. Mount or take out a module after turning off the power.

1422

6.9.3.4

CIMON-PLC

Wiring - Safety Precautions
In case of inputting pulses in high rate, take note of noise in wiring especially.
1. Use twist pair shield wires and ground in Degree 3.
2. Wire separately from power cable and I/O cables that cause noise.
3. Use stable power source as the power source for filter.
4. In case of 1-phase input, connect only Phase A. In case of 2-phase input, connect Phase A and B.

6.9.3.5

Examples of Wiring

Examples of wiring :
· In case that an encoder is open collector output type
· In case that an encoder is voltage output type
· In case the signal for outer presetting and the one for starting function are inputted.
· Coincidence Output
· Line Driver

In case that an encoder is open collector output type

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1423

In case that an encoder is voltage output type

1424

CIMON-PLC

inputted

Coincidence Output

XP / CP Series(CM1)

Line Driver

1425

1426

6.9.4

CIMON-PLC

Internal I/O
Signal Direction (CPU ?HSC Module)

Signal Direction (CPU ?HSC Module)

Input

Signal Name

Outpu Signal Name
t

X00

CH1

DPRAM ACK Signal

Y00

X01

Counted Value Greater 1

Y01

Requesting to Preset

X02

Counted Value Coincident 1

Y02

Enabling Coincidence Output

X03

Counted Value Less 1

Y03

DRRAM REQUEST

X04

Detecting Request for Outer Presetting

Y04

Enabling to Count

X05

Counted Value Greater 2

Y05

Requesting to Reset Detecting Outer Presetting

X06

Counted Value Coincident 2

Y06

Requesting to Start to Count

Counted Value Less 2

Y07

Counted Value Greater 1

Y08

X09

Counted Value Coincident 1

Y09

Requesting to Preset

X0A

Counted Value Less 1

Y0A

Enabling Coincidence Output

X0B

Detecting Request for Outer Presetting

Y0B

DRRAM REQUEST

X0C

Counted Value Greater 2

Y0C

Enabling to Count

X0D

Counted Value Coincident 2

Y0D

Requesting to Reset Detecting Outer Presetting

X0E

Counted Value Less 2

Y0E

Requesting to Start to Count

X0F

DPRAM ACK Signal

Y0F

Requesting to Reset Coincidence Signal 2

X07
X08

CH2

Click

6.9.4.1

Input Signals

CH1

Requesting to Reset Coincidence Signal 1

Requesting to Reset Coincidence Signal 2
CH2

Requesting to Reset Coincidence Signal 1

Output Signals

Input Signals

Channel

HSC -> CPU

Description

CH1 CH2
X01

X08

Counted Value Greater ( If "Current Value"(CH1:0H,1H CH2:20H,21H) > "Set Coincidence
1
Comparison Value 1"(CH1:12H,13H CH2:32H,33H), these are on.

X02

X09

Counted Value
Coincident 1

( If "Current Value"(CH1:0H,1H CH2:20H,21H) ="Set Coincidence
Comparison Value 1"(CH1:12H,13H CH2:32H,33H), these are set.
( If " Requesting to Reset Coincidence Signal 1"(Y00(Y08)) is on, these
are reset.

X03

X0A

Counted Value Less 1

( "Current Value ""(CH1:0H,1H CH2:20H,21H) < "Set Coincidence
Comparison Value 1"(CH1:12H,13H CH2:32H,33H), these are set.

X04

X0B

Detecting Request for
Outer Presetting

( When the signal to preset is detected from the outer input terminal,
these are set and latched.
( If "Requesting to Reset Detecting Outer Presetting"(Y05(Y0D)) is on,
these are reset.

X05

X0C

Counted Value Greater ( "Current Value"(CH1:0H,1H CH2:20H,21H) > "Set Coincidence
2
Comparison Value 2"(CH1:14H,15H CH2:34H,35H), these are set.

X06

X0D

Counted Value
Coincident 2

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1427

( If " Requesting to Reset Coincidence Signal 2" (Y07(Y0F)) is on, these
are reset.

6.9.4.2

X07

X0E

Counted Value Less 2

( "Current Value"(CH1:0H,1H CH2:20H,21H) < "Set Coincidence
Comparison Value 2"(CH1:14H,15H CH2:34H,35H), these are set.

X00

X0F

DPRAM ACK

( Response to DPRAM REQUEST
When the contents of DPRAM are set up to the module, these are set.

Output Signals

Channel

HSC <- CPU

Operatio Description
n
Timing

CH
1

CH
2

Y0
0

Y0
8

Requesting to Reset
Coincidence Signal 1

These are turned on to reset "Counted Value Coincident 1"
(X02(X09)).

Y0
1

Y0
9

Requesting to Preset

These are turned on to preset.

Y0
2

Y0
A

Enabling Coincidence
Output

These are turned on to enable to output "Counted Value
Coincident"(X02/X09 X06/X0D) to an outer terminal.

Y0
3

Y0
B

DRRAM REQUEST

These are turned on to make the contents of DPRAM available.

Y0
4

Y0
C

Enabling to Count

These are turned on to enable to count.

Y0
5

Y0
D

Requesting to Reset
Detecting Outer
Presetting

These are turned on to reset "Detecting Request for Outer
Presetting (X04(X0B))".

Y0
6

Y0
E

Requesting to Start to
Count

These are turned on to start the latch or the sampling counting
function.
These are turned on to start the disabling to count or the
periodic pulse counting.

Y0
7

Y0
F

Requesting to Reset
Coincidence Signal 2

These are turned on to reset "Counted Value Coincident
2"(X06(X0D)).

** Timing of DPRAM REQUEST(Y03, Y0B) and DPRAM ACK(X0F) to make DPRAM setup available.

6.9.5

Shared Memory
Address

Set Value

Initial

R/W

1428

CIMON-PLC

CH1

Value

Hexa

Deci

Hexa

Deci

20H

21H

22H

23H

Currently Counted Value(Signed 32-bit)

Flag Indicating Overflow Detected
(If overflow in Linear Counting, 1)

Flag Indicating Sampling-counted or
Periodic-pulse-counted

24H

Latch-counted Value

25H

26H

27H

28H

29H

2AH

2BH

2CH

2DH

2EH

2FH

10H

30H

R/W

11H

31H

12H

32H

R/W

13H

33H

14H

34H

R/W

15H

35H

16 H

36H

R/W

17 H

37H

18 H

38H

R/W

19 H

39H

1A H

3AH

Counting Function Setup
(0:Disable 1:Latch 2:Sampling 3:Periodic Pulse)

R/W

1B H

3BH

Sampling / Periodic Time

R/W

1C H

3CH

Counting Mode(0:Linear 1:Ring)

R/W

1D H

3DH

Pulse Input Method
( 0:1-phase 1-multiple(H/W Input to Phase B)
1:1-phase 1-multiple(S/W Input to Phase B)
2:2-phase 2-multiple(H/W Input to Phase B)
3:2-phase 2-multiple(S/W Input to Phase B)
4:CW/CCW 5:2-phase 1-multiple 6:2-phase 2-multiple
7:2-phase 4-multiple)

R/W

1E H

3EH

Counting down by software

R/W

1F H

3FH

Not Use

L
H

Sampling-counted Value

L
H

Previous Periodic-pulse-counted Value

L
H

Current Periodic-pulse-counted Value

L
H

Not Use

Preset Value(Signed 32-bit)

L
H

Set Coincidence Comparison Value 1(Signed 32-bit)

L
H

Set Coincidence Comparison Value 2(Signed 32-bit)

L
H

Set Lowest Limit Value of Ring Counting(Signed
32-bit)

Set Upper Limit Value of Ring Counting(Signed
32-bit)

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.9.5.1

1429

Currently-counted Value (Signed 32-bit)
Buffer Memory (ch1: 00H, 01H / ch2: 20H, 21H)

· This is used to store currently counted values.
· The range is from -2147483648 to 2147483637(Signed 32-bit).

6.9.5.2

Flag Indicating Overflow Detected
Buffer Memory (ch1: 02H / ch2: 22H)

· In case of linear counting, this is used to store overflow status.

6.9.5.3

Status

Buffer Memory Data

No Overflow

Overflow Occurs.

Flag Indicating Sampling-counted or Periodic-Pulse Counted
Buffer Memory (ch1: 03H / ch2:23H)

· When sampling counting or periodic pulse counting is selected, this is used to store the counting status.

6.9.5.4

Status

Buffer Memory Data

Stop Counting

Counting

Latch-counted Value
Buffer Memory (ch1: 04H, 05H / ch2: 24H, 25H)

· When a HSC module latch-counts, this is used to store the latch-counted value.
· The range is from -2147483648 to 2147483637(Signed 32-bit).

1430

6.9.5.5

CIMON-PLC

Sampling-counted Value
Buffer Memory (ch1: 06H, 07H / ch2: 26H, 27H)

· When a HSC module sampling-counts, this is used to store the sampling-counted value.
· The range is from -2147483648 to 2147483637(Signed 32-bit).

6.9.5.6

Previous and Current Periodic-pulse-counted Value
Buffer Memory (ch1: 08H~0BH / ch2: 28H~2BH)

· When a HSC module periodic-pulse-counts, this is used to store the previous and the current
periodic-pulse-counted value.
· The range is from -2147483648 to 2147483637(Signed 32-bit).

6.9.5.7

Preset Value
Buffer Memory (ch1: 10H, 11H / ch2: 30H, 31H)

· This is used to store the preset value for counting.
· The range is from -2147483648 to 2147483637(Signed 32-bit).
· To make the set value available, DPRAM REQ(Y03,Y0B) of I/O devices are to be on and off.
· As a set value is stored in EEPROM, the HSC module is operated as previously set value even though
the power is on and off.

6.9.5.8

Set Coincidence Comparison Value 1 & 2
Buffer Memory (ch1: 12H~15H / ch2: 32H~35H)

· This is used to store a set value, which is compared with the current value for coincidence output.
· Two coincidence output values can be set up by channels.
· The range is from -2147483648 to 2147483637(Signed 32-bit).

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1431

· To make a set value available, DPRAM REQ(Y03,Y0B) of the I/O devices are to be on and off.
· As a set value is stored in EEPROM, the HSC module is operated as previously set value even though
the power is on and off.

6.9.5.9

Set Lowest Limit Value and Upper Limit Value of Ring Counting
Buffer Memory (ch1: 16H~19H / ch2: 36H~39H)

· In case of ring counting, this is used to select its range.
· The range is from -2147483648 to 2147483637(Signed 32-bit).
· To make a set value available, DPRAM REQ(Y03,Y0B) of the I/O devices are to be on and off.
· As a set value is stored in EEPROM, the HSC module is operated as previously set value even though
the power is on and off.

6.9.5.10 Counting Function Setup
Buffer Memory (ch1: 1AH / ch2: 3AH)

· This is used to set up which counting is used.
· To make a set value available, DPRAM REQ(Y03,Y0B) of the I/O devices are to be on and off.
· Refer to Chapter 7 for the details.
Status

Buffer memory Data

Disabling to Count

Latch Counting

Sampling Counting

Periodic Counting

· As a set value is stored in EEPROM, the HSC module is operated as a previously set value even though
the power is on and off.

1432

CIMON-PLC

6.9.5.11 Sampling / Periodic Time
Buffer Memory (ch1: 1BH / ch2: 3BH)

· When sampling or periodic pulse counting is selected, this is used to store the value for setting up the
time used.
· The range is from 0 to 65535 and the unit is 10mS.
· To make a set value available, DPRAM REQ(Y03,Y0B) of the I/O devices are to be on and off.
· As a set value is stored in EEPROM, the HSC module is operated as previously set value even though
the power is on and off.

6.9.5.12 Counting Mode
Buffer Memory (ch1: 1CH / ch2: 3CH)

· This is used to set up whether linear counting or ring counting is operated.
· To make a set value available, DPRAM REQ(Y03,Y0B) of the I/O devices are to be on and off.
· Refer to Chapter 6 for the details.
Mode of Counting

Buffer Memory Data

Linear Counting

Ring Counting

· As a set value is stored in EEPROM, the HSC module is operated as previously set value even though
the power is on and off.

6.9.5.13 Pulse Input Method
Buffer Memory (ch1: 1DH / ch2: 3DH)

· This is used to select the method to input the pulses counted.
· To make a set value available, DPRAM REQ(Y03,Y0B) of the I/O devices are to be on and off.
· Refer to Chapter 6 for the details.
Input Method

Operation Mode(Buffer memory Data)

1-phase 1-multiple(Phase B H/W Input)

1-phase 1-multiple (Phase B S/W Input)

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1-phase 2-multiple (Phase B H/W Input)

1-phase 2-multiple (Phase B S/W Input)

CW/CCW

2-phase 1-multiple

2-phase 2-multiple

2-phase 4-multiple

1433

· As a set value is stored in EEPROM, the HSC module is operated as previously set value even though
the power is on and off.

6.9.5.14 Subtract Command by software
Buffer Memory (ch1: 1EH / ch2: 3EH)

· If 1 is written to buffer memory when a HSC module is counting in 1-phase input, the module can count
down.
· To count down by software, 1(1-phase 1-multiple Phase B software input) or 3(1-phase 2-multiple Phase
B software input) is to be inputted to buffer memory for pulse input method (ch1:1DH, ch2:3DH).
· As a set value is stored in EEPROM, the HSC module is operated as previously set value even though
the power is on and off.

6.9.6

Basic Functions
Basic Functions :

· Understanding Pulse Input Method and Counting Method
· Counting Forms
· Coincidence Output
· Presetting

1434

6.9.6.1

CIMON-PLC

Understanding Pulse Input Method and Counting Method

Type of Pulse Input Method ,

Pulse Input Count Timing
Method
1-phase

Counting

1-multiple

B is off.

Counting
Down

1-phase

A module counts at the rising edges of

Counting

2-multiple

A module counts at the falling edges of

B is on.

A module counts at the rising and falling edges of
A.
B is off.

Counting
Down

A module counts at the rising and falling edges of
A.
B is on.

CW/CCW

Counting

A module counts at the rising edges of

B is off.

Counting

2-phase

A module counts at the rising edges of

Counting

When

1-multiple

2-phase
2-multiple

A is off.

Down

B is off, a module counts at the rising

edges of

Counting

When

Down

edges of

Counting

When

B is off, a module counts at the falling
A.

B is off, a module counts at the rising

edges of
When

B is on, a module counts at the falling

edges of

XP / CP Series(CM1)

Counting

When

Down

edges of
When

B is on, a module counts at the rising

Counting

4-multiple

When

Counting

When

Down

edges of

B is off, a module counts at the falling
A.

A is off, a module counts at the rising

edges of
When

B is on, a module counts at the rising

edges of
When

A is off, a module counts at the falling

edges of

When

A is on, a module counts at the rising

edges of
When

B is on, a module counts at the falling

edges of
When

B is off, a module counts at the rising

edges of
When

B is off, a module counts at the falling

edges of
2-phase

1435

A is on, a module counted at the falling

edges of

1-phase Pulse Input
1-multiple or 2-multiple can be selected. The relation between Phase A and counting down is as follows.

CW/CCW Pulse Input

1436

CIMON-PLC

If there is pulse input in Phase A, the module counts. If there is pulse input in Phase B, the module counts
down. The relation between Phase A and Phase B is as follows.

2-phase Pulse Input
1-multiple or 2-multiple or 4-multiple can be selected. It is decided whether the module counter or counts
down by the difference between Phase A and Phase B. The relation between Phase A and Phase B is
follows.

6.9.6.2

Counting Forms

Linear Counting

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1437

Linear Counting
· If linear counting is selected, input pulses are counted in the range from –2147483648 to 2147483647.
· This is used in the combination of presetting function and coincidence output function.

Overflow Error
· This occurs when the value is linear-counted down over –2147483648 or linear-counted over
2147483647.
· If overflow occurs, the devices for detecting overflow in buffer memory (ch1:02H,ch2:22H) will be set and
the counting is stopped. Even though pulse inputs come continuously, the counted value is fixed as –
2147483648 or 2147483647.
· If the value is preset, overflow error will be cleared and the device for detecting overflow in buffer
memory will be 0.

Point
When values are linear-counted and ring-counted
In case that a currently counted value is greater than the maximum ring-counted value, it is to be
preset as the value less than or equal to the maximum ring-counted value to ring-count when being
linear-counted, and it is to be preset as the value greater than or equal to the minimum ring-counted
value to ring-count when being linear-counted down.
If the value is not preset, it will be linear-counted. (The case that Max. ring-counted value > Min.
ring-counted value)

Ring Counting

1438

CIMON-PLC

Ring Counting
If ring counting is selected, input pulses are counted repeatedly between the minimum ring-counted
value(ch1:16H,17H ch2:36H,37H) and the maximum ring-counted value(ch1:18H,19H ch2:38H,39H). The
overflow for ring counting does not occur. Ring counting is used in the combination of presetting and
coincidence output function.

Range of Ring Counting
The range of ring-counted pulses is from the minimum value(ch1:16H,17H ch2:36H,37H) to maximum
value(ch2:18H,19H ch2:38H,39H).

1) Min. ring-counted Value <= Current Value <= Max. ring-counted Value

Counting

In the case that a current value reaches the maximum ring-counted value, the minimum
ring-counted value is automatically stored in the current value.

Counting down In the case that a current value reaches the min. ring-counted value, when the next
counting-down pulse comes, the value "Max. ring-counted value – 1" is stored in the
current value.

While input pulses are being counted or counted down, the maximum ring-counted value is not stored in
the currently counted value of buffer memory.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1439

2) Current Value <= Min. ring-counted Value or Current Value >= Max. ring-counted Value

Counting

In the case that a current value reaches the minimum ring-counted value, when next
counting pulse comes, the value "Max. ring-counted value + 1" is stored in the current
value.

Counting down In the case that a current value reaches the maximum ring-counted value, the minimum
ring-counted value is automatically stored in the current value.

While input pulses are being counted or counted down, the maximum ring-counted value is not stored in
the currently counted value of buffer memory.

1440

CIMON-PLC

3) The maximum ring-counted value equals to the minimum ring-counted value
Any value in signed 32-bit binary can be ring-counted regardless of current value.

6.9.6.3

Coincidence Output
This is used to output coincidence signal when a currently counted value is compared, being coincided with a set
value. The coincidence output can be set up for 2 points each channel.
To output coincidence signal, enabling coincidence output (Y02(Y0A)) is to be on.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

No.

1441

Description
The set coincidence output value is stored in the set coincidence comparison value 1(ch1:

12H,13H,ch2:32H,33H ) in signed 32-bit binary.
When the currently counted value equals to the set coincidence output value, the counted value less is

off and the counted value coincident is on.
If the requesting to reset coincidence signal is on, the counted value coincident is reset. If the counted

value coincident is kept on, the next coincidence signal is not output.
4

6.9.6.4

If the counted value is greater than the set coincidence output value, the counted value greater is on.

Presetting
Presetting is used to write a currently counted value in an integer value as preset value.
There are two presetting methods, which are sequence program and outer control signal.

Presetting by Sequence Program ,
If Y01(Y09) is on by sequence program, a currently counted value is preset.

No
1

Description
The number is stored in the preset value(ch1:10H,11H, ch2:31H,32H) of the buffer memory in
signed 32-bit binary.
At the rising edge of the requesting to preset(From off to on), the currently counted value of the

buffer memory is set up as the preset value of the buffer memory. The value is preset irrelevantly to
the enabling to count(Y04(Y0C)).

1442

CIMON-PLC

Presetting by outer control signal ,
If a voltage is inputted to a presetting input terminal, a currently counted value is preset.

No
1

Description
A number is stored in the preset value (ch1:10H,11H, ch2:31H,32H) of buffer memory in signed
32-bit binary.
At the rising edge of the voltage inputted to an outer input terminal(From off to on), the currently

counted value of buffer memory is set up as the preset value of buffer memory. The value is preset
irrelevantly to the enabling to count(Y04(Y0C)).

Point
· If "flag detecting request for outer presetting(X04(X0b))" is on, even the voltage is inputted to an outer
preset terminal or "requesting to preset(Y01(Y09))" is set, a currently counted value is not preset. In
this case, to preset, "requesting to reset detecting outer presetting(Y05(Y0d))" is to be set and flag
detecting request for outer presetting is to be off.
· Even though outer presetting input is set while requesting to reset detecting outer

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1443

presetting(Y05(Y0d)), a value is not preset.

6.9.7

Counting Functions
Disabling to count, sampling counting, latch counting and periodic pulse counting are can be used.
If the following data are written in buffer memory(ch1:1AH ch2:3AH) and starting to count is given (Y06(Y0E) is
on by an outer input or a user program), one among the four counting functions can be used.

Counting Function

Set Value Note

Disabling to Count

In case that start to count is on while enabling to count(Y04(Y0c)) is
turning on, counting is stopped.

Latch Counting

A currently counted value is stored for a certain time.

Sampling Counting

The pulses inputted during a set time are counted.

Periodic Pulse
Counting

A currently and a previously counted value are stored for set
periodic time.

Point
Counting functions can be changed while starting to count is off.
If the value in the range from 1 to 65535 is inputted to buffer memory(ch1:1B , ch2:3B), set
sampling/periodic time can be changed.
The unit is 10ms. If 10 are inputted, it will be 10*10ms = 100ms.

List :

· Reading the Counted value for Counting Functions
· Disabling to Count
· Latch Counting
· Sampling Counting
· Periodic Pulse Counting

1444

6.9.7.1

CIMON-PLC

Reading the Counted value for Counting Functions
When a selected counting function is operated, the counted value for the function is stored in the following buffer
memory.

Current
Value

Counted Value
Latch-counted
Value

Sampling-counted
Value

Previous
Current
Periodic-pulse-coun Periodic-pulse-count
ted Value
ed Value

CH1

0H, 1H

04H, 05H

06H, 07H

08H, 09H

0AH, 0BH

CH2

20H, 21H

24H, 25H

26H, 27H

28H, 29H

2AH, 2BH

A currently counted value is stored in buffer memory in signed 32-bit value. The value is automatically revised
according to counting form.

Point
The counted value in buffer memory is to be read in two words by DFRO command. If the value is read
one word by one word while it is being revised, the value of the upper word and the lower word may be
wrong.

Ex 1. Right

Ex 2. Wrong

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.9.7.2

1445

Disabling to Count
Disabling to count is used to stop counting when enabling to count is on.

6.9.7.3

Description

Input pulses are counted by enabling to count(Y04(Y0C))".

Input pulses are not counted if starting to count(Y06(Y0E)) or input terminal to start to count is on.

If starting to count is off, input pulses will be counted again.

If enabling to count is off, input pulses will be not counted.

If enabling to count is off, input pulses will not be counted irrelevantly to starting to count.

As starting to count is on, even though enabling to count is on, input pulses are not counted.

If starting to count is off, input pulses will be counted again.

Latch Counting
If starting to count is on, a currently counted value is stored at rising edges.

1446

CIMON-PLC

Input pulses are latch-counted at the rising edge of starting to count.
Pulses are latch-counted irrelevantly to enabling to count(Y04(Y0C)).

6.9.7.4

Sampling Counting
Input pulses are counted for set periodic time.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1447

Description

At the rising edges when starting to count(Y06(Y0E)) or input terminal to count is on, the numbers of
pulses are counted from

If set periodic time is passed, pulses are not counted.

When input pulses are sampling-counted, 1 is stored in flag Indicating Sampling-counted or
Periodic-pulse-counted(ch1:03H ch2:23H).

After input pulses are sampling-counted, the value is stored in buffer memory.

Input pulses are sampling-counted irrelevantly to enabling to count(Y04(Y0C)).

1448

6.9.7.5

CIMON-PLC

Periodic Pulse Counting
A current value and a previous value are stored at set periodic times.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

Description

A currently counted value(0) is stored in a current periodic-pulse-counted value (ch1:0AH,0BH

1449

ch2:2AH,2BH) of buffer memory.
2

A currently counted value(200) is stored in the current periodic-pulse-counted value of buffer memory.
The "0" stored in the current periodic-pulse-counted value of buffer memory is stored in the previous
periodic-pulse-counted value(ch1:08H,09H ch2:28H,29H) of buffer memory.

A currently counted value(20) is stored in the current periodic-pulse-counted value of buffer memory.
The "200" stored in the current periodic-pulse-counted value of buffer memory is stored in the previous
periodic-pulse-counted value of buffer memory.

A currently counted value(100) is stored in the current periodic-pulse-counted value of buffer memory.
The "20" stored in the current periodic-pulse-counted value of buffer memory is stored in the previous
periodic-pulse-counted value of buffer memory.

A currently counted value(80) is stored in the current periodic-pulse-counted value of buffer memory.
The "100" stored in the current periodic-pulse-counted value of buffer memory is stored in the previous
periodic-pulse-counted value of buffer memory.

Input pulses are periodic-pulse-counted irrelevantly to enabling to count(Y04(Y0C)).

When input pulses are periodic-pulse-counted, "1" is stored in flag Indicating Sampling-counted or
Periodic-pulse-counted(ch1:03H ch2:23H).

6.9.8

CICON - Setting up HSC Card
If you select the Optional Card Setup in the Tools, an optional card setup dialog box will appear as follows.

Click :

1450

CIMON-PLC

· Set up HSC
· Upload
· Download
· Current Status
· Application Programs (Using the CICON)

6.9.8.1

Set up HSC
If you select the HSC in the above dialog box, the mounted slot and the OK, a HSC setup dialog box will appear
and the values currently set up to a HSC card will be automatically uploaded.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1451

Counting Setup
· Counting Mode : This is used to select ring counting or linear counting.
· Preset Value : This is used to set up a preset value.
· Coincidence Comparison Value 1, 2 : This is used to set up Coincidence Comparison Value 1 & 2.
· Min. ring-counted value : This is used to set up the minimum value when ring counting is used.
· Max. ring-counted value : This is used to set up the maximum value when ring counting is used.

Counting Function Setup
· Counting Type : Disabling to count, latch counting, sampling counting, periodic pulse counting

· Sampling/Interval(ms) : This is used to set up the time and the interval of sampling when sampling
counting or periodic pulse counting is used.

Pulse Input Setup
· Pulse Input Type : 1-ph 1-multiple, 1-ph 2-multiple, CW/CCW, 2-ph 1-multiple, 2-ph 2-multiple, 2-ph
4-multiple

1452

6.9.8.2

CIMON-PLC

Upload
If you press the upload button, the values currently set up to a HSC will be uploaded.

6.9.8.3

Download
If you press the download button, the currently set values will be downloaded to a HSC.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.9.8.4

Current Status
If you press the current status button, the current status of a HSC can be shown.

1453

1454

6.9.8.5

CIMON-PLC

Application Programs (Using the CICON)

Configuration ,

XP / CP Series(CM1)

Initial Setup and Using Card ,
Set Values in the CICON
Item

Set Value

Channel Used

Preset Value

2500

Mode of Counting

Ring Counting

Coincidence Comparison Value 1

1000

Coincidence Comparison Value 2

Min. Ring-counted Value

-5000

Max. Ring-counted Value

5000

Counting Function

Optional

Sampling/Interval(10mS)

1000

Pulse Input

2-phase 1-multiple

Input Card
Description

Contact

Enabling to Count

X10

X18

Enabling Coincidence Output

X11

X19

Resetting Coincidence Output

X12

X1A

Presetting

X13

X1B

Starting to Count

X14

X1C

Starting to Latch-count

X15

X1D

Starting to Sampling-count

X16

X1E

1455

1456

CIMON-PLC

Starting to Periodic-pulse-count

X17

X1F

Setup in the CICON ,
Use the CICON to set up as follows and to download set values.

Example of program ,

XP / CP Series(CM1)

The following program can be inserted according to the counting function used.

Disabling to count

Latch counting

Sampling counting

Periodic pulse counting

1457

1458

6.9.9

CIMON-PLC

Trouble Shooting
Trouble Shooting :

· Error in Counting
· Error in Counted Value
· Error in Output

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.9.9.1

Error in Counting

1459

1460

6.9.9.2

CIMON-PLC

Error in Counted Value

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.9.9.3

Error in Output

6.10

Positioning

1461

CM1-PSnnX module is a pulse output modules for CP and XP series of CIMON PLCs. PS02A type supports
differential driver system pulse output. PSnnX is capable of driving not only servo motor but also stepping motor

Features :
· Control Axis : CM1-PS02A provides 2 axis pulse outputs and supports linear/circular interpolation.

1462

CIMON-PLC

· Dedicated Instructions : CP and XP series of CIMON PLCs are embedding several dedicated
instructions for PSnnX module. These instructions provide easy and powerful control functions.
· Manual Operation : PSnnX module supports various kinds of manual operations, such as jog operation,
inching operation. And this module supports external connection of MPG (manual pulse generator).
· PLC compatibility : CP and XP CPUs of CIMON PLC supporting PSnnX module.

Contents :
· Specifications

· Dedicated Instructions for Positioning

· Wiring

· CICON - The configuration Tool

· Memory Area

· Programming Examples

· Parameter

· Trouble Shooting

· Position Data

6.10.1 Specifications
See :

· Technical Data
· General Specifications
· Input Signal Specifications
· Output Signal Specification
· Dimensions

6.10.1.1 Technical Data

LED Display
LED

Description

Cause

LED Status Symbol

XP / CP Series(CM1)

Normal

Axis Running

Axis Error

Check error code with CICON.
The error can be cleared by setting 1 to the ‘Error
Reset’ area in control memory.

System Error

Check error code with CICON.
The error can be cleared by setting 1 to the ‘Error
Reset’ area of axis 1 in control memory.

Fatal Defect

Check the mounting condition of module on
backplane.

Connector Pin Description
Signal

1463

Description

FP+

FP-

RP+

RP-

LMT U

Upper Limit Input

LMT L

Lower Limit Input

DOG

Near Point DOG Input

STOP

External STOP Input

ECMD

External Command Input

COM1

30
28

29
27

COMMON (LMT U, LMT L, DOG, STOP, ECMD)

RDY

Ready Signal Input from Driver

Pulse output

1464

CIMON-PLC

COM2

COMMON (RDY)

ZERO24

Zero Signal Input (+24V)

ZERO05

Zero Signal Input (+5V)

COM3

COMMON (ZERO24, ZERO05)

CLEAR

Deviation Counter Clear Output

COM4

COMMON (CLEAR)

MPG A+

MPG/ENCODER A+ Input

MPG A-

MPG/ENCODER A- Input

MPG B+

MPG/ENCODER B+ Input

MPG B-

MPG/ENCODER B- Input

Deviation counter clear is an output signal of PSnnX module.

6.10.1.2 General Specification

Item

Specification

Operating
Temperature

-10 ~ 65oC

Storage Temperature

-25 ~ 80oC

Operating Humidity

5 ~ 95%RH, Not condensed.

Storage Humidity

5 ~ 95%RH, Not condensed.

Vibration

In case of intermittent vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

Amplitude

Sweep

f< 57Hz

0.075mm

f < 150 Hz

9.8m/s2

10 times in each
direction (X,Y,Z)

{1G}

In case of continuous vibration

Shock

Frequency

Acceleration

Amplitude

Sweep

f < 57Hz

0.035mm

f < 150 Hz

4.9m/s2

10 times in each
direction (X,Y,Z)

{1G}

· Max. Shock Acc. : 147 m/s2

{15G}

· Time : 11 (3 times in X, Y, Z)
· Pulse Wave : Half sine wave pulse
Noise

Square wave impulse
noise

2000V

Electrostatic
discharge

Voltage: 4 kV(Contact discharge)

Radiated
electro-magnetic field

27 ~ 500 MHz. 10 V/m

Fast Transient Bust
Noise

Item

Power Digital I/O
Modul (24V or more)

Digital I/O(Less than 24V)
Analog I/O Comm.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

e
Voltage
Environment

No corrosive gas and no dust.

Altitude

2,000m or less

Pollution

Less than 2

Cooling

Natural Air cooling

2KV

interface
1KV

0.25KV

6.10.1.3 Module Specification
Module Name

CM1-PS02A

I/O Occupation

16 Points

Axis

2 Axis

Interpolation

2 Axis Linear/Circular Interpolation

Control Functions

Point to Point, Path, Speed

Control Unit

Pulse, mm, inch, degree

Position Data

600 / Axis

Coordinate

Absolute / Incremental

Backup

Flash Rom Backup (Parameters, Position Data, Block Data, Condition Data)

Positioning

Control Type

Position Control – Absolute Coordinate / Incremental Coordinate
Path Control - Absolute Coordinate / Incremental Coordinate

Coordinate

· Absolute Coordinate
-214748364.8

214748364.7

-21474.83648

21474.83647 inch

359.9999 degree

-2147483648

2147483647 pulse

· Incremental Coordinate

Speed

-214748364.8

214748364.7

-21474.83648

21474.83647 inch

-21474.83648

21474.83647 degree

-2147483648

2147483647 pulse

0.1

20,000,000.00 ( /min)

0.001

2,000,000.000 (inch/min)

0.001

2,000,000.000 (degree/min)

1,000,000 (pulse/sec)

Acc/Dec Type

Trapezoidal / S-Pattern

Acc/Dec Time

0 ~ 65,535 ms

Sudden Stop
Dec. Time

0 ~ 65,535 ms

External Cabling

40pin Connector

Max. Pulse Output

1 MPPS (Line Driver Pulse Output)

Max. Distance

10 m

1465

1466

CIMON-PLC

Power Consume

240 mA / 5V

Flash ROM Write Count

Max. 100,000 times

Dimension (mm)

32(W) * 109(H) * 93.3(D)

Weight (g)

168

6.10.1.4 Input Signal Specifications
Signal

Near Point DOG

Rated input
voltage /
current

Working
voltage
Range

24Vdc / 5mA

19.2 ~ 26.4
Vdc

19Vdc / 4mA 11Vdc / 1mA
or more

2.7kΩ

5Vdc / 7ma

2.5Vdc /
3mA or more

1Vdc / 1mA
or less

940Ω

19.2 ~ 26.4
Vdc

19Vdc / 4mA
or more

11Vdc /
1mA

2.8kΩ

Upper Limit (LMTU)

ON
Voltage /
Current

OFF
Voltage /
Current

Input
Resistance

Response
Time

Lower Limit (LMTL)
Stop (STOP)
External Command
(ECMD)
MPG
Phase A
(MPG A+, MPG A-)

Pulse Width

Phase B
(MPG B+, MPG B-)

Phase

Driver unit ready input 24Vdc / 5mA
(RDY)
Zero Input
(Encoder Z Phase)
(ZERO 5)
(ZERO 24)

5Vdc / 7ma
24Vdc / 5mA

4.25 ~
5.5Vdc

2.5Vdc /
1Vdc / 1mA
3mA or more
or less

19.2 ~
26.4Vdc

19Vdc / 4mA
or more

11Vdc /
1mA

600Ω
2.7kΩ

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1467

6.10.1.5 Output Signal Specification
Signal

Rated Voltage

Working Voltage

Max. Current /
Inrush Current

Voltage Drop at
ON

Leakage Current
at OFF

Pulse Output
(CW/PULSE)

5 ~ 24 Vdc

4.75 ~ 26.4 Vdc

50mA (1 point) /
0.2A (10ms or less)

0.5Vdc

0.1mA or less

Pulse Sign
(CCW/SIGN)

? Differential driver equivalent to AM26C31
? The type of output pulse(CW / CCW, Pulse/Sign) is selected by basic parameter settings
Pulse Output Output Signal Level
Mode
Positive Logic
Forward

Reverse

Negative Logic
Forward

Reverse

CW
CCW
Pulse
Sign
Deviation
Counter Clear
(CLEAR)

5 ~ 24Vdc

4.75 ~ 26.4Vdc

0.1A (1 point) /
0.4A (10ms or less)

6.10.1.6 Dimensions
Unit : mm

Function

MPG A-

MPG A+

MPG B-

MPG B+

1 Vdc

0.1mA or less

1468

CIMON-PLC

RP-

AXIS 2

RP+

AXIS 1

RPRP+

FP-

FP+

CLR COM

CLR

RDY COM

RDY

ZERO COM

ZERO 5

ZERO 24

Y COM

X COM

Y COM

X COM

ECMD

STOP

DOG

LMT L

LMT U

6.10.2 Wiring

Contents :
· Input Signal
· Output Signal
· Wiring Example "MR-J2S Seres (Mitsubishi)"
· Wiring Example "APD-VS Series (Metronix)"
· Wiring Exmaple "FDA5000 Series (LG Otis)"

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.10.2.1 Input Signal

6.10.2.2 Output Signal

1469

1470

CIMON-PLC

6.10.2.3 Wiring Example "MR-J2S Seres (Mitsubishi)"

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.10.2.4 Wiring Example "APD-VS Series (Metronix)"

1471

1472

CIMON-PLC

6.10.2.5 Wiring Exmaple "FDA5000 Series (LG Otis)"

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1473

6.10.3 Internal I/O and Shared Memory
PSnnX module occupies 16 points in PLC I/O space. These I/O points are used for data exchange with
CPU module. Direction of input signal is from PSnnX to CPU, and output signal is from CPU to PSnnX.

Direction : CPU?PSnnX

Input

Signal Description

Output

Signal Description

X00

Module Ready

Y00

CPU Ready

X01

Module Error

Y01

X02

Y02

X03

Y03

X04

Command Ack (Axis 1)

Y04

Positioning Start (Axis 1)

X05

Busy (Axis 1)

Y05

MPG Run (Axis 1)

X06

Error (Axis 1)

Y06

Forward JOG (Axis 1)

X07

Positioning Done (Axis 1)

Y07

Reverse JOG (Axis 1)

X08

M code ON (Axis 1)

Y08

Stop (Axis 1)

X09

Y09

X0A

Command Ack (Axis 2)

Y0A

Positioning Start (Axis 2)

X0B

Busy (Axis 2)

Y0B

MPG Run (Axis 2)

X0C

Error (Axis 2)

Y0C

Forward JOG (Axis 2)

X0D

Positioning Done (Axis 2)

Y0D

Reverse JOG (Axis 2)

X0E

M code ON (Axis 2)

Y0E

Stop (Axis 2)

X0F

Y0F

6.10.4 Shared Memory Area
PSnnX provides two types of shared memory area. One is buffer memory area and the other is system memory
area. These memory areas can be read or written by sequence program of CPU or CICON. Following shows the
block diagram of these shared memories.

1474

CIMON-PLC

Contents :
· Control Data Memory Area

6.10.4.1 Control Data Memory Area

System Memory
The configuration data and position data are stored in this memory. For access this area, the FREAD/
FWRITE instructions must be used in sequence program.
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1475

System memory is backed-up by flash memory. Current data of system memory is stored in flash memory
by issuing a command with instruction. The number of flash memory writing is restricted to 25 times at
every power ON. This restriction is putted for protecting flash memory from the sequence program mistake.
The overall lifetime of flash memory is 100,000 times of writing.

Buffer Memory
All the special purposed modules of CIMON PLC have buffer memory. Sequence program of CPU can get
or control the module’s useful information through this memory. For this data exchange the FROM/TO
instructions are used for data exchange between CPU and the module.
PSnnX provides two kinds of data through the buffer memory. One is a monitor data, and the other is a
control data. These two data are explained more precisely as follows.

Monitor Data
Monitor data provides some useful information about the running status of PSnnX module. These data are
read-only. Following table shows the data can be monitored.
OFFSET

Description

Axis 1

Axis 2

Axis 3

Axis 4

M Code

External Input Status

Running Status 1

Running Status 2

Destination Position Address (Low word)

Destination Position Address (High word)

Current Position Address (Low word)

Current Position Address (High word)

Machine Address (Low word)

Machine Address (High word)

Target Speed (Low word)

Target Speed (High word)

Current Speed (Low word)

Current Speed (High word)

Position Data Number

Flash Write Counter

Reserved

OS Version

Warn Code

Error Code

1476

CIMON-PLC

Control Data
This memory area is used for controlling the PSnnX module. Before issuing a instruction, the related data
have to be set properly.
OFFSET

Description

Axis 1

Axis 2

Axis 3

Axis 4

117

162

207

Position Data Number (1 – 600)

118

163

208

Reserved

119

164

209

Axis Error Reset

120

165

210

Resume Request

121

166

211

M code OFF Request

122

167

212

External Signal Enable(1) / Disable(0)

123

168

213

New Position Address (Low word)

124

169

214

New Position Address (High word)

125

170

215

Reserved

126

171

216

Reserved

127

172

217

Reserved

128

173

218

Reserved

129

174

219

Reserved

130

175

220

Reserved

131

176

221

New Speed (Low word)

132

177

222

New Speed (High word)

133

178

223

Speed Change Request (1)

134

179

224

Inching Movement Amount

135

180

225

JOG Speed (Low word)

136

181

226

JOG Speed (High word)

137

182

227

OPR Request Flag Reset

138

183

228

MPG Multiplier

139

184

229

MPG Operation Enable (1) / Disable (0)

140

185

230

Reserved

141

186

231

Reserved

142

187

232

Reserved

143

188

233

Reserved

144

189

234

Reserved

100

145

190

235

Reserved

101

146

191

236

Target Position Address (Low word)

102

147

192

237

Target Position Address (High word)

103

148

193

238

Target Speed (Low word)

104

149

194

239

Target Speed (High word)

105

150

195

240

Target Address Change Request (1)

106

151

196

241

Simultaneous Start Position Data Number (Axis 1)

XP / CP Series(CM1)

107

152

197

242

Simultaneous Start Position Data Number (Axis 2)

108

153

198

243

Simultaneous Start Position Data Number (Axis 3)

109

154

199

244

Simultaneous Start Position Data Number (Axis 4)

110

155

200

245

Step Operation Method

111

156

201

246

Step Operation Enable (1) / Disable (0)

112

157

202

247

Step Operation Command

113

158

203

248

Skip Request (1)

114

159

204

249

Teaching Data

115

160

205

250

Teaching Position Data Number

116

161

206

251

ABS Direction (only for unit of degree)

252

Reserved

253

Reserved

254

Flash Write Request (1)

255

Initialize to Factory Default (1)

6.10.5 Parameter
The parameters must be configured appropriately according to the machine, applicable motors etc.

· Basic Parameters
· Expanded Parameters
· OPR Parameters
· Common Parameters

Basic Parameters
Axis

Description

Initial
Value

Remark

200,000

mm [x10-2mm/min]
: 1 2,000,000,000
inch [x10-3inch/min]
: 1 2,000,000,000
degree [x10-3deg/min]
: 1 2,000,000,000
pulse [pulse/sec]
: 1 1,000,000

100

150

Speed limit (low word)

101

151

Speed limit (high word)

102

152

Bias speed (low word)

103

153

Bias speed (high word)

104

154

Acceleration/Deceleration time
#0

1,000

0 ~ 65,535 ms

105

155

Acceleration/Deceleration time
#1

1,000

0 ~ 65,535 ms

106

156

Acceleration/Deceleration time

1,000

0 ~ 65,535 ms

1477

1478

CIMON-PLC

#2
7

107

157

Acceleration/Deceleration time
#3

1,000

0 ~ 65,535 ms

108

158

Number of pulses per rotation

20,000

1 ~ 65,535 pulse

109

159

Movement amount per rotation

20,000

1
65,535
[x10-1 , x10-5 inch, x10-5 degree,
pulse]

110

160

Pulse Output Mode (Bit 0

00 = PLS/DIR mode
01 = CW/CCW mode

00 = pulse
01 = mm
10 = inch
11 = degree

00 = x 1
01 = x 10
10 = x 100
11 = x 1000

0 = Increase address at forward rotate
1 = Increase address at reverse rotate

Initial
Value

Remark

Unit setting (Bit 2

Unit magnification (Bit 4

Rotation direction setting (Bit
6)

Expanded Parameters
Axis

Description

111

161

Software stroke limit upper limit 2147483
(low word)
647

112

162

Software stroke limit upper limit
(high word)

113

163

Software stroke limit lower limit
(low word)

114

164

Software stroke limit lower limit
(high word)

115

165

Backlash compensation
amount

0
65,535
[x10-1 , x10-5 inch, x10-5 degree,
pulse]

116

166

Positioning complete signal
output time

300

65,535 ms

117

167

S-pattern ratio

100

100 %

118

168

External command function
selection

0 = Start
1 = Speed/Position switching
3 = Skip

119

169

Sudden stop deceleration time

1000

120

170

Acceleration/Deceleration
pattern (Bit 0)

0 = Trapezoidal, 1 = S-Pattern

M Code ON timing (Bit 1)

0 = WITH mode
1 = AFTER mode

Current feed value during
speed control (Bit 2 3)

00 = Do not update
01 = Update
10 = Update after clear

Software limit detection during

JOG, Inching, MPG

-2,147,483,648
2,147,483,647
[x10-1 , x10-5 inch, x10-5 degree,
pulse]

2147483
647

65,535 ms

XP / CP Series(CM1)

manual operation (Bit 4)

121

171

0 = allow, 1 = forbid

Software limit coordination (Bit
5)

0 = Current Address.
1 = Machine Address

Speed/Position switching
method (Bit 6)

0 = by Incremental Coord.
1 = by Absolute Coord.

Use External command (Bit 7)

0 = Not used
1 = Used

Use External STOP (Bit 8)

0 = Not used
1 = Used

Sudden stop group #1 (Bit 9)

Sudden stop group #2 (Bit 10)

0 = Normal Stop
1 = Sudden Stop

Sudden stop group #3 (Bit 11)

Logical Input
selection

Bit 00 : LMT U

Bit 01 : LMT L

Bit 02 : DOG

Bit 03 : STOP

Bit 04 : ECMD

Bit 05 : RDY

122

172

JOG speed limit value (low
word)

123

173

JOG speed limit value (high
word)

124

174

125

175

1479

0 = Low Active
1 = High Active

20000

mm [x10-2mm/min]
: 1 2,000,000,000
inch [x10-3inch/min]
: 1 2,000,000,000
degree [x10-3deg/min]
: 1 2,000,000,000
pulse [pulse/sec]
: 1 1,000,000

JOG Operation acceleration
time selection

0 – 3 (Acc/Dec number)

JOG Operation deceleration
time selection

0 – 3 (Acc/Dec number)

Description

Initial
Value

Remark

-2,147,483,648
2,147,483,647
[x10-1 , x10-5 inch, x10-5 degree,
pulse]

20,000

mm [x10-2mm/min]
: 1 2,000,000,000
inch [x10-3inch/min]
: 1 2,000,000,000
degree [x10-3deg/min]
: 1 2,000,000,000
pulse [pulse/sec]
: 1 1,000,000

OPR Parameters
Axis
1

130

180

OP address (low word)

131

181

OP address (high word)

132

182

OPR speed (low word)

133

183

OPR speed (high word)

134

184

Creep speed (low word)

135

185

Creep speed (high word)

136

186

OPR method (Bit 0

2,000

000

0(000) Detect zero after DOG OFF
1(001) Detect zero after deceleration
when DOG ON

1480

CIMON-PLC

2(010) Detect limit and zero signal
3(011) Detect DOG
OPR direction (Bit 3)

0 = forward
1 = reverse

137

187

OPR Acc/Dec number

3 (Acc/Dec number)

138

188

OPR dwell time

65,535 ms

139

189

OPR compensation (low word)

140

190

OPR compensation (high
word)

-2,147,483,648
2,147,483,647
[x10-1 , x10-5 inch, x10-5 degree,
pulse]

141

191

Deviation counter clear signal
time

1 ~ 65,535 ms

Description

Initial
Value

Remark

Pulse output Logic

0 = High Active
1 = Low Active

Common Parameters
Axis
1

200

6.10.5.1 Basic Parameters
IN THIS TOPIC :
Speed Limit
Bias Speed
Acceleration / Deceleration Time (0 ~ 3)
Pulse Output Mode
Rotation direction setting

Speed Limit
Designate the applicable maximum speed. All the speed in sequence program or position data must be
lower than this parameter. Otherwise, the axis error will be issued.
PSnnX module has different speed resolution according to the configuration of this parameter.

Speed Limit

Resolution (pulse)

8,000

8,001

16,000

16,001

40,000

40,001

80,000

80,001

160,000

XP / CP Series(CM1)

160,001

400,000

400,001

800,000

100

800,001

1,000,000

200

1481

This resolution table is applied to all speed data, such as bias speed, positioning command in sequence
program, OPR speeds and so on. Speed data must be multiple of resolution value of above table. If the
speed value used is not multiple of resolution value, PSnnX will choose automatically the near most value
among the multiple of resolution. But, if the selected speed is lower than bias speed, the bias speed will be
selected.

Bias Speed
This parameter designates the initial speed of pulse output. The bias speed has to be defined to allow the
motor to start smoothly especially when a stepping motor is used. A stepping motor will not start smoothly if
a low rotation speed is instructed at the beginning. This speed cannot be set higher than speed limit.

Acceleration / Deceleration Time (0~3)
Acceleration time specifies the time for the speed to increase from zero to the speed limit value. And
deceleration time specifies the time for the speed to decrease from the speed limit value to zero. In normal
case, the positioning speed is lower than the speed limit value, thus the actual acceleration/deceleration
time will be relatively short. The actual time for acceleration/deceleration can be calculated by following
formula.

T = V x Ts / Vmax
· V : Destination Speed,
· Ts : Acc/Dec time in parameter
· Vmax : Speed limit in parameter

Pulse Output Mode
Set the pulse output mode to match the servo amplifier being used. Pulse output signal is specified by the
‘pulse output logic’ parameter setting also. Followings are based on ‘high active’ setting of ‘pulse output
logic’ parameter.

PLS/DIR mode

1482

CIMON-PLC

Forward run and reverse run are controlled with the ON/OFF of the direction sign (SIGN).

CW/CCW
During forward run, the forward run feed pulse (CW) will be output.
During reverse run, the reverse run feed pulse (CCW) will be output.

Rotation direction setting
Set the relation of the motor rotation direction and current address increment/decrement.

6.10.5.2 Expaned Parameters
IN THIS TOPIC :
Software Limits
Backlash compensation amount
Positioning Complete Signal Output Time
S-Pattern Ratio
Acceleration / Deceleration Pattern
M Code On Timing
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1483

Sudden Stop Group (#1 ~ #3)
Logical Input Selection

Software Limits

Set the lower/upper limit for the machine’s movement range during positioning control. The software limit is
verified all the time during system running except for following special cases :
· When the unit is ‘degree’, the software limit check is invalid during speed control or during manual
control.
· During manual operation, software limit checking is performed according to the setting of ‘Software
limit detection during manual operation’
· To invalidate the software limit, set the setting value to ‘upper limit value = lower limit value’. (The
setting value can be anything.)
Software limit is verified when the positioning instruction is issued and during running. With the control unit
set to ‘degree’, the software upper and lower limit values are 0 to 359.99999. To validate the software limit
checking, set the lower and the upper limit value in a clockwise direction.

Example
To set the movement range A :
lower limit : 315

upper limit : 90

To set the movement range B :
lower limit : 90

upper limit : 315

1484

CIMON-PLC

In absolute positioning system with unit of ‘degree’, software limit setting influences the actual movement :
· When the software limit checking is allowed : The positioning is carried out in a clockwise/
counterclockwise direction depending on the software limit range setting method. Because of this,
positioning with ‘shortcut control’ may not be possible.
· When the software limit checking is forbidden : Positioning is carried out in the nearest direction to
the designated address, using the current value as a reference. This is called ‘shortcut control’.

Backlash compensation amount
The error that occurs due to backlash when moving the machine via gears can be compensated. When the
Backlash compensation amount amount is set, pulses equivalent to the compensation amount will be
output each time the direction changes during positioning.

Positioning Complete Signal Output Time
Set the output time of the positioning complete signal output from PSnnX. A positioning completes when
the specified dwell time has passed after the PSnnX terminated the output.
Speed

Time
Positioning
Complete Signal

Positioning Complete Signal
Output Time

Dwell Time

Speed

Time
Positioning
Complete Signal
Positioning Complete Signal Output Time

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1485

S-Pattern Ratio
This parameter is effective when the ‘Acc/Dec pattern’ is configured as S-Pattern (1). S-Pattern reduces the
burden of motor during starting and stopping. This is a method in which acceleration/deceleration is carried
out gradually, based on the acceleration time, deceleration time, speed limit value, and S-Pattern ratio set
by the user.
When the stepping motor is used, the S-Pattern acceleration/deceleration processing method cannot be
carried out. When using this processing method, ensure to use a servo motor.
Followings explain the concept of S-Pattern ratio. S-Pattern acceleration/deceleration is composed with 3
different acceleration/deceleration stages.

· 1st Stage : Increase the acceleration/deceleration value
· 2nd Stage : retain a constant acceleration/deceleration value
· 3rd Stage : decrease the acceleration/deceleration value
S-Pattern ratio is a time ratio of 2nd stage compared to the total acceleration/deceleration time (T). It can
be presented as a following formula.

S-Pattern Ratio (%) = ((T – ∆t) / T) x 100

When ∆t is ‘0’, the S-Pattern ratio will be 100%. In that case, the 2nd stage will be skipped and as a result,
the variation of speed will be large most. When ∆t is T, the S-Pattern ratio will be 0%. As a result, the SPattern acceleration/deceleration will be the same pattern with the trapezoidal.

1486

CIMON-PLC

Acceleration / Deceleration Pattern
Set whether to use automatic trapezoid acceleration/deceleration or S-Pattern acceleration/deceleration for
the acceleration/deceleration process.

Trapezoidal
The acceleration and deceleration are linear.

The acceleration and deceleration follow a sine curve

M Code ON Timing
This parameter sets the M code ON signal output timing. Choose either WITH mode or AFTER mode as
the M code ON signal output timing.
· With Mode : An M code is output and the M code ON signal is turned ON when a positioning operation
starts.
· After Mode : An M code is output and the M code ON signal is turned ON when a positioning operation
completes.
If the M code is set as zero, the M code ON signal will not be issued.

Sudden Stop Group (#1~#3)
Set the method to stop when the stop causes in the following stop groups occur.
· Stop Group 1 : Stop with hardware stroke limit
· Stop Group 2 : PLC Ready Signal OFF
· Stop Group 3 : External stop signal, Stop signal from PLC CPU, Error occurrence such as software limit,

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1487

Stop made when the near point DOG signal turns ON in OPR.

Logical Input selection
Set the I/O signal logic that matches the signaling specification of the connected external device. A
mismatch in the signal logic will disable normal operation. Be careful of this when you change from the
default value.

6.10.5.3 OPR Parameters
OPR is used to return a machine system at any position other than the OP to the OP. For normal operation of
OPR, the parameters in this section will be configured properly.

IN THIS TOPIC :
OP Address
OPR Speed
Creep Speed
OPR Method
OPR Direction
OPR Dwell Time
OPR Compensation

OP Address
Set the address used as the reference point for positioning control. When the machine OPR is completed,
the stop position address is changed to this address.

OPR Speed
Set the speed to be used in ‘Fast OPR’ stage. This speed must be less than ‘Speed Limit’ value and faster
than the ‘Creep speed’.

Creep Speed
Set the speed to be used in ‘Creep speed’ stage. This speed must be equal to or faster than the ‘Bias

1488

CIMON-PLC

Speed’.

OPR Method
CM1-PSnnX supports 4 types of OPR.

[ ZERO Detect after DOG OFF ]

When the OPR instruction is issued, PSnnX performs a fast OPR with the designated direction in ‘OPR
direction’. When the DOG signal is detected as ON, PSnnX switches the speed to the ‘Creep speed’. The
‘Creep speed’ will be continued until when the first ZERO signal detected after DOG signal OFF.

[ ZERO Detect while DOG ON ]

[ ZERO Detect after Hardware Limit Signal ]

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1489

When the OPR instruction is issued, PSnnX performs a fast OPR with the designated direction in ‘OPR
direction’. When one of the hardware limit signal is detected as ON, PSnnX changes the direction and
move backward with Creep speed. This backward movement will be continued until when the first ZERO
signal is detected.

[ Only with DOG Signal ]

When the OPR instruction is issued, PSnnX performs a fast OPR with the designated direction in ‘OPR
direction’. When the DOG signal is detected as ON, PSnnX will change the speed to ‘Creep Speed’.
Forward movement will be continued until when the DOG signal changes from ON to OFF. After the
detection of DOG signal OFF, PSnnX will change the movement direction to backward. And this movement
will be continued until the DOG signal ON again.

OPR Direction

1490

CIMON-PLC

Set the direction to start movement when starting machine OPR.

OPR Dwell Time
This setting is used when the OPR movement is completed. After this time the ‘OPR complete’ signal will
be issued.

OPR Compensation
After returning to the machine OP, this function compensates the position by the designated distance from
the machine OP position and sets that position as the OP address. If there is a physical limit to the OP
position, such as the near-point dog installation position, use this function to compensate the OP to an
optimum position.

6.10.5.4 Common Parameters

Pulse Output Logic
Set the logic of the driver pulse output.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1491

0 : High Active

1 : Low Active

6.10.6 Position Data
What is Position Data
Position data can be defined up to 600 for each axis. Each position data stores the position address,
moving method/speed/time and other information about a position control. A position data occupies 10
words of internal flash memory.

Details of Position Data
Memory Offset (Axis)
1

500

6500

12500

18500

Description

Initial
Value

Remark

Control Type (bit 0 ~ 1)

00 : Independent
01 : Continuous

Interpolation Axes (bit 2 ~ 3)

0 : Not interpolation
1:X
2:Y

Acceleration Number (bit 4 ~ 5)

Deceleration Number (bit 6 ~ 7)

00 : Acc/Dec #1
01 : Acc/Dec #2
10 : Acc/Dec #3
11 : Acc/Dec #4

Control Instruction (bit 8 ~ 15)

01h : ABS
02h : ABS2
03h : ABS3
04h : ABS4
05h : INC
06h : INC2
07h : INC3
08h : INC4
09h : FEED
0Ah : FEED2
0Bh : FEED3
0Ch : FEED4
0Dh : ACIS
0Eh : ICIS
0Fh : ACW
10h : ICW
11h : ACCW

Position
Data #1

1492

CIMON-PLC

12h : ICCW
13h : FSC
14h : FSC2
15h : FSC3
16h : FSC4
17h : RSC
18h : RSC2
19h : RSC3
1Ah : RSC4
80h : NOP
81h : JUMP
82h : LOOP
83h : LEND
84h : POS
501

6501

12501

18501

M code

0 ~ 65535

502

6502

12502

18502

Dwell time

0 ~ 65535 mS

503

6503

12503

18503

Reserved

504

6504

12504

18504

Speed (Low word)

505

6505

12505

18505

Speed (High word)

mm [x10-2mm/min]
: 1 2,000,000,000
inch [x10-3inch/min]
: 1 2,000,000,000
degree [x10-3deg/min]
: 1 2,000,000,000
pulse [pulse/sec]
: 1 1,000,000

506

6506

12506

18506

Destination Address
or Movement Amount (Low word)

507

6507

12507

18507

Destination Address
or Movement Amount (High
word)

-2,147,483,648
2,147,483,647
[x10-1 , x10-5 inch,
x10-5 degree, pulse]

508

6508

12508

18508

Circular Interpolation Address
(Low word)

509

6509

12509

18509

Circular Interpolation Address
(High word)

-2,147,483,648
2,147,483,647
[x10-1 , x10-5 inch,
x10-5 degree, pulse]

12490
12499

18490
18499

24490
24499

.
.
.
6490
6499

Position
Data
#600

6.10.6.1 Control Type

Independent
This control is set when executing only one designated data item of positioning. If a dwell time is
designated, the positioning will complete after the designated time expires.
Or if this control is used at the end of positioning data list, this data becomes the end of block data when
carrying out block positioning. The positioning will stop after this data.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1493

Continuous
This control is used when a series of positioning control is needed. The last position data of this chain must
be designated as independent control type to finish the positioning. The machine always automatically
decelerates each time the positioning is completed. Acceleration is then carried out after the speed
reaches 0 to carry out the next positioning data operation. If a dwell time is designated, the acceleration is
carried out after the designated time expires. In operation by continuous positioning control, the next
positioning number is automatically executed.

1494

CIMON-PLC

6.10.6.2 Interpolation Area
Set the axes that is interpolated with current axes. Current axes treated as main axes. This setting is valid only
when interpolation instruction is used. If the instruction is non-interpolation type, this setting has no meaning. But
when the interpolation instruction is used, this setting must designate the sub axes.
· Not Interpolation (00) : Use this setting on non-interpolated control.

· X (01) : Use this setting when the Y axis is the main axis and the X axis is sub-axis.

· Y (10) : Use this setting when the Y axis is the main axis and the X axis is sub-axis.

6.10.6.3 Acceleration/Deceleration Number

Designate the number of acceleration/deceleration time in basic parameter to be applied.

6.10.6.4 Control Instruction

Control Instruction :
· ABS

· FSC (forward) / RSC (reverse)

· INC

· NOP

· FEED

· JUMP

· ACIS (absolute address) / ICIS ( incremental address)

· LOOP / LEND

· ACW (absolute address) / ICW (incremental address)

· POS

· ACCW (absolute address) / ICCW ( incremental address)

ABS
Positioning is carried out from the current stop position to the designated address. The destination
positioning address must be absolute address.
All the addresses are based on the address established by machine OPR. The moving direction is decided
automatically by comparing the current and the destination position address.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1495

INC
Positioning is carried out from the current stop position by the designated amount of movement. The
direction is determined by the sign of the movement amount. If the movement amount is negative value, the
direction will be reverse. All the addresses are based on the address established by machine OPR.

FEED
The address of the current stop position (start point address) is set to ‘0’. Positioning is then carried out to a
position designated by movement amount.

ACIS (absolute address) / ICIS (incremental address)
One of the circular interpolation instruction. This instruction needs a point which is located in the path of
movement.

For using this circular interpolation instruction, the path point must be defined in ‘Circular Interpolation
Address’ field. The resulting control path is an arc having as its center the intersection point of
perpendicular bisectors of a straight line between the start point address and sub point address, and a
straight line between the sub point address and end point address.

1496

CIMON-PLC

ACW (absolute address) / ICW (incremental address)
This instruction is a kind of circular interpolation, and two motors are used to carry out position control in an
arc path having a designated center point, while carrying out interpolation for the direction of clock-wise.
The center point must be designated in ‘Circular Interpolation Address’ field.

ACCW (absolute address) / ICCW (incremental address)
This instruction is a kind of circular interpolation, and two motors are used to carry out position control in an
arc path having a designated center point, while carrying out interpolation for the direction of counterclockwise. The center point must be designated in ‘Circular Interpolation Address’ field.

FSC (forward) / RSC (reverse)
This instruction controls the speed. After issuing of this instruction, PSnnX outputs pulse with designated
speed until axis stop signal from Y8 or YE. The speed must be designated in the ‘Speed’ field. During the
speed control, current address value update is dependent on the setting of ‘Current feed value during
speed control’ in extended parameter.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1497

NOP
No operation.

JUMP
This instruction is used to change the next positioning data to execute. In continuous control the next
number of position data is automatically executed. But, this instruction changes the next position data to
execute. The number of position data must be designated in ‘dwell time’ field.

LOOP / LEND
This instruction is used to execute position data repeatedly. Position data between LOOP and LEND are
executed repeatedly for designated times in ‘M code’ field.

POS
This instruction is used to change the current position address to the designated address in ‘Destination
Address’ field. The machine position address does not affected by this instruction.

1498

CIMON-PLC

6.10.6.5 M Code

Set this item when carrying out sub work (clamp and drill stops, tool replacement, etc.) corresponding to the
code number related to the positioning data execution. X8 or XF point is turned ON depending on the
configuration of expended parameter ‘M code ON timing’. There are two modes for M code ON. During the M
code is ON, the next positioning data is not executed. M code can be cleared by sequence program in PLC CPU.

6.10.6.6 Dwewll Time

Set the time the machine dwells after the positioning stop to the output of the positioning done signal.

6.10.6.7 Speed

Set the speed for speed control function.

6.10.6.8 Destination Address / Movement Amount

Set the destination position address (absolute) or movement amount (incremental). In speed control instruction,
this setting is ignored.

6.10.6.9 Circular Interpolation Address

Set the path point address or center point address for circular interpolation. This setting is effective only in
circular interpolation functions.

6.10.7 Dedicated Instructions for Positioning

Dedicated Instructions for Positioning :
· PSTRT1 , PSTRT2

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1499

· PFWRT
· PINIT
· POSCTRL

6.10.7.1 PSTRT1, PSTRT2
This instruction starts the positioning control of the designated axis of the PSnnX.

n1 : Base and slot number
This parameter specifies which module the instruction to be issued.

· High Byte : Base Number (00h ~ 10h, 00h : local base)
· Low Byte : Slot Number (00h ~ 0Bh)

n2 : Number of position data
n2 parameter specifies the position number to be executed. The position data specified by this number
must be stored in flash memory of PSnnX.
· 1~600 : Position data number
· 9001 : Machine OPR
· 9002 : Fast OPR
· 9003 : Change the current position address
· 9004 : Multiple axis simultaneous start

n3 : Device memory where the result flags to be stored
The device memory must be a word. M, L, K, D area can be used with this instruction. After issuing the
instruction, the result of execution is stored in this memory as following :

1500

CIMON-PLC

· High Byte : Error code will be stored
· Low Byte : Flags representing execution status are stored.
a. Bit 0 : Processing the instruction.
b. Bit 1 : The execution of the instruction is completed.
c. Bit 2 : Error on execution of the instruction (this flag is set with bit 1)
d. Bit 3~7 : Reserved

6.10.7.2 PFWRT
This instruction is used to write the PSnnX parameters, positioning data and block data to the flash memory. The
flash memory of PSnnX can be rewritten up to 100,000 times. But, PSnnX limits this to 25 times after every
power ON. This limitation is for the purpose of protecting the flash memory damage from sequence program
mistake.

n1 : Base and slot number
This parameter specifies which module the instruction to be issued.

· High Byte : Base Number (00h ~ 10h, 00h : local base)
· Low Byte : Slot Number (00h ~ 0Bh)

n2 : Data type to be stored
Use one of following codes according to the data type to store
· 0 : All data (parameters, position data)

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1501

· 1 : Parameters
· 2 : Position Data

6.10.7.3 PINIT
This instruction is used to initialize the setting data to the factory default. After issuing this instruction, all data in
flash memory is cleared to the default.

n1 : Base and slot number
This parameter specifies which module the instruction to be issued.

· High Byte : Base Number (00h ~ 10h, 00h : local base)

1502

CIMON-PLC

· Low Byte : Slot Number (00h ~ 0Bh)

n2 : Data type to be initialized
Use one of following codes according to the data type to initialize
· 0 : All data (parameters, position data)
· 1 : Parameters
· 2 : Position Data

6.10.7.4 POSCTRL

n1 : Base and slot number
This parameter specifies which module the instruction to be issued.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

b15

b14

b13

b12

b11

b10

Base Number

1503

Slot Number

High Byte : Base Number (00h ~ 10h, 00h : local base)
Low Byte : Slot Number (00h ~ 0Bh)

n2 : Control Data
This must be designated with a block of word device. M, L, K, D area can be used as this block. The
designated device is the first device memory of 12 or 4 words sized continuous memory block. The precise
data for control are stored in this memory block.
A control code is included in this memory block. According to this control code, two different sized memory
blocks are used. One is 4 words and the other is 12 words sized block. The 4 words sized block is used at
3 simple controls such as changing position address or speed. The 12 words sized block is used for more
complicated control. Following tables show the structures of these two differently sized blocks.

Axis Number (N2)
Assign the number of axes to control.
· 1 : Axis 1
· 2 : Axis 2

1504

CIMON-PLC

Control Code (N2+1)
Assign one of following codes.
· 1 : Change the current position address. 2 more words must be followed for new position address.
· 2 : Change the current speed. 2 more words must be followed for new speed.
· 6 : Change the destination position address. 2 more words must be followed for new destination
position address.
· 9 : Clear the error code. 2 more words must be followed. Each word must be set as 1 and 0.
· 10 : Issue a control by position data. 10 more words must be followed for position data.

Control Data ([N2+2] ~ [N2+11])
According to the control code, 2 or 10 more words are needed. The detail information of these words are
explained as below.
· Control Code 1 : New position address (2 words)
· Control Code 2 : New speed (2 words)
· Control Code 6 : New destination position address (2 words)
· Control Code 9 : The first word must be set as 1 and the second word as 0 (2 words)
· Control Code 10 : 10 more words follow. These words have the same format as position data. The
detail information of the position data are described in former section. Refer to that section.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

6.10.8 CICON-The configuration Tool

"CICON" :
· Provides convenient interface to edit program easily.
· Supports link function of various types by using CPU Loader, RS232C/422/485 and Ethernet.
· Enables to diagnose program errors and system by using debug functions easily.

CICON - The configuration Tool :
· Open / Create a Configuration Data
· Save a Configuration Data
· Parameter Configuration
· Position data configuration
· Upload from module
· Download module

6.10.8.1 Open / Create a Configuration Data

Create a new configuration data
Select the menu ‘Tool’ - ‘Position Module’ – ‘Position Setup’
A new window will be created and all the configuration can be performed on this window.

1505

1506

CIMON-PLC

Open a configuration file
The configuration data of position module can be stored as a file. To open the configuration file, select the
menu as ‘Tool’ – ‘Position Module’ – ‘Open Data’.

6.10.8.2 Save a Configuration Data
The configuration data can be stored as a file. To save the configuration data, select the menu as ‘Tool’ –
‘Position Module’ – ‘Save Data’.

6.10.8.3 Parameter Configuration
The configuration window has three tab-windows. All parameters can be configured in ‘Parameter’ tab.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1507

After the configuration, the data can be downloaded to the position module or stored in a file. Use the menu
‘Tool’ – ‘Position Module’ – ‘Download’ to download the configuration.

6.10.8.4 Position data configuration
Position data for each axis can be configured at ‘Position Axis1’ and ‘Position Axis2’ tab.

6.10.8.5 Upload from module
All configuration data can be uploaded from the PSnnX module. Use the menu ‘Tool’ – ‘Position Module’ –
‘Upload’. For this operation, CICON must be in on-line status with PLC.

1508

CIMON-PLC

When the upload menu is activated, following dialog box quires about the type of configuration data to be
uploaded. Some of configuration data can be skipped to upload by un-checking the item.

6.10.8.6 Download module
All configuration data in configuration window can be downloaded to the PSnnX module. Use the menu ‘Tool’ –
‘Position Module’ – ‘Download’. For this operation, CICON must be in on-line status.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1509

When the download menu is activated, following dialog box quires about the type of configuration data to be
downloaded. Some of configuration data can be skipped to download by un-checking the item.

Check the ’Write to flash memory after download’ item to save the configuration data in flash memory of PSnnX.
If the data is downloaded without checking this item, the data is stored in RAM only. In that case, all the
configuration data will be returned to the original data stored in flash memory after power off and on. It is useful
when a number of trials are needed without affecting original configuration data.

6.10.9 Programming Examples
The example program in this section assumes that the PLC is equipped
with “CPU + PSnnX + XD16A + YR16A”. All input signals are defined as
variables as Left :

1510

CIMON-PLC

Contents :
· Making the Module ready
· Reading the error code and reset
· Reading the current position address
· Inching / JOG
· OPR
· Issuing the control with position data
· Continuous positioning with position data list
· Positioning Stop
· Resume Positioning
· Speed Changing
· Speed Control
· Positioning with M Code
· Positioning control without position data
· Flash Write

6.10.9.1 Making the Module ready
First of all, for proper operation of PSnnX module, the PLC CPU Ready (Y0) signal must be turned ON. After the
PSnnX module detects this signal, the module ready signal (X0) of PSnnX is turned ON.

6.10.9.2 Reading the error code and reset
When there is a error in PSnnX module, the error code must be reset for further operation. Following sample
program shows how to read the error code and reset it.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1511

6.10.9.3 Reading the current position address
Following example shows how to read the current position address and speed from the monitor data area of
PSnnX.

6.10.9.4 Inching/JOG

Inching
Following example shows how to set the inching operation. The inching movement amount must be set before
JOG output. The movement amount must be cleared to zero when the inching operation does not needed.

1512

CIMON-PLC

JOG
Following example shows hot to set the JOG operation. JOG speed must be set and the inching movement
amount must be cleared to zero before the JOG output. Notice that if the movement amount is not zero, the JOG
output performs the inching operation regardless of JOG speed setting.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1513

6.10.9.5 OPR
Following example shows how to issue the OPR. This example uses the PSTRT1 instruction for OPR. Ensure
that the OPR parameters are configured properly before running this example program.

6.10.9.6 Issuing the control with position data
This example performs the positioning with PSTRT1 instruction. PSTRT1 instruction needs the number of
position data. The number can be a range of 1 to 600. This example assumes that a position data is configured
on No. 1 as following figure.

1514

CIMON-PLC

6.10.9.7 Continuous positioning with position data list
This example shows the continuous positioning with multiple position data. A PSTRT1 instruction is used for that
operation. This example assumes that the position data is defined as following figure.

With only one PSTRT1 instruction, all the above position data are executed automatically. Notice that the control
type of leading three position data is configured as continuous and the last one is configured as independent
type.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1515

6.10.9.8 Positioning Stop
During the positioning operation, sequence program can issue a forced stop.

6.10.9.9 Resume Positioning
Resume operation is able to issue only when the module is in stopped state. The current state of module can be
known from ‘running status 2’ of monitor data. This example uses TO/TOP instruction. This instruction writes 1 to
the ‘Resume Request’ of control data area for resume operation. Notice that the resume operation cannot be
used when the state of module is standby state.

6.10.9.10 Speed Changing
There is two different way to change the current speed of positioning. The choice is dependent on user’s favorite.

By setting the control data area
Set the ‘New speed’ and ‘Speed change request’ fields of PSnnX’s control data memory. The new speed must
be written to the ‘New speed’ field, and then set the ‘Speed change request’ field as following example program.

1516

CIMON-PLC

By dedicated instruction
Use the POSCTRL instruction. POSCTRL instruction needs 4 words sized memory which is storing the control
code and it’s parameters are designated. For speed change control, use control code 2 as following example.

6.10.9.11 Speed Control
The instruction PSTRT1 can be used for speed control. The position data must be configured in advance. For
terminating speed control ‘Positioning Stop’ signal is used. This is presented at previous example.
Following shows two speed control examples. Each position data was defined as number of 20 and 21. Each
speed control will output pulse continuously until the positioning stop signal input.
Notice that the way of stop at stop signal is according to the setting of ‘Stop Group 3 Sudden stop selection’. It
can be a normal deceleration stop or sudden stop.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1517

6.10.9.12 Positioning with M Code
This example shows how to use M code in positioning control. Assume following four position data of 31 to 34.

The above position data is configured as 4 steps continuous position. Assume that the M code ON timing is
‘After’ mode. It that case, the M code will be issued at the end of each positioning, and the next positioning will
not be started until the M code is cleared. The M code OFF request control must be issued for clearing M code.

1518

CIMON-PLC

Following chart shows that the entire positioning path with proper M code clear request.

The M code ON state can be read by X8 point of PSnnX module. The continuous positioning control needs only
one positioning start signal for the first position data. The other position data are started automatically after M
code clear. The following figure shows the start of positioning.

Positioning start

M code Clear
If M code is designated non-zero value, the M code signal is turned on at each positioning control
according to the configuration of ‘M code ON timing’. The next position data can be started after the
preceding M code signal is cleared. For clearing the M code signal ‘M code clear request’ control must be
issued. Following figure shows the example of the clearing the M code signal.

6.10.9.13 Positioning control without position data
All previous examples use the position data for positioning control. The position data was defined in table and
the number of position data in table is used in control instructions.
This example shows how to issue a positioning control without position data. The POSCTRL instruction is used.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1519

The precise explanation of POSCTRL instruction was described in previous section. This example performs the
same positioning control that was used in section "Issuing the control with position data list". Following figure
shows the program.

6.10.9.14 Flash Write
This example shows how to store the parameter and position data to the flash memory of PSnnX module. The
PFWRT instruction is used. This instruction requires a code which defines the memory type to be stored. There
are two kinds of data which can be stored. One is the parameter and the other is position data table. One or all of
them can be selectively stored to flash memory. More detailed information about that was described in previous
section.
The data stored in flash memory are retained until the next power off and on. PSnnX module limits the number of
repeated writing at each power on. It is limited to 25 times. This limitation is settled for protecting the flash
memory from the sequence program mistake.

1520

CIMON-PLC

6.10.10 Trouble Shooting
· Error and Warn
· Error Code Details
· Warning Code Details

6.10.10.1 Error and Warn
If PSnnX module has an error, it cannot perform any kind of operation until the error is cleared. But the warn
state does not put any restriction on the operation of PSnnX. The error state is visualized by LED.
For clearing the error, the error code must be verified and the trouble source that caused the error must be
removed. For clearing the error code of PSnnX, refer to the section "Reading the error code and reset" .

Error on the parameter configuration
PSnnX module checks the parameter when the PLC Ready signal is turned on. If any kinds of error is
found such as configuration range overflow, the error will be issued.

Error on the instruction issuing
Error can be occurred when issue the control of positioning, JOG, Inching. Check the related configurations
of parameter or the signal from the mechanical part.

Error Classifications
Error Code Range

Description

001 ~ 009

Fatal error

100 ~ 199

Common error

200 ~ 299

Errors on OPR

300 ~ 399

Errors on JOG, Inching

500 ~ 599

Errors on positioning control

800 ~ 899

Errors on external signal interface

900 ~ 999

Errors on parameter configuration

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1521

Warnings
The warnings can be issued when invalid set value is found on the control data and position data area. The
warning code is cleared by the same method used in error code clearing.

Warning Classifications
Warning Code Range

Description

100 ~ 199

Common Warning

300 ~ 399

Warning on JOG operation

400 ~ 499

Warning on MPG operation

500 ~ 599

Warning on Positioning control

6.10.10.2 Error Code Details
Class

Code

Error Name

Description

No Error

Normal status

Fatal

DPRAM Initialize Error

DPRAM Access Error

Troubles in shared memory
Check with the CPU module

CPU Not Found

RES

101

PLC READY OFF

PLC Ready signal (Y0) is turned OFF
Turn on the Y0 signal by sequence program or CICON

102

DRIVER READY OFF

No ready signal from motor driver.
Check the cable and the driver.

RES

104

Hardware Upper Limit

105

Hardware Lower Limit

RES

154

Software stroke limit
upper limit

155

Software stroke limit
lower limit

RES

203

No DOG Signal

RES

207

OPR Required

Common

OPR

Hardware limit signal is detected.

Software limit is detected.

DOG signal is not detected during OPR operation.
Check the wiring.
OP is un-known when the OPR operation is issued.

1522

CIMON-PLC

Manual
Operation

Positioning

I/F

Parameter

RES

300

MPG Error

RES

503

Invalid Speed

RES

516

Path Control Error

RES

519

Interpolation Axis Busy

RES

521

Invalid Interpolation Axis Not supported axis was assigned as a interpolation

RES

525

Invalid Path Point

Designated path point is invalid for circular interpolation

526

Invalid End Point

Designated end point is invalid for circular interpolation

RES

536

Positioning started
during M CODE ON

M code by previous positioning control must be cleared.

537

CPU READY OFF

CPU READY signal (Y0) is not turned on.
Check the sequence program

538

Module READY OFF

Module READY signal (X0) is not turned ON

RES

543

Invalid Position Number

Check the position number.
Valid range : 1~600, 7000~7004, 9001~9004

544

Invalid Angle

When the unit is ‘degree’, the range must be in 0~359.9999

545

Invalid Loop Counter

Error on the repeat counter of LOOP instruction

RES

547

Nested Loop Error

Nest LOOP is permitted up to 8 levels

548

Internal Loop Error

Internal error was occurred during the processing loop. Try
to change some value of position data.

549

Unsupported Instruction Invalid instruction was used in position data

RES

805

Too Many FLASH
Writing

RES

900

Invalid Unit

901

Invalid Number of Pulse
Number of pulse per rotation can be a range of 1~65535
Per Rotationo

902

Invalid Movement
Amount per Rotation

Movement amount per rotation can be a range of 1~65535.

903

Invalid Unit
Magnification

Unit Magnification can be a range of 0 to 3

904

Invalid Pulse Output

Pulse output mode can be a 0 or 1

Check the parameter for JOG, Inching or MPG Operation

When the speed is not designated or designated as invalid
value
Invalid position data for path control.
The axis for interpolation is busy.
Check the timing of the positioning data

Up to 25 times of flash memory writing is permitted at each
power on.
Invalid unit code was assigned. The valid range of unit code
is 0 to 3.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

1523

Mode
905

Invalid Rotation
Direction

Rotation direction can be a value of 0 or 1

906

Invalid Bias Speed

Invalid value was assigned to the bias speed configuration.

RES

910

Invalid Speed Limit

911

Invalid Acc/Dec time 1

912

Invalid Acc/Dec time 2

913

Invalid Acc/Dec time 3

914

Invalid Acc/Dec time 4

RES

920

Invalid Backlash

The backlash can be a range of 0~65535

921

Invalid Software stroke
limit upper limit

Invalid value was assigned to the software stroke limit upper
limit configuration.

922

Invalid Software stroke
limit lower limit

Invalid value was assigned to the software stroke limit lower
limit configuration.

RES

927

Invalid M Code ON
Timing

RES

956

Invalid JOG Speed Limit Invalid value was assigned to JOG speed limit value

957

Invalid JOG Acc/Dec
Time

RES

960

Invalid S-Pattern Ratio

RES

967

Invalid External
command function
selection

RES

980

Invalid OPR method

The OPR method can be a range of 0~3

981

Invalid OPR Direction

OPR direction can be 0 or 1

982

Invalid OP Address

Invalid value was assigned to OP address.

Invalid value was assigned to the speed limit configuration.

The Acc/Dec time can be a range of 0~65535ms

M code on timing can be a value of 0 or 1

The JOG acc/dec time can be a range of 0~3

The S-Pattern ratio can be a range of 0~100

External command function selection can be 0, 1 or 3

6.10.10.3 Warning Code Details
Class

Code

Name

Description

No Warning

Normal Operation

100

Start Command on Busy

A start command was issued during the operation of a
axes. A start command must be issued when the BUSY
signal is off.

RES

102

Deviation Counter Clear
Request on Busy

RES

Common

A deviation counter clear request was issued during the
axis busy. The request is ignored.

1524

CIMON-PLC

JOG

A resume request was issued when the axes was still in
busy or in standby state.

104

Resume Ignored

RES

109

Teaching Ignored

RES

114

Below Bias Speed

RES

150

Invalid External
Command

RES

300

Speed change request
during deceleration

The speed change request will be ignored when the
request is issued during deceleration of continuous
positioning control.

301

JOG Speed Limit Warn

This warning will be issued when the JOG operation is
started with above the JOG speed limit value. The actual
JOG speed will be the JOG speed limit value.

RES

500

Invalid Bias Speed

Bias speed configuration of basic parameter was assigned
invalid value.

501

Speed Limit Exceeded

When the requested speed during positioning is above the
speed limit, this warning will be issued. The actual speed
will be the speed limit in basic parameter.

RES

503

M Code Signal ON

RES

505

Block Operation
Terminated

RES

509

Insufficient Remaining
Distance.

RES

512

Illegal External Function

This warning will be issued when the undefined external
signal command is turned on. This external command will
be ignored.

513

Insufficient Movement
Amount

Remained movement amount is not sufficient to
deceleration. When the destination position is reached
during the deceleration, the positioning will be stopped by
sudden stop.

514

Out Of Speed Limit

This warning will be issued when the requested speed is
above the speed limit configuration. The positioning control
will be performed by speed limit in basic parameter.

RES

Positioning

A teaching command was issued when the axes was still
in operation.
The designated speed is below the bias speed.
Actual operation speed is the bias speed.
External command signal is denied according to the
expended parameter configuration. This warning can be
issued when the ‘Use External command’ is set as 0 (Not
Used).

This warning is issued when the positioning start
command is issued during the M code is ON. The
positioning start command will be ignored.
On block program operation, if all the block is defined as
continuous then this warning will be issued at the end of
block.
This warning will be issued when there is not enough
distance remained to accelerate the speed to the new
requested speed.
The speed change request will be ignored.

XP / CP Series(CM1)

516

Illegal Teaching Data
Number

RES

518

Impossible to change the
Target

RES

1525

This warning will be issued when the data number for
teaching is invalid. The teaching operation will be ignored.
If it is impossible to change the target position address,
then this warning will be issued. The request for changing
target will be ignored.

Top Level Intro
This page is printed before a new
top-level chapter starts

Part

VII

BP Series(CM2, Block Type)

Block Type PLC (BP Series) :
· High performance CPU (200 nsec / step)
· CPU embedded PID function (max. 32 loops)
· High compatibility between CPU series : uses the same programming tool (CICON)
· Provides the programming tool (CICON) free.

Contents :
· Brochure
· Specification
· Functions
· Product Line
· Data Link
· Dimensions
· BP Main Module
· BP I/O Module
· Built-In High Speed Counter

7.1

Brochure
· Features of BP Series
· Product Line
· Communication
· Dimensions

1527

1528

CIMON-PLC

Features of BP Series :
· Series BP is suitable for a small-sized control system.
· Series BP furnishes many functions with various instructions as high-speed process to apply control sites.
· Series BP allows Any user to expand I/O Points easily for analog control or communication.
· Integrates power module, CPU and I/O module :Separation modules are not necessary.
· Process High-speed operation with a built-in high-speed MPU : Process speed (200ns/step)
· Several Hundreds of instruction : Sequence (62 Instructions) / Application (308 Instructions)

BP32M
· Abundant program capacity - 8,000 Step
· Device range :
Internal Relay : 4,096 Points
Data Memory : 5,000 Words
· Easy expansion : Max. 3 block expansion

BP16M
· Abundant program capacity - 4,000 Step
· Device range :
Assistant Relay : 4,000 Points
Data Memory : 1,000 Words
· Not-expansible

· Technical Specifications
Item

Specification
CM2-BP32M

CM2-BP16M

Program Control Type

Stored Program, Cyclic Operation, Time Driven Interrupt

I/O Control Type

Indirect, Direct by Instructions

Program Language

IL(Instruction List) , LD(Ladder Diagram)

Instruction
s

Sequence

62 Instruction

Application

308 Instruction

Processing Rate

200ns/Step

Program Memory
Capacity

8K Step

BP Series(CM2, Block Type)

Expansion Option

AD/DA/AD+DA/RTD/TC/IO (Max.
3steps)

Not-Expandable

I/O Point

128

4,096

1,024

2,048

256

100 Card * 100 Step

5,000 Word

1,024 Word

Type

On Delay, Off Delay, Integration, Monostable, Retriggerable

range

0.01 ~ 655.35 second(10ms), 0.1 ~ 6553.5 second(100ms)

Type

Up Counter , Down Counter , Up-Down Counter, Ring Counter

range

-32,768 ~ +32,767

Timer

Counter

1529

Operation Mode

RUN , STOP , PAUSE , DEBUG

Self diagnostic function

Operation Delay
Monitoring

Stops PLC Operation in case the detected time is over the
set time.

Error in Memory

Detects errors in flash memory in a CPU or DPRAM of each
specialty card

Power Trouble

Detects temporary breakdown in case input voltage is lower

HSC

1-phase 16kPPS, 2-phase 8kPPS

PID Auto Tuning

Executes automatic PID Operation

Password

Programs can be protected

DC 24V Output

Allows controlling sensors, switches and etc

CPU Built-in

· I/O Specifications
Item

DC Input

Relay Output

Transistor Output

Rated I/O Voltage

DC 24V

AC 220V / DC 24V

DC 12 / 24V

Rated I/O Current

4mA

1 Point, 2A / COM 5A

1 Point, 0.2A / COM
2A

On Voltage / On Current

DC 19V / 4mA

Off Voltage / Off Current

DC 11V / 1mA

Response
Time

Off -> On

5ms or less

10 ms or less

1ms or less

On -> Off

5ms or less

1ms or less

4 points

4 Points

8 Points

Common Type

1530

CIMON-PLC

Operation Indication

LED

Insulation Type

Photo Coupler

Relay

Photo Coupler

Input Type

SINK / SRC

Circuit

· Analog Expansion Block Specifications
Item

Specification

Power Source

DC 24V External Input

Type

A/D

Digital Data

Signed 16-Bit Binary Value (Data : 14 Bit)

Precision

Within 0.3%

Max. Conversion
Speed

5ms / 1Ch

Absolute Max. I/O
Insulation Type

D/A

12V / +21mA

10ms / 1Ch
12V / +21mA

RTD

50ms / 1Ch

Photo Coupler

Circuit

Ø Analog blocks can be expansion max.2 blocks

· Built-in Communication Block Specifications
Item

RS232C

RS422/485

RS422/485 2Ch

RS232C 1Ch

Model

Power Source

Supplied from CPU

Comm. Mode

Data Type

Exclusive

HMI Protocol(1 : n)

Loader

Communication to link with CICON

User

Protocol program

Data Bit

7 or 8 Bits

BP Series(CM2, Block Type)

Stop Bit

1 or 2 Bits

Parity

Even / Odd / None

Synchronous Type

Asynchronous

Baud Rate

300 / 600 / 1200 / 2400 / 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400

Modem Connection Function

Communication with an external modem unit

Item

Ethernet

Model

Power Source

Supplied form a CPU Module

Type

10 Base-T

Baud Rate

10Mbps

Max. Segment Length

100m (Node - Hub)

No. of Max. Nodes

Enables to link with 4-line Hub

Max. Protocol Size

1500Byte

Access Type

CSMA / CD

· Expansion

· Built-in High Speed Counter

1531

1532

CIMON-PLC

· 8 Pulse Input types
· Linear, Ring Counting Mode
· Coincidence Comparison Function
· Max.3kPPS

Product Line :
· Main Block Model Name

Model

Power Source

Input

CM2-BP32MDTA*

AC 90 ~ 240V

Output
TR (Sink)

[Indicates]

CM2-BP32MDCA*

TR (Source)

R : RS232C

CM2-BP32MDRA*

RELAY

S : RS422 / 485

CM2-BP32MDTD*

DC 24V

Remarks

DC 24V

TR (Sink)

CM2-BP32MDCD*

TR (Source)

CM2-BP32MDRD*

RELAY

CM2-BP16MDTA*

DC 24V

T : RS232 1ch
[Indicates]

CM2-BP16MDCA*

TR (Source)

R : RS232C

CM2-BP16MDRA*

RELAY

S : RS422 / 485

DC 24V

U : RS422 / 485 2ch

TR (Sink)

CM2-BP16MDTD*

AC 90 ~ 240V

E : Ethernet (10M)

TR (Sink)

BP Series(CM2, Block Type)

CM2-BP16MDCD*

TR (Source)

CM2-BP16MDRD*

RELAY

1533

· Expansion Block Model Name

v BP16M is not expandable

· I/O Expansion Unit
Model

Input

CM2-BP16EDT

Output
TR (Sink)

Power Source : Supplied from a main

CM2-BP16EDC

TR (Source)

unit.

CM2-BP16EDR

RELAY

CM2-BP32EDT

DC 24V

Remarks

TR (Sink)

CM2-BP32EDC

TR (Source)

CM2-BP32EDR

RELAY

CM2-BP16EDO

CM2-BP16EOR

RELAY

CM2-BP16EOT

TR (Sink)

CM2-BP16EOC

TR (Source)

· Analog Expansion Unit
Model

Input

CM2-BP04EAO

CM2-BP04EAA

CM2-BP04EOA

CM2-BP04ERO

RTD Input

AD V/I Input

Output

Remarks

Power Source : 24V External Power

DA V/I Output

source

1534

CIMON-PLC

CM2-BP04ETO

TC Input

v Max 2. analog blocks can be expanded with a main block

Communication :
· Ethernet

· Serial Communication

BP Series(CM2, Block Type)

Dimensions :
· Min Block, 32-point Expansion Block

1535

1536

CIMON-PLC

· Min Block(BP16M), 32-point Expansion Block, Analog Block

7.2

Specification
· Series BP is suitable for a small-sized control system.
· Series BP furnishes many functions with various instructions as high-speed process to apply control sites.
· Series BP allows Any user to expand I/O Points easily for analog control or communication.
· Integrates power module, CPU and I/O module :Separation modules are not necessary.
· Process High-speed operation with a built-in high-speed MPU : Process speed (200ns/step)
· Several Hundreds of instruction : Sequence (62 Instructions) / Application (308 Instructions)

BP32M :
1. Abundant program capacity - 8,000 Step
2. Device range :
· Internal Relay : 4,096 Points
· Data Memory : 5,000 Words
3. Easy expansion
· Max. 3 block expansion

BP16M :

BP Series(CM2, Block Type)

1537

1. Abundant program capacity - 4,000 Step
2. Device range :
· Assistant Relay : 4,000 Points
· Data Memory : 1,000 Words
3. Not-expansible

Item

BP32M

BP16M

Power

AC220V / DC24V (20W)

AC220V / DC24V (10W)

Input

DC24V

Out

Relay / TR SINK / TR SOURCE

Expansion Option

AD / DA / AD+DA / RTD / TC / IO
(Max.3steps)

Not-Expansible

Standard I/O

Input : 16 / Output : 16

Input : 8 / Output : 7

Program Control Type

Stored Program, Cyclic operation, Time Driven Interrupt

I/O Control Type

Indirect, Direct by Instructions

Program Language

IL (Instruction List), LD (Ladder Diagram)

Instruction

Sequence

62 Instruction

Application

308 Instruction

Processing Rate

200 nsec / step (Sequence Instruction)

List :
· I/O Point
· Self-diagnosis and Built-in Function
· I/O Specifications
· Analog Expansion Block Specifications
· Built-in Communication Block Specifications

I/O Point

BP32M

128

4096

1024

2048

256

100*100

5000

1024

BP16M

4096

1024

2048

256

100*100

5000

1024

1538

CIMON-PLC

Self-diagnosis and Built-in Function

Function

Description

Selfdiagnosis

Operation Delay
Monitoring

Stops PLC operation in case the detected time is over the set time.

Error in Memory

Detects errors in flash memory in a CPU or DPRAM of each specialty card.

Power Trouble

Detects temporary breakdown in case input voltage is lower.

HSC

3kPPS

PID Auto Tuning

Executes automatic RID operation. (Max. 32 Loops)

Password

Programs can be protected.

DC 24V Output

Allows controlling sensors, switches and etc (300mA)

CPU
Built-in

I/O Specifications

Item

DC Input

Relay Output

Transistor Output

Rated I/O Voltage

DC 24V

AC 220V / DC 24V

DC 12 / 24V

Rated I/O Current

4mA

1 Point, 2A / COM 5A

1 Point, 0.2A / COM 2A

On Voltage / On Current

DC 19V / 4mA

Off Voltage / Off Current

DC 11V / 1mA

Response
Time

Off -> On

5ms or less

10 ms or less

1ms or less

On -> Off

5ms or less

1ms or less

Common Type

4 points

4 Points

8 Points

Operation Indication

LED

Insulation Type

Photo Coupler

Relay

Photo Coupler

Input Type

SINK / SRC

Circuit

Analog Expansion Block Specifications

BP Series(CM2, Block Type)

Item

Specification

Power Source

DC 24V External Input

Type

A/D

Digital Data

Signed 16-Bit Binary Value (Data : 14 Bit)

Precision

Within

Max. Conversion Speed

5ms / 1Ch

Absolute Max. I/O

D/A

50ms / 1Ch

0.3%
10ms / 1Ch

12V / +21mA

Insulation Type

RTD

1539

12V / +21mA

Photo Coupler

Circuit

Built - in Communication Block Specifications

Item

RS232C

RS422/485

RS422/485 2Ch

RS232C 1Ch

Model

Power Source

Supplied from CPU

Comm. Mode

Data Type

Exclusive

HMI Protocol(1 : n)

Loader

Communication to link with CICON

User

Protocol program

Data Bit

7 or 8 Bits

Stop Bit

1 or 2 Bits

Parity

Even / Odd / None

Synchronous Type

Asynchronous

Baud Rate

300 / 600 / 1200 / 2400 / 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400

Modem Connection Function Communication with an external modem unit

Item

Ethernet

Model

Power Source

Supplied form a CPU Module

Type

10 Base-T

Baud Rate

10Mbps

Max. Segment Length

100m (Node - Hub)

No. of Max. Nodes

Enables to link with 4-line Hub

Max. Protocol Size

1500Byte

1540

CIMON-PLC

Access Type

7.3

CSMA / CD

Functions
Expansion

Built-in High Speed Counter

8 Pulse Input Types
Linear, Ring Counting Mode
Coincidence Comparison Function
Max 3kPPS

BP Series(CM2, Block Type)

7.4

1541

Product Line
Click :
· Main Block Model Name
· Expansion Block Model Name
· I/O Expansion Unit
· Analog Expansion Unit

Main Block Model Name,

Model

Power Source

Input

CM2-BP32MDTA*

AC 90 ~ 240V

Output
DC 24V

Remarks
TR (Sink)

CM2-BP32MDCA*

TR (Source)

CM2-BP32MDRA*

RELAY

CM2-BP32MDTD*

DC 24V

TR (Sink)

CM2-BP32MDCD*

TR (Source)

CM2-BP32MDRD*

RELAY

CM2-BP16MDTA*
CM2-BP16MDCA*

R : RS232C
S : RS422 / 485
E : Ethernet (10M)
U : RS422 / 485 2ch
T : RS232 1ch

TR (Sink)
AC 90 ~ 240V

CM2-BP16MDRA*

TR (Source)
8

CM2-BP16MDTD*
CM2-BP16MDCD*

[Indicates]

DC 24V

RELAY
TR (Sink)
TR (Source)
RELAY

[Indicates]
R : RS232C
S : RS422 / 485

1542

CIMON-PLC

Main Block (BP32M)

Main Block (BP16M)

Expansion (DIO)

Expansion (Analog)

Expansion Block Model Name ,

** BP16M is not expandable

I/O Expansion Unit ,

BP Series(CM2, Block Type)

Model

Input

CM2-BP16EDT

Output

Power Source : Supplied from a main

CM2-BP16EDC

TR (Source)

unit.

CM2-BP16EDR

RELAY
16

Remarks
TR (Sink)

CM2-BP32EDT

DC 24V

1543

TR (Sink)

CM2-BP32EDC

TR (Source)

CM2-BP32EDR

RELAY

CM2-BP16EDO

CM2-BP16EOR

RELAY

CM2-BP16EOT

TR (Sink)

CM2-BP16EOC

TR (Source)

Analog Expansion Unit ,

7.5

Model

Input

Output

CM2-BP04EAO

CM2-BP04EAA

CM2-BP04EOA

CM2-BP04ERO

RTD Input

CM2-BP04ETO

TC Input

AD V/I Input

0
2

Data Link
Ethernet ,

Remarks
Power Source : 24V External Power
DA V/I Output

source

1544

CIMON-PLC

Serial Communication,

BP Series(CM2, Block Type)

7.6

Dimensions
Main Block, 32-point Expansion Block

Main Block(BP 16M), 16-point Expansion Block, Analog Block

1545

1546

CIMON-PLC

7.7

BP Main Module

7.7.1

External Wiring

EXTERNAL WIRING

▶ CM2-BP32MDTA□

▶ CM2-BP32MDCA□

▶ CM2-BP32MDRA□

▶ CM2-BP32MDTD□

BP Series(CM2, Block Type)

▶ CM2-BP32MDCD□

▶ CM2-BP32MDRD□

▶ CM2-BP16MDTA□

▶ CM2-BP16MDCA□

1547

1548

CIMON-PLC

▶ CM2-BP16MDRA□

▶ CM2-BP16MDTD□

BP Series(CM2, Block Type)

▶ CM2-BP16MDRD□

1549

▶ CM2-BP16MDCD□

1550

7.7.2

CIMON-PLC

Communication Option Module Setting
Option Type

Communication Type

Modules that can be applied
CM2-BP32M

CM2-BP16M

-R

RS232C(HMI Protocol Only)

-S

RS422/485 1Ch(HMI Protocol Only)

-U

RS422/485 2Ch

-T

RS232C

-E

Ethernet (10Mbps)

CM2-BP32M Communication Option Connector Pin

BP Series(CM2, Block Type)

CM2-BP16M Communication Option Connector Pin

RS-232C

1551

1552

CIMON-PLC

7.8

BP I/O Module

7.8.1

External Wiring

EXTERNAL WIRING

▶ CM2-BP16EOT□

▶ CM2-BP16EDC□

▶ CM2-BP16EDR□

▶ CM2-BP16EDT□

BP Series(CM2, Block Type)

▶ CM2-BP16EOC□

1553

▶ CM2-BP16EOR□

1554

7.9

CIMON-PLC

Built-In High Speed Counter

High speed Pulse Input

Contents :
· Features
· Setting Up
· Coincidence Output Flag and Overflow Bit
· Exclusive Commands for Built-In High Speed Counter

7.9.1

Features
1. The built-in high speed counter of the block type PLC uses four switchable input terminals (X0000 ~
X0003). Those input terminals can be used as general inputs or exclusively for the high speed counter
inputs.
2. Pulse input of the high-speed counter requires rated load voltage of DC24V and digital input automatically
changes to high speed counter input according to the high speed counter settings from PLC parameter.
3. Counted values are saved as 32bit binary values with positive/negative signs (-2147484658 ~
2147483647).
4. For CM2-BP32M Series, when 1-Phase 1-Multiple is selected, maximum of 4 channels and when 2-Phase
2-Multiple is selected, maximum 2 channels can be used. (CM2-BP16M Series:1Phase 1Multiple - Max. 2
channels, 2Phase 2Multiple - Max. 1 channel)
5. The speed of the maximum input pulse is 3Kpps.
6. Supports 8 different pulse input types.
Pulse Input

1-Phase
1-Multiple

Channel

Count Timing

Type

X0000 , X0002 (ØA )

Counting

in Use

Counts at the rising edges

CH1

of ØA when ØB is OFF

CH3

X000 1, X000 3( Ø B)

BP Series(CM2, Block Type)

Counting

X0000 , X0002 (ØA )

Down

1555

Counts at the falling edges

CH1

of ØA when ØB is ON

CH3

X000 1, X000 3( Ø B)

Counting

X0000 , X000 1
(ØA )
X000 2, X000 3

1-Phase
HSCSW “U/D”( Ø B)

1-Multiple

Counts at the rising edges
of ØA when the input of
HSCSW U/D is OFF

ØB Switch
Function Input

Counting

X0000 , X000 1
(ØA )
X000 2, X000 3

Down
HSCSW “U/D”( Ø B)

Counts at the falling edges
of ØA when the input of
HSCSW U/D is ON

Counts at the rising and
Counting

X0000 , X0002 (ØA )

X000 1, X000 3( Ø B)

1-Phase

falling edges of ØA when Ø
B is OFF

CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4

CH1
CH3

2-Multiple
Counting

Counts at the rising and
X0000 , X0002 (ØA )

Down
X000 1, X000 3( Ø B)

Counting
1-Phase

X0000 , X000 1
(ØA )
X000 2, X000 3
HSCSW “U/D”( Ø B)

falling edges of ØA when Ø
B is ON

Counts at the rising edges
of ØA when the input of
HSCSW U/D is OFF

2-Multiple
ØB Switch
Function Input

Counting

X0000 , X000 1
(ØA )
X000 2, X000 3

Down
HSCSW “U/D”( Ø B)

Counting

X0000 , X0002 (ØA )

Counts at the falling edges
of ØA when the input of
HSCSW U/D is ON

CH1
CH3

CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4

Counts at the rising edges

CH1

of ØA when ØB is OFF

CH3

X000 1, X000 3( Ø B)

CW/CCW

X0000 , X0002 (ØA )

Counting
Down

Counts at the rising and
falling edges of ØB when Ø

X000 1, X000 3( Ø B)

A is OFF

CH1
CH3

1556

CIMON-PLC

Counting

X0000 , X0002 (ØA )

Counts at the rising edges

CH1

of ØA when ØB is OFF

CH3

Counts at the falling edges

CH1

of ØA when ØB is OFF

CH3

X000 1, X000 3( Ø B)

2-Phase
1-Multiple
Counting

X0000 , X0002 (ØA )

Down
X000 1, X000 3( Ø B)

Counts at the rising edges
Counting

X0000 , X0002 (ØA )

X000 1, X000 3( Ø B)

of ØA when ØB is OFF

CH1

Counts at the falling edges

CH3

of ØA when ØB is ON

2-Phase
2-Multiple

Counts at the rising edges
Counting

X0000 , X0002 (ØA )

Down
X000 1, X000 3( Ø B)

of ØA when ØB is ON

CH1

Counts at the falling edges

CH3

of ØA when ØB is OFF
Counts at the rising edges
of ØA when ØB is OFF
Counts at the falling edges

X0000 , X0002 (ØA )

Counting
X000 1, X000 3( Ø B)

of ØA when ØB is ON

CH1

Counts at the rising edges

CH3

of ØB when ØA is ON
Counts at the falling edges

2-Phase

of ØB when ØA is OFF

4-Multiple

Counts at the rising edges
of ØA when ØB is ON
Counts at the falling edges
Counting

X0000 , X0002 (ØA )

Down
X000 1, X000 3( Ø B)

of ØA when ØB is OFF

CH1

Counts at the rising edges

CH3

of ØB when ØA is OFF
Counts at the falling edges
of ØB when ØA is ON

7. There are 2 different counter modes as follows:
> Linear Counter
Can be counted within the range of -2147483648~2147483647. When the value goes out of this
range, the computation terminates and the internal overflow bit is set.
By executing preset command, internal overflow bit automatically resets.

BP Series(CM2, Block Type)

1557

> Ring Counter
Counts repeatedly between the maximum and minimum set values of the ring counter.
8. Coincidence output signal can be sent by comparing the present value and the already-set coincidence
value. The coincidence signal is not an actual output but SET/RESET of exclusive Flag(F0370~F038F).
9. During RUN Mode, modifying the following items is not authorized: Pulse Input Type, Preset Value,
Coincidence, Max. Ring Count, Min. Ring Count, and Counter Mode.

7.9.2

Setting Up
In the Project workspace on the left-hand side in CICON(Graphic Loader), double click on "PLC Parameter"
under "Parameter". When PLC Parameter window opens, click on "High Speed Counter" tab on the top tab
menu to get the same screen as follows:

1558

CIMON-PLC

Change the settings properly according to the consisted system and use command HSC or command
HSCSW in the scan program to compute input pulse.
1. CH1, CH3 Setting Options
Disable
1-Phase 1-Multiple
1-Phase 1-Multiple (ØB switch)
1-Phase 2-Multiple
1-Phase 2-Multiple (ØB switch)
CW/CCW
2-Phase 1-Multiple
2-Phase 2-Multiple
2-Phase 4-Multiple
2. CH2, CH4 Setting Options
Disable
1-Phase 1-Multiple (Ø B switch)
1-Phase 2-Multiple (ØB switch)
3. When "Ø B switch" is selected from CH1 and CH3, the user can choose from either Up or Down count
operation by using HSCSW command.
4. From Counter Setup for each channel, set each items of the active channels in order according to the
already-selected pulse input type (Counter Mode, Preset Value, Coincidence 1, Coincidence 2, Max. Ring
Count, Min. Ring Count).
5. There are two options for counter mode which are linear counter and ring counter. When ring counter is
selected and the max, and the min values are set, counting values goes back forth between the min value
and the max value. The overflow error does not occur for ring counter.
Operation of Ring Counter

Order of Ring Counting

BP Series(CM2, Block Type)

1559

6. While setting Preset values, when the preset terminal of HSC and HSCSW commands receives input
signal, the counted value changes to the preset value.
7. Up to 2 coincidence values can be set for each channel and set/reset the exclusive Flag(F0370~F038f) by
comparing the present value and the defined coincidence value.

7.9.3

Coincidence Output Flag and Overflow Bit
1. CH1, CH2 coincidence output Flag and Overflow Bit (F0370)
CH
No.
FLAG

CH2
Coincidence No.2

CH1
Coincidence No.1

Coincidence No.2

Coincidence No.1

F37 F37 F37 F37 F37 F37 F37 F37 F37 F37 F37 F37 F37 F37 F37 F37
F

SET

2. CH3, CH4 coincidence output Flag and Overflow Bit (F0380)
CH
No.
FLAG

CH4
Coincidence No.2

Coincidence No.1

Coincidence No.2

Coincidence No.1

F38 F38 F38 F38 F38 F38 F38 F38 F38 F38 F38 F38 F38 F38 F38 F38
F

SET

CH3

1560

CIMON-PLC

3. Overfolw Bit
When counter mode is set to linear counter, counting range is 2147483648~2147483647 and when the
value is out of the range, the computation terminates and sets internal overflow bit. Set overflow bit for
each channel is marked as

7.9.4

above.

Exclusive Commands for Built-In High Speed Counter
These commands are used exclusively for the built-in high speed counter of the block type PLC. The
following description only describes basic functions of the commands. Please refer to "CPU Command"
manual for more detailed descriptions and examples.
1. HSC
Receives an input of channel Enable and Preset signal of the high speed counter to start counting and
to use preset function of counting value. This command is used only when B-Phase switch function is
not selected.
2. HSCSW
This command is used only when pulse input type is selected to 1-Phase 1-Multiple B-Phase switch or
1-Phase 2-Multiple B-Phase switch. Like the command "HSC", it receives an input of channel
Enable,Preset, and B-Phase switch signal of the high speed counter to start counting and to use preset,
up/down function o f counting value.

Top Level Intro
This page is printed before a new
top-level chapter starts

Part

VIII

1562

CIMON-PLC

PLC-S(CM3)

PLC-S Brochure
PLC-S Program Setting
PLC-S Communication
PLC-S AD Module : SP04EAO
PLC-S DA Module : SP04EOAx
PLC-S AD DA Module : SP04EAA

PLC-S RTD Module : SP04ERO
PLC-S TC Module : SP04ETO
PLC_S AD MUX Module : SP 04EAM
PLC-S High-Speed Counter
PLC-S Positioning
PLC-S Parameter Settings

PLC-S(CM3)

8.1

PLCS Brochure

1563

1564

CIMON-PLC

PLC-S(CM3)

1565

1566

8.2

CIMON-PLC

PLCS Program Setting
Contents :
· Firmware download
· Installation of USB Device Driver.

8.2.1

Frimware Download
Please check CICON Build version and USB DRIVER installed.
(CICON version must be 2.29 or more. There is USB DRIVER in CICON folder.)

Contents :
· How to upgrade PLC-S CPU firmware.
· PLC-S Expansion module Firmware Upgrade

8.2.1.1

How to upgrade PLC-S CPU firmware

1. Turn PLC-S Power On (DC 24V) and connect USB connector with PC.
2. Put MODE SWITCH to STOP and check STOP LED On.
3. Execute CICON
4. Select CM3-plcS at CPU Type

PLC-S(CM3)

5. Select [Tool] -> [Connection Setup]

6. Select USB Port at Type.(Timeout should be more than 5 sec.)

1567

1568

CIMON-PLC

7. Select [Online] -> [Connect] and [Online] -> [Firmware Upgrade]

8. Check Online and select the folder where firmware file is in.

PLC-S(CM3)

9. Check firmware file name and click [OK] button.

1569

1570

CIMON-PLC

11.When firmware is finished in order, the message box will be appeared as follow. In case of PLC-S, only
Power LED is ON and others are blinking.

12.If you want to make other PLC-S firmware upgraded, start from No.8 again.
13.SD memory card type Module has the same upgrade process.

PLC-S(CM3)

8.2.1.2

PLC-S Expansion module Firmware Upgrade

1. Turn CPU Power ON(DC 24V) after connect expansion module to CPU.
2. Check Power LED of expansion module is ON.
3. Follow instruction from No.1 to No.8.
4. Check “01” at Slot in [Firmware List]

5. Check firmware file name and click [OK] button.

1571

1572

CIMON-PLC

6. Start firmware upgrade.
(Do not remove USB connection from PC or PLC-S until firmware is completely finished.)

7. When firmware is finished in order, the message box will be appeared as follow.

In case of expansion

module, Power LED is blinking quickly.

PLC-S(CM3)

8.3

PLCS Communication
Contents :
· Outline
· Ethernet
· Serial(COM1 / COM2)

1573

1574

8.3.1

CIMON-PLC

Outline

Ethernet
(100 BaseTX )

Port

COM 1

RS 232 C
(NullMODEM )

COM 2

RS 485
(Insulated )

Spec.

Protocol
CIMON HMI Protocol (TCP/IP, UDP/IP)

Ethernet

100Base-TX

MODBUS/TCP (Slave)

10Base-T

High Speed PLC Link

COM1

NULL MODEM

Programming Tool
Bridge

Programming Tool Connection (CICON)
CIMON HMI Protocol
RS232C

Features

DHCP + CIMON DDNS

MODBUS/RTU (Master)
MODBUS/RTU (Slave)

Protocol Auto Detection

Protocol Program
Programming Tool Connection (CICON)
CIMON HMI Protocol
MODBUS/RTU (Master)

COM2

RS485

Protocol Auto Detection

MODBUS/RTU (Slave)

Insulated

Protocol Program
Programming Tool Connection (CICON)

8.3.2

Ethernet
· Network Capacity

PLC-S(CM3)

1575

PLCS supports Max.5 clients at once. TCP/IP supports Max.2 clients at once.
If more than Max. number clients access network at once, network will be malfunction.
· Network Speed
Network speed(10Mbps, 100Mbps) will be set up automatically.
2.1 CIMON HMI Protocol (TCP/IP, UDP/IP)
1) PLCS supports "CIMON HMI Protocol" which all CIMON PLC have.
2) Comm. Port number : UDP/IP=10262, TCP/IP=10260
3) TCP/IP or UDP/IP are selected by Client(HMI device)
4) PLCS supports Max.5 clients at once. TCP/IP supports Max.2 clients at once.

2.2 MODBUS/TCP (Slave)

1) User can see MODBUS Memory map in “PLC Parameter”
2) This function enables user to choose and assign internal memory as MODBUS Memory.
3) This MODBUS Memory Map will be operated as same as COM1 and COM2 MODBUS/RTU Protocol.
4) Comm. Port Number : TCP/IP 502

2.3 High Speed PLC Link
1) This function will be used when fast communication between CIMON PLCs is needed.
2) It is possible to communicate among Max. 64stations.
3) Each PLC can send and receive data of Max. 64stations. Sending stations are limited upto
32stations.
4) There can be Max. 64words executive data in a station.

1576

CIMON-PLC

5) In order to activate this function, [Ethernet High Speed Link Program] is selected.

6) Note : [PLC Link] in [Parameter] does not support High support PLC Link to PLC-S. Only [Ethernet
High Speed Link Program] in Special program supports this function.

7) Compatible Comm. Modules are as following
· PLC-S : All CPU module which has Ethernet Option
· PLC-S : CM3-SP01EET (Ethernet Expansion module)
· CP/XP Series PLC : CM1-EC10A, CM1-EC10B
· Note : CM1-EC01A of CP/XP series is not compatible with Ethernet option of CM2-BP series.
·
8) In order to enjoy the best performance, it should be separated with other networks. If it works with
other networks, its network speed should be damaged. Its network is UDP/IP Broadcast type.
Therefore, network Hub does not need to be
9) switching Hub.

PLC-S(CM3)

1577

10) Comm. Port Number : UDP/IP 10264

2.4 Programming Tool Connection (CICON)
1) CPU can connect to CICON through Ethernet.
2) UDP/IP is used and Port Number is 10266.
3) Programming Tool Bridge supported.
This function enable to make CICON communication from CPU to other CPU by port COM1 or COM2.

4) Example of Programming Tool Bridge
· The above configuration is the one of examples of Programming Tool Bridge.
· Generally PLC-S communicates with other PLC-S by MODBUS/RTU Master-Slave. (Master
PLC-S has Ethernet Option)

1578

CIMON-PLC

· To operate this function, [Cicon Relay Use] of Master PLC Parameter must be selected.

· As 2 serial ports are supported, 2 MODBUS/RTU networks can be set up.
· If 2 Channels are used, IP address should be set up as below
Slave PLC with Channel 1 : Station No. 0~127
Slave PLC with Channel 2 : Station No. 128~254.
(Master PLC can use any Station No.)
· After setup, connect Master PLC to CICON through Ethernet to operate Slave PLC.

· Assign [Station No.] that you want to connect Slave PLC. Then Master PLC stops network and
connects CICON to Serial port.
(MODBUS/RTU Master Communication mode is changed to Stop mode at that time)

PLC-S(CM3)

1579

· Mater PLC will use assigned Station number of Ch1 or Ch2 in [PLC Parameter]
In case that both channels are selected by [Cicon Relay Use], any Station No. which is
matched with Master PLC will be connected.

· Without serial port setup, PLC-S can recognize Comm. protocol automatically. With this function,
Slave PLC changes MODBUS/RTU mode to CICON Comm. mode automatically.
· While program task is operating with Slave PLC, other PLCs will be on standby because serial
port cannot have several comm. protocols.
· After programming finished, Ethernet connection between Master PLC and CICON will be cut. If
Master PLC does not receive message from CICON in 5 sec. it changes to previous comm.
mode automatically. In this case, it will become MODBUS/RTU Master comm.
· Master PLC which is changed to MODBUS/RTU Master comm. will restart communication with
Slave PLC. Slave PLC search MODBUS/RTU protocol automatically and send respond when
Station number is correct.

2.5 DHCP
(1) Outline
PLC-S supports DHCP that is operated with dynamic IP network. However, as HMI does not recognize
dynamic IP, PLC-S provides method to operate private DDNS with CIMON SCADA.
(2) CIMON Private DDNS

1580

CIMON-PLC

The Private DDNS is the software which is provided with CIMON SCADA. It has function that operates
PLC-S with CIMON SCADA through dynamic IP. CIMON SCADA can gain IP address of PLC-S if user
install software in computer which has fixed IP and register PLC name and IP.
(3) PLC-S Setting (PLC Parameter -> Ethernet)

PLC-S(CM3)

1581

Above picture shows DHCP and DDNS setting parameter.
· DDNS address : write IP address which is assigned to DDNS. DDNS redundancy is possible.
· Site Name : Write PLC name. CIMON SCADA will search PLC IP address based on this Site
Name.
· DDNS Retry : PLC will send IP address to DDNS regularly. This function is used to register IP
address to DDNS in case that IP address is changed and show that PLC is connected with
network and works fine. Less than 1 minute is recommended.
(4) Etc.
· The network address assigned from DHCP can be checked at below F device address.
Items
Device address
Remarks
IP Address

Network Mask

Gateway

MAC Address

F0670

a.b.c.d

a.b

F0680

a.b.c.d

c.d

F0690

a.b.c.d

a.b

F0700

a.b.c.d

c.d

F0710

a.b.c.d

a.b

F0720

a.b.c.d

c.d

F0730

a:b:c:d:e:f

a:b

F0740

a:b:c:d:e:f

c:d

F0750

a:b:c:d:e:f

e:f

1582

CIMON-PLC

· DDNS Connection Port : UDP/IP, 20266

8.3.3

Serial(COM1 / COM2)
3.1 Features
(1) Protocol Auto Scan
· PLC-S scans below protocol for HMI automatically without protocol setting. (Baud rate and basic
parameter should be setup for matching with HMI)
1. CIMON HMI Protocol
2. MODBUS/RTU Slave
3. Programming Tool Connection (CICON)
· If Special program below is registered, Protocol Auto Scan is not operated with RUN Mode.
1. MODBUS/RTU Master
2. Protocol Program
(2) Communication insulation(COM2)
· COM2 Port is only for RS485
· COM2 Port has insulation and is effective as following:
1. Protect Comm. quality and electric shock from electric potential difference.
2. Protect Comm. quality from Noise and Surge.
(3) Comm. port independent.
· COM1 and COM2 works independently that makes flexible network.
· Two different protocols work with COM1 and COM2 simultaneously.
· Special programs works with COM1 and COM2 independently.
Ex) two protocols from each Comm. Port can work independently without interrupt.
(4) Programming Tool Bridge (CICON)
· Connect to CICON through Ethernet port.
· Please refer to PLC-S Ethernet Communication manual.

3.2 CIMON HMI Protocol
(1)CIMON HMI Protocol supported.

3.3 MODBUS/TCP MODBUS/RTU (Slave)

PLC-S(CM3)

(1) MODBUS Memory mapping function is supported in [PLC Parameter]
(2) This function is used to assign some parts of internal memory to MODBUS Memory.
(3) The MODBUS Memory Map is used the same with MODBUS/TCP supported from Ethernet.

3.4 MODBUS/RTU Master

(1)"MODBUS/RTU Master Program" is selected to use this function.

1583

1584

CIMON-PLC

(2)The Base and Slot must be Local and Slot0 each. Slot 0 means CPU in PLC-S.
(Special program which is used in Expansion module starts with ‘Slot 1’)
(3)Channel Mode
Mode

Port

Remark

Ch1

COM1

RS232C

Ch2

COM2

RS485

3.5 Protocol Program

PLC-S(CM3)

(1) "Protocol Program" is selected to use this function.
(2)The Base and Slot must be Local and Slot0 each. Slot 0 means CPU in PLC-S.
(Special program which is used in Expansion module starts with ‘Slot 1’)
(3)Channel Mode
Mode

Port

Remark

Ch1

COM1

RS232C

Ch2

COM2

RS485

1585

1586

8.4

CIMON-PLC

PLCS AD Module : SP04EAO
CM3-SP04EAO is analog input module that converts analog input signal (Voltage or Current) to 16bit binary
digital value.

Contents :
· Features
· Specification of Analog input module
· Dimension
· Conversion Characteristic according to Analog input voltage
· Conversion Characteristic according to Analog input current
· Functions of Analog Input Module
· Internal I/O Table
· Buffer Memory
· Wiring

8.4.1

Features
· CM3-SP04EAO is Analog input module which has 4 channels analog input (current/voltage).
· The input range is 0~20mA, 4~20mA, 0~5V, 1~5V, -10~10V, 0~10V.
· In order to have Max resolution, you can select 0~16000 or -8000~8000.

PLC-S(CM3)

1587

· User can have accuracy value because of digital filter inside.
· User can select Average processing (Time average / Count average) or Sampling processing.
· There is no quantity limitation to use in a system.
· (Maximum Expansion with one CPU is 11 modules except CPU)
· There is led indicator to check module status.

8.4.2

Specification of Analog input module

Item

CM3-SP04EAO

Analog input

4 Channel
0 ~ +5V(0 ~ 20mA)
1 ~ +5V(4 ~ 20mA)

Analog input

0 ~ +10V
-10V ~ +10V
Ø Voltage
0~5V

1~5V

Signed value
Precise value

Digital output

0~10V

-10~10V

-8000 ~ 8000
0~5000

1000~5000

Percentile value

0~10000

-10000~1000

0 ~ 10000

Ø Current
0~20mA
Signed value

4~20mA
-8000 ~ 8000

Precise value

0~20000

Percentile value
Analog input range

4000~20000
0 ~ 10000
Resolution

0 ~ +5 V

312.5 mV

1 ~ +5 V

250 mV

0 ~ +10 V

625 mV

-10V ~ +10 V

1.25 mV

0 ~ 20 mA

1.25 nA

Voltage
Max. resolution

Current
Accuracy
Max. Conversion
speed

4 ~ 20 mA
+- 0.1% (Full Scale)
2.1ms / 4Ch

1 nA

1588

CIMON-PLC

Absolute max. input
Insulation method

Voltage: +-15V, Current: +- 30mA
Photo-coupler insulation : between input terminal and PLC (No insulation between
channels)

IO Points

16 points

Connection Terminal

18-point terminal block

Consumption
current
Weight

430 mA
187 g
.

PLC-S(CM3)

8.4.3

Dimension

8.4.4

Conversion Characteristic according to Analog input voltage
No.

Analog input voltage

Offset

Gain

1 ~ 5V

0 ~ 5V

0 ~ 10V

10V

Digital output

Max. resolution
312.5 mV

0 ~ 16000

1589

250 mV

(-8000~8000)
625 mV

1590

CIMON-PLC

-10 ~ 10V

8.4.5

1250 mV

10V

Conversion Characteristic according to Analog input current
No.

8.4.6

-10V

Analog input current

Offset

Gain

Digital output

Max. resolution

0 ~ 20mA

0mA

20mA

0 ~ 16000

1.25 nA

4 ~ 20mA

4mA

20mA

(-8000~8000)

1 nA

Functions of Analog Input Module
· A/D Conversion methods
· Digital output value setting
· Precise value
· Percentile value

8.4.6.1

A/D Conversion methods

Sampling processing
It converts analog input sign to digital through general A/D conversion processing and save digital value
to Buffer memory. The required time for Sampling processing is 2.1ms interval regardless of the
number of channels used.
Average processing
It is used to execute A/D conversion of the channel designated for average account or times and save
the average of the accumulated sum on buffer memory. If setting value of time average is specified, it
does not read A/D conversion value but receives A/D conversion value gained by time interval and use
it for Count average process.
The after decimal point of A/D conversion is ignored.
Setting range of Count average process: 1~255 (times)
Setting range of Time average process: 0~255(x10)ms.
If setting value of Time average processing is 0, only Count average processing is executed.
· If Count average process is 10 times
It receives sampling data (2.1ms) 10 times and execute average processing. In other words, the
average value of input signal during 2.1ms outputs AD conversion value. In this case, interval time is
2.1ms.
· If Count average process is 10times and Time average process is 5(50ms)
Sampling data is done by every 50ms and it executes average processing with those sampling value
which is received 10 times. As a result, the average input signal value in 500ms will output as A/D
conversion value. In this case, interval time is 50ms.

PLC-S(CM3)

8.4.6.2

1591

Digital output value setting

When Digital output value is saved to Buffer memory, you can select signed value 14 bit data (-8000~8000)
or unsigned value 14 bit data (0~16000).

8.4.6.3

Precise value

It indicates digital output value separately with analog input signal to each channels so that you can see
precise value without additional data processing. You can check Precise value for each analog input range.

8.4.6.4

Analog input

Precise value

4 ~ 20 mA

4,000 ~ 20,000

0 ~ 20 mA

0 ~ 20,000

1~5V

1,000 ~ 5,000

0~5V

0 ~ 5,000

-10 ~ 10 V

-10,000 ~ 10,000

0 ~ 10 V

0 ~ 10,000

Percentile value

A/D conversion value for each channels indicates percentage (0~10000) compared with input
signal range.

8.4.7

Internal I/O Table
Direction of Signal(CPU? A/D Module)
Input
Name of Signal
X00
A/D Module Ready
X01
Reserved
X02
Flag indicating the operation condition

Direction of Signal(CPU? A/D Module)
Output
Name of Signal
Y00 Not Use
Y01
Y02 Requesting to set up an operation condition

set up
X03
X04
X05
X06
X07
X08
X09
X0A
X0B
X0C
X0D
X0E
X0F

Reserved
CH.1 Maximum alarm value
CH.2 Maximum alarm value
CH.3 Maximum alarm value
CH.4 Maximum alarm value
CH.1 Alarm in Minimum
CH.2 Alarm in Minimum
CH.3 Alarm in Minimum
CH.4 Alarm in Minimum
A/D module Error flag

Y03
Y04
Y05
Y06
Y07
Y08
Y09
Y0A
Y0B
Y0C
Y0D
Y0E
Y0F

ReserVed

Flag to request error clear

1592

8.4.8

CIMON-PLC

Buffer Memory
Memory address
Hex.
Dec.
0H
1H
2H
3H
4H
5H
6H
7H
8H
9H
AH
BH
CH
DH
EH
FH
10H
11H
12H
13H
14H
15H
16H
17H
18H
19H
1AH
1BH
1CH
1DH
1EH
1FH
20H
21H
22H
23H
24H
25H
26H

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
39
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38

Details
CH.1 Digital conversion value
CH.2 Digital conversion value
CH.3 Digital conversion value
CH.4 Digital conversion value
CH.1 Precise value
CH.2 Precise value
CH.3 Precise value
CH.4 Precise value
CH.1 Percentile value
CH.2 Percentile value
CH.3 Percentile value
CH.4 Percentile value
CH.1 Setup input signal range
CH.2 Setup input signal range
CH.3 Setup input signal range
CH.4 Setup input signal range
Setup Raw Value digital output
Reserved
CH.1 Average processing setting value
CH.2 Average processing setting value
CH.3 Average processing setting value
CH.4 Average processing setting value
CH.1 Maximum alarm setting value
CH.2 Maximum alarm setting value
CH.3 Maximum alarm setting value
CH.4 Maximum alarm setting value
CH.1 Minimum alarm setting value
CH.2 Minimum alarm setting value
CH.3 Minimum alarm setting value
CH.4 Minimum alarm setting value
Maximum alarm status
Minimum alarm status
CH.1 Digital Filter Constant
CH.2 Digital Filter Constant
CH.3 Digital Filter Constant
CH.4 Digital Filter Constant
Calibration Code
Error Code
OS Version

Default

R/W

0
0
0
0
0
2000h
2000h
2000h
2000h
0
0
0
0

R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W

0
0
0
0
30
30
30
30
-

R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R

PLC-S(CM3)

1593

* Buffer memory is located inside of AD module. It converts analog input signal to digital value and
setting values are saved in.
* It saves AD conversion value in buffer memory 0 ~ 3 to CPU memory through FROM instruction to
use program.
* R/W is to denote Read/Write if available from PLC program.
R: Read

8.4.8.1

W: Write

Digital conversion value

It is used to save A/D conversion digital output value.
The digital conversion value indicates 0 ~ 64,000 (or -32,000 ~ 32,000) by 16bit.
If digital conversion value is over this range, its value is fixed with -384 / 64,383 (or -32,384 / 32,383)

8.4.8.2

Precise value

It is used to convert A/D conversion value to Precise value.
Please see the Analog input range with Precise value as below.

8.4.8.3

Analog input

Precise value

4 ~ 20 mA

4,000 ~ 20,000

0 ~ 20 mA

0 ~ 20,000

1~5V

1,000 ~ 5,000

0~5V

0 ~ 5,000

-10 ~ 10 V

-10,000 ~ 10,000

0 ~ 10 V

0 ~ 10,000

Percentile value

is used to save analog input value for each channel as percentile value compared with input signal range.
The conversion value is 0 ~ 10,000(0% ~ 100.00%)

8.4.8.4

Setting Input signal range

It is used to setup analog input range for each channel.

Input signal range

Setting value

4 ~ 20 mA

0 ~ 20 mA

1594

8.4.8.5

CIMON-PLC

1~5V

0~5V

-10 ~ 10 V

0 ~ 10 V

Setting Raw Value digital output

Setup range of digital conversion value to output Raw value. 2 bit for each channel is assigned.
[Bit Mapping: 16 bits]
MSB
0

LSB
0

CH4

CH3

CH2

Code

Normal input range

Full Range

00 (0)

-8000 ~ +8000

-8191 ~ +8192

01 (1)

-8000 ~ +8000

10 (2)

-192 ~ 16191

11 (3)

0 ~ 64000

CH1

Full Range: It is used for Exceeding of normal input range.

8.4.8.6

Average processing setting value

It is used to specify average processing methods.
· Upper 1 byte: Count average: 1~256
· Lower 1 byte: Time average: 0~256 (*10ms)

8.4.8.7

Maximum alarm setting value

It is used to set maximum setting value. The alarm occurs when A/D conversion value exceeds maximum
alarm setting value.

8.4.8.8

Minimum alarm setting value

It is used to set minimum setting value. The alarm occurs when A/D conversion value is lower than minimum
alarm setting value.

8.4.8.9

Maximum alarm status

If A/D conversion value exceeds Maximum alarm setting value, related channel’s bit is ON.

PLC-S(CM3)

8.4.8.10 Minimum alarm status

If A/D conversion value is lower than Minimum alarm setting value, related channel’s bit is ON.

You can also Maximum alarm status of CH1 ~ CH4 at I/O area.

8.4.8.11 Error Code

If error occurs, error code indicates
Error Code

details

No error

System error (A/S needed)

Calibration fault for AD conversion value

8.4.8.12 OS Version

It is used to indicate Firmware version of module.

8.4.9

Wiring
[ In case of voltage input ]
+ Terminal

- Terminal

Ch 1

Terminal 1

Terminal 3

Ch 2

Terminal 4

Terminal 6

Ch 3

Terminal 7

Terminal 9

Ch 4

Terminal 10

Terminal 12

24V External

Connection : bottom of module

[ In case of current input ]
+Terminal

- Terminal

Action

Ch 1

Terminal 1

Terminal 3

Connect 1-2

Ch 2

Terminal 4

Terminal 6

Connect 4-5

Ch 3

Terminal 7

Terminal 9

Connect 7-8

Ch 4

Terminal 10

Terminal 12

Connect 10-11

24V External

Connection : bottom of module

[Wiring Input Method]

1595

1596

8.5

CIMON-PLC

SP04EAO

Voltage Input

Current Input

PLCS DA Module : SP04EOAx
CM3-SP04EOA* is the analog output module that converts 16bit binary digital input value to analog output
signal(Voltage or Current).

Contents :
· Features
· Specification of Analog output module (CM3-SP04EOAI, CM3-SP04EOAV)
· Dimension
· Conversion Characteristic according to Analog output voltage
· Conversion Characteristic according to Analog output current
· Internal I/O Table
· Shared Memory
· Wiring

8.5.1

Features
· CM3-SP04EOAV is a D/A module which has 4channels voltage output (-10~10V, 0~10V).
· CM3-SP04EOAI is a D/A module which has 4channels current output (4~20mA).
· DA conversion module converts digital value, 16bit binary data (data: 14bit) from PLC CPU, into analog
output signal (voltage or current output). It converts digital value (0~16000, -8000~8000) to analog value
(4~20mA, -10~10V, 0V~10V).
· Through “Hold/Clear” function, DA module can output offset value (4mA, -10V) when Error or RUN mode
changes to STOP mode, or maintain output value being with RUN mode.
· User can choose the basic output of the channel that converting is prohibited
· Max. 11 analog modules can be installed in one station.
· Normal status: LED On, Error status: LED blinking by 0.5sec interval.

PLC-S(CM3)

8.5.2

1597

Specification of Analog output module (CM3-SP04EOAI, CM3-SP04EOAV)
Item

CM3-SP04EOAI

CM3-SP04EOAV

Analog output CH.

4 Channel

-10V ~ 10V / 0 ~ 10V

Analog output

4 ~ 20mA

(DIP S/W)

Digital input

-0 ~ 16000 (-8000 ~ 8000)

Resolution

1.25 mV or less

1.25 µA or less

Accuracy

± 0.1%

Conversion speed

10ms

Absolute max, input
Insulation method

Voltage: ±15V

Current: ±24mA

Photo-coupler insulation : between input terminal and PLC (No insulation
between channels)

Power supply

External DC +24V

IO Points

16 points

Connection Terminal

12-point terminal block

Consumption

+5V

(mA)

24V

Weight

1598

CIMON-PLC

8.5.3

Dimension

8.5.4

Conversion Characteristic according to Analog output voltage
Analog output voltage

Offset

Gain

-10 ~ 10V

-10V

10V

Digital input
0~16000

Max. resolution
1.35mV

PLC-S(CM3)

8.5.5

8.5.6

1599

Conversion Characteristic according to Analog output current
Analog output current

Offset

Gain

4 ~ 20mA

4mA

20mA

Digital input
0~16000

Max. resolution

(-8000~8000)

1.25mA

Functions of Analog Output Module
· D/A conversion Enable/Disable settings
It is used to set D/A conversion Enable/Disable for each output channel.
If disused channel is set as Disable, it outputs offset value (4mA or –10V)
The conversion speed is at constant regardless of conversion Enable/Disable settings.
· Analog output Clear/Hold settings
It is used to hold or clear out analog value when PLC status is Stop mode or Error.
(User can select it in “Stop mode output”)
· Offset/Gain settings
When digital input value is 0~16000, -8000~8000, analog output can be calibrated to 4~20mA or –
10~10V.
· Digital output settings
When digital input value is saved to Buffer memory, the range 0~16000 or –8000~8000 can be
selected.
· D/A Channel output Enable/Disable settings (Set output)
It is used to select output D/A conversion value or offset value to each output channel.
The conversion speed is at constant regardless of Output Enable/Disable settings.
* Although D/A conversion is enabled but if Channel output is Disabled, D/A conversion value
does not output but output only Offset value (4mA or -10V). As D/A conversion Enable/Disable
settings are not saved, select Output Enable through using “TO” command at the first scan in
order to use channel.

8.5.7

Internal I/O Table

Input
X20
X21
X22
X23
X24
X25
X26

Sign direction (CPU ? D/A)
Signal
D/A module Ready
Reserved
Finishing operating condition setting
DA CH1 Output Enable (status)
DA CH2 Output Enable (status)
DA CH3 Output Enable (status)
DA CH4 Output Enable (status)

Output
Y20
Y21
Y22
Y23
Y24
Y25
Y26

Sign direction (CPU ?D/A)
Signal
Reserved
Requesting operating condition setting
DA CH1 Output Enable (control command)
DA CH2 Output Enable (control command)
DA CH3 Output Enable (control command)
DA CH4 Output Enable (control command)

1600

CIMON-PLC

X27
Y27
X28
Y28
X29
Y29
X2A
Y2A
Reserved
Reserved
X2B
Y2B
X2C
Y2C
X2D
Y2D
X2E
Y2E
X2F D/A module Error flag
Y2F request error clear
(I/O signal number appears as above when D/A conversion module is installed at the 1st slot)
* Finishing operating condition setting / Requesting operating condition setting
It is used to save operating condition in Buffer memory into flash memory of module permanently.
When DA module recognizes this signal, it saves data from buffer memory into flash memory and
sets Flag of “finishing operating condition setting”.

* Output Enable
It is used to output DA conversion signal of assigned channels.

8.5.8

Shared Memory
Address
Hex.
Dec.
00H
01H
02H
03H
04H
05H
06H
07H
08H
09H
0AH
0BH
0CH
0DH
0EH
0FH
10H
11H
12H
13H
14H
15H
16H
17H

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23

Details
DA conversion Enable/Disable setup
CH.1 Digital output value
CH.2 Digital output value
CH.3 Digital output value
CH.4 Digital output value
CH.1 Range of digital value
CH.2 Range of digital value
CH.3 Range of digital value
CH.4 Range of digital value
CH.1 Channel Hold / Clear
CH.2 Channel Hold / Clear
CH.3 Channel Hold / Clear
CH.4 Channel Hold / Clear
CH.1 Setup output range for channel
CH.2 Setup output range for channel
CH.3 Setup output range for channel
CH.4 Setup output range for channel
CH.1 Status
CH.2 Status
CH.3 Status
CH.4 Status
Error Code
OS Version
Enable DA output

Default R/W

(DIP
(DIP
(DIP
(DIP

S/W
S/W
S/W
S/W

setting
setting
setting
setting

needed)
needed)
needed)
needed)

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R/W

PLC-S(CM3)

1601

** Each data is Word type.
** R/W is to denote Read/Write if available from PLC program.
R: Read

8.5.8.1

W: Write

DA conversion Enable/Disable setup

It is used to specify Analog output Enable or Disable.

b15

ch 4 ch 3 ch 2 ch 1

0 = Forbidden, 1 = Allowed

8.5.8.2

Digital output value

It is used to convert specified digital value to analog signal. The range of digital value is specified from
“Range of digital value”.

8.5.8.3

Range of digital value.

It is used to set range of digital value that sequence program specifies. Maximum 14bit resolution digital
output is used.
Code

8.5.8.4

Range

0
1
2

0.. 16000
-8000... +8000
Voltage/Current value

(Current: 0 ... 20000, Voltage: -10000 ... +10000)
Percentage (0 .. 10000)

Channel Hold / Clear

It is used to specify status of analog output signal when PLC run mode becomes stop mode.
Hold / Clear
Stop mode output
0
1
2
3

8.5.8.5

(0000b)
(0001b)
(0010b)
(0011b)

Clear (Minimum output)
Hold (Maintain last output)
Half level (Medium output)
Max. level (Maximum output)

Setup output range for channel (DIP S/W setting needed)

Code

Range

0 ~ 10V

-10V ~ 10V

1602

CIMON-PLC

In order to operate it properly, software setting and hardware setting (DIP S/W) must be the same.
EX) CH1 software : 0 ~ 10V ,
CH2 software : -10V ~ 10V ,

8.5.8.6

8.5.8.7

DIP S/W : CH1 OFF
DIP S/W : CH2 ON

Error Code

It displays error codes
Error Code

Details

0
1
2

No error
System error (considered A/S)
No external DC 24V power

OS Version

It displays Firmware version of module.

8.5.9

Calibration setting (Voltage output / Current output)
Double click DA 4Ch.

PLC-S(CM3)

1603

Click “Calibration”
In case of Voltage output, check software setting and DIP S/W setting before calibration. Calibrate both
settings.
* DIP SWITCH OFF: 0~10V,

ON: -10 ~ 10V

1604

CIMON-PLC

Select channel and click “Next”

When you measure output after click “Set”, minimum output value will be (4mA, 0V).

Write Offset value (+9999 ~ -9999)
If you write 30, it does not mean that it will increase 30mV. It calculates again and increase by 30. In
case of current output, measure output again after 5 seconds.

PLC-S(CM3)

1605

If measurement is ok, click “Next”
If you read output value by measurement device after click “set”, maximum value will be (20mA,
10V).
Keep doing this process until measurement is ok.
Click “OK” to finish Calibration.
* Calibration is not possible when the range of voltage output is 0~15mV.

8.5.10 Wiring
[ CM3-SP04EOAV : In case of voltage output ]
Channel

+ Terminal

- Terminal

Ch 1

Terminal 1

Terminal 3

Ch 2

Terminal 3

Terminal 7

Ch 3

Terminal 5

Terminal 11

Ch 4

Terminal 13

Terminal 15

24V External

Connection : bottom of module

[ CM3-SP04EOAI : In case of current output ]
Channel

+ Terminal

- Terminal

Ch 1

Terminal 1

Terminal 2

Ch 2

Terminal 3

Terminal 4

Ch 3

Terminal 5

Terminal 6

Ch 4

Terminal 7

Terminal 8

24V External

Connection : bottom of module

[Wiring Output Method]

1606

8.6

CIMON-PLC

SP04EOAV

SP04EOAI

Voltage Output

Current Output

PLCS AD DA Module : SP04EAA
Contents :
· Overview
· Specifications
· Characteristic of I/O conversion
· I/O signal for CPU
· Buffer Memory
· Calibration setting for A/D
· Calibration setting for D/A
· A/D D/A Module setup in CICON
· Installation and Wiring

8.6.1

Overview
A/D and D/A mixed module CM3-SP04EAA, which is used by combining CPU for CIMON PLC-S series, is a
module that receives external analogue signals (DC voltage or current) and converts it into 16 bit binary
digital value and then converts signed 16 bit binary value into analogue signal (DC voltage or DC current)
· Characteristics
· Understanding concept

8.6.1.1

Characteristics

1. CM3-SP04EAA is able to perform A/D conversion and D/A conversion for each 2 channels.
2. It can convert input signals with 0~20mA, 4~20mA, 0~5V, 1~5V, -10~10V and 0~10V into 0~64000 or
-32000~32000 of digital values.
3. This module can output digital values of 0~64000 or -32000~32000 into signals with ranges of analog
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

PLC-S(CM3)

1607

values 0~20mA, 4~20mA, 0~5V, 1~5V, -10~10V and 0~10V
4. It can acquire precise measurement value thanks to digital filter.
5. This module can process average time and numbers of times
6. This module can acquire digital value of high resolution as its digital resolution can be set to 1/32000.
7. There is no limitation for the number of one system.

8.6.1.2

Understanding concept

A consecutively changing amount such as voltage, current, temperature, velocity, pressure and flow rate is
called analog amount. Temperature, for an example, is consecutively changing with time as shown in Fig 1.1
However, as this changing temperature is directly inputted into PLC, its equivalent analog amount of DC
voltage, 0 ~+10V or DC current 4~20

is inputted into PLC via transducer.

1608

CIMON-PLC

Non-consecutively changing numbers such as 0, 1, 2 or 3 is called digital amount. On and Off signal is
expressed by digital amount of 0 and 1. BCD value and binary value is also digital amount. CPU module is
unable to directly input analogue amount to calculate it as digital amount. Therefore, the system converts
analog amount into digital amount and then input the digital amount into CPU as shown in 1.4. In addition, it’
s necessary to convert digital amount of CPU into the amount of analog in order to output analog amount to
external side.

8.6.2

Specifications
Enter topic text here.

8.6.2.1

Specification of AD/DA module
Item
Analog I/O

Analog Input

CM3-SP04EAA
Input : 2 CH, Output : 2CH
0 ~ +5V(0 ~ 20mA)
1 ~ +5V(4 ~ 20mA)
0 ~ +10V
-10V ~ +10V
Ø Voltage
0~5V

Digital output

1~5V

Signed value

-32000 ~ 32000

Precise value

0~5000

Percentile value

0 ~ 10000

1000~5000

0~10V

0~10000

-10~10V

-10000~10000

Ø Current
0~20mA

4~20mA

Signed value

-32000 ~ 32000

Precise value

0~20000

Percentil value
Analog input range

0 ~ 10000

4000~20000
Resolution

0 ~ +5 V

78.1 mV

1 ~ +5 V

62.5 mV

0 ~ +10 V

156.3 mV

-10V ~ +10 V

312.5 mV

0 ~ 20 A

312.5 nA

Voltage
Max. resolution

current
Accuracy
Conversion speed
Absolute max. input
Insulation method

4~
20 mA
±0.05% (Full
Scale)
2.1ms / 4Ch

250 nA

PLC-S(CM3)

IO Points
Connection Terminal

18-point terminal block

Consumption current

430 mA

Weight

8.6.2.2

between channels)
16 points

187 g

Dimension
(Unit:mm)

8.6.3

Characteristic of I/O conversion
1. A/D conversion method

1609

1610

CIMON-PLC

· Sampling process
This process makes it possible to sequentially convert analog values to digital value by A/S conversion
and store it in buffer memory. Sampling process is performed with a frequency of 2.1 ms regardless of
the number of channels in use.
· Averaging process
This process calculates average value from sum of sampled AD converted values by the number of
average processing times and then stores it into buffer memory. In this case, if average processing time
is already set, the system converts AD converted values inputted based on set frequency not directly
taking AD converted value and uses it to calculate averaging for the number of times. Digits after
decimal occurred from AD conversion will be discarded. Set range for average calculation is 1~ 255
times for number and 0~255(X10) ms for average time. And if the value for time average is set to ‘0’,
the system performs only number of times for sampling data.
· In the event that average value for number of time is set to 10 times,
The system calculates average by receiving sampling process data (2.1ms) 10 times. In other words,
average value for signals which is inputted for 21ms is outputted as AD converted value. In this case,
the frequency for updating data is 2.1ms which is sampling processing time.
· In the event that average processing for number of times is set to 10 times and that of time is set to
5(50ms).
Average processing is performed in a way that data is sampled every 50 ms and the system receives
this value 10 times. In other words, average value for signal which is inputted for 500 ms is outputted as
AD converted value. In this case, the frequency of updating data is 50ms which is average processing
time.
30 X (4 X 5) = 600(ms)
2. Digital output value setting
When Digital output value is saved into Buffer memory, you can select signed value 16 bit data
(-32000~32000) or unsigned value 16 bit data (0~16000)
3.Precise value
The system displays analogue signals coming to each channel separately from digital output value. The
measured value can be checked without additional data processing. Displaying range for the measured
value for each input signal is referred as following.
Analog input
4 ~ 20 mA
0 ~ 20 mA
1~5V
0~5V
-10 ~ 10 V
0 ~ 10 V

Precise value
4,000 ~ 20,000
0 ~ 20,000
1,000 ~ 5,000
0 ~ 5,000
-10,000 ~ 10,000
0 ~ 10,000

PLC-S(CM3)

1611

4.Percentile value
Converted input value for each channel is displayed by percentage (0~10000) compared to whole input
signal range.

5.D/A conversion Enable /Disable settings
1. It is used to set D/A conversion Enable/Disable for each output channel.
2. If unused channel is set to be Disable for switching channel, offset value is outputted.(4mA or –10V)
3. The conversion speed is at constant regardless of conversion Enable/Disable settings
6.Analog output Clear/Hold settings
It is used to hold or clear out analog value when PLC status is Stop mode or Error.
7.Offset/Gain settings
When digital input value is 0~16000 or -8000~8000, analog output can be calibrated to 4~20mA or
-10~10V.
8.Digital output settings
When digital input value is saved to Buffer memory, the range 0~16000 or –8000~8000 can be
selected..
9.D/A output Enable/Disable
1. It is used to select output D/A conversion value or offset value to each output channel.
2. The conversion speed is at constant regardless of Output Enable/Disable settings.
* Note) When D/A output is set to be Disabled although D/A conversion is set to Enable for each channel,
D/A converted value is not normally outputted, instead the offset value (4mA or -10V) value is outputted.
Because D/A output Enable/Disable is not saved, make sure to set corresponding channel for each
Enable/Disable (User Program Memory address 23) to Enable (1) using TO command in the first scan to
use channels.

8.6.4

I/O signal for CPU
Sign direction(CPU ? A/D,D/A)
Input
X00
X01
X02
X03
X04
X05
X06
X07
X08
X09

Signal
A/D module Ready
Reserved
Finishing operating condition setting
CH.1 High Alarm value
CH.2 High Alarm value
CH.1 Low Alarm value
CH.2 Low Alarm value
Reserved

Sign direction(CPU ? A/D,D/A)
Output
Y10
Y11
Y12
Y13
Y14
Y15
Y16
Y17
Y18
Y19

Signal
Reserved
Requesting operating condition setting
DA CH1 output Enable
DA CH2 output Enable

Reserved

1612

CIMON-PLC

X0A
Y1A
X0B
Y1B
X0C
Y1C
X0D
Y1D
X0E
Y1E
X0F Module Error flag
Y1F Flag to request error clear
Refer to A/D module in Chapter 7 and D/A module in Chapter 8 for more detailed description for input /
output signals.

8.6.5

Buffer Memory
Address
Hex.
Dec.
0H
0
1H
1
2H
2
3H
3
4H
4
5H
5
6H
6
7H
7
8H
8
9H
9
AH
10
BH
11
CH
12
DH
13
EH
14
FH
15
10H
16
11H
17
12H
18
13H
19
14H
20
15H
21
16H
22
17H
23
18H
24
19H
25
1AH
26
1BH
27
1CH
28
1DH
29
1EH
30

Details
CH.1 Digital conversion value (AD)
CH.2 Digital conversion value (AD)
CH.1 Precise value (AD)
CH.2 Precise value (AD)
CH.1 Percentile value (AD)
CH.2 Percentile value (AD)
High alarm status (AD)
Low alarm status (AD)
CH.1 Setup input signal range (AD)
CH.2 Setup input signal range (AD)
Setup Raw Value digital output (AD)
CH.1 Average processing setting value (AD)
CH.2 Average processing setting value (AD)
CH.1 Maximum alarm setting value (AD)
CH.2 Maximum alarm setting value (AD)
CH.1 Minimum alarm setting value (AD)
CH.2 Minimum alarm setting value (AD)
CH.1 Digital Filter Constant (AD)
CH.2 Digital Filter Constant (AD)
DA Enable/Disable setup (DA conversion)
CH.1 DA output type (Current 2types, Voltage 4types)
CH.2 DA output type (Current 2types, Voltage 4types)
CH.1 DA Range of digital value
CH.2 DA Range of digital value
CH.1 DA Channel Hold/Clear
CH.2 DA Channel Hold/Clear
CH.1 digital output value (DA)
CH.2 digital output value (DA)
AD / DA Resolution setting
Error Code
OS Version

Default

R/W

0
0
0
2000h
2000h
0
0
0
0
30
30
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-

R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R

PLC-S(CM3)

1613

Buffer memory, which is a memory in AD module, stores digital signals converted by AD module and also
records set values in currently operating module. AD conversion values which is stored in buffer memory 0 ~
1 are stored into CPU memory to be used for program using FROM command.
R/W indicates whether or not reading / writing is available from PLC.

8.6.5.1

Digital conversion value

It is used to save A/D conversion digital output value.
Data in other areas is displayed depending on resolution setting for AD/DA (Offset 28)
[16 bit Resolution]
Digital conversion value is expressed by 1 bit data of 0 ~ 64,000 (or -32,000 ~ 32,000) and of the value
is off the range, it is fixed into -384 / 64,383 (or -32,384 / 32,383)
[14 bit Resolution]
Digital conversion value is displayed by 14bit data with 0 ~ 16,000 (or -8,000 ~ 8,000) and if the value is
off the range, it is fixed into -192 / 16,191 (or -8,192 / 8,191)

8.6.5.2

Precise value

A/D conversion value is converted into Precise value.
Refer to following table for the range for converted value depending on setting input range.
Analog input
4 ~ 20 mA
0 ~ 20 mA
1~5V
0~5V
-10 ~ 10 V
0 ~ 10 V

8.6.5.3

Precise value
4,000 ~ 20,000
0 ~ 20,000
1,000 ~ 5,000
0 ~ 5,000
-10,000 ~ 10,000
0 ~ 10,000

Percentile value

Analog signal entering channel is converted to percentage based on setting input range and then saved.
The converted values are 0 ~ 10,000(0% ~ 100.00%)

8.6.5.4

Setting Input signal range

This sets range for inputting analog signal to each channel
Refer to following table for set values depending on input range.
Input signal range
4 ~ 20 mA
0 ~ 20 mA
1~5V
0~5V

Setting value
0
1
2
3

1614

CIMON-PLC

-10 ~ 10 V
0 ~ 10 V

8.6.5.5

4
5

Setting Raw Value digital output

This sets range of digital conversion to be outputted as Raw Value
This is set to 2 bit per channel. Refer to following table
[Bit Mapping : 16 bits]
MSB
0

LSB
0

CH4

CH3

CH2

CH1

[16 Bit Resolution]
Code

Normal input range

Full Range

00 (0)

-32000 ~ +32000

-32767 ~ +32768

01 (1)

-32000 ~ +32000

10 (2)

500 ~ 64500

0 ~ 65000

11 (3)

0 ~ 64000

Code

Normal input range

Full Range

00 (0)

-8000 ~ +8000

-8192 ~ +8191

01 (1)

-8000 ~ +8000

10 (2)

0 ~ 16000

-192 ~ 16191

11 (3)

0 ~ 16000

[14 Bit Resolution]

Full Range : It is range for conversion for input signal which is off the normal range.

8.6.5.6

Average processing setting value

It is used to specify average processing methods.
· Upper 1 byte: Count average: 1~256
· Lower 1 byte: Time average: 0~256 (*10ms)

8.6.5.7

Maximum alarm setting value

When you want to use the function to detect Maximum alarm setting value by comparing A/D conversion
value, you set High conversion value as raw value standard.

PLC-S(CM3)

8.6.5.8

1615

Minimum alarm setting value

When you want to use the function to detect Minimum alarm setting value by comparing A/D conversion
value, you set Minimum alarm setting value as raw value standard.

8.6.5.9

Maximum alarm status

If A/D conversion value exceeds Maximum alarm setting value, related channel’s bit is ON.

You can also check Maximum alarm status of CH1 ~ CH4 at I/O area.

8.6.5.10 Minimum alarm status

If A/D conversion value is lower than Minimum alarm setting value, related channel’s bit is ON.

You can also Maximum alarm status of CH1 ~ CH4 at I/O area.

8.6.5.11 Digital output value

The system performs DA conversion for digital value designated by this area and outputs analog signals.
Range for set values is set from ‘Range for digital value’

8.6.5.12 DA Out Enable/Disable

It is used to set Enable or Disable analog signal output.
b0 = Ch1 Out Enable(1) or Out Disable(0)
b1 = Ch2 Out Enable(1) or Out Disable(0)

8.6.5.13 DA Output type

It designate types of analog signal which is converted by DA.
Following table shows summary of codes for various analog signals
Code

Output type

0 (0000b)

4 .. 20 mA

1 (0001b)

0 .. 20 mA

2 (0010b)

1 .. 5 V

3 (0011b)

0 .. 5 V

4 (0100b)

-10 .. +10 V

5 (0101b)

0 .. 10 V

Remark

1616

CIMON-PLC

8.6.5.14 DA Range of digital value

This sets the range of digital value designated by sequence program.
[16 Bit Resolution]
Code

Range

0 .. 64000

-32000 .. +32000

Voltage/Current value
(Current : 0 .. 20000, Voltage : -10000 .. +10000)

Percentile (0 .. 10000)

[14 Bit Resolution]
Code

Range

0 .. 16000

-8000 .. +8000

Voltage/Current value
(Current : 0 .. 20000, Voltage : -10000 .. +10000)

Percentile (0 .. 10000)

8.6.5.15 DA Channel Hold/Clear

This sets status of output signals for DA analog when PLC Run mode is switched to STOP mode. 4
operation statuses could be designated as shown at following table.
Hold/Clear

STOP mode output

0 (0000b)

Clear

1 (0001b)

Hold

2 (0010b)

Half Level

3 (0011b)

Max. Level

8.6.5.16 AD / DA Resolution setting

This function enables to set one of 16bit and 14bit of resolution for DA output value. Since most of functions
related to analog such as PID provided by CPU are configured based on 14 bit of resolution, there is no
additional task to convert the measured value once 14 bit of resolution is maintained.

PLC-S(CM3)

MSB

LSB
DA Resolution

CH4

CH3

AD Resolution

CH2

CH1

Resolution Code

Details

14 bit

16 bit

N.A

CH4

CH3

8.6.5.17 Error Code

If any error occurs in module, this displays error code.
Error Code

Details

No error

System error (A/S considered)

Calibration fail for AD conversion value

8.6.5.18 OS Version

This shows version of Firmware version for module.

8.6.6

Calibration setting for A/D
Double click AD/DA 2/2Ch at workplace.

CH2

CH1

1617

1618

CIMON-PLC

Click “A/D Calibrate”
In case of voltage input, 0~20mA will be a base provided that current input is -10~10V. If input is fixed by a
single value, its degree of precision becomes highest. Set resolution for 14bit and 16bit respectively and
then click “A/D Calibrate”.

PLC-S(CM3)

Select channel and click “Next”

Input -10V and 4mA if setting is -10 ~ 10V and 4 ~ 20mA. Click “Next”

Input maximum value for each setting input.

1619

1620

CIMON-PLC

Complete this procedure by performing same methods mentioned above for each channel.

8.6.7

Calibration setting for D/A
Double click AD/DA 2/2Ch at workplace.

Click “D/A Calibrate”
In case of voltage output, 0~20mA will be a base provided that current input is -10~10V. If input is fixed by a
single value, its degree of precision becomes highest. For resolution, once calibration is performed only at
14bit, the same condition will be applied for 16 bit as well.

PLC-S(CM3)

1621

Select channel and click “Next”

The minimum value (4mA, 0V) is outputted by calibrator or measuring instruments
Input value into the offset field (between +9999 and -9999) In this case, input value of 30 doesn’t mean
rising by 30mV but increase by 30 by calculated number.
If measurement is ok, click “Next”
The maximum value (20mA, 10V) is outputted by calibrator or measuring instruments
Complete this procedure by performing same methods mentioned above for each channel and click “OK”

1622

CIMON-PLC

* In case of calibration, correct calibration is possible without Calibrator or devices in use.

8.6.8

A/D D/A Module setup in CICON
If you select [Tool]?Special Module Setup]?AD/DA Module], the “A/D D/A Module Setup” window appears.
It displays Slot number where AD/DA module is installed. You can also see “A/D D/A Module Setup” window
when you double click AD/DA card at workspace.
“A/D D/A Module Setup” window shows current card information.

· AD Channel Setting
· DA Channel Setting
· A/D D/A module Status

8.6.8.1

AD Channel Setting

If you double click one of AD channel or click “Setup”, “Channel Setup” window pops up.

PLC-S(CM3)

1623

· Signal Type : 4 ~ 20mA, 0 ~ 20mA, 1 ~ 5V, 0 ~ 5V, -10 ~ 10V, 0 ~ 10V
· Digital Range : -32768 ~ 32767, -32000 ~ 32000, 500 ~ 64500,0 ~ 64000
· Filter Constant : 0 ~ 100%
· Sampling Time : 0 ~ 2550mSec
· Average WIN Size : 0 ~ 255 Samples
· High Alarm Value : within range of digital conversion value
· Low Alarm Value : within range of digital conversion value
- Click “OK” after channel setting
- If you select whole channels by mouse as below and click “Setup”, you can set all channels in once.

1624

8.6.8.2

CIMON-PLC

DA Channel Setting

If you double click one of DA channel or click “Setup”, “DA Channel Setup” window pops up.

PLC-S(CM3)

1625

· Digital Value Range : 0 ~ 16000, - 8000 ~ 8000
· Output Type : 4 ~ 20mA, 0 ~ 20mA, 1 ~ 5V, 0 ~ 5V, -10 ~ 10V, 0 ~ 10V
· STOP mode output : HOLD, CLEAR, Half Level, Max. Level
· Resolution : 14bits (1/16000), 16bits (1/64000)
In order to run CA by set value, click “Write”. The message “Set value was written to PLC” is displayed. Set
values are recorded at EEPROM. Therefore, conversion is carried out by current set values even power is
On/Off. If you click “Read”, it reads current set value from DA card.

8.6.8.3

A/D D/A Module Status

You can check firmware version of AD/DA module and Error code at A/D D/A Module Status if you click
“Status”

1626

CIMON-PLC

· DA Out Enable / DA Out Disable : It is used to make output current value or minimum value
(If power of PLC is turned Off, setting becomes DA Out Disable. Thus Y23 and Y24 should be always
on in ladder program. Please check I/O signal Table.)
· DA Set Value : adjust current value.
· Reset Error : Clear error codes when there is any arror or any digital value out of 0 ~ 16000(-8000 ~ 8000)
is inputted.
In order to make DA Out Enable properly, the bit of DA Out Enable/Disable(Buffer memory No.23) must be
set 1. If it is DA Out Disable, the minimum value (4mA, -10V, 0V) outs regardless of digital input value. You
can see the “Yes” or “No” as Enable / Disable status at the above picture.
Although you setup DA Out Enable, it will become DA Out Disable when power of PLC is turned OFF and
ON.

8.6.9

Installation and Wiring
· Installation
· Wiring

8.6.9.1

Installation

Installation environment
Environmental conditions
Install the module in control panel which is water proof and anti-vibration

PLC-S(CM3)

1627

Install the module where there is no persistent shock and vibration.
Install the module where it is not exposed to direct sun ray
Install this module where there is no condensation due to rapid temperature
Install this module where surrounding temperature is maintained at -10 ~ +65 .
Installation procedure
Make sure that residues from machining screw hole or wiring are not inserted into PLC
Install the module where operation is easy to be performed.
Do not install the module in devices with high voltage and same panel.
Keep more than 50 mm of gap from duct and surrounding module.
Put to earth where surrounding noise environment is good.

Cautions for handing
· Do not drop it or put strong shock on it.
· Do not separate PCB from case. Otherwise it may cause malfunction.
· Make sure that foreign substance such as residue from wiring is not inserted into upper areas of module.
If foreign substance is found there, remove it.
· Do not mount or dismount module while power is turned on.

8.6.9.2

Wiring

[ In case of current input ]
Channel

+ Terminal

- Terminal

Action

AD Ch 1

Terminal 1

Terminal 3

Connect 1-2

AD Ch 2

Terminal 4

Terminal 6

Connect 4-5

DA Ch 1

Terminal 8

Terminal 9

DA Ch 2

Terminal 11

Terminal 12

24V External

Connection : bottom of module

[Wiring Input Method]

1628

CIMON-PLC

SP04EAA

Voltage Input

Current Input

[Wiring Output Method]

8.7

SP04EAA

Voltage Output

Current Output

PLCS RTD Module : SP04ERO
Contents :
· Analog input 4 channel RTD
· Specification
· Characteristic of Temperature conversion
· Functions
· I/O signal for CPU
· Buffer Memory

PLC-S(CM3)

1629

· RTD module setting in CICON
· Trouble shooting

8.7.1

Analog input 4 channel RTD
RTD conversion module is a module that measures temperature by input from thermo resistor (Pt100,
JPt100, Pt1000, Ni1000) and converts it into temperature ( , ) and signed 14 bit of digital value.
· Features
· Understanding concept

8.7.1.1

Features

1. RTD module displays the temperature converted by platinum thermo resistor, Pt100 or JPt100 as

and the temperature can be handled as digital value with the first decimal place.
2. RTD conversion module converts temperature data into 16bit binary data for digital value.
3. It converts -200 ~600 (-50 ~160 ) into 0~16000(-8000~8000).
4. The range of temperature is -200 ~ 600 (-50 ~ 160 ) and range of digital value is -192 ~ 16191.
5. If user set minimum temp. value and maximum temp. value, RDT conversion module set minimum value
0(-8000) and maximum value 16000(8000).
6. RTD conversion module has functions to detect thermo resistor, short circuit of cable and exceeding of
measurement range for each channel.
7. This module can connect 4 types of thermo resistor (except Pt100) for maximum 4 points.
8. EXP LED is turned On for normal operation but it blinks every 0.3second for error.
9. Power LED blinks every 0.5second when RDT conversion module has communication error with CPU
module.

8.7.1.2

Understanding concept

1630

CIMON-PLC

Analog Value - A
Consecutively changing amounts such as voltage, current, temperature, speed, pressure and flow rate are
called Analog amount. Temperature, for example, is consecutively changing by time as shown in Figure 1-1.
However, because this consecutively changing amount can’t be directly inputted to PLC, thermocouple input
module makes it possible to convert temperature into digital amount for PLC.
Digital Value - D
Non-consecutively changing amount like numbers such as 0, 1, 2 and 3 is called Digital amount. The signal
ON and OFF is expressed by digital amount of 0 and 1. BCD value and binary value are also Digital
amount.

CPU module cannot input analog value directly to calculate digital amount. Therefore, analog value should
be converted digital value to be inputted to CPU as Figure 1-3. In addition, digital value in CPU needs to be
converted into analog value in order to output analog value.
Platinum and nickel thermo resistor
This is a sensor to detect temperature as a resistance..
A platinum thermo resistor, Pt100 and jPt100 display 100.00 ? of output for a temperature of 0
A platinum thermo resistor, Pt1000 displays 1000.00 ? of output for a temperature of 0 .
A nickel thermo resistor, Ni1000 displays 1000.00 ? of output for a temperature of 0

8.7.2

Specification
· General Specification
· Performance Specification
· Dimension

PLC-S(CM3)

8.7.2.1

1631

General Specification

NO
1
2
3
4

Items

Specification

Operating

standards

-10 ~ +65

temp.
Storage

-25 ~ +80

temp
Operating

5 ~ 95%RH, Non-condensing

humidity
Storage

5 ~ 95%RH, Non-condensing

humidity

For discontinuous vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

Amplitude

10=f < 57Hz

0.075mm

57= f < 150 Hz
5

9.8m/s2

{1G}

Vibration

Each 10 times in X,Y,Z

For continuous vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

Amplitude

10=f < 57Hz

0.035mm

57= f < 150 Hz

4.9m/s2 {1G}

-Max. impact acceleration : 147 m/s2
6

Numbers

{15G}

Shocks - Authorized time : 11ms
- Pulse wave : Sign half-wave pulse (Each 3 times in X,Y,Z directions)
Square wave
impulse noise
Electrostatic
discharging

±2000V

Noise

IEC61131-2

KDT standard
IEC61131-2

Voltage : 4KV(contact discharging)

IEC1000-4-2

Radiated
electromagnetic

IEC61131-2

directions

IEC1131-2

27 ~ 500 MHz. 10 V/m

IEC1000-4-3

field noise
Digital I/O

Fast transient /

Class

Power

Digital I/O

module

(24V or more)

Burst noise

(24V or less)
Analog I/O
communication
interface

Volta
ge
8
9

Ambient
conditions
Operating
height

No corrosive gas or dust
2,000m or less

2KV

1KV

0.25KV

IEC1131-2
IEC1000-4-4

1632

CIMON-PLC

10 Pollution 2 or less
Cooling
11
Natural air cooling
type

8.7.2.2

Performance Specification

Item

Specification
Pt100 (JIS C1640-1989, DIN 43760-1980)
JPt100 (KS C1603-1991, JIS C1604-1981)

RTD type

Pt1000 (DIN EN 60751)
Ni1000 (DIN 43760)
Ni1000 (TCR 5000)
Pt100 : -200.0 C to 600

Range of input
temperature

Digital/Temp. Output

C (18.48 to 313.59 )

JPt100 : -200.0

C to 600

C (17.14 to 317.28 )

Pt1000 : -200.0

C to 600

C (184.8 to 3135.9 )

Ni1000 (DIN 43760): -50.0

C to 160

C (742.6 to 2065.9 )

Ni1000 (TCR 5000): -50.0 C to 160 C (790.9 to 1863.6 )
Digital conversion value : 0 ~ 16,000(-8000~8000)
Temp. : -2000 ~ 6000 or -500 ~ 1600 (floating point X 10)

Disconnection detection 3 points indication for each channel
Accuracy

0.1 %(Full Scale)

Max. conversion speed 120ms
Number of Input
channels
Insulation Method

4Channel / 1 Module
Photo-coupler insulation : between input terminal and PLC (No insulation between
channels)

Connection Terminal

12 points

Consumpt + 5V

60 mA

ion
current

8.7.2.3

+ 24V

30 mA

Dimension
(Unit: mm)

PLC-S(CM3)

1633

1634

8.7.3

CIMON-PLC

Characteristic of Temperature conversion

1. Resistance of Pt100 sensor is varying depending on changes in surrounding temperature.
2. RDT input module performs linearization for resistance input of RTD which is non-linear as shown in
above picture.
3. The temperature is stored in internal memory of TC input module as a converted temperature.
4. It uses converted temperature or digital converted value stored in buffer memory in the module using
FROM command in scan program.

8.7.4

Functions
RTD conversion Enable / Disable
1. User can set RTD conversion Enable or Disable for each input channel.
2. User can make conversion time short by setting Disable to unused channels.
Temperature detection value
1. It saves a converted Celsius and Fahrenheit into memory. (down to one decimal point X 10)
2. It converts the converted temperature into 0~16000, -192 ~ 16191, -8000 ~ 8000, -8192 ~ 8191.
Information for operation channels
1. Information for channels under normal temperature conversion is displayed for each channel.
2. If there is any disconnection error in RTD conversion Enable channel, its bit becomes 0.
3. The bit for Disable channel is 0.

PLC-S(CM3)

1635

Disconnection detection function
1. It has a function to detect the disconnection of thermocouple and cable for each channel.
2. If disconnection is detected, RTD module holds temperature value before disconnection without further
conversion. In this case, error code is displayed while LED flickers every 0.3 second.
Digital output setting
User can select 0~16000, -192 ~ 16191, -8000 ~ 8000 and -8192 ~ 8191 as a range for saving digital output
value to buffer memory.
Maximum/Minimum temperature setting
1. RTD conversion module converts -200 ~600 (-50 ~160 ) into digital value 0(-8000)~16000(8000).
This maximum and minimum value could be set by user.
2. If a user inputs maximum and minimum value, RTD module converts the minimum value into 0(-8000)
and maximum value into 16000(8000).

8.7.5

I/O signal for CPU
Signal direction(CPU <- RTD)
Input

Signal

Signal direction(CPU -> RTD)
Output

X00

RTD module Ready

Y00

X01

RTD conversion completion flag

Y01

X02

Set value saving completion flag

Y02

X03

Y03

X04

Y04

X05

Y05

X06

Y06

X07

Y07

X08

Reserved

X09

Y08

Signal
Reserved
Requesting to save set value

Reserved

Y09

X0A

Y0A

X0B

Y0B

X0C

Y0C

X0D

Y0D

X0E

Y0E

Requesting circuit calibration

Y0F

Requesting error clear

X0F

RTD module error flag

** (I/O signal number appears as above when RTD module is installed at the 1st slot)
· Input Signal
· Output Signal

1636

8.7.5.1

CIMON-PLC

Input Signal

Device
NO.
X00

Name of Signals

RTD module Ready

X01

Description
(1) This signal is turned On at the time RTD conversion is completely
ready when CPU power is on. RTD conversion is performed.
(1) If any conversion Enable channel is not converted more than 1 time
while PLC power is turned on and its initialization is completed, this flag

RTD conversion

is OFF (in case that the conversion value is not stored at buffer). If all

completion flag

conversion Enable channel finished to be converted more than 1 time,
this flag is On.
(2) If set value is changed, this flag is cleared.
(1) This flag is used for interlock to turn ON/OFF “Requesting to save
set value”(Y02) when RTD conversion Enable/Disable is changed.
(2) If “Set value saving completion flag” is OFF, RTD conversion
process is not performed.
(in case “Requesting to save set value”(Y02) is ON)

X02

Set value saving
completion flag

(1) This flag is turned ON when error occurs in module.
(2) Error code clear turns “Requesting error clear” (Y0F) ON.
Execute Error clear in CICON

X0F

RTD module error flag

PLC-S(CM3)

8.7.5.2

1637

Output signal

Device

Name of signal

NO.

Description
(1) This signal is turned ON when RTD conversion
Enable/Disable, Designating RTD SET data and Maximum and

Y02

Request to save set value Minimum temp. set value are stored.
(2) Refer to X02(Set value saving completion) for timing of
ON/OFF
Requesting circuit

Y0E

(1) This signal is turned ON when circuit calibration is requested.
(2) Refer to X02(Set value saving completion) for timing of

calibration

ON/OFF
Y0F

Requesting error clear

(1) This signal is turned ON when error flag(X0F) is cleared.
(2) Refer to X0F(RTD module error flag) for timing of ON/OFF.

8.7.6

Buffer Memory
Address

Details

R/W

Address
Hex Dec

Details

R/W

Hex

Dec

RTD conversion Enable/Disable

CH.1 Temp detection value(°C)

R 1FH 31 CH.1 Error code

CH.2 Temp detection value(°C)

R 20H 32 CH.2 Error code

CH.3 Temp detection value(°C)

33 CH.3 Error code

CH.4 Temp detection value(°C)

34 CH.4 Error code

CH.5 Temp detection value(°C)

35 CH.5 Error code

CH.6 Temp detection value(°C)

36 CH.6 Error code

CH.7 Temp detection value(°C)

37 CH.7 Error code

CH.8 Temp detection value(°C)

38 CH.8 Error code

Designate RTD type

R/W 1EH 30 Designate Average Process

AH
BH
CH

10 Digital output setting 1
11 CH.1 Temp detection value (°F)
12 CH.2 Temp detection value (°F)

13 CH.3 Temp detection value (°F)

14 CH.4 Temp detection value (°F)

15 CH.5 Temp detection value (°F)

10H

16 CH.6 Temp detection value (°F)

11H

17 CH.7 Temp detection value (°F)

12H

R/W

R/W 27

39 Reserved

R/W 28
R 29
R 2A

40 Requesting data for calibration
41 CH.1 Max. temp input value
42 CH.2 Max. temp input value

R/W
R/W
R/W

43 CH.3 Max. temp input value

R/W

44 CH.4 Max. temp input value

R/W

45 CH.5 Max. temp input value

R/W

46 CH.6 Max. temp input value

R/W

47 CH.7 Max. temp input value

R/W

18 CH.8 Temp detection value (°F)

48 CH.8 Max. temp input value

R/W

13H

19 Information for operation channel

49 Max. & Min. Scale setting data

R/W

14H

20 Designate RTD type

50 Max. and Min. set error

1638

CIMON-PLC

15H

21 CH.1 Digital conversion value

51 CH.1 Min. temp input value

R/W

16H

22 CH.2 Digital conversion value

52 CH.2 Min. temp input value

R/W

17H

23 CH.3 Digital conversion value

53 CH.3 Min. temp input value

R/W

18H

24 CH.4 Digital conversion value

54 CH.4 Min. temp input value

R/W

19H

25 CH.5 Digital conversion value

55 CH.5 Min. temp input value

R/W

1AH

26 CH.6 Digital conversion value

56 CH.6 Min. temp input value

R/W

1BH

27 CH.7 Digital conversion value

57 CH.7 Min. temp input value

R/W

1CH

28 CH.8 Digital conversion value

1DH

29 Digital output setting 2

3A 58 CH.8 Min. temp input value
3B-3
CH1-CH4 average time/filter
R/W
59-62
E
coefficient setting

R/W
R/W

** Buffer memory, which is a memory in module, stores digital values that are converted from input signal of
RTD and records current operations for the module.
** Temperature conversion value or digital conversion value is stored to CPU memory using FROM
command and they are used for programs.
** Each data is 2 byte of data.
** 4 channel modules do not use buffer memory of CH.5 ~ CH.8
** R/W indicates whether or not read/write is possible from PLC
R: read

8.7.6.1

W: write

RTD conversion Enable/Disable setting(Buffer memory address "0")

1) Set up RTD conversion Enable or Disable for each channel.
2) The initial value is TC conversion Disable.
3) In order to save set value to module, “requesting to save set value (Y02) must be ON/OFF.
4) Set value is stored in EEPROM and is operated by previous set value when power is turned ON/OFF
b15
0

b14
0

b13
0

b12

b11

b10
0

b9
0

b8
0

b7
0

b6
0

CH CH CH CH
.4

1: RTD conversion Enable
0: RTD conversion Disable

b8 ~ b15 of CM3-SP04ERO is fixed at “0”
8.7.6.2

Temperature detection value

(Buffer memory address "1"~"8")

1. This stores temperature value which is detected by RTD conversion.
The value stored in the memory is actual temperature (first decimal digit) x 10
2. The range of Temperature Conversion is -200 ~ 600 and if it is out of this range, -250 ~ 650 is
measured. If the value is out of this range -250 ~ 650 , -250 ~ 650 is fixed.

8.7.6.3

Designate RTD type (Buffer memory address "9")

PLC-S(CM3)

1639

2) In order to save set value to module, “requesting to save set value (Y02) must be ON/OFF.
3) Set value is stored in EEPROM and is operated by previous set value when power is turned ON/OFF.
MSB

LSB
Ch4

Ch3
0

Ch2
0

Ch1
0

PLC-S only uses Buffer memory address “9”. If you set 4 bit for each 4 channels, RTD will be used as below
table.

8.7.6.4

Address 9

RTD type

0 (0000b)

Pt100

1 (0001b)

jPt100

2 (0010b)

Pt1000

3 (0011b)

Ni1000 (DIN43760)

4 (0100b)

Ni1000 (TCR5000)

Temperature detection value, °F (Buffer memory address "11" ~ "18")

1. Temperature in Fahrenheit converted by RTD module is stored. In this case, actual temperature (the first
decimal digit) * 10 is stored to memory.
2. The range of Temperature conversion is -392~1112°F and if it is out of this range, -482~1202°F is
measured. It the value is out of this range -482~1202°F, -482~1202°F is fixed.

8.7.6.5

Information for operation channel (Buffer memory address "19")

1. Information for channel under normal conversion among conversion Enable channels (Buffer memory
address”1”) is displayed.
2. Bit for disconnected channel among conversion Enable channels is 0 while bit for channel under
conversion is 1.
3. Bit for conversion Disable channel stores 0.

8.7.6.6

Digital conversion value (Buffer memory address "21"~"28")

1. If the temperature measured by RTD is -200 , it is stored as digital value 0(-8000). If it is 600 , it is
stored as digital value 16000(8000).
2. If user input Maximum and minimum value and minimum temperature is measured, 0(-8000) will be
stored. If maximum temperature is measured, 16000(8000) will be stored.

8.7.6.7

Digital output setting (Buffer memory address "10,29")

1640

CIMON-PLC

8191 is selected, the module displays minimum and maximum measured temperature for each
thermocouple by 0~16000 or -8000~8000 and if input values exceed this range, it displays -192 ~ 16191,
-8192 ~ 8191
2) Initial value is set to -192 ~ 16191.
3) In order to save set value to module, “requesting to save set value (Y02) must be ON/OFF.
4) Set value is stored in EEPROM and is operated by previous set value when power is turned ON/OFF.
Buffer memory
address"10"
Buffer memory
address"29"

8.7.6.8

CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH
.8

CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH
8

Address 10

Address 29

Digital output value

-192 ~ 16191

-8192 ~ 8191

0 ~ 16000

-8000 ~ 8000

Assigning average process (Buffer memory address "30")

1) Set average process of RTD module Enable/disable.
2) The initial value is RTD average process Disable for whole channels.
3) In order to save set value to module, “requesting to save set value (Y02) must be ON/OFF.
4) Set value is stored in EEPROM and is operated by previous set value when power is turned ON/OFF.

8.7.6.9

Error code (Buffer memory address "31"~"38")

1) Error code detected by RTD module is stored.
2) *indicates 1~3.
3) Error is maintained before it is cleared or power is turned OFF. If another error occurs before previous
error is not cleared, newly generated error is ignored.
4) Error code is decimal number.

If A and B are short circuited

PLC-S(CM3)

1641

If A or B is short circuited.

If b or A and B is short circuited

If the measured temperature exceeded maximum or minimum temperature range.

10*

System error (A/S) or 24V is not supplied to RDT module

8.7.6.10 Maximum and Minimum Temperature input value (Buffer memory address "41"~"48",
"51"~"58")

1) Input maximum and minimum temperature that user wants.
2) In order for maximum or minimum set value to be effective, make sure to set corresponding bit for
temperature SET data (Address “49”) for set channel to 1 and turn the request (Y02) for storing set value
ON/OFF.
3) For Maximum and Minimum setting Error, if minimum value inputted by user is larger than maximum
value, bit for corresponding channel becomes 1.
4) Set value is stored in EEPROM and is operated by previous set value when power is turned ON/OFF.
5) If maximum value is smaller than minimum value, error occurs.

8.7.6.11 Maximum and Minimum Scale setting data (buffer memory address "49")

CH CH CH CH
.4

.1
1: Setting Enable
0: Setting Disable

1. In case that Scale temperature unit is Disable, the Scale values of PT100, JPT100 and PT1000 are set as
200

~ 600 .

2. In case that Scale temperature unit is Disable, the Scale values of NI1000_DIN and NI1000_TCR are set
as -50

~ 160 .

8.7.6.12 Maximum and Minimum Set error (buffer memory address "50")

CH CH CH CH
.4

.1
1: Setting
error
0: No error

1. If maximum value is smaller than minimum value, error occurs.
2. In case of PT100, JPT100 and PT1000, error occurs if Minimum value is over -200 or Maximum value is
over 600.
3. In case of NI1000_DIN and NI1000_TCR, error occurs if Minimum value is over -50 or Maximum value is
over 160.

1642

CIMON-PLC

8.7.6.13 CH1-CH4 average time / filter coefficient (buffer memory address "59"~"62")

1) It stores filter coefficient set value and average time set value.
2) Average time set value for 1 BYTE below 1 WORD: 1~255 (sec.)
3) Filter coefficient set value for upper 1BYTE: 0~70%
4) When filter function is not used, set the value to 0

If converted temperature has severe variations due to external noise, set this.
Width for variations for converted temperature is limited before it is stored in buffer
memory.
Range of setting value: 0 ~ 70 %
Example) If temperature is changed as shown in following figure, it is a value that is actually
stored in buffer memory.
Conversion temp. value

10 %

14.5

13.2

9.4

13.5

12.2

9.3

5.4

14.0

70 %

11.5

11.1

12.0

11.1

9.3

11.0

Digital filter value

Current value = current value + (previous value – current value) * filter coefficient (%) / 100

8.7.7

RTD module setting in CICON
If you click [Tool] -> [Special module Setup] -> [RTD Module] in CICON, [RTD Module Setup] window
appears as below.
This automatically displays the base and slot where RTD card is installed in the connected PLC. You can
also double click corresponding RTD card after you read card information from project window to display
following set window.

PLC-S(CM3)

· Channel Setup
· RTD Module Status

8.7.7.1

Channel Setup

If you double click channel or click “Setup”, you can see “Channel Setup” as below picture

1643

1644

CIMON-PLC

1 RTD Type : PT100, JPT100, PT1000, NI1000
2 Digital Value Range : -192~16191, -8192~8191, 0~16000, -8000~8000
3 Digital Filter : 0~70%
4 Average: 1~255 sec.
- After setting, click “OK” to save setting value.

PLC-S(CM3)

1645

- If you select whole channels by mouse as below and click “Setup”, you can set all channels at once

1646

CIMON-PLC

In order to run RTD module with setting value, click “Write”
“Set value is written to PLC.” appears on the screen.
Set values are recorded at EEPROM. Therefore, conversion is carried out by current set values even power
is On/Off
If you click “Read”, CICON reads setting value from RTD module.

8.7.7.2

RTD Module Status

You can check firmware version of RTD module, Error code and Scale if you click “Status”
If Scale Min. and Scale Max. are set as Disable, the setting is basic standard which converts -200 ~ 600
to digital conversion value 0(-8000) ~16000(8000).

1 If you click “Scale Setup” after selecting channel, below windows appears

PLC-S(CM3)

1647

If you want to change maximum and minimum temperatures, select scaling and set temperature when digital
value is 0 and 16000. Scale set value is stored at EEPROM. Therefore, this module keeps previous value
even if power is turned OFF/ON.

8.7.8

Trouble shooting
RUN LED is blinking every 0.3 second
RUN LED is blinking every 0.5 second and temperature value is not changed
LED is blinking every 0.3 second temperature is stopped at around -250 (or -50 )

8.7.8.1

RUN LED is blinking every 0.3 second

Check error code in RTD module status window from CICON.
If there is short circuit (error code: 1) or temperature exceeds measurement temperature range (error code
4), error code is generated. Following picture indicates a case that No.1 channel is under short circuit of A
and B.

1648

CIMON-PLC

Refer to 10.6.2 (9) Error code.

8.7.8.2

RUN LED is blinking every 0.5 second and temperature value is not changed

RTD module is corrected for its measurement circuit before it is delivered from factory. In this case, the
module uses Y***5. Check if Y***5 bit for the module is set in CICON memory monitor and if it is already set,
then check if this bit is used through scan program or communication..

8.7.8.3

LED is blinking every 0.3 second temperature is stopped at around -250 (or -50 )

If RDT module is not connected with power 24V, this error occurs.
Connect 24V power at the bottom of RTD module to solve this problem.

8.8

PLCS TC Module : SP04ETO
TC conversion module is a module that measure temperature from thermocouple (K, J, E, T, B, R, S, and N)
and converts it into temperature value and signed 14 bit of digital value.

Contents :
· Overview
· Specification
· Characteristic of thermocouple temperature conversion
· Functions
· I/O signal for CPU
· Buffer Memory

PLC-S(CM3)

1649

· TC module setting in CICON
· Trouble shooting
· Thermistor Calibration
· Installation and Wiring

8.8.1

Overview
· Features
· Understanding concept

8.8.1.1

Features

1) CM3-SP04ETO is a TC module which directly connects 8 thermocouples (K, J, E, T, B, R, S, and N) to
thermocouple input module and converts temperature ( , ) by the first decimal digit and outputs digital
values of 0~16000
2) CM3-SP04ETO is used to convert temperature data into singed 14bit of binary data for digital value. This
module converts minimum and maximum value into 0~16000(-8000~8000)
3) Temperatures indicate minimum -50 and maximum +50 and digital value is expressed as
-192~16191(-8192~8191)
4) If a user set minimum and maximum temperature, this module converts the minimum value to 0(-8000)
and the maximum value to 16000(8000)
5) This module has a function to detect thermocouple, short circuit in cable and exceeding of measurement
range for each channel.
6) This module has 4 channels to connect thermocouples.
7) There is no limitation for number of TC modules in one base.
8) Reference Junction Compensation (RJC) is automatically performed by temperature sensor attached to
terminal.

1650

8.8.1.2

CIMON-PLC

Understanding concept

Analog Amount - A
Consecutively changing amounts such as voltage, current, temperature, speed, pressure and flow rate are
called Analog amount. Temperature, for example, is consecutively changing by time as shown in Picture 1.1.
However, because this consecutively changing amount can’t be directly inputted to PLC, thermocouple input
module makes it possible to convert temperature into digital amount for PLC.

Digital Amount - D
Non-consecutively changing amount like numbers such as 0, 1, 2 and 3 is called Digital amount. The signal
ON and OFF is expressed by digital amount of 0 and 1. BCD value and binary value are also Digital
amount.

Compensating cable
This is a cable to compensate deviation (temperature variations) due to distance for thermocouple input
module: This shows almost the same thermo-electrical characteristics in temperature of -20~90 for G
Type and 0~150

for H Type.

Thermocouple
It is a temperature sensor consisting of 2 different metals attached and uses thermoelectric effect which
makes thermoelectricity flow by generating electromotive force due to difference of temperature between
both contact points. The strength of electromotive force is determined by types of attached metals and
temperature for both contact points but it is not affected by shape, dimension and temperature variation of
metals.

PLC-S(CM3)

1651

Temperature conversion characteristic
Temperature conversion to thermocouple input has non-linear characteristics.
This module converts the thermocouple input with non-linear characteristics into A/D and outputs the
temperature conversion that is linearly treated.

Disconnection detection function
When Disconnection occurs between a thermocouple/parts of compensating cable and module, internal
disconnection detection circuit detects short circuit by identifying larger voltage than measurement range.

RJC (Reference Junction Compensation)
Because sensors for various types of thermocouple output voltage corresponding to differences in
temperature between both ends, actual temperature is measured in a way that a temperature from sensor is
added to current temperature in PLC.
Currently, SP04ETO module performs reference junction compensation (RJC) using by Thermistor.

8.8.2

Specification
· General specification
· Performance Specification
· Dimension

8.8.2.1

General specification

NO
1
2
3
4

Items

Specification

Operating

standards

-10 ~ +65

temp.
Storage

-25 ~ +80

temp.
Operating

5 ~ 95%RH, Non-condensing

humidity
Storage

5 ~ 95%RH, Non-condensing

humidity

For discontinuous vibration
5

Vibration

Frequency

Acceleration

Amplitude

Numbers

10=f < 57Hz

0.075mm

Each 10 times in X,Y,Z

IEC61131-2

1652

CIMON-PLC

57= f < 150 Hz

9.8m/s2

{1G}

For continuous vibration
Frequency

Acceleration

Amplitude

10=f < 57Hz

0.035mm

57= f < 150 Hz

4.9m/s2 {1G}

-Max. impact acceleration : 147 m/s2
6

directions

{15G}

Shocks - Authorized time : 11ms
- Pulse wave : Sign half-wave pulse (Each 3 times in X,Y,Z directions)
Square wave
impulse noise

±2000V

Electrostatic

KDT standard

Voltage : 4KV(contact discharging)

discharging
Radiated
electromagnetic
7

Noise

IEC61131-2

IEC61131-2
IEC1000-4-2
IEC1131-2

27 ~ 500 MHz. 10 V/m

IEC1000-4-3

field noise
Digital I/O
Class

Fast transient /

Power

Digital I/O

module

(24V or more)

2KV

1KV

Burst noise

(24V or less)
Analog I/O
communication

IEC1131-2
IEC1000-4-4

interface
Voltage
8
9

Ambient
conditions
Operating

0.25KV

No corrosive gas or dust

2,000m or less
height
10 Pollution 2 or less
Cooling
11
Natural air cooling
type

8.8.2.2

Performance Specification

Items
Type of input
sensors

Thermocouple K, J, E, T, B, R, S, N type

Digital conversion value : 0 ~ 16000(-8000~8000),
Digital output

Temp. conversion value :measured temp. range of thermocouple(down to one
decimal place X 10)

PLC-S(CM3)

1653

Range of input
temperature

RJC

Auto compensation by RJC

Disconnection
detection
Accuracy
Max. conversion
speed
Input channel No.
Insulation
Connection
Terminal

Detection for each channel
[(Full Scale)x0.3%+1oC(RJC tolerance)]
100ms / 1 channel
4Channel / Module
Photo-coupler insulation : between input terminal and PLC (No insulation between
channels)
8-point terminal block

+5V

60 mA

+15V

30 mA

-15V

10 mA

Consum
ption
current

8.8.2.3

Dimension
(Unit: mm)

1654

CIMON-PLC

PLC-S(CM3)

8.8.3

1655

Characteristic of thermocouple temperature conversion

1. Electromotive force in thermocouple is varying depending on changes in temperature near both ends of
each thermocouple.
2. TC input module performs linearization for electromotive force input from thermocouple which is
non-linear as shown in above figure.
3. The temperature is stored in internal memory of TC input module as a converted temperature.
4. It uses converted temperature or digital converted value stored in buffer memory in the module using
FROM command in scan program.

8.8.4

Functions
TC conversion Enable / Disable
1. User can set TC conversion Enable or Disable for each input channel.
2. User can make conversion time short by setting Disable to unused channels.
Temperature detection value
1. It saves a converted Celsius and Fahrenheit into memory. (down to one decimal point X 10)
2. It converts the converted temperature into 0~16000, -192 ~ 16191, -8000 ~ 8000, -8192 ~ 8191.
Information for operation channels
1. Information for channels under normal temperature conversion is displayed for each channel.

1656

CIMON-PLC

2. If there is any disconnection error in TC conversion Enable channel, its bit becomes 0.
3. The bit for Disable channel is 0.
Disconnection detection function
1. It has a function to detect the disconnection of thermocouple and cable for each channel.
2. If disconnection is detected, TC module holds temperature value before disconnection without further
conversion. In this case, error code is displayed while LED flickers every 0.2 second.
Digital output setting
User can select 0~16000, -192 ~ 16191, -8000 ~ 8000 and -8192 ~ 8191 as a range for saving digital
output value to buffer memory.
Maximum/Minimum temperature setting
TC module converts allowable temperature for each thermocouple into digital value of
0(-8000)~16000(8000). This maximum and minimum value could be set by user. If a user inputs
maximum and minimum value, TC module convert the minimum value into 0(-8000) and maximum
value into 16000(8000).
Maximum Sample Temperature setting
This function is used to detects wrong temperature if previous sample temperature and current sample
temperature are higher than a set temperature. User can set range of temperature from 3 to 1000.
If temperature is not updated under an environment with rapidly changing temperature, user should set
higher temperature than current set value.

8.8.5

I/O signal for CPU

Input
X20
X21
X22
X23
X24
X25
X26
X27
X28
X29
X2A
X2B
X2C
X2D
X2E
X2F

Signal direction(CPU <- TC)
Signal
TC module Ready
TC conversion completion flag
Set value saving completion flag

Reserved

TC module Error flag

Output
Y20
Y21
Y22
Y23
Y24
Y25
Y26
Y27
Y28
Y29
Y2A
Y2B
Y2C
Y2D
Y2E
Y2F

Signal direction(CPU -> TC)
Signal
Reserved
Requesting to save set value

Reserved

Request error clear

PLC-S(CM3)

1657

* (I/O signal number appears as above when TC module is installed at the 1st slot)
· Input Signal
· Output Signal

8.8.5.1

Input Signal
Device
NO.
X20

Name of Signals
TC Module Ready

Description
(1) This signal is turned On at the time TC conversion is completely ready
when CPU power is on. TC conversion is performed.
(1) If any conversion Enable channel is not converted more than 1 time
while PLC power is turned on and its initialization is completed, this flag is

X21

TC conversion
completion flag

OFF (in case that the conversion value is not stored at buffer). If all
conversion Enable channel finished to be converted more than 1 time, this
flag is On.
(2) If set value is changed, this flag is cleared.
(1) This flag is used for interlock to turn ON/OFF request of strong set
value when TC conversion Enable/Disable is changed.
(2) If set value storing completion flag is OFF, TC conversion process is
not performed.

X22

Set value saving
completion flag

(1) This flag is turned On when error occurs in module.
(2) Error code clear turns the request error clear ON(Y2F)
X2F

TC module error flag

1658

8.8.5.2

CIMON-PLC

Output signal
device

Name of signal

NO.

Descriptions
(1) This signal is turned ON when TC conversion Enable/Disable, TC

Request to save set

Y22

type and etc. are stored

value
(2) Refer to Y22(Requesting to save set value) for timing of ON/OFF

8.8.6

Buffer Memory
Address
Hex.

Address
Details

R/W

Details
Hex.

Dec.

R/W

TC conversion Enable/Disable

R/W

23H

CH.5 Error code

CH.1 Temp detection value(°C)

24H

CH.6 Error code

CH.2 Temp detection value(°C)

25H

CH.7 Error code

CH.3 Temp detection value(°C)

26H

CH.8 Error code

CH.4 Temp detection value(°C)

27H

Reserved

CH.5 Temp detection value(°C)

28H

Request calibration

R/W

CH.6 Temp detection value(°C)

29H

CH.1 Max. temp input value

R/W

CH.7 Temp detection value(°C)

2AH

CH.2 Max. temp input value

R/W

CH.8 Temp detection value(°C)

2BH

CH.3 Max. temp input value

R/W

CH.1~CH.4thermocouple type

R/W

2CH

CH.4 Max. temp input value

R/W

2DH

CH.5 Max. temp input value

R/W

setting
AH

Digital output setting 1

CH.1 Temp detection value (°F)

2EH

CH.6 Max. temp input value

R/W

CH.2 Temp detection value (°F)

2FH

CH.7 Max. temp input value

R/W

CH.3 Temp detection value (°F)

30H

CH.8 Max. temp input value

R/W

CH.4 Temp detection value (°F)

31H

Assigning temp. setting data

R/W

PLC-S(CM3)

1659

CH.5 Temp detection value (°F)

32H

Error in Temp. setting

10H

CH.6 Temp detection value (°F)

33H

CH.1 Min. temp input value

R/W

11H

CH.7 Temp detection value (°F)

34H

CH.2 Min. temp input value

R/W

12H

CH.8 Temp detection value (°F)

35H

CH.3 Min. temp input value

R/W

13H

36H

CH.4 Min. temp input value

R/W

14H

Assigning type setup data

R/W

37H

CH.5 Min. temp input value

R/W

15H

CH.1 Digital conversion value

38H

CH.6 Min. temp input value

R/W

16H

CH.2 Digital conversion value

39H

CH.7 Min. temp input value

R/W

17H

CH.3 Digital conversion value

3AH

CH.8 Min. temp input value

R/W

18H

CH.4 Digital conversion value

3B-3

19H

CH.5 Digital conversion value

3FH

OS Version

1AH

CH.6 Digital conversion value

40H

CH.1 Max. Temp. in changing

1BH

CH.7 Digital conversion value

41H

1CH

CH.8 Digital conversion value

42H

1DH

Digital output setting 2

R/W

43H

1EH

Assigning Average Process

R/W

44H

1FH

45H

20H

46H

21H

47H

22H

Information for operation
Channel

CH.1 Error code

CH.2 Error code

CH.3 Error code

CH.4 Error code

59-62

CH1-CH4 average time/filter
coefficient setting

CH.2 Max. Temp. in
changing
CH.3 Max. Temp. in
changing
CH.4 Max. Temp. in
changing
CH.5 Max. Temp. in
changing
CH.6 Max. Temp. in
changing
CH.7 Max. Temp. in
changing
CH.8 Max. Temp. in
changing

R/W
R
R/W
R/W

R/W

** Buffer memory, which is a memory in module, stores digital values that are converted from input signal of
thermocouple and records current operations for the module
Temperature conversion value or digital conversion value is stored to CPU memory using FROM command
and they are used for programs.
** Each data is 2 byte of data.
** 4 channel modules do not use buffer memory of CH.5 ~ CH.8
** R/W indicates whether or not read/write is possible from PLC
R : read

W : write

1660

8.8.6.1

CIMON-PLC

TC conversion Enable/Disable setting(Buffer memory address "0")

1) Set up TC conversion Enable or Disable for each channel.
2) The initial value is TC conversion Disable.
3) In order to save set value to module, “requesting to save set value(Y02) must be ON/OFF.
4) Set value is stored in EEPROM and is operated by previous set value when power is turned ON/OFF
B15
0

b14
0

b13
0

b12
0

b11

b10

b9
0

b8
0

b7
0

b6
0

b5
0

CH CH CH CH
.4

.1
1 : TC conversion Enable

b4~b15 of TC04A is fixed at “0”

0 : TC conversion

Disable

8.8.6.2

Temperature detection value (Buffer memory address "1"~"8")

1) This stores temperature value which is detected by TC conversion
The value stored in the memory is actual temperature(first decimal digit) x 10
2) Range of temperature conversion
Measured temp. range (oC)

Max. range of measured temperature(oC)

-200.0~1200.0

-250.0~1250.0

-200.0~800.0

-250.0~850.0

-200.0~600.0

-250.0~650.0

-200.0~400.0

-250.0~450.0

400.0~1800.0

350.0~1850.0

0.0~1750.0

-50.0~1800.0

0.0~1750.0

-50.0~1800.0

-200.0~1250.0

-250.0~1300.0

Thermocouple

3) If value is out of range, it is measured by minimum -50 and maximum +50 .

8.8.6.3

TC type setting (Buffer memory address "9")

1. In order to make set types of TC available, make sure to set the bit for “Assigning type setup data (Buffer
memory “20”) to 1 and make “requesting to save set value (Y02)” ON/OFF.
2. Initial value is set to “K” type.
3. In order to save set value to module, “requesting to save set value (Y02) must be ON/OFF.
4. Set value is stored in EEPROM and is operated by previous set value when power is turned ON/OFF
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

PLC-S(CM3)

1661

- Set value for each thermocouple type
TC type

Set value

b15 ~ b12

b11 ~ b8

b7 ~ b4

Buffer memory address "9"

8.8.6.4

b3 ~ b0

CH.4

CH.3

CH.2

CH.1

Temperature detection value, °F (Buffer memory address "11" ~ "18")

1. Temperature in Fahrenheit converted by TC module is stored.
2. In this case, actual temperature (the first decimal digit) * 10 is stored.

8.8.6.5

Information for operation channel (Buffer memory address "19")

8.8.6.6

Digital conversion value (Buffer memory address "21"~"28")

1. The temperature measured by TC is stored as digital value of 0(-8000) and 16000(8000). If the
temperature is out of this range, it is stored as maximum -192(-8192) ~ 16191(8191)
2. If user input Maximum and minimum value and minimum temperature is measured, 0(-8000) will be
stored. If maximum temperature is measured, 16000(8000) will be stored.

8.8.6.7

Digital output setting (Buffer memory address "10,29")

1. Select 0~16000,-8000~8000,-192~16191,-8192~8191 as digital output value.
If -192 ~ 16191 or -8192 ~ 8191 is selected, the module displays minimum and maximum measured
temperature for each thermocouple by 0~16000 or -8000~8000 and if input values exceed this range, it
displays -192 ~ 16191, -8192 ~ 8191.
2. Initial value is set to -192 ~ 16191
3. In order to save set value to module, “requesting to save set value (Y02) must be ON/OFF.
4. Set value is stored in EEPROM and is operated by previous set value when power is turned ON/OFF

Buffer memory

CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH

1662

CIMON-PLC

address"10"

Buffer memory

CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH

address"29"

8.8.6.8

Address 10

Address 29

Digital output value

-192 ~ 16191

-8192 ~ 8191

0 ~ 16000

-8000 ~ 8000

6
.6

3
.3

2
.2

1
.1

Assigning average process (Buffer memory address "30")

1. Set average process of TC module Enable/disable.
2. The initial value is TC average process Disable for whole channels.
3. In order to save set value to module, “requesting to save set value (Y02) must be ON/OFF.
4. Set value is stored in EEPROM and is operated by previous set value when power is turned ON/OFF
b15
0

b14
0

b13
0

b12
0

b11

b10

b9
0

b8
0

b7
0

b6
0

b5
0

CH CH CH CH
.4

1 : Average process Enable
0 : Average process Disable

8.8.6.9

Error code (Buffer memory address "31~38")

1. Error code detected by TC module is stored
2. Error code is maintained until a user clear it or power is turned OFF.
3. Error is maintained before it is cleared or power is turned OFF. If another error occurs before previous
error is not cleared, newly generated error is ignored
4. tindicates 1~3
5. Error code is decimal number.

disconnection

RJC error

in case that wrong TC type is selected

Measured temperature is out of maximum or minimum temperature range.

10t

System error (A/S needed)

PLC-S(CM3)

1663

8.8.6.10 Maximum Temperature input value (Buffer memory address "41~48")

Maximum and Minimum temperature SET data (Buffer memory address "49")
Maximum and Minimum setting Error (Buffer memory address "50")
Minimum temperature input value (Buffer memory address "51"~"58")
1. Input maximum and minimum temperature that user wants.
2. In order for maximum or minimum set value to be effective, make sure to set corresponding bit for
temperature SET data (Address “49”) for set channel to 1 and turn the request (Y02) for storing set value
ON/OFF.
3. For Maximum and Minimum setting Error, if minimum value inputted by user is larger than maximum
value, bit for corresponding channel becomes 1
4. Initial value is set to maximum and minimum value for temperature measurement range.
5. Because maximum and minimum variations that are inputted by user is stored in EEPROM, the module is
operated by previous set value even after power is turned ON and then OFF
6. If maximum value is smaller than minimum value, error occurs.

8.8.6.11 CH1-CH4 average time / filter coefficient (buffer memory address "49~52")

1) It stores filter coefficient set value and average time set value.
2) Average time set value for 1 BYTE below 1 WORD: 1~255
Filter coefficient set value for upper 1BYTE: %

0~70

When filter function is not used, set the value to 0

If converted temperature has severe variations due to external noise, set this.
Width for variations for converted temperature is limited before it is stored in buffer
memory.

1664

CIMON-PLC

Range of setting value : 0 ~ 70 %
Example) If temperature is changed as shown in following figure, it is a value that is actually
stored in buffer memory.
Conversion temp. value

10 %

14.5

13.2

9.4

13.5

12.2

9.3

5.4

14.0

70 %

11.5

11.1

12.0

11.1

9.3

11.0

Digital filter value

Current value = current value + (previous value – current value) * filter coefficient (%) / 100

8.8.6.12 Max. Temp. in changing (Buffer memory address "64~71")

1. This sets difference between previous measurement and current measurement for each channel and
stores them.
2. It sets up to 3~1000 (Initial value: 10)
3. Low set value may cause slow response but stability is high. Contrary to this, high set value gives rapid
response but its stability may be low.
4. If temperature is not updated under rapidly changing temperature, use higher temperature than current
set value.

8.8.7

TC module setting in CICON
If you click "Tool" -> "Special module Setup -> "TC Module" in CICON, "TC Module Setup" window appears
as below.
This automatically displays the base and slot where TC card is installed in the connected PLC. You can also
double click corresponding TC card after you read card information from project window to display following
set window.

PLC-S(CM3)

· Channel Setup
· TC Module Status

8.8.7.1

Channel Setup

If you double click channel or click “Setup”, you can see “Channel Setup” as below picture.

1. TC Type : K, J, E, T, R, S, B, N
2. Digital value range : -192~16191, -8192~8191, 0~16000, -8000~8000
3. Digital Filter : 0~70%
4. Average : 1~255
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

1665

1666

CIMON-PLC

After setting, click “OK” to save setting value.

If you select whole channels by mouse as below and click “Setup”, you can set all channels at once

In order to run TC module with setting value, click “Write”
“Set value is written to PLC.” Appears on the screen.
Set values are recorded at EEPROM. Therefore, conversion is carried out by current set values even power
is On/Off
If you click “Read”, CICON reads setting value from TC module.

PLC-S(CM3)

8.8.7.2

TC Module Status

You can check firmware version of TC module and Error code if you click “Status”

If you click “Scale Setup” after selecting channel, below windows appears

1667

1668

CIMON-PLC

If digital scale is not set, this module converts maximum and minimum temperature for each thermocouple
into 0(-8000) ~16000(8000). If you want to change maximum and minimum temperatures, select scaling and
set temperature when digital value is 0 and 1600. Scale set value is stored at EEPROM. Therefore, this
module keeps previous value even if power is turned OFF/ON.

8.8.8

Trouble shooting
· RUN LED is blinking every 0.2 second.
· RUN LED is blinking every 0.2 second and Error code No.2 is displayed.

8.8.8.1

RUN LED is blinking every 0.2 second.

Check error code in TC module status window from CICON
If there is short circuit (error code: 1) or temperature exceeds measurement temperature range (error code
4), error code is generated. Following picture indicates a case that No.1 channel is under short circuit.

PLC-S(CM3)

1669

Refer to Error code

8.8.8.2

RUN LED is blinking every 0.2 second and Error code No.2 is displayed.

TC module uses ±15V in analog calculation area. If voltage is not imposed on this module, this error occurs.

8.8.9

Thermistor Calibration
Click “Inter. Temp.”

1670

CIMON-PLC

Write internal temperature

Click “OK” to save set value and apply it

PLC-S(CM3)

1671

If user wants to delete the set value and apply other temperature value, click “Delete”

*Cautions
- If user set internal temperature value, temperature of inner thermistor is changed which means exact TC
temperature will not be shown. Therefore, do not use this function except test. Once internal temperature
function is used, user has to delete its value so that function of thermistor works properly.

8.8.10 Installation and Wiring
· Installation
· Wiring

8.8.10.1 Installation

Installation environment
Environmental conditions
Install the module in control panel which is water proof and anti-vibration
Install the module where there is no persistent shock and vibration.
Install the module where it is not exposed to direct sun ray
Install this module where there is no condensation due to rapid temperature
Install this module where surrounding temperature is maintained at -10 ~ +65 .
Installation procedure

1672

CIMON-PLC

Make sure that residues from machining screw hole or wiring are not inserted into PLC
Install the module where operation is easy to be performed.
Do not install the module in devices with high voltage and same panel.
Keep more than 50 mm of gap from duct and surrounding module.
Put to earth where surrounding noise environment is good.

8.8.10.2 Wiring

Channel

8.9

A Terminal

B Terminal

Ch 1

Terminal 1

Terminal 2

Ch 2

Terminal 3

Terminal 4

Ch 3

Terminal 5

Terminal 6

Ch 4

Terminal 7

Terminal 8

PLCS AD MUX Module : SP04EAM
Contents :
· Summary
· Performance Specifications
· Function
· Input and Output Flags for the CPU
· Buffer Memory
· MUX Module Settings in CICON
· Application Program and Example
· Installation and Wiring

8.9.1

Summary
Analog Mux module receives analog values from 4 channels and outputs the same values to one port at a
time.

PLC-S(CM3)

1673

1) Desired channels can be selected to be enabled or disabled and get operation status.
2) Different relay ON time can be set by each channel from 0.1 to 1000.0 seconds range.
3) Relay count values can be checked for life expectancy.
4) Easy control with Auto/Manual mode.
5) Power LED blinks by 0.5 second interval when there’s an error with CPU communication.
6) It is not suitable for current signal use since this module switches analog signals repeatedly.

8.9.2

Performance Specifications

Performance Specifications :
· General Standards
· Performance Specifications
· Appearance and Dimensions

8.9.2.1

General Standards

Item

Specification

Operating Temp.

-10 ~ +65

Storage Temp.

-25 ~ +80

Operating Humidity

5 ~ 95%RH (Non-condensing)

Storage Humidity

5 ~ 95%RH (Non-condensing)

Standard

For Intermittent Vibrations
Frequency

Acceleration

Amplitude

10= f <57Hz

0.075mm

57= f <150 Hz

9.8m/s2 {1G}

Number

Vibration
For Continuous Vibrations

20 times each in

Frequency

Acceleration

Amplitude

10=f < 57Hz

0.035mm

57= f < 150 Hz

4.9m/s2 {1G}

- Maximum Impact Acceleration : 147 m/s2
Shock

{15G}

- Duration Time: 11ms
- Pulse Wave : Sign Half-Wave Pulse (3 times each in X,Y,Z )

IEC61131-2

X,Y,Z

IEC61131-2

1674

CIMON-PLC

Square Wave

KDT

±2000V

Impulse Noise
Electrostatic

Standard

Voltage : 4KV (Contact discharging)

Discharging
Radiated
Electromagnet
Noise

Transient/

Power Module

Burst Noise

Voltage
Environment

8.9.2.2

(24V or
more)

2KV

1KV

Digital I/O,
(24V or less)

IEC1131-2

Analog I/O,

IEC1000-4-4

Comm. Interface
0.25KV

Corrosive Gas Free and Excessive Dust Free Environment

Altitude

Less than 2,000m

Pollution Degree

Less than level 2

Cooling Type

IEC1000-4-3

ic Field Noise

Digital I/O

IEC1000-4-2
IEC1131-2

27 ~ 500 MHz. 10 V/m

Fast

IEC61131-2

Natural Air Cooling

Performance Specifications

Item
Connectable Analog
Inputs

Standard

Voltage, TC and RTD sensor

Max/Min ON time

0.1 sec / 1000.0 sec

Analog Input Pts

4 channels / 1 module

Insulation Method

Relay

Number of Ports

Input: 12 pts, Ouput: 3 pts

Relay Life
Expectancy

Number of Operation of 10^8

PLC-S(CM3)

8.9.2.3

Appearance and Dimensions

8.9.3

Function
Channel Enable / Disable
1. The user can select enable or disable for each channel .
2. Channel conversion time can be reduced by disabling non-used channels.

1675

1676

CIMON-PLC

Relay ON Time Settings
1. Possible to set-up different relay ON time for each channel.
2. Anywhere from 0.1 to 1000.0 sec range can be set.
Operation Status
1. Indicates currently used channel information.
2. Bit for disabled channels shows as 0.
Relay Count Values
1. Relay count values are shown for each channel.
2. By looking at relay count values, the user can check the life expectancy of the relay.
3. Relay count information can be reset.
Auto/Manual Mode
1. Auto/Manual mode set-up for flexible settings of channel conversion time.
Error Detection
1. Error detecting function to monitor any problems in the module.
2. The error code can be reset.

8.9.4

Input and Output Flags for the CPU
Flag Direction (CPU ? MUX Module)
Input

Flag

X20

Flag Direction (CPU ? MUX Module)
Output

Flag

Y20

X21

MUX Channel Change Completed

Y21

Mux Channel Change Request

X22

Settings Save Completed

Y22

Settings Save Request

X23

1CH Relay Open Predict

Y23

1CH stoppage Request

X24

2CH Relay Open Predict

Y24

2CH stoppage Request

X25

3CH Relay Open Predict

Y25

3CH stoppage Request

X26

4CH Relay Open Predict

Y26

4CH stoppage Request

X27

1CH Relay Activate

Y27

X28

2CH Relay Activate

Y28

X29

3CH Relay Activate

Y29

X2A

4CH Relay Activate

Y2A

X2B

1CH Relay Count Reset Completed

Y2B

1CH Relay Count Reset Request

X2C

2CH Relay Count Reset Completed

Y2C

2CH Relay Count Reset Request

X2D

3CH Relay Count Reset Completed

Y2D

3CH Relay Count Reset Request

X2E

4CH Relay Count Reset Completed

Y2E

4CH Relay Count Reset Request

X2F

Module Error

Y2F

Error Clear Request

** Note that I/O flags shown above are applied when the MUX module is installed in the first slot

PLC-S(CM3)

1677

· Input Flag
· Output Flag

8.9.4.1

Input Flag

Device
NO.

Flag

Contents
(1) When in manual mode to ON/OFF the channel change request (Y21)

MUX Channel
X21

Change Completed
Flag

(1) When enabling/disabling a channel and ON/OFF the settings save
request (Y22)
(2) When settings save completed flag is OFF, MUX conversion process is
not activated
(In case of settings save request (Y22) is ON)
X22

MUX Settings Save
Completed Flag

(1) The flag get SET 100ms before the relay opens
(2) When the relay opens, it RESETS

X23~X26

Relay Open Predict
Flag

(1) ON when the relay closes.
X27~X2A

Relay Active Flag (2) Signal timing is X23~X26
(Refer to Relay OFF Predict Flag)

1678

CIMON-PLC

(1) Used when relay count reset request (Y2B~Y2E) is ON/OFF

X2B~X2E

Relay Count Reset
Completed Flag

(1) ON when there’s an error.
(2) To clear an error, error clear request (Y2F) should be ON.
Clear an error from CICON

X2F

8.9.4.2

Module Error Flag

Output Flag

Device
NO.

Y21

Y22

Flag

MUX Channel
Change Request

Contents
(1) When in MANUAL mode (Buffer memory “9”)
Turn ON when channel change is needed
(2) Refer to X21 (Channel Change Completed) for flag timing

Settings Save

(1) Turn ON to save all the settings on the buffer memory.

Request

(2) Refer to X22(Settings Save Completed) for flag timing.
(1) Turn ON when stoppage is required for enabled channels (buffer

Y23~Y26

Stoppage Request memory “0”)
(2) In OFF state, it is switched back to operating status.

Y2B~Y2
E

Y2F

Relay Count Reset (1) Turn ON when Relay count reset is required
Request
Error Clear
Request

(2) Refer to X0B~X0E(Count Reset Completed) for flag timing
(1) Turn ON when Error clear is needed
(2) Refer to X0F (Error Flag) for flag timing

PLC-S(CM3)

8.9.5

1679

Buffer Memory
Address

Contents

R/W

Hex

Dec

MUX Channel Enable / Disable

CH.1 Relay Count High

CH.1 Relay Count Low

CH.2 Relay Count High

CH.2 Relay Count Low

CH.3 Relay Count High

CH.3 Relay Count Low

CH.4 Relay Count High

CH.4 Relay Count Low

Auto/Manual Mode

Operation Status

CH.1 ON time setting value

R/W

CH.2 ON time setting value

R/W

CH.3 ON time setting value

R/W

CH.4 ON time setting value

R/W

Error Code

10H

11H

12H

13H

14H

OS Version

R/W

R
R/W
R

** Each data is 2 bytes.
** R/W shows whether it’s readable or writable from the PLC
R : Readable

8.9.5.1

W : Writable

Channel enable / disable setting (Buffer memory address "0")

1. Enable or disable by each channel
2. Initial setting is set to disable all the channels.
3. Settings save request flag (Y22) should be ON and then OFF to save the settings on the module.
4. Set values get saved on a flash memory of the module so when the power restarts, it contains the latest
saved settings.

1680

8.9.5.2

CIMON-PLC

Relay Count Value (Buffer memory address "1"~"8")

1. Display the relay’s number of operation by each channel.
2. Life expectancy of a relay is 10^8 operations.

8.9.5.3

Auto/Manual Mode Settings ( Buffer memory address "9")

1. Initial setting is set to Auto Mode.
2. Settings save request flag (Y22) should be ON and then OFF to save the settings on the module.
3. Set values get saved on a flash memory of the module so when the power restarts, it contains the latest
saved settings.
4. Only the lowest bit (b0) is used.

8.9.5.4

Operation Status (Buffer memory address "10")

1. When the stoppage request flag (Y23 ~ Y26) is activated for an enabled channel, the bit for the channel
turns to 0.
2. The bit for Disabled channel (buffer memory address “0”) gets displayed as 0.

8.9.5.5

Relay ON Time Settings (Buffer memory address "11"~"14")

1. Relay ON Time can be set by each channel (1~10000 : 0.1~1000.0 seconds)
2. The unit is 100ms.
Ex) When 3 is inputted, Relay ON Time becomes 3 X 100ms = 300ms

8.9.5.6

Error Code (Buffer memory address "15")

1. Error code that has been detected from the Mux module gets saved.
2. High byte is for channel number, and low byte is for error code.
3. The error remains until the power is off or the user clears the error. When there’s an another error
addition to the error that hasn’t been cleared, the new error gets ignored.
4. The error code is in decimal notation.
5. Error code 5 will occur when the relay count exceed the amount of Double Word (10^8).
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

PLC-S(CM3)

1681

Ex) when channel 1 counter exceed error occurs, the error code 0x0105 (256) occurs

8.9.6

MUX Module Settings in CICON
By selecting “Analog Mux Card” of “Special Module Setup” in "Tools" menu OR by double clicking Mux Card
in the project window, a setup window pops up as below. It shows installed base/slot information
automatically.
Current setting information about the mux module shows as below

· Channel Settings

8.9.6.1

Channel Settings
If the user double clicks the channel or after selecting the channel and clicking
in the module setup window, AD MUX Channel Setup pops up as below.

1682

CIMON-PLC

1. Channel Enable/Disable: Select the check box to Enable the channel and deselect to disable.
2. Relay On time settings : 0~10000 (0.1 ~ 1000 seconds)
- Click “OK” after the set-up is complete

- Select the entire channels as below and then click

to configure the settings all at

once.

PLC-S(CM3)

Click

1683

for the Mux module to be able to operate by the configured settings.

A message “Set value was written to PLC” shows up in the message display window.
Configured values get saved in the flash memory so that even when the power restarts, the saved settings
don’t get changed.
Button reads the current values that has been set from the Mux module.

- Save after enabling the entire channels

1684

CIMON-PLC

- Select the entire channels and click

- Click

to reset the counter.

on the settings windows to have a pop-up window as follows

Select “Yes” button to change to the manual mode and the button on the right hand side changes to

PLC-S(CM3)

8.9.7

1685

Application Program and Example
To use a Mux module, the desired channels should be enabled and the relay ON time should be set. There
are two ways for configuring the module settings.
- When configuring the settings on the RTD settings window of CICON (refer to page 6), there’s no need to
use scan program as below. However, when the modules get swapped, the settings need to be
reconfigured.
- Module settings configuration can be done by using scan program as below.
Whichever method the user chooses, the settings get saved on the internal memory and it stays even when
the power restarts.

1686

CIMON-PLC

Row 0: channels 1,2,3,4 of SP04EAM module get enabled
Row 1: channels 1,2,3,4 Relay ON time get set to 1.5 seconds
Row 2: the settings save request (Y22) gets SET
Row 3: when the settings save completed flag (X22) is SET, the settings save request (Y22) resets
-> Settings Saved
· Initialization

8.9.7.1

Initialization

Configuration
- Mount CM3-SP32MDT, CM3-SP04ETO, CM3-SP04EAM in order.

Initial Settings
- CM3-SP04ETO
Channel Used

Channel 1

TC Sensor Type

K TYPE

Digital Output Type

0~16000

Maximum Temperature Input Value

1000

Minimum Temperature Input Value

- CM3-SP04EAM
Channel Used

Channel 1

Channel 2

Relay ON Time

15 (x100ms)

30 (x100ms)

Program Description
1. Save the settings on the buffer memory by using TO command
2. Minimum and maximum temperature range for CM3-SP04ETO channel 1 will be 0~1000
(Minimum/Maximum value converts to digital value of 0~16000 range)
3. Set the relay ON time to 1.5 seconds for channel 1 and 3 seconds for channel 2 of CM3-SP04EAM
4. Set Settings Save Request Flag to be ON for CM3-SP04ETO, CM3-SP04EAM
5. After checking that Settings Save Completed flag is 0 for CM3-SP04ETO, CM3-SP04EAM, then turn OFF
Settings Save Request flag

PLC-S(CM3)

1687

* Modules operate by the values that are inputted by TO command in the buffer memory when turning on, off
the setting save request flag.
If the settings save request flag don’t get turned on and off, the modules operate by the previous values.
* Initial setting of the module can be done by going to “Special Module Setup” in CICON
Program

Row 0: permit SP04ETO module channel 1 conversion
Row 1: channel 1: 0~16000 digital conversion set
Row 2: channel 1: maximum temperature input value -> 1000
Row 3: channel 1: minimum temperature input value -> 0
Row 4: SP04ETO settings save request (Y22) SET
Row 5: enable SP04EAM module channel 1 and channel 2
Row 6: channel 1 RELAY ON TIME set to 1.5 seconds
Row 7: channel 2 RELAY ON TIME set to 3 seconds
Row 9: SP04EAM settings save request (Y32) SET
Row 10: SP04ETO settings save completed(X22) during falling edge, settings save request(Y22) RESET
-> TC module settings save complete

1688

CIMON-PLC

Row 11 : SP04EAM settings save complete (X32) during rising edge, settings save request (Y32) RESET
-> Mux module settings save complete
Row 12 : when channel 1 relay open signal (X33) is ON 0.1 second before channel 1 conversion, save the
TC sensor value
Row 13 : when channel 2 relay open signal (X34) is ON 0.1 second before channel 1 conversion, save
the TC sensor value
Row 14 : end

8.9.8

Installation and Wiring

Installation and Wiring :
· Installation
· Wiring

8.9.8.1

Installation

Installation Environment
- Environmental Conditions
· Please install in a dust-proof and water-proof control panel.
· Please install it where there is without any continuous shock or vibration.
· Please avoid locations that are exposed to direct sunlight.
· Please avoid locations with rapid temperature change and condensing environment.
· Please install it where the ambient temperature is -10 ~ +65 .
- Installation
· Please be careful not to let any wire scraps into the PLC during drilling or wiring.
· Please Install the PLC in an ideal position to operate
· Please do not install in the same panel as the high voltage equipment
· The distance between the duct and any other modules should be at least 50mm.
· Ground it in a location where there’s a decent ambient noise level.

Handling Precautions
· Please do not let it drop or give strong impact.
· Please do not remove the PCB from the case since it may cause a malfunction
· Please be careful not to let wire scraps to enter the module during wiring.
· Please refrain from detaching the module while the power is ON

8.9.8.2

Wiring

PLC-S(CM3)

1689

· Please don’t let the AC surge or induction noise to effect the module by connecting a separate cable
between the module’s external input signal and the alternate current.
· The wire should be selected considering the ambient temperature and the current used. The minimum
thickness of the wire should be AWG22 (0.3 mm2).
· When wiring, if the wire is in direct contact with oil, hazardous substances or devices that generate high
temperatures, it might cause a damage or malfunction.
· Please verify the polarity before applying analog input to the terminal.
· When wiring with high voltage line or power line, the malfunction or failure may cause by induced failure.
· It is not suitable for current signal use since this module switches analog signals repeatedly.

Concept Diagram

1690

CIMON-PLC

Wiring Example

PLC-S(CM3)

8.10

PLCS High-Speed Counter
Contents :
· General Specification

1691

1692

CIMON-PLC

· Counter / Preset Input Specification
· I/O Signal Connection
· Major Function
· High-Speed Counter

8.10.1 General Specification
Item
Phase
Type
Input Signal
Level
Max. Input Speed
Channel
Count Range
Counter

Counter Mode

Input Signal Mode
(configurable)
Signal Type
Function
Input Signal
Level
Type
Point
Output Signal
Function
Type
Preset Function
Other Functions

Specification
2 Phase (Phase A + Phase B) / Channel
Voltage Input (Open Collector)
DC24V
20kpps
2 Channels
Signed 32 Bit (-2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647)
Linear Count (with Carry/Borrow Flag)
Ring Count
1 Phase Low Active Input(PLS/DIR)
1 Phase High Active Input(PLC/DIR)
2 Phase 2Multiplication
2 Phase 4Multiplication
Voltage
Preset Input
DC24V
Voltage
1 Point / Channel
Compare Output (7 Compare Modes)
Relay or Open Collector
External Input Signal or Program
Counter Value Latch
Pulse Speed Measuring (time unit configurable)
RPM / PPS Measuring

8.10.2 Counter / Preset Input Specification
Item
Input Voltage
Input Current
On Min. Voltage
Off Max. Voltage

Specification
24V DC (20.4V ~ 28.8V)
4 mA
20.4V
6V

PLC-S(CM3)

1693

8.10.3 I/O Signal Connection
Allocation of I/O Signal for CM3-SP32MDT

Allocation of I/O Signal for CM3-SP16MDR
X00

Y10

X01

Y11

X02

Y12

X03

Y13

X04

Y14

X05

Y15

X06

Y16

X07

Y17

COM

I/O Signal
Pin

Input Signal (1)

Output Signal (3)

X000

Ch1 Phase A

Y010

X001

Ch1 Phase B

Y011

X002

Ch2 Phase A

Y012

X003

Ch2 Phase B

X004

Ch1 Preset Input (2)

Compare Output(3)

X005
X006

Y013
Y014
Y015

Ch2 Preset Input

Y016

X007

Y017

COM

Input Common

External Power Iput (+)

DC24V

COM

Input Common

Power Input Common (-)

COM

base on CM3-SP32MDT

1694

CIMON-PLC

1. HSC I/O signal is activated when [Counter Enable] is selected in Special program [HSC Program for
plcS]. If [Counter Enable] is not selected, general I/O signal is activated.
2. Preset Input signal is activated when [Accept Ext. Preset] is selected in Special program [HSC
Program for plcS]. If [Accept Ext. Preset] is not selected, general Input signal is activated.
3. You can assign output from Y10 to Y17 as Compare Output. Compare Output is activated when [Use
Compare Output(Y)]is selected and one of output is assigned at [Compare Output Con.]

8.10.4 Major Function

Contents :
· Counter Input Mode
· Counter Types
· Compared Output
· Counter Latch
· Revolution / Unit Time
· Preset Function

PLC-S(CM3)

1695

8.10.4.1 Counter Input mode

Counter Input mode
Group

A phase Input

1Ph.

Direction Input

2Multi.

(Low Active)

1Ph.

Direction Input

2Multi.

(High Active)

2Ph.
2Multi.
2Ph.
4Multi.

B phase Input
Pulse Input
Pulse Input

A. Pulse Input

B. Pulse Input

A. Pulse Input

B. Pulse Input

Up/Down
When A is high : Up Count
When A is low : Down Count
When A is low : Up Count
When A is high : Down Count
When A is antecedent to B : Up Count
When B is antecedent to A : Down Count
When A is antecedent to B : Up Count
When B is antecedent to A : Down Count

1. 1Phase 2Multiplication(Low Active)

Up Count and Down Count direction are made by A Ph. Input status. In case direction is changed
frequently, Count should be made by A Ph. Therefore, if you need precise measurement, 2Ph. 2Multi or
2Ph. 4Multi will be used.
2. 1Phase 2Multiplication(High Active)

1696

CIMON-PLC

3. 2Phase 2Multiplication

2 Phase 2
PhaseA

PhaseB
Count Value

Down Count

Up Count

4. 2Phase 4Multiplication

2 Phase 4
PhaseA

PhaseB
Count Value

Down Count

Up Count

8.10.4.2 Counter Types

1. Linear Counter

Counter Value
Carry
2,147 ,483 ,647

0
Down Count

Up Count

-2,147 ,483 ,648
Borrow
· Linear Count range : -2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647

PLC-S(CM3)

1697

· If count values reaches the Max. value while increased, Carry will occur and if count value reaches
the Min. value while decreased, Borrow will occur.
· If Carry occurs, count stops and increasing is not available but decreasing is available.
· If Borrow occurs, count stops and decreasing is not available but increasing is available.

2. Ring Count

Counter Value

Carry
Ring Max .

0
Down Count

Borrow

Up Count

· Ring Count range : from 0 to user-defined maximum value
· If count values exceeds user-defined maximum value during Up Count, Carry only occurs and count
operation will be continued from 0. Carry flag will be maintained until reverse pulse input.
· If count value reaches 0 during Down Count, Borrow occurs and count operation will be continued
from user0defined maximum value. Borrow flag will be maintained until reverse pulse input.
· If present count value exceeds user-defined range when setting Ring Count, Error is occurred and it
operates Linear Counter.

8.10.4.3 Compared Output

· Available compared outputs are 2 for 1 channel which can be used separately.
· In order to make actual comparison enabled after compared output condition set, [Use Compare
Output(Y)]is selected.
· In order to make external output, one of the compared equivalent output signal Y010~Y017 must be set.
Value
Compared output condition
0
Present value < Compared value
1
Present value <= Compared value
2
Present value = Compared value
3
Present value >= Compared value
4
Present value > Compared value
5
Compared value 1 <= Present value <= Compared value 2 (include)
Present value <= Compared value 1,
6
Present value >= Compared value 2 (Exclude)

1698

CIMON-PLC

8.10.4.4 Counter Latch

Count Latch is activated when [Latch Count] is selected in Special program [HSC Program for plcS].
Counter value is not cleared when power supply Off -> On and mode change, it is counted from previous
value.

8.10.4.5 Revolution / Unit time

This function counts the number of input pulses for a specified time. In order to use this function, [Unit time]
must be set bigger than 0. The displayed umber of pulses updated for a specified time.
· If 0 second is indicated, Revolution/Unit time cannot be operated as well as RPM/PPS.
· Pulse per 1Cycle : In order to indicate by Revolutions per minute(RPM), the operation is executed in
program. Write the number of pulse per 1 cycle. If parameter is indicated as 0, RPM is not operated.
Counter works by PPS regardless of other parameters.
Built-in HSC of PLCS counts input pulse speed through above parameters. Unit time, PPS(Pulse/Sec) or
RPM(Rotate/Minute) can be selected.

8.10.4.6 Preset Function

Pulse Input

Count Enable
(Offset 16 , Bit #0)

Int . Preset Value
(Offset 3, 4)

500

Int . Preset Signal
(Offset 16 , Bit #1)
Ext . Preset Value
(Offset 9, 10 )

200

100

Ext . Preset Input
(X0004 , X0006 )

Count Value

100

101

102

103

500

501

200

201

It changes the current value into preset value.
There are internal preset and external preset. External preset is fixed as input contact point.
External signal : Ch1 ->X0004, Ch2 -> X0006

8.10.5 High-Speed Counter

Contents :
· Parameter Memory
· Parameter Memory Setting

PLC-S(CM3)

1699

· Parameter Setting

8.10.5.1 Parameter Memory

Parameter setting of HSC takes 26 word memories. User can assign among M/L/K/D in Special program
[HSC program for plcS]

8.10.5.2 Parameter Memory Setting
Oft

Group

Description

Count Mode

Input Pulse Type

Compare Mode

+3
Int. Preset Value
+4
+5
Ext. Preset Value
+6 Paramet
+7
er
Ring Max. Value
+8
+9
Compare Max.
+10
+11
Compare Min.
+12

+13

Compare Output

+14
+15

Unit Time
Pulse / Rotation
Counter Enable
Int. Preset
Ext. Preset Enable
Down Counting
Compare Output

+16 Control

Enable
RPM / PPS Select
Count Latch
+17
+18 Monitor
+19

RPM/PPS
Measured Value

Value
H0000
H0001
H0000
H0001
H0002
H0003
H0000
H0001
H0002
H0003
H0004
H0005
H0006

Setting
Setting
Linear Counter
Ring Counter
2 Phase, 2Input, 2Multi.
2 Phase, 2Input, 4Multi.

<
<=
=
>=
>
<>
><

Memory
Word

Word

-2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647

Dword

-2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647

Dword

-2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647

Dword

-2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647

Dword

-2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647

Dword

HFFFF
H0000
H0001
H0002
H0003
H0004
H0005
H0006
H0007

Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3

N/A
Y0010
Y0011
Y0012
Y0013
Y0014
Y0015
Y0016
Y0017
1~60,000 mSec
1~60,000 Pulse
SET = Enable
SET = Preset
SET = Enable
SET = Down

Bit 4

SET = Enable

Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7..F

RPM(1), PPM(0)
SET = Enable

-2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647

Remark

Word

Low
High
Low
High
Low
High
Low
High
Low
High

Read Only

Word
Word

Read Only
Word

Dword

Low Word
High Word

1700

CIMON-PLC

Carry
Borrow
Compare Result

+20
+21
+22
+23
+24
+25

Current Count Value
Input Pulse per
Unit Time
Error Code

Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3..F

SET = Carry
SET = Borrow
SET = Result

Word

-2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647

Dword

-2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647

Dword

Refer Error Code Table

Word

Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Low Word
High Word
Low Word
High Word

8.10.5.3 Parameter Setting

(1) Count Mode (Offset 0)
You can choose Ring Counter or Linear Counter. If you change counter mode during operation, you should
make reset [Counter Enable] and set again. Before [Counter Enable] is reset, it is operated as Count mode.
If it is changed to Ring Count and current value exceeds range, Linear Counter will be operated.
(2) Input Pulse type (Offset 1)
PLC-S supports 2phase encoder input signal. Multiplication is selected. Please refer to 4.1 Counter Input
mode.
(3) Compare mode (Offset 2)

PLC-S(CM3)

1701

It is only operated when [Compare mode] (Offset 16 – Bit #4) is selected. You should set up [Compare
value1] and [Compare value2] Offset 9 – 12.
Compare Value Max
(Offset 9,10 )

Compare Result
(Offset 20 , Bit #2)

Compare Enable
(Offset 16 , Bit #4)

PulseIn

Compare Output
(Offset 13 )

1/0

Compare Mode
(Offset 2)

Counter
(Offset 21 ,22 )

Compare Value Min
(Offset 11 ,12 )

(4) Internal Preset value (Offset 3, 4)
When Internal preset(Offset 16, Bit #1) is changed from Reset to Set, current value is changed to
designated value.
(5) External Preset value (Offset 5, 6)
When External Preset Input signal(Ch1 : X0004, Ch2 : X0006) is changed from OFF to ON, current count
value is changed to designated value.
(6) Ring Counter Max. (Offset 7, 8)
When [Count mode] is Ring count, [Ring Counter Max] is set up here. Ring Count range : from 0 to
user-defined maximum value
(7) Compare value Max. (Offset 9, 10), Compare value Min. (Offset 11, 12)
Both compare values are used when [Compare Enable] is SET. According to [Compare mode], use can use
compare value Min. only or both Max. and Min. values together.
(8) Compare Output (Offset 13)
Compare result(Offset 20, Bit #2) can be used internal flag as well as external output signal. In order to use
this function, one of Output from Y0010 ~Y0017 can be selected.
(9) Unit time (Offset 14)
Unit time must be set in order to use RPM or PPS. If unit time is set as 0, RPM and PPS are not operated.
(10) Pulse per 1 cycle (Offset 15)
In order to use RPM, value must be set except 0. If ‘0’set up here, PPS will be operated and Error(101)
occur regardless of RPM/PPS (Offset 16, Bit #5).
(11) Status Flags(Offset 16)

1702

CIMON-PLC

(a) Counter Enable (Bit #0)
HSC I/O signal is activated when [Counter Enable] is selected.
(b) Internal Preset Request. (Bit #1)
When current value must set up as designated value, this Bit should be SET in sequence program.
When Bit is set, current count value(Offset 21, 22) will be changed as written value of internal
preset value(Offset 3, 4).
(c) Accept External preset (Bit #2)
When it is SET, current count value is changed to designated value by force through external
signal. External signal is assigned X0004(Ch1) and X0006(Ch2).
(d) Decrease (Bit #3)
According to Input signal direction, current count value becomes Up Count or Down Count. If
current count value is decreased, it will be SET. (In case of increasing, it will be RESET)
(e) Enable Compare Out (Bit #4)
When it is RESET, Compare Out is not operated.
(f)On RPM/Off PPS (Bit #5)
In order to use RPM, value(Offset 15) must be set except 0. If ‘0’set up here, PPS will be operated
regardless flag status.
(g) Latch Counter (Bit #6)
Even if power is off, present count value is maintained in memory safely.
(12) Determine the RPM / PPS (Offset 17, 18)
According to choice of RPM/PPS status(Offset 16, Bit #5), values of RPM or PPS will be saved here.

PPS =

[Input Pulse per Unit Time ] X 1000

[Unit Time ]

[PPS Offset 17 , 18 ]=

[Offset 23 , 24 ] X 1000

[Offset 14 ]

[Input Pulse per Unit Time ] X 1000 X 60
RPM =

[Unit Time ] X [Pulse per Rotation ]
[Offset 23 , 24 ] X 1000 X 60

[RPM Offset 17 , 18 ]=

[Offset 14 ] X [Offset 15 ]

(13) Monitor Flag (Offset 20)

(14) Current count value (Offset 21, 22)

PLC-S(CM3)

1703

(16) Error Code (Offset 25)
Code
0

8.11

Error name

Description

No Error

Normal operation mode

100

Exceed Ring count range

Current count value exceeds Ring Count Range

101

RPM operation error

In case pulse per 1 cycle is set ‘0’

PLCS Positioning
Contents :
· General Specification
· Input Signal Specification
· Output Signal Specification
· Ex. Signal Wiring
· Output Pulse Level
· Parameter
· Operation Data
· Position Data
· Positioning Instruction
· Error Code

8.11.1 General Specification
Item
No. of control axis
Interpolation
Pulse output signal
Pulse output type
Control type
Control unit
Position data
Position data set
Positioning monitor
Back-Up
Position Method
Position Address
Range

Specification
2 Axes
2 Axes linear interpolation
Open collector (DC24V)
Pulse + Direction
Position control, speed control, speed/position switching, position/speed
switching
Pulse
30 position data per axis (operation step no. : 1 .. 30)
CICON special program (permanent auto preservation)
Dedicated monitoring window provided by CICON
Parameter, operation data ?Flash
memory
Absolute / Incremental
-2,147,483,648

2,147,483,647 (Pulse)

1704

CIMON-PLC

Speed Range
Acceleration/decelerat
ion type
Acceleration/decelerat
ion time
Max. output pulse
Max. connection
distance

100,000 pps (1 pps unit)

Trapezoid-shaped
0

100,000 mSec.

(selectable from 4 types of acceleration/deceleration patterns)
100kpps
2m

8.11.2 Input Signal Specification
Item
Rated input voltage
Rated input current
Insulation type
Input Impedence
On voltage (Min.)
Off voltage (Max.)
Response time
Min. input width
Ext. Upper Limit Input
Ext. Lower Limit Input
DOG Input
Zero Input

Specification
24V DC (20.4V ~ 28.8V)
About 7 mA / 24V
Photo-coupler
About 3.3kΩ
20.4V
6V
0.5mSec or less (Used for positioning)
100 us
X0007 (X axis) / X000A (Y axis), B contact
X0008 (X axis) / X000B (Y axis), B contact
X000C (X axis) / X000E (Y axis), A contact
X000D (X axis) / X000F (Y axis), A contact

8.11.3 Output Signal Specification
Item
Rated load voltage
Max. load current
Insulation
Inrush current
On voltage drop
OFF leakage current
Response time

Specification
DC5
24V (DC4.75 ~ 26.4V)
0.1A / 1 point or below
Photo-coupler
1A / 10ms or below
DC 0.3V or below
0.1mA or below
0.1ms or below (rated load, resistor load)

PLC-S(CM3)

8.11.4 Ex. Signal Wiring

Input
Pin

Axis X

X007

Ext. Lower Limit (B contact)

X008

Ext. Upper Limit (B contact)

X009

N/A

Axis Y

X00A

Ext. Lower Limit (B contact)

X00B

Ext. Upper Limit (B contact)

X00C

DOG (A contact)

X00D

Zero (A contact)

X00E

DOG (A contact)

X00F

Zero (A contact)

COM

Input Common

Output
Pin

Axis X

Y010

Pulse Output

Y011

Direction Output

Axis Y

Y012

Pulse Output

Y013

Direction Output

DC24V

Output Common (+)

COM

Output Common (-)

1705

1706

CIMON-PLC

8.11.5 Output Pulse Level
[High Active Mode]

Forward

Backward

Forward

Backward

Y010
Y012

Y011
Y013

[Low Active Mode]

Y010
Y012

Y011
Y013

8.11.6 Parameter
All parameters can be configured by "Positioning Program for plcS" in CICON.

PLC-S(CM3)

Ofs

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Item
Pulse Output
Select

Default
0

1=High Active

R/W

Bais Speed

100,000 PPS

Speed Limit

50,000

100,000 PPS

Acc/Dec Time 1
Acc/Dec Time 2
Acc/Dec Time 3
Acc/Dec Time 4

1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000

1
1
1
1

65,535 mSec
65,535 mSec
65,535 mSec
65,535 mSec

W
W
W
W

S/W Upper Limit

2,147,483,647

-2,147,483,648

2,147,483,647

S/W Lower Limit

-2,147,483,648

2,147,483,647

13 under speed
control
Backlash
Compensation
External

15 Upper/Lower Limit

Low
High
Low
High

0=Do not update
0

1=Update

2=Clear and update
0

Signal
16
Jog Speed Limit
17
Jog Acc/Dec
18
Time
19 Inching Speed
Complete Output
20
Signal Duration

Remark

2=Low Active

Position address

Configuration Details
Function
0=Not Used

1707

20,000
0

65,535 Pulse

0=Not Used
1=Wired (Used)
1

100,000 PPS

(Bias Speed target address : backward positioning
ABS -1000

-1000

1000

3000

ABS 10000

5000

7000

10000

8.11.8.4.2 INC

Object moves from current position as long as the address set in operation data. At this time, target address
is based on start address. Direction is determined by sign (+, -).This command is used when the target
address. This command is using a relative coordinate which means the target address number is counted
from the starting address (present position before operating this command).
- In case address is positive number : forward positioning (direction increasing address)
- In case address is negative number : backward positioning (direction decreasing address)
INC 5000

INC -6000

-4500

6500

1500

8.11.8.4.3 FEED

Object moves from current position as long as the address set in operation data. Before executing the
command, current position address is cleared to zero.
FEED 5000

FEED -6000

-6000

Address cleared
tozero

5000

PLC-S(CM3)

1725

8.11.8.4.4 FSC/RSC

Performs speed control. Speed control outputs designated speed of pulse until the raising of stop request
(bit 1, control flag). According to the ‘position address under speed control’set in parameter, current position
address is cleared/updated or fixed during speed control.

Speed

Speed Control

Positioning Instruction
(POSCTRL / PSTRTn )

Time
Run
(Status Flag b 0)
Decelerate Stop Req .
(Control Flag b 1)
Positioning Completed
(Status Flag b 11 )

8.11.8.4.5 NOP

No operation is performed.
8.11.8.4.6 JUMP

The JUMP command is used to control the operation so it jumps to a positioning data No. set in the
positioning data during ‘continuous control’. Using the JUMP command enables repeating of the same
positioning control.
8.11.8.4.7 LOOP/LEND

The LOOP command is used for loop control by the repetition of LOOP to LEND. Nesting loop is allowed
and LOOP/LEND have to be set as ‘continuous control’type.
8.11.8.4.8 POS

Force to change the current position address to a new address. The new address has to be designated in ‘
target address’ field.

8.11.9 Positioning Instruction

Contents :
· PSTRTn (n=1

1726

CIMON-PLC

· POSCTRL
· TEACHn (n=1

8.11.9.1 PSTRTn (n=1

Start the positioning of the designated axis and position data No.

PSTRT 1 p1 p2 p3

AxisX

PSTRT 2 p1 p2 p3

AxisY

1) p1
Fixed value (0) in case of PLC-S since the CPU is in the 0th slot.
2) p2 (Positioning Data No.)
Positioning data No. to execute.
1. 1~30 : Position data No.
2. 9001 : OPR
3. 9002 : Fast OPR (The axis returns to the zero position address at the OPR high speed without
detecting DOG)
3) p3 (Result Flag)
Head address (device memory) where error code (if exist) and result flags to be written. (it must be a
word device, for example, M0100)

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10

Error Code

Result Flags

1. Upper Nibble : Error Code
2. Lower Nibble : Result Flag
· Bit #0 : Instruction process pending
· Bit #1 : Completed
· Bit #2 : Error Occurred (set simultaneously with bit #1)
· Bit #3~7 : Reserved (0)

8.11.9.2 POSCTRL

Issues positioning commands such as change speed, change target address, etc.

POSCTRL p 1 p2 p3

PLC-S(CM3)

1727

2) p2 (control parameter)
Head address (device memory) where parameters such as axis, command and control parameter are
stored.

Axis (1.. 2)
Command Code (1, 2, 3, 6)
Parameter (Lower word )
Parameter (Upper word )

(p2)
(p2+1)
(p2+2)
(p2+3)

Case : command code(p2+1) is not 10

(p2)
(p2+1)

Axis (1.. 2)
Command Code (10 )

(p2+2)
(p2+9)

Position data (8 words )

Case : command code(p2+1) is 10

p2 : Axis to control (1..2)
p2+1 : Command Code
p2+2 ~ p2+9 : Parameter
Command
Code

Description

Name
Change current

Parameter : a new position address (DWORD)

position address

OPR completed flag will be set after this command.

Change speed

Parameter : a new speed

Inching

Parameter : inching movement (distance), if a negative value was
designated, the axis moves backward direction.

Change target
address

Parameter : a new target address
Parameter : a position data block (8 word size)

10 Indirect position data This data block has the same format with ‘Position Data’as described in
section 8.
3) p3 (Result Flag)
Head address (device memory) where error code (if exist) and result flags to be written. (it must be a
word device, for example, M0100)

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10

Error Code

Result Flags

1728

CIMON-PLC

2. Lower Nibble : Result Flag
· Bit #0 : Instruction process pending
· Bit #1 : Completed
· Bit #2 : Error Occurred (set simultaneously with bit #1)
· Bit #3~7 : Reserved (0)

8.11.9.3 TEACHn (n=1

Change a parameter of position data already defined.

TEACH 1 p1 p2 p3

AxisX

TEACH 2 p1 p2 p3

AxisY

1) p1
Fixed value (0) in case of PLC-S since the CPU is in the 0th slot.
2) p2
Head address of device memory block with format of as following :

Set Item & Position Data No .

+0
+1

Set Value (DWORD )

SetItem

Position data No . : 1.. 30 (h001 .. h01 E)

0 : Target Address
1 : Speed
3 : Dwell Time
(example) Change the speed set value to 12345 of axis X position data No. 18.

MOVH 1012 D0100

DMOV 12345 D0101

TEACH 1 H0000 D0100 M0200

3) p3 (Result Flag)
Head address (device memory) where error code (if exist) and result flags to be written. (it must be a

PLC-S(CM3)

1729

word device, for example, M0200)

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10

Error Code

Result Flags

8.11.10 Error Code
Categor
y
Commo
n

OPR

Manual

Positioni

Code
0

Error Name
No error

Description
Normal operation status

104
105
154
155
156

H/W upper limit
H/W lower limit
S/W upper limit
S/W lower limit
Emergency Stop

Exceeds position limit (H/W upper limit signal detected)
Exceeds position limit (H/W lower limit signal detected)
Exceeds S/W position upper limit
Exceeds S/W position lower limit
Positioning control is denied.(Emergency stop signal is ON.)
Home position is not decided. Cannot execute positioning

202

OPR required

control.
Exceeds DOG signal input time limit (30 seconds) during

203

No DOG signal

OPR operation.
JOG/Inching command/input is executed while other

300

JOG/Inching fault

positioning control is under operation.

519

Interpolation fault

Partner axis is busy with non-interpolation operation.

Position address

A command to change current position address is issued

550

change fault

while the axis is under operation.
A command to change current speed is issued while the axis

551

Speed change fault
Target address

in stop or dwell.
A command to change target address is issued while the axis

552

change fault
Duplicated position

in stop or dwell.
Another position control command is issued while the axis is

553

control

under operation.
Online program edit/modify is performed while axis are under

554

Online edit fault

operation.

1730

8.12

CIMON-PLC

PLCS Parameter Settings
Contents :
· Basic Settings
· Latch Area Setup
· Interrupt
· CPU Error Manipulation
· Communication
· Input Setting
· Modbus
· Ethernet Settings

8.12.1 Basic Settings
On the project window, [Parameter] ->double click [PLC Parameter]

1.Action
· Override the instruction error : If this option is selected, PLC will run normally although arithmetic
overflow or arithmetic error occurs. (Basic setting : used)
· Allow DO while debugging :It is used to decide to output data to output module with debugging or just
change inner data without output. (basic setting : not used)

PLC-S(CM3)

1731

2.Timer
This option is for setting up time range when timer instruction used.
If user sets up timer as above, timer device of T0000~T0127 will be 100ms and T0127~T0511 will be
10ms.
If 100ms area set up 0~-1, whole timer area will be 10ms.
Once 100ms sets up, 10ms will be automatically set up rest area except 100ms area.

3.Communication
This option is for comm. Set up if PLC is connected with other device through Comm. Module.
· Permit data writing from remote : This option is used to change device value of CPU memory through
communication connection. If this option is not selected, only reading device data is available. (Basic
setting : used)
· Permit CPU mode change from remote : This option is used to change mode of CPU(RUN/STOP)
(Basic setting : used)
· Enable PLC-Link auto-swap(Redundant) : This option is for only Redundancy configuration. In case
that communication is disconnected with current PLC, another PLC will be connected automatically.
(Basic setting : not used)

4.Watch Dog Timer
This option is used to specify the time value (from 10ms up to 60,000ms by 10ms) of the scan
watch-dog timer to keep PLC from stopping due to program error.
In case that scan time becomes longer than fixed WDT value, CPU will be reset. (Basic setting : not
used)

5.Hot Restart
When power is supplied again in fixed time, this option makes Hot Restart initial program run after that,
main scan program run. (Basic setting : not used)

6.Expanstion (PLC-S is exception)
This option is used to specify expansion.
When expansion is used, user can decide number of expansion bases. (Basic setting : not used)

8.12.2 Latch Area Setup
On the project window, [Parameter] ->double click [PLC Parameter] -> [Latch Area Setup]

1732

CIMON-PLC

· It is used to specify the fixed area to preserve current device data although power is off or mode is
changed (Stop -> Run, Run -> Stop)
· Once latch area set up, data is maintained as last status when power on again.
· The range of Latch area depends on CPU types.
· The users can set up whole device memory as latch area.
· "K" device area provides latch area basically.
· Click to use the respective device and to select the area.

8.12.3 Interrupt
On the project window, [Parameter] ->double click [PLC Parameter] -> [Interrupt]

PLC-S(CM3)

1733

This option is used to decide Priority through fixed interval interrupt.
*This interrupt function can be used by adding the [Periodic Interrupt Program] in New Program.

1734

CIMON-PLC

Interrupt instruction.
Instruction

EI
DI

GEI
GDI

IRET

Symbol

GEI
GDI

IRET

Function

Allow interrupt (by channel)
Allow interrupt (by channel)

Terminate Interrupt program

8.12.4 CPU Error Manipulation
On the project window, [Parameter] ->double click [PLC Parameter] -> [CPU Error Manipulation]

PLC-S(CM3)

1735

1.Keep PLC running although initializing special module is failed
This option is used to decide to continue the PLC operation when initializing special module is failed.
Initialization : it refers to process which reads settings automatically to be normal status when power on.
Initialization lead-time : in 2 sec.
When initialization is failed, LED will be blinking and normal operation is not possible.
(Basic setting : not used)

2.Keep PLC running although reading & writing system data of special module failed.
This option is used to decide to continue the PLC operation when reading and writing system data of
special module are failed.
System Data : It refers to I/O area which designates settings and functions of special module.
(Basic setting : not used)

3.Keep PLC running although reading & writing User data of special module failed.
This option is used to decide to continue the PLC operation when reading and writing user data of
special module are failed.

1736

CIMON-PLC

User Data : it refers to measured data or will be measured data area by special module.
Measured data can be read through user data.
(Basic setting : not used)

4.Keep PLC running although FROM/TO occurs error.
This option is used to decide to continue the PLC operation when FROM/TO of special module occurs
error.
FROM/TO : it refers to instruction which reads(FROM) and writes(TO) value of special module.
(Basic setting : not used)

5.Keep PLC running although Digital Output occurs error.
This option is used to decide to continue the PLC operation when Digital Output occurs error.
DO : Digital Output
There are Relay, SSR and TR output and 8, 16 and 32 points modules
(Basic setting : not used)

6.Keep PLC running although unknown PLC module is installed.
This option is used to decide to continue the PLC operation when unknown PLC module is installed.
Unknown PLC module : it refers to PLC which CPU does not recognize.
In this case, CPU module needs to be firmware (OS) upgraded.
(Basic setting : used)

7.Keep Digital Output although CPU stops or occurs error.
This option is used to decide to continue Digital Output when CPU stops or occurs error.
If this option is selected, final Digital Output status will be maintained although CPU stops or occurs
error.
(Basic setting : not used)

8.12.5 Communication
On the project window, [Parameter] ->double click [PLC Parameter] -> [Channel 1]

PLC-S(CM3)

1737

Basically, PLCS CPU module has RS232C. (Option Comm. Port : RS485, Ethernet)
1Channel : RS232C, 2Channel : RS485C
CICON LOADER PROTOCOL
HMI PROTOCOL
MODBUS RTU SLAVE PROTOCOL
MODBUS RTU MASTER PROTOCOL(Special program)
User Protocol (Special program) (only MDT-P model).

Communication Setting.
CICON LOADER PROTOCOL
supports RS232C(Ch1), RS485(Ch2), Ethernet communication and USB port.
Ch1 & Ch2 : if the value of Baud rate, parity, Data Bit and Stop Bit are the same with other devices, it will
communicate as SLAVE Model.
Ethernet : IP setting must be the same with other devices.
USB Port : USB device (2.0)driver has to be installed. You can find out USB Driver in USB DRIVER folder in
CICON.
HMI PROTOCOL
HMI PROTOCOL supports Ch1, Ch2 and Ethernet communication.
Ch1 & Ch2 : if the value of Baud rate, parity, Data Bit and Stop Bit are the same with other devices, it will
communicate as SLAVE Model.

1738

CIMON-PLC

Ethernet : IP setting must be the same with other devices.
MODBUS RTU SLAVE PROTOCOL
MODBIS RTU SLAVE PROTOCOL supports Ch1, Ch2 and Ethernet communication when MODBUS RTU
MASTER in connected with.
Ch1 & Ch2 : if the value of Baud rate, parity, Data Bit and Stop Bit are the same with other devices, it will
communicate as SLAVE Model.
Ethernet : IP setting must be the same with other devices.

PLC-S(CM3)

8.12.6 Input Setting

1. Pulse Catch Input : Select Input point that will be High Speed Counter.
2. Input Filter Select : Digital Input Filter value settings.
You can set up User Input Filter Value through selecting input points as below:
Other inputs which are not selected will be setup by Standard Input Filter Value.

1739

1740

CIMON-PLC

8.12.7 Modbus
On the project window, [Parameter] -> double click [PLC Parameter]

PLC-S(CM3)

1. Coli Status : Select starting address of Coil Status(Bit Type)
2. Input Status : Select starting address of Input Status(Bit Type / Read Only)
3. Holding Register : Select starting address of Holding Register(Word Type)
4. Input Register : Select starting address of Input Register (Word Type)
5. Station No. : Select Station Address which will be in Comm. protocol.

8.12.8 Ethernet Settings
For details see "Click"

1741

1742

CIMON-PLC

8.12.9 PLC Link
1. Summary
The PLC Link function is used to exchange high baud rate and large capacity data between CIMON-PLCs
through Ethernet Comm. module. Device address, word size, periods and etc. are setup by PLC Link
parameter.
· Features
1. Max. 64 Blocks(Send 32 / Receive 32) can be set up for each Comm. modules.
Link Points
Max. Comm. Points

Max. Sending Points

Max. Block Points

Max. Points per Block

4,096

2,048

64(0~63)

Max. 64words for Block can be sent.
2. Interval period can be set up in the range from 50ms to 3sec.
3. Device address and word size can be set up to send and receive data.

2. PLC Link (Send / Receive)
Example of Data process in case of Send and Receive

PLC-S(CM3)

1743

- Send: Interval period, device address and word size should be set up.
- Receive: Station number and Block number should be set up.
Ex) Station"0" send 10 words from D00000 and Station "1" receive D00000 and save it to Y0000.

Sender (Station : 0)
Type

Block No.

Period

Address

Size

Sender

100ms

D0000

10 Word

Type

Station No.

Block No.

Address

Size

Receiver

Y0000

4 Word

Receiver (Station : 1)

The Station number and Block number of each Station 1 and 2 are set up as the same number. In this case,
Station 1 PLC can receive data from Station0 PLC by 100ms. Station0 PLC send 10 words but Station1 PLC
will receive only 4 words. (Receiver’s word size must be the same with sender’s or less than sender’s.

3. PLC Link Parameter
· Parameter settings for PLC Link
In order to exchange data between Comm. modules, [PLC Link] is executed first to setup parameter.
1.Open Project
Open project

1744

CIMON-PLC

[Parameter] -> [PLC Link]
· Parameter Settings for PLC Link
1. PLC Link :
Max. 4 Comm. Module can be installed at CPU module for PLC Link. In order to use PLC Link,
each Link will be setup as below Picture 6-2.
2.PLC Link Type settings :
There are 4 basic settings such as Link Type, Base, Slot and Station No.
- Link Type : Select Comm. module for PLC Link. If you do not want to use PLC Link, select
"Not Used".

PLC-S(CM3)

1745

- Base : Select the Base where Comm. module is installed for PLC Link. If Comm. module is
installed with CPU base, select "Local" Otherwise, select expansion Number where Comm.
module is installed.

Location where Comm. module installed

Base

CPU Base

Local

Expansion 1 Base(Expansion Switch 0)

Expansion 1

Expansion 15 Base( Expansion Switch 15)

Expansion 16

- Slot : Select slot number where Comm. module is installed.

3. PLC Link Block Settings :
This function is used to set up information of sender and receiver’s real data.
[PLC Link] -> [Link Type : Ethernet(Private Net)] -> [Add] -> [Link Block]
Link Block will be appeared as Picture.

1746

CIMON-PLC

Type -> Send : It is used to send chosen block.
Type -> Receive : It is used to receive chosen block.

PLC-S(CM3)

1747

- Tx Station No.
In case of Send Type : No need to set up
In case of Receive Type: Select Station Number to be received from 0 to 63.
- Block No. : In order to make a communication between PLCs, Block number (from 0 to 31)
must be setup and each Block number of Send and Receive must be the same.
- Period : This function is used to set up interval period for sending data. It can be set up from
50msec to 3sec. if interval period is set up as 50msec, PLC will send data by every 50msec.
- Device Address :
1. Send: Select device address where data will be sent.
2. Receive: Select device address where data will be saved.
- Size : Size refers to data size and it can be set up from 1 to 64words. Sender’s data size
must be the same with Receiver’s size or bigger than Receiver’s size.
Size of Sender and Receiver

Size to be saved

Sender > Receiver

Saved as Receiver’s size

Sender < Receiver

Saved as Sender’s size

Ex) Station1 sends Block 0,1,2 and 3 and receive Block 4,5,6 and 7.
Station 2 sends 4,5,6 and 7 and receive 0,1,2 and 3.
Ethernet module is installed at Slot 4.
Each data size is 1 Word and period is 50msec each.
Here is the sample parameter.

1748

CIMON-PLC

1. Station 1.

Station 1 send D00000~D00003 by 1word. If Station and Block number of Receiver is matched with
Sender’s one, Y0000~Y0030 will be saved.

2. Station 2

PLC-S(CM3)

1749

Station 2 sends Block 4,5,6 and 7 and Station 1 will compare Station and Block number and receive
data. Station 2 receives Y0000~Y0030 after comparing Station and Block number.

Top Level Intro
This page is printed before a new
top-level chapter starts

Part

Remote I/O(Rio)

1751

Remote I/O(Rio)

· Real time integrated input / output control
· Various I/O type supports - DC input 16/32 points, TR output 16/32 points, and relay output 16 points
· Enable to cannot up to 99 station
· Help to reduce installation and maintenance cost
· Compatible with other Manufacture's master with CIMON remote-IO
· International standard communication protocol (Profibus DP) selected open network intended use.
· Provide various system structure convenient system maintenance and system repair.
· To be able to select country code with hardware, system setup is processed more conveniently.
· Simple structure & simple to use due to its unify body - CPU, POWER, Input / Output, and communication
ability unified into one module
· Monitoring far distanced module's communication status with monitor.
· Supports high speed communication (Max 12 Mbps)
· Master speed governs speed of other units.

Module Name

Type

Specification

RP-XD16A

DC24V 16 points : Photo coupler insulation

RP-XD32A

DC24V 32 points : Photo coupler insulation

RP-YR16A

Profibus DP

RP-YT16A

Relay 16 points.
Transistor SINK Output 16 points : 0.5Amp : Photo coupler Insulation

RP-YT32A

Transistor SINK Output 32 points : 0.5Amp : Photo coupler Insulation

RP-XY32DT

I/O Hybrid (DC24V 16 Points : TR output 16 points)

Communication Specification

Network

Profibus - DP

Media Access

Logical Token Ring

Communication Method

RS-485 (Electric)

Topology

BUS

1752

CIMON-PLC

Modulation Method

NRZ

Communication Cable

Shielded Twisted Pair
1200m(9.6K ~ 187 Kbps)
400m(500Kbps)

Transmission distance

200m(1.5Mbps)
100m(3M ~ 12Mbps)
No. of Nodes / Network

99 Station

No. of Nodes / Segment

32 Station

General Specification

Input
Model

Point

Output

DC
(Sink/Source)
16

Transistor
(Sink)
16

Input / Output
Relay

DC
(Sink/Source)

Transistor
(Sink)

Rated Input
(Load Voltage)

DC24V

DC24V/
AC110V/220V

DC24V

Rated Input
(Load Current)

7mA

0.5A/4A

2A/5A

7mA

0.5A/4A

Off->On

3ms or less

2ms or less

10ms or less

3ms or less

2ms or
less

On->Off

3ms or less

2ms or less

5ms or less

3ms or less

2ms or
less

16points/Com

16 Points/Com

8 Points/Com

Respons
e Time

Common

16 Points/Com

Dimensions

Remote I/O(Rio)

1753

Top Level Intro
This page is printed before a new
top-level chapter starts

Part

Training Kit

1755

Training Kit
Contents :
· PEK - 308
· PEK - 408

10.1

PEK - 308
Contents :
1. Summary
2. Overview
3. Features and Specifications
4. Accessories
5. Getting Started
6. Appendix

10.1.1 Summary

Contents :
1. Training Objectives
2. PEK - 308 Training Kit Features

10.1.1.1 Training Objectives

1. To understand the basic knowledge and applications of PLC
2. To practice PLC operations with an user interface(XPANEL)
3. To improve a field of use for trainees
4. To learn about Data Link System between PLC<->PLC
5. To master PLC application command skills
6. To improve Xpanel designing skills
7. To be able to configure a combined controlling system
8. To acquire controlling ability of analog signals
9. To understand RS 232C/RS 422/RS 485 configurations
10.To master the capability to configure fields surveillance controlling and acquire management ability

10.1.1.2 PEK - 308 Training Kit Features

1. This is a multi-functional module type PLC training kit.
2. With CICON (loader program), practicing many different types of advanced command is possible: modify

1756

CIMON-PLC

while running, force input/output, reset program and etc.
3. By using Xpanel, users can learn about connections between PLC and MMI.
4. Toggle switches are included for program simulations using LED output lamps and a display device.
5. PID control is possible by using analog module
6. Positioning control exercise is possible by using an already-installed servo driver and a stepping motor
7. Easy connection to a HMI device for a remote controlling and monitoring.
8. Since the system is built with an optimal I/O point with different module types in mind, the user can easily
improve adaptive programming skills used in various fields

10.1.2 Overview

1. XPANEL : XT04CB
2. PLCS : CM3-SP32MDT, SP32EDT, SP32EDT, SP04EAA, SP04ERO
3. LED Lamp Outputs Y0010 ~ Y001F
4. Digital S/W Inputs X0000 ~ X000F
5. STEPPING MOTOR
6. Serial Port
· RS232 1port : HMI Protocol, 19200, N, 8, 1

Training Kit

· RS485 1port : HMI Protocol, 19200, N, 8, 1
7. (90~240V) Power Input

10.1.3 Features and Specifications

Contents :
1. PLCS
2. XPANEL

10.1.3.1 PLCS

Contents :
· PLCS Specifications
· PLCS module connection diagrams
· Training Kit connection diagrams
· I/O signal & buffer memory expansion module
· Serial port(DSUB-9) network connection diagram
10.1.3.1.1 PLCS Specifications

Contents :
· CPU : CM3-SP32MDTF
· Digital Input Expansion Module : CM3-SP32EDT
· Analog I/O Expansion Module : CM3-SP04EAA
· RTD Thermometer Module : CM3-SP04ERO

1757

1758

CIMON-PLC

10.1.3.1.1.1 CPU : CM3-SP32MDTF

Contents
Power
Program Control Type
I/O Control Type
Programming Language
Data Process
Sequence
Instructions
Application
Processing Rate
Program Memory Capacity
Maximum I/O/ Maximum Expansion
Drive Mode
Data during Power Outage
Number of Program Blocks
Scan
Period
Special
Program Type
Initial
Sub
Routine

126
Operation Delay Monitoring ,Memory Error,

Self-diagnosis Function
X
Y
M
L
K
F
T
C

I/O Error ,Battery/Power Error
Cold/Hot Restart
1024 pts (X0000 – X063F)
1024 pts (Y0000 – Y063F)
8192 pts (M0000 – M511F)
4096 pts (L0000 – L255F)
4096 pts (K0000 – K255F)
2048 pts (F0000 – F127F)
512 pts (T0000 – T0511)
512 pts (C0000 – C0511)

100 states x 100 set (00.00 - 99.99)

Restart Function

Device Memory Capacity

Specifications
DC24V
Stored Program, Iterative Operation, Time Driven Interrupt
Indirect Type, Direct Type by instructions
IL(Instruction List), LD(Ladder Diagram)
32 Bit
55 Instruction
389 Instruction
200ns / Step
10K Step
384 pts / 1 main Block + Max. 11 Block
Run, Stop, Remote Run, Remote Stop
Variable data can be Retained
128
127 (number of program blocks that are used in a task)
16
126
2 (_INIT,_H_INIT)

Training Kit

D
Z
R

1759

10000 words (D0000 - D9999)
1024 words (Call Stack : Z0000 - Z0063, Z1000 - Z1063)
16 pts (Index)
20Kpps, 2 Phase 2Ch.
Max. 100Kpps, 2 Axis, Linear interpolation
32 Channels, Auto-Tuning
Embedded (Battery CR2032 Backup)
Standard : USB Loader, Serial 1(RS232C)

High Speed Counter
Position Determination
PID
RTC
Networking Channel

Optional : Serial 1Ch(RS485), Ethernet 1Ch
Minimum 3years of life expectancy

Etc.
10.1.3.1.1.2 Digital Input Expansion Module : CM3-SP32EDT

DC Input

Relay Output

Transistor Output

CM3-SP32EDT

CM3-SP16EOR

CM3-SP32EDT

DC 24V

AC 220V / DC 24V

DC 12V / 24V

4mA

1pt 2A / COM 5A

1pt 0.2A, COM 2A

On Voltage/Current

DC19V / 3mA

N/A

Off Voltage/Current

DC6V / 1mA

N/A

Response Time

Less than 3ms

Less than 10ms

Less than 1ms

Indication Lamp

LED Turns On When ON

LED Turns On when ON

Insulation Method

Photo coupler insulation

Relay insulation

Photo coupler insulation

Input Method

SINK/SRC compatible

N/A

Output Method

N/A

Relay

Sink

Type
Rated
I/O Voltage
Rated
I/O Current

Circuits

10.1.3.1.1.3 Analog I/O Expansion Module : CM3-SP04EAA

Analog Input
Contents

Spec

Analog Input Points

2pts

Analog Input

Electric Voltage: 0V ~ +5V, 1V ~ +5V, 0V ~ +10V. -10V ~

+10V

LED

1760

CIMON-PLC

Electric Current : 0~20mA, 4~20mA
14bit, 0~16000
Input Resolution

16bit, 0~64000
Configure by Software

Accuracy

± 0.1% (Full Scale)

Conversion Speed

2.1ms / 1ch
±12V

Max Input
Insulation Method

±25mA
Input Circuit: Photo Coupler insulation
Each Channel : non-insulation

Occupation Method

16pts

External Power Supply

DC 24V

Connection Terminal

12pts Terminal

Current

Internal

@DC24V, 15mA

External

@DC24V, 70mA

consumption
(mA)

Analog Output
Contents

Spec

Analog Output Points

2Pts
Electric Voltage: 0V ~ +5V, 1V ~ +5V, 0V ~ +10V. -10V ~

Analog Output

+10V
Electric Current: 0~20mA, 4~20mA

Output Configuration Method

Software Configuration
14bit, 0~16000

Digital Input

16bit, 0~64000
Software Configuration

Accuracy

± 0.1% (Full Scale)

Conversion Speed

10ms

Max Output

±12V
24mA

Insulation Method

Input Circuit: Photo Coupler Insulation

External Power Supply

DC 24V

Occupation Method

16pts

Connection Terminal

12pts Terminal

Internal

@DC24V, 15mA

consumption (mA) External

@DC24V, 70mA

Internal current

Training Kit

10.1.3.1.1.4 RTD Thermometer Module : CM3-SP04ERO

Spec
PT100,JPT100,PT1000,

Thermoresistor

NI1000 (DIN 43760), NI1000 (TCR 5000)
PT100 : -200.0oC to 600oC (18.48 to 313.59W)
JPT100 : -200.0oC to 600oC (17.14 to 317.28W)
PT1000 : -200.0oC to 600oC (184.8 to 3135.9W)

Range of Temp.

NI1000 (DIN 43760):
-50.0oC to 160oC (742.6 to 1986.3W)
NI1000 (TCR 5000):
-50.0oC to 160oC (790.9 to 1799.3W)
Digital Value : 0 ~ 16,000(-8000~8000)

Digital/Temp Output

Temp : -2000~6000
(floating point X 10)

Disconnection Detection

3pts Indication for Each Channel

Precision

0.1 %(Full Scale)

Max Conversion Rate

50ms / 4 Channels

No. of Input Channels

4 Channels / 1 Module
Input Terminal <->PLC Power

Insulation Method

Photo Coupler Insulation
(Between Channels Non-insulation)

Connection Terminal

12pts Terminal
+5V

+15V

-15V

Internal current
consumption (mA)

10.1.3.1.2 PLCS module connection diagrams

Contents :
· SP32MDTV
· SP32EDT(Input Module Connection Diagram)
· SP32EAA(Analog I/O Module)
· SP32ERO(RTD Temperature Measuring Module)

1761

1762

CIMON-PLC

10.1.3.1.2.1 SP32MDTV

Main Module I/O Connection Diagram

Terminal Block (CM0-TB32M) Connection Diagram

Training Kit

1763

1764

CIMON-PLC

10.1.3.1.2.2 SP32EDT(Input Module Connection Diagram)

10.1.3.1.2.3 SP32EAA(Analog I/O Module)

I/O Electric Voltage Signal
Channel

+ Terminal

- Terminal

AD 1 CH

V1+

COM

AD 2 CH

V2+

COM

DA 1 CH

V1+

COM

DA 2 CH

V2+

COM

I/O Electric Current Signal
Channel

+ Terminal

- Terminal

Instruction

AD 1 CH

I1+

COM

Connect V1+ - I1+

AD 2 CH

I2+

COM

Connect V1+ - I1+

DA 1 CH

I1+

COM

N/A

DA 2 CH

I2+

COM

N/A

Training Kit

10.1.3.1.2.4 SP32ERO(RTD Temperature Measuring Module)

1765

1766

CIMON-PLC

10.1.3.1.3 Training Kit connection diagrams

Training Kit

1767

1768

CIMON-PLC

10.1.3.1.4 I/O signal & buffer memory expansion module

Contents :
· SP32EAA
· SP32ERO
10.1.3.1.4.1 SP32EAA

I/O signal
Direction of Signal(CPU<-A/D, D/A Module)
Input

Name of Signal

Direction of Signal(CPU->A/D, D/A Module)
Output

Name of Signal

X00

A/D Module Ready

Y00

N/A

X01

N/A

Y01

N/A

Y02

Requesting to Set Up an Operation Condition

Flag Indicating the Operation

X02

Condition Settings

X03

CH 1 – Indicating Alarm in Max

Y03

D/A CH 1 Output Enable (Control Command)

X04

CH 2 – Indicating Alarm in Max

Y04

D/A CH 2 Output Enable (Control Command)

X05

CH 3 – Indicating Alarm in Max

Y05

N/A

X06

CH 4 – Indicating Alarm in Max

Y06

N/A

X07

N/A

Y07

N/A

X08

N/A

Y08

N/A

X09

N/A

Y09

N/A

X0A

N/A

Y0A

N/A

X0B

N/A

Y0B

N/A

X0C

N/A

Y0C

N/A

X0D

N/A

Y0D

N/A

X0E

N/A

Y0E

N/A

X0F

D/A Error Indication Flag

Y0F

Requesting to Clear the Error

Buffer Memory
Address

Default

Description

Value

R/W

Hexa

Deci

Digital Converted Value of CH.1 (AD)

Digital Converted Value of CH.2 (AD)

Input Signal Value of CH.1 (AD)

Input Signal Value of CH.2 (AD)

Percentage Value of CH.1 (AD)

Percentage Value of CH.2 (AD)

Training Kit

Alarm in Max Status (AD)

Alarm in Min Status (AD)

Setting Up Input Range of CH.1 (AD)

R/W

Setting Up Input Range of CH.2 (AD)

R/W

Raw Value Digital Output Set (AD)

R/W

Average Process Set Value of CH.1 (AD)

2000h

R/W

Average Process Set Value of CH.2 (AD)

2000h

R/W

Max Alarm Set Value of CH.1 (AD)

R/W

Max Alarm Set Value of CH.2 (AD)

R/W

Min. Alarm Set Value of CH.1 (AD)

R/W

10H

Min. Alarm Set Value of CH.2 (AD)

R/W

11H

CH.1 Digital Filter Constant (AD)

R/W

12H

CH.2 Digital Filter Constant (AD)

R/W

13H

DA Conversion Enable/Disable Settings

R/W

14H

R/W

15H

R/W

16H

CH.1 DA Set Range

R/W

17H

CH.2 DA Set Range

R/W

18H

CH.1 DA Channel Hold/Clear

R/W

CH.2 DA Channel Hold/Clear

R/W

19H

CH.1 DA Output Type
(Current 2 types, Voltage 4types)
CH.2 DA Output Type
(Current 2 types, Voltage 4types)

1AH

Digital Output Value of CH.1 (DA)

R/W

1BH

Digital Output Value of CH.2(DA)

R/W

1CH

AD / DA Resolution Set

R/W

1DH

Error Code

1EH

OS Version

1769

10.1.3.1.4.2 SP32ERO

I/O signal
Direction of Signal(RTD Module->CPU)
Input
Name of Signal
X00 RTD Module Ready
X01 RTD Conversion complete flag
Flag Indicating the Operation
X02
Condition Set Up
X03
N/A
X04

Output
Y00
Y01
Y02
Y03
Y04

Direction of Signal(CPU<-RTD Module)
Name of Signal
N/A
N/A
Requesting to Set Up an Operation Condition
N/A

1770

CIMON-PLC

X05
X06
X07
X08
X09
X0A
X0B
X0C
X0D
X0E
X0F

Y05
Y06
Y07
Y08
Y09
Y0A
Y0B
Y0C
Y0D
Y0E
RTD Error Indication Flag

Y0F

Requesting to Clear the Error

Buffer Memory
Adress
Description

R/W

Hexadec.

Decimal

RTD Conversion Enable/Disable Settings

R/W

Detected Temperature Value of CH1( )

Detected Temperature Value of CH2( )

Detected Temperature Value of CH3( )

Detected Temperature Value of CH4( )

Detected Temperature Value of CH5( )

Detected Temperature Value of CH6( )

Detected Temperature Value of CH7( )

Detected Temperature Value of CH8( )

RTD Type Assign

N/A

Detected Temperature Value of CH1(°F)

Detected Temperature Value of CH2(°F)

Detected Temperature Value of CH3(°F)

Detected Temperature Value of CH4(°F)

Detected Temperature Value of CH5(°F)

10H

Detected Temperature Value of CH6(°F)

11H

Detected Temperature Value of CH7(°F)

12H

Detected Temperature Value of CH8°F)

13H

Operating Channels Information

14H

N/A

15H

Digital Conversion Value of CH1

16H

Digital Conversion Value of CH2

17H

Digital Conversion Value of CH3

R/W

Training Kit

18H

Digital Conversion Value of CH4

19H

Digital Conversion Value of CH5

1AH

Digital Conversion Value of CH6

1BH

Digital Conversion Value of CH7

1CH

Digital Conversion Value of CH8

1DH

Digital Output Settings #2

R/W

1EH

Average Process Assign

R/W

1FH

Error Code Value of CH1

20H

Error Code Value of CH2

21H

Error Code Value of CH3

22H

Error Code Value of CH4

23H

Error Code Value of CH5

24H

Error Code Value of CH6

25H

Error Code Value of CH7

26H

Error Code Value of CH8

27H

39
N/A

28H

29H

Max Temperature Input Value of CH1

R/W

2AH

Max Temperature Input Value of CH2

R/W

2BH

Max Temperature Input Value of CH3

R/W

2CH

Max Temperature Input Value of CH4

R/W

2DH

Max Temperature Input Value of CH5

R/W

2EH

Max Temperature Input Value of CH6

R/W

2FH

Max Temperature Input Value of CH7

R/W

30H

Max Temperature Input Value of CH8

R/W

31H

Max/Min Temperature Settings Data

R/W

32H

Error in Max/Min Setup

33H

Min Temperature Input Value of CH1

R/W

34H

Min Temperature Input Value of CH2

R/W

35H

Min Temperature Input Value of CH3

R/W

36H

Min Temperature Input Value of CH4

R/W

37H

Min Temperature Input Value of CH5

R/W

38H

Min Temperature Input Value of CH6

R/W

39H

Min Temperature Input Value of CH7

R/W

3AH

Min Temperature Input Value of CH8

R/W

1771

1772

CIMON-PLC

3B-3E

59-62

Average Time/Filter Coefficient Settings for
CH1-4

R/W

10.1.3.1.5 Serial port(DSUB-9) network connection diagram

*6PIN connector is a communication port which is included with PLCS main module (SP32MDTF).

10.1.3.2 XPANEL

Contents :
· Xpanel Specifications
10.1.3.2.1 Xpanel Specifications

Contents :
1. XT04CB-D Spec.
2. Serial Port Connection Diagram
3. Instructions on Project Download
10.1.3.2.1.1 XT04CB-D Spec.

Model

CM1 - XT04CB-D

LCD Size

4.3 inch wide

LCD Type

TFE Color

Colors
Resolution
Backlight

16.7M Colors
WQVGA 480x272
LED
300

Training Kit

Luminance

300 cd/m2

Touch Panel

4 wire registive

Memory

64MB SDRAM

Storage

32MB Flash

COM1

RS-232

COM2

RS-422/485

Ethernet

+LAN option:10/100 BaseT

USB Host

1 Port

Tool Port

1 USB device

SD Card

None

Audio

None

Rated Voltage
Power Consumption
OS

DC24V
4W
Windows CE 5.0

Dimension(mm)

128x102x50

Panel Cut(mm)

120x94

10.1.3.2.1.2 Serial Port Connection Diagram

1773

1774

CIMON-PLC

10.1.3.2.1.3 Instructions on Project Download

USB Loader Port
USB Loader Cable
1. Download the following synchronization program from Microsoft website and install it:
· Windows7 : Mobile Device Center
· XP : ActiveSync
2. Connect USB Mini cable to a loader port
3. Open Xpanel Designer and click on [Online] on the top menu and click on [Write to Xpanel]
4. A selected project downloads onto Xpanel

10.1.4 Accessories
Accessories included with PEK-308 Training Kit:
1. Power Cable (rated current of 7A 250V)
2. USB Loader Cable
3. PLC-S terminal block CM0-TB32M
4. Terminal block cable CM0-SCB15M
5. Installation CD ( CICON, Xpanel Designer, Sample Program)
6. Instruction manual

10.1.5 Getting Started

Contents :
1. Basic Operating Instructions
2. Creating a Sample Project

Training Kit

10.1.5.1 Basic Operating Instructions

Contents :
1. Main Page
2. I/O POINT Page
3. Analog Page
4. Position Status Page
5. Positioning Page
10.1.5.1.1 Main Page

Moves to a page where the user can test point of contact control.

Moves to a page where the user can check the positioning control status

1775

1776

CIMON-PLC

Moves to a page where the user can change positioning control settings and actually control it

Moves to a page where the user can input/output analog signals and check RTD Temperature measurement
10.1.5.1.2 I/O POINT Page

The user can turn the display lamp (on the screen) on by pressing input button or using the toggle switch
The user should check if the LED lamp is also On/Off
10.1.5.1.3 Analog Page

Training Kit

1777

This page displays the analog input/output signal values from each channel of SP04EAA module and also
displays the measured temperature data from SP04ERO module.
10.1.5.1.4 Position Status Page

In this page, the user can practice monitoring, controlling JOG driver motion, resetting the current driver
error status and other functions

Forward direction or backward direction movement can be achieved with JOG function

Monitoring of the current status of motion control can be achieved here. Red lamp means it’s operating.

The current position and speed of the Servo can be monitored

Performs emergency stop and stops immediately.

1778

CIMON-PLC

In case of Servo Error, it makes the Servo to reset

Set the current position as an original/zero point
10.1.5.1.5 Positioning Page

The user can set preferred values and control positioning functions in this page

This shows a position of the Servo

This shows a current speed of the Servo

The user can set a preferred position of the Servo

Training Kit

The user can set a preferred speed of the Servo

Set the current position as an original/zero point

Makes the Servo to run

Makes the Servo to stop

Returns the Servo to the original/zero point

]
The lamp turns ON in an error state

Reset the error state

Performs emergency stop and stops immediately.

10.1.5.2 Creating a Sample Project

Contents :
1. Lamp On/Off Control Exercise

1779

1780

CIMON-PLC

2. Analog Input / Output Exercise
3. Using RTD Thermometer
4. Using Positioning Control
10.1.5.2.1 Lamp On/Off Control Exercise

To control a lamp with a toggle switch, a ladder, as above, has to be created in CICON.
When an input signal is generated from X00, Y18 LED lamp turns on or off. Since X00 and M20 are
connected with an OR logic, the user can also control Y18 LED lamp on MMI instead with a toggle switch by
generating ON/OFF signal for M20.

To display the lamp on Xpanel, the user needs to create two images of a lamp for both ON and OFF and
then check on visible property. After that, make the two images overlap to each other so that the lamp on
Xpanel will turn on/off depending on the LED lamp Y18.

X00 status can be reversed by using a toggle switch.
10.1.5.2.2 Analog Input / Output Exercise

To receive analog signals, a logic that communicates with a special card needs to be created. The
command for receiving signals is “FROM” and the command for sending signals is TO.
By using “FROM” and “TO” command, the user can read the input or output values from AD/DA card.

Receiving Analog Input

Training Kit

1781

FROM command is used to receive a data from a buffer memory. FROM command is used as follows:
FROM (n1) (n2) (D) (n3)
N1 : Slot number
N2 : Buffer memory
D : Memory address for storing input value
N3 : Data number for reading from a buffer memory
[FROM H0003 0 D3004 2] : This command reads two data (Digitally converted values of CH1 and CH2) from
the 0th buffer memory of the special module (SP04EAA) and stores them in D3004.

Analog Input Value is shown on the page using tag value on Xpanel

Sending Analog Output

To send an analog output signal, the user must authorize DA conversion on the buffer memory of the analog
output module (SP04EAA)
“TO” command is used to write a data to a buffer memory of a special card. “TO” command is used as
follows:
TO n1 n2 S n3
N1 : Slot Number
N2 : Buffer Memory
S : Input Data
N3 : Data Number
[TO H0003 19 H0003 1] : This command writes value of 3 on the 19th buffer memory of the special module
(SP04EAA) which is positioned on the 3rd slot. When the value 3 writes on the memory, it automatically
authorize DA conversion for CH1 and CH2 Slot 3

special module(SP04EAA) .

After authorizing DA conversion of an analog output channel, the user need to send an actual output

1782

CIMON-PLC

The logic to send out an actual output is as above.
To send the output signal, first the user always need to send the enable I/O signal and then use TO
command to send the real data.
Y03, Y04 are the enable I/O signals
[TO H0003 26 D3006 20] : This command stores the data from D3006 and D3007 in the 26th buffer memory
and then outputs to CH1 and CH2 respectively

10.1.5.2.3 Using RTD Thermometer

The way to use RTD temperature module is very similar to that of Analog Input module. Similarly, it uses “
FROM” command to receive the measured temperature values.

First, it uses “TO” command to store the value in the 0th buffer memory.
The 0th memory is the RTD conversion authorization buffer memory. The structure of this memory is shown
below:

Bits number 0~4 represent each channels’current authorization status and to authorization for the entire
channel, H000F should be used.
[FROM H0004 1 D3000 4] : This command stores the temeprature data from each channel in D3000
~D3003 which were in the 1st~4th buffer memory.

Training Kit

1783

10.1.5.2.4 Using Positioning Control

Operating JOG Mode

If the starting address of the positioning control program is registered from L0, the user can control L03 and
L04 to control forward and backward JOG motion.

Using POSCTRL Command
POSCTRL is a special command for positioning control. This command controls the positioning control
module.
A.Setting the Starting Point

The following command is for setting the current position the starting point:
[POSCTRL n1 n2 n3]
N1 : (BASE/Slot) number
N2 : Control parameter
N3 : Result FLAG
The sample program above substitues (1,1,0,0) in the control parameter. Therefore, it sets the current
X-coordinate to 0.

1784

CIMON-PLC

Control Parameter (when the control code(N2+1) is not 10)
N2

Axis (1, 2)

N2 + 1

Command Code

N2 + 2

Parameter (low)

N2 + 3

Parameter (high)

Control Code
1

Change Position

Change Speed

Change Target Address

Error Clear

Indirect Position Data

B.Indirect Driving by using POSCTRL

This exmaple is for setting an X axis indirectly and driving
By using MOV command to substitue the data that correspond to the control bit as shown below

Training Kit

Control Parameter (when the control code(N2+1) is 10 )
N2

Axis

N2 + 1

Control Code (10)

N2 + 2

Control Command

H0100

N2 + 3

M Code

N2 + 4

Dwell Time

N2 + 5

Reserved(0)

N2 + 6

Speed (Low Word)

D10

N2 + 7

Speed (High Word)

N2 + 8

Destination Address (Low)

N2 + 9

Destination Address (High)

N2 + 10

Circular Interpolation (Low)

N2 + 11

Circular Interpolation (High)

Positon Data

D12

Each parameter data sets as above. Therefore, it operates according to the speed from D10 and the
position from D12

Position Data
OFF SET

Content
Control Pattern

Bit
0
1
2

Interpolation

Acceleration Time
Decceleration Time

00 : Non-interpolation
01 : Main Axis = Y (Linear interpolation)

Function
00 : Single step control
01 : Continuous control

4
5
6
7

10 : Main Axis = X (Linear interpolation)
Acc/Dec No. ( 0 – 3)
Acc/Dec No. ((0 – 3)
00

Control Code

8 ~ 15

H
01
H
05

End of position data
ABS Absolute position control
INC Incremental position control

1785

1786

CIMON-PLC

H
09

FEED

H
13

RSC Speed control (Backward)

H
80

NOP No operation

H
81

H
83

JUMP Force to change next step No
LOOP The first step of loop

H
84
H
1
2
3
4
5
6

Dwell Time
N/A
Speed
Target Position Address

Address reset

FSC Speed control (Forward)

H
17

H
82

Incremental position control ater

LEND The last step of loop
POS

Force to change the current positon
address

0 ~ 65,535 or indirect data (device memory)
N/A
L
1 ~ 100,000 or indirect data (device memory)
H
L
-2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647 or indirect data
H

(device memory)

Operation Data

Axis

Item

Bit
0
1

Control
Flag

Description
Data Details

Comment

Axis Enable(1)/Disable(0)
Deccelerate stop requirement

2
3
4
5

(activated on rising edge, and auto reset)
Emergency stop requirement (activated on rising edge)
Forward JOG/Inching ON(1) / OFF(0)
Backward JOG/Inching ON(1) / OFF(0)
N/A

N/A

Training Kit

N/A

Error clear (activated on rising edge and auto reset)

Run (0=stopped , 1=running)

Under position control

Under speed control

Under linear interpolation

Under OPR

Reserved (0)

Status

Under acceleration

Flag

Under constant speed running

Under decceleration

Under dwell

Positioning Completed

OPR Completed

Direction Forward(0) / Backward (1)

Pulse output disabled

Error

Current Pos.
Address
Current Speed

L
H
L
H

Pulse

1 – 100,000

PPS

Position program step number (1-30)

Next Step

Position program step number (1-30)
(0-65535)

Error Code

[See error code table]
0
1

-2,146,483,648 – 2,147,483,647

Current Step

Inching Mov

Contorl
Flag

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B

1787

Enable(1)/Disable(0
Deccelerate stop requirement
(activated on rising edge, and auto reset)
Emergency stop requirement (activated on rising edge)
Forward JOG/Inching ON(1) / OFF(0)
Backward JOG/Inching ON(1) / OFF(0)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A

Pulse

1788

CIMON-PLC

Status
Flag

C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F

Cur. Pos.
Address
Current
Speed
Current Step
Next Step
Inching Mov
Error Code

N/A
N/A
N/A
Error clear (activated on rising edge and auto reset)
Run (0=stopped , 1=running)
Under position control
Under speed control
Under linear interpolation
Under OPR
Reserved (0)
Reserved (0)
Under acceleration
Under constant speed running
Under decceleration
Under dwell
Positioning Completed
OPR Completed
Direction Forward(0) / Backward (1)
Pulse output disabled
Error
-2,146,483,648 – 2,147,483,647
1 – 100,000
Position program step number (1-30)
Position program step number (1-30)
(0-65535)
[See error code table]

10.1.6 Appendix

Contents :
1. Toggle Switch
2. ON-OFF Control by Using Timers
3. Controlling Garage Door
4. Measuring the Length of Items by Using Limit SW and Encoder
5. Decoding
6. Counting the Number of Items

Training Kit

1789

10.1.6.1 Toggle Switch

Whenever the input switch X0000 is selected, the Lamp Y0010 turns ON-OFF.
When the lamp is ON and the switch X0000 is selected, the lamp turns off and it stays like that even when
the switch is unselected. When the lamp is OFF and the switch X0000 is selected the lamp turns on and it
stays on even when the switch is unselected.

10.1.6.2 ON-OFF Control by Using Timers

Using 100ms timers to turn the lamp off for 10 seconds and turn it on for 3 seconds.

1790

CIMON-PLC

10.1.6.3 Controlling Garage Door

When a car stops in front of the door, Photo sensor 1 senses the car and opens the door, and then when
the car goes inside the garage, Photo sensor 2 senses the car in the garage and closes the door. The user
can also control the door by up/down switch without using the sensors

10.1.6.4 Measuring the Length of Items by Using Limit SW and Encoder

Training Kit

1791

This program measures the length of items. The items are on a conveyor which is powered by a motor that
moves 1cm per 1pulse.
By using limit switches, the program measures the starting point of the item and the end point to calculate
the total length.

1792

CIMON-PLC

10.1.6.5 Decoding

This program analyzes M0000 input data and then controls only one motor out of 8 depending on the
inputted data.

Training Kit

1793

10.1.6.6 Counting the Number of Items

This program counts the number of items passing through the sensor (limit switch) and displays the number
on the segment display. When 1000 items are passed, the program stops the conveyor belt and resets the
display to 0.

10.2

PEK - 408
· To Study basic knowledge and applications on PLC
· To improve applicable capability of trainees at site
· To master the capability to use PLC application instructions
· To master the capability to control analog signals
· To understand how to configure RS232C/422/485
· To master the capability to configure and operate a site monitoring & operation
system

Features of Training Kit :
· Compose of high-performance module type PLC components.

1794

CIMON-PLC

· Enables to practice the advanced functions of various types like on-line editing, forced input/output,
initialization program by using an exclusive loader program (CICON)
· Enable to perform PLC training without connection with other devices.
· Equipped with toggle switches, push buttons and so on to use output lamps and an display for a simulation
load.
· Equipped with an analog input signal generator and a level meter to make sure analog output signals.
· Enable to practice PID control by using analog converters.
· Equipped with a photo sensor and an encoder to detect easily the number of revolutions by using.
· Enables computer link in series communication type through computer exclusive terminal of CPU
· Enables remote control and monitoring in connection with HMI S/W
· Composed of a system with very suitable input/output points in module type to improve the capability of
programming for site situation.
· Composed of attachable-detachable type to switch input, output and optional modules freely, if necessary.
· Enables training from basic to application

Click :

· Structure

· Internal Connection Diagram

· Module Specifications

· Programming and Operating

· Assigning Input/Output Addresses

· Exmaple of PLC Application

Training Kit

10.2.1 Structure

Structure :

Accessories :
· Power Cable (Rated 7A 250V)
· CM0-CBL15 . 1.5m Loader Cable
· Users Manual
· RS-232C cable
· CD including CICON, application program samples & CIMON HMI S/W Demo

PLC Module Composition :

Module Name

Type

Specification

CM1-CP4A

CPU

16K step program memory capacity

CM1-SPC

Power

Voltage output 5 / 24 / +15 / -15 V

CM1-BS08A

Base

8-slot Base

1795

1796

CIMON-PLC

CM1-XD32C
CM1-YT32B
CM1-YR16A

Digital input

32 point input module
32 point source output module

Digital output

16 point relay output module

CM1-AD08V

Analog input

14 bit 8ch voltage Analog Input

CM1-DA04V

Analog output

14 bit 4ch voltage Analog Output

CM1-SC02A
CM1-EC01A
CM1-HS02A

RS232C / 422 / 485

Communication

10 Mbps Ethernet

HSC

200 kpps 2 Ch high speed Counter

10.2.2 Module Specifications

Standard Module Composition :

v The modules can be changed according to user’s training use.

Click

· CM1-SPC

· CM1-DA04V

· CM1-CP4A

· CM1-AD08V

· CM1-XD32C

· CM1-HS02B

· CM1-YT32B

· CM1-SC02A

· CM1-YR16A

· CM1-EC01A

CM1-SPC ,
This is used to receive the power of AC 220V, supplying the power of DC +5V, +24V, ±15V to each part of a
PLC.
Model
Input

CM1-SPC
Input Voltage

AC220V, 50/60

Input Current

0.25A MAX For 220VAC

Training Kit

Output

Inrush Current

30A or less

Efficiency

70% or more(Rated Input/Load)

Allowed Breakdown

Output voltage /
Output Current

+5V (3.5A), +24V (0.5A), +15V (0.5A), -15V (0.3A)

Voltage Status Indication

1797

or less

LED is turned on in case output voltage is normal.

CM1-CP4A,
The CM1-CP4A processes fast by high-speed MPU and Fractionizes the error codes in self-diagnosis by
contents to find the reasons of them.
Model

Specification
CM1-CP4A

Type of Program Control

Stored Program, Repeat Operation, Time Driven Interrupt

Type of I/O Control

Indirect, Direct by Instructions

Program Language

IL(Instruction List) , LD(Ladder Diagram)

Instruction

Sequence

54 Instructions

Application

264 Instructions

Baud Rate(Sequence)

200

Capacity of Memory

16K Steps

Base Expansion

Not Available

Capacity of
Data Memory

Timer
Counter

/ Step

384

8,192

2,048

1024(Select 10 ms or 100 ms at user’s option)

1,024

100Card * 100Step

5,000

2048

Type

On Delay, Off Delay, Accumulation, Monostable, Retriggerable

Range

0.01 sec ~ 655.35 sec

Type

Up Counter , Down Counter , Up-Down Counter, Ring Counter

Range

-32,768 ~ +32,767

Operation Mode

RUN , STOP , PAUSE , DEBUG

Self-dignosis

Watch-dog Timer, Memory Check-sum, I/O Card, Battery, Power

Type of Standard Base

3 slots, 5 slots, 8 slots, 12 slots

Built-in Function

· Computer Link(RS232C)
· PID Control
· I/O Reservation

1798

CIMON-PLC

· On-line Editing

CM1-XD32C,
Model

CM1-XD32C

No. of Input Points

32 Points SINK/SRC Input

Rated Input Voltage

DC24V

Rated Input Current

4mA

On Voltage/On Current

DC19V/4mA

Off Voltage/Off Current

DC11V/1mA

Response Time

Off -> On

5mSec or less

On -> Off

5mSec or less

Type of Common

8 Points

Operation Indication

LED is turned on incase input is turned on.

Type of Insulation

Photo coupler insulation

CM1-YT32B
Model

CM1-YT32B

No. of Output Points

32 Points SRC

Rated Load Voltage
Rated Load Current
Response Time

DC12 ~ 24V
1 Point

0.2A

1Com

Off -> On

1mSec or less

On -> Off

1mSec or less

Type of Common

32 Points

Operation Indication

LED is turned on incase input is turned on.

Type of Insulation

Photo coupler

CM1-YR16A,
Model

CM1-YR16A

No. of Output Points

16 Points

Rated Load Voltage

DC12/24V AC220V

Rated Load Current
Response Time

1 Point

1Com

Off -> On

10mSec or less

On -> Off

5mSec or less

Training Kit

Type of Common

8 Points

Operation Indication

LED is turned on incase input is turned on.

Type of Insulation

Relay

CM1-DA04V,
Model

DA14Bit / 4CH / Voltage Output
CM1-DA04V

No. of Input Channels

4 Channels

Digital Input

Signed 16 Bit Binary Value(Data: 14 Bits)

Analog Output

-10 ~ 10V

Max. Resolution

1.25mV

Precision

Within 0.3%

Max. Conversion Rate

10mSec

Absolute Max. Output

15V

Type of Insulation

Photo Coupler between input terminal and PLC

CM1-AD08V,
Model

AD14Bit / 8CH / Voltage Input
CM1-AD08V

No. of Analog Input Channels

8 Channels

Analog Input

0 ~ 5V,
1 ~ 5V,
0 ~ 10V,
-10 ~ +10V

Digital Output

Signed 16 Bit Binary Value(Data: 14 Bits)

Max. Resolution

0 ~ 5V

0.3125mV

1 ~ 5V

0.25mV

0 ~ 10V

0.625mV

-10 ~ 10V

1.25mV

0 ~ 20mA

1.25mA

4 ~ 20mA

1.0mA

Precision

Within 0.3%

Max. Conversion Rate
Absolute Max. Input

5mSec/1ch
Voltage

12V

Current

25mA

Type of Insulation

Photo Coupler between input terminal and PLC

1799

1800

CIMON-PLC

CM1-HS02B,
Model

CM1-HS02B

Channel

2 Channels

Counting Input
Signal

Signal

1-phase Input/2-phase Input

Level of Signal

DC5 / 12 / 24V, 2 ~ 5mA

Range of Counting

32Bit ( -2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647 )

Counting Rate

200kPPS

Form

Up-down Preset Counting + Ring Counting

External Output

Type

Comparative Output ( > , = , < )

Form of Signal

Open Collector Output

CM1-SC02A,
Model

CM1-SC02A

Interface

RS232C / RS422 / RS485

Comm. Mode

Form of Data

Exclusive

KDT’s Exclusive Protocol(Supports 1 : n Communication)

Graphic Loader

Graphic Loader Link Communication

User

User Protocol

Data Bit

7 or 8 Bits

Stop Bit

1 or 2 Bits

Parity

Even / Odd / None

Form of synchronism

Non-synchronous

Baud Rate

300 / 600 / 1200 / 2400 / 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 76800

Modem Link

Long-distance communication by linking with a modem unit

CM1-EC01A,
Model

CM1-EC01A

Type of Cable

10BASE-T

Baud Rate

10 Mbps

Type of Transmission

Base Band

Max. Length of Segment

100m (Node to Hub)

Max. Number of Nodes

Hub 4 Steps

Max. Size of Protocol

1500 Byte

Type of Network Access

CSMA / CD

Training Kit

10.2.3 Assigning Input/Output Addresses

1. DIGIT Switch Input X0000 ~ X0007
2. LED Lamp Output Y0020 ~ Y002F
3. DISPLAY(BCD) UnIt Output Y0030 ~ Y003F
4. Toggle switch input X0000 ~ X000F

10.2.4 Internal Connection Diagram

Detailed Module Connection Diagram :
· CM1-XD32C
· CM1-YT32B
· CM1-DA04V / AD08V
· CM1-HS02B

1801

1802

CIMON-PLC

10.2.4.1 CM1-XD32C

Training Kit

1803

1804

CIMON-PLC

10.2.4.2 CM1-YT32B

Training Kit

1805

1806

CIMON-PLC

10.2.4.3 CM1-DA04V / AD08V

Training Kit

10.2.4.4 CM1-HS02B

10.2.5 Programming and Operating

Programming and Operating,
· Operating PLC
· Writing Device Addresses
· Example of PLC Program
· Linking with HMI S/W CIMON in RS232C Type

1807

1808

CIMON-PLC

10.2.5.1 Operating PLC
1. Install the CICON software in a computer.
2. Select the menu to open the new program in the new project and to write a program.
3. After you finish writing the program and select the menu to compile it, make sure whether there is an error in
the compiled one.
4. Connect the COM Port of a computer to the Loader Port of a CPU with a loader cable.
5. Select the menu to set up special cards.
6. Put the CPU on the ‘Stop’mode and select the menu to download the program.
7. Put the mode switch on ‘Run’ mode.

10.2.5.2 Writing Device Addresses
Type

Bit Data

Word Data

Timer, Counter
Output Contact

Type of

[Device Symbol]

[Device Symbol] + [Device Symbol] +

Device

+ [Card No.] +

+ [Card No.]

[Bit No.]

[Bit No.]
Usable

Step Controller
Contact

Bit Device in Words
[Device Symbol] +

[Card No.] + [.] + [Bit [Card No.] + [0]
No.]

X, Y, M, K, L, F

D, Z, T, C

T, C

X, Y, M, K, L, F

Card

Decimal

No.

3 Character

4 Character

2 Character

3 Character

Bit No.

Hexadecimal

Decimal

X000E

D1234

T0003

S00.00

X0110

Y0012

Z0001

C0567

S12.78

Y0330

M034F

T0011

M0440

K0120

C1023

K0000

Device

1 Character
Exampl
e

2 Character

L023C

L0040

F0093

F0130

10.2.5.3 Example of PLC Program
1. If the input signal(X0000) comes, the LED lamp for the output(Y0020) is turned on.

Training Kit

1809

2. If the input signal(X0001) comes, the LED lamp for the output(Y0021) is turned on even the
switch is turned off. If another input signal(X0002) comes, the output is turned off.

3. If the input signal(X0008) comes, the LED lamp for the output(Y0028) is turned on in 5
seconds. If the switch is turned off, the LED lamp for the output(Y0028) is turned off in 3
seconds.

4. While the input signal(X0009) is turning on, the LED lamp for the output(Y0029) blinks at the
intervals of 3 seconds.

5. If the input signal(X0003) comes at five times, the LED Lamp for the output(Y0023) is turned

1810

CIMON-PLC

on. If an input signal(X0004) comes, the output and counting are reset.

6. The numerals indicated as DIGIT S/W X0010 ~ X001F are output in DISPLAY UNIT(Y0030 ~
Y003F).

7. The voltage input from CM1-AD08V is converted to digital value and the result is stored in
D0000.

8. The digital value stored in D0010 is voltage-output through CM1-DA04V.

10.2.5.4 Linking with HMI S/W CIMON in RS232C Type
To understand easily, a written CIMON program is explained.

Training Kit

1811

1. Setting up Communication
Connect the COM Port1 of a computer with Module CM1-SC02A in RS-232C Type.
In the I/O device setup, select the KDT Systems CIMON-PLC RS232C/422/485 after entering the name as
follows.

Select the menu to set up the communication block and the environment for actual communication.

In the CICON, select the menu to set up Module CM1-SC02A as follows.

1812

CIMON-PLC

Make sure whether they are actually communicated when selecting the menu to run after setup as the
above.
The communication status should be normal as follows.

2. Address Map
Address

Data

Tag

Device

Name of Tag

F0000

Digital

Real Tag

PLC.PLC

X0010

Analog

Real Tag

PLC.PLC

DIGITSW (BCD16)

Y0030

Analog

Real Tag

PLC.PLC

DISPLAY (BCD16)

Y0020 ~ Y003F

Digital

Real Tag

PLC.PLC

OUTPUT.Y20
~ OUTPUT.Y3F

X0000 ~ X001F

Digital

Real Tag

PLC.PLC

INPUT.X0 ~ INPUT.X1F

D0000

Analog

Real Tag

PLC.PLC

AD.CH1

D0044

Analog

Real Tag

PLC.PLC

HSC.CH1

Digital

Virtual Tag

HC_CH1_CHANGED

3. Window Configuration
Main Window

Training Kit

[Figure 1 Main Window]

HSC1

[Figure 2 Revolution of HSC 2]

AD Input

1813

1814

CIMON-PLC

[Figure 4 AD Input (CH 1)]

Indicating BCD Value

DIGIT S/W
· Tag Name : DIGITSW
· Data Type : BCD
DISPLAY BCD
· Tag Name : DISPLAY
· Data Type : BCD

Lamp Indicating RUN/STOP Status

Training Kit

Opening the dialog box to set up Device Y

[Dialog box to open a page and set digital value]

Color Variation of Input(Device X)

1815

1816

CIMON-PLC

Color Variation of Output(Device Y)

10.2.6 Exmaple of PLC Application

List :
· Toggling Output Contact by Using Input Contact
· Controlling On-Off by Using a Timer
· Controlling Garage Shutter
· Measuring the Length of an Object by Using Limit S/W and Encoder
· Decoding
· Using a Cam Switch
· Counting the Number of Moving Objects

Training Kit

1817

· Keeping the Counted Value
· Network

10.2.6.1 Toggling Output Contact by Using Input Contact
[Operation] Lamp(Y0010) is turned on and off whenever the input switch(X0000) is turned on.
If Switch X0000 is turned on in the status that the current lamp is turned on, the lamp is turned off. If Switch
X0000 is turned on in the status that the current lamp is turned off, the lamp is turned on.

1818

CIMON-PLC

10.2.6.2 Controlling On-Off by Using a Timer
[Operation] The lamp is turned off for 10 seconds and on for 3 seconds by using a 100ms timer.

10.2.6.3 Controlling Garage Shutter
[Operation] If a car arrives in front of the garage, Photo Sensor 1 detects it to open the door. And if the car
comes in, Photo Sensor 2 detects it to close the door. But the door can be controlled by up, down, emergency
switch without the operation of the sensors, too.

Training Kit

1819

10.2.6.4 Measuring the Length of an Object by Using Limit S/W and Encoder
[Operation] The length of an object is measured through the conveyor in which a motor moving as much as 1
cm for 1 pulse is installed. The following is a PLC program to measure the length of the currently passing object
by detecting the front and rear of the object passing on a conveyor with a limit switch.

1820

CIMON-PLC

10.2.6.5 Decoding
[Operation] The following is a PLC program to analyze Input Data M0000 and operate the motor of the input
number among 8 motors.

Training Kit

1821

10.2.6.6 Using a Cam Switch
[Operation] The following is a PLC program to output bit data to 16 terminals as maximum by using the cam
switch with 4 input terminals.
· Input terminal(Cam switch) : X0000 ~ X0003
· Output terminal(Motor) : Y0010 ~ Y001F

1822

CIMON-PLC

Training Kit

1823

10.2.6.7 Counting the Number of Moving Objects
[Operation] The following is a PLC program to count the number of the objects passing on a conveyor belt and
show the number on a segment indicator, and to stop the conveyor belt and clear the number on the segment
indicator, if the number of the objects having passed on the conveyor belt is 1000.

1824

CIMON-PLC

10.2.6.8 Keeping the Counted Value
[Operation] In case the power is off while counting pulses by using a HSC module or CPU status is switched
from Stop to Run, the counted value is cleared. The following is a PLC program to keep the counted value as it is
even though such situation occurs. (The counted value is always stored in the latched device(K0000) by MOV.
The value is preset in case of running again.)

Training Kit

1825

10.2.6.9 Network
[Operation] A CIMON-PLC can communicate with an other manufacturers’PLC using Modicon(Modbus)
Protocol. The following is a PLC program to read 2-byte data of an other manufacturers’PLC from a CIMON-PLC

1826

CIMON-PLC

by using Modbus Protocol and store the data in the memory of the CIMON-PLC.(But, data are read every
200ms.)
· Other manufacturer’s PLC: Internal Memory(Address: 402561)
· CIMON-PLC: Data Memory(Address: 403073 -> D0000)

Top Level Intro
This page is printed before a new
top-level chapter starts

Part

1828

CIMON-PLC

FAQ
Is there any question about CIMON - PLC ? See our FAQs.
· How can I use the variable name in mnemonic (IL, instruction list) program?
· How to Read From and Write To Special Modules.
· Device Memories of CIMON - PLC
· How can I creat a serial protocol program?
· How can I send the initialize commands to my dial-up MODEM which is connected with CM1-SC01A?
· How can I make a sequence program to generate analog outputs from my DA module?
· Is there any protocol over serial network to share data between two different PLC System? Especially
for the PLC model that does not support the "PLC Link" such as BP16Mxx.
· How can I program an ON-Off (digital) PID control loop with CIMON PLC?

11.1

How can I program an ON-Off (digital) PID control loop with
CIMON PLC?
CICON (The programming tool for CIMON PLC series) provides an easy dialog based PID programming
environment as shown in the following picture.

FAQ

1829

There is no need to write a sequence program with this tool. It is enough for programming a PID loop that fill-in
some PID parameters and download with other sequence programs. One of topics in CICON help describes well
how to program a standard PID loop which has an analog control signal output. Try to find the topic with "PID"
keyword in help window of CICON.
This document describes a PID loop which has a digital control output - ON/OFF controlled PID. Although the
ON/OFF controlled PID does not have an analog output, the basic concept and parameters are exactly the same
as the standard one (the analog output PID control). All parameters in the above dialog box have the same
meanings. Only one parameter needed to consider for a digital output PID is the "On/Off Time". Normally this
parameter is configured as zero in an analog output PID. If this item was configured as any non-zero value, the
configured PID loop will perform a digital output control. the "On/Off Time" parameter decides the duty cycle of
digital output as shown in the following picture..

1830

CIMON-PLC

Off Time". and the output signal state (ON or OFF) is decided at every sampling time period. Because of that,
the "On/Off Time" duration is recommended to be configured as at least ten times of the "Sampling Time".
As previously described, the final control output (MV : Management Value, D00102 in the above example PID)
will have just two possible output values. One is "MV Low Limit" which imply the OFF output state (D00008 in
the above example PID), and the other is "MV High Limit" which imply the ON output state (D00009 in the
above example PID). However, since the actual control output is a digital output, the programmer has to add a
line of sequence program which convert the MV to a digital output signal, as shown in the following picture.

This one sequence program line can be inserted to anywhere of normal scan program type sequence program.
In this example, the output actuator assumed to be allocated on the Y0030 point, and there is just one
comparison. If the calculated MV has the same value as predefined "MV High Limit", then turn on the control
output. Otherwise, turn off the control output.

[ Summary ]
1. Set the "On/Off Time" parameter as a non-zero value. (the unit of second)
2. The value of "On/Off Time" parameter has to be designated as ten times or more of the "Sampling
Time" vlaue.
3. Add a sequence program which checks the control output value (MV) as describe in the following line
:
- If the MV output was the same value of "MV High Limit" than make the digital output point as ON.
Otherwise, put the digital output point as OFF.

11.2

How can I send the initialize commands to my dial-up MODEM
which is connected with CM1-SC01A?
This topic can be applied to the CM1-SC02A and "T" option of CM2-BP series PLC too.
CIMON PLC provides default MODEM initializing commands as shown in the following text box :

ATZ
ATE0
[User defined init. Commands]
ATS0=1
And also, user defined commands can be added to the above sequence. Following dialog box of CICON shows
the configuration window of serial communication module of CIMON PLC. You can see the command input field
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

FAQ

1831

in this picture.

A simple sequence program is needed to transmit the MODEM initialization commands configured as above.

Above sequence program sends the initializing commands to the dial-up MODEM which is connected with PLC.
This example assumes that the SCnnA module was installed in the first slot of local base. That is, Y0000 Y000F and X0000 - X000F I/O memory area was allocated to the SCnnA module.
This example program can be explained by using the following timing chart.

This situation is triggered by Y0A signal which is pulled up by the sequence program.
1) SCnnA/B module detects the Y0A signal and responds with setting X0A signal up.
2) SCnnA/B module transmits the MODEM initialize commands which are registered already by CICON.
3) The X0A signal is detected by the sequence program. The sequence program pull the Y0A signal down.

1832

CIMON-PLC

Following table shows the I/O memory map of SCnnA/B module. You can see the Y0A and X0A signal
descriptions in this table.

Device

Description For Signal

Device

Description For Signal

X0000

Error in module

Y0000

Clear error

X0001

Initialized (Card Ready)

Y0001

X0002

Y0002

X0003

Y0003

X0004

Rx Data Existing(Ch1)

Y0004

Clear Rx Buffer (Ch1)

X0005

Tx Buffer Empty(Ch1)

Y0005

Clear Tx Buffer (Ch1)

X0006

Rx Data Existing(Ch2)

Y0006

Clear Rx Buffer (Ch2)

X0007

Tx Buffer Empty(Ch2)

Y0007

Clear Tx Buffer (Ch2)

X0008

Y0008

X0009

Y0009

X000A

Modem Initialized

Y000A

Modem Initialization Request

X000B

Dialing

Y000B

Dialing Request(Line Connection)

X000C

Detect DCD Signal

Y000C

Connection Release Request

X000D

Detect DSR Signal

Y000D

X000E
X000F

11.3

Y000E
Parameter Applied

Y000F

Parameter Setup Request

Is there any protocol over serial network to share data between
two different PLC System? Especially for the PLC model that
does not support the "PLC Link" such as BP16Mxx.
The CIMON PLC provides a network protocol, the PLC Link, for sharing data between PLC systems. However
not all communication options support the PLC Link functions. The table below shows the entire serial
communication modules and options of CIMON PLCs and their supported functions.

FAQ

1833

If all communication modules(options) in system configuration support the "PLC Link", there is no problem to
share data between CPUs. This report is valuable to consider for the system configuration when one or several
modules (or options) which do not support the "PLC Link" function are included in system configuration.
However, please notice that this report assumes that at lease one module (or option) in system configuration
support the "Protocol Program" function. Otherwise, they cannot share data directly. If there is no "Protocol
Program" supporting module or option, a master system (such as CIMON SCADA or Xpanel) should relay data
between slaves. This is another topic and this report does not cover that configuration.
For sharing data with a module which does not support the "PLC Link", this report recommends to use the
"Protocol Program" function. Since the "HMI Protocol" is supported in almost all modules (options) of CIMON
PLC, this is the most reasonable solution.
Following sample program assumes the configuration as 1:1 network.

This picture below shows a sample of "Protocol Program". (The sample program can be downloaded from
internet. Seethe last page of this document.)

1834

CIMON-PLC

This program plays a role of "HMI Protocol" master in a network. It automatically reads 10 words of data from
slave (station #0) and sends 10 words of data to slave at every 200msec as shown in the following table.

Already published FAQ, "How can I create a serial protocol program?", explains about the protocol programming.
The MODBUS Protocol was explained in that document, but it still can be helpful for understanding the protocol
program function.
The master module which runs above protocol program should have been configured as following sample
picture. Note that the "Protocol" option should be checked as "Protocol Program".

FAQ

1835

[ Registering the sample program ]
[STEP1] This sample program can be downloaded from following URL.
http://www.kdtsys.com/UseFiles/bbs/HMI_MASTER.ZIP
The "HMI_MASTER.SPC" file is zipped in the above file. Unzip and copy this file to your project folder.
[STEP2] Register the program to your CICON project as shown in the following example picture.

[STEP3] Select the "HMI_MASTER.SPC" program file and click the "Open" button.

1836

CIMON-PLC

[STEP4] Configure the "Program ID". This ID should not be duplicated with other programs which are
already registered in your project.

11.4

How can I use the variable name in mnemonic (IL, instruction list)
program?
The programming software, CICON, supports it by the same way that of ladder programming. Following sample
picture shows the overall concept of using variable name in IL window.

FAQ

1837

CICON provides the way to use variable name in programming window instead of using memory device name.
First of all, for using the service, the programmer must define a variable in the 'Variable Table' window. in this
window, the programmer can define their own variables according to the device type, data type and address.
After all the wanted variables have been defined in the 'Variable Table', the programmer can use both of the
device address and variable in IL programming window. The variable name will be displayed in blue colored text
as shown in the above picture.
Notice that the word and bit variables should be defined separately even if they have the same address form.
That is, for example, 'M0000' can be a bit address as well as a word address. If 'M0000' is used for both of bit
and word, two different variables must be defined in the 'Variable Table', one for bit and the other for word type
data.

11.5

How can I read(write) data from(to) special modules?
CIMON PLC has many kinds of special modules such as AD, DA, High Speed Counter, etc. All these special
modules have a shared memory in their hardware for data exchange with CPU module. The CPU module can
send various operation commands, and receive data through this shared memory. On the same way, a
sequence program can read from and write to shared memories of special module by using dedicated
instructions to this purpose, FROM and TO.
To use FROM/TO instructions appropriately, a programmer must know the memory map of the target special

1838

CIMON-PLC

module. Every special module which have a shared memory were documented the map of the memory in their
manuals. CIMON PLC system calls this shared memory as “User Program Memory”.

FROM
‘FROM’ instruction reads word data from shared memory of special module, and stores them to the internal
device of CPU. Sequence program of CPU can read and process the word data of special module. For
example, the converted value of AD module, the temperature value of RTD or TC module etc.
The typical usage of the instruction can be represented by following LD.

Base and Slot number where the special module is installed

Start address of user program memory

Start device address where read data are stored

Number of words to read

S1 (base and slot number) :
CIMON PLC can be expanded up to 16 bases. Following is a sample drawing of 16 bases expansion.

FAQ

1839

The first operand of FROM instruction should be base
and slot number. It can be understood easily with hexadecimal notation, because the most significant byte is
assigned as base number and the least significant byte
is assigned as slot number. Keep in mind that base and
slot numbers are ‘0’ based. That is the number of local
base and the first slot are zero.

S2 (Start address of user program memory) :
Designate the start address of user program memory to read. Refer to the manual or quick-reference guide
of objective module.

S3 (Start address of device) :
Designate the start address of word device where read values will be stored. Y/M/L/K/D/Z devices is
possible.

Number of words to read and store :
Designate the number of words to read and store.

[ Programming Example ]
Following is an example program which reads one word and eight words. It assumes the special module is
CM1-ADxxxx and installed in forth slot of the first expanded base.

1840

CIMON-PLC

TO
‘TO’ instruction writes word data to shared memory of special module such as DA modules. The typical
usage of the instruction can be represented by following LD.

FAQ

Base and Slot number where the special module is installed

Start address of user program memory where to write

Constant Value or start device address which is storing values to write

Number of words to write

1841

S1 (base and slot number) :
Refer to ‘FROM’ instruction.

S2 (Start address of user program memory) :
Designate the start address of user program memory where to write. Refer to the manual or quickreference guide of objective module.

S3 (Constant value or start address of device) :
Designate the start address of word device which is storing value to write. X/Y/M/L/K/F/D/Z devices is
possible. This operand can be designated with constant value to write. In this case, only one value can be
written to user program memory at once.

Number of words to write :
Designate the number of words to write.

[ Programming Example ]
Following is an example program which writes one word and eight words. It assumes the special module is
CM1-DAxxxx and installed in forth slot of the first expanded base.

1842

11.6

CIMON-PLC

Device Memories of CIMON-PLC
CIMON PLC has 11 differently named devices. Each device has it’s own symbol which is denoted by a capital
character.

X (Input)
‘X’ device is a digital input device. It can be ether real physical input signal or various status input from
special module. Every special modules have their own I/O map and it was described in it’s manual and
quick reference guide.

FAQ

1843

‘Y’ device is a digital output device. It can be ether real physical output or various control output to special
module. Every special modules have their own I/O map and it was described in it’s manual and quick
reference guide.

M (General Purpose Relay)
‘M’ device is an Internal input/output digital device. It can be used in various applications such as
intermediate data storage, virtual I/O, word data storage etc.

L (General Purpose Relay)
The usage of ‘K’ device is very similar to ‘M’ device. The difference between them is only symbol character.

K (Latch Relay)
The usage of ‘K’ device is very similar to ‘M’ device. But, it has additional functionality of latch. All data in
this device are retained even while power off or CPU stopped status. There is no need to configure as latch
area.

F (Flags)
‘F’ device is an Input (read) only device. This device provides various useful flags such as one scan on/off,
always on, periodic on/off, etc. Refer to CPU’s ‘Flags’ section for more detailed descriptions about ‘F’ relay

T (Timer)
‘T’ device is a timer device. This device is somewhat different with other devices in that it has both features
of bit and word device. It is determined by instruction type which feature will be processed. Following table
describes the features for each instruction types.

Device ‘T’ In Sequence Program
Features

Instructions

Configuration and
Operation

TMR, TON, TOFF, TMON, TRTG

Get Timer Output

LOAD (LD, LDI etc.)

Example

1844

CIMON-PLC

Reset Timer

RST

Read/Modify Tick
Count

WORD operations
(MOV, INC, > etc.)

As shown in above table, timer has three data types, one for bit data and two for word data. Bit data type
represents timer output status in LOAD instructions and timer reset output for RST instruction. Word data
types are set and tick values. The set value can be written only by TIMER instructions (TRM, TON, TOFF,
TMON, TRIG). The tick value can be modified or verified by various word instructions such as MOV, INC,
comparative instructions and so on.
Symbol character of all these device is ‘T’ in sequence programming point of view. But in monitoring point
of view, two more symbol characters are used. ‘T’ represents just the output status of timer, ‘TC’ represents
the tick counter of timer and ‘TS’ represents set value of timer. These two new symbols of word are utilized
in device memory monitoring window of CICON and in communication protocols for HMI

Device ‘T’ In Monitoring
Symbols

Data Types

Descriptions

Bit

The status of timer output

Word

The tick count of timer (0 ~ 65,535)

Word

The set value of timer (0 ~ 65,535)

C (Counter)
‘C’ device is a counter device. As ‘T’ device, this device is somewhat different with other devices in that it
has both features of bit and word device. It is determined by instruction type which feature will be
processed. Features of ‘C’ device on each instruction types are described in following table.

Device ‘C’ In Sequence Program
Features

Instructions

Configuration
and Operation

CTU, CTD, CTUD, CTR

Example

FAQ

Get Counter
Output

LOAD (LD, LDI etc.)

Read/Modify
Counted Value

WORD operations
(MOV, INC, > etc.)

1845

As shown in above table, counter has three data types, one for bit data and two for word data. Bit data type
represents counter output status in LOAD instructions. Word data types are set and count values. The set
value can be written only by COUNTER instructions (CTU, CTD, CTUD, CTR). The count value can be
modified or verified by various word instructions such as MOV, INC, comparative instructions and so on.
Symbol character of all these device is ‘C’ in sequence programming point of view. But in monitoring point
of view, two more symbol characters are used. ‘C’ represents just the output status of counter, ‘CC’
represents the counted value of counter and ‘CS’ represents set value of counter. These two new symbols
of word are utilized in device memory monitoring window of CICON and in communication protocols for HMI

Device ‘C’ In Monitoring
Symbols

Data Types

Descriptions

Bit

The status of counter output

Word

The counting value of counter (-32,768 ~ 32,767)

Word

The set value of counter (-32,768 ~ 32,767)

S (Step Controller)
‘S’ device is a special purpose relay for control algorithm which proceeds step by step. CIMON PLC
supports up to 100 cards of step controller (S00.nn ~ S99.nn). Each step controller has 100 differently
numbered state, and only one can be active among these state (Sxx.00 ~ Sxx.99).
‘S’ device can be manipulated with ‘OUT’ or ‘SET’ instruction. ‘OUT’ instruction sets (activates) one
designated state and there is no restrictions on operation. ‘SET’ instruction also sets one designated state
(assume the state number is ‘n’) but there is a restriction that the previous state (state number ‘n-1’) must
be active state. If the instruction was executed successfully, previous state will be reset (deactivated)
automatically. That is, there is no need to reset previous state.
For verifying a state is activated or not, ‘LOAD’ instructions can be applicable.
10. D (General Purpose Word Data)
‘D’ device is a word device. The data in this device is processed as signed value. The range of a word
value is -32,768 ~ +32,767. If it was needed to manipulate an unsigned value, specify the value as hex
notation(H0000 to HFFFF) in LD program.
In case of storing a double-word data, the word ordering is shown by following example.

DMOV H12345678 D00100
Device

Data

Storage

D00100

H5678

Least significant word

1846

CIMON-PLC

D00101

H1234

Most significant word

The range of a double word value is -2,147,483,648 ~ +2,147,483,647.

Z (Call Stack)
‘Z’ device is a word device. It is used for data exchange with subroutine. Every running scan program has
two 64 words of ‘Z’ memory area. One is for it’s own and the other is for subroutine. It’s own memory area
can be accessed with ‘Z0000’ to ‘Z0063’, and subroutine’s memory can be accessed with ‘Z1000’ to
‘Z1063’.
If there is some data to transfer to subroutine, just stores them in ‘Z1000’ to ‘Z1063’ and next call the
subroutine. Then, the called subroutine can read and process the data and store the result with the address
of ‘Z0000’ to ‘Z0063’.
At any time a sequence program can access two 64 words blocks of ‘Z’ memory. And the total size of
physical ‘Z’ device is 1024 words, that is the reason of why maximum call level is restricted to 16. The
relationship between physical memory and programming address of ‘Z’ device at different call level was
explained more precisely in following drawing.

FAQ

11.7

1847

How can I create a serial protocol program?
CIMON PLC provides a function of programmable protocol. This report provides an example of the protocol
program with the CM1-SC02A module or its families. The example is described with following condition and
assumptions.
Protocol
· MODBUS RTU Protocol (Master, Binary Mode)
Assumptions
· A MODBUS slave device is connected with the RS485 channel of CM1-SC02A
· The station number of slave device : 20 (decimal)
· The Reader of this document is familiar with the MODBUS/RTU protocol
Objectives
· Read 10 holding registers (403073-403082) of slave and store them to the momory of
CIMON PLC (D0100-D0109) at every 200ms
· Send (write) 10 words to the slave address area stated from 403083 at every 200ms. The
data to send are stored in the memory area of CIMON PLC started from D0110.

In order to describe the simple and easy example, the MODBUS/RTU protocol was chosen.

1848

CIMON-PLC

Because, the MODBUS/RTU protocol is one of the most well known protocols and this protocol
includes almost every functions which provided by CIMON PLC's protocol program.
But, note that the communication modules of CIMON PLC (CM1-SC01A / SC01B / SC02A)
supports master as well as slave mode. So, there will be no needs to use the protocol
programming of MODBUS in actual situation with CIMON PLCs.

[ Step 1 ] Create a new program block

1. Use the menu of 'File' - 'New Program...' to open the above dialog box
2. Choose the 'Protocol Program (232/422/485)' program type
3. Give a name to the new protocol program ('MODBUS_MST' in this example)

[ Step 2 ] Configure the basic parameters
After pressing the 'OK' button of the 'New Program' dialog box, the main protocol programming window will
be shown as following picture.

FAQ

1849

First of all, the basic parameters should be configured in this dialog box.
Base

Designate the base location of communication module where the protocol program is executed

Slot

Designate the base location of communication module where the protocol program is executed

Choose one of two channels of communication module. CH1 is the RS232C port, and CH2 is
RS422/485 port in case of CM1-SC02A

Result Designate the first word address of 4 continuous word memories of M area. These memories have
its meaning when the periodical TX frame was activated. The communication module updates
these word memories at every communication transaction. This 4 word memories include the
success/error flags of all frame registered. For more information, refer to the communication
manual.
Note)
These 4 word memory areas are automatically updated by communication module. Please ensure
that these memory areas are not used as other purpose in sequence program
Word Memory

Meaning of SET (1)

M word offset + 0

Success flags for frame number 0 to 15

M word offset + 1

Success flags for frame number 16 to 31

M word offset + 2

Error flags for frame number 0 to 15

M word offset + 3

Error flags for frame number 16 to 31

[ Step 3 ] Define the received data frame format

1850

CIMON-PLC

1. Frame Setup
When the 'Add...' button in main configuration window is chosen, the 'Frame Setup' dialog box will be
displayed. Following items have to be configured in this dialog box for defining a data frame to be
received from a MODBUS slave device.
Name of the Give a name to the frame. This name can be used instead of the frame number in
frame
Note)

sequence program. This name is the 'RD-RX_1' in this example

Maximum 32 frames can be defined in a protocol program. The frame number of each frame is
automatically assigned when it is created. Do not use the frame number directly in other program
blocks. the frame number can be changed at any time especially when one or more frames are
removed from the original list. Use the frame name instead of the frame number.
TX / RX

Define the direction of frame. The direction of the data frame sent from other device is

'RX'
Period
This field has meaning only in the frame of TX direction
Tx Frame by If there should be a response frame transmission after receiving the data frame, this
Rx

field has to be filled with other frame name to be transferred. However, the MODBUS/
RTU protocol does not require the response frame transmission after receiving data.
Leave it as 'None'

FAQ

1851

DLE Doubling This technique is used in some protocols such as SIEMENS 3964R. It is a kind of
frame construction technique. If an already defined special code was included in a
constructed frame, the code must be appeared twice in the actual transfer frame.
However, the MODBUS/RTU protocol does not use this technique. Leave it as
unchecked
2. Define the frame with segments
In order to define a communication frame, CIMON PLC uses the segment concept as a primitive unit of
continuous data block. 4 different segment types are provided as shown in the following table.
Segment Type

Description

Fixed Value

A part of frame which composed with fixed (static) data.

Ignore

A part of frame which has no meaning. The data in this segment is ignored at
frame analysis

Memory Link

A part of frame which should be moved to the memory of PLC CPU for further
data manipulation

Error Check

A part of frame which has error check codes such as BCC

As shown in the previous picture, a segment can be configured by filling in the segment type and length
field. Other configuration fields need to be filled up according to the each segment type. In this example,
the data frame from slave device was defined as following 4 segments.
Stn No.

Cmd

Length

Data (20 bytes)

CRC

14h

03h

14h

??h ??h ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ??h

??h ??h

Memory Link

Error Check

Fixed

3. Defining a fixed type segment
The fixed value segment is constructed with one or more static data. Following dialog box shows the
configuration fields for fixed value segment type.

Length
Value
Binary

Designate the size of fixed data in byte
in Specify the fixed value list in hexa-decimal format. Each value represents an 8 bits
value and should be separated with each other by 'space' character

1852

CIMON-PLC

Value in ASCII Specify the fixed value in ASCII
In this example, there are two fixed value segments. One of them is 1 byte sized segment which is a
header of the frame. And the other is two byte sized segment which includes a command code and data
size of the frame.
4. Defining a memory link type segment
The memory link segment moves the designated size of data between PLC's memory and
communication frame. If the frame direction is RX frame, the configured portion of data in received frame
will be moved to the PLC memory. Otherwise TX frame, the data stored in PLC memory will be moved to
the transmission frame.
And also, the data conversion process can be applied to the data during their movement according to
the configuration.

Length

Designate the size of fixed data in byte

Address

Designate the memory address of PLC

ASCII

data If the data in frame are coded in ASCII, the data in PLC memory have to be

Conversion

converted to or from ASCII code. Following options are provided for this conversion

Converting Option
Description
Binary
The data in frame are coded in binary. No conversion needed.
If this option was chosen, the word swapping function can be utilized for the
HEX

device which uses different byte ordering system with CIMON PLC.
The data in frame are coded in ASCII, and in hexa-decimal number

DEC
Float

representation.
The data in frame are coded in ASCII, and in decimal number representation.
The data in frame are coded in ASCII, and in decimal floating point number
representation.
If this option was chosen, the scale factor should be designated also. This
factor is needed for the PLC CPUs which does not support the floating point
data format.

FAQ

1853

In this example, the third segment is defined as a 'memory link' type segment. The 'length' of this
segment was designated as 20 bytes. That means, 20 bytes portion of frame data include the 10 word
sized read data and these data will be moved to the memory of PLC. The ASCII data conversion option
was chosen as 'binary'. That is, there is no need to convert data during data movement. The MODBUS/
RTU protocol of our example does not use ASCII coded data.

The protocol program is base on the following byte alignment condition for a word data. If the actual
byte order was not matched with this, the "Word swapping (LSB-MSB)" option has to be checked
for the normal data conversion.
Transmit offset + 0

Transmit offset + 0

High byte

Low byte
1 Word Data

5. Defining a error check segment
Some of protocol put the error check codes in their frame format. The 'Error Check(BCC)' type segment
is provided for that kind of protocols. CIMON PLC supports several well-known error checking algorithms
as shown in the following table.

Error Check
SUM
SUM + Mask

Description

Remark

Add all byte data within designated segments
1. Add all byte data within designated segments

The masking

2. Bitwise AND operation with masking value

value should be
declared

XOR

Take exclusive-or for all byte data within designated
segment

XOR + Mask

MUL

1. Take exclusive-or for all byte data within designated

The masking

segment

value should be

2. Bitwise AND operation with masking value

declared

Take multiplication for all byte data within designated
segments

MUL + Mask

CRC (Modbus)
CRC16
SUM + 1's
complement
SUM + 2's
complement

1. Take multiplication for all byte data within designated

The masking

segments

value should be

2. Bitwise AND operation with masking value

declared

16bits CRC for MODBUS
16bits CRC
1. Add all byte data within designated segment
2. Take the 1's complement of SUM
1. Add all byte data within designated segment
2. Take the 2's complement of SUM

1854

CIMON-PLC

CRC (FT3/DNP3)

16bits CRC for DNP3

In this example, the "CRC (Modbus)" type was chosen for the segment 0, 1 and 2. Note that the 'Word
swapping (LSB-MSB)' option should be checked for the MODBUS RTU protocol as shown in the above
picture. MODBUS RTU protocol transmits low order byte of CRC first.

[ Step 4] Define the data read command frame format

FAQ

1855

The precise configuration method and background knowledge was not described in this step. Please refer
to the previous section, [Step 3], for the more detailed explanations. Only the topic related with the current
example, MODBUS/RTU protocol programming, is described in this section.
1. Frame Setup
Name

the "RD_TX_1"

frame
TX / RX

"TX"

Period

"2". This configuration means the frame is automatically transmitted at every
200msec.

Rx Frame After "RD_RX_1". This configuration make the communication module wait the RX frame
Tx

"RD_RX_1" immediately after transmitting current frame.

DLE Doubling

Not used.

1856

CIMON-PLC

2. Define the frame with segments
The read command frame which will be sent to the slave device was defined as following 3 segments (2
fixed segments and 1 error check segment).

Stn No.

Cmd

14h

03h

Fixed

Address
0Ch

00h

No. of Reg
00h

Fixed

0Ah

CRC
??h ??h
Error Check

According to the MODBUS/RTU protocol document, the command code of reading holding registers in
'03h'. And our example assumes that the communication module read 10 holding registers from 403073
to 403082. So, the start address of holding registers which will be transmitted in the TX frame is 3072
(0C00h). Note that the memory address on the frame is one less than actual address in the MODBUS
protocol (3073 - 1 = 3072). And then, the number of register to read is coded at the end of the second
fixed frame in word data. The read size of this example is 10 (000Ah).

[ Step 5 ] Define the format of write response frame

FAQ

1857

The precise configuration method and background knowledge was not described in this step. Please refer
to the previous section, [Step 3], for more detailed explanations. Only the topic related with the current
example, MODBUS/RTU protocol programming, is described in this section.
1. Frame Setup
Name

the "WR_RX_1"

frame
TX / RX

"RX"

Period

Not used.

Rx Frame After None.
Tx
DLE Doubling

Not used.

1858

CIMON-PLC

2. Define the frame with segments
The response frame for write command was defined as following 3 segments (2 fixed segments and 1
error check segment).

Stn No.

Cmd

14h

10h

Fixed

Address
0Ch

0Ah

No. of Reg
00h

Fixed

0Ah

CRC
??h ??h
Error Check

According to the MODBUS/RTU protocol document, the command code of writing holding registers is
'10h'. And our example assumes that the communication module writes 10 continuous holding registers
from 403083 to 403092. So, the start address of written memory area is 3082 (0C0Ah). Note that the
memory address on the frame is one less than actual address in the MODBUS protocol (3083 - 1 =
3082). And then, the number of written registers is coded at the end of the second fixed frame in word
data. The written size of this example is 10 (000Ah).

[ Step 6 ] Define the write command frame

FAQ

1859

the "WR_TX_1"

frame
TX / RX

"TX"

Period

2. This configuration means the frame is automatically transmitted at every
200msec.

Rx Frame After "WR_RX_1". This configuration make the communication module wait the RX frame
Tx

"WR_RX_1" immediately after transmitting current frame.

DLE Doubling

Not used.

2. Define the frame with segment
The response frame for write command was defined as following 4 segments (2 fixed segments, 1
memory link segment and 1 error check segment).
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

1860

CIMON-PLC

Stn No. Cmd

Address

No. of Reg

Byte

Data to be Written

CRC

data in D0110 - D0119 (20

??h ??h

Count
14h

10h

0Ch

0Ah

00h

0Ah

14h

bytes)
Fixed

Fixed

Memory Link

Error
Check

According to the MODBUS/RTU protocol document, the command code of writing multiple holding
register is '10h'. And our example assumes that the communication module writes 10 continuous words
of holding register form 403083 to 403092. So, the start address of memory area to be written is 3082
(0C0Ah). Note that the memory address on the frame is one less than actual address in the MODBUS
protocol (3083 - 1 = 3082). And next, the number of writing registers is coded with the number of 10
(000Ah). The second fixed segment is ended with the byte size of followed writing data, 20 bytes (14h).
The data to be written are defined as a memory link segment in this example.

[ Step 7 ] Programming is completed. Download it
If all the programming jobs described above were successfully completed, the only remaining job is "Tool"
- "Compile All + Link" menu. During the communication, the communication status will be provided by M
memory area which was designated at [Step 2].

The Sample program can be downloaded from following URL.
· File name : MODBUS_MST.SPC
· URL : http://www.kdtsys.com/file_bdG/upload_file/MODBUS_MST.SPC
1. Copy the downloaded program file to your project folder.
2. Add the program to your project by using "File"-"Add a Program" menu.

11.8

How can I make a sequence program to generate analog outputs
from my DA module?
Here is an example for that.

FAQ

1861

Ø Rung 1
For safety purpose, the module doesn't output D/A signal without definite command from sequence program
or CICON. This rung sends signal output enable command to DA module by TO instruction.
The first operand 'H0001' means the first expanded block. If there was another block between CPU and DA,
this operand should be 'H0002'.
The second operand 23 means the address of this enable command buffer in 'User Program Memory'. (Refer
to the MAP)
The third operand 'H000F' means enabling all outputs (CH1 to CH4). Each channel is bitwise allocated. If you
want to enable only CH3, this value should be 'H0004'.
The fourth operand '1' means 1 WORD writing to 'User Program Memory'.
Ø Rung 2
Writes the output value of CH1 on every 0.1 second with a TO instruction. The second operand '1' means the
address of 'User Program Memory' where the output value should be written to for CH1. (Refer to the MAP)
The third operand 'D00000' means the device which is storing the digital value for signal output.
The last operand '1' means 1 WORD writing.
Ø Rung 3
Shows another example of one channel output. This rung is for CH2 and the output value is stored in D00001.
Ø Rung 4
Shows a simultaneous output example of multi-channel. This rung output signals to CH3 and CH4
simultaneously. The digital values are stored in D00002 and D00003 for each channel.
Generally, for unburden CPU's scan speed, it's better to output all channel simultaneously than outputs one by
one channel. Following example instruction shows this method.

1862

CIMON-PLC

H0001

D0000

Index

Index
-AACOS 998
ACOSP 998
ADD 845
ADDP 845
ANB 789
AND 781
AND< 781
AND<= 781
AND<> 781
AND= 781
AND> 781
AND>= 781
ANDE< 837
ANDE<= 837
ANDE<> 837
ANDE= 837
ANDE> 837
ANDE>= 837
ANDF 784
ANDI 781
ANDP 784
ASIN 997
ASINP 997
ATAN 1000
ATANP 1000
ATVP 1026

BCDP 865
BCOS 1011
BCOSP 1011
BDIV 859
BDIVP 859
BDSQR 1008
BDSQRP 1008
BIN 867
BINDA 923
BINDAP 923
BINHA 926
BINHAP 926
BINP 867
BITMOV 886
BITMOVP 886
BK< 842
BK<= 842
BK<=P 842
BK<> 842
BK<>P 842
BK 842
BK>= 842
BK>=P 842
BK>P 842
BKAND 904
BKANDP 904
BKOR 906
BKORP 906
BKXNR 910
BKXNRP 910
BKXOR 908
BKXORP 908
BMOV 877
BMOVP 877
BMUL 853
BMULP 853
BP Brochure 1527
BP Built-In High Speed Counter
BP Data Link 1543
BP Dimensions 1545
BP Functions 1540
BP High Speed Counter 1554
BP I/O Module 1552
BP Main Module 1546

1554

1863

1864

CIMON-PLC

BP Product Line 1541
BP Series(CM2 Block Type)
BP Specification 1536
BP16Mxx PLC
1832
BREAK 822
BREAKP 822
BRST 955
BRSTP 955
BSET 955
BSETP 955
BSFL 919
BSFLP 919
BSFR 919
BSFRP 919
BSIN 1010
BSINP 1010
BSQR 1008
BSQRP 1008
BSUB 849
BSUBP 849
BTAN 1012
BTANP 1012
BXCH 881
BXCHP 881

CICON Special Program 532
CLC 831
CML 879
CMLP 879
Communication Setting 456
Compile/Link 458
COS 995
COSP 995
Creating a Project 436
Cross Reference 465
CTD 977
CTR 980
CTU 976
CTUD 979

1527

-D-

-CCalibration 1401
CALL 816
CALLP 816
CEND 812
CENDP 812
CICON 418
CICON Appendix 654
CICON Communication Setting Program
CICON Components 422
CICON Download Util 633
CICON Essential Function 432
CICON Menu 426
CICON Multiple Programs 472
CICON Option 429
CICON PLC Control 551
CICON PLC Simulator 581
CICON Scan Program 487
CICON SFC Program 550
CICON Single Programming 435
CICON Special Card Setting 553

492

DABIN 930
DABINP 930
DADD 845
DADDP 845
DAND 898
DANDP 898
DATE- 960
DATE+ 958
DATE+P 958
DATE-P 960
DATERD 964
DATERDP 964
DATEWR 967
DATEWRP 967
DBADD 846
DBADDP 846
DBCD 865
DBCDDA 927
DBCDDAP 927
DBCDP 865
DBDIV 859
DBDIVP 859
DBIN 867
DBINDA 923
DBINDAP 923
DBINHA 926
DBINHAP 926
DBINP 867
DBMUL 853
DBMULP 853
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

Index

DBSUB 849
DBSUBP 849
DCML 879
DCMLP 879
DDABIN 930
DDABINP 930
DDEC 862
DDECP 862
DDIV 856
DDIVP 856
DEC 862
DECO 944
DECOP 944
DECP 862
DEG 1002
DEGP 1002
DFLT 869
DFLTP 869
DFRO 982
DFROP 982
DGBIN 874
DGBINP 874
DGRY 873
DGRYP 873
DHABIN 934
DHABINP 934
DI 823
DINC 862
DINCP 862
DINT 871
DINTP 871
DIS 946
DISP 946
DIV 856
DIVP 856
DMAX 937
DMAXP 937
DMIN 938
DMINP 938
DMOV 875
DMOVP 875
DMUL 850
DMULP 850
DNEG 868
DNEGP 868
DOR 900
DORP 900
Copyright 2012 BY KDT SYSTEMS, All rights reserved.

Download 459, 633
Download Util 633
DPGM 825
DRCL 916
DRCLP 916
DRCR 913
DRCRP 913
DROL 914
DROLP 914
DROR 912
DRORP 912
DSFL 921
DSFLP 921
DSFR 921
DSFRP 921
DSUB 848
DSUBP 848
DSUM 940
DSUMP 940
DTEST 953
DTESTP 953
DTO 984
DTOP 984
DUTY 1025
DWDIV 857
DWDIVP 857
DWMUL 852
DWMULP 852
DXCH 880
DXCHP 880
DXNR 903
DXNRP 903
DXOR 901
DXORP 901

-EEADD 846
EADDP 846
ECALL 818
ECALLP 818
EDIV 861
EDIVP 861
EI 823
EMOV 878
EMOVP 878
EMUL 855

1865

1866

CIMON-PLC

EMULP 855
ENCO 944
ENCOP 944
END 810
EPGM 825
ESUB 850
ESUBP 850
EXP 1004
EXPP 1004

-FFAQ 1828
FDEL 896
FDELP 896
FIFR 891
FIFRP 891
FIFW 889
FIFWP 889
FINS 895
FINSP 895
FLT 869
FLTP 869
FMOV 883
FMOVP 883
FOR 820
FPOP 893
FPOPP 893
FREAD 1017
FREADP 1017
FROM 982
FROMP 982
FWRITE 1019
FWRITEP 1019

-GGBIN 874
GBINP 874
GDI 823
GEI 823
GRY 873
GRYP 873

-HHABIN 934
HABINP 934
HOUR 962
HOURP 962
HSC Program for PLC-S

550

-IINC 862
INCP 862
INITEND 828
Installation 420
Installation of USB Device Driver 655
INT 871
INTP 871
INV 786
IO Input Filter Setting Program 550
IRET 825

-JJME 815
JMP 815
JMPP 815

Index

LDF 784
LDI 781
LDP 784
LOG 1005
LOGP 1005

-MMAX 937
MAXP 937
MC 808
MCR 808
MIN 938
MINP 938
Monitoring 459
MOV 875
MOVP 875
MPP 792
MPS 792
MRD 792
MUL 850
MULP 850

-NNEG 868
NEGP 868
NEXT 820

1867

ORD>= 837
ORE< 837
ORE<= 837
ORE<> 837
ORE= 837
ORE> 837
ORF 784
ORI 781
ORP 784
OUT 796

-PPEND 813
PID On/Off
1828
PID Special Program 533
PLC Common 669
PLC Download Util 633
PLCS AD DA Module 1606
PLCS AD Module 1586
PLCS Brochure 1563
PLCS Communication 1573
PLCS DA Module 1596
PLCS Firmware Download 1566
PLCS High-Speed Counter 1691
PLCS Parameter Settings 1730
PLCS PLC Link 1742
PLCS Positioning 1703
PLCS Positioning Error Code 1729
PLCS Positioning Ex. Signal Wiring 1705
PLCS Positioning General Specification 1703
PLCS Positioning Input Signal Specification 1704
PLCS Positioning Instruction 1725
PLCS Positioning Operation Data 1714
PLCS Positioning Output Pulse Level 1706
PLCS Positioning Output Signal Specification 1704
PLCS Positioning Parameter 1706
PLCS Positioning Position Data 1718
PLCS Program Setting 1566
PLCS RTD Module 1628
PLCS TC Module 1648
PLC-S(CM3) 1562
PLF 801
PLS 801
Positioning Program for PLC-S 550

1868

CIMON-PLC

-QQuick Reference Manual

111

-RRAD 1001
RADP 1001
RCL 916
RCLP 916
RCR 913
RCRP 913
RCV 988
RCVP 988
RECV 991
RECVP 991
Registering a new Program 437
RemoteI/O 1751
Requirements for Installation 419
RET 816, 818
RFS 832
RFSP 832
RIO 1751
RND 1007
RNDP 1007
ROL 914
ROLP 914
ROR 912
RORP 912
RST 800

-SSBRT 816, 818
SCL 949
SCLP 949
Screen Configuration
SECOND 962
SECONDP 962
SEG 942
SEGP 942
SEND 990
SENDP 990
SET 798
SFL 917

423

SFLP 917
SFR 917
SFRP 917
Simulator Features 582
Simulator Manual 624
Simulator Screen Layout 583
Simulator Settings 613
SIN 993
SINP 993
SND 987
SNDP 987
Special Card Init. Program 533
SQR 1003
SQRP 1003
SRND 1007
SRNDP 1007
STC 831
STOP 827
SUB 848
SUBP 848
SUM 940
SUMP 940
SWAP 887
SWAPP 887

-TTAN 996
TANP 996
TEST 953
TESTP 953
Thermistor setting Program
TMON 973
TMR 972
TO 984
TOFF 971
TON 970
TOP 984
Training Kit 1755
TRTG 975

543

Index

UNIP 946
Update History 38
Update News 33
UpdateNews Ver302 109
UpdateNews Ver303 96
UpdateNews Ver304 91
UpdateNews Ver305 85
UpdateNews Ver306 84
UpdateNews Ver307 84
UpdateNews Ver308 77
UpdateNews Ver309 75
UpdateNews Ver310 65
UpdateNews Ver400 51
UpdateNews Ver401 51
UpdateNews Ver402 46
USB Driver 655
USB Driver Install 655

-Vvariable table
Ver302 109
Ver303 96
Ver304 91
Ver305 85
Ver306 84
Ver307 84
Ver308 77
Ver309 75
Ver310 65
Ver400 51
Ver401 51
Ver402 46

442

-WWAND 898
WANDP 898
WBMOV 885
WBMOVP 885
WDIV 857
WDIVP 857
WDT 829
WDTP 829
Welcome 30
Windows 7 USB Driver

655

WMUL 852
WMULP 852
WOR 900
WORP 900
Writing Scan Program
wsum 863
wsump 863
WXNR 903
WXNRP 903
WXOR 901
WXORP 901

438

-XXCH 880
XCHP 880
XP / CP Series(CM1) 1043
XP/ CP A/D Converters 1259
XP/ CP Brochure 1043
XP/ CP D/A Converters 1280
XP/ CP Ethernet Module 1198
XP/ CP High-speed Counter 1413
XP/ CP Positioning 1461
XP/ CP RTD Module 1298
XP/ CP Serial Communication Module
XP/ CP TC Module 1329
XP/ CP Weighing 1362

1076

1869

1870

CIMON-PLC

Endnotes 2... (after index)

Back Cover

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.2
Linearized                      : No
Warning                         : Invalid xref table

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

PLC(eng)_Ver4.03 PLC(eng) Ver4.03

L010988 - CICON Users Manual_Ver4.03 L010988 - CICON Users Manual_Ver4.03

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation